gtk

package
v0.2.2 Latest Latest
Warning

This package is not in the latest version of its module.

 Go to latest Published: Feb 13, 2024 License: MPL-2.0 Imports: 20 Imported by: 108

Documentation

Index

Constants

View Source 
const ACCESSIBLE_VALUE_UNDEFINED = -1

ACCESSIBLE_VALUE_UNDEFINED: undefined value. The accessible attribute is either unset, or its value is undefined.

View Source 
const BINARY_AGE = 201

BINARY_AGE: like gtk_get_binary_age(), but from the headers used at application compile time, rather than from the library linked against at application run time.

View Source 
const IM_MODULE_EXTENSION_POINT_NAME = "gtk-im-module"
View Source 
const INPUT_ERROR = -1

INPUT_ERROR: constant to return from a signal handler for the ::input signal in case of conversion failure.

See gtk.SpinButton::input.

View Source 
const INTERFACE_AGE = 1

INTERFACE_AGE: like gtk_get_interface_age(), but from the headers used at application compile time, rather than from the library linked against at application run time.

View Source 
const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL = "full"

LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL: name used for the stock full offset included by LevelBar.

View Source 
const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH = "high"

LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH: name used for the stock high offset included by LevelBar.

View Source 
const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW = "low"

LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW: name used for the stock low offset included by LevelBar.

View Source 
const MAJOR_VERSION = 4

MAJOR_VERSION: like gtk_get_major_version(), but from the headers used at application compile time, rather than from the library linked against at application run time.

View Source 
const MAX_COMPOSE_LEN = 7
View Source 
const MEDIA_FILE_EXTENSION_POINT_NAME = "gtk-media-file"
View Source 
const MICRO_VERSION = 1

MICRO_VERSION: like gtk_get_micro_version(), but from the headers used at application compile time, rather than from the library linked against at application run time.

View Source 
const MINOR_VERSION = 2

MINOR_VERSION: like gtk_get_minor_version(), but from the headers used at application compile time, rather than from the library linked against at application run time.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_A3 = "iso_a3"

PAPER_NAME_A3: name for the A3 paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_A4 = "iso_a4"

PAPER_NAME_A4: name for the A4 paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_A5 = "iso_a5"

PAPER_NAME_A5: name for the A5 paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_B5 = "iso_b5"

PAPER_NAME_B5: name for the B5 paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_EXECUTIVE = "na_executive"

PAPER_NAME_EXECUTIVE: name for the Executive paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_LEGAL = "na_legal"

PAPER_NAME_LEGAL: name for the Legal paper size.

View Source 
const PAPER_NAME_LETTER = "na_letter"

PAPER_NAME_LETTER: name for the Letter paper size.

View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE = "collate"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE = "default-source"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER = "dither"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX = "duplex"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS = "finishings"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE = "media-type"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP = "number-up"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT = "number-up-layout"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES = "n-copies"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION = "orientation"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BASENAME = "output-basename"

PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BASENAME: key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the file name of the output without the path to the directory and the file extension.

View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN = "output-bin"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_DIR = "output-dir"

PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_DIR: key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the directory to which the output should be written.

View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_FILE_FORMAT = "output-file-format"

PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_FILE_FORMAT: key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the format of the output. The supported values are “PS” and “PDF”.

View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_URI = "output-uri"

PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_URI: key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the URI to which the output should be written. GTK itself supports only “file://” URIs.

View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES = "page-ranges"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET = "page-set"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT = "paper-format"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT = "paper-height"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH = "paper-width"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER = "printer"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI = "printer-lpi"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES = "print-pages"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY = "quality"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION = "resolution"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X = "resolution-x"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y = "resolution-y"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE = "reverse"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE = "scale"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR = "use-color"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_EXTRA = "win32-driver-extra"
View Source 
const PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_VERSION = "win32-driver-version"
View Source 
const PRIORITY_RESIZE = 110

PRIORITY_RESIZE: use this priority for functionality related to size allocation.

It is used internally by GTK+ to compute the sizes of widgets. This priority is higher than GDK_PRIORITY_REDRAW to avoid resizing a widget which was just redrawn.

View Source 
const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION = 600

STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION: priority that can be used when adding a GtkStyleProvider for application-specific style information.

View Source 
const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK = 1

STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK: priority used for default style information that is used in the absence of themes.

Note that this is not very useful for providing default styling for custom style classes - themes are likely to override styling provided at this priority with catch-all * {...} rules.

View Source 
const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_SETTINGS = 400

STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_SETTINGS: priority used for style information provided via GtkSettings.

This priority is higher than K_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_THEME to let settings override themes.

View Source 
const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_THEME = 200

STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_THEME: priority used for style information provided by themes.

View Source 
const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER = 800

STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER: priority used for the style information from $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.css.

You should not use priorities higher than this, to give the user the last word.

View Source 
const TEXT_VIEW_PRIORITY_VALIDATE = 125

TEXT_VIEW_PRIORITY_VALIDATE: priority at which the text view validates onscreen lines in an idle job in the background.

View Source 
const TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID = -1

TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID uses the default sort function in a gtk.TreeSortable.

See also: gtk.TreeSortable.SetSortColumnID().

View Source 
const TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID = -2

TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID disables sorting in a gtk.TreeSortable.

See also: gtk.TreeSortable.SetSortColumnID().

Variables

View Source 
var (
	GTypeAccessibleAutocomplete     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_autocomplete_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleInvalidState     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_invalid_state_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleProperty         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_property_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleRelation         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_relation_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleRole             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_role_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleSort             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_sort_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleState            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_state_get_type())
	GTypeAccessibleTristate         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_tristate_get_type())
	GTypeAlign                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_align_get_type())
	GTypeArrowType                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_arrow_type_get_type())
	GTypeAssistantPageType          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_assistant_page_type_get_type())
	GTypeBaselinePosition           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_baseline_position_get_type())
	GTypeBorderStyle                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_border_style_get_type())
	GTypeBuilderError               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_error_get_type())
	GTypeButtonsType                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_buttons_type_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererAccelMode      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_accel_mode_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererMode           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_mode_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintAttribute        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_attribute_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintRelation         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_relation_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintStrength         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_strength_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintVflParserError   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_vfl_parser_error_get_type())
	GTypeCornerType                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_corner_type_get_type())
	GTypeDeleteType                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_delete_type_get_type())
	GTypeDirectionType              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_direction_type_get_type())
	GTypeEditableProperties         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_editable_properties_get_type())
	GTypeEntryIconPosition          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_entry_icon_position_get_type())
	GTypeEventSequenceState         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_sequence_state_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooserAction          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_action_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooserError           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_error_get_type())
	GTypeFilterChange               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_filter_change_get_type())
	GTypeFilterMatch                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_filter_match_get_type())
	GTypeIconSize                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_size_get_type())
	GTypeIconThemeError             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_theme_error_get_type())
	GTypeIconViewDropPosition       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_view_drop_position_get_type())
	GTypeImageType                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_image_type_get_type())
	GTypeInputPurpose               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_input_purpose_get_type())
	GTypeJustification              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_justification_get_type())
	GTypeLevelBarMode               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_level_bar_mode_get_type())
	GTypeLicense                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_license_get_type())
	GTypeMessageType                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_message_type_get_type())
	GTypeMovementStep               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_movement_step_get_type())
	GTypeNotebookTab                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_notebook_tab_get_type())
	GTypeNumberUpLayout             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_number_up_layout_get_type())
	GTypeOrdering                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_ordering_get_type())
	GTypeOrientation                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_orientation_get_type())
	GTypeOverflow                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_overflow_get_type())
	GTypePackType                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_pack_type_get_type())
	GTypePadActionType              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_pad_action_type_get_type())
	GTypePageOrientation            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_page_orientation_get_type())
	GTypePageSet                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_page_set_get_type())
	GTypePanDirection               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_pan_direction_get_type())
	GTypePolicyType                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_policy_type_get_type())
	GTypePositionType               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_position_type_get_type())
	GTypePrintDuplex                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_duplex_get_type())
	GTypePrintError                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_error_get_type())
	GTypePrintOperationAction       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_operation_action_get_type())
	GTypePrintOperationResult       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_operation_result_get_type())
	GTypePrintPages                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_pages_get_type())
	GTypePrintQuality               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_quality_get_type())
	GTypePrintStatus                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_status_get_type())
	GTypePropagationLimit           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_propagation_limit_get_type())
	GTypePropagationPhase           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_propagation_phase_get_type())
	GTypeRecentManagerError         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_recent_manager_error_get_type())
	GTypeResponseType               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_response_type_get_type())
	GTypeRevealerTransitionType     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_revealer_transition_type_get_type())
	GTypeScrollStep                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scroll_step_get_type())
	GTypeScrollType                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scroll_type_get_type())
	GTypeScrollablePolicy           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scrollable_policy_get_type())
	GTypeSelectionMode              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_selection_mode_get_type())
	GTypeSensitivityType            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sensitivity_type_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutScope              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_scope_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutType               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_type_get_type())
	GTypeSizeGroupMode              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_size_group_mode_get_type())
	GTypeSizeRequestMode            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_size_request_mode_get_type())
	GTypeSortType                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sort_type_get_type())
	GTypeSorterChange               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sorter_change_get_type())
	GTypeSorterOrder                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sorter_order_get_type())
	GTypeSpinButtonUpdatePolicy     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_spin_button_update_policy_get_type())
	GTypeSpinType                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_spin_type_get_type())
	GTypeStackTransitionType        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_stack_transition_type_get_type())
	GTypeStringFilterMatchMode      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_string_filter_match_mode_get_type())
	GTypeSystemSetting              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_system_setting_get_type())
	GTypeTextDirection              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_direction_get_type())
	GTypeTextExtendSelection        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_extend_selection_get_type())
	GTypeTextViewLayer              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_view_layer_get_type())
	GTypeTextWindowType             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_window_type_get_type())
	GTypeTreeViewColumnSizing       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_view_column_sizing_get_type())
	GTypeTreeViewDropPosition       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_view_drop_position_get_type())
	GTypeTreeViewGridLines          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_view_grid_lines_get_type())
	GTypeUnit                       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_unit_get_type())
	GTypeWrapMode                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_wrap_mode_get_type())
	GTypeApplicationInhibitFlags    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_application_inhibit_flags_get_type())
	GTypeBuilderClosureFlags        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_closure_flags_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererState          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_state_get_type())
	GTypeDebugFlags                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_debug_flags_get_type())
	GTypeDialogFlags                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_dialog_flags_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerScrollFlags = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_scroll_flags_get_type())
	GTypeFontChooserLevel           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_font_chooser_level_get_type())
	GTypeIconLookupFlags            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_lookup_flags_get_type())
	GTypeInputHints                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_input_hints_get_type())
	GTypePickFlags                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_pick_flags_get_type())
	GTypePopoverMenuFlags           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_popover_menu_flags_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutActionFlags        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_action_flags_get_type())
	GTypeStateFlags                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_state_flags_get_type())
	GTypeStyleContextPrintFlags     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_style_context_print_flags_get_type())
	GTypeTextSearchFlags            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_search_flags_get_type())
	GTypeTreeModelFlags             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_model_flags_get_type())
	GTypeAccessible                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_accessible_get_type())
	GTypeActionable                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_actionable_get_type())
	GTypeAppChooser                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_app_chooser_get_type())
	GTypeBuildable                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_buildable_get_type())
	GTypeBuilderScope               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_scope_get_type())
	GTypeCellEditable               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_editable_get_type())
	GTypeCellLayout                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_layout_get_type())
	GTypeColorChooser               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_color_chooser_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintTarget           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_target_get_type())
	GTypeEditableTextWidget         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_editable_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooser                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_get_type())
	GTypeFontChooser                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_font_chooser_get_type())
	GTypeNativeSurface              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_native_get_type())
	GTypeOrientable                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_orientable_get_type())
	GTypePrintOperationPreview      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_operation_preview_get_type())
	GTypeRoot                       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_root_get_type())
	GTypeScrollable                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scrollable_get_type())
	GTypeSelectionModel             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_selection_model_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutManager            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_manager_get_type())
	GTypeStyleProvider              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_style_provider_get_type())
	GTypeTreeDragDest               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_drag_dest_get_type())
	GTypeTreeDragSource             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_drag_source_get_type())
	GTypeTreeModel                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_model_get_type())
	GTypeTreeSortable               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_sortable_get_type())
	GTypeATContext                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_at_context_get_type())
	GTypeAboutDialog                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_about_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeActionBar                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_action_bar_get_type())
	GTypeActivateAction             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_activate_action_get_type())
	GTypeAdjustment                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_adjustment_get_type())
	GTypeAlternativeTrigger         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_alternative_trigger_get_type())
	GTypeAnyFilter                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_any_filter_get_type())
	GTypeAppChooserButton           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_app_chooser_button_get_type())
	GTypeAppChooserDialog           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_app_chooser_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeAppChooserWidget           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_app_chooser_widget_get_type())
	GTypeApplication                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_application_get_type())
	GTypeApplicationWindow          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_application_window_get_type())
	GTypeAspectFrame                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_aspect_frame_get_type())
	GTypeAssistant                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_assistant_get_type())
	GTypeAssistantPage              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_assistant_page_get_type())
	GTypeBinLayout                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_bin_layout_get_type())
	GTypeBookmarkList               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_bookmark_list_get_type())
	GTypeBoolFilter                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_bool_filter_get_type())
	GTypeBox                        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_box_get_type())
	GTypeBoxLayout                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_box_layout_get_type())
	GTypeBuilder                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_get_type())
	GTypeBuilderCScope              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_cscope_get_type())
	GTypeBuilderListItemFactory     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_builder_list_item_factory_get_type())
	GTypeButton                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_button_get_type())
	GTypeCClosureExpression         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cclosure_expression_get_type())
	GTypeCalendar                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_calendar_get_type())
	GTypeCallbackAction             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_callback_action_get_type())
	GTypeCellArea                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_area_get_type())
	GTypeCellAreaBox                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_area_box_get_type())
	GTypeCellAreaContext            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_area_context_get_type())
	GTypeCellRenderer               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererAccel          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_accel_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererCombo          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_combo_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererPixbuf         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererProgress       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_progress_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererSpin           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_spin_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererSpinner        = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererText           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_text_get_type())
	GTypeCellRendererToggle         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_type())
	GTypeCellView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_cell_view_get_type())
	GTypeCenterBox                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_center_box_get_type())
	GTypeCenterLayout               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_center_layout_get_type())
	GTypeCheckButton                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_check_button_get_type())
	GTypeClosureExpression          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_closure_expression_get_type())
	GTypeColorButton                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_color_button_get_type())
	GTypeColorChooserDialog         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_color_chooser_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeColorChooserWidget         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_color_chooser_widget_get_type())
	GTypeColumnView                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_column_view_get_type())
	GTypeColumnViewColumn           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_column_view_column_get_type())
	GTypeComboBox                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_combo_box_get_type())
	GTypeComboBoxText               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_combo_box_text_get_type())
	GTypeConstantExpression         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constant_expression_get_type())
	GTypeConstraint                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintGuide            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_guide_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintLayout           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_layout_get_type())
	GTypeConstraintLayoutChild      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_constraint_layout_child_get_type())
	GTypeCSSProvider                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_css_provider_get_type())
	GTypeCustomFilter               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_custom_filter_get_type())
	GTypeCustomLayout               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_custom_layout_get_type())
	GTypeCustomSorter               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_custom_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeDialog                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeDirectoryList              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_directory_list_get_type())
	GTypeDragIcon                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drag_icon_get_type())
	GTypeDragSource                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drag_source_get_type())
	GTypeDrawingArea                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drawing_area_get_type())
	GTypeDropControllerMotion       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drop_controller_motion_get_type())
	GTypeDropDown                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drop_down_get_type())
	GTypeDropTarget                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drop_target_get_type())
	GTypeDropTargetAsync            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_drop_target_async_get_type())
	GTypeEditableLabel              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_editable_label_get_type())
	GTypeEmojiChooser               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_emoji_chooser_get_type())
	GTypeEntry                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_entry_get_type())
	GTypeEntryBuffer                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_entry_buffer_get_type())
	GTypeEntryCompletion            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_entry_completion_get_type())
	GTypeEventController            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerFocus       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_focus_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerKey         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_key_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerLegacy      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_legacy_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerMotion      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_motion_get_type())
	GTypeEventControllerScroll      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_event_controller_scroll_get_type())
	GTypeEveryFilter                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_every_filter_get_type())
	GTypeExpander                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_expander_get_type())
	GTypeExpression                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_expression_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooserDialog          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooserNative          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_native_get_type())
	GTypeFileChooserWidget          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_chooser_widget_get_type())
	GTypeFileFilter                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_file_filter_get_type())
	GTypeFilter                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_filter_get_type())
	GTypeFilterListModel            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_filter_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeFixed                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_fixed_get_type())
	GTypeFixedLayout                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_fixed_layout_get_type())
	GTypeFixedLayoutChild           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_fixed_layout_child_get_type())
	GTypeFlattenListModel           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_flatten_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeFlowBox                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_flow_box_get_type())
	GTypeFlowBoxChild               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_flow_box_child_get_type())
	GTypeFontButton                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_font_button_get_type())
	GTypeFontChooserDialog          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_font_chooser_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeFontChooserWidget          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_font_chooser_widget_get_type())
	GTypeFrame                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_frame_get_type())
	GTypeGLArea                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gl_area_get_type())
	GTypeGesture                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_get_type())
	GTypeGestureClick               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_click_get_type())
	GTypeGestureDrag                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_drag_get_type())
	GTypeGestureLongPress           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_long_press_get_type())
	GTypeGesturePan                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_pan_get_type())
	GTypeGestureRotate              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_rotate_get_type())
	GTypeGestureSingle              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_single_get_type())
	GTypeGestureStylus              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_stylus_get_type())
	GTypeGestureSwipe               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_swipe_get_type())
	GTypeGestureZoom                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_gesture_zoom_get_type())
	GTypeGrid                       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_grid_get_type())
	GTypeGridLayout                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_grid_layout_get_type())
	GTypeGridLayoutChild            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_grid_layout_child_get_type())
	GTypeGridView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_grid_view_get_type())
	GTypeHeaderBar                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_header_bar_get_type())
	GTypeIMContext                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_im_context_get_type())
	GTypeIMContextSimple            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_im_context_simple_get_type())
	GTypeIMMulticontext             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_im_multicontext_get_type())
	GTypeIconPaintable              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_paintable_get_type())
	GTypeIconTheme                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_theme_get_type())
	GTypeIconView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_icon_view_get_type())
	GTypeImage                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_image_get_type())
	GTypeInfoBar                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_info_bar_get_type())
	GTypeKeyvalTrigger              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_keyval_trigger_get_type())
	GTypeLabel                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_label_get_type())
	GTypeLayoutChild                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_layout_child_get_type())
	GTypeLayoutManager              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_layout_manager_get_type())
	GTypeLevelBar                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_level_bar_get_type())
	GTypeLinkButton                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_link_button_get_type())
	GTypeListBase                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_base_get_type())
	GTypeListBox                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_box_get_type())
	GTypeListBoxRow                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_box_row_get_type())
	GTypeListItem                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_item_get_type())
	GTypeListItemFactory            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_item_factory_get_type())
	GTypeListStore                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_store_get_type())
	GTypeListView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_list_view_get_type())
	GTypeLockButton                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_lock_button_get_type())
	GTypeMapListModel               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_map_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeMediaControls              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_media_controls_get_type())
	GTypeMediaFile                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_media_file_get_type())
	GTypeMediaStream                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_media_stream_get_type())
	GTypeMenuButton                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_menu_button_get_type())
	GTypeMessageDialog              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_message_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeMnemonicAction             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_mnemonic_action_get_type())
	GTypeMnemonicTrigger            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_mnemonic_trigger_get_type())
	GTypeMountOperation             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_mount_operation_get_type())
	GTypeMultiFilter                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_multi_filter_get_type())
	GTypeMultiSelection             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_multi_selection_get_type())
	GTypeMultiSorter                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_multi_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeNamedAction                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_named_action_get_type())
	GTypeNativeDialog               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_native_dialog_get_type())
	GTypeNeverTrigger               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_never_trigger_get_type())
	GTypeNoSelection                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_no_selection_get_type())
	GTypeNotebook                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_notebook_get_type())
	GTypeNotebookPage               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_notebook_page_get_type())
	GTypeNothingAction              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_nothing_action_get_type())
	GTypeNumericSorter              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_numeric_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeObjectExpression           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_object_expression_get_type())
	GTypeOverlay                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_overlay_get_type())
	GTypeOverlayLayout              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_overlay_layout_get_type())
	GTypeOverlayLayoutChild         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_overlay_layout_child_get_type())
	GTypePadController              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_pad_controller_get_type())
	GTypePageSetup                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_page_setup_get_type())
	GTypePaned                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_paned_get_type())
	GTypePasswordEntry              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_password_entry_get_type())
	GTypePicture                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_picture_get_type())
	GTypePopover                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_popover_get_type())
	GTypePopoverMenu                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_popover_menu_get_type())
	GTypePopoverMenuBar             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_popover_menu_bar_get_type())
	GTypePrintContext               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_context_get_type())
	GTypePrintOperation             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_operation_get_type())
	GTypePrintSettings              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_print_settings_get_type())
	GTypeProgressBar                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_progress_bar_get_type())
	GTypePropertyExpression         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_property_expression_get_type())
	GTypeRange                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_range_get_type())
	GTypeRecentManager              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_recent_manager_get_type())
	GTypeRevealer                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_revealer_get_type())
	GTypeScale                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scale_get_type())
	GTypeScaleButton                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scale_button_get_type())
	GTypeScrollbar                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scrollbar_get_type())
	GTypeScrolledWindow             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_scrolled_window_get_type())
	GTypeSearchBar                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_search_bar_get_type())
	GTypeSearchEntry                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_search_entry_get_type())
	GTypeSelectionFilterModel       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_selection_filter_model_get_type())
	GTypeSeparator                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_separator_get_type())
	GTypeSettings                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_settings_get_type())
	GTypeShortcut                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutAction             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_action_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutController         = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_controller_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutLabel              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_label_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutTrigger            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcut_trigger_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutsGroup             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcuts_group_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutsSection           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcuts_section_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutsShortcut          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcuts_shortcut_get_type())
	GTypeShortcutsWindow            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_shortcuts_window_get_type())
	GTypeSignalAction               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_signal_action_get_type())
	GTypeSignalListItemFactory      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_signal_list_item_factory_get_type())
	GTypeSingleSelection            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_single_selection_get_type())
	GTypeSizeGroup                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_size_group_get_type())
	GTypeSliceListModel             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_slice_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeSnapshot                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_snapshot_get_type())
	GTypeSortListModel              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sort_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeSorter                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeSpinButton                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_spin_button_get_type())
	GTypeSpinner                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_spinner_get_type())
	GTypeStack                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_stack_get_type())
	GTypeStackPage                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_stack_page_get_type())
	GTypeStackSidebar               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_stack_sidebar_get_type())
	GTypeStackSwitcher              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_stack_switcher_get_type())
	GTypeStatusbar                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_statusbar_get_type())
	GTypeStringFilter               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_string_filter_get_type())
	GTypeStringList                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_string_list_get_type())
	GTypeStringObject               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_string_object_get_type())
	GTypeStringSorter               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_string_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeStyleContext               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_style_context_get_type())
	GTypeSwitch                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_switch_get_type())
	GTypeText                       = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_get_type())
	GTypeTextBuffer                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_buffer_get_type())
	GTypeTextChildAnchor            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_child_anchor_get_type())
	GTypeTextMark                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_mark_get_type())
	GTypeTextTag                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_tag_get_type())
	GTypeTextTagTable               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_tag_table_get_type())
	GTypeTextView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_view_get_type())
	GTypeToggleButton               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_toggle_button_get_type())
	GTypeTooltip                    = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tooltip_get_type())
	GTypeTreeExpander               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_expander_get_type())
	GTypeTreeListModel              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_list_model_get_type())
	GTypeTreeListRow                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_list_row_get_type())
	GTypeTreeListRowSorter          = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_list_row_sorter_get_type())
	GTypeTreeModelFilter            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_model_filter_get_type())
	GTypeTreeModelSort              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_model_sort_get_type())
	GTypeTreeSelection              = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_selection_get_type())
	GTypeTreeStore                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_store_get_type())
	GTypeTreeView                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_view_get_type())
	GTypeTreeViewColumn             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_view_column_get_type())
	GTypeVideo                      = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_video_get_type())
	GTypeViewport                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_viewport_get_type())
	GTypeVolumeButton               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_volume_button_get_type())
	GTypeWidget                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_widget_get_type())
	GTypeWidgetPaintable            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_widget_paintable_get_type())
	GTypeWindow                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_window_get_type())
	GTypeWindowControls             = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_window_controls_get_type())
	GTypeWindowGroup                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_window_group_get_type())
	GTypeWindowHandle               = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_window_handle_get_type())
	GTypeBitset                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_bitset_get_type())
	GTypeBorder                     = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_border_get_type())
	GTypeCSSSection                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_css_section_get_type())
	GTypeExpressionWatch            = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_expression_watch_get_type())
	GTypePaperSize                  = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_paper_size_get_type())
	GTypeRecentInfo                 = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_recent_info_get_type())
	GTypeRequisition                = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_requisition_get_type())
	GTypeTextIter                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_text_iter_get_type())
	GTypeTreeIter                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_iter_get_type())
	GTypeTreePath                   = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_path_get_type())
	GTypeTreeRowReference           = coreglib.Type(C.gtk_tree_row_reference_get_type())
)

GType values.

Functions

func AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask 

func AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask() gdk.ModifierType

AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask gets the modifier mask.

The modifier mask determines which modifiers are considered significant for keyboard accelerators. This includes all keyboard modifiers except for GDK_LOCK_MASK.

The function returns the following values:

  • modifierType: modifier mask for accelerators.

func AcceleratorGetLabel 

func AcceleratorGetLabel(acceleratorKey uint, acceleratorMods gdk.ModifierType) string

AcceleratorGetLabel converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • acceleratorKey: accelerator keyval.
  • acceleratorMods: accelerator modifier mask.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.

func AcceleratorGetLabelWithKeycode 

func AcceleratorGetLabelWithKeycode(display *gdk.Display, acceleratorKey, keycode uint, acceleratorMods gdk.ModifierType) string

AcceleratorGetLabelWithKeycode converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string that can be displayed to the user.

The string may be translated.

This function is similar to gtk.AcceleratorGetLabel(), but handling keycodes.

This is only useful for system-level components, applications should use gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display (optional) or NULL to use the default display.
  • acceleratorKey: accelerator keyval.
  • keycode: accelerator keycode.
  • acceleratorMods: accelerator modifier mask.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.

func AcceleratorName 

func AcceleratorName(acceleratorKey uint, acceleratorMods gdk.ModifierType) string

AcceleratorName converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().

For example, if you pass in GDK_KEY_q and GDK_CONTROL_MASK, this function returns <Control>q.

If you need to display accelerators in the user interface, see gtk.AcceleratorGetLabel().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • acceleratorKey: accelerator keyval.
  • acceleratorMods: accelerator modifier mask.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly-allocated accelerator name.

func AcceleratorNameWithKeycode 

func AcceleratorNameWithKeycode(display *gdk.Display, acceleratorKey, keycode uint, acceleratorMods gdk.ModifierType) string

AcceleratorNameWithKeycode converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse_with_keycode().

This is similar to gtk.AcceleratorName() but handling keycodes. This is only useful for system-level components, applications should use gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display (optional) or NULL to use the default display.
  • acceleratorKey: accelerator keyval.
  • keycode: accelerator keycode.
  • acceleratorMods: accelerator modifier mask.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly allocated accelerator name.

func AcceleratorParse 

func AcceleratorParse(accelerator string) (uint, gdk.ModifierType, bool)

AcceleratorParse parses a string representing an accelerator.

The format looks like “<Control>a” or “<Shift><Alt>F1”.

The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case, and also abbreviations such as “<Ctl>” and “<Ctrl>”. Key names are parsed using gdk.KeyvalFromName(). For character keys the name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use “<Ctrl>minus” instead of “<Ctrl>-”.

If the parse fails, accelerator_key and accelerator_mods will be set to 0 (zero).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accelerator: string representing an accelerator.

The function returns the following values:

  • acceleratorKey (optional): return location for accelerator keyval, or NULL.
  • acceleratorMods (optional): return location for accelerator modifier mask, NULL.
  • ok

func AcceleratorParseWithKeycode 

func AcceleratorParseWithKeycode(accelerator string, display *gdk.Display) (uint, []uint, gdk.ModifierType, bool)

AcceleratorParseWithKeycode parses a string representing an accelerator.

This is similar to gtk.AcceleratorParse() but handles keycodes as well. This is only useful for system-level components, applications should use gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.

If accelerator_codes is given and the result stored in it is non-NULL, the result must be freed with g_free().

If a keycode is present in the accelerator and no accelerator_codes is given, the parse will fail.

If the parse fails, accelerator_key, accelerator_mods and accelerator_codes will be set to 0 (zero).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accelerator: string representing an accelerator.
  • display (optional) to look up accelerator_codes in.

The function returns the following values:

  • acceleratorKey (optional): return location for accelerator keyval, or NULL.
  • acceleratorCodes (optional): return location for accelerator keycodes, or NULL.
  • acceleratorMods (optional): return location for accelerator modifier mask, NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if parsing succeeded.

func AcceleratorValid 

func AcceleratorValid(keyval uint, modifiers gdk.ModifierType) bool

AcceleratorValid determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute a valid keyboard accelerator.

For example, the GDK_KEY_a keyval plus GDK_CONTROL_MASK mark is valid, and matches the “Ctrl+a” accelerator. But, you can't, for instance, use the GDK_KEY_Control_L keyval as an accelerator.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyval: GDK keyval.
  • modifiers: modifier mask.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the accelerator is valid.

func AccessiblePropertyInitValue 

func AccessiblePropertyInitValue(property AccessibleProperty, value *coreglib.Value)

The function takes the following parameters:

  • property
  • value

func AccessibleRelationInitValue 

func AccessibleRelationInitValue(relation AccessibleRelation, value *coreglib.Value)

The function takes the following parameters:

  • relation
  • value

func AccessibleStateInitValue 

func AccessibleStateInitValue(state AccessibleState, value *coreglib.Value)

The function takes the following parameters:

  • state
  • value

func BuilderErrorQuark 

func BuilderErrorQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func CSSParserErrorQuark 

func CSSParserErrorQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func CSSParserWarningQuark 

func CSSParserWarningQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func CheckVersion 

func CheckVersion(requiredMajor, requiredMinor, requiredMicro uint) string

CheckVersion checks that the GTK library in use is compatible with the given version.

Generally you would pass in the constants GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, GTK_MINOR_VERSION, GTK_MICRO_VERSION as the three arguments to this function; that produces a check that the library in use is compatible with the version of GTK the application or module was compiled against.

Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version of the running library is newer than the version required_major.required_minor.required_micro. Second the running library must be binary compatible with the version required_major.required_minor.required_micro (same major version.)

This function is primarily for GTK modules; the module can call this function to check that it wasn’t loaded into an incompatible version of GTK. However, such a check isn’t completely reliable, since the module may be linked against an old version of GTK and calling the old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded into an application using a newer version of GTK.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • requiredMajor: required major version.
  • requiredMinor: required minor version.
  • requiredMicro: required micro version.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): NULL if the GTK library is compatible with the given version, or a string describing the version mismatch. The returned string is owned by GTK and should not be modified or freed.

func ConstraintVflParserErrorQuark 

func ConstraintVflParserErrorQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func DisableSetlocale 

func DisableSetlocale()

DisableSetlocale prevents gtk_init and gtk_init_check from automatically calling setlocale (LC_ALL, "").

You would want to use this function if you wanted to set the locale for your program to something other than the user’s locale, or if you wanted to set different values for different locale categories.

Most programs should not need to call this function.

func DistributeNaturalAllocation 

func DistributeNaturalAllocation(extraSpace int, sizes []RequestedSize) int

DistributeNaturalAllocation distributes extra_space to child sizes by bringing smaller children up to natural size first.

The remaining space will be added to the minimum_size member of the GtkRequestedSize struct. If all sizes reach their natural size then the remaining space is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • extraSpace: extra space to redistribute among children after subtracting minimum sizes and any child padding from the overall allocation.
  • sizes: array of structs with a client pointer and a minimum/natural size in the orientation of the allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: remainder of extra_space after redistributing space to sizes.

func DragIconSetFromPaintable 

func DragIconSetFromPaintable(drag gdk.Dragger, paintable gdk.Paintabler, hotX, hotY int)

DragIconSetFromPaintable creates a GtkDragIcon that shows paintable, and associates it with the drag operation.

The hotspot position on the paintable is aligned with the hotspot of the cursor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drag: GdkDrag.
  • paintable: GdkPaintable to display.
  • hotX: x coordinate of the hotspot.
  • hotY: y coordinate of the hotspot.

func FileChooserErrorQuark 

func FileChooserErrorQuark() glib.Quark

FileChooserErrorQuark registers an error quark for GtkFileChooser errors.

The function returns the following values:

  • quark: error quark used for GtkFileChooser errors.

func GetBinaryAge 

func GetBinaryAge() uint

GetBinaryAge returns the binary age as passed to libtool.

If libtool means nothing to you, don't worry about it.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: binary age of the GTK library.

func GetDefaultLanguage 

func GetDefaultLanguage() *pango.Language

GetDefaultLanguage returns the Language for the default language currently in effect. (Note that this can change over the life of an application.) The default language is derived from the current locale. It determines, for example, whether GTK uses the right-to-left or left-to-right text direction.

This function is equivalent to pango_language_get_default(). See that function for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • language: default language as a Language, must not be freed.

func GetInterfaceAge 

func GetInterfaceAge() uint

GetInterfaceAge returns the interface age as passed to libtool.

If libtool means nothing to you, don't worry about it.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: interface age of the GTK library.

func GetMajorVersion 

func GetMajorVersion() uint

GetMajorVersion returns the major version number of the GTK library.

For example, in GTK version 3.1.5 this is 3.

This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK library your code is running against. Contrast with the GTK_MAJOR_VERSION macro, which represents the major version of the GTK headers you have included when compiling your code.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: major version number of the GTK library.

func GetMicroVersion 

func GetMicroVersion() uint

GetMicroVersion returns the micro version number of the GTK library.

For example, in GTK version 3.1.5 this is 5.

This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK library your code is are running against. Contrast with the GTK_MICRO_VERSION macro, which represents the micro version of the GTK headers you have included when compiling your code.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: micro version number of the GTK library.

func GetMinorVersion 

func GetMinorVersion() uint

GetMinorVersion returns the minor version number of the GTK library.

For example, in GTK version 3.1.5 this is 1.

This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK library your code is are running against. Contrast with the GTK_MINOR_VERSION macro, which represents the minor version of the GTK headers you have included when compiling your code.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: minor version number of the GTK library.

func HSVToRGB 

func HSVToRGB(h, s, v float32) (r, g, b float32)

HSVToRGB converts a color from HSV space to RGB.

Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range; output values will be in the same range.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • h: hue.
  • s: saturation.
  • v: value.

The function returns the following values:

  • r: return value for the red component.
  • g: return value for the green component.
  • b: return value for the blue component.

func IconThemeErrorQuark 

func IconThemeErrorQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func Init 

func Init()

Init: call this function before using any other GTK functions in your GUI applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the toolkit and parses some standard command line options.

If you are using Application, you don't have to call gtk_init() or gtk_init_check(); the #GApplication::startup handler does it for you.

This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize the windowing system for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.

GTK calls signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN) during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(), but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do similar things.

func InitCheck 

func InitCheck() bool

InitCheck: this function does the same work as gtk_init() with only a single change: It does not terminate the program if the windowing system can’t be initialized. Instead it returns FALSE on failure.

This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the windowing system has been successfully initialized, FALSE otherwise.

func IsInitialized 

func IsInitialized() bool

IsInitialized: use this function to check if GTK has been initialized with gtk_init() or gtk_init_check().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: initialization status.

func PaperSizeGetDefault 

func PaperSizeGetDefault() string

PaperSizeGetDefault returns the name of the default paper size, which depends on the current locale.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of the default paper size. The string is owned by GTK and should not be modified.

func PrintErrorQuark 

func PrintErrorQuark() glib.Quark

PrintErrorQuark registers an error quark for GtkPrintOperation if necessary.

The function returns the following values:

  • quark: error quark used for GtkPrintOperation errors.

func PrintRunPageSetupDialogAsync 

func PrintRunPageSetupDialogAsync(parent *Window, pageSetup *PageSetup, settings *PrintSettings, doneCb PageSetupDoneFunc)

PrintRunPageSetupDialogAsync runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from page_setup.

In contrast to gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog(), this function returns after showing the page setup dialog on platforms that support this, and calls done_cb from a signal handler for the ::response signal of the dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): transient parent, or NULL.
  • pageSetup (optional): existing PageSetup, or NULL.
  • settings: PrintSettings.
  • doneCb: function to call when the user saves the modified page setup.

func RGBToHSV 

func RGBToHSV(r, g, b float32) (h, s, v float32)

RGBToHSV converts a color from RGB space to HSV.

Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range; output values will be in the same range.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • r: red.
  • g: green.
  • b: blue.

The function returns the following values:

  • h: return value for the hue component.
  • s: return value for the saturation component.
  • v: return value for the value component.

func RecentManagerErrorQuark 

func RecentManagerErrorQuark() glib.Quark

The function returns the following values:

func RenderActivity 

func RenderActivity(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderActivity renders an activity indicator (such as in Spinner). The state GTK_STATE_FLAG_CHECKED determines whether there is activity going on.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderArrow 

func RenderArrow(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, angle, x, y, size float64)

RenderArrow renders an arrow pointing to angle.

Typical arrow rendering at 0, 1⁄2 π;, π; and 3⁄2 π:

! (arrows.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • angle: arrow angle from 0 to 2 * G_PI, being 0 the arrow pointing to the north.
  • x: x origin of the render area.
  • y: y origin of the render area.
  • size: square side for render area.

func RenderBackground 

func RenderBackground(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderBackground renders the background of an element.

Typical background rendering, showing the effect of background-image, border-width and border-radius:

! (background.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderCheck 

func RenderCheck(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderCheck renders a checkmark (as in a CheckButton).

The GTK_STATE_FLAG_CHECKED state determines whether the check is on or off, and GTK_STATE_FLAG_INCONSISTENT determines whether it should be marked as undefined.

Typical checkmark rendering:

! (checks.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderExpander 

func RenderExpander(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderExpander renders an expander (as used in TreeView and Expander) in the area defined by x, y, width, height. The state GTK_STATE_FLAG_CHECKED determines whether the expander is collapsed or expanded.

Typical expander rendering:

! (expanders.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderFocus 

func RenderFocus(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderFocus renders a focus indicator on the rectangle determined by x, y, width, height.

Typical focus rendering:

! (focus.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderFrame 

func RenderFrame(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderFrame renders a frame around the rectangle defined by x, y, width, height.

Examples of frame rendering, showing the effect of border-image, border-color, border-width, border-radius and junctions:

! (frames.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderHandle 

func RenderHandle(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderHandle renders a handle (as in Paned and Window’s resize grip), in the rectangle determined by x, y, width, height.

Handles rendered for the paned and grip classes:

! (handles.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func RenderIcon 

func RenderIcon(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, texture gdk.Texturer, x, y float64)

RenderIcon renders the icon in texture at the specified x and y coordinates.

This function will render the icon in texture at exactly its size, regardless of scaling factors, which may not be appropriate when drawing on displays with high pixel densities.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • texture containing the icon to draw.
  • x: x position for the texture.
  • y: y position for the texture.

func RenderLayout 

func RenderLayout(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y float64, layout *pango.Layout)

RenderLayout renders layout on the coordinates x, y.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin.
  • y: y origin.
  • layout to render.

func RenderLine 

func RenderLine(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x0, y0, x1, y1 float64)

RenderLine renders a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x0: x coordinate for the origin of the line.
  • y0: y coordinate for the origin of the line.
  • x1: x coordinate for the end of the line.
  • y1: y coordinate for the end of the line.

func RenderOption 

func RenderOption(context *StyleContext, cr *cairo.Context, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderOption renders an option mark (as in a radio button), the GTK_STATE_FLAG_CHECKED state will determine whether the option is on or off, and GTK_STATE_FLAG_INCONSISTENT whether it should be marked as undefined.

Typical option mark rendering:

! (options.png).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: StyleContext.
  • cr: #cairo_t.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func SetDebugFlags 

func SetDebugFlags(flags DebugFlags)

SetDebugFlags sets the GTK debug flags.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags: debug flags to set.

func ShowURI 

func ShowURI(parent *Window, uri string, timestamp uint32)

ShowURI: this function launches the default application for showing a given uri, or shows an error dialog if that fails.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional) window.
  • uri to show.
  • timestamp from the event that triggered this call, or GDK_CURRENT_TIME.

func ShowURIFull 

func ShowURIFull(ctx context.Context, parent *Window, uri string, timestamp uint32, callback gio.AsyncReadyCallback)

ShowURIFull: this function launches the default application for showing a given uri.

The callback will be called when the launch is completed. It should call gtk_show_uri_full_finish() to obtain the result.

This is the recommended call to be used as it passes information necessary for sandbox helpers to parent their dialogs properly.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ctx (optional) to cancel the launch.
  • parent (optional) window.
  • uri to show.
  • timestamp from the event that triggered this call, or GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
  • callback (optional) to call when the action is complete.

func ShowURIFullFinish 

func ShowURIFullFinish(parent *Window, result gio.AsyncResulter) error

ShowURIFullFinish finishes the gtk_show_uri() call and returns the result of the operation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent passed to gtk_show_uri().
  • result that was passed to callback.

func StyleContextAddProviderForDisplay 

func StyleContextAddProviderForDisplay(display *gdk.Display, provider StyleProviderer, priority uint)

StyleContextAddProviderForDisplay adds a global style provider to display, which will be used in style construction for all GtkStyleContexts under display.

GTK uses this to make styling information from GtkSettings available.

Note: If both priorities are the same, A GtkStyleProvider added through gtk.StyleContext.AddProvider() takes precedence over another added through this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.
  • provider: GtkStyleProvider.
  • priority of the style provider. The lower it is, the earlier it will be used in the style construction. Typically this will be in the range between GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK and GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER.

func StyleContextRemoveProviderForDisplay 

func StyleContextRemoveProviderForDisplay(display *gdk.Display, provider StyleProviderer)

StyleContextRemoveProviderForDisplay removes provider from the global style providers list in display.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.
  • provider: GtkStyleProvider.

func TestAccessibleAssertionMessageRole 

func TestAccessibleAssertionMessageRole(domain, file string, line int, fn, expr string, accessible Accessibler, expectedRole, actualRole AccessibleRole)

The function takes the following parameters:

  • domain
  • file
  • line
  • fn
  • expr
  • accessible
  • expectedRole
  • actualRole

func TestAccessibleHasProperty 

func TestAccessibleHasProperty(accessible Accessibler, property AccessibleProperty) bool

TestAccessibleHasProperty checks whether the Accessible has property set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessible: Accessible.
  • property: AccessibleProperty.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the property is set in the accessible.

func TestAccessibleHasRelation 

func TestAccessibleHasRelation(accessible Accessibler, relation AccessibleRelation) bool

TestAccessibleHasRelation checks whether the Accessible has relation set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessible: Accessible.
  • relation: AccessibleRelation.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the relation is set in the accessible.

func TestAccessibleHasRole 

func TestAccessibleHasRole(accessible Accessibler, role AccessibleRole) bool

TestAccessibleHasRole checks whether the Accessible:accessible-role of the accessible is role.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessible: Accessible.
  • role: AccessibleRole.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the role matches.

func TestAccessibleHasState 

func TestAccessibleHasState(accessible Accessibler, state AccessibleState) bool

TestAccessibleHasState checks whether the Accessible has state set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessible: Accessible.
  • state: AccessibleState.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the state is set in the accessible.

func TestListAllTypes 

func TestListAllTypes() []coreglib.Type

TestListAllTypes: return the type ids that have been registered after calling gtk_test_register_all_types().

The function returns the following values:

  • gTypes: 0-terminated array of type ids.

func TestRegisterAllTypes 

func TestRegisterAllTypes()

TestRegisterAllTypes: force registration of all core GTK object types.

This allowes to refer to any of those object types via g_type_from_name() after calling this function.

func TestWidgetWaitForDraw 

func TestWidgetWaitForDraw(widget Widgetter)

TestWidgetWaitForDraw enters the main loop and waits for widget to be “drawn”.

In this context that means it waits for the frame clock of widget to have run a full styling, layout and drawing cycle.

This function is intended to be used for syncing with actions that depend on widget relayouting or on interaction with the display server.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget to wait for.

func TreeCreateRowDragContent 

func TreeCreateRowDragContent(treeModel TreeModeller, path *TreePath) *gdk.ContentProvider

TreeCreateRowDragContent creates a content provider for dragging path from tree_model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • treeModel: TreeModel.
  • path: row in tree_model.

The function returns the following values:

  • contentProvider: new ContentProvider.

func TreeGetRowDragData 

func TreeGetRowDragData(value *coreglib.Value) (*TreeModel, *TreePath, bool)

TreeGetRowDragData obtains a tree_model and path from value of target type GTK_TYPE_TREE_ROW_DATA.

The returned path must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: #GValue.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional): TreeModel.
  • path (optional): row in tree_model.
  • ok: TRUE if selection_data had target type GTK_TYPE_TREE_ROW_DATA is otherwise valid.

func TreeRowReferenceDeleted 

func TreeRowReferenceDeleted(proxy *coreglib.Object, path *TreePath)

TreeRowReferenceDeleted lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy() know that the model emitted the TreeModel::row-deleted signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • proxy: #GObject.
  • path position that was deleted.

func TreeRowReferenceInserted 

func TreeRowReferenceInserted(proxy *coreglib.Object, path *TreePath)

TreeRowReferenceInserted lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy() know that the model emitted the TreeModel::row-inserted signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • proxy: #GObject.
  • path: row position that was inserted.

func ValueSetExpression 

func ValueSetExpression(value *coreglib.Value, expression Expressioner)

ValueSetExpression stores the given GtkExpression inside value.

The GValue will acquire a reference to the expression.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue initialized with type GTK_TYPE_EXPRESSION.
  • expression: GtkExpression.

func ValueTakeExpression 

func ValueTakeExpression(value *coreglib.Value, expression Expressioner)

ValueTakeExpression stores the given GtkExpression inside value.

This function transfers the ownership of the expression to the GValue.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue initialized with type GTK_TYPE_EXPRESSION.
  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func WidgetSetDefaultDirection 

func WidgetSetDefaultDirection(dir TextDirection)

WidgetSetDefaultDirection sets the default reading direction for widgets.

See gtk.Widget.SetDirection().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dir: new default direction. This cannot be GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.

func WindowGetDefaultIconName 

func WindowGetDefaultIconName() string

WindowGetDefaultIconName returns the fallback icon name for windows.

The returned string is owned by GTK and should not be modified. It is only valid until the next call to gtk.Window().SetDefaultIconName.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): fallback icon name for windows.

func WindowGetToplevels 

func WindowGetToplevels() *gio.ListModel

WindowGetToplevels returns a list of all existing toplevel windows.

If you want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving callbacks that might destroy the widgets or add new ones, be aware that the list of toplevels will change and emit the "items-changed" signal.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: list of toplevel widgets.

func WindowSetAutoStartupNotification 

func WindowSetAutoStartupNotification(setting bool)

WindowSetAutoStartupNotification sets whether the window should request startup notification.

By default, after showing the first GtkWindow, GTK calls gdk.Display.NotifyStartupComplete(). Call this function to disable the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification until after your real main window has been shown, for example.

In that example, you would disable startup notification temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that showing the main window would automatically result in notification.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to automatically do startup notification.

func WindowSetDefaultIconName 

func WindowSetDefaultIconName(name string)

WindowSetDefaultIconName sets an icon to be used as fallback.

The fallback icon is used for windows that haven't had gtk.Window.SetIconName() called on them.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the themed icon.

func WindowSetInteractiveDebugging 

func WindowSetInteractiveDebugging(enable bool)

WindowSetInteractiveDebugging opens or closes the interactive debugger (#interactive-debugging).

The debugger offers access to the widget hierarchy of the application and to useful debugging tools.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enable: TRUE to enable interactive debugging.

Types

type ATContext 

type ATContext struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ATContext: GtkATContext is an abstract class provided by GTK to communicate to platform-specific assistive technologies API.

Each platform supported by GTK implements a GtkATContext subclass, and is responsible for updating the accessible state in response to state changes in GtkAccessible.

func BaseATContext 

func BaseATContext(obj ATContexter) *ATContext

BaseATContext returns the underlying base object.

func NewATContextCreate 

func NewATContextCreate(accessibleRole AccessibleRole, accessible Accessibler, display *gdk.Display) *ATContext

NewATContextCreate creates a new GtkATContext instance for the given accessible role, accessible instance, and display connection.

The GtkATContext implementation being instantiated will depend on the platform.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessibleRole: accessible role used by the GtkATContext.
  • accessible: GtkAccessible implementation using the GtkATContext.
  • display: GdkDisplay used by the GtkATContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • atContext (optional): GtkATContext.

func (*ATContext) Accessible 

func (self *ATContext) Accessible() *Accessible

Accessible retrieves the GtkAccessible using this context.

The function returns the following values:

  • accessible: GtkAccessible.

func (*ATContext) AccessibleRole 

func (self *ATContext) AccessibleRole() AccessibleRole

AccessibleRole retrieves the accessible role of this context.

The function returns the following values:

  • accessibleRole: GtkAccessibleRole.

func (*ATContext) ConnectStateChange 

func (self *ATContext) ConnectStateChange(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStateChange is emitted when the attributes of the accessible for the GtkATContext instance change.

type ATContexter 

type ATContexter interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ATContexter describes types inherited from class ATContext.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type AboutDialog 

type AboutDialog struct {
	Window
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AboutDialog: GtkAboutDialog offers a simple way to display information about a program.

The shown information includes the programs' logo, name, copyright, website and license. It is also possible to give credits to the authors, documenters, translators and artists who have worked on the program.

An about dialog is typically opened when the user selects the About option from the Help menu. All parts of the dialog are optional.

!An example GtkAboutDialog (aboutdialog.png)

About dialogs often contain links and email addresses. GtkAboutDialog displays these as clickable links. By default, it calls gtk.ShowURI() when a user clicks one. The behaviour can be overridden with the gtk.AboutDialog::activate-link signal.

To specify a person with an email address, use a string like Edgar Allan Poe <edgarpoe.com>. To specify a website with a title, use a string like GTK team https://www.gtk.org.

To make constructing a GtkAboutDialog as convenient as possible, you can use the function gtk.ShowAboutDialog() which constructs and shows a dialog and keeps it around so that it can be shown again.

Note that GTK sets a default title of _("About s") on the dialog window (where s is replaced by the name of the application, but in order to ensure proper translation of the title, applications should set the title property explicitly when constructing a GtkAboutDialog, as shown in the following example: 

GFile *logo_file = g_file_new_for_path ("./logo.png");
GdkTexture *example_logo = gdk_texture_new_from_file (logo_file, NULL);
g_object_unref (logo_file);

gtk_show_about_dialog (NULL,
                       "program-name", "ExampleCode",
                       "logo", example_logo,
                       "title", _("About ExampleCode"),
                       NULL);

CSS nodes

GtkAboutDialog has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .aboutdialog.

func NewAboutDialog 

func NewAboutDialog() *AboutDialog

NewAboutDialog creates a new GtkAboutDialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • aboutDialog: newly created GtkAboutDialog.

func (*AboutDialog) AddCreditSection 

func (about *AboutDialog) AddCreditSection(sectionName string, people []string)

AddCreditSection creates a new section in the "Credits" page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sectionName: name of the section.
  • people who belong to that section.

func (*AboutDialog) Artists 

func (about *AboutDialog) Artists() []string

Artists returns the string which are displayed in the "Artists" tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: a NULL-terminated string array containing the artists. The array is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) Authors 

func (about *AboutDialog) Authors() []string

Authors returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: a NULL-terminated string array containing the authors. The array is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) Comments 

func (about *AboutDialog) Comments() string

Comments returns the comments string.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): comments. The string is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
func (about *AboutDialog) ConnectActivateLink(f func(uri string) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateLink is emitted every time a URL is activated.

Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour, which is to call gtk.ShowURI().

func (*AboutDialog) Copyright 

func (about *AboutDialog) Copyright() string

Copyright returns the copyright string.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): copyright string. The string is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) Documenters 

func (about *AboutDialog) Documenters() []string

Documenters returns the string which are displayed in the "Documenters" tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: a NULL-terminated string array containing the documenters. The array is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) License 

func (about *AboutDialog) License() string

License returns the license information.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): license information. The string is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) LicenseType 

func (about *AboutDialog) LicenseType() License

LicenseType retrieves the license type.

The function returns the following values:

  • license: gtk.License value.
func (about *AboutDialog) Logo() *gdk.Paintable

Logo returns the paintable displayed as logo in the about dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable (optional) displayed as logo or NULL if the logo is unset or has been set via gtk.AboutDialog.SetLogoIconName(). The paintable is owned by the about dialog.

func (*AboutDialog) LogoIconName 

func (about *AboutDialog) LogoIconName() string

LogoIconName returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): icon name displayed as logo, or NULL if the logo has been set via gtk.AboutDialog.SetLogo(). The string is owned by the dialog.

func (*AboutDialog) ProgramName 

func (about *AboutDialog) ProgramName() string

ProgramName returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): program name. The string is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) SetArtists 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetArtists(artists []string)

SetArtists sets the strings which are displayed in the "Artists" tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • artists authors of the artwork of the application.

func (*AboutDialog) SetAuthors 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetAuthors(authors []string)

SetAuthors sets the strings which are displayed in the "Authors" tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • authors of the application.

func (*AboutDialog) SetComments 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetComments(comments string)

SetComments sets the comments string to display in the about dialog.

This should be a short string of one or two lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • comments (optional) string.

func (*AboutDialog) SetCopyright 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetCopyright(copyright string)

SetCopyright sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.

This should be a short string of one or two lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • copyright (optional) string.

func (*AboutDialog) SetDocumenters 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetDocumenters(documenters []string)

SetDocumenters sets the strings which are displayed in the "Documenters" tab of the credits dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • documenters authors of the documentation of the application.

func (*AboutDialog) SetLicense 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetLicense(license string)

SetLicense sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary license dialog.

If license is NULL, the license button is hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • license (optional) information.

func (*AboutDialog) SetLicenseType 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetLicenseType(licenseType License)

SetLicenseType sets the license of the application showing the about dialog from a list of known licenses.

This function overrides the license set using gtk.AboutDialog.SetLicense().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • licenseType: type of license.
func (about *AboutDialog) SetLogo(logo gdk.Paintabler)

SetLogo sets the logo in the about dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • logo (optional): GdkPaintable.

func (*AboutDialog) SetLogoIconName 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetLogoIconName(iconName string)

SetLogoIconName sets the icon name to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName (optional): icon name.

func (*AboutDialog) SetProgramName 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetProgramName(name string)

SetProgramName sets the name to display in the about dialog.

If name is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional): program name.

func (*AboutDialog) SetSystemInformation 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetSystemInformation(systemInformation string)

SetSystemInformation sets the system information to be displayed in the about dialog.

If system_information is NULL, the system information tab is hidden.

See gtk.AboutDialog:system-information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • systemInformation (optional): system information.

func (*AboutDialog) SetTranslatorCredits 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetTranslatorCredits(translatorCredits string)

SetTranslatorCredits sets the translator credits string which is displayed in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The intended use for this string is to display the translator of the language which is currently used in the user interface. Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the string for translation: 

GtkWidget *about = gtk_about_dialog_new ();
 gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (GTK_ABOUT_DIALOG (about),
                                          _("translator-credits"));

It is a good idea to use the customary msgid “translator-credits” for this purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and since GtkAboutDialog will detect if “translator-credits” is untranslated and hide the tab.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • translatorCredits (optional): translator credits.

func (*AboutDialog) SetVersion 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetVersion(version string)

SetVersion sets the version string to display in the about dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • version (optional) string.

func (*AboutDialog) SetWebsite 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetWebsite(website string)

SetWebsite sets the URL to use for the website link.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • website (optional): URL string starting with http://.

func (*AboutDialog) SetWebsiteLabel 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetWebsiteLabel(websiteLabel string)

SetWebsiteLabel sets the label to be used for the website link.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • websiteLabel: label used for the website link.

func (*AboutDialog) SetWrapLicense 

func (about *AboutDialog) SetWrapLicense(wrapLicense bool)

SetWrapLicense sets whether the license text in the about dialog should be automatically wrapped.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wrapLicense: whether to wrap the license.

func (*AboutDialog) SystemInformation 

func (about *AboutDialog) SystemInformation() string

SystemInformation returns the system information that is shown in the about dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): system information.

func (*AboutDialog) TranslatorCredits 

func (about *AboutDialog) TranslatorCredits() string

TranslatorCredits returns the translator credits string which is displayed in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): translator credits string.

func (*AboutDialog) Version 

func (about *AboutDialog) Version() string

Version returns the version string.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): version string. The string is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.

func (*AboutDialog) Website 

func (about *AboutDialog) Website() string

Website returns the website URL.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): website URL.

func (*AboutDialog) WebsiteLabel 

func (about *AboutDialog) WebsiteLabel() string

WebsiteLabel returns the label used for the website link.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): label used for the website link.

func (*AboutDialog) WrapLicense 

func (about *AboutDialog) WrapLicense() bool

WrapLicense returns whether the license text in the about dialog is automatically wrapped.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the license text is wrapped.

type Accessible 

type Accessible struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Accessible: GtkAccessible is an interface for describing UI elements for Assistive Technologies.

Every accessible implementation has:

  • a “role”, represented by a value of the gtk.AccessibleRole enumeration
  • an “attribute”, represented by a set of gtk.AccessibleState, gtk.AccessibleProperty and gtk.AccessibleRelation values

The role cannot be changed after instantiating a GtkAccessible implementation.

The attributes are updated every time a UI element's state changes in a way that should be reflected by assistive technologies. For instance, if a GtkWidget visibility changes, the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_HIDDEN state will also change to reflect the gtk.Widget:visible property.

Accessible wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Accessible) AccessibleRole 

func (self *Accessible) AccessibleRole() AccessibleRole

AccessibleRole retrieves the GtkAccessibleRole for the given GtkAccessible.

The function returns the following values:

  • accessibleRole: GtkAccessibleRole.

func (*Accessible) ResetProperty 

func (self *Accessible) ResetProperty(property AccessibleProperty)

ResetProperty resets the accessible property to its default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • property: GtkAccessibleProperty.

func (*Accessible) ResetRelation 

func (self *Accessible) ResetRelation(relation AccessibleRelation)

ResetRelation resets the accessible relation to its default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • relation: GtkAccessibleRelation.

func (*Accessible) ResetState 

func (self *Accessible) ResetState(state AccessibleState)

ResetState resets the accessible state to its default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • state: GtkAccessibleState.

func (*Accessible) UpdateProperty 

func (self *Accessible) UpdateProperty(properties []AccessibleProperty, values []coreglib.Value)

UpdateProperty updates an array of accessible properties.

This function should be called by GtkWidget types whenever an accessible property change must be communicated to assistive technologies.

This function is meant to be used by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • properties: array of GtkAccessibleProperty.
  • values: array of GValues, one for each property.

func (*Accessible) UpdateRelation 

func (self *Accessible) UpdateRelation(relations []AccessibleRelation, values []coreglib.Value)

UpdateRelation updates an array of accessible relations.

This function should be called by GtkWidget types whenever an accessible relation change must be communicated to assistive technologies.

This function is meant to be used by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • relations: array of GtkAccessibleRelation.
  • values: array of GValues, one for each relation.

func (*Accessible) UpdateState 

func (self *Accessible) UpdateState(states []AccessibleState, values []coreglib.Value)

UpdateState updates an array of accessible states.

This function should be called by GtkWidget types whenever an accessible state change must be communicated to assistive technologies.

This function is meant to be used by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • states: array of GtkAccessibleState.
  • values: array of GValues, one for each state.

type AccessibleAutocomplete 

type AccessibleAutocomplete C.gint

AccessibleAutocomplete: possible values for the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_AUTOCOMPLETE accessible property. 

const (
	// AccessibleAutocompleteNone: automatic suggestions are not displayed.
	AccessibleAutocompleteNone AccessibleAutocomplete = iota
	// AccessibleAutocompleteInline: when a user is providing input, text
	// suggesting one way to complete the provided input may be dynamically
	// inserted after the caret.
	AccessibleAutocompleteInline
	// AccessibleAutocompleteList: when a user is providing input, an element
	// containing a collection of values that could complete the provided input
	// may be displayed.
	AccessibleAutocompleteList
	// AccessibleAutocompleteBoth: when a user is providing input, an element
	// containing a collection of values that could complete the provided
	// input may be displayed. If displayed, one value in the collection is
	// automatically selected, and the text needed to complete the automatically
	// selected value appears after the caret in the input.
	AccessibleAutocompleteBoth
)

func (AccessibleAutocomplete) String 

func (a AccessibleAutocomplete) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleAutocomplete.

type AccessibleInvalidState 

type AccessibleInvalidState C.gint

AccessibleInvalidState: possible values for the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_INVALID accessible state.

Note that the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_INVALID_FALSE and GTK_ACCESSIBLE_INVALID_TRUE have the same values as FALSE and TRUE. 

const (
	// AccessibleInvalidFalse: there are no detected errors in the value.
	AccessibleInvalidFalse AccessibleInvalidState = iota
	// AccessibleInvalidTrue: value entered by the user has failed validation.
	AccessibleInvalidTrue
	// AccessibleInvalidGrammar: grammatical error was detected.
	AccessibleInvalidGrammar
	// AccessibleInvalidSpelling: spelling error was detected.
	AccessibleInvalidSpelling
)

func (AccessibleInvalidState) String 

func (a AccessibleInvalidState) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleInvalidState.

type AccessibleProperty 

type AccessibleProperty C.gint

AccessibleProperty: possible accessible properties of a GtkAccessible. 

const (
	// AccessiblePropertyAutocomplete indicates whether inputting text could
	// trigger display of one or more predictions of the user's intended value
	// for a combobox, searchbox, or textbox and specifies how predictions would
	// be presented if they were made. Value type: AccessibleAutocomplete.
	AccessiblePropertyAutocomplete AccessibleProperty = iota
	// AccessiblePropertyDescription defines a string value that describes or
	// annotates the current element. Value type: string.
	AccessiblePropertyDescription
	// AccessiblePropertyHasPopup indicates the availability and type of
	// interactive popup element, such as menu or dialog, that can be triggered
	// by an element.
	AccessiblePropertyHasPopup
	// AccessiblePropertyKeyShortcuts indicates keyboard shortcuts that an
	// author has implemented to activate or give focus to an element. Value
	// type: string.
	AccessiblePropertyKeyShortcuts
	// AccessiblePropertyLabel defines a string value that labels the current
	// element. Value type: string.
	AccessiblePropertyLabel
	// AccessiblePropertyLevel defines the hierarchical level of an element
	// within a structure. Value type: integer.
	AccessiblePropertyLevel
	// AccessiblePropertyModal indicates whether an element is modal when
	// displayed. Value type: boolean.
	AccessiblePropertyModal
	// AccessiblePropertyMultiLine indicates whether a text box accepts multiple
	// lines of input or only a single line. Value type: boolean.
	AccessiblePropertyMultiLine
	// AccessiblePropertyMultiSelectable indicates that the user may select
	// more than one item from the current selectable descendants. Value type:
	// boolean.
	AccessiblePropertyMultiSelectable
	// AccessiblePropertyOrientation indicates whether the element's orientation
	// is horizontal, vertical, or unknown/ambiguous. Value type: Orientation.
	AccessiblePropertyOrientation
	// AccessiblePropertyPlaceholder defines a short hint (a word or short
	// phrase) intended to aid the user with data entry when the control has
	// no value. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the
	// expected format. Value type: string.
	AccessiblePropertyPlaceholder
	// AccessiblePropertyReadOnly indicates that the element is not editable,
	// but is otherwise operable. Value type: boolean.
	AccessiblePropertyReadOnly
	// AccessiblePropertyRequired indicates that user input is required on the
	// element before a form may be submitted. Value type: boolean.
	AccessiblePropertyRequired
	// AccessiblePropertyRoleDescription defines a human-readable,
	// author-localized description for the role of an element. Value type:
	// string.
	AccessiblePropertyRoleDescription
	// AccessiblePropertySort indicates if items in a table or grid are sorted
	// in ascending or descending order. Possible property values are in the
	// AccessibleSort enumeration. Value type: AccessibleSort.
	AccessiblePropertySort
	// AccessiblePropertyValueMax defines the maximum allowed value for a range
	// widget. Value type: double.
	AccessiblePropertyValueMax
	// AccessiblePropertyValueMin defines the minimum allowed value for a range
	// widget. Value type: double.
	AccessiblePropertyValueMin
	// AccessiblePropertyValueNow defines the current value for a range widget.
	// Value type: double.
	AccessiblePropertyValueNow
	// AccessiblePropertyValueText defines the human readable text alternative
	// of aria-valuenow for a range widget. Value type: string.
	AccessiblePropertyValueText
)

func (AccessibleProperty) String 

func (a AccessibleProperty) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleProperty.

type AccessibleRelation 

type AccessibleRelation C.gint

AccessibleRelation: possible accessible relations of a GtkAccessible.

Accessible relations can be references to other widgets, integers or strings. 

const (
	// AccessibleRelationActiveDescendant identifies the currently active
	// element when focus is on a composite widget, combobox, textbox, group,
	// or application. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationActiveDescendant AccessibleRelation = iota
	// AccessibleRelationColCount defines the total number of columns in a
	// table, grid, or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationColCount
	// AccessibleRelationColIndex defines an element's column index or position
	// with respect to the total number of columns within a table, grid,
	// or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationColIndex
	// AccessibleRelationColIndexText defines a human readable text alternative
	// of GTK_ACCESSIBLE_RELATION_COL_INDEX. Value type: string.
	AccessibleRelationColIndexText
	// AccessibleRelationColSpan defines the number of columns spanned by a cell
	// or gridcell within a table, grid, or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationColSpan
	// AccessibleRelationControls identifies the element (or elements) whose
	// contents or presence are controlled by the current element. Value type:
	// reference.
	AccessibleRelationControls
	// AccessibleRelationDescribedBy identifies the element (or elements) that
	// describes the object. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationDescribedBy
	// AccessibleRelationDetails identifies the element (or elements) that
	// provide additional information related to the object. Value type:
	// reference.
	AccessibleRelationDetails
	// AccessibleRelationErrorMessage identifies the element that provides an
	// error message for an object. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationErrorMessage
	// AccessibleRelationFlowTo identifies the next element (or elements) in
	// an alternate reading order of content which, at the user's discretion,
	// allows assistive technology to override the general default of reading in
	// document source order. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationFlowTo
	// AccessibleRelationLabelledBy identifies the element (or elements) that
	// labels the current element. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationLabelledBy
	// AccessibleRelationOwns identifies an element (or elements) in order to
	// define a visual, functional, or contextual parent/child relationship
	// between elements where the widget hierarchy cannot be used to represent
	// the relationship. Value type: reference.
	AccessibleRelationOwns
	// AccessibleRelationPosInSet defines an element's number or position in the
	// current set of listitems or treeitems. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationPosInSet
	// AccessibleRelationRowCount defines the total number of rows in a table,
	// grid, or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationRowCount
	// AccessibleRelationRowIndex defines an element's row index or position
	// with respect to the total number of rows within a table, grid,
	// or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationRowIndex
	// AccessibleRelationRowIndexText defines a human readable text alternative
	// of aria-rowindex. Value type: string.
	AccessibleRelationRowIndexText
	// AccessibleRelationRowSpan defines the number of rows spanned by a cell or
	// gridcell within a table, grid, or treegrid. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationRowSpan
	// AccessibleRelationSetSize defines the number of items in the current set
	// of listitems or treeitems. Value type: integer.
	AccessibleRelationSetSize
)

func (AccessibleRelation) String 

func (a AccessibleRelation) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleRelation.

type AccessibleRole 

type AccessibleRole C.gint

AccessibleRole: accessible role for a GtkAccessible implementation.

Abstract roles are only used as part of the ontology; application developers must not use abstract roles in their code. 

const (
	// AccessibleRoleAlert: element with important, and usually time-sensitive,
	// information.
	AccessibleRoleAlert AccessibleRole = iota
	// AccessibleRoleAlertDialog: type of dialog that contains an alert message.
	AccessibleRoleAlertDialog
	// AccessibleRoleBanner: unused.
	AccessibleRoleBanner
	// AccessibleRoleButton: input element that allows for user-triggered
	// actions when clicked or pressed.
	AccessibleRoleButton
	// AccessibleRoleCaption: unused.
	AccessibleRoleCaption
	// AccessibleRoleCell: unused.
	AccessibleRoleCell
	// AccessibleRoleCheckbox: checkable input element that has three possible
	// values: true, false, or mixed.
	AccessibleRoleCheckbox
	// AccessibleRoleColumnHeader: header in a columned list.
	AccessibleRoleColumnHeader
	// AccessibleRoleComboBox: input that controls another element, such as
	// a list or a grid, that can dynamically pop up to help the user set the
	// value of the input.
	AccessibleRoleComboBox
	// AccessibleRoleCommand: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleCommand
	// AccessibleRoleComposite: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleComposite
	// AccessibleRoleDialog: dialog is a window that is designed to interrupt
	// the current processing of an application in order to prompt the user to
	// enter information or require a response.
	AccessibleRoleDialog
	// AccessibleRoleDocument: unused.
	AccessibleRoleDocument
	// AccessibleRoleFeed: unused.
	AccessibleRoleFeed
	// AccessibleRoleForm: unused.
	AccessibleRoleForm
	// AccessibleRoleGeneric: unused.
	AccessibleRoleGeneric
	// AccessibleRoleGrid: grid of items.
	AccessibleRoleGrid
	// AccessibleRoleGridCell: item in a grid or tree grid.
	AccessibleRoleGridCell
	// AccessibleRoleGroup: element that groups multiple widgets. GTK uses this
	// role for various containers, like Box, Viewport, and HeaderBar.
	AccessibleRoleGroup
	// AccessibleRoleHeading: unused.
	AccessibleRoleHeading
	// AccessibleRoleImg: image.
	AccessibleRoleImg
	// AccessibleRoleInput: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleInput
	// AccessibleRoleLabel: visible name or caption for a user interface
	// component.
	AccessibleRoleLabel
	// AccessibleRoleLandmark: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleLandmark
	// AccessibleRoleLegend: unused.
	AccessibleRoleLegend
	// AccessibleRoleLink: clickable link.
	AccessibleRoleLink
	// AccessibleRoleList: list of items.
	AccessibleRoleList
	// AccessibleRoleListBox: unused.
	AccessibleRoleListBox
	// AccessibleRoleListItem: item in a list.
	AccessibleRoleListItem
	// AccessibleRoleLog: unused.
	AccessibleRoleLog
	// AccessibleRoleMain: unused.
	AccessibleRoleMain
	// AccessibleRoleMarquee: unused.
	AccessibleRoleMarquee
	// AccessibleRoleMath: unused.
	AccessibleRoleMath
	// AccessibleRoleMeter: element that represents a value within a known
	// range.
	AccessibleRoleMeter
	// AccessibleRoleMenu: menu.
	AccessibleRoleMenu
	// AccessibleRoleMenuBar: menubar.
	AccessibleRoleMenuBar
	// AccessibleRoleMenuItem: item in a menu.
	AccessibleRoleMenuItem
	// AccessibleRoleMenuItemCheckbox: check item in a menu.
	AccessibleRoleMenuItemCheckbox
	// AccessibleRoleMenuItemRadio: radio item in a menu.
	AccessibleRoleMenuItemRadio
	// AccessibleRoleNavigation: unused.
	AccessibleRoleNavigation
	// AccessibleRoleNone: element that is not represented to accessibility
	// technologies.
	AccessibleRoleNone
	// AccessibleRoleNote: unused.
	AccessibleRoleNote
	// AccessibleRoleOption: unused.
	AccessibleRoleOption
	// AccessibleRolePresentation: element that is not represented to
	// accessibility technologies.
	AccessibleRolePresentation
	// AccessibleRoleProgressBar: element that displays the progress status for
	// tasks that take a long time.
	AccessibleRoleProgressBar
	// AccessibleRoleRadio: checkable input in a group of radio roles, only one
	// of which can be checked at a time.
	AccessibleRoleRadio
	// AccessibleRoleRadioGroup: unused.
	AccessibleRoleRadioGroup
	// AccessibleRoleRange: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleRange
	// AccessibleRoleRegion: unused.
	AccessibleRoleRegion
	// AccessibleRoleRow: row in a columned list.
	AccessibleRoleRow
	// AccessibleRoleRowGroup: unused.
	AccessibleRoleRowGroup
	// AccessibleRoleRowHeader: unused.
	AccessibleRoleRowHeader
	// AccessibleRoleScrollbar: graphical object that controls the scrolling of
	// content within a viewing area, regardless of whether the content is fully
	// displayed within the viewing area.
	AccessibleRoleScrollbar
	// AccessibleRoleSearch: unused.
	AccessibleRoleSearch
	// AccessibleRoleSearchBox: type of textbox intended for specifying search
	// criteria.
	AccessibleRoleSearchBox
	// AccessibleRoleSection: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleSection
	// AccessibleRoleSectionHead: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleSectionHead
	// AccessibleRoleSelect: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleSelect
	// AccessibleRoleSeparator: divider that separates and distinguishes
	// sections of content or groups of menuitems.
	AccessibleRoleSeparator
	// AccessibleRoleSlider: user input where the user selects a value from
	// within a given range.
	AccessibleRoleSlider
	// AccessibleRoleSpinButton: form of range that expects the user to select
	// from among discrete choices.
	AccessibleRoleSpinButton
	// AccessibleRoleStatus: unused.
	AccessibleRoleStatus
	// AccessibleRoleStructure: abstract role.
	AccessibleRoleStructure
	// AccessibleRoleSwitch: type of checkbox that represents on/off values,
	// as opposed to checked/unchecked values.
	AccessibleRoleSwitch
	// AccessibleRoleTab: item in a list of tab used for switching pages.
	AccessibleRoleTab
	// AccessibleRoleTable: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTable
	// AccessibleRoleTabList: list of tabs for switching pages.
	AccessibleRoleTabList
	// AccessibleRoleTabPanel: page in a notebook or stack.
	AccessibleRoleTabPanel
	// AccessibleRoleTextBox: type of input that allows free-form text as its
	// value.
	AccessibleRoleTextBox
	// AccessibleRoleTime: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTime
	// AccessibleRoleTimer: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTimer
	// AccessibleRoleToolbar: unused.
	AccessibleRoleToolbar
	// AccessibleRoleTooltip: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTooltip
	// AccessibleRoleTree: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTree
	// AccessibleRoleTreeGrid: treeview-like, columned list.
	AccessibleRoleTreeGrid
	// AccessibleRoleTreeItem: unused.
	AccessibleRoleTreeItem
	// AccessibleRoleWidget: interactive component of a graphical user
	// interface. This is the role that GTK uses by default for widgets.
	AccessibleRoleWidget
	// AccessibleRoleWindow: application window.
	AccessibleRoleWindow
)

func (AccessibleRole) String 

func (a AccessibleRole) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleRole.

type AccessibleSort 

type AccessibleSort C.gint

AccessibleSort: possible values for the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_PROPERTY_SORT accessible property. 

const (
	// AccessibleSortNone: there is no defined sort applied to the column.
	AccessibleSortNone AccessibleSort = iota
	// AccessibleSortAscending items are sorted in ascending order by this
	// column.
	AccessibleSortAscending
	// AccessibleSortDescending items are sorted in descending order by this
	// column.
	AccessibleSortDescending
	// AccessibleSortOther: sort algorithm other than ascending or descending
	// has been applied.
	AccessibleSortOther
)

func (AccessibleSort) String 

func (a AccessibleSort) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleSort.

type AccessibleState 

type AccessibleState C.gint

AccessibleState: possible accessible states of a GtkAccessible. 

const (
	// AccessibleStateBusy: “busy” state. This state has boolean values.
	AccessibleStateBusy AccessibleState = iota
	// AccessibleStateChecked: “checked” state; indicates the current state of a
	// CheckButton. Value type: AccessibleTristate.
	AccessibleStateChecked
	// AccessibleStateDisabled: “disabled” state; corresponds to the
	// Widget:sensitive property on Widget. It indicates a UI element that is
	// perceivable, but not editable or operable. Value type: boolean.
	AccessibleStateDisabled
	// AccessibleStateExpanded: “expanded” state; corresponds to the
	// Expander:expanded property on Expander. Value type: boolean or undefined.
	AccessibleStateExpanded
	// AccessibleStateHidden: “hidden” state; corresponds to the Widget:visible
	// property on Widget. You can use this state explicitly on UI elements that
	// should not be exposed to an assistive technology. Value type: boolean See
	// also: GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_DISABLED.
	AccessibleStateHidden
	// AccessibleStateInvalid: “invalid” state; set when a widget is showing an
	// error. Value type: AccessibleInvalidState.
	AccessibleStateInvalid
	// AccessibleStatePressed: “pressed” state; indicates the current state of a
	// ToggleButton. Value type: AccessibleTristate enumeration.
	AccessibleStatePressed
	// AccessibleStateSelected: “selected” state; set when a widget is selected.
	// Value type: boolean or undefined.
	AccessibleStateSelected
)

func (AccessibleState) String 

func (a AccessibleState) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleState.

type AccessibleTristate 

type AccessibleTristate C.gint

AccessibleTristate: possible values for the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_PRESSED accessible state.

Note that the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_FALSE and GTK_ACCESSIBLE_TRISTATE_TRUE have the same values as FALSE and TRUE. 

const (
	// AccessibleTristateFalse: state is false.
	AccessibleTristateFalse AccessibleTristate = iota
	// AccessibleTristateTrue: state is true.
	AccessibleTristateTrue
	// AccessibleTristateMixed: state is mixed.
	AccessibleTristateMixed
)

func (AccessibleTristate) String 

func (a AccessibleTristate) String() string

String returns the name in string for AccessibleTristate.

type Accessibler 

type Accessibler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// AccessibleRole retrieves the GtkAccessibleRole for the given
	// GtkAccessible.
	AccessibleRole() AccessibleRole
	// ResetProperty resets the accessible property to its default value.
	ResetProperty(property AccessibleProperty)
	// ResetRelation resets the accessible relation to its default value.
	ResetRelation(relation AccessibleRelation)
	// ResetState resets the accessible state to its default value.
	ResetState(state AccessibleState)
	// UpdateProperty updates an array of accessible properties.
	UpdateProperty(properties []AccessibleProperty, values []coreglib.Value)
	// UpdateRelation updates an array of accessible relations.
	UpdateRelation(relations []AccessibleRelation, values []coreglib.Value)
	// UpdateState updates an array of accessible states.
	UpdateState(states []AccessibleState, values []coreglib.Value)
}

Accessibler describes Accessible's interface methods.

type ActionBar 

type ActionBar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ActionBar: GtkActionBar is designed to present contextual actions.

!An example GtkActionBar (action-bar.png)

It is expected to be displayed below the content and expand horizontally to fill the area.

It allows placing children at the start or the end. In addition, it contains an internal centered box which is centered with respect to the full width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.

CSS nodes

GtkActionBar has a single CSS node with name actionbar.

func NewActionBar 

func NewActionBar() *ActionBar

NewActionBar creates a new GtkActionBar widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • actionBar: new GtkActionBar.

func (*ActionBar) CenterWidget 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) CenterWidget() Widgetter

CenterWidget retrieves the center bar widget of the bar.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): center GtkWidget or NULL.

func (*ActionBar) PackEnd 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) PackEnd(child Widgetter)

PackEnd adds child to action_bar, packed with reference to the end of the action_bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to be added to action_bar.

func (*ActionBar) PackStart 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) PackStart(child Widgetter)

PackStart adds child to action_bar, packed with reference to the start of the action_bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to be added to action_bar.

func (*ActionBar) Remove 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from action_bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to be removed.

func (*ActionBar) Revealed 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) Revealed() bool

Revealed gets whether the contents of the action bar are revealed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: current value of the gtk.ActionBar:revealed property.

func (*ActionBar) SetCenterWidget 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) SetCenterWidget(centerWidget Widgetter)

SetCenterWidget sets the center widget for the GtkActionBar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • centerWidget (optional): widget to use for the center.

func (*ActionBar) SetRevealed 

func (actionBar *ActionBar) SetRevealed(revealed bool)

SetRevealed reveals or conceals the content of the action bar.

Note: this does not show or hide action_bar in the gtk.Widget:visible sense, so revealing has no effect if the action bar is hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • revealed: new value of the property.

type Actionable 

type Actionable struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Actionable: GtkActionable interface provides a convenient way of asscociating widgets with actions.

It primarily consists of two properties: gtk.Actionable:action-name and gtk.Actionable:action-target. There are also some convenience APIs for setting these properties.

The action will be looked up in action groups that are found among the widgets ancestors. Most commonly, these will be the actions with the “win.” or “app.” prefix that are associated with the GtkApplicationWindow or GtkApplication, but other action groups that are added with gtk.Widget.InsertActionGroup() will be consulted as well.

Actionable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Actionable) ActionName 

func (actionable *Actionable) ActionName() string

ActionName gets the action name for actionable.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): action name, or NULL if none is set.

func (*Actionable) ActionTargetValue 

func (actionable *Actionable) ActionTargetValue() *glib.Variant

ActionTargetValue gets the current target value of actionable.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant (optional): current target value.

func (*Actionable) SetActionName 

func (actionable *Actionable) SetActionName(actionName string)

SetActionName specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be associated.

If action_name is NULL then the widget will be unassociated from any previous action.

Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be located) within the hierarchy of a GtkApplicationWindow.

Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the containing GtkApplicationWindow or its associated GtkApplication, respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the GMenu associated with the window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actionName (optional): action name, or NULL.

func (*Actionable) SetActionTargetValue 

func (actionable *Actionable) SetActionTargetValue(targetValue *glib.Variant)

SetActionTargetValue sets the target value of an actionable widget.

If target_value is NULL then the target value is unset.

The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the parameter to activation of the action associated with the GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state is equal to the given target.

Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a GAction with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button will be associated with the same action, but with a different target value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets, rendered inactive).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • targetValue (optional) to set as the target value, or NULL.

func (*Actionable) SetDetailedActionName 

func (actionable *Actionable) SetDetailedActionName(detailedActionName string)

SetDetailedActionName sets the action-name and associated string target value of an actionable widget.

detailed_action_name is a string in the format accepted by g_action_parse_detailed_name().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • detailedActionName: detailed action name.

type ActionableInterface added in v0.0.5 

type ActionableInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ActionableInterface: interface vtable for GtkActionable.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type Actionabler 

type Actionabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// ActionName gets the action name for actionable.
	ActionName() string
	// ActionTargetValue gets the current target value of actionable.
	ActionTargetValue() *glib.Variant
	// SetActionName specifies the name of the action with which this widget
	// should be associated.
	SetActionName(actionName string)
	// SetActionTargetValue sets the target value of an actionable widget.
	SetActionTargetValue(targetValue *glib.Variant)
	// SetDetailedActionName sets the action-name and associated string target
	// value of an actionable widget.
	SetDetailedActionName(detailedActionName string)
}

Actionabler describes Actionable's interface methods.

type ActivateAction 

type ActivateAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ActivateAction: GtkShortcutAction that calls gtk_widget_activate().

func ActivateActionGet 

func ActivateActionGet() *ActivateAction

ActivateActionGet gets the activate action.

This is an action that calls gtk_widget_activate() on the given widget upon activation.

The function returns the following values:

  • activateAction: activate action.

type Adjustment 

type Adjustment struct {
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Adjustment: GtkAdjustment is a model for a numeric value.

The `GtkAdjustment has an associated lower and upper bound. It also contains step and page increments, and a page size.

Adjustments are used within several GTK widgets, including gtk.SpinButton, gtk.Viewport, gtk.Scrollbar and gtk.Scale.

The GtkAdjustment object does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of the GtkAdjustment to control the value.

func NewAdjustment 

func NewAdjustment(value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize float64) *Adjustment

NewAdjustment creates a new GtkAdjustment.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: initial value.
  • lower: minimum value.
  • upper: maximum value.
  • stepIncrement: step increment.
  • pageIncrement: page increment.
  • pageSize: page size.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: new GtkAdjustment.

func (*Adjustment) ClampPage 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) ClampPage(lower, upper float64)

ClampPage updates the value property to ensure that the range between lower and upper is in the current page.

The current page goes from value to value + page-size. If the range is larger than the page size, then only the start of it will be in the current page.

A gtk.Adjustment::value-changed signal will be emitted if the value is changed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lower value.
  • upper value.

func (*Adjustment) Configure 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) Configure(value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize float64)

Configure sets all properties of the adjustment at once.

Use this function to avoid multiple emissions of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal. See gtk.Adjustment.SetLower() for an alternative way of compressing multiple emissions of gtk.Adjustment::changed into one.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: new value.
  • lower: new minimum value.
  • upper: new maximum value.
  • stepIncrement: new step increment.
  • pageIncrement: new page increment.
  • pageSize: new page size.

func (*Adjustment) ConnectChanged 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when one or more of the GtkAdjustment properties have been changed.

Note that the gtk.Adjustment:value property is covered by the gtk.Adjustment::value-changed signal.

func (*Adjustment) ConnectValueChanged 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) ConnectValueChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectValueChanged is emitted when the value has been changed.

func (*Adjustment) Lower 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) Lower() float64

Lower retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current minimum value of the adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) MinimumIncrement 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) MinimumIncrement() float64

MinimumIncrement gets the smaller of step increment and page increment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: minimum increment of adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) PageIncrement 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) PageIncrement() float64

PageIncrement retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current page increment of the adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) PageSize 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) PageSize() float64

PageSize retrieves the page size of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current page size of the adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) SetLower 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetLower(lower float64)

SetLower sets the minimum value of the adjustment.

When setting multiple adjustment properties via their individual setters, multiple gtk.Adjustment::changed signals will be emitted. However, since the emission of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal is tied to the emission of the ::notify signals of the changed properties, it’s possible to compress the gtk.Adjustment::changed signals into one by calling g_object_freeze_notify() and g_object_thaw_notify() around the calls to the individual setters.

Alternatively, using a single g_object_set() for all the properties to change, or using gtk.Adjustment.Configure() has the same effect.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lower: new minimum value.

func (*Adjustment) SetPageIncrement 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetPageIncrement(pageIncrement float64)

SetPageIncrement sets the page increment of the adjustment.

See gtk.Adjustment.SetLower() about how to compress multiple emissions of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal when setting multiple adjustment properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageIncrement: new page increment.

func (*Adjustment) SetPageSize 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetPageSize(pageSize float64)

SetPageSize sets the page size of the adjustment.

See gtk.Adjustment.SetLower() about how to compress multiple emissions of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal when setting multiple adjustment properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageSize: new page size.

func (*Adjustment) SetStepIncrement 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetStepIncrement(stepIncrement float64)

SetStepIncrement sets the step increment of the adjustment.

See gtk.Adjustment.SetLower() about how to compress multiple emissions of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal when setting multiple adjustment properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stepIncrement: new step increment.

func (*Adjustment) SetUpper 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetUpper(upper float64)

SetUpper sets the maximum value of the adjustment.

Note that values will be restricted by upper - page-size if the page-size property is nonzero.

See gtk.Adjustment.SetLower() about how to compress multiple emissions of the gtk.Adjustment::changed signal when setting multiple adjustment properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • upper: new maximum value.

func (*Adjustment) SetValue 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) SetValue(value float64)

SetValue sets the GtkAdjustment value.

The value is clamped to lie between gtk.Adjustment:lower and gtk.Adjustment:upper.

Note that for adjustments which are used in a GtkScrollbar, the effective range of allowed values goes from gtk.Adjustment:lower to gtk.Adjustment:upper - gtk.Adjustment:page-size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: new value.

func (*Adjustment) StepIncrement 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) StepIncrement() float64

StepIncrement retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current step increment of the adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) Upper 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) Upper() float64

Upper retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current maximum value of the adjustment.

func (*Adjustment) Value 

func (adjustment *Adjustment) Value() float64

Value gets the current value of the adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current value of the adjustment.

type AdjustmentClass added in v0.0.5 

type AdjustmentClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AdjustmentClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type AdjustmentOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type AdjustmentOverrides struct {
	Changed      func()
	ValueChanged func()
}

AdjustmentOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Align 

type Align C.gint

Align controls how a widget deals with extra space in a single dimension.

Alignment only matters if the widget receives a “too large” allocation, for example if you packed the widget with the gtk.Widget:hexpand property inside a GtkBox, then the widget might get extra space. If you have for example a 16x16 icon inside a 32x32 space, the icon could be scaled and stretched, it could be centered, or it could be positioned to one side of the space.

Note that in horizontal context GTK_ALIGN_START and GTK_ALIGN_END are interpreted relative to text direction.

GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE support is optional for containers and widgets, and it is only supported for vertical alignment. When it's not supported by a child or a container it is treated as GTK_ALIGN_FILL. 

const (
	// AlignFill: stretch to fill all space if possible, center if no meaningful
	// way to stretch.
	AlignFill Align = iota
	// AlignStart: snap to left or top side, leaving space on right or bottom.
	AlignStart
	// AlignEnd: snap to right or bottom side, leaving space on left or top.
	AlignEnd
	// AlignCenter: center natural width of widget inside the allocation.
	AlignCenter
	// AlignBaseline: align the widget according to the baseline. See Widget.
	AlignBaseline
)

func (Align) String 

func (a Align) String() string

String returns the name in string for Align.

type Allocation 

type Allocation = gdk.Rectangle

Allocation: rectangle representing the area allocated for a widget by its parent.

type AlternativeTrigger 

type AlternativeTrigger struct {
	ShortcutTrigger
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AlternativeTrigger: GtkShortcutTrigger that combines two triggers.

The GtkAlternativeTrigger triggers when either of two trigger.

This can be cascaded to combine more than two triggers.

func NewAlternativeTrigger 

func NewAlternativeTrigger(first, second ShortcutTriggerer) *AlternativeTrigger

NewAlternativeTrigger creates a GtkShortcutTrigger that will trigger whenever either of the two given triggers gets triggered.

Note that nesting is allowed, so if you want more than two alternative, create a new alternative trigger for each option.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • first trigger that may trigger.
  • second trigger that may trigger.

The function returns the following values:

  • alternativeTrigger: new GtkShortcutTrigger.

func (*AlternativeTrigger) First 

func (self *AlternativeTrigger) First() ShortcutTriggerer

First gets the first of the two alternative triggers that may trigger self.

gtk.AlternativeTrigger.GetSecond() will return the other one.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutTrigger: first alternative trigger.

func (*AlternativeTrigger) Second 

func (self *AlternativeTrigger) Second() ShortcutTriggerer

Second gets the second of the two alternative triggers that may trigger self.

gtk.AlternativeTrigger.GetFirst() will return the other one.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutTrigger: second alternative trigger.

type AnyFilter 

type AnyFilter struct {
	MultiFilter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AnyFilter: GtkAnyFilter matches an item when at least one of its filters matches.

To add filters to a GtkAnyFilter, use gtk.MultiFilter.Append().

func NewAnyFilter 

func NewAnyFilter() *AnyFilter

NewAnyFilter creates a new empty "any" filter.

Use gtk.MultiFilter.Append() to add filters to it.

This filter matches an item if any of the filters added to it matches the item. In particular, this means that if no filter has been added to it, the filter matches no item.

The function returns the following values:

  • anyFilter: new GtkAnyFilter.

type AppChooser 

type AppChooser struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AppChooser: GtkAppChooser is an interface for widgets which allow the user to choose an application.

The main objects that implement this interface are gtk.AppChooserWidget, gtk.AppChooserDialog and gtk.AppChooserButton.

Applications are represented by GIO GAppInfo objects here. GIO has a concept of recommended and fallback applications for a given content type. Recommended applications are those that claim to handle the content type itself, while fallback also includes applications that handle a more generic content type. GIO also knows the default and last-used application for a given content type. The GtkAppChooserWidget provides detailed control over whether the shown list of applications should include default, recommended or fallback applications.

To obtain the application that has been selected in a GtkAppChooser, use gtk.AppChooser.GetAppInfo().

AppChooser wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*AppChooser) AppInfo 

func (self *AppChooser) AppInfo() *gio.AppInfo

AppInfo returns the currently selected application.

The function returns the following values:

  • appInfo (optional): GAppInfo for the currently selected application, or NULL if none is selected. Free with g_object_unref().

func (*AppChooser) ContentType 

func (self *AppChooser) ContentType() string

ContentType returns the content type for which the GtkAppChooser shows applications.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: content type of self. Free with g_free().

func (*AppChooser) Refresh 

func (self *AppChooser) Refresh()

Refresh reloads the list of applications.

type AppChooserButton 

type AppChooserButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	AppChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AppChooserButton: GtkAppChooserButton lets the user select an application.

!An example GtkAppChooserButton (appchooserbutton.png)

Initially, a GtkAppChooserButton selects the first application in its list, which will either be the most-recently used application or, if gtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item is TRUE, the default application.

The list of applications shown in a GtkAppChooserButton includes the recommended applications for the given content type. When gtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item is set, the default application is also included. To let the user chooser other applications, you can set the gtk.AppChooserButton:show-dialog-item property, which allows to open a full gtk.AppChooserDialog.

It is possible to add custom items to the list, using gtk.AppChooserButton.AppendCustomItem(). These items cause the gtk.AppChooserButton::custom-item-activated signal to be emitted when they are selected.

To track changes in the selected application, use the gtk.AppChooserButton::changed signal.

CSS nodes

GtkAppChooserButton has a single CSS node with the name “appchooserbutton”.

func NewAppChooserButton 

func NewAppChooserButton(contentType string) *AppChooserButton

NewAppChooserButton creates a new GtkAppChooserButton for applications that can handle content of the given type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contentType: content type to show applications for.

The function returns the following values:

  • appChooserButton: newly created GtkAppChooserButton.

func (*AppChooserButton) AppendCustomItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) AppendCustomItem(name, label string, icon gio.Iconner)

AppendCustomItem appends a custom item to the list of applications that is shown in the popup.

The item name must be unique per-widget. Clients can use the provided name as a detail for the gtk.AppChooserButton::custom-item-activated signal, to add a callback for the activation of a particular custom item in the list.

See also gtk.AppChooserButton.AppendSeparator().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the custom item.
  • label for the custom item.
  • icon for the custom item.

func (*AppChooserButton) AppendSeparator 

func (self *AppChooserButton) AppendSeparator()

AppendSeparator appends a separator to the list of applications that is shown in the popup.

func (*AppChooserButton) ConnectChanged 

func (self *AppChooserButton) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when the active application changes.

func (*AppChooserButton) ConnectCustomItemActivated 

func (self *AppChooserButton) ConnectCustomItemActivated(f func(itemName string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCustomItemActivated is emitted when a custom item is activated.

Use gtk.AppChooserButton.AppendCustomItem(), to add custom items.

func (*AppChooserButton) Heading 

func (self *AppChooserButton) Heading() string

Heading returns the text to display at the top of the dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text to display at the top of the dialog, or NULL, in which case a default text is displayed.

func (*AppChooserButton) Modal 

func (self *AppChooserButton) Modal() bool

Modal gets whether the dialog is modal.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the dialog is modal.

func (*AppChooserButton) SetActiveCustomItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) SetActiveCustomItem(name string)

SetActiveCustomItem selects a custom item.

See gtk.AppChooserButton.AppendCustomItem().

Use gtk.AppChooser.Refresh() to bring the selection to its initial state.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the custom item.

func (*AppChooserButton) SetHeading 

func (self *AppChooserButton) SetHeading(heading string)

SetHeading sets the text to display at the top of the dialog.

If the heading is not set, the dialog displays a default text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • heading: string containing Pango markup.

func (*AppChooserButton) SetModal 

func (self *AppChooserButton) SetModal(modal bool)

SetModal sets whether the dialog should be modal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modal: TRUE to make the dialog modal.

func (*AppChooserButton) SetShowDefaultItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) SetShowDefaultItem(setting bool)

SetShowDefaultItem sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show the default application for the given content type at top.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item.

func (*AppChooserButton) SetShowDialogItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) SetShowDialogItem(setting bool)

SetShowDialogItem sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show an entry to trigger a GtkAppChooserDialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserButton:show-dialog-item.

func (*AppChooserButton) ShowDefaultItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) ShowDefaultItem() bool

ShowDefaultItem returns whether the dropdown menu should show the default application at the top.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item.

func (*AppChooserButton) ShowDialogItem 

func (self *AppChooserButton) ShowDialogItem() bool

ShowDialogItem returns whether the dropdown menu shows an item for a GtkAppChooserDialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserButton:show-dialog-item.

type AppChooserDialog 

type AppChooserDialog struct {
	Dialog

	*coreglib.Object
	AppChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AppChooserDialog: GtkAppChooserDialog shows a GtkAppChooserWidget inside a GtkDialog.

!An example GtkAppChooserDialog (appchooserdialog.png)

Note that GtkAppChooserDialog does not have any interesting methods of its own. Instead, you should get the embedded GtkAppChooserWidget using gtk.AppChooserDialog.GetWidget() and call its methods if the generic gtk.AppChooser interface is not sufficient for your needs.

To set the heading that is shown above the GtkAppChooserWidget, use gtk.AppChooserDialog.SetHeading().

func NewAppChooserDialog 

func NewAppChooserDialog(parent *Window, flags DialogFlags, file gio.Filer) *AppChooserDialog

NewAppChooserDialog creates a new GtkAppChooserDialog for the provided GFile.

The dialog will show applications that can open the file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): GtkWindow, or NULL.
  • flags for this dialog.
  • file: GFile.

The function returns the following values:

  • appChooserDialog: newly created GtkAppChooserDialog.

func NewAppChooserDialogForContentType 

func NewAppChooserDialogForContentType(parent *Window, flags DialogFlags, contentType string) *AppChooserDialog

NewAppChooserDialogForContentType creates a new GtkAppChooserDialog for the provided content type.

The dialog will show applications that can open the content type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): GtkWindow, or NULL.
  • flags for this dialog.
  • contentType: content type string.

The function returns the following values:

  • appChooserDialog: newly created GtkAppChooserDialog.

func (*AppChooserDialog) Heading 

func (self *AppChooserDialog) Heading() string

Heading returns the text to display at the top of the dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text to display at the top of the dialog, or NULL, in which case a default text is displayed.

func (*AppChooserDialog) SetHeading 

func (self *AppChooserDialog) SetHeading(heading string)

SetHeading sets the text to display at the top of the dialog.

If the heading is not set, the dialog displays a default text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • heading: string containing Pango markup.

func (*AppChooserDialog) Widget 

func (self *AppChooserDialog) Widget() Widgetter

Widget returns the GtkAppChooserWidget of this dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: GtkAppChooserWidget of self.

type AppChooserWidget 

type AppChooserWidget struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	AppChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AppChooserWidget: GtkAppChooserWidget is a widget for selecting applications.

It is the main building block for gtk.AppChooserDialog. Most applications only need to use the latter; but you can use this widget as part of a larger widget if you have special needs.

GtkAppChooserWidget offers detailed control over what applications are shown, using the gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-default, gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-recommended, gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-fallback, gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-other and gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-all properties. See the gtk.AppChooser documentation for more information about these groups of applications.

To keep track of the selected application, use the gtk.AppChooserWidget::application-selected and gtk.AppChooserWidget::application-activated signals.

CSS nodes

GtkAppChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name appchooser.

func NewAppChooserWidget 

func NewAppChooserWidget(contentType string) *AppChooserWidget

NewAppChooserWidget creates a new GtkAppChooserWidget for applications that can handle content of the given type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contentType: content type to show applications for.

The function returns the following values:

  • appChooserWidget: newly created GtkAppChooserWidget.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ConnectApplicationActivated 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ConnectApplicationActivated(f func(application gio.AppInfor)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectApplicationActivated is emitted when an application item is activated from the widget's list.

This usually happens when the user double clicks an item, or an item is selected and the user presses one of the keys Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ConnectApplicationSelected 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ConnectApplicationSelected(f func(application gio.AppInfor)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectApplicationSelected is emitted when an application item is selected from the widget's list.

func (*AppChooserWidget) DefaultText 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) DefaultText() string

DefaultText returns the text that is shown if there are not applications that can handle the content type.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:default-text.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetDefaultText 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetDefaultText(text string)

SetDefaultText sets the text that is shown if there are not applications that can handle the content type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:default-text.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetShowAll 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetShowAll(setting bool)

SetShowAll sets whether the app chooser should show all applications in a flat list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-all.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetShowDefault 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetShowDefault(setting bool)

SetShowDefault sets whether the app chooser should show the default handler for the content type in a separate section.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-default.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetShowFallback 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetShowFallback(setting bool)

SetShowFallback sets whether the app chooser should show related applications for the content type in a separate section.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-fallback.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetShowOther 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetShowOther(setting bool)

SetShowOther sets whether the app chooser should show applications which are unrelated to the content type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-other.

func (*AppChooserWidget) SetShowRecommended 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) SetShowRecommended(setting bool)

SetShowRecommended sets whether the app chooser should show recommended applications for the content type in a separate section.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value for gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-recommended.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ShowAll 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ShowAll() bool

ShowAll gets whether the app chooser should show all applications in a flat list.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-all.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ShowDefault 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ShowDefault() bool

ShowDefault gets whether the app chooser should show the default handler for the content type in a separate section.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-default.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ShowFallback 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ShowFallback() bool

ShowFallback gets whether the app chooser should show related applications for the content type in a separate section.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-fallback.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ShowOther 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ShowOther() bool

ShowOther gets whether the app chooser should show applications which are unrelated to the content type.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-other.

func (*AppChooserWidget) ShowRecommended 

func (self *AppChooserWidget) ShowRecommended() bool

ShowRecommended gets whether the app chooser should show recommended applications for the content type in a separate section.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of gtk.AppChooserWidget:show-recommended.

type AppChooserer 

type AppChooserer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// AppInfo returns the currently selected application.
	AppInfo() *gio.AppInfo
	// ContentType returns the content type for which the GtkAppChooser shows
	// applications.
	ContentType() string
	// Refresh reloads the list of applications.
	Refresh()
}

AppChooserer describes AppChooser's interface methods.

type Application 

type Application struct {
	gio.Application
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Application: GtkApplication is a high-level API for writing applications.

It supports many aspects of writing a GTK application in a convenient fashion, without enforcing a one-size-fits-all model.

Currently, GtkApplication handles GTK initialization, application uniqueness, session management, provides some basic scriptability and desktop shell integration by exporting actions and menus and manages a list of toplevel windows whose life-cycle is automatically tied to the life-cycle of your application.

While GtkApplication works fine with plain gtk.Windows, it is recommended to use it together with gtk.ApplicationWindow.

Automatic resources

GtkApplication will automatically load menus from the GtkBuilder resource located at "gtk/menus.ui", relative to the application's resource base path (see g_application_set_resource_base_path()). The menu with the ID "menubar" is taken as the application's menubar. Additional menus (most interesting submenus) can be named and accessed via gtk.Application.GetMenuByID() which allows for dynamic population of a part of the menu structure.

It is also possible to provide the menubar manually using gtk.Application.SetMenubar().

GtkApplication will also automatically setup an icon search path for the default icon theme by appending "icons" to the resource base path. This allows your application to easily store its icons as resources. See gtk.IconTheme.AddResourcePath() for more information.

If there is a resource located at "gtk/help-overlay.ui" which defines a gtk.ShortcutsWindow with ID "help_overlay" then GtkApplication associates an instance of this shortcuts window with each gtk.ApplicationWindow and sets up the keyboard accelerator <kbd>Control</kbd>+<kbd>?</kbd> to open it. To create a menu item that displays the shortcuts window, associate the item with the action win.show-help-overlay.

A simple application

A simple example (https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/tree/master/examples/bp/bloatpad.c) is available in the GTK source code repository

GtkApplication optionally registers with a session manager of the users session (if you set the gtk.Application:register-session property) and offers various functionality related to the session life-cycle.

An application can block various ways to end the session with the gtk.Application.Inhibit() function. Typical use cases for this kind of inhibiting are long-running, uninterruptible operations, such as burning a CD or performing a disk backup. The session manager may not honor the inhibitor, but it can be expected to inform the user about the negative consequences of ending the session while inhibitors are present.

See Also

HowDoI: Using GtkApplication (https://wiki.gnome.org/HowDoI/GtkApplication), Getting Started with GTK: Basics (getting_started.html#basics).

func NewApplication 

func NewApplication(applicationId string, flags gio.ApplicationFlags) *Application

NewApplication creates a new GtkApplication instance.

When using GtkApplication, it is not necessary to call gtk.Init() manually. It is called as soon as the application gets registered as the primary instance.

Concretely, gtk.Init() is called in the default handler for the GApplication::startup signal. Therefore, GtkApplication subclasses should always chain up in their GApplication::startup handler before using any GTK API.

Note that commandline arguments are not passed to gtk.Init().

If application_id is not NULL, then it must be valid. See g_application_id_is_valid().

If no application ID is given then some features (most notably application uniqueness) will be disabled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • applicationId (optional): application ID.
  • flags: application flags.

The function returns the following values:

  • application: new GtkApplication instance.

func (*Application) AccelsForAction 

func (application *Application) AccelsForAction(detailedActionName string) []string

AccelsForAction gets the accelerators that are currently associated with the given action.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • detailedActionName: detailed action name, specifying an action and target to obtain accelerators for.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: accelerators for detailed_action_name.

func (*Application) ActionsForAccel 

func (application *Application) ActionsForAccel(accel string) []string

ActionsForAccel returns the list of actions (possibly empty) that accel maps to.

Each item in the list is a detailed action name in the usual form.

This might be useful to discover if an accel already exists in order to prevent installation of a conflicting accelerator (from an accelerator editor or a plugin system, for example). Note that having more than one action per accelerator may not be a bad thing and might make sense in cases where the actions never appear in the same context.

In case there are no actions for a given accelerator, an empty array is returned. NULL is never returned.

It is a programmer error to pass an invalid accelerator string.

If you are unsure, check it with gtk.AcceleratorParse() first.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accel: accelerator that can be parsed by gtk.AcceleratorParse().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: NULL-terminated array of actions for accel.

func (*Application) ActiveWindow 

func (application *Application) ActiveWindow() *Window

ActiveWindow gets the “active” window for the application.

The active window is the one that was most recently focused (within the application). This window may not have the focus at the moment if another application has it — this is just the most recently-focused window within this application.

The function returns the following values:

  • window (optional): active window.

func (*Application) AddWindow 

func (application *Application) AddWindow(window *Window)

AddWindow adds a window to application.

This call can only happen after the application has started; typically, you should add new application windows in response to the emission of the GApplication::activate signal.

This call is equivalent to setting the gtk.Window:application property of window to application.

Normally, the connection between the application and the window will remain until the window is destroyed, but you can explicitly remove it with gtk.Application.RemoveWindow().

GTK will keep the application running as long as it has any windows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • window: GtkWindow.

func (*Application) ConnectQueryEnd 

func (application *Application) ConnectQueryEnd(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectQueryEnd is emitted when the session manager is about to end the session.

This signal is only emitted if gtk.Application:register-session is TRUE. Applications can connect to this signal and call gtk.Application.Inhibit() with GTK_APPLICATION_INHIBIT_LOGOUT to delay the end of the session until state has been saved.

func (*Application) ConnectWindowAdded 

func (application *Application) ConnectWindowAdded(f func(window *Window)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectWindowAdded is emitted when a gtk.Window is added to application through gtk.Application.AddWindow().

func (*Application) ConnectWindowRemoved 

func (application *Application) ConnectWindowRemoved(f func(window *Window)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectWindowRemoved is emitted when a gtk.Window is removed from application.

This can happen as a side-effect of the window being destroyed or explicitly through gtk.Application.RemoveWindow().

func (*Application) Inhibit 

func (application *Application) Inhibit(window *Window, flags ApplicationInhibitFlags, reason string) uint

Inhibit: inform the session manager that certain types of actions should be inhibited.

This is not guaranteed to work on all platforms and for all types of actions.

Applications should invoke this method when they begin an operation that should not be interrupted, such as creating a CD or DVD. The types of actions that may be blocked are specified by the flags parameter. When the application completes the operation it should call gtk.Application.Uninhibit() to remove the inhibitor. Note that an application can have multiple inhibitors, and all of them must be individually removed. Inhibitors are also cleared when the application exits.

Applications should not expect that they will always be able to block the action. In most cases, users will be given the option to force the action to take place.

The reason message should be short and to the point.

If window is given, the session manager may point the user to this window to find out more about why the action is inhibited.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • window (optional): GtkWindow.
  • flags: what types of actions should be inhibited.
  • reason (optional): short, human-readable string that explains why these operations are inhibited.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: non-zero cookie that is used to uniquely identify this request. It should be used as an argument to gtk.Application.Uninhibit() in order to remove the request. If the platform does not support inhibiting or the request failed for some reason, 0 is returned.

func (*Application) ListActionDescriptions 

func (application *Application) ListActionDescriptions() []string

ListActionDescriptions lists the detailed action names which have associated accelerators.

See gtk.Application.SetAccelsForAction().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: detailed action names.

func (*Application) MenuByID 

func (application *Application) MenuByID(id string) *gio.Menu

MenuByID gets a menu from automatically loaded resources.

See the section on Automatic resources (class.Application.html#automatic-resources) for more information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id of the menu to look up.

The function returns the following values:

  • menu (optional) gets the menu with the given id from the automatically loaded resources.

func (*Application) Menubar 

func (application *Application) Menubar() gio.MenuModeller

Menubar returns the menu model that has been set with gtk.Application.SetMenubar().

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional): menubar for windows of application.

func (*Application) RemoveWindow 

func (application *Application) RemoveWindow(window *Window)

RemoveWindow: remove a window from application.

If window belongs to application then this call is equivalent to setting the gtk.Window:application property of window to NULL.

The application may stop running as a result of a call to this function, if window was the last window of the application.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • window: GtkWindow.

func (*Application) SetAccelsForAction 

func (application *Application) SetAccelsForAction(detailedActionName string, accels []string)

SetAccelsForAction sets zero or more keyboard accelerators that will trigger the given action.

The first item in accels will be the primary accelerator, which may be displayed in the UI.

To remove all accelerators for an action, use an empty, zero-terminated array for accels.

For the detailed_action_name, see g_action_parse_detailed_name() and g_action_print_detailed_name().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • detailedActionName: detailed action name, specifying an action and target to associate accelerators with.
  • accels: list of accelerators in the format understood by gtk.AcceleratorParse().

func (*Application) SetMenubar 

func (application *Application) SetMenubar(menubar gio.MenuModeller)

SetMenubar sets or unsets the menubar for windows of application.

This is a menubar in the traditional sense.

This can only be done in the primary instance of the application, after it has been registered. GApplication::startup is a good place to call this.

Depending on the desktop environment, this may appear at the top of each window, or at the top of the screen. In some environments, if both the application menu and the menubar are set, the application menu will be presented as if it were the first item of the menubar. Other environments treat the two as completely separate — for example, the application menu may be rendered by the desktop shell while the menubar (if set) remains in each individual window.

Use the base GActionMap interface to add actions, to respond to the user selecting these menu items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • menubar (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*Application) Uninhibit 

func (application *Application) Uninhibit(cookie uint)

Uninhibit removes an inhibitor that has been previously established.

See gtk.Application.Inhibit().

Inhibitors are also cleared when the application exits.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cookie that was returned by gtk.Application.Inhibit().

func (*Application) WindowByID 

func (application *Application) WindowByID(id uint) *Window

WindowByID returns the gtk.ApplicationWindow with the given ID.

The ID of a GtkApplicationWindow can be retrieved with gtk.ApplicationWindow.GetID().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id: identifier number.

The function returns the following values:

  • window (optional) for the given id.

func (*Application) Windows 

func (application *Application) Windows() []*Window

Windows gets a list of the gtk.Window instances associated with application.

The list is sorted by most recently focused window, such that the first element is the currently focused window. (Useful for choosing a parent for a transient window.)

The list that is returned should not be modified in any way. It will only remain valid until the next focus change or window creation or deletion.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: GList of GtkWindow instances.

type ApplicationClass added in v0.0.5 

type ApplicationClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ApplicationClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ApplicationClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (a *ApplicationClass) ParentClass() *gio.ApplicationClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type ApplicationInhibitFlags 

type ApplicationInhibitFlags C.guint

ApplicationInhibitFlags types of user actions that may be blocked by GtkApplication.

See gtk.Application.Inhibit(). 

const (
	// ApplicationInhibitLogout: inhibit ending the user session by logging out
	// or by shutting down the computer.
	ApplicationInhibitLogout ApplicationInhibitFlags = 0b1
	// ApplicationInhibitSwitch: inhibit user switching.
	ApplicationInhibitSwitch ApplicationInhibitFlags = 0b10
	// ApplicationInhibitSuspend: inhibit suspending the session or computer.
	ApplicationInhibitSuspend ApplicationInhibitFlags = 0b100
	// ApplicationInhibitIdle: inhibit the session being marked as idle (and
	// possibly locked).
	ApplicationInhibitIdle ApplicationInhibitFlags = 0b1000
)

func (ApplicationInhibitFlags) Has 

func (a ApplicationInhibitFlags) Has(other ApplicationInhibitFlags) bool

Has returns true if a contains other.

func (ApplicationInhibitFlags) String 

func (a ApplicationInhibitFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for ApplicationInhibitFlags.

type ApplicationOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ApplicationOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	WindowAdded func(window *Window)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	WindowRemoved func(window *Window)
}

ApplicationOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ApplicationWindow 

type ApplicationWindow struct {
	Window

	*coreglib.Object
	gio.ActionGroup
	gio.ActionMap
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ApplicationWindow: GtkApplicationWindow is a GtkWindow subclass that integrates with GtkApplication.

Notably, GtkApplicationWindow can handle an application menubar.

This class implements the GActionGroup and GActionMap interfaces, to let you add window-specific actions that will be exported by the associated gtk.Application, together with its application-wide actions. Window-specific actions are prefixed with the “win.” prefix and application-wide actions are prefixed with the “app.” prefix. Actions must be addressed with the prefixed name when referring to them from a GMenuModel.

Note that widgets that are placed inside a GtkApplicationWindow can also activate these actions, if they implement the gtk.Actionable interface.

The settings gtk.Settings:gtk-shell-shows-app-menu and gtk.Settings:gtk-shell-shows-menubar tell GTK whether the desktop environment is showing the application menu and menubar models outside the application as part of the desktop shell. For instance, on OS X, both menus will be displayed remotely; on Windows neither will be.

If the desktop environment does not display the menubar, then GtkApplicationWindow will automatically show a menubar for it. This behaviour can be overridden with the gtk.ApplicationWindow:show-menubar property. If the desktop environment does not display the application menu, then it will automatically be included in the menubar or in the windows client-side decorations.

See gtk.PopoverMenu for information about the XML language used by GtkBuilder for menu models.

See also: gtk.Application.SetMenubar().

A GtkApplicationWindow with a menubar

The code sample below shows how to set up a GtkApplicationWindow with a menu bar defined on the gtk.Application: 

GtkApplication *app = gtk_application_new ("org.gtk.test", 0);

GtkBuilder *builder = gtk_builder_new_from_string (
    "<interface>"
    "  <menu id='menubar'>"
    "    <submenu>"
    "      <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Edit</attribute>"
    "      <item>"
    "        <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Copy</attribute>"
    "        <attribute name='action'>win.copy</attribute>"
    "      </item>"
    "      <item>"
    "        <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Paste</attribute>"
    "        <attribute name='action'>win.paste</attribute>"
    "      </item>"
    "    </submenu>"
    "  </menu>"
    "</interface>",
    -1);

GMenuModel *menubar = G_MENU_MODEL (gtk_builder_get_object (builder, "menubar"));
gtk_application_set_menubar (GTK_APPLICATION (app), menubar);
g_object_unref (builder);

// ...

GtkWidget *window = gtk_application_window_new (app);.

func NewApplicationWindow 

func NewApplicationWindow(application *Application) *ApplicationWindow

NewApplicationWindow creates a new GtkApplicationWindow.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • application: GtkApplication.

The function returns the following values:

  • applicationWindow: newly created GtkApplicationWindow.

func (*ApplicationWindow) HelpOverlay 

func (window *ApplicationWindow) HelpOverlay() *ShortcutsWindow

HelpOverlay gets the GtkShortcutsWindow that is associated with window.

See gtk.ApplicationWindow.SetHelpOverlay().

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutsWindow (optional): help overlay associated with window, or NULL.

func (*ApplicationWindow) ID 

func (window *ApplicationWindow) ID() uint

ID returns the unique ID of the window. 

If the window has not yet been added to a GtkApplication, returns 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: unique ID for window, or 0 if the window has not yet been added to a GtkApplication.

func (*ApplicationWindow) SetHelpOverlay 

func (window *ApplicationWindow) SetHelpOverlay(helpOverlay *ShortcutsWindow)

SetHelpOverlay associates a shortcuts window with the application window.

Additionally, sets up an action with the name win.show-help-overlay to present it.

window takes responsibility for destroying help_overlay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • helpOverlay (optional): GtkShortcutsWindow.

func (*ApplicationWindow) SetShowMenubar 

func (window *ApplicationWindow) SetShowMenubar(showMenubar bool)

SetShowMenubar sets whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu and menubar as needed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showMenubar: whether to show a menubar when needed.

func (*ApplicationWindow) ShowMenubar 

func (window *ApplicationWindow) ShowMenubar() bool

ShowMenubar returns whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu and menubar as needed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if window will display a menubar when needed.

type ApplicationWindowClass added in v0.0.5 

type ApplicationWindowClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ApplicationWindowClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ApplicationWindowClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (a *ApplicationWindowClass) ParentClass() *WindowClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type ApplicationWindowOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ApplicationWindowOverrides struct {
}

ApplicationWindowOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ArrowType 

type ArrowType C.gint

ArrowType: used to indicate the direction in which an arrow should point. 

const (
	// ArrowUp represents an upward pointing arrow.
	ArrowUp ArrowType = iota
	// ArrowDown represents a downward pointing arrow.
	ArrowDown
	// ArrowLeft represents a left pointing arrow.
	ArrowLeft
	// ArrowRight represents a right pointing arrow.
	ArrowRight
	// ArrowNone: no arrow.
	ArrowNone
)

func (ArrowType) String 

func (a ArrowType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ArrowType.

type AspectFrame 

type AspectFrame struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AspectFrame: GtkAspectFrame preserves the aspect ratio of its child.

The frame can respect the aspect ratio of the child widget, or use its own aspect ratio.

CSS nodes

GtkAspectFrame uses a CSS node with name frame.

func NewAspectFrame 

func NewAspectFrame(xalign, yalign, ratio float32, obeyChild bool) *AspectFrame

NewAspectFrame: create a new GtkAspectFrame.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: horizontal alignment of the child within the parent. Ranges from 0.0 (left aligned) to 1.0 (right aligned).
  • yalign: vertical alignment of the child within the parent. Ranges from 0.0 (top aligned) to 1.0 (bottom aligned).
  • ratio: desired aspect ratio.
  • obeyChild: if TRUE, ratio is ignored, and the aspect ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.

The function returns the following values:

  • aspectFrame: new GtkAspectFrame.

func (*AspectFrame) Child 

func (self *AspectFrame) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of self@.

func (*AspectFrame) ObeyChild 

func (self *AspectFrame) ObeyChild() bool

ObeyChild returns whether the child's size request should override the set aspect ratio of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether to obey the child's size request.

func (*AspectFrame) Ratio 

func (self *AspectFrame) Ratio() float32

Ratio returns the desired aspect ratio of the child.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: desired aspect ratio.

func (*AspectFrame) SetChild 

func (self *AspectFrame) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*AspectFrame) SetObeyChild 

func (self *AspectFrame) SetObeyChild(obeyChild bool)

SetObeyChild sets whether the aspect ratio of the child's size request should override the set aspect ratio of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • obeyChild: if TRUE, ratio is ignored, and the aspect ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.

func (*AspectFrame) SetRatio 

func (self *AspectFrame) SetRatio(ratio float32)

SetRatio sets the desired aspect ratio of the child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ratio: aspect ratio of the child.

func (*AspectFrame) SetXAlign 

func (self *AspectFrame) SetXAlign(xalign float32)

SetXAlign sets the horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: horizontal alignment, from 0.0 (left aligned) to 1.0 (right aligned).

func (*AspectFrame) SetYAlign 

func (self *AspectFrame) SetYAlign(yalign float32)

SetYAlign sets the vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • yalign: horizontal alignment, from 0.0 (top aligned) to 1.0 (bottom aligned).

func (*AspectFrame) XAlign 

func (self *AspectFrame) XAlign() float32

XAlign returns the horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: horizontal alignment.

func (*AspectFrame) YAlign 

func (self *AspectFrame) YAlign() float32

YAlign returns the vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of the GtkAspectFrame.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: vertical alignment.

type Assistant 

type Assistant struct {
	Window
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Assistant: GtkAssistant is used to represent a complex as a series of steps.

!An example GtkAssistant (assistant.png)

Each step consists of one or more pages. GtkAssistant guides the user through the pages, and controls the page flow to collect the data needed for the operation.

GtkAssistant handles which buttons to show and to make sensitive based on page sequence knowledge and the gtk.AssistantPageType of each page in addition to state information like the *completed* and *committed* page statuses.

If you have a case that doesn’t quite fit in GtkAssistants way of handling buttons, you can use the GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM page type and handle buttons yourself.

GtkAssistant maintains a GtkAssistantPage object for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain the GtkAssistantPage for a child with gtk.Assistant.GetPage().

GtkAssistant as GtkBuildable

The GtkAssistant implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the action_area as internal children with the name “action_area”.

To add pages to an assistant in GtkBuilder, simply add it as a child to the GtkAssistant object. If you need to set per-object properties, create a GtkAssistantPage object explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it.

CSS nodes

GtkAssistant has a single CSS node with the name window and style class .assistant.

func NewAssistant 

func NewAssistant() *Assistant

NewAssistant creates a new GtkAssistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • assistant: newly created GtkAssistant.

func (*Assistant) AddActionWidget 

func (assistant *Assistant) AddActionWidget(child Widgetter)

AddActionWidget adds a widget to the action area of a GtkAssistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget.

func (*Assistant) AppendPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) AppendPage(page Widgetter) int

AppendPage appends a page to the assistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting at 0) of the inserted page.

func (*Assistant) Commit 

func (assistant *Assistant) Commit()

Commit erases the visited page history.

GTK will then hide the back button on the current page, and removes the cancel button from subsequent pages.

Use this when the information provided up to the current page is hereafter deemed permanent and cannot be modified or undone. For example, showing a progress page to track a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has clicked apply on a confirmation page.

func (*Assistant) ConnectApply 

func (assistant *Assistant) ConnectApply(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectApply is emitted when the apply button is clicked.

The default behavior of the GtkAssistant is to switch to the page after the current page, unless the current page is the last one.

A handler for the ::apply signal should carry out the actions for which the wizard has collected data. If the action takes a long time to complete, you might consider putting a page of type GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS after the confirmation page and handle this operation within the gtk.Assistant::prepare signal of the progress page.

func (*Assistant) ConnectCancel 

func (assistant *Assistant) ConnectCancel(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCancel is emitted when then the cancel button is clicked.

func (*Assistant) ConnectClose 

func (assistant *Assistant) ConnectClose(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClose is emitted either when the close button of a summary page is clicked, or when the apply button in the last page in the flow (of type GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM) is clicked.

func (*Assistant) ConnectEscape 

func (assistant *Assistant) ConnectEscape(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEscape: action signal for the Escape binding.

func (*Assistant) ConnectPrepare 

func (assistant *Assistant) ConnectPrepare(f func(page Widgetter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPrepare is emitted when a new page is set as the assistant's current page, before making the new page visible.

A handler for this signal can do any preparations which are necessary before showing page.

func (*Assistant) CurrentPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) CurrentPage() int

CurrentPage returns the page number of the current page.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the current page in the assistant, or -1 if the assistant has no pages, or no current page.

func (*Assistant) InsertPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) InsertPage(page Widgetter, position int) int

InsertPage inserts a page in the assistant at a given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page: GtkWidget.
  • position: index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page, or -1 to append the page to the assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the inserted page.

func (*Assistant) NPages 

func (assistant *Assistant) NPages() int

NPages returns the number of pages in the assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of pages in the assistant.

func (*Assistant) NextPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) NextPage()

NextPage: navigate to the next page.

It is a programming error to call this function when there is no next page.

This function is for use when creating pages of the GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM type.

func (*Assistant) NthPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) NthPage(pageNum int) Widgetter

NthPage returns the child widget contained in page number page_num.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of a page in the assistant, or -1 to get the last page.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget, or NULL if page_num is out of bounds.

func (*Assistant) Page 

func (assistant *Assistant) Page(child Widgetter) *AssistantPage

Page returns the GtkAssistantPage object for child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • assistantPage: GtkAssistantPage for child.

func (*Assistant) PageComplete 

func (assistant *Assistant) PageComplete(page Widgetter) bool

PageComplete gets whether page is complete.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if page is complete.

func (*Assistant) PageTitle 

func (assistant *Assistant) PageTitle(page Widgetter) string

PageTitle gets the title for page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: title for page.

func (*Assistant) PageType 

func (assistant *Assistant) PageType(page Widgetter) AssistantPageType

PageType gets the page type of page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.

The function returns the following values:

  • assistantPageType: page type of page.

func (*Assistant) Pages 

func (assistant *Assistant) Pages() *gio.ListModel

Pages gets a list model of the assistant pages.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: list model of the pages.

func (*Assistant) PrependPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) PrependPage(page Widgetter) int

PrependPage prepends a page to the assistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting at 0) of the inserted page.

func (*Assistant) PreviousPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) PreviousPage()

PreviousPage: navigate to the previous visited page.

It is a programming error to call this function when no previous page is available.

This function is for use when creating pages of the GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM type.

func (*Assistant) RemoveActionWidget 

func (assistant *Assistant) RemoveActionWidget(child Widgetter)

RemoveActionWidget removes a widget from the action area of a GtkAssistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget.

func (*Assistant) RemovePage 

func (assistant *Assistant) RemovePage(pageNum int)

RemovePage removes the page_num’s page from assistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of a page in the assistant, or -1 to remove the last page.

func (*Assistant) SetCurrentPage 

func (assistant *Assistant) SetCurrentPage(pageNum int)

SetCurrentPage switches the page to page_num.

Note that this will only be necessary in custom buttons, as the assistant flow can be set with gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of the page to switch to, starting from 0. If negative, the last page will be used. If greater than the number of pages in the assistant, nothing will be done.

func (*Assistant) SetForwardPageFunc 

func (assistant *Assistant) SetForwardPageFunc(pageFunc AssistantPageFunc)

SetForwardPageFunc sets the page forwarding function to be page_func.

This function will be used to determine what will be the next page when the user presses the forward button. Setting page_func to NULL will make the assistant to use the default forward function, which just goes to the next visible page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageFunc (optional): GtkAssistantPageFunc, or NULL to use the default one.

func (*Assistant) SetPageComplete 

func (assistant *Assistant) SetPageComplete(page Widgetter, complete bool)

SetPageComplete sets whether page contents are complete.

This will make assistant update the buttons state to be able to continue the task.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.
  • complete completeness status of the page.

func (*Assistant) SetPageTitle 

func (assistant *Assistant) SetPageTitle(page Widgetter, title string)

SetPageTitle sets a title for page.

The title is displayed in the header area of the assistant when page is the current page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.
  • title: new title for page.

func (*Assistant) SetPageType 

func (assistant *Assistant) SetPageType(page Widgetter, typ AssistantPageType)

SetPageType sets the page type for page.

The page type determines the page behavior in the assistant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • page of assistant.
  • typ: new type for page.

func (*Assistant) UpdateButtonsState 

func (assistant *Assistant) UpdateButtonsState()

UpdateButtonsState forces assistant to recompute the buttons state.

GTK automatically takes care of this in most situations, e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the visibility or completeness of a page changes.

One situation where it can be necessary to call this function is when changing a value on the current page affects the future page flow of the assistant.

type AssistantPage 

type AssistantPage struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

AssistantPage: GtkAssistantPage is an auxiliary object used by `GtkAssistant.

func (*AssistantPage) Child 

func (page *AssistantPage) Child() Widgetter

Child returns the child to which page belongs.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: child to which page belongs.

type AssistantPageFunc 

type AssistantPageFunc func(currentPage int) (gint int)

AssistantPageFunc: type of callback used to calculate the next page in a GtkAssistant.

It’s called both for computing the next page when the user presses the “forward” button and for handling the behavior of the “last” button.

See gtk.Assistant.SetForwardPageFunc().

type AssistantPageType 

type AssistantPageType C.gint

AssistantPageType determines the page role inside a GtkAssistant.

The role is used to handle buttons sensitivity and visibility.

Note that an assistant needs to end its page flow with a page of type GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM, GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_SUMMARY or GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS to be correct.

The Cancel button will only be shown if the page isn’t “committed”. See gtk_assistant_commit() for details. 

const (
	// AssistantPageContent: page has regular contents. Both the Back and
	// forward buttons will be shown.
	AssistantPageContent AssistantPageType = iota
	// AssistantPageIntro: page contains an introduction to the assistant task.
	// Only the Forward button will be shown if there is a next page.
	AssistantPageIntro
	// AssistantPageConfirm: page lets the user confirm or deny the changes.
	// The Back and Apply buttons will be shown.
	AssistantPageConfirm
	// AssistantPageSummary: page informs the user of the changes done. Only the
	// Close button will be shown.
	AssistantPageSummary
	// AssistantPageProgress: used for tasks that take a long time to complete,
	// blocks the assistant until the page is marked as complete. Only the back
	// button will be shown.
	AssistantPageProgress
	// AssistantPageCustom: used for when other page types are not appropriate.
	// No buttons will be shown, and the application must add its own buttons
	// through gtk_assistant_add_action_widget().
	AssistantPageCustom
)

func (AssistantPageType) String 

func (a AssistantPageType) String() string

String returns the name in string for AssistantPageType.

type BaselinePosition 

type BaselinePosition C.gint

BaselinePosition: baseline position in a row of widgets.

Whenever a container has some form of natural row it may align children in that row along a common typographical baseline. If the amount of vertical space in the row is taller than the total requested height of the baseline-aligned children then it can use a GtkBaselinePosition to select where to put the baseline inside the extra available space. 

const (
	// BaselinePositionTop: align the baseline at the top.
	BaselinePositionTop BaselinePosition = iota
	// BaselinePositionCenter: center the baseline.
	BaselinePositionCenter
	// BaselinePositionBottom: align the baseline at the bottom.
	BaselinePositionBottom
)

func (BaselinePosition) String 

func (b BaselinePosition) String() string

String returns the name in string for BaselinePosition.

type BinLayout 

type BinLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BinLayout: GtkBinLayout is a GtkLayoutManager subclass useful for create "bins" of widgets.

GtkBinLayout will stack each child of a widget on top of each other, using the gtk.Widget:hexpand, gtk.Widget:vexpand, gtk.Widget:halign, and gtk.Widget:valign properties of each child to determine where they should be positioned.

func NewBinLayout 

func NewBinLayout() *BinLayout

NewBinLayout creates a new GtkBinLayout instance.

The function returns the following values:

  • binLayout: newly created GtkBinLayout.

type BinLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type BinLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BinLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*BinLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (b *BinLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type BinLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BinLayoutOverrides struct {
}

BinLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Bitset 

type Bitset struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Bitset: GtkBitset represents a set of unsigned integers.

Another name for this data structure is "bitmap".

The current implementation is based on roaring bitmaps (https://roaringbitmap.org/).

A bitset allows adding a set of integers and provides support for set operations like unions, intersections and checks for equality or if a value is contained in the set. GtkBitset also contains various functions to query metadata about the bitset, such as the minimum or maximum values or its size.

The fastest way to iterate values in a bitset is gtk.BitsetIter.

The main use case for GtkBitset is implementing complex selections for gtk.SelectionModel.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewBitsetEmpty 

func NewBitsetEmpty() *Bitset

NewBitsetEmpty constructs a struct Bitset.

func NewBitsetRange 

func NewBitsetRange(start uint, nItems uint) *Bitset

NewBitsetRange constructs a struct Bitset.

func (*Bitset) Add 

func (self *Bitset) Add(value uint) bool

Add adds value to self if it wasn't part of it before.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value to add.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if value was not part of self and self was changed.

func (*Bitset) AddRange 

func (self *Bitset) AddRange(start uint, nItems uint)

AddRange adds all values from start (inclusive) to start + n_items (exclusive) in self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: first value to add.
  • nItems: number of consecutive values to add.

func (*Bitset) AddRangeClosed 

func (self *Bitset) AddRangeClosed(first uint, last uint)

AddRangeClosed adds the closed range [first, last], so first, last and all values in between. first must be smaller than last.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • first value to add.
  • last value to add.

func (*Bitset) AddRectangle 

func (self *Bitset) AddRectangle(start uint, width uint, height uint, stride uint)

AddRectangle interprets the values as a 2-dimensional boolean grid with the given stride and inside that grid, adds a rectangle with the given width and height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: first value to add.
  • width of the rectangle.
  • height of the rectangle.
  • stride: row stride of the grid.

func (*Bitset) Contains 

func (self *Bitset) Contains(value uint) bool

Contains checks if the given value has been added to self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value to check.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self contains value.

func (*Bitset) Copy 

func (self *Bitset) Copy() *Bitset

Copy creates a copy of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • bitset: new bitset that contains the same values as self.

func (*Bitset) Difference 

func (self *Bitset) Difference(other *Bitset)

Difference sets self to be the symmetric difference of self and other.

The symmetric difference is set self to contain all values that were either contained in self or in other, but not in both. This operation is also called an XOR.

It is allowed for self and other to be the same bitset. The bitset will be emptied in that case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other: GtkBitset to compute the difference from.

func (*Bitset) Equals 

func (self *Bitset) Equals(other *Bitset) bool

Equals returns TRUE if self and other contain the same values.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other GtkBitset.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self and other contain the same values.

func (*Bitset) Intersect 

func (self *Bitset) Intersect(other *Bitset)

Intersect sets self to be the intersection of self and other.

In other words, remove all values from self that are not part of other.

It is allowed for self and other to be the same bitset. Nothing will happen in that case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other: GtkBitset to intersect with.

func (*Bitset) IsEmpty 

func (self *Bitset) IsEmpty() bool

IsEmpty: check if no value is contained in bitset.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self is empty.

func (*Bitset) Maximum 

func (self *Bitset) Maximum() uint

Maximum returns the largest value in self.

If self is empty, 0 is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: largest value in self.

func (*Bitset) Minimum 

func (self *Bitset) Minimum() uint

Minimum returns the smallest value in self.

If self is empty, G_MAXUINT is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: smallest value in self.

func (*Bitset) Nth 

func (self *Bitset) Nth(nth uint) uint

Nth returns the value of the nth item in self.

If nth is >= the size of self, 0 is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nth: index of the item to get.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: value of the nth item in self.

func (*Bitset) Remove 

func (self *Bitset) Remove(value uint) bool

Remove removes value from self if it was part of it before.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value to add.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if value was part of self and self was changed.

func (*Bitset) RemoveAll 

func (self *Bitset) RemoveAll()

RemoveAll removes all values from the bitset so that it is empty again.

func (*Bitset) RemoveRange 

func (self *Bitset) RemoveRange(start uint, nItems uint)

RemoveRange removes all values from start (inclusive) to start + n_items (exclusive) in self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: first value to remove.
  • nItems: number of consecutive values to remove.

func (*Bitset) RemoveRangeClosed 

func (self *Bitset) RemoveRangeClosed(first uint, last uint)

RemoveRangeClosed removes the closed range [first, last], so first, last and all values in between. first must be smaller than last.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • first value to remove.
  • last value to remove.

func (*Bitset) RemoveRectangle 

func (self *Bitset) RemoveRectangle(start uint, width uint, height uint, stride uint)

RemoveRectangle interprets the values as a 2-dimensional boolean grid with the given stride and inside that grid, removes a rectangle with the given width and height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: first value to remove.
  • width of the rectangle.
  • height of the rectangle.
  • stride: row stride of the grid.

func (*Bitset) ShiftLeft 

func (self *Bitset) ShiftLeft(amount uint)

ShiftLeft shifts all values in self to the left by amount.

Values smaller than amount are discarded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • amount to shift all values to the left.

func (*Bitset) ShiftRight 

func (self *Bitset) ShiftRight(amount uint)

ShiftRight shifts all values in self to the right by amount.

Values that end up too large to be held in a #guint are discarded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • amount to shift all values to the right.

func (*Bitset) Size 

func (self *Bitset) Size() uint64

Size gets the number of values that were added to the set.

For example, if the set is empty, 0 is returned.

Note that this function returns a guint64, because when all values are set, the return value is G_MAXUINT + 1. Unless you are sure this cannot happen (it can't with GListModel), be sure to use a 64bit type.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint64: number of values in the set.

func (*Bitset) SizeInRange 

func (self *Bitset) SizeInRange(first uint, last uint) uint64

SizeInRange gets the number of values that are part of the set from first to last (inclusive).

Note that this function returns a guint64, because when all values are set, the return value is G_MAXUINT + 1. Unless you are sure this cannot happen (it can't with GListModel), be sure to use a 64bit type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • first element to include.
  • last element to include.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint64: number of values in the set from first to last.

func (*Bitset) Splice 

func (self *Bitset) Splice(position uint, removed uint, added uint)

Splice: this is a support function for GListModel handling, by mirroring the GlistModel::items-changed signal.

First, it "cuts" the values from position to removed from the bitset. That is, it removes all those values and shifts all larger values to the left by removed places.

Then, it "pastes" new room into the bitset by shifting all values larger than position by added spaces to the right. This frees up space that can then be filled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which to slice.
  • removed: number of values to remove.
  • added: number of values to add.

func (*Bitset) Subtract 

func (self *Bitset) Subtract(other *Bitset)

Subtract sets self to be the subtraction of other from self.

In other words, remove all values from self that are part of other.

It is allowed for self and other to be the same bitset. The bitset will be emptied in that case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other: GtkBitset to subtract.

func (*Bitset) Union 

func (self *Bitset) Union(other *Bitset)

Union sets self to be the union of self and other.

That is, add all values from other into self that weren't part of it.

It is allowed for self and other to be the same bitset. Nothing will happen in that case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other: GtkBitset to union with.

type BitsetIter 

type BitsetIter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BitsetIter: opaque, stack-allocated struct for iterating over the elements of a GtkBitset.

Before a GtkBitsetIter can be used, it needs to be initialized with gtk.BitsetIter().InitFirst, gtk.BitsetIter().InitLast or gtk.BitsetIter().InitAt.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func BitsetIterInitAt 

func BitsetIterInitAt(set *Bitset, target uint) (*BitsetIter, uint, bool)

BitsetIterInitAt initializes iter to point to target.

If target is not found, finds the next value after it. If no value >= target exists in set, this function returns FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • set: GtkBitset.
  • target value to start iterating at.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: pointer to an uninitialized GtkBitsetIter.
  • value (optional): set to the found value in set.
  • ok: TRUE if a value was found.

func BitsetIterInitFirst 

func BitsetIterInitFirst(set *Bitset) (*BitsetIter, uint, bool)

BitsetIterInitFirst initializes an iterator for set and points it to the first value in set.

If set is empty, FALSE is returned and value is set to G_MAXUINT.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • set: GtkBitset.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: pointer to an uninitialized GtkBitsetIter.
  • value (optional): set to the first value in set.
  • ok: TRUE if set isn't empty.

func BitsetIterInitLast 

func BitsetIterInitLast(set *Bitset) (*BitsetIter, uint, bool)

BitsetIterInitLast initializes an iterator for set and points it to the last value in set.

If set is empty, FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • set: GtkBitset.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: pointer to an uninitialized GtkBitsetIter.
  • value (optional): set to the last value in set.
  • ok: TRUE if set isn't empty.

func (*BitsetIter) IsValid 

func (iter *BitsetIter) IsValid() bool

IsValid checks if iter points to a valid value.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter points to a valid value.

func (*BitsetIter) Next 

func (iter *BitsetIter) Next() (uint, bool)

Next moves iter to the next value in the set.

If it was already pointing to the last value in the set, FALSE is returned and iter is invalidated.

The function returns the following values:

  • value (optional): set to the next value.
  • ok: TRUE if a next value existed.

func (*BitsetIter) Previous 

func (iter *BitsetIter) Previous() (uint, bool)

Previous moves iter to the previous value in the set.

If it was already pointing to the first value in the set, FALSE is returned and iter is invalidated.

The function returns the following values:

  • value (optional): set to the previous value.
  • ok: TRUE if a previous value existed.

func (*BitsetIter) Value 

func (iter *BitsetIter) Value() uint

Value gets the current value that iter points to.

If iter is not valid and gtk.BitsetIter.IsValid() returns FALSE, this function returns 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: current value pointer to by iter.

type BookmarkList 

type BookmarkList struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BookmarkList: GtkBookmarkList is a list model that wraps GBookmarkFile.

It presents a GListModel and fills it asynchronously with the GFileInfos returned from that function.

The GFileInfos in the list have some attributes in the recent namespace added: recent::private (boolean) and recent:applications (stringv).

func NewBookmarkList 

func NewBookmarkList(filename, attributes string) *BookmarkList

NewBookmarkList creates a new GtkBookmarkList with the given attributes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional): bookmark file to load.
  • attributes (optional) to query.

The function returns the following values:

  • bookmarkList: new GtkBookmarkList.

func (*BookmarkList) Attributes 

func (self *BookmarkList) Attributes() string

Attributes gets the attributes queried on the children.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): queried attributes.

func (*BookmarkList) Filename 

func (self *BookmarkList) Filename() string

Filename returns the filename of the bookmark file that this list is loading.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: filename of the .xbel file.

func (*BookmarkList) IOPriority 

func (self *BookmarkList) IOPriority() int

IOPriority gets the IO priority to use while loading file.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: IO priority.

func (*BookmarkList) IsLoading 

func (self *BookmarkList) IsLoading() bool

IsLoading returns TRUE if the files are currently being loaded.

Files will be added to self from time to time while loading is going on. The order in which are added is undefined and may change in between runs.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self is loading.

func (*BookmarkList) SetAttributes 

func (self *BookmarkList) SetAttributes(attributes string)

SetAttributes sets the attributes to be enumerated and starts the enumeration.

If attributes is NULL, no attributes will be queried, but a list of Infos will still be created.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attributes (optional) to enumerate.

func (*BookmarkList) SetIOPriority 

func (self *BookmarkList) SetIOPriority(ioPriority int)

SetIOPriority sets the IO priority to use while loading files.

The default IO priority is G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ioPriority: IO priority to use.

type BookmarkListClass added in v0.0.5 

type BookmarkListClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BookmarkListClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type BookmarkListOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BookmarkListOverrides struct {
}

BookmarkListOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type BoolFilter 

type BoolFilter struct {
	Filter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BoolFilter: GtkBoolFilter evaluates a boolean GtkExpression to determine whether to include items.

func NewBoolFilter 

func NewBoolFilter(expression Expressioner) *BoolFilter

NewBoolFilter creates a new bool filter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional) to evaluate or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • boolFilter: new GtkBoolFilter.

func (*BoolFilter) Expression 

func (self *BoolFilter) Expression() Expressioner

Expression gets the expression that the filter uses to evaluate if an item should be filtered.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func (*BoolFilter) Invert 

func (self *BoolFilter) Invert() bool

Invert returns whether the filter inverts the expression.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the filter inverts.

func (*BoolFilter) SetExpression 

func (self *BoolFilter) SetExpression(expression Expressioner)

SetExpression sets the expression that the filter uses to check if items should be filtered.

The expression must have a value type of G_TYPE_BOOLEAN.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func (*BoolFilter) SetInvert 

func (self *BoolFilter) SetInvert(invert bool)

SetInvert sets whether the filter should invert the expression.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • invert: TRUE to invert.

type BoolFilterClass added in v0.0.5 

type BoolFilterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BoolFilterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*BoolFilterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (b *BoolFilterClass) ParentClass() *FilterClass

type BoolFilterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BoolFilterOverrides struct {
}

BoolFilterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Border 

type Border struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Border: struct that specifies a border around a rectangular area.

Each side can have different width.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewBorder 

func NewBorder() *Border

NewBorder constructs a struct Border.

func (*Border) Bottom 

func (b *Border) Bottom() int16

Bottom: width of the bottom border.

func (*Border) Copy 

func (border_ *Border) Copy() *Border

Copy copies a Border-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • border: copy of border_.

func (*Border) Left 

func (b *Border) Left() int16

Left: width of the left border.

func (*Border) Right 

func (b *Border) Right() int16

Right: width of the right border.

func (*Border) SetBottom 

func (b *Border) SetBottom(bottom int16)

Bottom: width of the bottom border.

func (*Border) SetLeft 

func (b *Border) SetLeft(left int16)

Left: width of the left border.

func (*Border) SetRight 

func (b *Border) SetRight(right int16)

Right: width of the right border.

func (*Border) SetTop 

func (b *Border) SetTop(top int16)

Top: width of the top border.

func (*Border) Top 

func (b *Border) Top() int16

Top: width of the top border.

type BorderStyle 

type BorderStyle C.gint

BorderStyle describes how the border of a UI element should be rendered. 

const (
	// BorderStyleNone: no visible border.
	BorderStyleNone BorderStyle = iota
	// BorderStyleHidden: same as GTK_BORDER_STYLE_NONE.
	BorderStyleHidden
	// BorderStyleSolid: single line segment.
	BorderStyleSolid
	// BorderStyleInset looks as if the content is sunken into the canvas.
	BorderStyleInset
	// BorderStyleOutset looks as if the content is coming out of the canvas.
	BorderStyleOutset
	// BorderStyleDotted series of round dots.
	BorderStyleDotted
	// BorderStyleDashed series of square-ended dashes.
	BorderStyleDashed
	// BorderStyleDouble: two parallel lines with some space between them.
	BorderStyleDouble
	// BorderStyleGroove looks as if it were carved in the canvas.
	BorderStyleGroove
	// BorderStyleRidge looks as if it were coming out of the canvas.
	BorderStyleRidge
)

func (BorderStyle) String 

func (b BorderStyle) String() string

String returns the name in string for BorderStyle.

type Box 

type Box struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Box: GtkBox widget arranges child widgets into a single row or column.

!An example GtkBox (box.png)

Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its gtk.Orientable:orientation property. Within the other dimension, all children are allocated the same size. Of course, the gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties can be used on the children to influence their allocation.

Use repeated calls to gtk.Box.Append() to pack widgets into a GtkBox from start to end. Use gtk.Box.Remove() to remove widgets from the GtkBox. gtk.Box.InsertChildAfter() can be used to add a child at a particular position.

Use gtk.Box.SetHomogeneous() to specify whether or not all children of the GtkBox are forced to get the same amount of space.

Use gtk.Box.SetSpacing() to determine how much space will be minimally placed between all children in the GtkBox. Note that spacing is added *between* the children.

Use gtk.Box.ReorderChildAfter() to move a child to a different place in the box.

CSS nodes

GtkBox uses a single CSS node with name box.

Accessibility

GtkBox uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewBox 

func NewBox(orientation Orientation, spacing int) *Box

NewBox creates a new GtkBox.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation box’s orientation.
  • spacing: number of pixels to place by default between children.

The function returns the following values:

  • box: new GtkBox.

func (*Box) Append 

func (box *Box) Append(child Widgetter)

Append adds child as the last child to box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to append.

func (*Box) BaselinePosition 

func (box *Box) BaselinePosition() BaselinePosition

BaselinePosition gets the value set by gtk_box_set_baseline_position().

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: baseline position.

func (*Box) Homogeneous 

func (box *Box) Homogeneous() bool

Homogeneous returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the same size).

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the box is homogeneous.

func (*Box) InsertChildAfter 

func (box *Box) InsertChildAfter(child, sibling Widgetter)

InsertChildAfter inserts child in the position after sibling in the list of box children.

If sibling is NULL, insert child at the first position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to insert.
  • sibling (optional) after which to insert child.

func (*Box) Prepend 

func (box *Box) Prepend(child Widgetter)

Prepend adds child as the first child to box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to prepend.

func (*Box) Remove 

func (box *Box) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child widget from box.

The child must have been added before with gtk.Box.Append(), gtk.Box.Prepend(), or gtk.Box.InsertChildAfter().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.

func (*Box) ReorderChildAfter 

func (box *Box) ReorderChildAfter(child, sibling Widgetter)

ReorderChildAfter moves child to the position after sibling in the list of box children.

If sibling is NULL, move child to the first position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to move, must be a child of box.
  • sibling (optional) to move child after, or NULL.

func (*Box) SetBaselinePosition 

func (box *Box) SetBaselinePosition(position BaselinePosition)

SetBaselinePosition sets the baseline position of a box.

This affects only horizontal boxes with at least one baseline aligned child. If there is more vertical space available than requested, and the baseline is not allocated by the parent then position is used to allocate the baseline with respect to the extra space available.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: GtkBaselinePosition.

func (*Box) SetHomogeneous 

func (box *Box) SetHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetHomogeneous sets whether or not all children of box are given equal space in the box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: boolean value, TRUE to create equal allotments, FALSE for variable allotments.

func (*Box) SetSpacing 

func (box *Box) SetSpacing(spacing int)

SetSpacing sets the number of pixels to place between children of box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: number of pixels to put between children.

func (*Box) Spacing 

func (box *Box) Spacing() int

Spacing gets the value set by gtk_box_set_spacing().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: spacing between children.

type BoxClass added in v0.0.5 

type BoxClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BoxClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*BoxClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (b *BoxClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type BoxLayout 

type BoxLayout struct {
	LayoutManager

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BoxLayout: GtkBoxLayout is a layout manager that arranges children in a single row or column.

Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its gtk.Orientable:orientation property. Within the other dimension all children all allocated the same size. The GtkBoxLayout will respect the gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties of each child widget.

If you want all children to be assigned the same size, you can use the gtk.BoxLayout:homogeneous property.

If you want to specify the amount of space placed between each child, you can use the gtk.BoxLayout:spacing property.

func NewBoxLayout 

func NewBoxLayout(orientation Orientation) *BoxLayout

NewBoxLayout creates a new GtkBoxLayout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation for the new layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • boxLayout: new box layout.

func (*BoxLayout) BaselinePosition 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) BaselinePosition() BaselinePosition

BaselinePosition gets the value set by gtk_box_layout_set_baseline_position().

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: baseline position.

func (*BoxLayout) Homogeneous 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) Homogeneous() bool

Homogeneous returns whether the layout is set to be homogeneous.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the layout is homogeneous.

func (*BoxLayout) SetBaselinePosition 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) SetBaselinePosition(position BaselinePosition)

SetBaselinePosition sets the baseline position of a box layout.

The baseline position affects only horizontal boxes with at least one baseline aligned child. If there is more vertical space available than requested, and the baseline is not allocated by the parent then the given position is used to allocate the baseline within the extra space available.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: GtkBaselinePosition.

func (*BoxLayout) SetHomogeneous 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) SetHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetHomogeneous sets whether the box layout will allocate the same size to all children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to set the box layout as homogeneous.

func (*BoxLayout) SetSpacing 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) SetSpacing(spacing uint)

SetSpacing sets how much spacing to put between children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing to apply between children.

func (*BoxLayout) Spacing 

func (boxLayout *BoxLayout) Spacing() uint

Spacing returns the space that box_layout puts between children.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: spacing of the layout.

type BoxLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type BoxLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BoxLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*BoxLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (b *BoxLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type BoxLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BoxLayoutOverrides struct {
}

BoxLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type BoxOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BoxOverrides struct {
}

BoxOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Buildable 

type Buildable struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Buildable: GtkBuildable allows objects to extend and customize their deserialization from ui files.

The interface includes methods for setting names and properties of objects, parsing custom tags and constructing child objects.

The GtkBuildable interface is implemented by all widgets and many of the non-widget objects that are provided by GTK. The main user of this interface is gtk.Builder. There should be very little need for applications to call any of these functions directly.

An object only needs to implement this interface if it needs to extend the GtkBuilder XML format or run any extra routines at deserialization time.

Buildable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Buildable) BuildableID 

func (buildable *Buildable) BuildableID() string

BuildableID gets the ID of the buildable object.

GtkBuilder sets the name based on the ID attribute of the <object> tag used to construct the buildable.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: ID of the buildable object.

type BuildableIface added in v0.0.5 

type BuildableIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuildableIface: GtkBuildableIface interface contains methods that are necessary to allow GtkBuilder to construct an object from a GtkBuilder UI definition.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type BuildableParser 

type BuildableParser struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuildableParser: sub-parser for GtkBuildable implementations.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type Buildabler 

type Buildabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// BuildableID gets the ID of the buildable object.
	BuildableID() string
}

Buildabler describes Buildable's interface methods.

type Builder 

type Builder struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Builder: GtkBuilder reads XML descriptions of a user interface and instantiates the described objects.

To create a GtkBuilder from a user interface description, call gtk.Builder.NewFromFile, gtk.Builder.NewFromResource or gtk.Builder.NewFromString.

In the (unusual) case that you want to add user interface descriptions from multiple sources to the same GtkBuilder you can call gtk.Builder.New to get an empty builder and populate it by (multiple) calls to gtk.Builder.AddFromFile(), gtk.Builder.AddFromResource() or gtk.Builder.AddFromString().

A GtkBuilder holds a reference to all objects that it has constructed and drops these references when it is finalized. This finalization can cause the destruction of non-widget objects or widgets which are not contained in a toplevel window. For toplevel windows constructed by a builder, it is the responsibility of the user to call gtk.Window.Destroy() to get rid of them and all the widgets they contain.

The functions gtk.Builder.GetObject() and gtk.Builder.GetObjects() can be used to access the widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description. Toplevel windows returned by these functions will stay around until the user explicitly destroys them with gtk.Window.Destroy(). Other widgets will either be part of a larger hierarchy constructed by the builder (in which case you should not have to worry about their lifecycle), or without a parent, in which case they have to be added to some container to make use of them. Non-widget objects need to be reffed with g_object_ref() to keep them beyond the lifespan of the builder.

GtkBuilder UI Definitions

GtkBuilder parses textual descriptions of user interfaces which are specified in XML format. We refer to these descriptions as “GtkBuilder UI definitions” or just “UI definitions” if the context is clear.

The toplevel element is <interface>. It optionally takes a “domain” attribute, which will make the builder look for translated strings using dgettext() in the domain specified. This can also be done by calling gtk.Builder.SetTranslationDomain() on the builder.

Objects are described by <object> elements, which can contain <property> elements to set properties, <signal> elements which connect signals to handlers, and <child> elements, which describe child objects (most often widgets inside a container, but also e.g. actions in an action group, or columns in a tree model). A <child> element contains an <object> element which describes the child object.

The target toolkit version(s) are described by <requires> elements, the “lib” attribute specifies the widget library in question (currently the only supported value is “gtk”) and the “version” attribute specifies the target version in the form “<major>.<minor>”. GtkBuilder will error out if the version requirements are not met.

Typically, the specific kind of object represented by an <object> element is specified by the “class” attribute. If the type has not been loaded yet, GTK tries to find the get_type() function from the class name by applying heuristics. This works in most cases, but if necessary, it is possible to specify the name of the get_type() function explicitly with the "type-func" attribute.

Objects may be given a name with the “id” attribute, which allows the application to retrieve them from the builder with gtk.Builder.GetObject(). An id is also necessary to use the object as property value in other parts of the UI definition. GTK reserves ids starting and ending with ___ (three consecutive underscores) for its own purposes.

Setting properties of objects is pretty straightforward with the <property> element: the “name” attribute specifies the name of the property, and the content of the element specifies the value. If the “translatable” attribute is set to a true value, GTK uses gettext() (or dgettext() if the builder has a translation domain set) to find a translation for the value. This happens before the value is parsed, so it can be used for properties of any type, but it is probably most useful for string properties. It is also possible to specify a context to disambiguate short strings, and comments which may help the translators.

GtkBuilder can parse textual representations for the most common property types: characters, strings, integers, floating-point numbers, booleans (strings like “TRUE”, “t”, “yes”, “y”, “1” are interpreted as TRUE, strings like “FALSE”, “f”, “no”, “n”, “0” are interpreted as FALSE), enumerations (can be specified by their name, nick or integer value), flags (can be specified by their name, nick, integer value, optionally combined with “|”, e.g. “GTK_INPUT_HINT_EMOJI|GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE”) and colors (in a format understood by gdk.RGBA.Parse()).

GVariants can be specified in the format understood by g_variant_parse(), and pixbufs can be specified as a filename of an image file to load.

Objects can be referred to by their name and by default refer to objects declared in the local XML fragment and objects exposed via gtk.Builder.ExposeObject(). In general, GtkBuilder allows forward references to objects — declared in the local XML; an object doesn’t have to be constructed before it can be referred to. The exception to this rule is that an object has to be constructed before it can be used as the value of a construct-only property.

It is also possible to bind a property value to another object's property value using the attributes "bind-source" to specify the source object of the binding, and optionally, "bind-property" and "bind-flags" to specify the source property and source binding flags respectively. Internally, GtkBuilder implements this using GBinding objects. For more information see g_object_bind_property().

Sometimes it is necessary to refer to widgets which have implicitly been constructed by GTK as part of a composite widget, to set properties on them or to add further children (e.g. the content area of a GtkDialog). This can be achieved by setting the “internal-child” property of the <child> element to a true value. Note that Builder still requires an <object> element for the internal child, even if it has already been constructed.

A number of widgets have different places where a child can be added (e.g. tabs vs. page content in notebooks). This can be reflected in a UI definition by specifying the “type” attribute on a <child> The possible values for the “type” attribute are described in the sections describing the widget-specific portions of UI definitions.

Signal handlers and function pointers

Signal handlers are set up with the <signal> element. The “name” attribute specifies the name of the signal, and the “handler” attribute specifies the function to connect to the signal. The remaining attributes, “after”, “swapped” and “object”, have the same meaning as the corresponding parameters of the g_signal_connect_object() or g_signal_connect_data() functions. A “last_modification_time” attribute is also allowed, but it does not have a meaning to the builder.

If you rely on GModule support to lookup callbacks in the symbol table, the following details should be noted:

When compiling applications for Windows, you must declare signal callbacks with G_MODULE_EXPORT, or they will not be put in the symbol table. On Linux and Unix, this is not necessary; applications should instead be compiled with the -Wl,--export-dynamic CFLAGS, and linked against gmodule-export-2.0.

A GtkBuilder UI Definition 

<interface>
  <object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
    <child internal-child="vbox">
      <object class="GtkBox" id="vbox1">
        <child internal-child="action_area">
          <object class="GtkBox" id="hbuttonbox1">
            <child>
              <object class="GtkButton" id="ok_button">
                <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
                <signal name="clicked" handler="ok_button_clicked"/>
              </object>
            </child>
          </object>
        </child>
      </object>
    </child>
  </object>
</interface>

Beyond this general structure, several object classes define their own XML DTD fragments for filling in the ANY placeholders in the DTD above. Note that a custom element in a <child> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the parent object, while a custom element in an <object> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the object.

These XML fragments are explained in the documentation of the respective objects.

A <template> tag can be used to define a widget class’s components. See the GtkWidget documentation (class.Widget.html#building-composite-widgets-from-template-xml) for details.

func NewBuilder 

func NewBuilder() *Builder

NewBuilder creates a new empty builder object.

This function is only useful if you intend to make multiple calls to gtk.Builder.AddFromFile(), gtk.Builder.AddFromResource() or gtk.Builder.AddFromString() in order to merge multiple UI descriptions into a single builder.

The function returns the following values:

  • builder: new (empty) GtkBuilder object.

func NewBuilderFromFile 

func NewBuilderFromFile(filename string) *Builder

NewBuilderFromFile parses the UI definition in the file filename.

If there is an error opening the file or parsing the description then the program will be aborted. You should only ever attempt to parse user interface descriptions that are shipped as part of your program.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename of user interface description file.

The function returns the following values:

  • builder: GtkBuilder containing the described interface.

func NewBuilderFromResource 

func NewBuilderFromResource(resourcePath string) *Builder

NewBuilderFromResource parses the UI definition at resource_path.

If there is an error locating the resource or parsing the description, then the program will be aborted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: GResource resource path.

The function returns the following values:

  • builder: GtkBuilder containing the described interface.

func NewBuilderFromString 

func NewBuilderFromString(str string, length int) *Builder

NewBuilderFromString parses the UI definition in string.

If string is NULL-terminated, then length should be -1. If length is not -1, then it is the length of string.

If there is an error parsing string then the program will be aborted. You should not attempt to parse user interface description from untrusted sources.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: user interface (XML) description.
  • length of string, or -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • builder: GtkBuilder containing the interface described by string.

func (*Builder) AddFromFile 

func (builder *Builder) AddFromFile(filename string) error

AddFromFile parses a file containing a UI definition and merges it with the current contents of builder.

This function is useful if you need to call gtk.Builder.SetCurrentObject()) to add user data to callbacks before loading GtkBuilder UI. Otherwise, you probably want gtk.Builder.NewFromFile instead.

If an error occurs, 0 will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, G_MARKUP_ERROR or G_FILE_ERROR domains.

It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this call. You should not use this function with untrusted files (ie: files that are not part of your application). Broken GtkBuilder files can easily crash your program, and it’s possible that memory was leaked leading up to the reported failure. The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is to call g_error().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename: name of the file to parse.

func (*Builder) AddFromResource 

func (builder *Builder) AddFromResource(resourcePath string) error

AddFromResource parses a resource file containing a UI definition and merges it with the current contents of builder.

This function is useful if you need to call gtk.Builder.SetCurrentObject() to add user data to callbacks before loading GtkBuilder UI. Otherwise, you probably want gtk.Builder.NewFromResource instead.

If an error occurs, 0 will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, G_MARKUP_ERROR or G_RESOURCE_ERROR domain.

It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this call. The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is to call g_error().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: path of the resource file to parse.

func (*Builder) AddFromString 

func (builder *Builder) AddFromString(buffer string, length int) error

AddFromString parses a string containing a UI definition and merges it with the current contents of builder.

This function is useful if you need to call gtk.Builder.SetCurrentObject() to add user data to callbacks before loading GtkBuilder UI. Otherwise, you probably want gtk.Builder.NewFromString instead.

Upon errors FALSE will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, G_MARKUP_ERROR or G_VARIANT_PARSE_ERROR domain.

It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this call. The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is to call g_error().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer: string to parse.
  • length of buffer (may be -1 if buffer is nul-terminated).

func (*Builder) AddObjectsFromFile 

func (builder *Builder) AddObjectsFromFile(filename string, objectIds []string) error

AddObjectsFromFile parses a file containing a UI definition building only the requested objects and merges them with the current contents of builder.

Upon errors, 0 will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, G_MARKUP_ERROR or G_FILE_ERROR domain.

If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not its child (for instance a GtkTreeView that depends on its GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitly list all of them in object_ids.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename: name of the file to parse.
  • objectIds: nul-terminated array of objects to build.

func (*Builder) AddObjectsFromResource 

func (builder *Builder) AddObjectsFromResource(resourcePath string, objectIds []string) error

AddObjectsFromResource parses a resource file containing a UI definition, building only the requested objects and merges them with the current contents of builder.

Upon errors, 0 will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, G_MARKUP_ERROR or G_RESOURCE_ERROR domain.

If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not its child (for instance a GtkTreeView that depends on its GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitly list all of them in object_ids.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: path of the resource file to parse.
  • objectIds: nul-terminated array of objects to build.

func (*Builder) AddObjectsFromString 

func (builder *Builder) AddObjectsFromString(buffer string, length int, objectIds []string) error

AddObjectsFromString parses a string containing a UI definition, building only the requested objects and merges them with the current contents of builder.

Upon errors FALSE will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.

If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not its child (for instance a GtkTreeView that depends on its GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitly list all of them in object_ids.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer: string to parse.
  • length of buffer (may be -1 if buffer is nul-terminated).
  • objectIds: nul-terminated array of objects to build.

func (*Builder) CurrentObject 

func (builder *Builder) CurrentObject() *coreglib.Object

CurrentObject gets the current object set via gtk_builder_set_current_object().

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): current object.

func (*Builder) ExposeObject 

func (builder *Builder) ExposeObject(name string, object *coreglib.Object)

ExposeObject: add object to the builder object pool so it can be referenced just like any other object built by builder.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the object exposed to the builder.
  • object to expose.

func (*Builder) ExtendWithTemplate 

func (builder *Builder) ExtendWithTemplate(object *coreglib.Object, templateType coreglib.Type, buffer string, length int) error

ExtendWithTemplate: main private entry point for building composite components from template XML.

This is exported purely to let gtk-builder-tool validate templates, applications have no need to call this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • object that is being extended.
  • templateType: type that the template is for.
  • buffer: string to parse.
  • length of buffer (may be -1 if buffer is nul-terminated).

func (*Builder) GetObject 

func (builder *Builder) GetObject(name string) *coreglib.Object

GetObject gets the object named name.

Note that this function does not increment the reference count of the returned object.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of object to get.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional) named name or NULL if it could not be found in the object tree.

func (*Builder) Objects 

func (builder *Builder) Objects() []*coreglib.Object

Objects gets all objects that have been constructed by builder.

Note that this function does not increment the reference counts of the returned objects.

The function returns the following values:

  • sList: a newly-allocated GSList containing all the objects constructed by the GtkBuilder instance. It should be freed by g_slist_free().

func (*Builder) Scope 

func (builder *Builder) Scope() *BuilderScope

Scope gets the scope in use that was set via gtk_builder_set_scope().

The function returns the following values:

  • builderScope: current scope.

func (*Builder) SetCurrentObject 

func (builder *Builder) SetCurrentObject(currentObject *coreglib.Object)

SetCurrentObject sets the current object for the builder.

The current object can be thought of as the this object that the builder is working for and will often be used as the default object when an object is optional.

gtk.Widget.InitTemplate() for example will set the current object to the widget the template is inited for. For functions like gtk.Builder.NewFromResource, the current object will be NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • currentObject (optional): new current object or NULL for none.

func (*Builder) SetScope 

func (builder *Builder) SetScope(scope BuilderScoper)

SetScope sets the scope the builder should operate in.

If scope is NULL a new gtk.BuilderCScope will be created.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scope (optional) to use or NULL for the default.

func (*Builder) SetTranslationDomain 

func (builder *Builder) SetTranslationDomain(domain string)

SetTranslationDomain sets the translation domain of builder.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • domain (optional): translation domain or NULL.

func (*Builder) TranslationDomain 

func (builder *Builder) TranslationDomain() string

TranslationDomain gets the translation domain of builder.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): translation domain or NULL. This string is owned by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Builder) TypeFromName 

func (builder *Builder) TypeFromName(typeName string) coreglib.Type

TypeFromName looks up a type by name.

This is using the virtual function that GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when implementing the GtkBuildable interface on a type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typeName: type name to lookup.

The function returns the following values:

  • gType: GType found for type_name or G_TYPE_INVALID if no type was found.

func (*Builder) ValueFromStringType 

func (builder *Builder) ValueFromStringType(typ coreglib.Type, str string) (coreglib.Value, error)

ValueFromStringType demarshals a value from a string.

Unlike gtk.Builder.ValueFromString(), this function takes a GType instead of GParamSpec.

Calls g_value_init() on the value argument, so it need not be initialised beforehand.

Upon errors FALSE will be returned and error will be assigned a GError from the GTK_BUILDER_ERROR domain.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: GType of the value.
  • str: string representation of the value.

The function returns the following values:

  • value to store the result in.

type BuilderCScope 

type BuilderCScope struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	BuilderScope
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuilderCScope: GtkBuilderScope implementation for the C language.

GtkBuilderCScope instances use symbols explicitly added to builder with prior calls to gtk.BuilderCScope.AddCallbackSymbol(). If developers want to do that, they are encouraged to create their own scopes for that purpose.

In the case that symbols are not explicitly added; GTK will uses GModule’s introspective features (by opening the module NULL) to look at the application’s symbol table. From here it tries to match the signal function names given in the interface description with symbols in the application.

Note that unless gtk.BuilderCScope.AddCallbackSymbol() is called for all signal callbacks which are referenced by the loaded XML, this functionality will require that GModule be supported on the platform.

func NewBuilderCScope 

func NewBuilderCScope() *BuilderCScope

NewBuilderCScope creates a new GtkBuilderCScope object to use with future GtkBuilder instances.

Calling this function is only necessary if you want to add custom callbacks via gtk.BuilderCScope.AddCallbackSymbol().

The function returns the following values:

  • builderCScope: new GtkBuilderCScope.

type BuilderCScopeClass added in v0.0.5 

type BuilderCScopeClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuilderCScopeClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type BuilderCScopeOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type BuilderCScopeOverrides struct {
}

BuilderCScopeOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type BuilderClosureFlags 

type BuilderClosureFlags C.guint

BuilderClosureFlags: list of flags that can be passed to gtk_builder_create_closure().

New values may be added in the future for new features, so external implementations of gtk.BuilderScope should test the flags for unknown values and raise a GTK_BUILDER_ERROR_INVALID_ATTRIBUTE error when they encounter one. 

const (
	// BuilderClosureSwapped: closure should be created swapped. See
	// g_cclosure_new_swap() for details.
	BuilderClosureSwapped BuilderClosureFlags = 0b1
)

func (BuilderClosureFlags) Has 

func (b BuilderClosureFlags) Has(other BuilderClosureFlags) bool

Has returns true if b contains other.

func (BuilderClosureFlags) String 

func (b BuilderClosureFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for BuilderClosureFlags.

type BuilderError 

type BuilderError C.gint

BuilderError: error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using Builder. 

const (
	// BuilderErrorInvalidTypeFunction: type-func attribute didn’t name a
	// function that returns a #GType.
	BuilderErrorInvalidTypeFunction BuilderError = iota
	// BuilderErrorUnhandledTag: input contained a tag that Builder can’t
	// handle.
	BuilderErrorUnhandledTag
	// BuilderErrorMissingAttribute: attribute that is required by Builder was
	// missing.
	BuilderErrorMissingAttribute
	// BuilderErrorInvalidAttribute found an attribute that it doesn’t
	// understand.
	BuilderErrorInvalidAttribute
	// BuilderErrorInvalidTag found a tag that it doesn’t understand.
	BuilderErrorInvalidTag
	// BuilderErrorMissingPropertyValue: required property value was missing.
	BuilderErrorMissingPropertyValue
	// BuilderErrorInvalidValue couldn’t parse some attribute value.
	BuilderErrorInvalidValue
	// BuilderErrorVersionMismatch: input file requires a newer version of GTK.
	BuilderErrorVersionMismatch
	// BuilderErrorDuplicateID: object id occurred twice.
	BuilderErrorDuplicateID
	// BuilderErrorObjectTypeRefused: specified object type is of the same
	// type or derived from the type of the composite class being extended with
	// builder XML.
	BuilderErrorObjectTypeRefused
	// BuilderErrorTemplateMismatch: wrong type was specified in a composite
	// class’s template XML.
	BuilderErrorTemplateMismatch
	// BuilderErrorInvalidProperty: specified property is unknown for the object
	// class.
	BuilderErrorInvalidProperty
	// BuilderErrorInvalidSignal: specified signal is unknown for the object
	// class.
	BuilderErrorInvalidSignal
	// BuilderErrorInvalidID: object id is unknown.
	BuilderErrorInvalidID
	// BuilderErrorInvalidFunction: function could not be found. This often
	// happens when symbols are set to be kept private. Compiling code with
	// -rdynamic or using the gmodule-export-2.0 pkgconfig module can fix this
	// problem.
	BuilderErrorInvalidFunction
)

func (BuilderError) String 

func (b BuilderError) String() string

String returns the name in string for BuilderError.

type BuilderListItemFactory 

type BuilderListItemFactory struct {
	ListItemFactory
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuilderListItemFactory: GtkBuilderListItemFactory is a GtkListItemFactory that creates widgets by instantiating GtkBuilder UI templates.

The templates must be extending GtkListItem, and typically use GtkExpressions to obtain data from the items in the model.

Example: 

<interface>
  <template class="GtkListItem">
    <property name="child">
      <object class="GtkLabel">
        <property name="xalign">0</property>
        <binding name="label">
          <lookup name="name" type="SettingsKey">
            <lookup name="item">GtkListItem</lookup>
          </lookup>
        </binding>
      </object>
    </property>
  </template>
</interface>.

func NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromBytes 

func NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromBytes(scope BuilderScoper, bytes *glib.Bytes) *BuilderListItemFactory

NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromBytes creates a new GtkBuilderListItemFactory that instantiates widgets using bytes as the data to pass to GtkBuilder.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scope (optional) to use when instantiating.
  • bytes: GBytes containing the ui file to instantiate.

The function returns the following values:

  • builderListItemFactory: new GtkBuilderListItemFactory.

func NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromResource 

func NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromResource(scope BuilderScoper, resourcePath string) *BuilderListItemFactory

NewBuilderListItemFactoryFromResource creates a new GtkBuilderListItemFactory that instantiates widgets using data read from the given resource_path to pass to GtkBuilder.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scope (optional) to use when instantiating.
  • resourcePath: valid path to a resource that contains the data.

The function returns the following values:

  • builderListItemFactory: new GtkBuilderListItemFactory.

func (*BuilderListItemFactory) Bytes 

func (self *BuilderListItemFactory) Bytes() *glib.Bytes

Bytes gets the data used as the GtkBuilder UI template for constructing listitems.

The function returns the following values:

  • bytes: GtkBuilder data.

func (*BuilderListItemFactory) Resource 

func (self *BuilderListItemFactory) Resource() string

Resource: if the data references a resource, gets the path of that resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): path to the resource or NULL if none.

func (*BuilderListItemFactory) Scope 

func (self *BuilderListItemFactory) Scope() *BuilderScope

Scope gets the scope used when constructing listitems.

The function returns the following values:

  • builderScope (optional): scope used when constructing listitems.

type BuilderScope 

type BuilderScope struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuilderScope: GtkBuilderScope is an interface to provide language binding support to GtkBuilder.

The goal of GtkBuilderScope is to look up programming-language-specific values for strings that are given in a GtkBuilder UI file.

The primary intended audience is bindings that want to provide deeper integration of GtkBuilder into the language.

A GtkBuilderScope instance may be used with multiple GtkBuilder objects, even at once.

By default, GTK will use its own implementation of GtkBuilderScope for the C language which can be created via gtk.BuilderCScope.New.

BuilderScope wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func BaseBuilderScope 

func BaseBuilderScope(obj BuilderScoper) *BuilderScope

BaseBuilderScope returns the underlying base object.

type BuilderScopeInterface added in v0.0.5 

type BuilderScopeInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BuilderScopeInterface: virtual function table to implement for BuilderScope implementations. Default implementations for each function do exist, but they usually just fail, so it is suggested that implementations implement all of them.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type BuilderScoper 

type BuilderScoper interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

BuilderScoper describes BuilderScope's interface methods.

type Button 

type Button struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Actionable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Button: GtkButton widget is generally used to trigger a callback function that is called when the button is pressed.

!An example GtkButton (button.png)

The GtkButton widget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it can hold almost any other standard GtkWidget. The most commonly used child is the GtkLabel.

CSS nodes

GtkButton has a single CSS node with name button. The node will get the style classes .image-button or .text-button, if the content is just an image or label, respectively. It may also receive the .flat style class. When activating a button via the keyboard, the button will temporarily gain the .keyboard-activating style class.

Other style classes that are commonly used with GtkButton include .suggested-action and .destructive-action. In special cases, buttons can be made round by adding the .circular style class.

Button-like widgets like gtk.ToggleButton, gtk.MenuButton, gtk.VolumeButton, gtk.LockButton, gtk.ColorButton or gtk.FontButton use style classes such as .toggle, .popup, .scale, .lock, .color on the button node to differentiate themselves from a plain GtkButton.

Accessibility

GtkButton uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTON role.

func NewButton 

func NewButton() *Button

NewButton creates a new GtkButton widget.

To add a child widget to the button, use gtk.Button.SetChild().

The function returns the following values:

  • button: newly created GtkButton widget.

func NewButtonFromIconName 

func NewButtonFromIconName(iconName string) *Button

NewButtonFromIconName creates a new button containing an icon from the current icon theme.

If the icon name isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated appropriately.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName (optional): icon name or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • button: new GtkButton displaying the themed icon.

func NewButtonWithLabel 

func NewButtonWithLabel(label string) *Button

NewButtonWithLabel creates a GtkButton widget with a GtkLabel child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: text you want the GtkLabel to hold.

The function returns the following values:

  • button: newly created GtkButton widget.

func NewButtonWithMnemonic 

func NewButtonWithMnemonic(label string) *Button

NewButtonWithMnemonic creates a new GtkButton containing a label.

If characters in label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: text of the button, with an underscore in front of the mnemonic character.

The function returns the following values:

  • button: new GtkButton.

func (*Button) Child 

func (button *Button) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of button.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of button.

func (*Button) ConnectActivate 

func (button *Button) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted to animate press then release.

This is an action signal. Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the gtk.Button::clicked signal.

func (*Button) ConnectClicked 

func (button *Button) ConnectClicked(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClicked is emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).

func (*Button) HasFrame 

func (button *Button) HasFrame() bool

HasFrame returns whether the button has a frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the button has a frame.

func (*Button) IconName 

func (button *Button) IconName() string

IconName returns the icon name of the button.

If the icon name has not been set with gtk.Button.SetIconName() the return value will be NULL. This will be the case if you create an empty button with gtk.Button.New to use as a container.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): icon name set via gtk.Button.SetIconName().

func (*Button) Label 

func (button *Button) Label() string

Label fetches the text from the label of the button.

If the label text has not been set with gtk.Button.SetLabel() the return value will be NULL. This will be the case if you create an empty button with gtk.Button.New to use as a container.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text of the label widget. This string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Button) SetChild 

func (button *Button) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Button) SetHasFrame 

func (button *Button) SetHasFrame(hasFrame bool)

SetHasFrame sets the style of the button.

Buttons can has a flat appearance or have a frame drawn around them.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasFrame: whether the button should have a visible frame.

func (*Button) SetIconName 

func (button *Button) SetIconName(iconName string)

SetIconName adds a GtkImage with the given icon name as a child.

If button already contains a child widget, that child widget will be removed and replaced with the image.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName: icon name.

func (*Button) SetLabel 

func (button *Button) SetLabel(label string)

SetLabel sets the text of the label of the button to label.

This will also clear any previously set labels.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: string.

func (*Button) SetUseUnderline 

func (button *Button) SetUseUnderline(useUnderline bool)

SetUseUnderline sets whether to use underlines as mnemonics.

If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useUnderline: TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.

func (*Button) UseUnderline 

func (button *Button) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline gets whether underlines are interpreted as mnemonics.

See gtk.Button.SetUseUnderline().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.

type ButtonClass added in v0.0.5 

type ButtonClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ButtonClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ButtonClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (b *ButtonClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type ButtonOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ButtonOverrides struct {
	Activate func()
	Clicked  func()
}

ButtonOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ButtonsType 

type ButtonsType C.gint

ButtonsType: prebuilt sets of buttons for GtkDialog.

If none of these choices are appropriate, simply use GTK_BUTTONS_NONE and call gtk.Dialog.AddButtons().

> Please note that GTK_BUTTONS_OK, GTK_BUTTONS_YES_NO > and GTK_BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL are discouraged by the > GNOME Human Interface Guidelines (http://library.gnome.org/devel/hig-book/stable/). 

const (
	// ButtonsNone: no buttons at all.
	ButtonsNone ButtonsType = iota
	// ButtonsOK: OK button.
	ButtonsOK
	// ButtonsClose: close button.
	ButtonsClose
	// ButtonsCancel: cancel button.
	ButtonsCancel
	// ButtonsYesNo yes and No buttons.
	ButtonsYesNo
	// ButtonsOKCancel: OK and Cancel buttons.
	ButtonsOKCancel
)

func (ButtonsType) String 

func (b ButtonsType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ButtonsType.

type CClosureExpression 

type CClosureExpression struct {
	Expression
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CClosureExpression: variant of GtkClosureExpression using a C closure.

type CSSLocation 

type CSSLocation struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CSSLocation represents a location in a file or other source of data parsed by the CSS engine.

The bytes and line_bytes offsets are meant to be used to programmatically match data. The lines and line_chars offsets can be used for printing the location in a file.

Note that the lines parameter starts from 0 and is increased whenever a CSS line break is encountered. (CSS defines the C character sequences "\r\n", "\r", "\n" and "\f" as newlines.) If your document uses different rules for line breaking, you might want run into problems here.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewCSSLocation 

func NewCSSLocation(bytes, chars, lines, lineBytes, lineChars uint) CSSLocation

NewCSSLocation creates a new CSSLocation instance from the given fields. Beware that this function allocates on the Go heap; be careful when using it!

func (*CSSLocation) Bytes 

func (c *CSSLocation) Bytes() uint

Bytes: number of bytes parsed since the beginning.

func (*CSSLocation) Chars 

func (c *CSSLocation) Chars() uint

Chars: number of characters parsed since the beginning.

func (*CSSLocation) LineBytes 

func (c *CSSLocation) LineBytes() uint

LineBytes: number of bytes parsed since the last line break.

func (*CSSLocation) LineChars 

func (c *CSSLocation) LineChars() uint

LineChars: number of characters parsed since the last line break.

func (*CSSLocation) Lines 

func (c *CSSLocation) Lines() uint

Lines: number of full lines that have been parsed If you want to display this as a line number, you need to add 1 to this.

func (*CSSLocation) SetBytes 

func (c *CSSLocation) SetBytes(bytes uint)

Bytes: number of bytes parsed since the beginning.

func (*CSSLocation) SetChars 

func (c *CSSLocation) SetChars(chars uint)

Chars: number of characters parsed since the beginning.

func (*CSSLocation) SetLineBytes 

func (c *CSSLocation) SetLineBytes(lineBytes uint)

LineBytes: number of bytes parsed since the last line break.

func (*CSSLocation) SetLineChars 

func (c *CSSLocation) SetLineChars(lineChars uint)

LineChars: number of characters parsed since the last line break.

func (*CSSLocation) SetLines 

func (c *CSSLocation) SetLines(lines uint)

Lines: number of full lines that have been parsed If you want to display this as a line number, you need to add 1 to this.

type CSSParserError 

type CSSParserError C.gint

CSSParserError errors that can occur while parsing CSS.

These errors are unexpected and will cause parts of the given CSS to be ignored. 

const (
	// CSSParserErrorFailed: unknown failure.
	CSSParserErrorFailed CSSParserError = iota
	// CSSParserErrorSyntax: given text does not form valid syntax.
	CSSParserErrorSyntax
	// CSSParserErrorImport: failed to import a resource.
	CSSParserErrorImport
	// CSSParserErrorName: given name has not been defined.
	CSSParserErrorName
	// CSSParserErrorUnknownValue: given value is not correct.
	CSSParserErrorUnknownValue
)

func (CSSParserError) String 

func (c CSSParserError) String() string

String returns the name in string for CSSParserError.

type CSSParserWarning 

type CSSParserWarning C.gint

CSSParserWarning warnings that can occur while parsing CSS.

Unlike CssParserErrors, warnings do not cause the parser to skip any input, but they indicate issues that should be fixed. 

const (
	// CSSParserWarningDeprecated: given construct is deprecated and will be
	// removed in a future version.
	CSSParserWarningDeprecated CSSParserWarning = iota
	// CSSParserWarningSyntax: syntax construct was used that should be avoided.
	CSSParserWarningSyntax
	// CSSParserWarningUnimplemented: feature is not implemented.
	CSSParserWarningUnimplemented
)

func (CSSParserWarning) String 

func (c CSSParserWarning) String() string

String returns the name in string for CSSParserWarning.

type CSSProvider 

type CSSProvider struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	StyleProvider
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CSSProvider: GtkCssProvider is an object implementing the GtkStyleProvider interface for CSS.

It is able to parse CSS-like input in order to style widgets.

An application can make GTK parse a specific CSS style sheet by calling gtk.CSSProvider.LoadFromFile() or gtk.CSSProvider.LoadFromResource() and adding the provider with gtk.StyleContext.AddProvider() or gtk.StyleContext().AddProviderForDisplay.

In addition, certain files will be read when GTK is initialized. First, the file $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.css is loaded if it exists. Then, GTK loads the first existing file among XDG_DATA_HOME/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, $HOME/.themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, $XDG_DATA_DIRS/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css and DATADIR/share/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, where THEME is the name of the current theme (see the gtk.Settings:gtk-theme-name setting), VARIANT is the variant to load (see the gtk.Settings:gtk-application-prefer-dark-theme setting), DATADIR is the prefix configured when GTK was compiled (unless overridden by the GTK_DATA_PREFIX environment variable), and VERSION is the GTK version number. If no file is found for the current version, GTK tries older versions all the way back to 4.0.

To track errors while loading CSS, connect to the gtk.CSSProvider::parsing-error signal.

func NewCSSProvider 

func NewCSSProvider() *CSSProvider

NewCSSProvider returns a newly created GtkCssProvider.

The function returns the following values:

  • cssProvider: new GtkCssProvider.

func (*CSSProvider) ConnectParsingError 

func (cssProvider *CSSProvider) ConnectParsingError(f func(section *CSSSection, err error)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectParsingError signals that a parsing error occurred.

The path, line and position describe the actual location of the error as accurately as possible.

Parsing errors are never fatal, so the parsing will resume after the error. Errors may however cause parts of the given data or even all of it to not be parsed at all. So it is a useful idea to check that the parsing succeeds by connecting to this signal.

Note that this signal may be emitted at any time as the css provider may opt to defer parsing parts or all of the input to a later time than when a loading function was called.

func (*CSSProvider) LoadFromData 

func (cssProvider *CSSProvider) LoadFromData(data string)

LoadFromData loads data into css_provider.

This clears any previously loaded information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • data: CSS data loaded in memory.

func (*CSSProvider) LoadFromFile 

func (cssProvider *CSSProvider) LoadFromFile(file gio.Filer)

LoadFromFile loads the data contained in file into css_provider.

This clears any previously loaded information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file: GFile pointing to a file to load.

func (*CSSProvider) LoadFromPath 

func (cssProvider *CSSProvider) LoadFromPath(path string)

LoadFromPath loads the data contained in path into css_provider.

This clears any previously loaded information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path of a filename to load, in the GLib filename encoding.

func (*CSSProvider) LoadFromResource 

func (cssProvider *CSSProvider) LoadFromResource(resourcePath string)

LoadFromResource loads the data contained in the resource at resource_path into the css_provider.

This clears any previously loaded information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: GResource resource path.

func (*CSSProvider) LoadNamed 

func (provider *CSSProvider) LoadNamed(name, variant string)

LoadNamed loads a theme from the usual theme paths.

The actual process of finding the theme might change between releases, but it is guaranteed that this function uses the same mechanism to load the theme that GTK uses for loading its own theme.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name: theme name.
  • variant (optional) to load, for example, "dark", or NULL for the default.

func (*CSSProvider) String 

func (provider *CSSProvider) String() string

String converts the provider into a string representation in CSS format.

Using gtk.CSSProvider.LoadFromData() with the return value from this function on a new provider created with gtk.CSSProvider.New will basically create a duplicate of this provider.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: new string representing the provider.

type CSSSection 

type CSSSection struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CSSSection defines a part of a CSS document.

Because sections are nested into one another, you can use gtk_css_section_get_parent() to get the containing region.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewCSSSection 

func NewCSSSection(file gio.Filer, start *CSSLocation, end *CSSLocation) *CSSSection

NewCSSSection constructs a struct CSSSection.

func (*CSSSection) EndLocation 

func (section *CSSSection) EndLocation() *CSSLocation

EndLocation returns the location in the CSS document where this section ends.

The function returns the following values:

  • cssLocation: end location of this section.

func (*CSSSection) File 

func (section *CSSSection) File() *gio.File

File gets the file that section was parsed from.

If no such file exists, for example because the CSS was loaded via gtk.CSSProvider.LoadFromData(), then NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • file: GFile from which the section was parsed.

func (*CSSSection) Parent 

func (section *CSSSection) Parent() *CSSSection

Parent gets the parent section for the given section.

The parent section is the section that contains this section. A special case are sections of type GTK_CSS_SECTION_DOCUMENT. Their parent will either be NULL if they are the original CSS document that was loaded by gtk.CSSProvider.LoadFromFile() or a section of type GTK_CSS_SECTION_IMPORT if it was loaded with an import rule from a different file.

The function returns the following values:

  • cssSection (optional): parent section.

func (*CSSSection) StartLocation 

func (section *CSSSection) StartLocation() *CSSLocation

StartLocation returns the location in the CSS document where this section starts.

The function returns the following values:

  • cssLocation: start location of this section.

func (*CSSSection) String 

func (section *CSSSection) String() string

String prints the section into a human-readable text form using gtk.CSSSection.Print().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: new string.

type Calendar 

type Calendar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Calendar: GtkCalendar is a widget that displays a Gregorian calendar, one month at a time.

!An example GtkCalendar (calendar.png)

A GtkCalendar can be created with gtk.Calendar.New.

The date that is currently displayed can be altered with gtk.Calendar.SelectDay().

To place a visual marker on a particular day, use gtk.Calendar.MarkDay() and to remove the marker, gtk.Calendar.UnmarkDay(). Alternative, all marks can be cleared with gtk.Calendar.ClearMarks().

The selected date can be retrieved from a GtkCalendar using gtk.Calendar.GetDate().

Users should be aware that, although the Gregorian calendar is the legal calendar in most countries, it was adopted progressively between 1582 and 1929. Display before these dates is likely to be historically incorrect.

CSS nodes 

calendar.view
├── header
│   ├── button
│   ├── stack.month
│   ├── button
│   ├── button
│   ├── label.year
│   ╰── button
╰── grid
    ╰── label[.day-name][.week-number][.day-number][.other-month][.today]

GtkCalendar has a main node with name calendar. It contains a subnode called header containing the widgets for switching between years and months.

The grid subnode contains all day labels, including week numbers on the left (marked with the .week-number css class) and day names on top (marked with the .day-name css class).

Day labels that belong to the previous or next month get the .other-month style class. The label of the current day get the .today style class.

Marked day labels get the :selected state assigned.

func NewCalendar 

func NewCalendar() *Calendar

NewCalendar creates a new calendar, with the current date being selected.

The function returns the following values:

  • calendar: newly GtkCalendar widget.

func (*Calendar) ClearMarks 

func (calendar *Calendar) ClearMarks()

ClearMarks: remove all visual markers.

func (*Calendar) ConnectDaySelected 

func (calendar *Calendar) ConnectDaySelected(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDaySelected is emitted when the user selects a day.

func (*Calendar) ConnectNextMonth 

func (calendar *Calendar) ConnectNextMonth(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectNextMonth is emitted when the user switched to the next month.

func (*Calendar) ConnectNextYear 

func (calendar *Calendar) ConnectNextYear(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectNextYear is emitted when user switched to the next year.

func (*Calendar) ConnectPrevMonth 

func (calendar *Calendar) ConnectPrevMonth(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPrevMonth is emitted when the user switched to the previous month.

func (*Calendar) ConnectPrevYear 

func (calendar *Calendar) ConnectPrevYear(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPrevYear is emitted when user switched to the previous year.

func (*Calendar) Date 

func (self *Calendar) Date() *glib.DateTime

Date returns a Time representing the shown year, month and the selected day.

The returned date is in the local time zone.

The function returns the following values:

  • dateTime: GDate representing the shown date.

func (*Calendar) DayIsMarked 

func (calendar *Calendar) DayIsMarked(day uint) bool

DayIsMarked returns if the day of the calendar is already marked.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • day number between 1 and 31.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the day is marked.

func (*Calendar) MarkDay 

func (calendar *Calendar) MarkDay(day uint)

MarkDay places a visual marker on a particular day.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • day number to mark between 1 and 31.

func (*Calendar) SelectDay 

func (self *Calendar) SelectDay(date *glib.DateTime)

SelectDay switches to date's year and month and select its day.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • date representing the day to select.

func (*Calendar) SetShowDayNames 

func (self *Calendar) SetShowDayNames(value bool)

SetShowDayNames sets whether the calendar shows day names.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: whether to show day names above the day numbers.

func (*Calendar) SetShowHeading 

func (self *Calendar) SetShowHeading(value bool)

SetShowHeading sets whether the calendar should show a heading.

The heading contains the current year and month as well as buttons for changing both.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: whether to show the heading in the calendar.

func (*Calendar) SetShowWeekNumbers 

func (self *Calendar) SetShowWeekNumbers(value bool)

SetShowWeekNumbers sets whether week numbers are shown in the calendar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: whether to show week numbers on the left of the days.

func (*Calendar) ShowDayNames 

func (self *Calendar) ShowDayNames() bool

ShowDayNames returns whether self is currently showing the names of the week days.

This is the value of the gtk.Calendar:show-day-names property.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the calendar shows day names.

func (*Calendar) ShowHeading 

func (self *Calendar) ShowHeading() bool

ShowHeading returns whether self is currently showing the heading.

This is the value of the gtk.Calendar:show-heading property.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the calendar is showing a heading.

func (*Calendar) ShowWeekNumbers 

func (self *Calendar) ShowWeekNumbers() bool

ShowWeekNumbers returns whether self is showing week numbers right now.

This is the value of the gtk.Calendar:show-week-numbers property.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the calendar is showing week numbers.

func (*Calendar) UnmarkDay 

func (calendar *Calendar) UnmarkDay(day uint)

UnmarkDay removes the visual marker from a particular day.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • day number to unmark between 1 and 31.

type CallbackAction 

type CallbackAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CallbackAction: GtkShortcutAction that invokes a callback.

func NewCallbackAction 

func NewCallbackAction(callback ShortcutFunc) *CallbackAction

NewCallbackAction: create a custom action that calls the given callback when activated.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • callback (optional) to call.

The function returns the following values:

  • callbackAction: new shortcut action.

type CellAllocCallback 

type CellAllocCallback func(renderer CellRendererer, cellArea, cellBackground *gdk.Rectangle) (ok bool)

CellAllocCallback: type of the callback functions used for iterating over the cell renderers and their allocated areas inside a CellArea, see gtk_cell_area_foreach_alloc().

type CellArea 

type CellArea struct {
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned

	*coreglib.Object
	Buildable
	CellLayout
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellArea: abstract class for laying out GtkCellRenderers

The CellArea is an abstract class for CellLayout widgets (also referred to as "layouting widgets") to interface with an arbitrary number of CellRenderers and interact with the user for a given TreeModel row.

The cell area handles events, focus navigation, drawing and size requests and allocations for a given row of data.

Usually users dont have to interact with the CellArea directly unless they are implementing a cell-layouting widget themselves.

Requesting area sizes

As outlined in [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management], GTK uses a height-for-width geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user interfaces. CellArea uses the same semantics to calculate the size of an area for an arbitrary number of TreeModel rows.

When requesting the size of a cell area one needs to calculate the size for a handful of rows, and this will be done differently by different layouting widgets. For instance a TreeViewColumn always lines up the areas from top to bottom while a IconView on the other hand might enforce that all areas received the same width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell areas when allocated less width.

It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of cells are different in each row). For this reason the CellArea uses a CellAreaContext object to store the alignments and sizes along the way (as well as the overall largest minimum and natural size for all the rows which have been calculated with the said context).

The CellAreaContext is an opaque object specific to the CellArea which created it (see gtk_cell_area_create_context()). The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically), However, it’s important that the same CellAreaContext which was used to request the sizes for a given TreeModel row be used when rendering or processing events for that row.

In order to request the width of all the rows at the root level of a TreeModel one would do the following: 

static gboolean
foo_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
           GtkDirectionType direction)
{
  Foo        *foo  = FOO (widget);
  FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv;
  int         focus_row;
  gboolean    have_focus = FALSE;

  focus_row = priv->focus_row;

  if (!gtk_widget_has_focus (widget))
    gtk_widget_grab_focus (widget);

  valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, priv->focus_row);
  while (valid)
    {
      gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (priv->area, priv->model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);

      if (gtk_cell_area_focus (priv->area, direction))
        {
           priv->focus_row = focus_row;
           have_focus = TRUE;
           break;
        }
      else
        {
          if (direction == GTK_DIR_RIGHT ||
              direction == GTK_DIR_LEFT)
            break;
          else if (direction == GTK_DIR_UP ||
                   direction == GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD)
           {
              if (focus_row == 0)
                break;
              else
               {
                  focus_row--;
                  valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, focus_row);
               }
            }
          else
            {
              if (focus_row == last_row)
                break;
              else
                {
                  focus_row++;
                  valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (priv->model, &iter);
                }
            }
        }
    }
    return have_focus;
}

Note that the layouting widget is responsible for matching the GtkDirectionType values to the way it lays out its cells.

Cell Properties

The CellArea introduces cell properties for CellRenderers. This provides some general interfaces for defining the relationship cell areas have with their cells. For instance in a CellAreaBox a cell might “expand” and receive extra space when the area is allocated more than its full natural request, or a cell might be configured to “align” with adjacent rows which were requested and rendered with the same CellAreaContext.

Use gtk_cell_area_class_install_cell_property() to install cell properties for a cell area class and gtk_cell_area_class_find_cell_property() or gtk_cell_area_class_list_cell_properties() to get information about existing cell properties.

To set the value of a cell property, use gtk_cell_area_cell_set_property(), gtk_cell_area_cell_set() or gtk_cell_area_cell_set_valist(). To obtain the value of a cell property, use gtk_cell_area_cell_get_property(), gtk_cell_area_cell_get() or gtk_cell_area_cell_get_valist().

func BaseCellArea 

func BaseCellArea(obj CellAreaer) *CellArea

BaseCellArea returns the underlying base object.

func (*CellArea) Activate 

func (area *CellArea) Activate(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState, editOnly bool) bool

Activate activates area, usually by activating the currently focused cell, however some subclasses which embed widgets in the area can also activate a widget if it currently has the focus.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context in context with the current row data.
  • widget that area is rendering on.
  • cellArea: size and location of area relative to widget’s allocation.
  • flags flags for area for this row of data.
  • editOnly: if TRUE then only cell renderers that are GTK_CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE will be activated.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether area was successfully activated.

func (*CellArea) ActivateCell 

func (area *CellArea) ActivateCell(widget Widgetter, renderer CellRendererer, event gdk.Eventer, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) bool

ActivateCell: this is used by CellArea subclasses when handling events to activate cells, the base CellArea class activates cells for keyboard events for free in its own GtkCellArea->activate() implementation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget that area is rendering onto.
  • renderer in area to activate.
  • event for which cell activation should occur.
  • cellArea in widget relative coordinates of renderer for the current row.
  • flags for renderer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether cell activation was successful.

func (*CellArea) Add 

func (area *CellArea) Add(renderer CellRendererer)

Add adds renderer to area with the default child cell properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to add to area.

func (*CellArea) AddFocusSibling 

func (area *CellArea) AddFocusSibling(renderer, sibling CellRendererer)

AddFocusSibling adds sibling to renderer’s focusable area, focus will be drawn around renderer and all of its siblings if renderer can focus for a given row.

Events handled by focus siblings can also activate the given focusable renderer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer expected to have focus.
  • sibling to add to renderer’s focus area.

func (*CellArea) ApplyAttributes 

func (area *CellArea) ApplyAttributes(treeModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, isExpander, isExpanded bool)

ApplyAttributes applies any connected attributes to the renderers in area by pulling the values from tree_model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • treeModel to pull values from.
  • iter in tree_model to apply values for.
  • isExpander: whether iter has children.
  • isExpanded: whether iter is expanded in the view and children are visible.

func (*CellArea) AttributeConnect 

func (area *CellArea) AttributeConnect(renderer CellRendererer, attribute string, column int)

AttributeConnect connects an attribute to apply values from column for the TreeModel in use.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to connect an attribute for.
  • attribute name.
  • column column to fetch attribute values from.

func (*CellArea) AttributeDisconnect 

func (area *CellArea) AttributeDisconnect(renderer CellRendererer, attribute string)

AttributeDisconnect disconnects attribute for the renderer in area so that attribute will no longer be updated with values from the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to disconnect an attribute for.
  • attribute name.

func (*CellArea) AttributeGetColumn 

func (area *CellArea) AttributeGetColumn(renderer CellRendererer, attribute string) int

AttributeGetColumn returns the model column that an attribute has been mapped to, or -1 if the attribute is not mapped.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer: CellRenderer.
  • attribute on the renderer.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: model column, or -1.

func (*CellArea) CellAllocation 

func (area *CellArea) CellAllocation(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, renderer CellRendererer, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle) *gdk.Rectangle

CellAllocation derives the allocation of renderer inside area if area were to be renderered in cell_area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context used to hold sizes for area.
  • widget that area is rendering on.
  • renderer to get the allocation for.
  • cellArea: whole allocated area for area in widget for this row.

The function returns the following values:

  • allocation: where to store the allocation for renderer.

func (*CellArea) CellAtPosition 

func (area *CellArea) CellAtPosition(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, x, y int) (*gdk.Rectangle, CellRendererer)

CellAtPosition gets the CellRenderer at x and y coordinates inside area and optionally returns the full cell allocation for it inside cell_area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context used to hold sizes for area.
  • widget that area is rendering on.
  • cellArea: whole allocated area for area in widget for this row.
  • x position.
  • y position.

The function returns the following values:

  • allocArea (optional): where to store the inner allocated area of the returned cell renderer, or NULL.
  • cellRenderer at x and y.

func (*CellArea) CellGetProperty 

func (area *CellArea) CellGetProperty(renderer CellRendererer, propertyName string, value *coreglib.Value)

CellGetProperty gets the value of a cell property for renderer in area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer inside area.
  • propertyName: name of the property to get.
  • value: location to return the value.

func (*CellArea) CellSetProperty 

func (area *CellArea) CellSetProperty(renderer CellRendererer, propertyName string, value *coreglib.Value)

CellSetProperty sets a cell property for renderer in area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer inside area.
  • propertyName: name of the cell property to set.
  • value to set the cell property to.

func (*CellArea) ConnectAddEditable 

func (area *CellArea) ConnectAddEditable(f func(renderer CellRendererer, editable CellEditabler, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, path string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAddEditable indicates that editing has started on renderer and that editable should be added to the owning cell-layouting widget at cell_area.

func (*CellArea) ConnectApplyAttributes 

func (area *CellArea) ConnectApplyAttributes(f func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, isExpander, isExpanded bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectApplyAttributes: this signal is emitted whenever applying attributes to area from model.

func (*CellArea) ConnectFocusChanged 

func (area *CellArea) ConnectFocusChanged(f func(renderer CellRendererer, path string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectFocusChanged indicates that focus changed on this area. This signal is emitted either as a result of focus handling or event handling.

It's possible that the signal is emitted even if the currently focused renderer did not change, this is because focus may change to the same renderer in the same cell area for a different row of data.

func (*CellArea) ConnectRemoveEditable 

func (area *CellArea) ConnectRemoveEditable(f func(renderer CellRendererer, editable CellEditabler)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRemoveEditable indicates that editing finished on renderer and that editable should be removed from the owning cell-layouting widget.

func (*CellArea) CopyContext 

func (area *CellArea) CopyContext(context *CellAreaContext) *CellAreaContext

CopyContext: this is sometimes needed for cases where rows need to share alignments in one orientation but may be separately grouped in the opposing orientation.

For instance, IconView creates all icons (rows) to have the same width and the cells theirin to have the same horizontal alignments. However each row of icons may have a separate collective height. IconView uses this to request the heights of each row based on a context which was already used to request all the row widths that are to be displayed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context to copy.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellAreaContext: newly created CellAreaContext copy of context.

func (*CellArea) CreateContext 

func (area *CellArea) CreateContext() *CellAreaContext

CreateContext creates a CellAreaContext to be used with area for all purposes. CellAreaContext stores geometry information for rows for which it was operated on, it is important to use the same context for the same row of data at all times (i.e. one should render and handle events with the same CellAreaContext which was used to request the size of those rows of data).

The function returns the following values:

  • cellAreaContext: newly created CellAreaContext which can be used with area.

func (*CellArea) CurrentPathString 

func (area *CellArea) CurrentPathString() string

CurrentPathString gets the current TreePath string for the currently applied TreeIter, this is implicitly updated when gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes() is called and can be used to interact with renderers from CellArea subclasses.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: current TreePath string for the current attributes applied to area. This string belongs to the area and should not be freed.

func (*CellArea) EditWidget 

func (area *CellArea) EditWidget() *CellEditable

EditWidget gets the CellEditable widget currently used to edit the currently edited cell.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellEditable: currently active CellEditable widget.

func (*CellArea) EditedCell 

func (area *CellArea) EditedCell() CellRendererer

EditedCell gets the CellRenderer in area that is currently being edited.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRenderer: currently edited CellRenderer.

func (*CellArea) Event 

func (area *CellArea) Event(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, event gdk.Eventer, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) int

Event delegates event handling to a CellArea.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context for this row of data.
  • widget that area is rendering to.
  • event to handle.
  • cellArea: widget relative coordinates for area.
  • flags for area in this row.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: TRUE if the event was handled by area.

func (*CellArea) Focus 

func (area *CellArea) Focus(direction DirectionType) bool

Focus: this should be called by the area’s owning layout widget when focus is to be passed to area, or moved within area for a given direction and row data.

Implementing CellArea classes should implement this method to receive and navigate focus in its own way particular to how it lays out cells.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • direction: DirectionType.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus remains inside area as a result of this call.

func (*CellArea) FocusCell 

func (area *CellArea) FocusCell() CellRendererer

FocusCell retrieves the currently focused cell for area.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRenderer: currently focused cell in area.

func (*CellArea) FocusFromSibling 

func (area *CellArea) FocusFromSibling(renderer CellRendererer) CellRendererer

FocusFromSibling gets the CellRenderer which is expected to be focusable for which renderer is, or may be a sibling.

This is handy for CellArea subclasses when handling events, after determining the renderer at the event location it can then chose to activate the focus cell for which the event cell may have been a sibling.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer: CellRenderer.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRenderer (optional) for which renderer is a sibling, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) FocusSiblings 

func (area *CellArea) FocusSiblings(renderer CellRendererer) []CellRendererer

FocusSiblings gets the focus sibling cell renderers for renderer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer expected to have focus.

The function returns the following values:

  • list of CellRenderers. The returned list is internal and should not be freed.

func (*CellArea) ForEach 

func (area *CellArea) ForEach(callback CellCallback)

ForEach calls callback for every CellRenderer in area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • callback to call.

func (*CellArea) ForEachAlloc 

func (area *CellArea) ForEachAlloc(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, cellArea, backgroundArea *gdk.Rectangle, callback CellAllocCallback)

ForEachAlloc calls callback for every CellRenderer in area with the allocated rectangle inside cell_area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context for this row of data.
  • widget that area is rendering to.
  • cellArea: widget relative coordinates and size for area.
  • backgroundArea: widget relative coordinates of the background area.
  • callback to call.

func (*CellArea) HasRenderer 

func (area *CellArea) HasRenderer(renderer CellRendererer) bool

HasRenderer checks if area contains renderer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to check.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if renderer is in the area.

func (*CellArea) InnerCellArea 

func (area *CellArea) InnerCellArea(widget Widgetter, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle) *gdk.Rectangle

InnerCellArea: this is a convenience function for CellArea implementations to get the inner area where a given CellRenderer will be rendered. It removes any padding previously added by gtk_cell_area_request_renderer().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget that area is rendering onto.
  • cellArea: widget relative coordinates where one of area’s cells is to be placed.

The function returns the following values:

  • innerArea: return location for the inner cell area.

func (*CellArea) IsActivatable 

func (area *CellArea) IsActivatable() bool

IsActivatable returns whether the area can do anything when activated, after applying new attributes to area.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether area can do anything when activated.

func (*CellArea) IsFocusSibling 

func (area *CellArea) IsFocusSibling(renderer, sibling CellRendererer) bool

IsFocusSibling returns whether sibling is one of renderer’s focus siblings (see gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer expected to have focus.
  • sibling to check against renderer’s sibling list.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if sibling is a focus sibling of renderer.

func (*CellArea) PreferredHeight 

func (area *CellArea) PreferredHeight(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PreferredHeight retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural height.

area will store some geometrical information in context along the way; when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important to check the minimum_height and natural_height of this call but rather to consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height() after a series of requests.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context to perform this request with.
  • widget where area will be rendering.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height, or NULL.
  • naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) PreferredHeightForWidth 

func (area *CellArea) PreferredHeightForWidth(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PreferredHeightForWidth retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural height if it would be given the specified width.

area stores some geometrical information in context along the way while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width(). It’s important to perform a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() requests with context first and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width() on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each fully requested row.

If at some point, the width of a single row changes, it should be requested with gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() again and then the full width of the requested rows checked again with gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context which has already been requested for widths.
  • widget where area will be rendering.
  • width for which to check the height of this area.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height, or NULL.
  • naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) PreferredWidth 

func (area *CellArea) PreferredWidth(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PreferredWidth retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural width.

area will store some geometrical information in context along the way; when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important to check the minimum_width and natural_width of this call but rather to consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width() after a series of requests.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context to perform this request with.
  • widget where area will be rendering.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width, or NULL.
  • naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) PreferredWidthForHeight 

func (area *CellArea) PreferredWidthForHeight(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PreferredWidthForHeight retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural width if it would be given the specified height.

area stores some geometrical information in context along the way while calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height(). It’s important to perform a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() requests with context first and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width_for_height() on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each fully requested row.

If at some point, the height of a single row changes, it should be requested with gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() again and then the full height of the requested rows checked again with gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context which has already been requested for widths.
  • widget where area will be rendering.
  • height for which to check the width of this area.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width, or NULL.
  • naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) Remove 

func (area *CellArea) Remove(renderer CellRendererer)

Remove removes renderer from area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to remove from area.

func (*CellArea) RemoveFocusSibling 

func (area *CellArea) RemoveFocusSibling(renderer, sibling CellRendererer)

RemoveFocusSibling removes sibling from renderer’s focus sibling list (see gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer expected to have focus.
  • sibling to remove from renderer’s focus area.

func (*CellArea) RequestMode 

func (area *CellArea) RequestMode() SizeRequestMode

RequestMode gets whether the area prefers a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeRequestMode preferred by area.

func (*CellArea) RequestRenderer 

func (area *CellArea) RequestRenderer(renderer CellRendererer, orientation Orientation, widget Widgetter, forSize int) (minimumSize, naturalSize int)

RequestRenderer: this is a convenience function for CellArea implementations to request size for cell renderers. It’s important to use this function to request size and then use gtk_cell_area_inner_cell_area() at render and event time since this function will add padding around the cell for focus painting.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to request size for.
  • orientation in which to request size.
  • widget that area is rendering onto.
  • forSize: allocation contextual size to request for, or -1 if the base request for the orientation is to be returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumSize (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalSize (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.

func (*CellArea) SetFocusCell 

func (area *CellArea) SetFocusCell(renderer CellRendererer)

SetFocusCell: explicitly sets the currently focused cell to renderer.

This is generally called by implementations of CellAreaClass.focus() or CellAreaClass.event(), however it can also be used to implement functions such as gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to give focus to.

func (*CellArea) Snapshot 

func (area *CellArea) Snapshot(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, snapshot *Snapshot, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState, paintFocus bool)

Snapshot snapshots area’s cells according to area’s layout onto at the given coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context for this row of data.
  • widget that area is rendering to.
  • snapshot to draw to.
  • backgroundArea: widget relative coordinates for area’s background.
  • cellArea: widget relative coordinates for area.
  • flags for area in this row.
  • paintFocus: whether area should paint focus on focused cells for focused rows or not.

func (*CellArea) StopEditing 

func (area *CellArea) StopEditing(canceled bool)

StopEditing: explicitly stops the editing of the currently edited cell.

If canceled is TRUE, the currently edited cell renderer will emit the ::editing-canceled signal, otherwise the the ::editing-done signal will be emitted on the current edit widget.

See gtk_cell_area_get_edited_cell() and gtk_cell_area_get_edit_widget().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canceled: whether editing was canceled.

type CellAreaBox 

type CellAreaBox struct {
	CellArea

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellAreaBox: cell area that renders GtkCellRenderers into a row or a column

The CellAreaBox renders cell renderers into a row or a column depending on its Orientation.

GtkCellAreaBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers to adding cell renderers with reference to a particular position in a CellAreaBox. There are two reference positions: the start and the end of the box. When the CellAreaBox is oriented in the GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL orientation, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is defined as the bottom. In the GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL orientation start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.

Alignments of CellRenderers rendered in adjacent rows can be configured by configuring the CellAreaBox align child cell property with gtk_cell_area_cell_set_property() or by specifying the "align" argument to gtk_cell_area_box_pack_start() and gtk_cell_area_box_pack_end().

func NewCellAreaBox 

func NewCellAreaBox() *CellAreaBox

NewCellAreaBox creates a new CellAreaBox.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellAreaBox: newly created CellAreaBox.

func (*CellAreaBox) PackEnd 

func (box *CellAreaBox) PackEnd(renderer CellRendererer, expand, align, fixed bool)

PackEnd adds renderer to box, packed with reference to the end of box.

The renderer is packed after (away from end of) any other CellRenderer packed with reference to the end of box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to add.
  • expand: whether renderer should receive extra space when the area receives more than its natural size.
  • align: whether renderer should be aligned in adjacent rows.
  • fixed: whether renderer should have the same size in all rows.

func (*CellAreaBox) PackStart 

func (box *CellAreaBox) PackStart(renderer CellRendererer, expand, align, fixed bool)

PackStart adds renderer to box, packed with reference to the start of box.

The renderer is packed after any other CellRenderer packed with reference to the start of box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • renderer to add.
  • expand: whether renderer should receive extra space when the area receives more than its natural size.
  • align: whether renderer should be aligned in adjacent rows.
  • fixed: whether renderer should have the same size in all rows.

func (*CellAreaBox) SetSpacing 

func (box *CellAreaBox) SetSpacing(spacing int)

SetSpacing sets the spacing to add between cell renderers in box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: space to add between CellRenderers.

func (*CellAreaBox) Spacing 

func (box *CellAreaBox) Spacing() int

Spacing gets the spacing added between cell renderers.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: space added between cell renderers in box.

type CellAreaClass added in v0.0.5 

type CellAreaClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellAreaClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type CellAreaContext 

type CellAreaContext struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellAreaContext stores geometrical information for a series of rows in a GtkCellArea

The CellAreaContext object is created by a given CellArea implementation via its CellAreaClass.create_context() virtual method and is used to store cell sizes and alignments for a series of TreeModel rows that are requested and rendered in the same context.

CellLayout widgets can create any number of contexts in which to request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the same context which was used to request sizes for a given TreeModel row also be used for the same row when calling other CellArea APIs such as gtk_cell_area_render() and gtk_cell_area_event().

func (*CellAreaContext) Allocate 

func (context *CellAreaContext) Allocate(width, height int)

Allocate allocates a width and/or a height for all rows which are to be rendered with context.

Usually allocation is performed only horizontally or sometimes vertically since a group of rows are usually rendered side by side vertically or horizontally and share either the same width or the same height. Sometimes they are allocated in both horizontal and vertical orientations producing a homogeneous effect of the rows. This is generally the case for TreeView when TreeView:fixed-height-mode is enabled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: allocated width for all TreeModel rows rendered with context, or -1.
  • height: allocated height for all TreeModel rows rendered with context, or -1.

func (*CellAreaContext) Allocation 

func (context *CellAreaContext) Allocation() (width, height int)

Allocation fetches the current allocation size for context.

If the context was not allocated in width or height, or if the context was recently reset with gtk_cell_area_context_reset(), the returned value will be -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • width (optional): location to store the allocated width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): location to store the allocated height, or NULL.

func (*CellAreaContext) Area 

func (context *CellAreaContext) Area() CellAreaer

Area fetches the CellArea this context was created by.

This is generally unneeded by layouting widgets; however, it is important for the context implementation itself to fetch information about the area it is being used for.

For instance at CellAreaContextClass.allocate() time it’s important to know details about any cell spacing that the CellArea is configured with in order to compute a proper allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellArea this context was created by.

func (*CellAreaContext) PreferredHeight 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PreferredHeight() (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PreferredHeight gets the accumulative preferred height for all rows which have been requested with this context.

After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height, or NULL.
  • naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height, or NULL.

func (*CellAreaContext) PreferredHeightForWidth 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PreferredHeightForWidth(width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PreferredHeightForWidth gets the accumulative preferred height for width for all rows which have been requested for the same said width with this context.

After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are -1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: proposed width for allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height, or NULL.
  • naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height, or NULL.

func (*CellAreaContext) PreferredWidth 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PreferredWidth() (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PreferredWidth gets the accumulative preferred width for all rows which have been requested with this context.

After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width, or NULL.
  • naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width, or NULL.

func (*CellAreaContext) PreferredWidthForHeight 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PreferredWidthForHeight(height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PreferredWidthForHeight gets the accumulative preferred width for height for all rows which have been requested for the same said height with this context.

After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are -1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • height: proposed height for allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width, or NULL.
  • naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width, or NULL.

func (*CellAreaContext) PushPreferredHeight 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PushPreferredHeight(minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PushPreferredHeight causes the minimum and/or natural height to grow if the new proposed sizes exceed the current minimum and natural height.

This is used by CellAreaContext implementations during the request process over a series of TreeModel rows to progressively push the requested height over a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() requests.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • minimumHeight: proposed new minimum height for context.
  • naturalHeight: proposed new natural height for context.

func (*CellAreaContext) PushPreferredWidth 

func (context *CellAreaContext) PushPreferredWidth(minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PushPreferredWidth causes the minimum and/or natural width to grow if the new proposed sizes exceed the current minimum and natural width.

This is used by CellAreaContext implementations during the request process over a series of TreeModel rows to progressively push the requested width over a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() requests.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • minimumWidth: proposed new minimum width for context.
  • naturalWidth: proposed new natural width for context.

func (*CellAreaContext) Reset 

func (context *CellAreaContext) Reset()

Reset resets any previously cached request and allocation data.

When underlying TreeModel data changes its important to reset the context if the content size is allowed to shrink. If the content size is only allowed to grow (this is usually an option for views rendering large data stores as a measure of optimization), then only the row that changed or was inserted needs to be (re)requested with gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width().

When the new overall size of the context requires that the allocated size changes (or whenever this allocation changes at all), the variable row sizes need to be re-requested for every row.

For instance, if the rows are displayed all with the same width from top to bottom then a change in the allocated width necessitates a recalculation of all the displayed row heights using gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width().

type CellAreaContextClass added in v0.0.5 

type CellAreaContextClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellAreaContextClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type CellAreaContextOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CellAreaContextOverrides struct {
	// Allocate allocates a width and/or a height for all rows which are to be
	// rendered with context.
	//
	// Usually allocation is performed only horizontally or sometimes vertically
	// since a group of rows are usually rendered side by side vertically
	// or horizontally and share either the same width or the same height.
	// Sometimes they are allocated in both horizontal and vertical orientations
	// producing a homogeneous effect of the rows. This is generally the case
	// for TreeView when TreeView:fixed-height-mode is enabled.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - width: allocated width for all TreeModel rows rendered with context,
	//     or -1.
	//   - height: allocated height for all TreeModel rows rendered with
	//     context, or -1.
	//
	Allocate func(width, height int)
	// PreferredHeightForWidth gets the accumulative preferred height for width
	// for all rows which have been requested for the same said width with this
	// context.
	//
	// After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever
	// requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are -1.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - width: proposed width for allocation.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredHeightForWidth func(width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)
	// PreferredWidthForHeight gets the accumulative preferred width for height
	// for all rows which have been requested for the same said height with this
	// context.
	//
	// After gtk_cell_area_context_reset() is called and/or before ever
	// requesting the size of a CellArea, the returned values are -1.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - height: proposed height for allocation.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredWidthForHeight func(height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)
	// Reset resets any previously cached request and allocation data.
	//
	// When underlying TreeModel data changes its important to reset the
	// context if the content size is allowed to shrink. If the content
	// size is only allowed to grow (this is usually an option for views
	// rendering large data stores as a measure of optimization), then only
	// the row that changed or was inserted needs to be (re)requested with
	// gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width().
	//
	// When the new overall size of the context requires that the allocated size
	// changes (or whenever this allocation changes at all), the variable row
	// sizes need to be re-requested for every row.
	//
	// For instance, if the rows are displayed all with the same
	// width from top to bottom then a change in the allocated width
	// necessitates a recalculation of all the displayed row heights using
	// gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width().
	Reset func()
}

CellAreaContextOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CellAreaOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CellAreaOverrides struct {
	// Activate activates area, usually by activating the currently focused
	// cell, however some subclasses which embed widgets in the area can also
	// activate a widget if it currently has the focus.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context in context with the current row data.
	//   - widget that area is rendering on.
	//   - cellArea: size and location of area relative to widget’s allocation.
	//   - flags flags for area for this row of data.
	//   - editOnly: if TRUE then only cell renderers that are
	//     GTK_CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE will be activated.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: whether area was successfully activated.
	//
	Activate func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState, editOnly bool) bool
	// Add adds renderer to area with the default child cell properties.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - renderer to add to area.
	//
	Add func(renderer CellRendererer)
	// ApplyAttributes applies any connected attributes to the renderers in area
	// by pulling the values from tree_model.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - treeModel to pull values from.
	//   - iter in tree_model to apply values for.
	//   - isExpander: whether iter has children.
	//   - isExpanded: whether iter is expanded in the view and children are
	//     visible.
	//
	ApplyAttributes func(treeModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, isExpander, isExpanded bool)
	// CopyContext: this is sometimes needed for cases where rows need to
	// share alignments in one orientation but may be separately grouped in the
	// opposing orientation.
	//
	// For instance, IconView creates all icons (rows) to have the same
	// width and the cells theirin to have the same horizontal alignments.
	// However each row of icons may have a separate collective height. IconView
	// uses this to request the heights of each row based on a context which was
	// already used to request all the row widths that are to be displayed.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context to copy.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - cellAreaContext: newly created CellAreaContext copy of context.
	//
	CopyContext func(context *CellAreaContext) *CellAreaContext
	// CreateContext creates a CellAreaContext to be used with area for all
	// purposes. CellAreaContext stores geometry information for rows for which
	// it was operated on, it is important to use the same context for the same
	// row of data at all times (i.e. one should render and handle events with
	// the same CellAreaContext which was used to request the size of those rows
	// of data).
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - cellAreaContext: newly created CellAreaContext which can be used with
	//     area.
	//
	CreateContext func() *CellAreaContext
	// Event delegates event handling to a CellArea.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context for this row of data.
	//   - widget that area is rendering to.
	//   - event to handle.
	//   - cellArea: widget relative coordinates for area.
	//   - flags for area in this row.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - gint: TRUE if the event was handled by area.
	//
	Event func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, event gdk.Eventer, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) int
	// Focus: this should be called by the area’s owning layout widget when
	// focus is to be passed to area, or moved within area for a given direction
	// and row data.
	//
	// Implementing CellArea classes should implement this method to receive and
	// navigate focus in its own way particular to how it lays out cells.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - direction: DirectionType.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if focus remains inside area as a result of this call.
	//
	Focus func(direction DirectionType) bool
	// PreferredHeight retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural
	// height.
	//
	// area will store some geometrical information in context along the way;
	// when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not
	// important to check the minimum_height and natural_height of this call but
	// rather to consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height() after a
	// series of requests.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context to perform this request with.
	//   - widget where area will be rendering.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredHeight func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)
	// PreferredHeightForWidth retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural
	// height if it would be given the specified width.
	//
	// area stores some geometrical information in context along the way while
	// calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width(). It’s important to perform a
	// series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() requests with context first
	// and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width() on each cell
	// area individually to get the height for width of each fully requested
	// row.
	//
	// If at some point, the width of a single row changes, it should
	// be requested with gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width() again and
	// then the full width of the requested rows checked again with
	// gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width().
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context which has already been requested for widths.
	//   - widget where area will be rendering.
	//   - width for which to check the height of this area.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumHeight (optional): location to store the minimum height,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalHeight (optional): location to store the natural height,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredHeightForWidth func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)
	// PreferredWidth retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural width.
	//
	// area will store some geometrical information in context along the way;
	// when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not
	// important to check the minimum_width and natural_width of this call but
	// rather to consult gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width() after a
	// series of requests.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context to perform this request with.
	//   - widget where area will be rendering.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredWidth func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)
	// PreferredWidthForHeight retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural width
	// if it would be given the specified height.
	//
	// area stores some geometrical information in context along the way while
	// calling gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height(). It’s important to perform
	// a series of gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() requests with context
	// first and then call gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width_for_height() on
	// each cell area individually to get the height for width of each fully
	// requested row.
	//
	// If at some point, the height of a single row changes, it should
	// be requested with gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height() again and
	// then the full height of the requested rows checked again with
	// gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height().
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context which has already been requested for widths.
	//   - widget where area will be rendering.
	//   - height for which to check the width of this area.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumWidth (optional): location to store the minimum width,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalWidth (optional): location to store the natural width,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredWidthForHeight func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)
	// RequestMode gets whether the area prefers a height-for-width layout or a
	// width-for-height layout.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - sizeRequestMode preferred by area.
	//
	RequestMode func() SizeRequestMode
	// IsActivatable returns whether the area can do anything when activated,
	// after applying new attributes to area.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: whether area can do anything when activated.
	//
	IsActivatable func() bool
	// Remove removes renderer from area.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - renderer to remove from area.
	//
	Remove func(renderer CellRendererer)
	// Snapshot snapshots area’s cells according to area’s layout onto at the
	// given coordinates.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context for this row of data.
	//   - widget that area is rendering to.
	//   - snapshot to draw to.
	//   - backgroundArea: widget relative coordinates for area’s background.
	//   - cellArea: widget relative coordinates for area.
	//   - flags for area in this row.
	//   - paintFocus: whether area should paint focus on focused cells for
	//     focused rows or not.
	//
	Snapshot func(context *CellAreaContext, widget Widgetter, snapshot *Snapshot, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState, paintFocus bool)
}

CellAreaOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CellAreaer 

type CellAreaer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

CellAreaer describes types inherited from class CellArea.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type CellCallback 

type CellCallback func(renderer CellRendererer) (ok bool)

CellCallback: type of the callback functions used for iterating over the cell renderers of a CellArea, see gtk_cell_area_foreach().

type CellEditable 

type CellEditable struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellEditable: interface for widgets that can be used for editing cells

The CellEditable interface must be implemented for widgets to be usable to edit the contents of a TreeView cell. It provides a way to specify how temporary widgets should be configured for editing, get the new value, etc.

CellEditable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*CellEditable) ConnectEditingDone 

func (cellEditable *CellEditable) ConnectEditingDone(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEditingDone: this signal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its value from the cell_editable.

Implementations of CellEditable are responsible for emitting this signal when they are done editing, e.g. Entry emits this signal when the user presses Enter. Typical things to do in a handler for ::editing-done are to capture the edited value, disconnect the cell_editable from signals on the CellRenderer, etc.

gtk_cell_editable_editing_done() is a convenience method for emitting CellEditable::editing-done.

func (*CellEditable) ConnectRemoveWidget 

func (cellEditable *CellEditable) ConnectRemoveWidget(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRemoveWidget: this signal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished editing, and the cell_editable widget is being removed and may subsequently be destroyed.

Implementations of CellEditable are responsible for emitting this signal when they are done editing. It must be emitted after the CellEditable::editing-done signal, to give the cell renderer a chance to update the cell's value before the widget is removed.

gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget() is a convenience method for emitting CellEditable::remove-widget.

func (*CellEditable) EditingDone 

func (cellEditable *CellEditable) EditingDone()

EditingDone emits the CellEditable::editing-done signal.

func (*CellEditable) RemoveWidget 

func (cellEditable *CellEditable) RemoveWidget()

RemoveWidget emits the CellEditable::remove-widget signal.

func (*CellEditable) StartEditing 

func (cellEditable *CellEditable) StartEditing(event gdk.Eventer)

StartEditing begins editing on a cell_editable.

The CellRenderer for the cell creates and returns a CellEditable from gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing(), configured for the CellRenderer type.

gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() can then set up cell_editable suitably for editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit CellEditable::editing-done.

Note that the cell_editable is created on-demand for the current edit; its lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event (optional) that began the editing process, or NULL if editing was initiated programmatically.

type CellEditableIface added in v0.0.5 

type CellEditableIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellEditableIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type CellEditabler 

type CellEditabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// EditingDone emits the CellEditable::editing-done signal.
	EditingDone()
	// RemoveWidget emits the CellEditable::remove-widget signal.
	RemoveWidget()
	// StartEditing begins editing on a cell_editable.
	StartEditing(event gdk.Eventer)

	// Editing-done: this signal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its
	// value from the cell_editable.
	ConnectEditingDone(func()) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Remove-widget: this signal is meant to indicate that the cell is
	// finished editing, and the cell_editable widget is being removed and may
	// subsequently be destroyed.
	ConnectRemoveWidget(func()) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

CellEditabler describes CellEditable's interface methods.

type CellLayout 

type CellLayout struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellLayout: interface for packing cells

CellLayout is an interface to be implemented by all objects which want to provide a TreeViewColumn like API for packing cells, setting attributes and data funcs.

One of the notable features provided by implementations of GtkCellLayout are attributes. Attributes let you set the properties in flexible ways. They can just be set to constant values like regular properties. But they can also be mapped to a column of the underlying tree model with gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes(), which means that the value of the attribute can change from cell to cell as they are rendered by the cell renderer. Finally, it is possible to specify a function with gtk_cell_layout_set_cell_data_func() that is called to determine the value of the attribute for each cell that is rendered.

GtkCellLayouts as GtkBuildable

Implementations of GtkCellLayout which also implement the GtkBuildable interface (CellView, IconView, ComboBox, EntryCompletion, TreeViewColumn) accept GtkCellRenderer objects as <child> elements in UI definitions. They support a custom <attributes> element for their children, which can contain multiple <attribute> elements. Each <attribute> element has a name attribute which specifies a property of the cell renderer; the content of the element is the attribute value.

This is an example of a UI definition fragment specifying attributes: 

<object class="GtkCellView">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
    <attributes>
      <attribute name="text">0</attribute>
    </attributes>
  </child>"
</object>

Furthermore for implementations of GtkCellLayout that use a CellArea to lay out cells (all GtkCellLayouts in GTK use a GtkCellArea) [cell properties][cell-properties] can also be defined in the format by specifying the custom <cell-packing> attribute which can contain multiple <property> elements defined in the normal way.

Here is a UI definition fragment specifying cell properties: 

<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
    <cell-packing>
      <property name="align">True</property>
      <property name="expand">False</property>
    </cell-packing>
  </child>"
</object>

Subclassing GtkCellLayout implementations

When subclassing a widget that implements CellLayout like IconView or ComboBox, there are some considerations related to the fact that these widgets internally use a CellArea. The cell area is exposed as a construct-only property by these widgets. This means that it is possible to e.g. do 

static void
my_combo_box_init (MyComboBox *b)
{
  GtkCellRenderer *cell;

  cell = gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new ();
  // The following call causes the default cell area for combo boxes,
  // a GtkCellAreaBox, to be instantiated
  gtk_cell_layout_pack_start (GTK_CELL_LAYOUT (b), cell, FALSE);
  ...
}

GtkWidget *
my_combo_box_new (GtkCellArea *area)
{
  // This call is going to cause a warning about area being ignored
  return g_object_new (MY_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", area, NULL);
}

If supporting alternative cell areas with your derived widget is not important, then this does not have to concern you. If you want to support alternative cell areas, you can do so by moving the problematic calls out of init() and into a constructor() for your class.

CellLayout wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*CellLayout) AddAttribute 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) AddAttribute(cell CellRendererer, attribute string, column int)

AddAttribute adds an attribute mapping to the list in cell_layout.

The column is the column of the model to get a value from, and the attribute is the parameter on cell to be set from the value. So for example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the “text” attribute of a CellRendererText get its values from column 2.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • attribute on the renderer.
  • column position on the model to get the attribute from.

func (*CellLayout) Area 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) Area() CellAreaer

Area returns the underlying CellArea which might be cell_layout if called on a CellArea or might be NULL if no CellArea is used by cell_layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellArea (optional): cell area used by cell_layout, or NULL in case no cell area is used.

func (*CellLayout) Cells 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) Cells() []CellRendererer

Cells returns the cell renderers which have been added to cell_layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with g_list_free() when no longer needed.

func (*CellLayout) Clear 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) Clear()

Clear unsets all the mappings on all renderers on cell_layout and removes all renderers from cell_layout.

func (*CellLayout) ClearAttributes 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) ClearAttributes(cell CellRendererer)

ClearAttributes clears all existing attributes previously set with gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell to clear the attribute mapping on.

func (*CellLayout) PackEnd 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) PackEnd(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)

PackEnd adds the cell to the end of cell_layout. If expand is FALSE, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided evenly between cells for which expand is TRUE.

Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • expand: TRUE if cell is to be given extra space allocated to cell_layout.

func (*CellLayout) PackStart 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) PackStart(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)

PackStart packs the cell into the beginning of cell_layout. If expand is FALSE, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided evenly between cells for which expand is TRUE.

Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • expand: TRUE if cell is to be given extra space allocated to cell_layout.

func (*CellLayout) Reorder 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) Reorder(cell CellRendererer, position int)

Reorder re-inserts cell at position.

Note that cell has already to be packed into cell_layout for this to function properly.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell to reorder.
  • position: new position to insert cell at.

func (*CellLayout) SetCellDataFunc 

func (cellLayout *CellLayout) SetCellDataFunc(cell CellRendererer, fn CellLayoutDataFunc)

SetCellDataFunc sets the CellLayoutDataFunc to use for cell_layout.

This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for setting the column value, and should set the value of cell_layout’s cell renderer(s) as appropriate.

func may be NULL to remove a previously set function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • fn (optional) to use, or NULL.

type CellLayoutDataFunc 

type CellLayoutDataFunc func(cellLayout CellLayouter, cell CellRendererer, treeModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter)

CellLayoutDataFunc: function which should set the value of cell_layout’s cell renderer(s) as appropriate.

type CellLayoutIface added in v0.0.5 

type CellLayoutIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellLayoutIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type CellLayouter 

type CellLayouter interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// AddAttribute adds an attribute mapping to the list in cell_layout.
	AddAttribute(cell CellRendererer, attribute string, column int)
	// Clear unsets all the mappings on all renderers on cell_layout and removes
	// all renderers from cell_layout.
	Clear()
	// ClearAttributes clears all existing attributes previously set with
	// gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
	ClearAttributes(cell CellRendererer)
	// Area returns the underlying CellArea which might be cell_layout if called
	// on a CellArea or might be NULL if no CellArea is used by cell_layout.
	Area() CellAreaer
	// Cells returns the cell renderers which have been added to cell_layout.
	Cells() []CellRendererer
	// PackEnd adds the cell to the end of cell_layout.
	PackEnd(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)
	// PackStart packs the cell into the beginning of cell_layout.
	PackStart(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)
	// Reorder re-inserts cell at position.
	Reorder(cell CellRendererer, position int)
	// SetCellDataFunc sets the CellLayoutDataFunc to use for cell_layout.
	SetCellDataFunc(cell CellRendererer, fn CellLayoutDataFunc)
}

CellLayouter describes CellLayout's interface methods.

type CellRenderer 

type CellRenderer struct {
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRenderer: object for rendering a single cell

The CellRenderer is a base class of a set of objects used for rendering a cell to a #cairo_t. These objects are used primarily by the TreeView widget, though they aren’t tied to them in any specific way. It is worth noting that CellRenderer is not a Widget and cannot be treated as such.

The primary use of a CellRenderer is for drawing a certain graphical elements on a #cairo_t. Typically, one cell renderer is used to draw many cells on the screen. To this extent, it isn’t expected that a CellRenderer keep any permanent state around. Instead, any state is set just prior to use using #GObjects property system. Then, the cell is measured using gtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_size(). Finally, the cell is rendered in the correct location using gtk_cell_renderer_snapshot().

There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new CellRenderer. First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size, barring a style change. The CellRenderer also has a number of generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.

Beyond merely rendering a cell, cell renderers can optionally provide active user interface elements. A cell renderer can be “activatable” like CellRendererToggle, which toggles when it gets activated by a mouse click, or it can be “editable” like CellRendererText, which allows the user to edit the text using a widget implementing the CellEditable interface, e.g. Entry. To make a cell renderer activatable or editable, you have to implement the CellRendererClass.activate or CellRendererClass.start_editing virtual functions, respectively.

Many properties of CellRenderer and its subclasses have a corresponding “set” property, e.g. “cell-background-set” corresponds to “cell-background”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not. You should not set them independently.

func BaseCellRenderer 

func BaseCellRenderer(obj CellRendererer) *CellRenderer

BaseCellRenderer returns the underlying base object.

func (*CellRenderer) Activate 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Activate(event gdk.Eventer, widget Widgetter, path string, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) bool

Activate passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing. Some cell renderers may use events; for example, CellRendererToggle toggles when it gets a mouse click.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event: Event.
  • widget that received the event.
  • path: widget-dependent string representation of the event location; e.g. for TreeView, a string representation of TreePath.
  • backgroundArea: background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
  • cellArea: cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
  • flags: render flags.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the event was consumed/handled.

func (*CellRenderer) AlignedArea 

func (cell *CellRenderer) AlignedArea(widget Widgetter, flags CellRendererState, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle) *gdk.Rectangle

AlignedArea gets the aligned area used by cell inside cell_area. Used for finding the appropriate edit and focus rectangle.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.
  • flags: render flags.
  • cellArea: cell area which would be passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().

The function returns the following values:

  • alignedArea: return location for the space inside cell_area that would actually be used to render.

func (*CellRenderer) Alignment 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Alignment() (xalign, yalign float32)

Alignment fills in xalign and yalign with the appropriate values of cell.

The function returns the following values:

  • xalign (optional): location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or NULL.
  • yalign (optional): location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) ConnectEditingCanceled 

func (cell *CellRenderer) ConnectEditingCanceled(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEditingCanceled: this signal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a cell. For example, an editable cell renderer could be written to cancel editing when the user presses Escape.

See also: gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing().

func (*CellRenderer) ConnectEditingStarted 

func (cell *CellRenderer) ConnectEditingStarted(f func(editable CellEditabler, path string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEditingStarted: this signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited. The intended use of this signal is to do special setup on editable, e.g. adding a EntryCompletion or setting up additional columns in a ComboBox.

See gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() for information on the lifecycle of the editable and a way to do setup that doesn’t depend on the renderer.

Note that GTK doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future releases, therefore you should check the type of editable before doing any specific setup, as in the following example: 

static void
text_editing_started (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
                      GtkCellEditable *editable,
                      const char      *path,
                      gpointer         data)
{
  if (GTK_IS_ENTRY (editable))
    {
      GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);

      // ... create a GtkEntryCompletion

      gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
    }
}.

func (*CellRenderer) FixedSize 

func (cell *CellRenderer) FixedSize() (width, height int)

FixedSize fills in width and height with the appropriate size of cell.

The function returns the following values:

  • width (optional): location to fill in with the fixed width of the cell, or NULL.
  • height (optional): location to fill in with the fixed height of the cell, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) IsActivatable 

func (cell *CellRenderer) IsActivatable() bool

IsActivatable checks whether the cell renderer can do something when activated.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer can do anything when activated.

func (*CellRenderer) IsExpanded 

func (cell *CellRenderer) IsExpanded() bool

IsExpanded checks whether the given CellRenderer is expanded.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer is expanded.

func (*CellRenderer) IsExpander 

func (cell *CellRenderer) IsExpander() bool

IsExpander checks whether the given CellRenderer is an expander.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if cell is an expander, and FALSE otherwise.

func (*CellRenderer) Padding 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Padding() (xpad, ypad int)

Padding fills in xpad and ypad with the appropriate values of cell.

The function returns the following values:

  • xpad (optional): location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or NULL.
  • ypad (optional): location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) PreferredHeight 

func (cell *CellRenderer) PreferredHeight(widget Widgetter) (minimumSize, naturalSize int)

PreferredHeight retrieves a renderer’s natural size when rendered to widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumSize (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalSize (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) PreferredHeightForWidth 

func (cell *CellRenderer) PreferredHeightForWidth(widget Widgetter, width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)

PreferredHeightForWidth retrieves a cell renderers’s minimum and natural height if it were rendered to widget with the specified width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.
  • width: size which is available for allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumHeight (optional): location for storing the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalHeight (optional): location for storing the preferred size, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) PreferredSize 

func (cell *CellRenderer) PreferredSize(widget Widgetter) (minimumSize, naturalSize *Requisition)

PreferredSize retrieves the minimum and natural size of a cell taking into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumSize (optional): location for storing the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalSize (optional): location for storing the natural size, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) PreferredWidth 

func (cell *CellRenderer) PreferredWidth(widget Widgetter) (minimumSize, naturalSize int)

PreferredWidth retrieves a renderer’s natural size when rendered to widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumSize (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalSize (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) PreferredWidthForHeight 

func (cell *CellRenderer) PreferredWidthForHeight(widget Widgetter, height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)

PreferredWidthForHeight retrieves a cell renderers’s minimum and natural width if it were rendered to widget with the specified height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget this cell will be rendering to.
  • height: size which is available for allocation.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumWidth (optional): location for storing the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalWidth (optional): location for storing the preferred size, or NULL.

func (*CellRenderer) RequestMode 

func (cell *CellRenderer) RequestMode() SizeRequestMode

RequestMode gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeRequestMode preferred by this renderer.

func (*CellRenderer) Sensitive 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Sensitive() bool

Sensitive returns the cell renderer’s sensitivity.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer is sensitive.

func (*CellRenderer) SetAlignment 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetAlignment(xalign, yalign float32)

SetAlignment sets the renderer’s alignment within its available space.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: x alignment of the cell renderer.
  • yalign: y alignment of the cell renderer.

func (*CellRenderer) SetFixedSize 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetFixedSize(width, height int)

SetFixedSize sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width of the cell renderer, or -1.
  • height of the cell renderer, or -1.

func (*CellRenderer) SetIsExpanded 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetIsExpanded(isExpanded bool)

SetIsExpanded sets whether the given CellRenderer is expanded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • isExpanded: whether cell should be expanded.

func (*CellRenderer) SetIsExpander 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetIsExpander(isExpander bool)

SetIsExpander sets whether the given CellRenderer is an expander.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • isExpander: whether cell is an expander.

func (*CellRenderer) SetPadding 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetPadding(xpad, ypad int)

SetPadding sets the renderer’s padding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xpad: x padding of the cell renderer.
  • ypad: y padding of the cell renderer.

func (*CellRenderer) SetSensitive 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetSensitive(sensitive bool)

SetSensitive sets the cell renderer’s sensitivity.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sensitive: sensitivity of the cell.

func (*CellRenderer) SetVisible 

func (cell *CellRenderer) SetVisible(visible bool)

SetVisible sets the cell renderer’s visibility.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: visibility of the cell.

func (*CellRenderer) Snapshot 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Snapshot(snapshot *Snapshot, widget Widgetter, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState)

Snapshot invokes the virtual render function of the CellRenderer. The three passed-in rectangles are areas in cr. Most renderers will draw within cell_area; the xalign, yalign, xpad, and ypad fields of the CellRenderer should be honored with respect to cell_area. background_area includes the blank space around the cell, and also the area containing the tree expander; so the background_area rectangles for all cells tile to cover the entire window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • snapshot to draw to.
  • widget owning window.
  • backgroundArea: entire cell area (including tree expanders and maybe padding on the sides).
  • cellArea: area normally rendered by a cell renderer.
  • flags that affect rendering.

func (*CellRenderer) StartEditing 

func (cell *CellRenderer) StartEditing(event gdk.Eventer, widget Widgetter, path string, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) *CellEditable

StartEditing starts editing the contents of this cell, through a new CellEditable widget created by the CellRendererClass.start_editing virtual function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event (optional): Event.
  • widget that received the event.
  • path: widget-dependent string representation of the event location; e.g. for TreeView, a string representation of TreePath.
  • backgroundArea: background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
  • cellArea: cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
  • flags: render flags.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellEditable (optional): new CellEditable for editing this cell, or NULL if editing is not possible.

func (*CellRenderer) State 

func (cell *CellRenderer) State(widget Widgetter, cellState CellRendererState) StateFlags

State translates the cell renderer state to StateFlags, based on the cell renderer and widget sensitivity, and the given CellRendererState.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional) or NULL.
  • cellState: cell renderer state.

The function returns the following values:

  • stateFlags: widget state flags applying to cell.

func (*CellRenderer) StopEditing 

func (cell *CellRenderer) StopEditing(canceled bool)

StopEditing informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped. If canceled is TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the CellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.

This function should be called by cell renderer implementations in response to the CellEditable::editing-done signal of CellEditable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canceled: TRUE if the editing has been canceled.

func (*CellRenderer) Visible 

func (cell *CellRenderer) Visible() bool

Visible returns the cell renderer’s visibility.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer is visible.

type CellRendererAccel 

type CellRendererAccel struct {
	CellRendererText
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererAccel renders a keyboard accelerator in a cell

CellRendererAccel displays a keyboard accelerator (i.e. a key combination like Control + a). If the cell renderer is editable, the accelerator can be changed by simply typing the new combination.

func NewCellRendererAccel 

func NewCellRendererAccel() *CellRendererAccel

NewCellRendererAccel creates a new CellRendererAccel.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererAccel: new cell renderer.

func (*CellRendererAccel) ConnectAccelCleared 

func (v *CellRendererAccel) ConnectAccelCleared(f func(pathString string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAccelCleared gets emitted when the user has removed the accelerator.

func (*CellRendererAccel) ConnectAccelEdited 

func (v *CellRendererAccel) ConnectAccelEdited(f func(pathString string, accelKey uint, accelMods gdk.ModifierType, hardwareKeycode uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAccelEdited gets emitted when the user has selected a new accelerator.

type CellRendererAccelMode 

type CellRendererAccelMode C.gint

CellRendererAccelMode determines if the edited accelerators are GTK accelerators. If they are, consumed modifiers are suppressed, only accelerators accepted by GTK are allowed, and the accelerators are rendered in the same way as they are in menus. 

const (
	// CellRendererAccelModeGTK: GTK accelerators mode.
	CellRendererAccelModeGTK CellRendererAccelMode = iota
	// CellRendererAccelModeOther: other accelerator mode.
	CellRendererAccelModeOther
)

func (CellRendererAccelMode) String 

func (c CellRendererAccelMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for CellRendererAccelMode.

type CellRendererClass added in v0.0.5 

type CellRendererClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type CellRendererCombo 

type CellRendererCombo struct {
	CellRendererText
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererCombo renders a combobox in a cell

CellRendererCombo renders text in a cell like CellRendererText from which it is derived. But while CellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, CellRendererCombo offers a ComboBox widget to edit the text. The values to display in the combo box are taken from the tree model specified in the CellRendererCombo:model property.

The combo cell renderer takes care of adding a text cell renderer to the combo box and sets it to display the column specified by its CellRendererCombo:text-column property. Further properties of the combo box can be set in a handler for the CellRenderer::editing-started signal.

func NewCellRendererCombo 

func NewCellRendererCombo() *CellRendererCombo

NewCellRendererCombo creates a new CellRendererCombo. Adjust how text is drawn using object properties. Object properties can be set globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with TreeViewColumn, you can bind a property to a value in a TreeModel. For example, you can bind the “text” property on the cell renderer to a string value in the model, thus rendering a different string in each row of the TreeView.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererCombo: new cell renderer.

func (*CellRendererCombo) ConnectChanged 

func (v *CellRendererCombo) ConnectChanged(f func(pathString string, newIter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged: this signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument new_iter corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.

Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view, the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.

type CellRendererMode 

type CellRendererMode C.gint

CellRendererMode identifies how the user can interact with a particular cell. 

const (
	// CellRendererModeInert: cell is just for display and cannot be interacted
	// with. Note that this doesn’t mean that eg. the row being drawn can’t be
	// selected -- just that a particular element of it cannot be individually
	// modified.
	CellRendererModeInert CellRendererMode = iota
	// CellRendererModeActivatable: cell can be clicked.
	CellRendererModeActivatable
	// CellRendererModeEditable: cell can be edited or otherwise modified.
	CellRendererModeEditable
)

func (CellRendererMode) String 

func (c CellRendererMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for CellRendererMode.

type CellRendererOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CellRendererOverrides struct {
	// Activate passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible
	// processing. Some cell renderers may use events; for example,
	// CellRendererToggle toggles when it gets a mouse click.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - event: Event.
	//   - widget that received the event.
	//   - path: widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
	//     e.g. for TreeView, a string representation of TreePath.
	//   - backgroundArea: background area as passed to
	//     gtk_cell_renderer_render().
	//   - cellArea: cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
	//   - flags: render flags.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if the event was consumed/handled.
	//
	Activate        func(event gdk.Eventer, widget Widgetter, path string, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) bool
	EditingCanceled func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - editable
	//   - path
	//
	EditingStarted func(editable CellEditabler, path string)
	// AlignedArea gets the aligned area used by cell inside cell_area. Used for
	// finding the appropriate edit and focus rectangle.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget this cell will be rendering to.
	//   - flags: render flags.
	//   - cellArea: cell area which would be passed to
	//     gtk_cell_renderer_render().
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - alignedArea: return location for the space inside cell_area that
	//     would actually be used to render.
	//
	AlignedArea func(widget Widgetter, flags CellRendererState, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle) *gdk.Rectangle
	// PreferredHeight retrieves a renderer’s natural size when rendered to
	// widget.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget this cell will be rendering to.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumSize (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
	//   - naturalSize (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.
	//
	PreferredHeight func(widget Widgetter) (minimumSize, naturalSize int)
	// PreferredHeightForWidth retrieves a cell renderers’s minimum and natural
	// height if it were rendered to widget with the specified width.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget this cell will be rendering to.
	//   - width: size which is available for allocation.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumHeight (optional): location for storing the minimum size,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalHeight (optional): location for storing the preferred size,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredHeightForWidth func(widget Widgetter, width int) (minimumHeight, naturalHeight int)
	// PreferredWidth retrieves a renderer’s natural size when rendered to
	// widget.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget this cell will be rendering to.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumSize (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
	//   - naturalSize (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.
	//
	PreferredWidth func(widget Widgetter) (minimumSize, naturalSize int)
	// PreferredWidthForHeight retrieves a cell renderers’s minimum and natural
	// width if it were rendered to widget with the specified height.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget this cell will be rendering to.
	//   - height: size which is available for allocation.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimumWidth (optional): location for storing the minimum size,
	//     or NULL.
	//   - naturalWidth (optional): location for storing the preferred size,
	//     or NULL.
	//
	PreferredWidthForHeight func(widget Widgetter, height int) (minimumWidth, naturalWidth int)
	// RequestMode gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width
	// layout or a width-for-height layout.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - sizeRequestMode preferred by this renderer.
	//
	RequestMode func() SizeRequestMode
	// Snapshot invokes the virtual render function of the CellRenderer.
	// The three passed-in rectangles are areas in cr. Most renderers will
	// draw within cell_area; the xalign, yalign, xpad, and ypad fields of the
	// CellRenderer should be honored with respect to cell_area. background_area
	// includes the blank space around the cell, and also the area containing
	// the tree expander; so the background_area rectangles for all cells tile
	// to cover the entire window.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - snapshot to draw to.
	//   - widget owning window.
	//   - backgroundArea: entire cell area (including tree expanders and maybe
	//     padding on the sides).
	//   - cellArea: area normally rendered by a cell renderer.
	//   - flags that affect rendering.
	//
	Snapshot func(snapshot *Snapshot, widget Widgetter, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState)
	// StartEditing starts editing the contents of this cell, through a new
	// CellEditable widget created by the CellRendererClass.start_editing
	// virtual function.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - event (optional): Event.
	//   - widget that received the event.
	//   - path: widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
	//     e.g. for TreeView, a string representation of TreePath.
	//   - backgroundArea: background area as passed to
	//     gtk_cell_renderer_render().
	//   - cellArea: cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render().
	//   - flags: render flags.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - cellEditable (optional): new CellEditable for editing this cell,
	//     or NULL if editing is not possible.
	//
	StartEditing func(event gdk.Eventer, widget Widgetter, path string, backgroundArea, cellArea *gdk.Rectangle, flags CellRendererState) *CellEditable
}

CellRendererOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CellRendererPixbuf 

type CellRendererPixbuf struct {
	CellRenderer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererPixbuf renders a pixbuf in a cell

A CellRendererPixbuf can be used to render an image in a cell. It allows to render either a given Pixbuf (set via the CellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf property) or a named icon (set via the CellRendererPixbuf:icon-name property).

To support the tree view, CellRendererPixbuf also supports rendering two alternative pixbufs, when the CellRenderer:is-expander property is TRUE. If the CellRenderer:is-expanded property is TRUE and the CellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-open property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that pixbuf, if the CellRenderer:is-expanded property is FALSE and the CellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-closed property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that one.

func NewCellRendererPixbuf 

func NewCellRendererPixbuf() *CellRendererPixbuf

NewCellRendererPixbuf creates a new CellRendererPixbuf. Adjust rendering parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with TreeViewColumn, you can bind a property to a value in a TreeModel. For example, you can bind the “pixbuf” property on the cell renderer to a pixbuf value in the model, thus rendering a different image in each row of the TreeView.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererPixbuf: new cell renderer.

type CellRendererProgress 

type CellRendererProgress struct {
	CellRenderer

	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererProgress renders numbers as progress bars

CellRendererProgress renders a numeric value as a progress par in a cell. Additionally, it can display a text on top of the progress bar.

func NewCellRendererProgress 

func NewCellRendererProgress() *CellRendererProgress

NewCellRendererProgress creates a new CellRendererProgress.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererProgress: new cell renderer.

type CellRendererSpin 

type CellRendererSpin struct {
	CellRendererText
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererSpin renders a spin button in a cell

CellRendererSpin renders text in a cell like CellRendererText from which it is derived. But while CellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, CellRendererSpin offers a SpinButton widget. Of course, that means that the text has to be parseable as a floating point number.

The range of the spinbutton is taken from the adjustment property of the cell renderer, which can be set explicitly or mapped to a column in the tree model, like all properties of cell renders. CellRendererSpin also has properties for the CellRendererSpin:climb-rate and the number of CellRendererSpin:digits to display. Other SpinButton properties can be set in a handler for the CellRenderer::editing-started signal.

The CellRendererSpin cell renderer was added in GTK 2.10.

func NewCellRendererSpin 

func NewCellRendererSpin() *CellRendererSpin

NewCellRendererSpin creates a new CellRendererSpin.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererSpin: new CellRendererSpin.

type CellRendererSpinner 

type CellRendererSpinner struct {
	CellRenderer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererSpinner renders a spinning animation in a cell

GtkCellRendererSpinner renders a spinning animation in a cell, very similar to Spinner. It can often be used as an alternative to a CellRendererProgress for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.

To start the animation in a cell, set the CellRendererSpinner:active property to TRUE and increment the CellRendererSpinner:pulse property at regular intervals. The usual way to set the cell renderer properties for each cell is to bind them to columns in your tree model using e.g. gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute().

func NewCellRendererSpinner 

func NewCellRendererSpinner() *CellRendererSpinner

NewCellRendererSpinner returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate activity.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererSpinner: new CellRenderer.

type CellRendererState 

type CellRendererState C.guint

CellRendererState tells how a cell is to be rendered. 

const (
	// CellRendererSelected: cell is currently selected, and probably has a
	// selection colored background to render to.
	CellRendererSelected CellRendererState = 0b1
	// CellRendererPrelit: mouse is hovering over the cell.
	CellRendererPrelit CellRendererState = 0b10
	// CellRendererInsensitive: cell is drawn in an insensitive manner.
	CellRendererInsensitive CellRendererState = 0b100
	// CellRendererSorted: cell is in a sorted row.
	CellRendererSorted CellRendererState = 0b1000
	// CellRendererFocused: cell is in the focus row.
	CellRendererFocused CellRendererState = 0b10000
	// CellRendererExpandable: cell is in a row that can be expanded.
	CellRendererExpandable CellRendererState = 0b100000
	// CellRendererExpanded: cell is in a row that is expanded.
	CellRendererExpanded CellRendererState = 0b1000000
)

func (CellRendererState) Has 

func (c CellRendererState) Has(other CellRendererState) bool

Has returns true if c contains other.

func (CellRendererState) String 

func (c CellRendererState) String() string

String returns the names in string for CellRendererState.

type CellRendererText 

type CellRendererText struct {
	CellRenderer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererText renders text in a cell

A CellRendererText renders a given text in its cell, using the font, color and style information provided by its properties. The text will be ellipsized if it is too long and the CellRendererText:ellipsize property allows it.

If the CellRenderer:mode is GTK_CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE, the CellRendererText allows to edit its text using an entry.

func NewCellRendererText 

func NewCellRendererText() *CellRendererText

NewCellRendererText creates a new CellRendererText. Adjust how text is drawn using object properties. Object properties can be set globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with TreeViewColumn, you can bind a property to a value in a TreeModel. For example, you can bind the “text” property on the cell renderer to a string value in the model, thus rendering a different string in each row of the TreeView.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererText: new cell renderer.

func (*CellRendererText) ConnectEdited 

func (renderer *CellRendererText) ConnectEdited(f func(path, newText string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEdited: this signal is emitted after renderer has been edited.

It is the responsibility of the application to update the model and store new_text at the position indicated by path.

func (*CellRendererText) SetFixedHeightFromFont 

func (renderer *CellRendererText) SetFixedHeightFromFont(numberOfRows int)

SetFixedHeightFromFont sets the height of a renderer to explicitly be determined by the “font” and “y_pad” property set on it. Further changes in these properties do not affect the height, so they must be accompanied by a subsequent call to this function. Using this function is inflexible, and should really only be used if calculating the size of a cell is too slow (ie, a massive number of cells displayed). If number_of_rows is -1, then the fixed height is unset, and the height is determined by the properties again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • numberOfRows: number of rows of text each cell renderer is allocated, or -1.

type CellRendererTextClass added in v0.0.5 

type CellRendererTextClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererTextClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CellRendererTextClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CellRendererTextClass) ParentClass() *CellRendererClass

type CellRendererTextOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CellRendererTextOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - path
	//   - newText
	//
	Edited func(path, newText string)
}

CellRendererTextOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CellRendererToggle 

type CellRendererToggle struct {
	CellRenderer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellRendererToggle renders a toggle button in a cell

CellRendererToggle renders a toggle button in a cell. The button is drawn as a radio or a checkbutton, depending on the CellRendererToggle:radio property. When activated, it emits the CellRendererToggle::toggled signal.

func NewCellRendererToggle 

func NewCellRendererToggle() *CellRendererToggle

NewCellRendererToggle creates a new CellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with TreeViewColumn, you can bind a property to a value in a TreeModel. For example, you can bind the “active” property on the cell renderer to a boolean value in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of the model.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellRendererToggle: new cell renderer.

func (*CellRendererToggle) Activatable 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) Activatable() bool

Activatable returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.

func (*CellRendererToggle) Active 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) Active() bool

Active returns whether the cell renderer is active. See gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cell renderer is active.

func (*CellRendererToggle) ConnectToggled 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) ConnectToggled(f func(path string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggled signal is emitted when the cell is toggled.

It is the responsibility of the application to update the model with the correct value to store at path. Often this is simply the opposite of the value currently stored at path.

func (*CellRendererToggle) Radio 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) Radio() bool

Radio returns whether we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.

func (*CellRendererToggle) SetActivatable 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) SetActivatable(setting bool)

SetActivatable makes the cell renderer activatable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: value to set.

func (*CellRendererToggle) SetActive 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) SetActive(setting bool)

SetActive activates or deactivates a cell renderer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: value to set.

func (*CellRendererToggle) SetRadio 

func (toggle *CellRendererToggle) SetRadio(radio bool)

SetRadio: if radio is TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle (i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles). If FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option). This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just before rendering each cell in the model (for TreeView, you set up a per-row setting using TreeViewColumn to associate model columns with cell renderer properties).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • radio: TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button.

type CellRendererer 

type CellRendererer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

CellRendererer describes types inherited from class CellRenderer.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type CellView 

type CellView struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	CellLayout
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CellView: widget displaying a single row of a GtkTreeModel

A CellView displays a single row of a TreeModel using a CellArea and CellAreaContext. A CellAreaContext can be provided to the CellView at construction time in order to keep the cellview in context of a group of cell views, this ensures that the renderers displayed will be properly aligned with each other (like the aligned cells in the menus of ComboBox).

CellView is Orientable in order to decide in which orientation the underlying CellAreaContext should be allocated. Taking the ComboBox menu as an example, cellviews should be oriented horizontally if the menus are listed top-to-bottom and thus all share the same width but may have separate individual heights (left-to-right menus should be allocated vertically since they all share the same height but may have variable widths).

CSS nodes

GtkCellView has a single CSS node with name cellview.

func NewCellView 

func NewCellView() *CellView

NewCellView creates a new CellView widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellView: newly created CellView widget.

func NewCellViewWithContext 

func NewCellViewWithContext(area CellAreaer, context *CellAreaContext) *CellView

NewCellViewWithContext creates a new CellView widget with a specific CellArea to layout cells and a specific CellAreaContext.

Specifying the same context for a handful of cells lets the underlying area synchronize the geometry for those cells, in this way alignments with cellviews for other rows are possible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • area to layout cells.
  • context in which to calculate cell geometry.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellView: newly created CellView widget.

func NewCellViewWithMarkup 

func NewCellViewWithMarkup(markup string) *CellView

NewCellViewWithMarkup creates a new CellView widget, adds a CellRendererText to it, and makes it show markup. The text can be marked up with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].

The function takes the following parameters:

  • markup: text to display in the cell view.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellView: newly created CellView widget.

func NewCellViewWithText 

func NewCellViewWithText(text string) *CellView

NewCellViewWithText creates a new CellView widget, adds a CellRendererText to it, and makes it show text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text to display in the cell view.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellView: newly created CellView widget.

func NewCellViewWithTexture 

func NewCellViewWithTexture(texture gdk.Texturer) *CellView

NewCellViewWithTexture creates a new CellView widget, adds a CellRendererPixbuf to it, and makes it show texture.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • texture: image to display in the cell view.

The function returns the following values:

  • cellView: newly created CellView widget.

func (*CellView) DisplayedRow 

func (cellView *CellView) DisplayedRow() *TreePath

DisplayedRow returns a TreePath referring to the currently displayed row. If no row is currently displayed, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): currently displayed row or NULL.

func (*CellView) DrawSensitive 

func (cellView *CellView) DrawSensitive() bool

DrawSensitive gets whether cell_view is configured to draw all of its cells in a sensitive state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether cell_view draws all of its cells in a sensitive state.

func (*CellView) FitModel 

func (cellView *CellView) FitModel() bool

FitModel gets whether cell_view is configured to request space to fit the entire TreeModel.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether cell_view requests space to fit the entire TreeModel.

func (*CellView) Model 

func (cellView *CellView) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model for cell_view. If no model is used NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional) used or NULL.

func (*CellView) SetDisplayedRow 

func (cellView *CellView) SetDisplayedRow(path *TreePath)

SetDisplayedRow sets the row of the model that is currently displayed by the CellView. If the path is unset, then the contents of the cellview “stick” at their last value; this is not normally a desired result, but may be a needed intermediate state if say, the model for the CellView becomes temporarily empty.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) or NULL to unset.

func (*CellView) SetDrawSensitive 

func (cellView *CellView) SetDrawSensitive(drawSensitive bool)

SetDrawSensitive sets whether cell_view should draw all of its cells in a sensitive state, this is used by ComboBox menus to ensure that rows with insensitive cells that contain children appear sensitive in the parent menu item.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drawSensitive: whether to draw all cells in a sensitive state.

func (*CellView) SetFitModel 

func (cellView *CellView) SetFitModel(fitModel bool)

SetFitModel sets whether cell_view should request space to fit the entire TreeModel.

This is used by ComboBox to ensure that the cell view displayed on the combo box’s button always gets enough space and does not resize when selection changes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fitModel: whether cell_view should request space for the whole model.

func (*CellView) SetModel 

func (cellView *CellView) SetModel(model TreeModeller)

SetModel sets the model for cell_view. If cell_view already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If model is NULL, then it will unset the old model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): TreeModel.

type CenterBox 

type CenterBox struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CenterBox: GtkCenterBox arranges three children in a row, keeping the middle child centered as well as possible.

!An example GtkCenterBox (centerbox.png)

To add children to GtkCenterBox, use gtk.CenterBox.SetStartWidget(), gtk.CenterBox.SetCenterWidget() and gtk.CenterBox.SetEndWidget().

The sizing and positioning of children can be influenced with the align and expand properties of the children.

GtkCenterBox as GtkBuildable

The GtkCenterBox implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing children in the 3 positions by specifying “start”, “center” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.

CSS nodes

GtkCenterBox uses a single CSS node with the name “box”,

The first child of the GtkCenterBox will be allocated depending on the text direction, i.e. in left-to-right layouts it will be allocated on the left and in right-to-left layouts on the right.

In vertical orientation, the nodes of the children are arranged from top to bottom.

Accessibility

GtkCenterBox uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewCenterBox 

func NewCenterBox() *CenterBox

NewCenterBox creates a new GtkCenterBox.

The function returns the following values:

  • centerBox: new GtkCenterBox.

func (*CenterBox) BaselinePosition 

func (self *CenterBox) BaselinePosition() BaselinePosition

BaselinePosition gets the value set by gtk_center_box_set_baseline_position().

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: baseline position.

func (*CenterBox) CenterWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) CenterWidget() Widgetter

CenterWidget gets the center widget, or NULL if there is none.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): center widget.

func (*CenterBox) EndWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) EndWidget() Widgetter

EndWidget gets the end widget, or NULL if there is none.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): end widget.

func (*CenterBox) SetBaselinePosition 

func (self *CenterBox) SetBaselinePosition(position BaselinePosition)

SetBaselinePosition sets the baseline position of a center box.

This affects only horizontal boxes with at least one baseline aligned child. If there is more vertical space available than requested, and the baseline is not allocated by the parent then position is used to allocate the baseline wrt. the extra space available.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: GtkBaselinePosition.

func (*CenterBox) SetCenterWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) SetCenterWidget(child Widgetter)

SetCenterWidget sets the center widget.

To remove the existing center widget, pas NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): new center widget, or NULL.

func (*CenterBox) SetEndWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) SetEndWidget(child Widgetter)

SetEndWidget sets the end widget.

To remove the existing end widget, pass NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): new end widget, or NULL.

func (*CenterBox) SetStartWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) SetStartWidget(child Widgetter)

SetStartWidget sets the start widget.

To remove the existing start widget, pass NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): new start widget, or NULL.

func (*CenterBox) StartWidget 

func (self *CenterBox) StartWidget() Widgetter

StartWidget gets the start widget, or NULL if there is none.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): start widget.

type CenterLayout 

type CenterLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CenterLayout: GtkCenterLayout is a layout manager that manages up to three children.

The start widget is allocated at the start of the layout (left in left-to-right locales and right in right-to-left ones), and the end widget at the end.

The center widget is centered regarding the full width of the layout's.

func NewCenterLayout 

func NewCenterLayout() *CenterLayout

NewCenterLayout creates a new GtkCenterLayout.

The function returns the following values:

  • centerLayout: newly created GtkCenterLayout.

func (*CenterLayout) BaselinePosition 

func (self *CenterLayout) BaselinePosition() BaselinePosition

BaselinePosition returns the baseline position of the layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: current baseline position of self.

func (*CenterLayout) CenterWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) CenterWidget() Widgetter

CenterWidget returns the center widget of the layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): current center widget of self.

func (*CenterLayout) EndWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) EndWidget() Widgetter

EndWidget returns the end widget of the layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): current end widget of self.

func (*CenterLayout) Orientation 

func (self *CenterLayout) Orientation() Orientation

Orientation gets the current orienration of the layout manager.

The function returns the following values:

  • orientation: current orientation of self.

func (*CenterLayout) SetBaselinePosition 

func (self *CenterLayout) SetBaselinePosition(baselinePosition BaselinePosition)

SetBaselinePosition sets the new baseline position of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • baselinePosition: new baseline position.

func (*CenterLayout) SetCenterWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) SetCenterWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetCenterWidget sets the new center widget of self.

To remove the existing center widget, pass NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): new center widget.

func (*CenterLayout) SetEndWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) SetEndWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetEndWidget sets the new end widget of self.

To remove the existing center widget, pass NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): new end widget.

func (*CenterLayout) SetOrientation 

func (self *CenterLayout) SetOrientation(orientation Orientation)

SetOrientation sets the orientation of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: new orientation.

func (*CenterLayout) SetStartWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) SetStartWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetStartWidget sets the new start widget of self.

To remove the existing start widget, pass NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): new start widget.

func (*CenterLayout) StartWidget 

func (self *CenterLayout) StartWidget() Widgetter

StartWidget returns the start widget fo the layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): current start widget of self.

type CenterLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type CenterLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CenterLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CenterLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CenterLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type CenterLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CenterLayoutOverrides struct {
}

CenterLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CheckButton 

type CheckButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Actionable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CheckButton: GtkCheckButton places a label next to an indicator.

!Example GtkCheckButtons (check-button.png)

A GtkCheckButton is created by calling either gtk.CheckButton.New or gtk.CheckButton.NewWithLabel.

The state of a GtkCheckButton can be set specifically using gtk.CheckButton.SetActive(), and retrieved using gtk.CheckButton.GetActive().

Inconsistent state

In addition to "on" and "off", check buttons can be an "in between" state that is neither on nor off. This can be used e.g. when the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a check button, and the current values in that range are inconsistent.

To set a GtkCheckButton to inconsistent state, use gtk.CheckButton.SetInconsistent().

Grouping

Check buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.

Grouped check buttons use a different indicator, and are commonly referred to as *radio buttons*.

!Example GtkCheckButtons (radio-button.png)

To add a GtkCheckButton to a group, use gtk.CheckButton.SetGroup().

CSS nodes 

checkbutton[.text-button]
├── check
╰── [label]

A GtkCheckButton has a main node with name checkbutton. If the gtk.CheckButton:label property is set, it contains a label child. The indicator node is named check when no group is set, and radio if the checkbutton is grouped together with other checkbuttons.

Accessibility

GtkCheckButton uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_CHECKBOX role.

func NewCheckButton 

func NewCheckButton() *CheckButton

NewCheckButton creates a new GtkCheckButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • checkButton: new GtkCheckButton.

func NewCheckButtonWithLabel 

func NewCheckButtonWithLabel(label string) *CheckButton

NewCheckButtonWithLabel creates a new GtkCheckButton with the given text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text for the check button.

The function returns the following values:

  • checkButton: new GtkCheckButton.

func NewCheckButtonWithMnemonic 

func NewCheckButtonWithMnemonic(label string) *CheckButton

NewCheckButtonWithMnemonic creates a new GtkCheckButton with the given text and a mnemonic.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text of the button, with an underscore in front of the mnemonic character.

The function returns the following values:

  • checkButton: new GtkCheckButton.

func (*CheckButton) Active 

func (self *CheckButton) Active() bool

Active returns whether the check button is active.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the check button is active.

func (*CheckButton) ConnectActivate 

func (self *CheckButton) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted to when the check button is activated.

The ::activate signal on GtkCheckButton is an action signal and emitting it causes the button to animate press then release.

Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the gtk.CheckButton::toggled signal.

func (*CheckButton) ConnectToggled 

func (self *CheckButton) ConnectToggled(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggled is emitted when the buttons's gtk.CheckButton:active property changes.

func (*CheckButton) Inconsistent 

func (checkButton *CheckButton) Inconsistent() bool

Inconsistent returns whether the check button is in an inconsistent state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if check_button is currently in an inconsistent state.

func (*CheckButton) Label 

func (self *CheckButton) Label() string

Label returns the label of the check button.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): label self shows next to the indicator. If no label is shown, NULL will be returned.

func (*CheckButton) SetActive 

func (self *CheckButton) SetActive(setting bool)

SetActive changes the check buttons active state.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*CheckButton) SetGroup 

func (self *CheckButton) SetGroup(group *CheckButton)

SetGroup adds self to the group of group.

In a group of multiple check buttons, only one button can be active at a time. The behavior of a checkbutton in a group is also commonly known as a *radio button*.

Setting the group of a check button also changes the css name of the indicator widget's CSS node to 'radio'.

Setting up groups in a cycle leads to undefined behavior.

Note that the same effect can be achieved via the gtk.Actionable API, by using the same action with parameter type and state type 's' for all buttons in the group, and giving each button its own target value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • group (optional): another GtkCheckButton to form a group with.

func (*CheckButton) SetInconsistent 

func (checkButton *CheckButton) SetInconsistent(inconsistent bool)

SetInconsistent sets the GtkCheckButton to inconsistent state.

You shoud turn off the inconsistent state again if the user checks the check button. This has to be done manually.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • inconsistent: TRUE if state is inconsistent.

func (*CheckButton) SetLabel 

func (self *CheckButton) SetLabel(label string)

SetLabel sets the text of self.

If gtk.CheckButton:use-underline is TRUE, an underscore in label is interpreted as mnemonic indicator, see gtk.CheckButton.SetUseUnderline() for details on this behavior.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text shown next to the indicator, or NULL to show no text.

func (*CheckButton) SetUseUnderline 

func (self *CheckButton) SetUseUnderline(setting bool)

SetUseUnderline sets whether underlines in the label indicate mnemonics.

If setting is TRUE, an underscore character in self's label indicates a mnemonic accelerator key. This behavior is similar to gtk.Label:use-underline.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*CheckButton) UseUnderline 

func (self *CheckButton) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline returns whether underlines in the label indicate mnemonics.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of the gtk.CheckButton:use-underline property. See gtk.CheckButton.SetUseUnderline() for details on how to set a new value.

type CheckButtonClass added in v0.0.5 

type CheckButtonClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CheckButtonClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CheckButtonClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CheckButtonClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type CheckButtonOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CheckButtonOverrides struct {
	Activate func()
	Toggled  func()
}

CheckButtonOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ClosureExpression 

type ClosureExpression struct {
	Expression
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ClosureExpression: expression using a custom GClosure to compute the value from its parameters.

type ColorButton 

type ColorButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	ColorChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColorButton: GtkColorButton allows to open a color chooser dialog to change the color.

!An example GtkColorButton (color-button.png)

It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.

CSS nodes 

colorbutton
╰── button.color
    ╰── [content]

GtkColorButton has a single CSS node with name colorbutton which contains a button node. To differentiate it from a plain GtkButton, it gets the .color style class.

func NewColorButton 

func NewColorButton() *ColorButton

NewColorButton creates a new color button.

This returns a widget in the form of a small button containing a swatch representing the current selected color. When the button is clicked, a color chooser dialog will open, allowing the user to select a color. The swatch will be updated to reflect the new color when the user finishes.

The function returns the following values:

  • colorButton: new color button.

func NewColorButtonWithRGBA 

func NewColorButtonWithRGBA(rgba *gdk.RGBA) *ColorButton

NewColorButtonWithRGBA creates a new color button showing the given color.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rgba: GdkRGBA to set the current color with.

The function returns the following values:

  • colorButton: new color button.

func (*ColorButton) ConnectColorSet 

func (button *ColorButton) ConnectColorSet(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectColorSet is emitted when the user selects a color.

When handling this signal, use gtk.ColorChooser.GetRGBA() to find out which color was just selected.

Note that this signal is only emitted when the user changes the color. If you need to react to programmatic color changes as well, use the notify::color signal.

func (*ColorButton) Modal 

func (button *ColorButton) Modal() bool

Modal gets whether the dialog is modal.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the dialog is modal.

func (*ColorButton) SetModal 

func (button *ColorButton) SetModal(modal bool)

SetModal sets whether the dialog should be modal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modal: TRUE to make the dialog modal.

func (*ColorButton) SetTitle 

func (button *ColorButton) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title for the color chooser dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title: string containing new window title.

func (*ColorButton) Title 

func (button *ColorButton) Title() string

Title gets the title of the color chooser dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: internal string, do not free the return value.

type ColorChooser 

type ColorChooser struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColorChooser: GtkColorChooser is an interface that is implemented by widgets for choosing colors.

Depending on the situation, colors may be allowed to have alpha (translucency).

In GTK, the main widgets that implement this interface are gtk.ColorChooserWidget, gtk.ColorChooserDialog and gtk.ColorButton.

ColorChooser wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*ColorChooser) AddPalette 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) AddPalette(orientation Orientation, colorsPerLine int, colors []gdk.RGBA)

AddPalette adds a palette to the color chooser.

If orientation is horizontal, the colors are grouped in rows, with colors_per_line colors in each row. If horizontal is FALSE, the colors are grouped in columns instead.

The default color palette of gtk.ColorChooserWidget has 45 colors, organized in columns of 5 colors (this includes some grays).

The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the palettes have 9-10 columns.

Calling this function for the first time has the side effect of removing the default color palette from the color chooser.

If colors is NULL, removes all previously added palettes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL if the palette should be displayed in rows, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL for columns.
  • colorsPerLine: number of colors to show in each row/column.
  • colors (optional) of the palette, or NULL.

func (*ColorChooser) ConnectColorActivated 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) ConnectColorActivated(f func(color *gdk.RGBA)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectColorActivated is emitted when a color is activated from the color chooser.

This usually happens when the user clicks a color swatch, or a color is selected and the user presses one of the keys Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter.

func (*ColorChooser) RGBA 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) RGBA() *gdk.RGBA

RGBA gets the currently-selected color.

The function returns the following values:

  • color: GdkRGBA to fill in with the current color.

func (*ColorChooser) SetRGBA 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) SetRGBA(color *gdk.RGBA)

SetRGBA sets the color.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • color: new color.

func (*ColorChooser) SetUseAlpha 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) SetUseAlpha(useAlpha bool)

SetUseAlpha sets whether or not the color chooser should use the alpha channel.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useAlpha: TRUE if color chooser should use alpha channel, FALSE if not.

func (*ColorChooser) UseAlpha 

func (chooser *ColorChooser) UseAlpha() bool

UseAlpha returns whether the color chooser shows the alpha channel.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the color chooser uses the alpha channel, FALSE if not.

type ColorChooserDialog 

type ColorChooserDialog struct {
	Dialog

	*coreglib.Object
	ColorChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColorChooserDialog: dialog for choosing a color.

!An example GtkColorChooserDialog (colorchooser.png)

GtkColorChooserDialog implements the gtk.ColorChooser interface and does not provide much API of its own.

To create a GtkColorChooserDialog, use gtk.ColorChooserDialog.New.

To change the initially selected color, use gtk.ColorChooser.SetRGBA(). To get the selected color use gtk.ColorChooser.GetRGBA().

func NewColorChooserDialog 

func NewColorChooserDialog(title string, parent *Window) *ColorChooserDialog

NewColorChooserDialog creates a new GtkColorChooserDialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional): title of the dialog, or NULL.
  • parent (optional): transient parent of the dialog, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • colorChooserDialog: new GtkColorChooserDialog.

type ColorChooserInterface added in v0.0.5 

type ColorChooserInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColorChooserInterface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ColorChooserWidget 

type ColorChooserWidget struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	ColorChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColorChooserWidget: GtkColorChooserWidget widget lets the user select a color.

By default, the chooser presents a predefined palette of colors, plus a small number of settable custom colors. It is also possible to select a different color with the single-color editor.

To enter the single-color editing mode, use the context menu of any color of the palette, or use the '+' button to add a new custom color.

The chooser automatically remembers the last selection, as well as custom colors.

To create a GtkColorChooserWidget, use gtk.ColorChooserWidget.New.

To change the initially selected color, use gtk.ColorChooser.SetRGBA(). To get the selected color use gtk.ColorChooser.GetRGBA().

The GtkColorChooserWidget is used in the gtk.ColorChooserDialog to provide a dialog for selecting colors.

CSS names

GtkColorChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name colorchooser.

func NewColorChooserWidget 

func NewColorChooserWidget() *ColorChooserWidget

NewColorChooserWidget creates a new GtkColorChooserWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • colorChooserWidget: new GtkColorChooserWidget.

type ColorChooserer 

type ColorChooserer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// AddPalette adds a palette to the color chooser.
	AddPalette(orientation Orientation, colorsPerLine int, colors []gdk.RGBA)
	// RGBA gets the currently-selected color.
	RGBA() *gdk.RGBA
	// UseAlpha returns whether the color chooser shows the alpha channel.
	UseAlpha() bool
	// SetRGBA sets the color.
	SetRGBA(color *gdk.RGBA)
	// SetUseAlpha sets whether or not the color chooser should use the alpha
	// channel.
	SetUseAlpha(useAlpha bool)

	// Color-activated is emitted when a color is activated from the color
	// chooser.
	ConnectColorActivated(func(color *gdk.RGBA)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

ColorChooserer describes ColorChooser's interface methods.

type ColumnView 

type ColumnView struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColumnView: GtkColumnView presents a large dynamic list of items using multiple columns with headers.

GtkColumnView uses the factories of its columns to generate a cell widget for each column, for each visible item and displays them together as the row for this item.

The gtk.ColumnView:show-row-separators and [propertyGtk.ColumnView:show-column-separators] properties offer a simple way to display separators between the rows or columns.

GtkColumnView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on *rubberband selection*, using gtk.ColumnView:enable-rubberband.

The column view supports sorting that can be customized by the user by clicking on column headers. To set this up, the GtkSorter returned by gtk.ColumnView.GetSorter() must be attached to a sort model for the data that the view is showing, and the columns must have sorters attached to them by calling gtk.ColumnViewColumn.SetSorter(). The initial sort order can be set with gtk.ColumnView.SortByColumn().

The column view also supports interactive resizing and reordering of columns, via Drag-and-Drop of the column headers. This can be enabled or disabled with the gtk.ColumnView:reorderable and gtk.ColumnViewColumn:resizable properties.

To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview (section-list-widget.html).

CSS nodes 

columnview[.column-separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table]
├── header
│   ├── <column header>
┊   ┊
│   ╰── <column header>
│
├── listview
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]

GtkColumnView uses a single CSS node named columnview. It may carry the .column-separators style class, when gtk.ColumnView:show-column-separators property is set. Header widgets appear below a node with name header. The rows are contained in a GtkListView widget, so there is a listview node with the same structure as for a standalone GtkListView widget. If gtk.ColumnView:show-row-separators is set, it will be passed on to the list view, causing its CSS node to carry the .separators style class. For rubberband selection, a node with name rubberband is used.

The main columnview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation (section-list-widget.html#list-styles): .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.

Accessibility

GtkColumnView uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TREE_GRID role, header title widgets are using the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COLUMN_HEADER role. The row widgets are using the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_ROW role, and individual cells are using the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELL role.

func NewColumnView 

func NewColumnView(model SelectionModeller) *ColumnView

NewColumnView creates a new GtkColumnView.

You most likely want to call gtk.ColumnView.AppendColumn() to add columns next.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): list model to use, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • columnView: new GtkColumnView.

func (*ColumnView) AppendColumn 

func (self *ColumnView) AppendColumn(column *ColumnViewColumn)

AppendColumn appends the column to the end of the columns in self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: GtkColumnViewColumn that hasn't been added to a GtkColumnView yet.

func (*ColumnView) Columns 

func (self *ColumnView) Columns() *gio.ListModel

Columns gets the list of columns in this column view.

This list is constant over the lifetime of self and can be used to monitor changes to the columns of self by connecting to the ::items-changed signal.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: list managing the columns.

func (*ColumnView) ConnectActivate 

func (self *ColumnView) ConnectActivate(f func(position uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when a row has been activated by the user, usually via activating the GtkListBase|list.activate-item action.

This allows for a convenient way to handle activation in a columnview. See gtk.ListItem.SetActivatable() for details on how to use this signal.

func (*ColumnView) EnableRubberband 

func (self *ColumnView) EnableRubberband() bool

EnableRubberband returns whether rows can be selected by dragging with the mouse.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rubberband selection is enabled.

func (*ColumnView) InsertColumn 

func (self *ColumnView) InsertColumn(position uint, column *ColumnViewColumn)

InsertColumn inserts a column at the given position in the columns of self.

If column is already a column of self, it will be repositioned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to insert column at.
  • column: GtkColumnViewColumn to insert.

func (*ColumnView) Model 

func (self *ColumnView) Model() *SelectionModel

Model gets the model that's currently used to read the items displayed.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionModel (optional): model in use.

func (*ColumnView) RemoveColumn 

func (self *ColumnView) RemoveColumn(column *ColumnViewColumn)

RemoveColumn removes the column from the list of columns of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: GtkColumnViewColumn that's part of self.

func (*ColumnView) Reorderable 

func (self *ColumnView) Reorderable() bool

Reorderable returns whether columns are reorderable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if columns are reorderable.

func (*ColumnView) SetEnableRubberband 

func (self *ColumnView) SetEnableRubberband(enableRubberband bool)

SetEnableRubberband sets whether selections can be changed by dragging with the mouse.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableRubberband: TRUE to enable rubberband selection.

func (*ColumnView) SetModel 

func (self *ColumnView) SetModel(model SelectionModeller)

SetModel sets the model to use.

This must be a gtk.SelectionModel.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*ColumnView) SetReorderable 

func (self *ColumnView) SetReorderable(reorderable bool)

SetReorderable sets whether columns should be reorderable by dragging.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • reorderable: whether columns should be reorderable.

func (*ColumnView) SetShowColumnSeparators 

func (self *ColumnView) SetShowColumnSeparators(showColumnSeparators bool)

SetShowColumnSeparators sets whether the list should show separators between columns.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showColumnSeparators: TRUE to show column separators.

func (*ColumnView) SetShowRowSeparators 

func (self *ColumnView) SetShowRowSeparators(showRowSeparators bool)

SetShowRowSeparators sets whether the list should show separators between rows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showRowSeparators: TRUE to show row separators.

func (*ColumnView) SetSingleClickActivate 

func (self *ColumnView) SetSingleClickActivate(singleClickActivate bool)

SetSingleClickActivate sets whether rows should be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • singleClickActivate: TRUE to activate items on single click.

func (*ColumnView) ShowColumnSeparators 

func (self *ColumnView) ShowColumnSeparators() bool

ShowColumnSeparators returns whether the list should show separators between columns.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the list shows column separators.

func (*ColumnView) ShowRowSeparators 

func (self *ColumnView) ShowRowSeparators() bool

ShowRowSeparators returns whether the list should show separators between rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the list shows separators.

func (*ColumnView) SingleClickActivate 

func (self *ColumnView) SingleClickActivate() bool

SingleClickActivate returns whether rows will be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rows are activated on single click.

func (*ColumnView) SortByColumn 

func (self *ColumnView) SortByColumn(column *ColumnViewColumn, direction SortType)

SortByColumn sets the sorting of the view.

This function should be used to set up the initial sorting. At runtime, users can change the sorting of a column view by clicking on the list headers.

This call only has an effect if the sorter returned by gtk.ColumnView.GetSorter() is set on a sort model, and gtk.ColumnViewColumn.SetSorter() has been called on column to associate a sorter with the column.

If column is NULL, the view will be unsorted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column (optional): GtkColumnViewColumn to sort by, or NULL.
  • direction to sort in.

func (*ColumnView) Sorter 

func (self *ColumnView) Sorter() *Sorter

Sorter returns a special sorter that reflects the users sorting choices in the column view.

To allow users to customizable sorting by clicking on column headers, this sorter needs to be set on the sort model underneath the model that is displayed by the view.

See gtk.ColumnViewColumn.SetSorter() for setting up per-column sorting.

Here is an example: 

gtk_column_view_column_set_sorter (column, sorter);
gtk_column_view_append_column (view, column);
sorter = g_object_ref (gtk_column_view_get_sorter (view)));
model = gtk_sort_list_model_new (store, sorter);
selection = gtk_no_selection_new (model);
gtk_column_view_set_model (view, selection);.

The function returns the following values:

  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter of self.

type ColumnViewColumn 

type ColumnViewColumn struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ColumnViewColumn: GtkColumnViewColumn represents the columns being added to GtkColumnView.

The main ingredient for a GtkColumnViewColumn is the GtkListItemFactory that tells the columnview how to create cells for this column from items in the model.

Columns have a title, and can optionally have a header menu set with gtk.ColumnViewColumn.SetHeaderMenu().

A sorter can be associated with a column using gtk.ColumnViewColumn.SetSorter(), to let users influence sorting by clicking on the column header.

func NewColumnViewColumn 

func NewColumnViewColumn(title string, factory *ListItemFactory) *ColumnViewColumn

NewColumnViewColumn creates a new GtkColumnViewColumn that uses the given factory for mapping items to widgets.

You most likely want to call gtk.ColumnView.AppendColumn() next.

The function takes ownership of the argument, so you can write code like: 

column = gtk_column_view_column_new (_("Name"),
  gtk_builder_list_item_factory_new_from_resource ("/name.ui"));.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional): title to use for this column.
  • factory (optional) to populate items with.

The function returns the following values:

  • columnViewColumn: new GtkColumnViewColumn using the given factory.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) ColumnView 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) ColumnView() *ColumnView

ColumnView gets the column view that's currently displaying this column.

If self has not been added to a column view yet, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • columnView (optional): column view displaying self.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Expand 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Expand() bool

Expand returns whether this column should expand.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this column expands.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Factory 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Factory() *ListItemFactory

Factory gets the factory that's currently used to populate list items for this column.

The function returns the following values:

  • listItemFactory (optional): factory in use.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) FixedWidth 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) FixedWidth() int

FixedWidth gets the fixed width of the column.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: fixed with of the column.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) HeaderMenu 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) HeaderMenu() gio.MenuModeller

HeaderMenu gets the menu model that is used to create the context menu for the column header.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional) or NULL.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Resizable 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Resizable() bool

Resizable returns whether this column is resizable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this column is resizable.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetExpand 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetExpand(expand bool)

SetExpand sets the column to take available extra space.

The extra space is shared equally amongst all columns that have the expand set to TRUE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expand: TRUE if this column should expand to fill available sace.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetFactory 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetFactory(factory *ListItemFactory)

SetFactory sets the GtkListItemFactory to use for populating list items for this column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factory (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetFixedWidth 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetFixedWidth(fixedWidth int)

SetFixedWidth: if fixed_width is not -1, sets the fixed width of column; otherwise unsets it.

Setting a fixed width overrides the automatically calculated width. Interactive resizing also sets the “fixed-width” property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fixedWidth: new fixed width, or -1.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetHeaderMenu 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetHeaderMenu(menu gio.MenuModeller)

SetHeaderMenu sets the menu model that is used to create the context menu for the column header.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • menu (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetResizable 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetResizable(resizable bool)

SetResizable sets whether this column should be resizable by dragging.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resizable: whether this column should be resizable.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetSorter 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetSorter(sorter *Sorter)

SetSorter associates a sorter with the column.

If sorter is NULL, the column will not let users change the sorting by clicking on its header.

This sorter can be made active by clicking on the column header, or by calling gtk.ColumnView.SortByColumn().

See gtk.ColumnView.GetSorter() for the necessary steps for setting up customizable sorting for gtk.ColumnView.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter to associate with column.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetTitle 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title of this column.

The title is displayed in the header of a GtkColumnView for this column and is therefore user-facing text that should be translated.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional): title to use for this column.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) SetVisible 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) SetVisible(visible bool)

SetVisible sets whether this column should be visible in views.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: whether this column should be visible.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Sorter 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Sorter() *Sorter

Sorter returns the sorter that is associated with the column.

The function returns the following values:

  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter of self.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Title 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Title() string

Title returns the title set with gtk_column_view_column_set_title().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional) column's title.

func (*ColumnViewColumn) Visible 

func (self *ColumnViewColumn) Visible() bool

Visible returns whether this column is visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this column is visible.

type ComboBox 

type ComboBox struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	CellEditable
	CellLayout
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ComboBox: GtkComboBox is a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of valid choices.

!An example GtkComboBox (combo-box.png)

The GtkComboBox displays the selected choice; when activated, the GtkComboBox displays a popup which allows the user to make a new choice.

The GtkComboBox uses the model-view pattern; the list of valid choices is specified in the form of a tree model, and the display of the choices can be adapted to the data in the model by using cell renderers, as you would in a tree view. This is possible since GtkComboBox implements the gtk.CellLayout interface. The tree model holding the valid choices is not restricted to a flat list, it can be a real tree, and the popup will reflect the tree structure.

To allow the user to enter values not in the model, the gtk.ComboBox:has-entry property allows the GtkComboBox to contain a gtk.Entry. This entry can be accessed by calling gtk.ComboBox.GetChild() on the combo box.

For a simple list of textual choices, the model-view API of GtkComboBox can be a bit overwhelming. In this case, gtk.ComboBoxText offers a simple alternative. Both GtkComboBox and GtkComboBoxText can contain an entry.

CSS nodes 

combobox
├── box.linked
│   ╰── button.combo
│       ╰── box
│           ├── cellview
│           ╰── arrow
╰── window.popup

A normal combobox contains a box with the .linked class, a button with the .combo class and inside those buttons, there are a cellview and an arrow. 

combobox
├── box.linked
│   ├── entry.combo
│   ╰── button.combo
│       ╰── box
│           ╰── arrow
╰── window.popup

A GtkComboBox with an entry has a single CSS node with name combobox. It contains a box with the .linked class. That box contains an entry and a button, both with the .combo class added. The button also contains another node with name arrow.

Accessibility

GtkComboBox uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COMBO_BOX role.

func NewComboBox 

func NewComboBox() *ComboBox

NewComboBox creates a new empty GtkComboBox.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBox: new GtkComboBox.

func NewComboBoxWithEntry 

func NewComboBoxWithEntry() *ComboBox

NewComboBoxWithEntry creates a new empty GtkComboBox with an entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBox: new GtkComboBox.

func NewComboBoxWithModel 

func NewComboBoxWithModel(model TreeModeller) *ComboBox

NewComboBoxWithModel creates a new GtkComboBox with a model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: GtkTreeModel.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBox: new GtkComboBox.

func NewComboBoxWithModelAndEntry 

func NewComboBoxWithModelAndEntry(model TreeModeller) *ComboBox

NewComboBoxWithModelAndEntry creates a new empty GtkComboBox with an entry and a model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: GtkTreeModel.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBox: new GtkComboBox.

func (*ComboBox) Active 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) Active() int

Active returns the index of the currently active item.

If the model is a non-flat treemodel, and the active item is not an immediate child of the root of the tree, this function returns gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0], where path is the gtk.TreePath of the active item.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: integer which is the index of the currently active item, or -1 if there’s no active item.

func (*ComboBox) ActiveID 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ActiveID() string

ActiveID returns the ID of the active row of combo_box.

This value is taken from the active row and the column specified by the gtk.ComboBox:id-column property of combo_box (see gtk.ComboBox.SetIDColumn()).

The returned value is an interned string which means that you can compare the pointer by value to other interned strings and that you must not free it.

If the gtk.ComboBox:id-column property of combo_box is not set, or if no row is active, or if the active row has a NULL ID value, then NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): ID of the active row, or NULL.

func (*ComboBox) ActiveIter 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ActiveIter() (*TreeIter, bool)

ActiveIter sets iter to point to the currently active item.

If no item is active, iter is left unchanged.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: GtkTreeIter.
  • ok: TRUE if iter was set, FALSE otherwise.

func (*ComboBox) ButtonSensitivity 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ButtonSensitivity() SensitivityType

ButtonSensitivity returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button sensitive or not when there are no items in the model.

The function returns the following values:

  • sensitivityType: GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button is sensitive when the model is empty, GTK_SENSITIVITY_OFF if the button is always insensitive or GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO if it is only sensitive as long as the model has one item to be selected.

func (*ComboBox) Child 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of combo_box.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of combo_box.

func (*ComboBox) ConnectChanged 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when the active item is changed.

The can be due to the user selecting a different item from the list, or due to a call to gtk.ComboBox.SetActiveIter(). It will also be emitted while typing into the entry of a combo box with an entry.

func (*ComboBox) ConnectFormatEntryText 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ConnectFormatEntryText(f func(path string) (utf8 string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectFormatEntryText is emitted to allow changing how the text in a combo box's entry is displayed.

See gtk.ComboBox:has-entry.

Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing path. That string will then be used to set the text in the combo box's entry. The default signal handler uses the text from the gtk.ComboBox:entry-text-column model column.

Here's an example signal handler which fetches data from the model and displays it in the entry. 

static char *
format_entry_text_callback (GtkComboBox *combo,
                            const char *path,
                            gpointer     user_data)
{
  GtkTreeIter iter;
  GtkTreeModel model;
  double       value;

  model = gtk_combo_box_get_model (combo);

  gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model, &iter, path);
  gtk_tree_model_get (model, &iter,
                      THE_DOUBLE_VALUE_COLUMN, &value,
                      -1);

  return g_strdup_printf ("g", value);
}.

func (*ComboBox) ConnectMoveActive 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ConnectMoveActive(f func(scrollType ScrollType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveActive is emitted to move the active selection.

This is an keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*ComboBox) ConnectPopdown 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ConnectPopdown(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPopdown is emitted to popdown the combo box list.

This is an keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are Alt+Up and Escape.

func (*ComboBox) ConnectPopup 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) ConnectPopup(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPopup is emitted to popup the combo box list.

This is an keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is Alt+Down.

func (*ComboBox) EntryTextColumn 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) EntryTextColumn() int

EntryTextColumn returns the column which combo_box is using to get the strings from to display in the internal entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column in the data source model of combo_box.

func (*ComboBox) HasEntry 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) HasEntry() bool

HasEntry returns whether the combo box has an entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether there is an entry in combo_box.

func (*ComboBox) IDColumn 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) IDColumn() int

IDColumn returns the column which combo_box is using to get string IDs for values from.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column in the data source model of combo_box.

func (*ComboBox) Model 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the GtkTreeModel of combo_box.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional): GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.

func (*ComboBox) Popdown 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) Popdown()

Popdown hides the menu or dropdown list of combo_box.

This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; applications should have little use for it.

func (*ComboBox) Popup 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) Popup()

Popup pops up the menu or dropdown list of combo_box.

This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; applications should have little use for it.

Before calling this, combo_box must be mapped, or nothing will happen.

func (*ComboBox) PopupFixedWidth 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) PopupFixedWidth() bool

PopupFixedWidth gets whether the popup uses a fixed width.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the popup uses a fixed width.

func (*ComboBox) PopupForDevice 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) PopupForDevice(device gdk.Devicer)

PopupForDevice pops up the menu of combo_box.

Note that currently this does not do anything with the device, as it was previously only used for list-mode combo boxes, and those were removed in GTK 4. However, it is retained in case similar functionality is added back later.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • device: GdkDevice.

func (*ComboBox) SetActive 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetActive(index_ int)

SetActive sets the active item of combo_box to be the item at index.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: index in the model passed during construction, or -1 to have no active item.

func (*ComboBox) SetActiveID 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetActiveID(activeId string) bool

SetActiveID changes the active row of combo_box to the one that has an ID equal to active_id.

If active_id is NULL, the active row is unset. Rows having a NULL ID string cannot be made active by this function.

If the gtk.ComboBox:id-column property of combo_box is unset or if no row has the given ID then the function does nothing and returns FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • activeId (optional): ID of the row to select, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a row with a matching ID was found. If a NULL active_id was given to unset the active row, the function always returns TRUE.

func (*ComboBox) SetActiveIter 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetActiveIter(iter *TreeIter)

SetActiveIter sets the current active item to be the one referenced by iter.

If iter is NULL, the active item is unset.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter (optional): GtkTreeIter, or NULL.

func (*ComboBox) SetButtonSensitivity 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetButtonSensitivity(sensitivity SensitivityType)

SetButtonSensitivity sets whether the dropdown button of the combo box should update its sensitivity depending on the model contents.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sensitivity: specify the sensitivity of the dropdown button.

func (*ComboBox) SetChild 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of combo_box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*ComboBox) SetEntryTextColumn 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetEntryTextColumn(textColumn int)

SetEntryTextColumn sets the model column which combo_box should use to get strings from to be text_column.

The column text_column in the model of combo_box must be of type G_TYPE_STRING.

This is only relevant if combo_box has been created with gtk.ComboBox:has-entry as TRUE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • textColumn: column in model to get the strings from for the internal entry.

func (*ComboBox) SetIDColumn 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetIDColumn(idColumn int)

SetIDColumn sets the model column which combo_box should use to get string IDs for values from.

The column id_column in the model of combo_box must be of type G_TYPE_STRING.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • idColumn: column in model to get string IDs for values from.

func (*ComboBox) SetModel 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetModel(model TreeModeller)

SetModel sets the model used by combo_box to be model.

Will unset a previously set model (if applicable). If model is NULL, then it will unset the model.

Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to call gtk.CellLayout.Clear() yourself if you need to set up different cell renderers for the new model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GtkTreeModel.

func (*ComboBox) SetPopupFixedWidth 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetPopupFixedWidth(fixed bool)

SetPopupFixedWidth specifies whether the popup’s width should be a fixed width.

If fixed is TRUE, the popup's width is set to match the allocated width of the combo box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fixed: whether to use a fixed popup width.

func (*ComboBox) SetRowSeparatorFunc 

func (comboBox *ComboBox) SetRowSeparatorFunc(fn TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc)

SetRowSeparatorFunc sets the row separator function, which is used to determine whether a row should be drawn as a separator.

If the row separator function is NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc.

type ComboBoxClass added in v0.0.5 

type ComboBoxClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ComboBoxClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ComboBoxClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *ComboBoxClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type ComboBoxOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ComboBoxOverrides struct {
	Changed func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	FormatEntryText func(path string) string
}

ComboBoxOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ComboBoxText 

type ComboBoxText struct {
	ComboBox
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ComboBoxText: GtkComboBoxText is a simple variant of GtkComboBox for text-only use cases.

!An example GtkComboBoxText (combo-box-text.png)

GtkComboBoxText hides the model-view complexity of GtkComboBox.

To create a GtkComboBoxText, use gtk.ComboBoxText.New or gtk.ComboBoxText.NewWithEntry.

You can add items to a GtkComboBoxText with gtk.ComboBoxText.AppendText(), gtk.ComboBoxText.InsertText() or gtk.ComboBoxText.PrependText() and remove options with gtk.ComboBoxText.Remove().

If the GtkComboBoxText contains an entry (via the gtk.ComboBox:has-entry property), its contents can be retrieved using gtk.ComboBoxText.GetActiveText().

You should not call gtk.ComboBox.SetModel() or attempt to pack more cells into this combo box via its gtk.CellLayout interface.

GtkComboBoxText as GtkBuildable

The GtkComboBoxText implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element can specify the “id” corresponding to the appended text and also supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.

Here is a UI definition fragment specifying GtkComboBoxText items: 

<object class="GtkComboBoxText">
  <items>
    <item translatable="yes" id="factory">Factory</item>
    <item translatable="yes" id="home">Home</item>
    <item translatable="yes" id="subway">Subway</item>
  </items>
</object>

CSS nodes 

combobox
╰── box.linked
    ├── entry.combo
    ├── button.combo
    ╰── window.popup

GtkComboBoxText has a single CSS node with name combobox. It adds the style class .combo to the main CSS nodes of its entry and button children, and the .linked class to the node of its internal box.

func NewComboBoxText 

func NewComboBoxText() *ComboBoxText

NewComboBoxText creates a new GtkComboBoxText.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBoxText: new GtkComboBoxText.

func NewComboBoxTextWithEntry 

func NewComboBoxTextWithEntry() *ComboBoxText

NewComboBoxTextWithEntry creates a new GtkComboBoxText with an entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • comboBoxText: new GtkComboBoxText.

func (*ComboBoxText) ActiveText 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) ActiveText() string

ActiveText returns the currently active string in combo_box.

If no row is currently selected, NULL is returned. If combo_box contains an entry, this function will return its contents (which will not necessarily be an item from the list).

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): newly allocated string containing the currently active text. Must be freed with g_free().

func (*ComboBoxText) Append 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) Append(id, text string)

Append appends text to the list of strings stored in combo_box.

If id is non-NULL then it is used as the ID of the row.

This is the same as calling gtk.ComboBoxText.Insert() with a position of -1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id (optional): string ID for this value, or NULL.
  • text: string.

func (*ComboBoxText) AppendText 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) AppendText(text string)

AppendText appends text to the list of strings stored in combo_box.

This is the same as calling gtk.ComboBoxText.InsertText() with a position of -1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text: string.

func (*ComboBoxText) Insert 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) Insert(position int, id, text string)

Insert inserts text at position in the list of strings stored in combo_box.

If id is non-NULL then it is used as the ID of the row. See gtk.ComboBox:id-column.

If position is negative then text is appended.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: index to insert text.
  • id (optional): string ID for this value, or NULL.
  • text: string to display.

func (*ComboBoxText) InsertText 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) InsertText(position int, text string)

InsertText inserts text at position in the list of strings stored in combo_box.

If position is negative then text is appended.

This is the same as calling gtk.ComboBoxText.Insert() with a NULL ID string.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: index to insert text.
  • text: string.

func (*ComboBoxText) Prepend 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) Prepend(id, text string)

Prepend prepends text to the list of strings stored in combo_box.

If id is non-NULL then it is used as the ID of the row.

This is the same as calling gtk.ComboBoxText.Insert() with a position of 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id (optional): string ID for this value, or NULL.
  • text: string.

func (*ComboBoxText) PrependText 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) PrependText(text string)

PrependText prepends text to the list of strings stored in combo_box.

This is the same as calling gtk.ComboBoxText.InsertText() with a position of 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text: string.

func (*ComboBoxText) Remove 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) Remove(position int)

Remove removes the string at position from combo_box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: index of the item to remove.

func (*ComboBoxText) RemoveAll 

func (comboBox *ComboBoxText) RemoveAll()

RemoveAll removes all the text entries from the combo box.

type ConstantExpression 

type ConstantExpression struct {
	Expression
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstantExpression: constant value in a GtkExpression.

func NewConstantExpressionForValue 

func NewConstantExpressionForValue(value *coreglib.Value) *ConstantExpression

NewConstantExpressionForValue creates an expression that always evaluates to the given value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue.

The function returns the following values:

  • constantExpression: new GtkExpression.

func (*ConstantExpression) Value 

func (expression *ConstantExpression) Value() *coreglib.Value

Value gets the value that a constant expression evaluates to.

The function returns the following values:

  • value: value.

type Constraint 

type Constraint struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Constraint: GtkConstraint describes a constraint between attributes of two widgets, expressed as a linear equation.

The typical equation for a constraint is: 

target.target_attr = source.source_attr × multiplier + constant

Each GtkConstraint is part of a system that will be solved by a gtk.ConstraintLayout in order to allocate and position each child widget or guide.

The source and target, as well as their attributes, of a GtkConstraint instance are immutable after creation.

func NewConstraint 

func NewConstraint(target ConstraintTargetter, targetAttribute ConstraintAttribute, relation ConstraintRelation, source ConstraintTargetter, sourceAttribute ConstraintAttribute, multiplier, constant float64, strength int) *Constraint

NewConstraint creates a new constraint representing a relation between a layout attribute on a source and a layout attribute on a target.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target (optional) of the constraint.
  • targetAttribute: attribute of target to be set.
  • relation equivalence between target_attribute and source_attribute.
  • source (optional) of the constraint.
  • sourceAttribute: attribute of source to be read.
  • multiplier: multiplication factor to be applied to source_attribute.
  • constant factor to be added to source_attribute.
  • strength of the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraint: newly created constraint.

func NewConstraintConstant 

func NewConstraintConstant(target ConstraintTargetter, targetAttribute ConstraintAttribute, relation ConstraintRelation, constant float64, strength int) *Constraint

NewConstraintConstant creates a new constraint representing a relation between a layout attribute on a target and a constant value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target (optional): the target of the constraint.
  • targetAttribute: attribute of target to be set.
  • relation equivalence between target_attribute and constant.
  • constant factor to be set on target_attribute.
  • strength of the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraint: newly created constraint.

func (*Constraint) Constant 

func (constraint *Constraint) Constant() float64

Constant retrieves the constant factor added to the source attributes' value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: constant factor.

func (*Constraint) IsAttached 

func (constraint *Constraint) IsAttached() bool

IsAttached checks whether the constraint is attached to a gtk.ConstraintLayout, and it is contributing to the layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the constraint is attached.

func (*Constraint) IsConstant 

func (constraint *Constraint) IsConstant() bool

IsConstant checks whether the constraint describes a relation between an attribute on the gtk.Constraint:target and a constant value.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the constraint is a constant relation.

func (*Constraint) IsRequired 

func (constraint *Constraint) IsRequired() bool

IsRequired checks whether the constraint is a required relation for solving the constraint layout.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the constraint is required.

func (*Constraint) Multiplier 

func (constraint *Constraint) Multiplier() float64

Multiplier retrieves the multiplication factor applied to the source attribute's value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: multiplication factor.

func (*Constraint) Relation 

func (constraint *Constraint) Relation() ConstraintRelation

Relation: order relation between the terms of the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintRelation: relation type.

func (*Constraint) Source 

func (constraint *Constraint) Source() *ConstraintTarget

Source retrieves the gtk.ConstraintTarget used as the source for the constraint.

If the source is set to NULL at creation, the constraint will use the widget using the gtk.ConstraintLayout as the source.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintTarget (optional): source of the constraint.

func (*Constraint) SourceAttribute 

func (constraint *Constraint) SourceAttribute() ConstraintAttribute

SourceAttribute retrieves the attribute of the source to be read by the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintAttribute source's attribute.

func (*Constraint) Strength 

func (constraint *Constraint) Strength() int

Strength retrieves the strength of the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: strength value.

func (*Constraint) Target 

func (constraint *Constraint) Target() *ConstraintTarget

Target retrieves the gtk.ConstraintTarget used as the target for the constraint.

If the targe is set to NULL at creation, the constraint will use the widget using the gtk.ConstraintLayout as the target.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintTarget (optional): ConstraintTarget.

func (*Constraint) TargetAttribute 

func (constraint *Constraint) TargetAttribute() ConstraintAttribute

TargetAttribute retrieves the attribute of the target to be set by the constraint.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintAttribute target's attribute.

type ConstraintAttribute 

type ConstraintAttribute C.gint

ConstraintAttribute: widget attributes that can be used when creating a GtkConstraint. 

const (
	// ConstraintAttributeNone: no attribute, used for constant relations.
	ConstraintAttributeNone ConstraintAttribute = iota
	// ConstraintAttributeLeft: left edge of a widget, regardless of text
	// direction.
	ConstraintAttributeLeft
	// ConstraintAttributeRight: right edge of a widget, regardless of text
	// direction.
	ConstraintAttributeRight
	// ConstraintAttributeTop: top edge of a widget.
	ConstraintAttributeTop
	// ConstraintAttributeBottom: bottom edge of a widget.
	ConstraintAttributeBottom
	// ConstraintAttributeStart: leading edge of a widget, depending on text
	// direction; equivalent to GTK_CONSTRAINT_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT for LTR languages,
	// and GTK_CONSTRAINT_ATTRIBUTE_RIGHT for RTL ones.
	ConstraintAttributeStart
	// ConstraintAttributeEnd: trailing edge of a widget, depending on
	// text direction; equivalent to GTK_CONSTRAINT_ATTRIBUTE_RIGHT for LTR
	// languages, and GTK_CONSTRAINT_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT for RTL ones.
	ConstraintAttributeEnd
	// ConstraintAttributeWidth: width of a widget.
	ConstraintAttributeWidth
	// ConstraintAttributeHeight: height of a widget.
	ConstraintAttributeHeight
	// ConstraintAttributeCenterX: center of a widget, on the horizontal axis.
	ConstraintAttributeCenterX
	// ConstraintAttributeCenterY: center of a widget, on the vertical axis.
	ConstraintAttributeCenterY
	// ConstraintAttributeBaseline: baseline of a widget.
	ConstraintAttributeBaseline
)

func (ConstraintAttribute) String 

func (c ConstraintAttribute) String() string

String returns the name in string for ConstraintAttribute.

type ConstraintClass added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ConstraintGuide 

type ConstraintGuide struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	ConstraintTarget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintGuide: GtkConstraintGuide is an invisible layout element in a GtkConstraintLayout.

The GtkConstraintLayout treats guides like widgets. They can be used as the source or target of a GtkConstraint.

Guides have a minimum, maximum and natural size. Depending on the constraints that are applied, they can act like a guideline that widgets can be aligned to, or like *flexible space*.

Unlike a GtkWidget, a GtkConstraintGuide will not be drawn.

func NewConstraintGuide 

func NewConstraintGuide() *ConstraintGuide

NewConstraintGuide creates a new GtkConstraintGuide object.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintGuide: new GtkConstraintGuide object.

func (*ConstraintGuide) MaxSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) MaxSize(width, height *int)

MaxSize gets the maximum size of guide.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width (optional): return location for the maximum width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): return location for the maximum height, or NULL.

func (*ConstraintGuide) MinSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) MinSize(width, height *int)

MinSize gets the minimum size of guide.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width (optional): return location for the minimum width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): return location for the minimum height, or NULL.

func (*ConstraintGuide) Name 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) Name() string

Name retrieves the name set using gtk_constraint_guide_set_name().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): name of the guide.

func (*ConstraintGuide) NatSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) NatSize(width, height *int)

NatSize gets the natural size of guide.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width (optional): return location for the natural width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): return location for the natural height, or NULL.

func (*ConstraintGuide) SetMaxSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) SetMaxSize(width, height int)

SetMaxSize sets the maximum size of guide.

If guide is attached to a GtkConstraintLayout, the constraints will be updated to reflect the new size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: new maximum width, or -1 to not change it.
  • height: new maximum height, or -1 to not change it.

func (*ConstraintGuide) SetMinSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) SetMinSize(width, height int)

SetMinSize sets the minimum size of guide.

If guide is attached to a GtkConstraintLayout, the constraints will be updated to reflect the new size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: new minimum width, or -1 to not change it.
  • height: new minimum height, or -1 to not change it.

func (*ConstraintGuide) SetName 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) SetName(name string)

SetName sets a name for the given GtkConstraintGuide.

The name is useful for debugging purposes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) for the guide.

func (*ConstraintGuide) SetNatSize 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) SetNatSize(width, height int)

SetNatSize sets the natural size of guide.

If guide is attached to a GtkConstraintLayout, the constraints will be updated to reflect the new size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: new natural width, or -1 to not change it.
  • height: new natural height, or -1 to not change it.

func (*ConstraintGuide) SetStrength 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) SetStrength(strength ConstraintStrength)

SetStrength sets the strength of the constraint on the natural size of the given GtkConstraintGuide.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • strength of the constraint.

func (*ConstraintGuide) Strength 

func (guide *ConstraintGuide) Strength() ConstraintStrength

Strength retrieves the strength set using gtk_constraint_guide_set_strength().

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintStrength: strength of the constraint on the natural size.

type ConstraintGuideClass added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintGuideClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintGuideClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ConstraintGuideOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintGuideOverrides struct {
}

ConstraintGuideOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ConstraintLayout 

type ConstraintLayout struct {
	LayoutManager

	*coreglib.Object
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintLayout: layout manager using constraints to describe relations between widgets.

GtkConstraintLayout is a layout manager that uses relations between widget attributes, expressed via gtk.Constraint instances, to measure and allocate widgets.

How do constraints work

Constraints are objects defining the relationship between attributes of a widget; you can read the description of the gtk.Constraint class to have a more in depth definition.

By taking multiple constraints and applying them to the children of a widget using GtkConstraintLayout, it's possible to describe complex layout policies; each constraint applied to a child or to the parent widgets contributes to the full description of the layout, in terms of parameters for resolving the value of each attribute.

It is important to note that a layout is defined by the totality of constraints; removing a child, or a constraint, from an existing layout without changing the remaining constraints may result in an unstable or unsolvable layout.

Constraints have an implicit "reading order"; you should start describing each edge of each child, as well as their relationship with the parent container, from the top left (or top right, in RTL languages), horizontally first, and then vertically.

A constraint-based layout with too few constraints can become "unstable", that is: have more than one solution. The behavior of an unstable layout is undefined.

A constraint-based layout with conflicting constraints may be unsolvable, and lead to an unstable layout. You can use the gtk.Constraint:strength property of gtk.Constraint to "nudge" the layout towards a solution.

GtkConstraintLayout as GtkBuildable

GtkConstraintLayout implements the gtk.Buildable interface and has a custom "constraints" element which allows describing constraints in a gtk.Builder UI file.

An example of a UI definition fragment specifying a constraint: 

<object class="GtkConstraintLayout">
  <constraints>
    <constraint target="button" target-attribute="start"
                relation="eq"
                source="super" source-attribute="start"
                constant="12"
                strength="required" />
    <constraint target="button" target-attribute="width"
                relation="ge"
                constant="250"
                strength="strong" />
  </constraints>
</object>

The definition above will add two constraints to the GtkConstraintLayout:

  • a required constraint between the leading edge of "button" and the leading edge of the widget using the constraint layout, plus 12 pixels
  • a strong, constant constraint making the width of "button" greater than, or equal to 250 pixels

The "target" and "target-attribute" attributes are required.

The "source" and "source-attribute" attributes of the "constraint" element are optional; if they are not specified, the constraint is assumed to be a constant.

The "relation" attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be an equality.

The "strength" attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be required.

The "source" and "target" attributes can be set to "super" to indicate that the constraint target is the widget using the GtkConstraintLayout.

There can be "constant" and "multiplier" attributes.

Additionally, the "constraints" element can also contain a description of the ConstraintGuides used by the layout: 

<constraints>
  <guide min-width="100" max-width="500" name="hspace"/>
  <guide min-height="64" nat-height="128" name="vspace" strength="strong"/>
</constraints>

The "guide" element has the following optional attributes:

  • "min-width", "nat-width", and "max-width", describe the minimum, natural, and maximum width of the guide, respectively
  • "min-height", "nat-height", and "max-height", describe the minimum, natural, and maximum height of the guide, respectively
  • "strength" describes the strength of the constraint on the natural size of the guide; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to have a medium strength
  • "name" describes a name for the guide, useful when debugging

Using the Visual Format Language

Complex constraints can be described using a compact syntax called VFL, or *Visual Format Language*.

The Visual Format Language describes all the constraints on a row or column, typically starting from the leading edge towards the trailing one. Each element of the layout is composed by "views", which identify a gtk.ConstraintTarget.

For instance: 

[button]-[textField]

Describes a constraint that binds the trailing edge of "button" to the leading edge of "textField", leaving a default space between the two.

Using VFL is also possible to specify predicates that describe constraints on attributes like width and height: 

// Width must be greater than, or equal to 50
[button(>=50)]

// Width of button1 must be equal to width of button2
[button1(==button2)]

The default orientation for a VFL description is horizontal, unless otherwise specified: 

// horizontal orientation, default attribute: width
H:[button(>=150)]

// vertical orientation, default attribute: height
V:[button1(==button2)]

It's also possible to specify multiple predicates, as well as their strength: 

// minimum width of button must be 150
// natural width of button can be 250
[button(>=150required, ==250medium)]

Finally, it's also possible to use simple arithmetic operators: 

// width of button1 must be equal to width of button2
// divided by 2 plus 12
[button1(button2 / 2 + 12)].

func NewConstraintLayout 

func NewConstraintLayout() *ConstraintLayout

NewConstraintLayout creates a new GtkConstraintLayout layout manager.

The function returns the following values:

  • constraintLayout: newly created GtkConstraintLayout.

func (*ConstraintLayout) AddConstraint 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) AddConstraint(constraint *Constraint)

AddConstraint adds a constraint to the layout manager.

The gtk.Constraint:source and gtk.Constraint:target properties of constraint can be:

  • set to NULL to indicate that the constraint refers to the widget using layout
  • set to the gtk.Widget using layout
  • set to a child of the gtk.Widget using layout
  • set to a gtk.ConstraintGuide that is part of layout

The layout acquires the ownership of constraint after calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • constraint: gtk.Constraint.

func (*ConstraintLayout) AddConstraintsFromDescription 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) AddConstraintsFromDescription(lines []string, hspacing, vspacing int, views map[string]ConstraintTargetter) ([]*Constraint, error)

AddConstraintsFromDescription creates a list of constraints from a VFL description.

The Visual Format Language, VFL, is based on Apple's AutoLayout VFL (https://developer.apple.com/library/content/documentation/UserExperience/Conceptual/AutolayoutPG/VisualFormatLanguage.html).

The views dictionary is used to match gtk.ConstraintTarget instances to the symbolic view name inside the VFL.

The VFL grammar is: 

     <visualFormatString> = (<orientation>)?
                            (<superview><connection>)?
                            <view>(<connection><view>)*
                            (<connection><superview>)?
            <orientation> = 'H' | 'V'
              <superview> = '|'
             <connection> = '' | '-' <predicateList> '-' | '-'
          <predicateList> = <simplePredicate> | <predicateListWithParens>
        <simplePredicate> = <metricName> | <positiveNumber>
<predicateListWithParens> = '(' <predicate> (',' <predicate>)* ')'
              <predicate> = (<relation>)? <objectOfPredicate> (<operatorList>)? ('@' <priority>)?
               <relation> = '==' | '<=' | '>='
      <objectOfPredicate> = <constant> | <viewName> | ('.' <attributeName>)?
               <priority> = <positiveNumber> | 'required' | 'strong' | 'medium' | 'weak'
               <constant> = <number>
           <operatorList> = (<multiplyOperator>)? (<addOperator>)?
       <multiplyOperator> = [ '*' | '/' ] <positiveNumber>
            <addOperator> = [ '+' | '-' ] <positiveNumber>
               <viewName> = A-Za-z_ ([A-Za-z0-9_]*) // A C identifier
             <metricName> = A-Za-z_ ([A-Za-z0-9_]*) // A C identifier
          <attributeName> = 'top' | 'bottom' | 'left' | 'right' | 'width' | 'height' |
                            'start' | 'end' | 'centerX' | 'centerY' | 'baseline'
         <positiveNumber> // A positive real number parseable by g_ascii_strtod()
                 <number> // A real number parseable by g_ascii_strtod()

**Note**: The VFL grammar used by GTK is slightly different than the one defined by Apple, as it can use symbolic values for the constraint's strength instead of numeric values; additionally, GTK allows adding simple arithmetic operations inside predicates.

Examples of VFL descriptions are: 

// Default spacing
[button]-[textField]

// Width constraint
[button(>=50)]

// Connection to super view
|-50-[purpleBox]-50-|

// Vertical layout
V:[topField]-10-[bottomField]

// Flush views
[maroonView][blueView]

// Priority
[button(100strong)]

// Equal widths
[button1(==button2)]

// Multiple predicates
[flexibleButton(>=70,<=100)]

// A complete line of layout
|-[find]-[findNext]-[findField(>=20)]-|

// Operators
[button1(button2 / 3 + 50)]

// Named attributes
[button1(==button2.height)].

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lines: array of Visual Format Language lines defining a set of constraints.
  • hspacing: default horizontal spacing value, or -1 for the fallback value.
  • vspacing: default vertical spacing value, or -1 for the fallback value.
  • views: dictionary of [ name, target ] pairs; the name keys map to the view names in the VFL lines, while the target values map to children of the widget using a GtkConstraintLayout, or guides.

The function returns the following values:

  • list of gtk.Constraint instances that were added to the layout.

func (*ConstraintLayout) AddGuide 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) AddGuide(guide *ConstraintGuide)

AddGuide adds a guide to layout.

A guide can be used as the source or target of constraints, like a widget, but it is not visible.

The layout acquires the ownership of guide after calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • guide: gtk.ConstraintGuide object.

func (*ConstraintLayout) ObserveConstraints 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) ObserveConstraints() *gio.ListModel

ObserveConstraints returns a GListModel to track the constraints that are part of the layout.

Calling this function will enable extra internal bookkeeping to track constraints and emit signals on the returned listmodel. It may slow down operations a lot.

Applications should try hard to avoid calling this function because of the slowdowns.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: a GListModel tracking the layout's constraints.

func (*ConstraintLayout) ObserveGuides 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) ObserveGuides() *gio.ListModel

ObserveGuides returns a GListModel to track the guides that are part of the layout.

Calling this function will enable extra internal bookkeeping to track guides and emit signals on the returned listmodel. It may slow down operations a lot.

Applications should try hard to avoid calling this function because of the slowdowns.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: a GListModel tracking the layout's guides.

func (*ConstraintLayout) RemoveAllConstraints 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) RemoveAllConstraints()

RemoveAllConstraints removes all constraints from the layout manager.

func (*ConstraintLayout) RemoveConstraint 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) RemoveConstraint(constraint *Constraint)

RemoveConstraint removes constraint from the layout manager, so that it no longer influences the layout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • constraint: gtk.Constraint.

func (*ConstraintLayout) RemoveGuide 

func (layout *ConstraintLayout) RemoveGuide(guide *ConstraintGuide)

RemoveGuide removes guide from the layout manager, so that it no longer influences the layout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • guide: gtk.ConstraintGuide object.

type ConstraintLayoutChild 

type ConstraintLayoutChild struct {
	LayoutChild
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintLayoutChild: GtkLayoutChild subclass for children in a GtkConstraintLayout.

type ConstraintLayoutChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintLayoutChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintLayoutChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ConstraintLayoutChildClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *ConstraintLayoutChildClass) ParentClass() *LayoutChildClass

type ConstraintLayoutChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintLayoutChildOverrides struct {
}

ConstraintLayoutChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ConstraintLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ConstraintLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *ConstraintLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type ConstraintLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintLayoutOverrides struct {
}

ConstraintLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ConstraintOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ConstraintOverrides struct {
}

ConstraintOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ConstraintRelation 

type ConstraintRelation C.gint

ConstraintRelation: relation between two terms of a constraint. 

const (
	// ConstraintRelationLE less than, or equal.
	ConstraintRelationLE ConstraintRelation = -1
	// ConstraintRelationEq: equal.
	ConstraintRelationEq ConstraintRelation = 0
	// ConstraintRelationGE: greater than, or equal.
	ConstraintRelationGE ConstraintRelation = 1
)

func (ConstraintRelation) String 

func (c ConstraintRelation) String() string

String returns the name in string for ConstraintRelation.

type ConstraintStrength 

type ConstraintStrength C.gint

ConstraintStrength: strength of a constraint, expressed as a symbolic constant.

The strength of a Constraint can be expressed with any positive integer; the values of this enumeration can be used for readability. 

const (
	// ConstraintStrengthRequired: constraint is required towards solving the
	// layout.
	ConstraintStrengthRequired ConstraintStrength = 1001001000
	// ConstraintStrengthStrong: strong constraint.
	ConstraintStrengthStrong ConstraintStrength = 1000000000
	// ConstraintStrengthMedium: medium constraint.
	ConstraintStrengthMedium ConstraintStrength = 1000
	// ConstraintStrengthWeak: weak constraint.
	ConstraintStrengthWeak ConstraintStrength = 1
)

func (ConstraintStrength) String 

func (c ConstraintStrength) String() string

String returns the name in string for ConstraintStrength.

type ConstraintTarget 

type ConstraintTarget struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ConstraintTarget: GtkConstraintTarget interface is implemented by objects that can be used as source or target in GtkConstraints.

Besides GtkWidget, it is also implemented by GtkConstraintGuide.

ConstraintTarget wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func BaseConstraintTarget 

func BaseConstraintTarget(obj ConstraintTargetter) *ConstraintTarget

BaseConstraintTarget returns the underlying base object.

type ConstraintTargetter 

type ConstraintTargetter interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ConstraintTargetter describes ConstraintTarget's interface methods.

type ConstraintVflParserError 

type ConstraintVflParserError C.gint

ConstraintVflParserError: domain for VFL parsing errors. 

const (
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidSymbol: invalid or unknown symbol.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidSymbol ConstraintVflParserError = iota
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidAttribute: invalid or unknown attribute.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidAttribute
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidView: invalid or unknown view.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidView
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidMetric: invalid or unknown metric.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidMetric
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidPriority: invalid or unknown priority.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidPriority
	// ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidRelation: invalid or unknown relation.
	ConstraintVflParserErrorInvalidRelation
)

func (ConstraintVflParserError) String 

func (c ConstraintVflParserError) String() string

String returns the name in string for ConstraintVflParserError.

type CornerType 

type CornerType C.gint

CornerType specifies which corner a child widget should be placed in when packed into a GtkScrolledWindow.

This is effectively the opposite of where the scroll bars are placed. 

const (
	// CornerTopLeft: place the scrollbars on the right and bottom of the widget
	// (default behaviour).
	CornerTopLeft CornerType = iota
	// CornerBottomLeft: place the scrollbars on the top and right of the
	// widget.
	CornerBottomLeft
	// CornerTopRight: place the scrollbars on the left and bottom of the
	// widget.
	CornerTopRight
	// CornerBottomRight: place the scrollbars on the top and left of the
	// widget.
	CornerBottomRight
)

func (CornerType) String 

func (c CornerType) String() string

String returns the name in string for CornerType.

type CustomFilter 

type CustomFilter struct {
	Filter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomFilter: GtkCustomFilter determines whether to include items with a callback.

func NewCustomFilter 

func NewCustomFilter(matchFunc CustomFilterFunc) *CustomFilter

NewCustomFilter creates a new filter using the given match_func to filter items.

If match_func is NULL, the filter matches all items.

If the filter func changes its filtering behavior, gtk_filter_changed() needs to be called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • matchFunc (optional): function to filter items.

The function returns the following values:

  • customFilter: new GtkCustomFilter.

func (*CustomFilter) SetFilterFunc 

func (self *CustomFilter) SetFilterFunc(matchFunc CustomFilterFunc)

SetFilterFunc sets the function used for filtering items.

If match_func is NULL, the filter matches all items.

If the filter func changes its filtering behavior, gtk_filter_changed() needs to be called.

If a previous function was set, its user_destroy will be called now.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • matchFunc (optional): function to filter items.

type CustomFilterClass added in v0.0.5 

type CustomFilterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomFilterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CustomFilterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CustomFilterClass) ParentClass() *FilterClass

type CustomFilterFunc 

type CustomFilterFunc func(item *coreglib.Object) (ok bool)

CustomFilterFunc: user function that is called to determine if the item should be matched.

If the filter matches the item, this function must return TRUE. If the item should be filtered out, FALSE must be returned.

type CustomFilterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CustomFilterOverrides struct {
}

CustomFilterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CustomLayout 

type CustomLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomLayout: GtkCustomLayout uses closures for size negotiation.

A GtkCustomLayout uses closures matching to the old GtkWidget virtual functions for size negotiation, as a convenience API to ease the porting towards the corresponding `GtkLayoutManager virtual functions.

type CustomLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type CustomLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CustomLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CustomLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type CustomLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CustomLayoutOverrides struct {
}

CustomLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type CustomSorter 

type CustomSorter struct {
	Sorter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomSorter: GtkCustomSorter is a GtkSorter implementation that sorts via a callback function.

func NewCustomSorter 

func NewCustomSorter(sortFunc glib.CompareDataFunc) *CustomSorter

NewCustomSorter creates a new GtkSorter that works by calling sort_func to compare items.

If sort_func is NULL, all items are considered equal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortFunc (optional): GCompareDataFunc to use for sorting.

The function returns the following values:

  • customSorter: new GtkCustomSorter.

func (*CustomSorter) SetSortFunc 

func (self *CustomSorter) SetSortFunc(sortFunc glib.CompareDataFunc)

SetSortFunc sets (or unsets) the function used for sorting items.

If sort_func is NULL, all items are considered equal.

If the sort func changes its sorting behavior, gtk_sorter_changed() needs to be called.

If a previous function was set, its user_destroy will be called now.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortFunc (optional): function to sort items.

type CustomSorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type CustomSorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

CustomSorterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*CustomSorterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (c *CustomSorterClass) ParentClass() *SorterClass

type CustomSorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type CustomSorterOverrides struct {
}

CustomSorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DebugFlags 

type DebugFlags C.guint
const (
	DebugText           DebugFlags = 0b1
	DebugTree           DebugFlags = 0b10
	DebugKeybindings    DebugFlags = 0b100
	DebugModules        DebugFlags = 0b1000
	DebugGeometry       DebugFlags = 0b10000
	DebugIcontheme      DebugFlags = 0b100000
	DebugPrinting       DebugFlags = 0b1000000
	DebugBuilder        DebugFlags = 0b10000000
	DebugSizeRequest    DebugFlags = 0b100000000
	DebugNoCSSCache     DebugFlags = 0b1000000000
	DebugInteractive    DebugFlags = 0b10000000000
	DebugTouchscreen    DebugFlags = 0b100000000000
	DebugActions        DebugFlags = 0b1000000000000
	DebugLayout         DebugFlags = 0b10000000000000
	DebugSnapshot       DebugFlags = 0b100000000000000
	DebugConstraints    DebugFlags = 0b1000000000000000
	DebugBuilderObjects DebugFlags = 0b10000000000000000
	DebugA11Y           DebugFlags = 0b100000000000000000
	DebugIconfallback   DebugFlags = 0b1000000000000000000
)

func GetDebugFlags 

func GetDebugFlags() DebugFlags

GetDebugFlags returns the GTK debug flags that are currently active.

This function is intended for GTK modules that want to adjust their debug output based on GTK debug flags.

The function returns the following values:

  • debugFlags: GTK debug flags.

func (DebugFlags) Has 

func (d DebugFlags) Has(other DebugFlags) bool

Has returns true if d contains other.

func (DebugFlags) String 

func (d DebugFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for DebugFlags.

type DeleteType 

type DeleteType C.gint

DeleteType: passed to various keybinding signals for deleting text. 

const (
	// DeleteChars: delete characters.
	DeleteChars DeleteType = iota
	// DeleteWordEnds: delete only the portion of the word to the left/right of
	// cursor if we’re in the middle of a word.
	DeleteWordEnds
	// DeleteWords: delete words.
	DeleteWords
	// DeleteDisplayLines: delete display-lines. Display-lines refers to the
	// visible lines, with respect to the current line breaks. As opposed to
	// paragraphs, which are defined by line breaks in the input.
	DeleteDisplayLines
	// DeleteDisplayLineEnds: delete only the portion of the display-line to the
	// left/right of cursor.
	DeleteDisplayLineEnds
	// DeleteParagraphEnds: delete to the end of the paragraph. Like C-k in
	// Emacs (or its reverse).
	DeleteParagraphEnds
	// DeleteParagraphs: delete entire line. Like C-k in pico.
	DeleteParagraphs
	// DeleteWhitespace: delete only whitespace. Like M-\ in Emacs.
	DeleteWhitespace
)

func (DeleteType) String 

func (d DeleteType) String() string

String returns the name in string for DeleteType.

type Dialog 

type Dialog struct {
	Window
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Dialog dialogs are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount of input.

!An example GtkDialog (dialog.png)

Typical uses are to display a message, ask a question, or anything else that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.

The main area of a GtkDialog is called the "content area", and is yours to populate with widgets such a GtkLabel or GtkEntry, to present your information, questions, or tasks to the user.

In addition, dialogs allow you to add "action widgets". Most commonly, action widgets are buttons. Depending on the platform, action widgets may be presented in the header bar at the top of the window, or at the bottom of the window. To add action widgets, create your GtkDialog using gtk.Dialog.NewWithButtons, or use gtk.Dialog.AddButton(), gtk.Dialog.AddButtons(), or gtk.Dialog.AddActionWidget().

GtkDialogs uses some heuristics to decide whether to add a close button to the window decorations. If any of the action buttons use the response ID GTK_RESPONSE_CLOSE or GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL, the close button is omitted.

Clicking a button that was added as an action widget will emit the gtk.Dialog::response signal with a response ID that you specified. GTK will never assign a meaning to positive response IDs; these are entirely user-defined. But for convenience, you can use the response IDs in the gtk.ResponseType enumeration (these all have values less than zero). If a dialog receives a delete event, the gtk.Dialog::response signal will be emitted with the GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT response ID.

Dialogs are created with a call to gtk.Dialog.New or gtk.Dialog.NewWithButtons. The latter is recommended; it allows you to set the dialog title, some convenient flags, and add buttons.

A “modal” dialog (that is, one which freezes the rest of the application from user input), can be created by calling gtk.Window.SetModal() on the dialog. When using gtk.Dialog.NewWithButtons, you can also pass the GTK_DIALOG_MODAL flag to make a dialog modal.

For the simple dialog in the following example, a gtk.MessageDialog would save some effort. But you’d need to create the dialog contents manually if you had more than a simple message in the dialog.

An example for simple GtkDialog usage: 

// Function to open a dialog box with a message
void
quick_message (GtkWindow *parent, char *message)
{
 GtkWidget *dialog, *label, *content_area;
 GtkDialogFlags flags;

 // Create the widgets
 flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
 dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("Message",
                                       parent,
                                       flags,
                                       _("_OK"),
                                       GTK_RESPONSE_NONE,
                                       NULL);
 content_area = gtk_dialog_get_content_area (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
 label = gtk_label_new (message);

 // Ensure that the dialog box is destroyed when the user responds

 g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog,
                           "response",
                           G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
                           dialog);

 // Add the label, and show everything we’ve added

 gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (content_area), label);
 gtk_widget_show (dialog);
}

GtkDialog as GtkBuildable

The GtkDialog implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the content_area as an internal child with the name “content_area”.

GtkDialog supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs action_area). To mark a response as default, set the “default“ attribute of the <action-widget> element to true.

GtkDialog supports adding action widgets by specifying “action“ as the “type“ attribute of a <child> element. The widget will be added either to the action area or the headerbar of the dialog, depending on the “use-header-bar“ property. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the <action-widgets> element.

An example of a Dialog UI definition fragment: 

<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
  <child type="action">
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button_cancel"/>
  </child>
  <child type="action">
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button_ok">
    </object>
  </child>
  <action-widgets>
    <action-widget response="cancel">button_cancel</action-widget>
    <action-widget response="ok" default="true">button_ok</action-widget>
  </action-widgets>
</object>

Accessibility

GtkDialog uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_DIALOG role.

func NewDialog 

func NewDialog() *Dialog

NewDialog creates a new dialog box.

Widgets should not be packed into the GtkWindow directly, but into the content_area and action_area, as described above.

The function returns the following values:

  • dialog: new dialog as a GtkWidget.

func NewDialogWithFlags 

func NewDialogWithFlags(title string, parent *Window, flags DialogFlags) *Dialog

NewDialogWithFlags is a slightly more advanced version of NewDialog, allowing the user to construct a new dialog with the given constructor-only dialog flags.

It is a wrapper around Gtk.Dialog.new_with_buttons in C.

func (*Dialog) AddActionWidget 

func (dialog *Dialog) AddActionWidget(child Widgetter, responseId int)

AddActionWidget adds an activatable widget to the action area of a GtkDialog.

GTK connects a signal handler that will emit the gtk.Dialog::response signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is appended to the end of the dialog’s action area.

If you want to add a non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the action_area field of the GtkDialog struct.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: activatable widget.
  • responseId: response ID for child.

func (*Dialog) AddButton 

func (dialog *Dialog) AddButton(buttonText string, responseId int) Widgetter

AddButton adds a button with the given text.

GTK arranges things so that clicking the button will emit the gtk.Dialog::response signal with the given response_id. The button is appended to the end of the dialog’s action area. The button widget is returned, but usually you don’t need it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buttonText: text of button.
  • responseId: response ID for the button.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: GtkButton widget that was added.

func (*Dialog) ConnectClose 

func (dialog *Dialog) ConnectClose(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClose is emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the dialog.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.

func (*Dialog) ConnectResponse 

func (dialog *Dialog) ConnectResponse(f func(responseId int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectResponse is emitted when an action widget is clicked.

The signal is also emitted when the dialog receives a delete event, and when gtk.Dialog.Response() is called. On a delete event, the response ID is GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Otherwise, it depends on which action widget was clicked.

func (*Dialog) ContentArea 

func (dialog *Dialog) ContentArea() *Box

ContentArea returns the content area of dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • box: content area Box.

func (*Dialog) HeaderBar 

func (dialog *Dialog) HeaderBar() *HeaderBar

HeaderBar returns the header bar of dialog.

Note that the headerbar is only used by the dialog if the gtk.Dialog:use-header-bar property is TRUE.

The function returns the following values:

  • headerBar: header bar.

func (*Dialog) Response 

func (dialog *Dialog) Response(responseId int)

Response emits the ::response signal with the given response ID.

Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.

func (*Dialog) ResponseForWidget 

func (dialog *Dialog) ResponseForWidget(widget Widgetter) int

ResponseForWidget gets the response id of a widget in the action area of a dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget in the action area of dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: response id of widget, or GTK_RESPONSE_NONE if widget doesn’t have a response id set.

func (*Dialog) SetDefaultResponse 

func (dialog *Dialog) SetDefaultResponse(responseId int)

SetDefaultResponse sets the default widget for the dialog based on the response ID.

Pressing “Enter” normally activates the default widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.

func (*Dialog) SetResponseSensitive 

func (dialog *Dialog) SetResponseSensitive(responseId int, setting bool)

SetResponseSensitive: convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.

Calls gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, setting) for each widget in the dialog’s action area with the given response_id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.
  • setting: TRUE for sensitive.

func (*Dialog) WidgetForResponse 

func (dialog *Dialog) WidgetForResponse(responseId int) Widgetter

WidgetForResponse gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area of a dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID used by the dialog widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional) button that uses the given response_id, or NULL.

type DialogClass added in v0.0.5 

type DialogClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DialogClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*DialogClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (d *DialogClass) ParentClass() *WindowClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type DialogFlags 

type DialogFlags C.guint

DialogFlags flags used to influence dialog construction. 

const (
	// DialogModal: make the constructed dialog modal.
	DialogModal DialogFlags = 0b1
	// DialogDestroyWithParent: destroy the dialog when its parent is destroyed.
	DialogDestroyWithParent DialogFlags = 0b10
	// DialogUseHeaderBar: create dialog with actions in header bar instead of
	// action area.
	DialogUseHeaderBar DialogFlags = 0b100
)

func (DialogFlags) Has 

func (d DialogFlags) Has(other DialogFlags) bool

Has returns true if d contains other.

func (DialogFlags) String 

func (d DialogFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for DialogFlags.

type DialogOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type DialogOverrides struct {
	Close func()
	// Response emits the ::response signal with the given response ID.
	//
	// Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - responseId: response ID.
	//
	Response func(responseId int)
}

DialogOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DirectionType 

type DirectionType C.gint

DirectionType focus movement types. 

const (
	// DirTabForward: move forward.
	DirTabForward DirectionType = iota
	// DirTabBackward: move backward.
	DirTabBackward
	// DirUp: move up.
	DirUp
	// DirDown: move down.
	DirDown
	// DirLeft: move left.
	DirLeft
	// DirRight: move right.
	DirRight
)

func (DirectionType) String 

func (d DirectionType) String() string

String returns the name in string for DirectionType.

type DirectoryList 

type DirectoryList struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DirectoryList: GtkDirectoryList is a list model that wraps g_file_enumerate_children_async().

It presents a GListModel and fills it asynchronously with the GFileInfos returned from that function.

Enumeration will start automatically when a the gtk.DirectoryList:file property is set.

While the GtkDirectoryList is being filled, the gtk.DirectoryList:loading property will be set to TRUE. You can listen to that property if you want to show information like a GtkSpinner or a "Loading..." text.

If loading fails at any point, the gtk.DirectoryList:error property will be set to give more indication about the failure.

The GFileInfos returned from a GtkDirectoryList have the "standard::file" attribute set to the GFile they refer to. This way you can get at the file that is referred to in the same way you would via g_file_enumerator_get_child(). This means you do not need access to the GtkDirectoryList, but can access the GFile directly from the GFileInfo when operating with a GtkListView or similar.

func NewDirectoryList 

func NewDirectoryList(attributes string, file gio.Filer) *DirectoryList

NewDirectoryList creates a new GtkDirectoryList.

The GtkDirectoryList is querying the given file with the given attributes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attributes (optional) to query with.
  • file (optional) to query.

The function returns the following values:

  • directoryList: new GtkDirectoryList.

func (*DirectoryList) Attributes 

func (self *DirectoryList) Attributes() string

Attributes gets the attributes queried on the children.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): queried attributes.

func (*DirectoryList) Error 

func (self *DirectoryList) Error() error

Error gets the loading error, if any.

If an error occurs during the loading process, the loading process will finish and this property allows querying the error that happened. This error will persist until a file is loaded again.

An error being set does not mean that no files were loaded, and all successfully queried files will remain in the list.

The function returns the following values:

  • err (optional): loading error or NULL if loading finished successfully.

func (*DirectoryList) File 

func (self *DirectoryList) File() *gio.File

File gets the file whose children are currently enumerated.

The function returns the following values:

  • file (optional) whose children are enumerated.

func (*DirectoryList) IOPriority 

func (self *DirectoryList) IOPriority() int

IOPriority gets the IO priority set via gtk_directory_list_set_io_priority().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: IO priority.

func (*DirectoryList) IsLoading 

func (self *DirectoryList) IsLoading() bool

IsLoading returns TRUE if the children enumeration is currently in progress.

Files will be added to self from time to time while loading is going on. The order in which are added is undefined and may change in between runs.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self is loading.

func (*DirectoryList) Monitored 

func (self *DirectoryList) Monitored() bool

Monitored returns whether the directory list is monitoring the directory for changes.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the directory is monitored.

func (*DirectoryList) SetAttributes 

func (self *DirectoryList) SetAttributes(attributes string)

SetAttributes sets the attributes to be enumerated and starts the enumeration.

If attributes is NULL, no attributes will be queried, but a list of GFileInfos will still be created.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attributes (optional) to enumerate.

func (*DirectoryList) SetFile 

func (self *DirectoryList) SetFile(file gio.Filer)

SetFile sets the file to be enumerated and starts the enumeration.

If file is NULL, the result will be an empty list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional) to be enumerated.

func (*DirectoryList) SetIOPriority 

func (self *DirectoryList) SetIOPriority(ioPriority int)

SetIOPriority sets the IO priority to use while loading directories.

Setting the priority while self is loading will reprioritize the ongoing load as soon as possible.

The default IO priority is G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT, which is higher than the GTK redraw priority. If you are loading a lot of directories in parallel, lowering it to something like G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE may increase responsiveness.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ioPriority: IO priority to use.

func (*DirectoryList) SetMonitored 

func (self *DirectoryList) SetMonitored(monitored bool)

SetMonitored sets whether the directory list will monitor the directory for changes. If monitoring is enabled, the ::items-changed signal will be emitted when the directory contents change.

When monitoring is turned on after the initial creation of the directory list, the directory is reloaded to avoid missing files that appeared between the initial loading and when monitoring was turned on.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • monitored: TRUE to monitor the directory for changes.

type DirectoryListClass added in v0.0.5 

type DirectoryListClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DirectoryListClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type DirectoryListOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type DirectoryListOverrides struct {
}

DirectoryListOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DragIcon 

type DragIcon struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Root
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DragIcon: GtkDragIcon is a GtkRoot implementation for drag icons.

A drag icon moves with the pointer during a Drag-and-Drop operation and is destroyed when the drag ends.

To set up a drag icon and associate it with an ongoing drag operation, use gtk.DragIcon().GetForDrag to get the icon for a drag. You can then use it like any other widget and use gtk.DragIcon.SetChild() to set whatever widget should be used for the drag icon.

Keep in mind that drag icons do not allow user input.

func (*DragIcon) Child 

func (self *DragIcon) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the widget currently used as drag icon.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): drag icon or NULL if none.

func (*DragIcon) SetChild 

func (self *DragIcon) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the widget to display as the drag icon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): GtkWidget or NULL.

type DragIconClass added in v0.0.5 

type DragIconClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DragIconClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*DragIconClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (d *DragIconClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type DragIconOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type DragIconOverrides struct {
}

DragIconOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DragSource 

type DragSource struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DragSource: GtkDragSource is an event controller to initiate Drag-And-Drop operations.

GtkDragSource can be set up with the necessary ingredients for a DND operation ahead of time. This includes the source for the data that is being transferred, in the form of a gdk.ContentProvider, the desired action, and the icon to use during the drag operation. After setting it up, the drag source must be added to a widget as an event controller, using gtk.Widget.AddController(). 

static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
  GtkDragSource *drag_source = gtk_drag_source_new ();

  g_signal_connect (drag_source, "prepare", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_prepare), self);
  g_signal_connect (drag_source, "drag-begin", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_begin), self);

  gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (drag_source));
}

Setting up the content provider and icon ahead of time only makes sense when the data does not change. More commonly, you will want to set them up just in time. To do so, GtkDragSource has gtk.DragSource::prepare and gtk.DragSource::drag-begin signals.

The ::prepare signal is emitted before a drag is started, and can be used to set the content provider and actions that the drag should be started with. 

static GdkContentProvider *
on_drag_prepare (GtkDragSource *source,
                 double         x,
                 double         y,
                 MyWidget      *self)
{
  // This widget supports two types of content: GFile objects
  // and GdkPixbuf objects; GTK will handle the serialization
  // of these types automatically
  GFile *file = my_widget_get_file (self);
  GdkPixbuf *pixbuf = my_widget_get_pixbuf (self);

  return gdk_content_provider_new_union ((GdkContentProvider *[2]) {
      gdk_content_provider_new_typed (G_TYPE_FILE, file),
      gdk_content_provider_new_typed (GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF, pixbuf),
    }, 2);
}

The ::drag-begin signal is emitted after the GdkDrag object has been created, and can be used to set up the drag icon. 

static void
on_drag_begin (GtkDragSource *source,
               GtkDrag       *drag,
               MyWidget      *self)
{
  // Set the widget as the drag icon
  GdkPaintable *paintable = gtk_widget_paintable_new (GTK_WIDGET (self));
  gtk_drag_source_set_icon (source, paintable, 0, 0);
  g_object_unref (paintable);
}

During the DND operation, GtkDragSource emits signals that can be used to obtain updates about the status of the operation, but it is not normally necessary to connect to any signals, except for one case: when the supported actions include GDK_ACTION_MOVE, you need to listen for the gtk.DragSource::drag-end signal and delete the data after it has been transferred.

func NewDragSource 

func NewDragSource() *DragSource

NewDragSource creates a new GtkDragSource object.

The function returns the following values:

  • dragSource: new GtkDragSource.

func (*DragSource) Actions 

func (source *DragSource) Actions() gdk.DragAction

Actions gets the actions that are currently set on the GtkDragSource.

The function returns the following values:

  • dragAction actions set on source.

func (*DragSource) ConnectDragBegin 

func (source *DragSource) ConnectDragBegin(f func(drag gdk.Dragger)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragBegin is emitted on the drag source when a drag is started.

It can be used to e.g. set a custom drag icon with gtk.DragSource.SetIcon().

func (*DragSource) ConnectDragCancel 

func (source *DragSource) ConnectDragCancel(f func(drag gdk.Dragger, reason gdk.DragCancelReason) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragCancel is emitted on the drag source when a drag has failed.

The signal handler may handle a failed drag operation based on the type of error. It should return TRUE if the failure has been handled and the default "drag operation failed" animation should not be shown.

func (*DragSource) ConnectDragEnd 

func (source *DragSource) ConnectDragEnd(f func(drag gdk.Dragger, deleteData bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragEnd is emitted on the drag source when a drag is finished.

A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo things done in gtk.DragSource::prepare or gtk.DragSource::drag-begin handlers.

func (*DragSource) ConnectPrepare 

func (source *DragSource) ConnectPrepare(f func(x, y float64) (contentProvider *gdk.ContentProvider)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPrepare is emitted when a drag is about to be initiated.

It returns the GdkContentProvider to use for the drag that is about to start. The default handler for this signal returns the value of the gtk.DragSource:content property, so if you set up that property ahead of time, you don't need to connect to this signal.

func (*DragSource) Content 

func (source *DragSource) Content() *gdk.ContentProvider

Content gets the current content provider of a GtkDragSource.

The function returns the following values:

  • contentProvider (optional): GdkContentProvider of source.

func (*DragSource) Drag 

func (source *DragSource) Drag() gdk.Dragger

Drag returns the underlying GdkDrag object for an ongoing drag.

The function returns the following values:

  • drag (optional): GdkDrag of the current drag operation, or NULL.

func (*DragSource) DragCancel 

func (source *DragSource) DragCancel()

DragCancel cancels a currently ongoing drag operation.

func (*DragSource) SetActions 

func (source *DragSource) SetActions(actions gdk.DragAction)

SetActions sets the actions on the GtkDragSource.

During a DND operation, the actions are offered to potential drop targets. If actions include GDK_ACTION_MOVE, you need to listen to the gtk.DragSource::drag-end signal and handle delete_data being TRUE.

This function can be called before a drag is started, or in a handler for the gtk.DragSource::prepare signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actions to offer.

func (*DragSource) SetContent 

func (source *DragSource) SetContent(content *gdk.ContentProvider)

SetContent sets a content provider on a GtkDragSource.

When the data is requested in the cause of a DND operation, it will be obtained from the content provider.

This function can be called before a drag is started, or in a handler for the gtk.DragSource::prepare signal.

You may consider setting the content provider back to NULL in a gtk.DragSource::drag-end signal handler.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • content (optional): GdkContentProvider, or NULL.

func (*DragSource) SetIcon 

func (source *DragSource) SetIcon(paintable gdk.Paintabler, hotX, hotY int)

SetIcon sets a paintable to use as icon during DND operations.

The hotspot coordinates determine the point on the icon that gets aligned with the hotspot of the cursor.

If paintable is NULL, a default icon is used.

This function can be called before a drag is started, or in a gtk.DragSource::prepare or gtk.DragSource::drag-begin signal handler.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional) to use as icon, or NULL.
  • hotX: hotspot X coordinate on the icon.
  • hotY: hotspot Y coordinate on the icon.

type DrawingArea 

type DrawingArea struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DrawingArea: GtkDrawingArea is a widget that allows drawing with cairo.

!An example GtkDrawingArea (drawingarea.png)

It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:

- The gtk.Widget::realize signal to take any necessary actions when the widget is instantiated on a particular display. (Create GDK resources in response to this signal.)

- The gtk.DrawingArea::resize signal to take any necessary actions when the widget changes size.

- Call gtk.DrawingArea.SetDrawFunc() to handle redrawing the contents of the widget.

The following code portion demonstrates using a drawing area to display a circle in the normal widget foreground color.

Simple GtkDrawingArea usage 

static void
draw_function (GtkDrawingArea *area,
               cairo_t        *cr,
               int             width,
               int             height,
               gpointer        data)
{
  GdkRGBA color;
  GtkStyleContext *context;

  context = gtk_widget_get_style_context (GTK_WIDGET (area));

  cairo_arc (cr,
             width / 2.0, height / 2.0,
             MIN (width, height) / 2.0,
             0, 2 * G_PI);

  gtk_style_context_get_color (context,
                               &color);
  gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba (cr, &color);

  cairo_fill (cr);
}

int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  gtk_init ();

  GtkWidget *area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
  gtk_drawing_area_set_content_width (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100);
  gtk_drawing_area_set_content_height (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100);
  gtk_drawing_area_set_draw_func (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area),
                                  draw_function,
                                  NULL, NULL);
  return 0;
}

The draw function is normally called when a drawing area first comes onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered. You can also force a redraw by adding to the “damage region” of the drawing area’s window using gtk.Widget.QueueDraw(). This will cause the drawing area to call the draw function again.

The available routines for drawing are documented on the [GDK Drawing Primitives][gdk4-Cairo-Interaction] page and the cairo documentation.

To receive mouse events on a drawing area, you will need to use event controllers. To receive keyboard events, you will need to set the “can-focus” property on the drawing area, and you should probably draw some user-visible indication that the drawing area is focused.

If you need more complex control over your widget, you should consider creating your own GtkWidget subclass.

func NewDrawingArea 

func NewDrawingArea() *DrawingArea

NewDrawingArea creates a new drawing area.

The function returns the following values:

  • drawingArea: new GtkDrawingArea.

func (*DrawingArea) ConnectResize 

func (self *DrawingArea) ConnectResize(f func(width, height int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectResize is emitted once when the widget is realized, and then each time the widget is changed while realized.

This is useful in order to keep state up to date with the widget size, like for instance a backing surface.

func (*DrawingArea) ContentHeight 

func (self *DrawingArea) ContentHeight() int

ContentHeight retrieves the content height of the GtkDrawingArea.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: height requested for content of the drawing area.

func (*DrawingArea) ContentWidth 

func (self *DrawingArea) ContentWidth() int

ContentWidth retrieves the content width of the GtkDrawingArea.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: width requested for content of the drawing area.

func (*DrawingArea) SetContentHeight 

func (self *DrawingArea) SetContentHeight(height int)

SetContentHeight sets the desired height of the contents of the drawing area.

Note that because widgets may be allocated larger sizes than they requested, it is possible that the actual height passed to your draw function is larger than the height set here. You can use gtk.Widget.SetVAlign() to avoid that.

If the height is set to 0 (the default), the drawing area may disappear.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • height of contents.

func (*DrawingArea) SetContentWidth 

func (self *DrawingArea) SetContentWidth(width int)

SetContentWidth sets the desired width of the contents of the drawing area.

Note that because widgets may be allocated larger sizes than they requested, it is possible that the actual width passed to your draw function is larger than the width set here. You can use gtk.Widget.SetHAlign() to avoid that.

If the width is set to 0 (the default), the drawing area may disappear.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width of contents.

func (*DrawingArea) SetDrawFunc 

func (self *DrawingArea) SetDrawFunc(drawFunc DrawingAreaDrawFunc)

SetDrawFunc: setting a draw function is the main thing you want to do when using a drawing area.

The draw function is called whenever GTK needs to draw the contents of the drawing area to the screen.

The draw function will be called during the drawing stage of GTK. In the drawing stage it is not allowed to change properties of any GTK widgets or call any functions that would cause any properties to be changed. You should restrict yourself exclusively to drawing your contents in the draw function.

If what you are drawing does change, call gtk.Widget.QueueDraw() on the drawing area. This will cause a redraw and will call draw_func again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drawFunc (optional): callback that lets you draw the drawing area's contents.

type DrawingAreaClass added in v0.0.5 

type DrawingAreaClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DrawingAreaClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*DrawingAreaClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (d *DrawingAreaClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type DrawingAreaDrawFunc 

type DrawingAreaDrawFunc func(drawingArea *DrawingArea, cr *cairo.Context, width, height int)

DrawingAreaDrawFunc: whenever drawing_area needs to redraw, this function will be called.

This function should exclusively redraw the contents of the drawing area and must not call any widget functions that cause changes.

type DrawingAreaOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type DrawingAreaOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - width
	//   - height
	//
	Resize func(width, height int)
}

DrawingAreaOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DropControllerMotion 

type DropControllerMotion struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DropControllerMotion: GtkDropControllerMotion is an event controller tracking the pointer during Drag-and-Drop operations.

It is modeled after gtk.EventControllerMotion so if you have used that, this should feel really familiar.

This controller is not able to accept drops, use gtk.DropTarget for that purpose.

func NewDropControllerMotion 

func NewDropControllerMotion() *DropControllerMotion

NewDropControllerMotion creates a new event controller that will handle pointer motion events during drag and drop.

The function returns the following values:

  • dropControllerMotion: new GtkDropControllerMotion.

func (*DropControllerMotion) ConnectEnter 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) ConnectEnter(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnter signals that the pointer has entered the widget.

func (*DropControllerMotion) ConnectLeave 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) ConnectLeave(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLeave signals that the pointer has left the widget.

func (*DropControllerMotion) ConnectMotion 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) ConnectMotion(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMotion is emitted when the pointer moves inside the widget.

func (*DropControllerMotion) ContainsPointer 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) ContainsPointer() bool

ContainsPointer returns if a Drag-and-Drop operation is within the widget self or one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a dragging pointer is within self or one of its children.

func (*DropControllerMotion) Drop 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) Drop() gdk.Dropper

Drop returns the GdkDrop of a current Drag-and-Drop operation over the widget of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • drop (optional): GdkDrop currently happening within self or NULL if none.

func (*DropControllerMotion) IsPointer 

func (self *DropControllerMotion) IsPointer() bool

IsPointer returns if a Drag-and-Drop operation is within the widget self, not one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a dragging pointer is within self but not one of its children.
type DropDown struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DropDown: GtkDropDown is a widget that allows the user to choose an item from a list of options.

!An example GtkDropDown (drop-down.png)

The GtkDropDown displays the selected choice.

The options are given to GtkDropDown in the form of GListModel and how the individual options are represented is determined by a gtk.ListItemFactory. The default factory displays simple strings.

GtkDropDown knows how to obtain strings from the items in a gtk.StringList; for other models, you have to provide an expression to find the strings via gtk.DropDown.SetExpression().

GtkDropDown can optionally allow search in the popup, which is useful if the list of options is long. To enable the search entry, use gtk.DropDown.SetEnableSearch().

CSS nodes

GtkDropDown has a single CSS node with name dropdown, with the button and popover nodes as children.

Accessibility

GtkDropDown uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COMBO_BOX role.

func NewDropDown 

func NewDropDown(model gio.ListModeller, expression Expressioner) *DropDown

NewDropDown creates a new GtkDropDown.

You may want to call gtk.DropDown.SetFactory() to set up a way to map its items to widgets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use or NULL for none.
  • expression (optional) to use or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • dropDown: new GtkDropDown.

func NewDropDownFromStrings 

func NewDropDownFromStrings(strings []string) *DropDown

NewDropDownFromStrings creates a new GtkDropDown that is populated with the strings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • strings to put in the dropdown.

The function returns the following values:

  • dropDown: new GtkDropDown.
func (self *DropDown) EnableSearch() bool

EnableSearch returns whether search is enabled.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the popup includes a search entry.
func (self *DropDown) Expression() Expressioner

Expression gets the expression set that is used to obtain strings from items.

See gtk.DropDown.SetExpression().

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression or NULL.
func (self *DropDown) Factory() *ListItemFactory

Factory gets the factory that's currently used to populate list items.

The factory returned by this function is always used for the item in the button. It is also used for items in the popup if gtk.DropDown:list-factory is not set.

The function returns the following values:

  • listItemFactory (optional): factory in use.
func (self *DropDown) ListFactory() *ListItemFactory

ListFactory gets the factory that's currently used to populate list items in the popup.

The function returns the following values:

  • listItemFactory (optional): factory in use.
func (self *DropDown) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model that provides the displayed items.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model in use.
func (self *DropDown) Selected() uint

Selected gets the position of the selected item.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: position of the selected item, or GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION if not item is selected.
func (self *DropDown) SelectedItem() *coreglib.Object

SelectedItem gets the selected item. If no item is selected, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): selected item.
func (self *DropDown) SetEnableSearch(enableSearch bool)

SetEnableSearch sets whether a search entry will be shown in the popup that allows to search for items in the list.

Note that gtk.DropDown:expression must be set for search to work.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableSearch: whether to enable search.
func (self *DropDown) SetExpression(expression Expressioner)

SetExpression sets the expression that gets evaluated to obtain strings from items.

This is used for search in the popup. The expression must have a value type of G_TYPE_STRING.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression, or NULL.
func (self *DropDown) SetFactory(factory *ListItemFactory)

SetFactory sets the GtkListItemFactory to use for populating list items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factory (optional) to use or NULL for none.
func (self *DropDown) SetListFactory(factory *ListItemFactory)

SetListFactory sets the GtkListItemFactory to use for populating list items in the popup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factory (optional) to use or NULL for none.
func (self *DropDown) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the GListModel to use.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use or NULL for none.
func (self *DropDown) SetSelected(position uint)

SetSelected selects the item at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the item to select, or GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION.
type DropDownClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DropDownClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference. 

func (d *DropDownClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass
type DropDownOverrides struct {
}

DropDownOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type DropTarget 

type DropTarget struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DropTarget: GtkDropTarget is an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations.

The most basic way to use a GtkDropTarget to receive drops on a widget is to create it via gtk.DropTarget.New, passing in the GType of the data you want to receive and connect to the gtk.DropTarget::drop signal to receive the data: 

static gboolean
on_drop (GtkDropTarget *target,
         const GValue  *value,
         double         x,
         double         y,
         gpointer       data)
{
  MyWidget *self = data;

  // Call the appropriate setter depending on the type of data
  // that we received
  if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, G_TYPE_FILE))
    my_widget_set_file (self, g_value_get_object (value));
  else if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF))
    my_widget_set_pixbuf (self, g_value_get_object (value));
  else
    return FALSE;

  return TRUE;
}

static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
  GtkDropTarget *target =
    gtk_drop_target_new (G_TYPE_INVALID, GDK_ACTION_COPY);

  // This widget accepts two types of drop types: GFile objects
  // and GdkPixbuf objects
  gtk_drop_target_set_gtypes (target, (GTypes [2]) {
    G_TYPE_FILE,
    GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF,
  }, 2);

  gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (target));
}

GtkDropTarget supports more options, such as:

  • rejecting potential drops via the gtk.DropTarget::accept signal and the gtk.DropTarget.Reject() function to let other drop targets handle the drop
  • tracking an ongoing drag operation before the drop via the gtk.DropTarget::enter, gtk.DropTarget::motion and gtk.DropTarget::leave signals
  • configuring how to receive data by setting the gtk.DropTarget:preload property and listening for its availability via the gtk.DropTarget:value property

However, GtkDropTarget is ultimately modeled in a synchronous way and only supports data transferred via GType. If you want full control over an ongoing drop, the gtk.DropTargetAsync object gives you this ability.

While a pointer is dragged over the drop target's widget and the drop has not been rejected, that widget will receive the GTK_STATE_FLAG_DROP_ACTIVE state, which can be used to style the widget.

If you are not interested in receiving the drop, but just want to update UI state during a Drag-and-Drop operation (e.g. switching tabs), you can use gtk.DropControllerMotion.

func NewDropTarget 

func NewDropTarget(typ coreglib.Type, actions gdk.DragAction) *DropTarget

NewDropTarget creates a new GtkDropTarget object.

If the drop target should support more than 1 type, pass G_TYPE_INVALID for type and then call gtk.DropTarget.SetGTypes().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: supported type or G_TYPE_INVALID.
  • actions: supported actions.

The function returns the following values:

  • dropTarget: new GtkDropTarget.

func (*DropTarget) Actions 

func (self *DropTarget) Actions() gdk.DragAction

Actions gets the actions that this drop target supports.

The function returns the following values:

  • dragAction actions that this drop target supports.

func (*DropTarget) ConnectAccept 

func (self *DropTarget) ConnectAccept(f func(drop gdk.Dropper) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAccept is emitted on the drop site when a drop operation is about to begin.

If the drop is not accepted, FALSE will be returned and the drop target will ignore the drop. If TRUE is returned, the drop is accepted for now but may be rejected later via a call to gtk.DropTarget.Reject() or ultimately by returning FALSE from a gtk.DropTarget::drop handler.

The default handler for this signal decides whether to accept the drop based on the formats provided by the drop.

If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected depends on the data, this function should return TRUE, the gtk.DropTarget:preload property should be set and the value should be inspected via the ::notify:value signal, calling gtk.DropTarget.Reject() if required.

func (*DropTarget) ConnectDrop 

func (self *DropTarget) ConnectDrop(f func(value *coreglib.Value, x, y float64) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDrop is emitted on the drop site when the user drops the data onto the widget.

The signal handler must determine whether the pointer position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns FALSE and no further processing is necessary.

Otherwise, the handler returns TRUE. In this case, this handler will accept the drop. The handler is responsible for rading the given value and performing the drop operation.

func (*DropTarget) ConnectEnter 

func (self *DropTarget) ConnectEnter(f func(x, y float64) (dragAction gdk.DragAction)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnter is emitted on the drop site when the pointer enters the widget.

It can be used to set up custom highlighting.

func (*DropTarget) ConnectLeave 

func (self *DropTarget) ConnectLeave(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLeave is emitted on the drop site when the pointer leaves the widget.

Its main purpose it to undo things done in gtk.DropTarget::enter.

func (*DropTarget) ConnectMotion 

func (self *DropTarget) ConnectMotion(f func(x, y float64) (dragAction gdk.DragAction)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMotion is emitted while the pointer is moving over the drop target.

func (*DropTarget) Drop 

func (self *DropTarget) Drop() gdk.Dropper

Drop gets the currently handled drop operation.

If no drop operation is going on, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • drop (optional): current drop.

func (*DropTarget) Formats 

func (self *DropTarget) Formats() *gdk.ContentFormats

Formats gets the data formats that this drop target accepts.

If the result is NULL, all formats are expected to be supported.

The function returns the following values:

  • contentFormats (optional): supported data formats.

func (*DropTarget) GTypes 

func (self *DropTarget) GTypes() []coreglib.Type

GTypes gets the list of supported GTypes for self.

If no type have been set, NULL will be returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • gTypes (optional): G_TYPE_INVALID-terminated array of types included in formats or NULL if none.

func (*DropTarget) Preload 

func (self *DropTarget) Preload() bool

Preload gets whether data should be preloaded on hover.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if drop data should be preloaded.

func (*DropTarget) Reject 

func (self *DropTarget) Reject()

Reject rejects the ongoing drop operation.

If no drop operation is ongoing, i.e when gtk.DropTarget:drop is NULL, this function does nothing.

This function should be used when delaying the decision on whether to accept a drag or not until after reading the data.

func (*DropTarget) SetActions 

func (self *DropTarget) SetActions(actions gdk.DragAction)

SetActions sets the actions that this drop target supports.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actions: supported actions.

func (*DropTarget) SetGTypes 

func (self *DropTarget) SetGTypes(types []coreglib.Type)

SetGTypes sets the supported GTypes for this drop target.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types (optional): all supported #GTypes that can be dropped.

func (*DropTarget) SetPreload 

func (self *DropTarget) SetPreload(preload bool)

SetPreload sets whether data should be preloaded on hover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • preload: TRUE to preload drop data.

func (*DropTarget) Value 

func (self *DropTarget) Value() *coreglib.Value

Value gets the current drop data, as a GValue.

The function returns the following values:

  • value (optional): current drop data.

type DropTargetAsync 

type DropTargetAsync struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DropTargetAsync: GtkDropTargetAsync is an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations, asynchronously.

It is the more complete but also more complex method of handling drop operations compared to gtk.DropTarget, and you should only use it if GtkDropTarget doesn't provide all the features you need.

To use a GtkDropTargetAsync to receive drops on a widget, you create a GtkDropTargetAsync object, configure which data formats and actions you support, connect to its signals, and then attach it to the widget with gtk.Widget.AddController().

During a drag operation, the first signal that a GtkDropTargetAsync emits is gtk.DropTargetAsync::accept, which is meant to determine whether the target is a possible drop site for the ongoing drop. The default handler for the ::accept signal accepts the drop if it finds a compatible data format and an action that is supported on both sides.

If it is, and the widget becomes a target, you will receive a gtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-enter signal, followed by gtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-motion signals as the pointer moves, optionally a gtk.DropTargetAsync::drop signal when a drop happens, and finally a gtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-leave signal when the pointer moves off the widget.

The ::drag-enter and ::drag-motion handler return a GdkDragAction to update the status of the ongoing operation. The ::drop handler should decide if it ultimately accepts the drop and if it does, it should initiate the data transfer and finish the operation by calling gdk.Drop.Finish().

Between the ::drag-enter and ::drag-leave signals the widget is a current drop target, and will receive the GTK_STATE_FLAG_DROP_ACTIVE state, which can be used by themes to style the widget as a drop target.

func NewDropTargetAsync 

func NewDropTargetAsync(formats *gdk.ContentFormats, actions gdk.DragAction) *DropTargetAsync

NewDropTargetAsync creates a new GtkDropTargetAsync object.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • formats (optional): supported data formats.
  • actions: supported actions.

The function returns the following values:

  • dropTargetAsync: new GtkDropTargetAsync.

func (*DropTargetAsync) Actions 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) Actions() gdk.DragAction

Actions gets the actions that this drop target supports.

The function returns the following values:

  • dragAction actions that this drop target supports.

func (*DropTargetAsync) ConnectAccept 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) ConnectAccept(f func(drop gdk.Dropper) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAccept is emitted on the drop site when a drop operation is about to begin.

If the drop is not accepted, FALSE will be returned and the drop target will ignore the drop. If TRUE is returned, the drop is accepted for now but may be rejected later via a call to gtk.DropTargetAsync.RejectDrop() or ultimately by returning FALSE from a gtk.DropTargetAsync::drop handler.

The default handler for this signal decides whether to accept the drop based on the formats provided by the drop.

If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected needs further processing, such as inspecting the data, this function should return TRUE and proceed as is drop was accepted and if it decides to reject the drop later, it should call gtk.DropTargetAsync.RejectDrop().

func (*DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragEnter 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragEnter(f func(drop gdk.Dropper, x, y float64) (dragAction gdk.DragAction)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragEnter is emitted on the drop site when the pointer enters the widget.

It can be used to set up custom highlighting.

func (*DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragLeave 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragLeave(f func(drop gdk.Dropper)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragLeave is emitted on the drop site when the pointer leaves the widget.

Its main purpose it to undo things done in GtkDropTargetAsync::drag-enter.

func (*DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragMotion 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) ConnectDragMotion(f func(drop gdk.Dropper, x, y float64) (dragAction gdk.DragAction)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragMotion is emitted while the pointer is moving over the drop target.

func (*DropTargetAsync) ConnectDrop 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) ConnectDrop(f func(drop gdk.Dropper, x, y float64) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDrop is emitted on the drop site when the user drops the data onto the widget.

The signal handler must determine whether the pointer position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns FALSE and no further processing is necessary.

Otherwise, the handler returns TRUE. In this case, this handler will accept the drop. The handler must ensure that gdk.Drop.Finish() is called to let the source know that the drop is done. The call to gdk.Drop.Finish() must only be done when all data has been received.

To receive the data, use one of the read functions provided by gdk.Drop such as gdk.Drop.ReadAsync() or gdk.Drop.ReadValueAsync().

func (*DropTargetAsync) Formats 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) Formats() *gdk.ContentFormats

Formats gets the data formats that this drop target accepts.

If the result is NULL, all formats are expected to be supported.

The function returns the following values:

  • contentFormats (optional): supported data formats.

func (*DropTargetAsync) RejectDrop 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) RejectDrop(drop gdk.Dropper)

RejectDrop sets the drop as not accepted on this drag site.

This function should be used when delaying the decision on whether to accept a drag or not until after reading the data.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drop of an ongoing drag operation.

func (*DropTargetAsync) SetActions 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) SetActions(actions gdk.DragAction)

SetActions sets the actions that this drop target supports.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actions: supported actions.

func (*DropTargetAsync) SetFormats 

func (self *DropTargetAsync) SetFormats(formats *gdk.ContentFormats)

SetFormats sets the data formats that this drop target will accept.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • formats (optional): supported data formats or NULL for any format.

type EditableInterface added in v0.0.5 

type EditableInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EditableInterface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type EditableLabel 

type EditableLabel struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	EditableTextWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EditableLabel: GtkEditableLabel is a label that allows users to edit the text by switching to an “edit mode”.

!An example GtkEditableLabel (editable-label.png)

GtkEditableLabel does not have API of its own, but it implements the gtk.Editable interface.

The default bindings for activating the edit mode is to click or press the Enter key. The default bindings for leaving the edit mode are the Enter key (to save the results) or the Escape key (to cancel the editing).

CSS nodes 

editablelabel[.editing]
╰── stack
    ├── label
    ╰── text

GtkEditableLabel has a main node with the name editablelabel. When the entry is in editing mode, it gets the .editing style class.

For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see gtk.Text.

func NewEditableLabel 

func NewEditableLabel(str string) *EditableLabel

NewEditableLabel creates a new GtkEditableLabel widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: text for the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • editableLabel: new GtkEditableLabel.

func (*EditableLabel) Editing 

func (self *EditableLabel) Editing() bool

Editing returns whether the label is currently in “editing mode”.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self is currently in editing mode.

func (*EditableLabel) StartEditing 

func (self *EditableLabel) StartEditing()

StartEditing switches the label into “editing mode”.

func (*EditableLabel) StopEditing 

func (self *EditableLabel) StopEditing(commit bool)

StopEditing switches the label out of “editing mode”.

If commit is TRUE, the resulting text is kept as the gtk.Editable:text property value, otherwise the resulting text is discarded and the label will keep its previous gtk.Editable:text property value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • commit: whether to set the edited text on the label.

type EditableLabelClass added in v0.0.5 

type EditableLabelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EditableLabelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*EditableLabelClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (e *EditableLabelClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type EditableLabelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type EditableLabelOverrides struct {
}

EditableLabelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type EditableProperties 

type EditableProperties C.gint
const (
	EditablePropText EditableProperties = iota
	EditablePropCursorPosition
	EditablePropSelectionBound
	EditablePropEditable
	EditablePropWidthChars
	EditablePropMaxWidthChars
	EditablePropXAlign
	EditablePropEnableUndo
	EditableNumProperties
)

func (EditableProperties) String 

func (e EditableProperties) String() string

String returns the name in string for EditableProperties.

type EditableTextWidget added in v0.0.6 

type EditableTextWidget struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EditableTextWidget: GtkEditable is an interface for text editing widgets.

Typical examples of editable widgets are gtk.Entry and gtk.SpinButton. It contains functions for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can connect to modify the behavior of a widget.

As an example of the latter usage, by connecting the following handler to gtk.Editable::insert-text, an application can convert all entry into a widget into uppercase.

Forcing entry to uppercase. 

#include <ctype.h>

void
insert_text_handler (GtkEditable *editable,
                     const char  *text,
                     int          length,
                     int         *position,
                     gpointer     data)
{
  char *result = g_utf8_strup (text, length);

  g_signal_handlers_block_by_func (editable,
                               (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
  gtk_editable_insert_text (editable, result, length, position);
  g_signal_handlers_unblock_by_func (editable,
                                     (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);

  g_signal_stop_emission_by_name (editable, "insert_text");

  g_free (result);
}

Implementing GtkEditable

The most likely scenario for implementing GtkEditable on your own widget is that you will embed a Text inside a complex widget, and want to delegate the editable functionality to that text widget. GtkEditable provides some utility functions to make this easy.

In your class_init function, call gtk.Editable().InstallProperties, passing the first available property ID: 

static void
my_class_init (MyClass *class)
{
  ...
  g_object_class_install_properties (object_class, NUM_PROPERTIES, props);
  gtk_editable_install_properties (object_clas, NUM_PROPERTIES);
  ...
}

In your interface_init function for the GtkEditable interface, provide an implementation for the get_delegate vfunc that returns your text widget: 

GtkEditable *
get_editable_delegate (GtkEditable *editable)
{
  return GTK_EDITABLE (MY_WIDGET (editable)->text_widget);
}

static void
my_editable_init (GtkEditableInterface *iface)
{
  iface->get_delegate = get_editable_delegate;
}

You don't need to provide any other vfuncs. The default implementations work by forwarding to the delegate that the GtkEditableInterface.get_delegate() vfunc returns.

In your instance_init function, create your text widget, and then call gtk.Editable.InitDelegate(): 

static void
my_widget_init (MyWidget *self)
{
  ...
  self->text_widget = gtk_text_new ();
  gtk_editable_init_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self));
  ...
}

In your dispose function, call gtk.Editable.FinishDelegate() before destroying your text widget: 

static void
my_widget_dispose (GObject *object)
{
  ...
  gtk_editable_finish_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self));
  g_clear_pointer (&self->text_widget, gtk_widget_unparent);
  ...
}

Finally, use gtk.Editable().DelegateSetProperty in your set_property function (and similar for get_property), to set the editable properties: 

...
if (gtk_editable_delegate_set_property (object, prop_id, value, pspec))
  return;

switch (prop_id)
...

It is important to note that if you create a GtkEditable that uses a delegate, the low level gtk.Editable::insert-text and gtk.Editable::delete-text signals will be propagated from the "wrapper" editable to the delegate, but they will not be propagated from the delegate to the "wrapper" editable, as they would cause an infinite recursion. If you wish to connect to the gtk.Editable::insert-text and gtk.Editable::delete-text signals, you will need to connect to them on the delegate obtained via gtk.Editable.GetDelegate().

This type has been renamed from Editable.

EditableTextWidget wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*EditableTextWidget) Alignment added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Alignment() float32

Alignment gets the alignment of the editable.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: alignment.

func (*EditableTextWidget) Chars added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Chars(startPos, endPos int) string

Chars retrieves a sequence of characters.

The characters that are retrieved are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the characters retrieved are those characters from start_pos to the end of the text.

Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startPos: start of text.
  • endPos: end of text.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: pointer to the contents of the widget as a string. This string is allocated by the GtkEditable implementation and should be freed by the caller.

func (*EditableTextWidget) ConnectChanged added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted at the end of a single user-visible operation on the contents.

E.g., a paste operation that replaces the contents of the selection will cause only one signal emission (even though it is implemented by first deleting the selection, then inserting the new content, and may cause multiple ::notify::text signals to be emitted).

func (*EditableTextWidget) ConnectDeleteText added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) ConnectDeleteText(f func(startPos, endPos int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeleteText is emitted when text is deleted from the widget by the user.

The default handler for this signal will normally be responsible for deleting the text, so by connecting to this signal and then stopping the signal with g_signal_stop_emission(), it is possible to modify the range of deleted text, or prevent it from being deleted entirely.

The start_pos and end_pos parameters are interpreted as for gtk.Editable.DeleteText().

func (*EditableTextWidget) Delegate added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Delegate() *EditableTextWidget

Delegate gets the GtkEditable that editable is delegating its implementation to.

Typically, the delegate is a gtk.Text widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): delegate GtkEditable.

func (*EditableTextWidget) DeleteSelection added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) DeleteSelection()

DeleteSelection deletes the currently selected text of the editable.

This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.

func (*EditableTextWidget) DeleteText added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) DeleteText(startPos, endPos int)

DeleteText deletes a sequence of characters.

The characters that are deleted are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the characters deleted are those from start_pos to the end of the text.

Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startPos: start position.
  • endPos: end position.

func (*EditableTextWidget) Editable added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Editable() bool

Editable retrieves whether editable is editable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if editable is editable.

func (*EditableTextWidget) EnableUndo added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) EnableUndo() bool

EnableUndo gets if undo/redo actions are enabled for editable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if undo is enabled.

func (*EditableTextWidget) FinishDelegate added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) FinishDelegate()

FinishDelegate undoes the setup done by gtk.Editable.InitDelegate().

This is a helper function that should be called from dispose, before removing the delegate object.

func (*EditableTextWidget) InitDelegate added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) InitDelegate()

InitDelegate sets up a delegate for GtkEditable.

This is assuming that the get_delegate vfunc in the GtkEditable interface has been set up for the editable's type.

This is a helper function that should be called in instance init, after creating the delegate object.

func (*EditableTextWidget) MaxWidthChars added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) MaxWidthChars() int

MaxWidthChars retrieves the desired maximum width of editable, in characters.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum width of the entry, in characters.

func (*EditableTextWidget) Position added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Position() int

Position retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start of the content of the editable.

Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: cursor position.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SelectRegion added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SelectRegion(startPos, endPos int)

SelectRegion selects a region of text.

The characters that are selected are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the characters selected are those characters from start_pos to the end of the text.

Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startPos: start of region.
  • endPos: end of region.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SelectionBounds added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SelectionBounds() (startPos, endPos int, ok bool)

SelectionBounds retrieves the selection bound of the editable.

start_pos will be filled with the start of the selection and end_pos with end. If no text was selected both will be identical and FALSE will be returned.

Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.

The function returns the following values:

  • startPos (optional): location to store the starting position, or NULL.
  • endPos (optional): location to store the end position, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if there is a non-empty selection, FALSE otherwise.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetAlignment added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetAlignment(xalign float32)

SetAlignment sets the alignment for the contents of the editable.

This controls the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed text is shorter than the width of the editable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right). Reversed for RTL layouts.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetEditable added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetEditable(isEditable bool)

SetEditable determines if the user can edit the text in the editable widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • isEditable: TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text in the widget.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetEnableUndo added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetEnableUndo(enableUndo bool)

SetEnableUndo: if enabled, changes to editable will be saved for undo/redo actions.

This results in an additional copy of text changes and are not stored in secure memory. As such, undo is forcefully disabled when gtk.Text:visibility is set to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableUndo: if undo/redo should be enabled.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetMaxWidthChars added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetMaxWidthChars(nChars int)

SetMaxWidthChars sets the desired maximum width in characters of editable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChars: new desired maximum width, in characters.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetPosition added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetPosition(position int)

SetPosition sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.

The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0) index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1 indicates that the position should be set after the last character of the editable. Note that position is in characters, not in bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the cursor.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetText added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetText(text string)

SetText sets the text in the editable to the given value.

This is replacing the current contents.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text to set.

func (*EditableTextWidget) SetWidthChars added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) SetWidthChars(nChars int)

SetWidthChars changes the size request of the editable to be about the right size for n_chars characters.

Note that it changes the size request, the size can still be affected by how you pack the widget into containers. If n_chars is -1, the size reverts to the default size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChars: width in chars.

func (*EditableTextWidget) Text added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) Text() string

Text retrieves the contents of editable.

The returned string is owned by GTK and must not be modified or freed.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: pointer to the contents of the editable.

func (*EditableTextWidget) WidthChars added in v0.0.6 

func (editable *EditableTextWidget) WidthChars() int

WidthChars gets the number of characters of space reserved for the contents of the editable.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of chars to request space for, or negative if unset.

type EditableTextWidgetter added in v0.0.6 

type EditableTextWidgetter interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// DeleteSelection deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
	DeleteSelection()
	// DeleteText deletes a sequence of characters.
	DeleteText(startPos, endPos int)
	// FinishDelegate undoes the setup done by gtk.Editable.InitDelegate().
	FinishDelegate()
	// Alignment gets the alignment of the editable.
	Alignment() float32
	// Chars retrieves a sequence of characters.
	Chars(startPos, endPos int) string
	// Delegate gets the GtkEditable that editable is delegating its
	// implementation to.
	Delegate() *EditableTextWidget
	// Editable retrieves whether editable is editable.
	Editable() bool
	// EnableUndo gets if undo/redo actions are enabled for editable.
	EnableUndo() bool
	// MaxWidthChars retrieves the desired maximum width of editable,
	// in characters.
	MaxWidthChars() int
	// Position retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the
	// start of the content of the editable.
	Position() int
	// SelectionBounds retrieves the selection bound of the editable.
	SelectionBounds() (startPos, endPos int, ok bool)
	// Text retrieves the contents of editable.
	Text() string
	// WidthChars gets the number of characters of space reserved for the
	// contents of the editable.
	WidthChars() int
	// InitDelegate sets up a delegate for GtkEditable.
	InitDelegate()
	// SelectRegion selects a region of text.
	SelectRegion(startPos, endPos int)
	// SetAlignment sets the alignment for the contents of the editable.
	SetAlignment(xalign float32)
	// SetEditable determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
	// widget.
	SetEditable(isEditable bool)
	// SetEnableUndo: if enabled, changes to editable will be saved for
	// undo/redo actions.
	SetEnableUndo(enableUndo bool)
	// SetMaxWidthChars sets the desired maximum width in characters of
	// editable.
	SetMaxWidthChars(nChars int)
	// SetPosition sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
	SetPosition(position int)
	// SetText sets the text in the editable to the given value.
	SetText(text string)
	// SetWidthChars changes the size request of the editable to be about the
	// right size for n_chars characters.
	SetWidthChars(nChars int)

	// Changed is emitted at the end of a single user-visible operation on the
	// contents.
	ConnectChanged(func()) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Delete-text is emitted when text is deleted from the widget by the user.
	ConnectDeleteText(func(startPos, endPos int)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

EditableTextWidgetter describes EditableTextWidget's interface methods.

type EmojiChooser 

type EmojiChooser struct {
	Popover
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EmojiChooser: GtkEmojiChooser is used by text widgets such as GtkEntry or GtkTextView to let users insert Emoji characters.

!An example GtkEmojiChooser (emojichooser.png)

GtkEmojiChooser emits the gtk.EmojiChooser::emoji-picked signal when an Emoji is selected.

CSS nodes 

popover
├── box.emoji-searchbar
│   ╰── entry.search
╰── box.emoji-toolbar
    ├── button.image-button.emoji-section
    ├── ...
    ╰── button.image-button.emoji-section

Every GtkEmojiChooser consists of a main node called popover. The contents of the popover are largely implementation defined and supposed to inherit general styles. The top searchbar used to search emoji and gets the .emoji-searchbar style class itself. The bottom toolbar used to switch between different emoji categories consists of buttons with the .emoji-section style class and gets the .emoji-toolbar style class itself.

func NewEmojiChooser 

func NewEmojiChooser() *EmojiChooser

NewEmojiChooser creates a new GtkEmojiChooser.

The function returns the following values:

  • emojiChooser: new GtkEmojiChooser.

func (*EmojiChooser) ConnectEmojiPicked 

func (v *EmojiChooser) ConnectEmojiPicked(f func(text string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEmojiPicked is emitted when the user selects an Emoji.

type Entry 

type Entry struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned
	Accessible
	Buildable
	CellEditable
	ConstraintTarget
	EditableTextWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Entry: GtkEntry is a single line text entry widget.

!An example GtkEntry (entry.png)

A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.

When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using gtk.Entry.SetVisibility(). In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.Entry.SetInvisibleChar().

GtkEntry has the ability to display progress or activity information behind the text. To make an entry display such information, use gtk.Entry.SetProgressFraction() or gtk.Entry.SetProgressPulseStep().

Additionally, GtkEntry can show icons at either side of the entry. These icons can be activatable by clicking, can be set up as drag source and can have tooltips. To add an icon, use gtk.Entry.SetIconFromGIcon() or one of the various other functions that set an icon from an icon name or a paintable. To trigger an action when the user clicks an icon, connect to the gtk.Entry::icon-press signal. To allow DND operations from an icon, use gtk.Entry.SetIconDragSource(). To set a tooltip on an icon, use gtk.Entry.SetIconTooltipText() or the corresponding function for markup.

Note that functionality or information that is only available by clicking on an icon in an entry may not be accessible at all to users which are not able to use a mouse or other pointing device. It is therefore recommended that any such functionality should also be available by other means, e.g. via the context menu of the entry.

CSS nodes 

entry[.flat][.warning][.error]
├── text[.readonly]
├── image.left
├── image.right
╰── [progress[.pulse]]

GtkEntry has a main node with the name entry. Depending on the properties of the entry, the style classes .read-only and .flat may appear. The style classes .warning and .error may also be used with entries.

When the entry shows icons, it adds subnodes with the name image and the style class .left or .right, depending on where the icon appears.

When the entry shows progress, it adds a subnode with the name progress. The node has the style class .pulse when the shown progress is pulsing.

For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see gtk.Text.

GtkEntry as GtkBuildable

The GtkEntry implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify Attribute values for this label.

An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes: 

<object class="GtkEnry">
  <attributes>
    <attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
    <attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
  </attributes>
</object>

The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.

Accessibility

GtkEntry uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOX role.

func NewEntry 

func NewEntry() *Entry

NewEntry creates a new entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • entry: new GtkEntry.

func NewEntryWithBuffer 

func NewEntryWithBuffer(buffer *EntryBuffer) *Entry

NewEntryWithBuffer creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer to use for the new GtkEntry.

The function returns the following values:

  • entry: new GtkEntry.

func (*Entry) ActivatesDefault 

func (entry *Entry) ActivatesDefault() bool

ActivatesDefault retrieves the value set by gtk_entry_set_activates_default().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the entry will activate the default widget.

func (*Entry) Alignment 

func (entry *Entry) Alignment() float32

Alignment gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().

See also: gtk.Editable:xalign.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: alignment.

func (*Entry) Attributes 

func (entry *Entry) Attributes() *pango.AttrList

Attributes gets the attribute list of the GtkEntry.

See gtk.Entry.SetAttributes().

The function returns the following values:

  • attrList (optional): attribute list, or NULL if none was set.

func (*Entry) Buffer 

func (entry *Entry) Buffer() *EntryBuffer

Buffer: get the GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for this widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryBuffer: GtkEntryBuffer object.

func (*Entry) Completion 

func (entry *Entry) Completion() *EntryCompletion

Completion returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryCompletion (optional): auxiliary completion object currently in use by entry.

func (*Entry) ConnectActivate 

func (entry *Entry) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when the entry is activated.

The keybindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.

func (*Entry) ConnectIconPress 

func (entry *Entry) ConnectIconPress(f func(iconPos EntryIconPosition)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectIconPress is emitted when an activatable icon is clicked.

func (*Entry) ConnectIconRelease 

func (entry *Entry) ConnectIconRelease(f func(iconPos EntryIconPosition)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectIconRelease is emitted on the button release from a mouse click over an activatable icon.

func (*Entry) CurrentIconDragSource 

func (entry *Entry) CurrentIconDragSource() int

CurrentIconDragSource returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current DND operation, or -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the icon which is the source of the current DND operation, or -1.

func (*Entry) ExtraMenu 

func (entry *Entry) ExtraMenu() gio.MenuModeller

ExtraMenu gets the menu model set with gtk_entry_set_extra_menu().

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional): menu model.

func (*Entry) GrabFocusWithoutSelecting 

func (entry *Entry) GrabFocusWithoutSelecting() bool

GrabFocusWithoutSelecting causes entry to have keyboard focus.

It behaves like gtk.Widget.GrabFocus(), except that it doesn't select the contents of the entry. You only want to call this on some special entries which the user usually doesn't want to replace all text in, such as search-as-you-type entries.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus is now inside self.

func (*Entry) HasFrame 

func (entry *Entry) HasFrame() bool

HasFrame gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the entry has a beveled frame.

func (*Entry) IconActivatable 

func (entry *Entry) IconActivatable(iconPos EntryIconPosition) bool

IconActivatable returns whether the icon is activatable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the icon is activatable.

func (*Entry) IconArea 

func (entry *Entry) IconArea(iconPos EntryIconPosition) *gdk.Rectangle

IconArea gets the area where entry’s icon at icon_pos is drawn.

This function is useful when drawing something to the entry in a draw callback.

If the entry is not realized or has no icon at the given position, icon_area is filled with zeros. Otherwise, icon_area will be filled with the icon's allocation, relative to entry's allocation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconArea: return location for the icon’s area.

func (*Entry) IconAtPos 

func (entry *Entry) IconAtPos(x, y int) int

IconAtPos finds the icon at the given position and return its index.

The position’s coordinates are relative to the entry’s top left corner. If x, y doesn’t lie inside an icon, -1 is returned. This function is intended for use in a gtk.Widget::query-tooltip signal handler.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x coordinate of the position to find, relative to entry.
  • y coordinate of the position to find, relative to entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the icon at the given position, or -1.

func (*Entry) IconGIcon 

func (entry *Entry) IconGIcon(iconPos EntryIconPosition) *gio.Icon

IconGIcon retrieves the GIcon used for the icon.

NULL will be returned if there is no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by GdkPaintable or icon name).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • icon (optional): GIcon, or NULL if no icon is set or if the icon is not a GIcon.

func (*Entry) IconName 

func (entry *Entry) IconName(iconPos EntryIconPosition) string

IconName retrieves the icon name used for the icon.

NULL is returned if there is no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by GdkPaintable or gicon).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): icon name, or NULL if no icon is set or if the icon wasn’t set from an icon name.

func (*Entry) IconPaintable 

func (entry *Entry) IconPaintable(iconPos EntryIconPosition) *gdk.Paintable

IconPaintable retrieves the GdkPaintable used for the icon.

If no GdkPaintable was used for the icon, NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable, or NULL if no icon is set for this position or the icon set is not a GdkPaintable.

func (*Entry) IconSensitive 

func (entry *Entry) IconSensitive(iconPos EntryIconPosition) bool

IconSensitive returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the icon is sensitive.

func (*Entry) IconStorageType 

func (entry *Entry) IconStorageType(iconPos EntryIconPosition) ImageType

IconStorageType gets the type of representation being used by the icon to store image data.

If the icon has no image data, the return value will be GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • imageType: image representation being used.

func (*Entry) IconTooltipMarkup 

func (entry *Entry) IconTooltipMarkup(iconPos EntryIconPosition) string

IconTooltipMarkup gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified position in entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): tooltip text, or NULL. Free the returned string with g_free() when done.

func (*Entry) IconTooltipText 

func (entry *Entry) IconTooltipText(iconPos EntryIconPosition) string

IconTooltipText gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified position in entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): tooltip text, or NULL. Free the returned string with g_free() when done.

func (*Entry) InputHints 

func (entry *Entry) InputHints() InputHints

InputHints gets the input hints of this GtkEntry.

The function returns the following values:

  • inputHints: input hints.

func (*Entry) InputPurpose 

func (entry *Entry) InputPurpose() InputPurpose

InputPurpose gets the input purpose of the GtkEntry.

The function returns the following values:

  • inputPurpose: input purpose.

func (*Entry) InvisibleChar 

func (entry *Entry) InvisibleChar() uint32

InvisibleChar retrieves the character displayed in place of the actual text in “password mode”.

The function returns the following values:

  • gunichar: current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not show invisible text at all.

func (*Entry) MaxLength 

func (entry *Entry) MaxLength() int

MaxLength retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in entry.

See gtk.Entry.SetMaxLength().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum allowed number of characters in GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.

func (*Entry) OverwriteMode 

func (entry *Entry) OverwriteMode() bool

OverwriteMode gets whether the GtkEntry is in overwrite mode.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the text is overwritten when typing.

func (*Entry) PlaceholderText 

func (entry *Entry) PlaceholderText() string

PlaceholderText retrieves the text that will be displayed when entry is empty and unfocused.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): pointer to the placeholder text as a string. This string points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not be freed, modified or stored. If no placeholder text has been set, NULL will be returned.

func (*Entry) ProgressFraction 

func (entry *Entry) ProgressFraction() float64

ProgressFraction returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.

See gtk.Entry.SetProgressFraction().

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.

func (*Entry) ProgressPulse 

func (entry *Entry) ProgressPulse()

ProgressPulse indicates that some progress is made, but you don’t know how much.

Causes the entry’s progress indicator to enter “activity mode”, where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by gtk.Entry.SetProgressPulseStep()).

func (*Entry) ProgressPulseStep 

func (entry *Entry) ProgressPulseStep() float64

ProgressPulseStep retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.

func (*Entry) ResetIMContext 

func (entry *Entry) ResetIMContext()

ResetIMContext: reset the input method context of the entry if needed.

This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer would confuse on-going input method behavior.

func (*Entry) SetActivatesDefault 

func (entry *Entry) SetActivatesDefault(setting bool)

SetActivatesDefault sets whether pressing Enter in the entry will activate the default widget for the window containing the entry.

This usually means that the dialog containing the entry will be closed, since the default widget is usually one of the dialog buttons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to activate window’s default widget on Enter keypress.

func (*Entry) SetAlignment 

func (entry *Entry) SetAlignment(xalign float32)

SetAlignment sets the alignment for the contents of the entry.

This controls the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed text is shorter than the width of the entry.

See also: gtk.Editable:xalign.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right). Reversed for RTL layouts.

func (*Entry) SetAttributes 

func (entry *Entry) SetAttributes(attrs *pango.AttrList)

SetAttributes sets a PangoAttrList.

The attributes in the list are applied to the entry text.

Since the attributes will be applies to text that changes as the user types, it makes most sense to use attributes with unlimited extent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attrs: PangoAttrList.

func (*Entry) SetBuffer 

func (entry *Entry) SetBuffer(buffer *EntryBuffer)

SetBuffer: set the GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for this widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer: GtkEntryBuffer.

func (*Entry) SetCompletion 

func (entry *Entry) SetCompletion(completion *EntryCompletion)

SetCompletion sets completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with entry.

All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on completion using the GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if completion is set to NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • completion (optional): GtkEntryCompletion or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetExtraMenu 

func (entry *Entry) SetExtraMenu(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetExtraMenu sets a menu model to add when constructing the context menu for entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*Entry) SetHasFrame 

func (entry *Entry) SetHasFrame(setting bool)

SetHasFrame sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value.

func (*Entry) SetIconActivatable 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconActivatable(iconPos EntryIconPosition, activatable bool)

SetIconActivatable sets whether the icon is activatable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • activatable: TRUE if the icon should be activatable.

func (*Entry) SetIconDragSource 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconDragSource(iconPos EntryIconPosition, provider *gdk.ContentProvider, actions gdk.DragAction)

SetIconDragSource sets up the icon at the given position as drag source.

This makes it so that GTK will start a drag operation when the user clicks and drags the icon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • provider: ContentProvider.
  • actions: bitmask of the allowed drag actions.

func (*Entry) SetIconFromGIcon 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconFromGIcon(iconPos EntryIconPosition, icon gio.Iconner)

SetIconFromGIcon sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position from the current icon theme.

If the icon isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed instead.

If icon is NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: position at which to set the icon.
  • icon (optional) to set, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetIconFromIconName 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconFromIconName(iconPos EntryIconPosition, iconName string)

SetIconFromIconName sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position from the current icon theme.

If the icon name isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed instead.

If icon_name is NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: position at which to set the icon.
  • iconName (optional): icon name, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetIconFromPaintable 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconFromPaintable(iconPos EntryIconPosition, paintable gdk.Paintabler)

SetIconFromPaintable sets the icon shown in the specified position using a GdkPaintable.

If paintable is NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetIconSensitive 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconSensitive(iconPos EntryIconPosition, sensitive bool)

SetIconSensitive sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • sensitive specifies whether the icon should appear sensitive or insensitive.

func (*Entry) SetIconTooltipMarkup 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconTooltipMarkup(iconPos EntryIconPosition, tooltip string)

SetIconTooltipMarkup sets tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at the specified position.

tooltip is assumed to be marked up with Pango Markup.

Use NULL for tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.

See also gtk.Widget.SetTooltipMarkup() and gtk.Entry.SetIconTooltipText().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • tooltip (optional) contents of the tooltip for the icon, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetIconTooltipText 

func (entry *Entry) SetIconTooltipText(iconPos EntryIconPosition, tooltip string)

SetIconTooltipText sets tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at the specified position.

Use NULL for tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.

See also gtk.Widget.SetTooltipText() and gtk.Entry.SetIconTooltipMarkup().

If you unset the widget tooltip via gtk.Widget.SetTooltipText() or gtk.Widget.SetTooltipMarkup(), this sets gtk.Widget:has-tooltip to FALSE, which suppresses icon tooltips too. You can resolve this by then calling gtk.Widget.SetHasTooltip() to set gtk.Widget:has-tooltip back to TRUE, or setting at least one non-empty tooltip on any icon achieves the same result.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconPos: icon position.
  • tooltip (optional) contents of the tooltip for the icon, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetInputHints 

func (entry *Entry) SetInputHints(hints InputHints)

SetInputHints: set additional hints which allow input methods to fine-tune their behavior.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hints: hints.

func (*Entry) SetInputPurpose 

func (entry *Entry) SetInputPurpose(purpose InputPurpose)

SetInputPurpose sets the input purpose which can be used by input methods to adjust their behavior.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • purpose: purpose.

func (*Entry) SetInvisibleChar 

func (entry *Entry) SetInvisibleChar(ch uint32)

SetInvisibleChar sets the character to use in place of the actual text in “password mode”.

See gtk.Entry.SetVisibility() for how to enable “password mode”.

By default, GTK picks the best invisible char available in the current font. If you set the invisible char to 0, then the user will get no feedback at all; there will be no text on the screen as they type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ch: unicode character.

func (*Entry) SetMaxLength 

func (entry *Entry) SetMaxLength(max int)

SetMaxLength sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the widget.

If the current contents are longer than the given length, then they will be truncated to fit.

This is equivalent to getting entry's GtkEntryBuffer and calling gtk.EntryBuffer.SetMaxLength() on it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • max: maximum length of the entry, or 0 for no maximum. (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will be clamped to the range 0-65536.

func (*Entry) SetOverwriteMode 

func (entry *Entry) SetOverwriteMode(overwrite bool)

SetOverwriteMode sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the GtkEntry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • overwrite: new value.

func (*Entry) SetPlaceholderText 

func (entry *Entry) SetPlaceholderText(text string)

SetPlaceholderText sets text to be displayed in entry when it is empty.

This can be used to give a visual hint of the expected contents of the GtkEntry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional): string to be displayed when entry is empty and unfocused, or NULL.

func (*Entry) SetProgressFraction 

func (entry *Entry) SetProgressFraction(fraction float64)

SetProgressFraction causes the entry’s progress indicator to “fill in” the given fraction of the bar.

The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fraction of the task that’s been completed.

func (*Entry) SetProgressPulseStep 

func (entry *Entry) SetProgressPulseStep(fraction float64)

SetProgressPulseStep sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress bouncing block for each pulse.

Use gtk.Entry.ProgressPulse() to pulse the progress.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fraction between 0.0 and 1.0.

func (*Entry) SetTabs 

func (entry *Entry) SetTabs(tabs *pango.TabArray)

SetTabs sets a PangoTabArray.

The tabstops in the array are applied to the entry text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tabs (optional): PangoTabArray.

func (*Entry) SetVisibility 

func (entry *Entry) SetVisibility(visible bool)

SetVisibility sets whether the contents of the entry are visible or not.

When visibility is set to FALSE, characters are displayed as the invisible char, and will also appear that way when the text in the entry widget is copied elsewhere.

By default, GTK picks the best invisible character available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.Entry.SetInvisibleChar().

Note that you probably want to set gtk.Entry:input-purpose to GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_PASSWORD or GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_PIN to inform input methods about the purpose of this entry, in addition to setting visibility to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: TRUE if the contents of the entry are displayed as plaintext.

func (*Entry) Tabs 

func (entry *Entry) Tabs() *pango.TabArray

Tabs gets the tabstops of the `GtkEntry.

See gtk.Entry.SetTabs().

The function returns the following values:

  • tabArray (optional): tabstops, or NULL if none was set.

func (*Entry) TextLength 

func (entry *Entry) TextLength() uint16

TextLength retrieves the current length of the text in entry.

This is equivalent to getting entry's GtkEntryBuffer and calling gtk.EntryBuffer.GetLength() on it.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint16: current number of characters in GtkEntry, or 0 if there are none.

func (*Entry) UnsetInvisibleChar 

func (entry *Entry) UnsetInvisibleChar()

UnsetInvisibleChar unsets the invisible char, so that the default invisible char is used again. See gtk.Entry.SetInvisibleChar().

func (*Entry) Visibility 

func (entry *Entry) Visibility() bool

Visibility retrieves whether the text in entry is visible.

See gtk.Entry.SetVisibility().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the text is currently visible.

type EntryBuffer 

type EntryBuffer struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EntryBuffer: GtkEntryBuffer hold the text displayed in a GtkText widget.

A single GtkEntryBuffer object can be shared by multiple widgets which will then share the same text content, but not the cursor position, visibility attributes, icon etc.

GtkEntryBuffer may be derived from. Such a derived class might allow text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory, useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.

func NewEntryBuffer 

func NewEntryBuffer(initialChars string, nInitialChars int) *EntryBuffer

NewEntryBuffer: create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.

Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • initialChars (optional): initial buffer text, or NULL.
  • nInitialChars: number of characters in initial_chars, or -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryBuffer: new GtkEntryBuffer object.

func (*EntryBuffer) Bytes 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) Bytes() uint

Bytes retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.

See gtk.EntryBuffer.GetLength().

The function returns the following values:

  • gsize: byte length of the buffer.

func (*EntryBuffer) ConnectDeletedText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) ConnectDeletedText(f func(position, nChars uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeletedText: text is altered in the default handler for this signal.

If you want access to the text after the text has been modified, use G_CONNECT_AFTER.

func (*EntryBuffer) ConnectInsertedText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) ConnectInsertedText(f func(position uint, chars string, nChars uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertedText: this signal is emitted after text is inserted into the buffer.

func (*EntryBuffer) DeleteText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) DeleteText(position uint, nChars int) uint

DeleteText deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer.

n_chars characters are deleted starting at position. If n_chars is negative, then all characters until the end of the text are deleted.

If position or n_chars are out of bounds, then they are coerced to sane values.

Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which to delete text.
  • nChars: number of characters to delete.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: number of characters deleted.

func (*EntryBuffer) EmitDeletedText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) EmitDeletedText(position, nChars uint)

EmitDeletedText: used when subclassing GtkEntryBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which text was deleted.
  • nChars: number of characters deleted.

func (*EntryBuffer) EmitInsertedText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) EmitInsertedText(position uint, chars string, nChars uint)

EmitInsertedText: used when subclassing GtkEntryBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which text was inserted.
  • chars: text that was inserted.
  • nChars: number of characters inserted.

func (*EntryBuffer) InsertText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) InsertText(position uint, chars string, nChars int) uint

InsertText inserts n_chars characters of chars into the contents of the buffer, at position position.

If n_chars is negative, then characters from chars will be inserted until a null-terminator is found. If position or n_chars are out of bounds, or the maximum buffer text length is exceeded, then they are coerced to sane values.

Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which to insert text.
  • chars: text to insert into the buffer.
  • nChars: length of the text in characters, or -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: number of characters actually inserted.

func (*EntryBuffer) Length 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) Length() uint

Length retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: number of characters in the buffer.

func (*EntryBuffer) MaxLength 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) MaxLength() int

MaxLength retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum allowed number of characters in EntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.

func (*EntryBuffer) SetMaxLength 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) SetMaxLength(maxLength int)

SetMaxLength sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the buffer.

If the current contents are longer than the given length, then they will be truncated to fit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • maxLength: maximum length of the entry buffer, or 0 for no maximum. (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will be clamped to the range 0-65536.

func (*EntryBuffer) SetText 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) SetText(chars string, nChars int)

SetText sets the text in the buffer.

This is roughly equivalent to calling gtk.EntryBuffer.DeleteText() and gtk.EntryBuffer.InsertText().

Note that n_chars is in characters, not in bytes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • chars: new text.
  • nChars: number of characters in text, or -1.

func (*EntryBuffer) Text 

func (buffer *EntryBuffer) Text() string

Text retrieves the contents of the buffer.

The memory pointer returned by this call will not change unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: pointer to the contents of the widget as a string. This string points to internally allocated storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or stored.

type EntryBufferClass added in v0.0.5 

type EntryBufferClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EntryBufferClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type EntryBufferOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type EntryBufferOverrides struct {
	// DeleteText deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer.
	//
	// n_chars characters are deleted starting at position. If n_chars is
	// negative, then all characters until the end of the text are deleted.
	//
	// If position or n_chars are out of bounds, then they are coerced to sane
	// values.
	//
	// Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - position at which to delete text.
	//   - nChars: number of characters to delete.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - guint: number of characters deleted.
	//
	DeleteText func(position, nChars uint) uint
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - position
	//   - nChars
	//
	DeletedText func(position, nChars uint)
	// Length retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - guint: number of characters in the buffer.
	//
	Length func() uint
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Text func(nBytes *uint) string
	// InsertText inserts n_chars characters of chars into the contents of the
	// buffer, at position position.
	//
	// If n_chars is negative, then characters from chars will be inserted until
	// a null-terminator is found. If position or n_chars are out of bounds,
	// or the maximum buffer text length is exceeded, then they are coerced to
	// sane values.
	//
	// Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - position at which to insert text.
	//   - chars: text to insert into the buffer.
	//   - nChars: length of the text in characters, or -1.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - guint: number of characters actually inserted.
	//
	InsertText func(position uint, chars string, nChars uint) uint
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - position
	//   - chars
	//   - nChars
	//
	InsertedText func(position uint, chars string, nChars uint)
}

EntryBufferOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type EntryClass added in v0.0.5 

type EntryClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EntryClass class structure for Entry. All virtual functions have a default implementation. Derived classes may set the virtual function pointers for the signal handlers to NULL, but must keep get_text_area_size and get_frame_size non-NULL; either use the default implementation, or provide a custom one.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*EntryClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (e *EntryClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type EntryCompletion 

type EntryCompletion struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Buildable
	CellLayout
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EntryCompletion: GtkEntryCompletion is an auxiliary object to provide completion functionality for GtkEntry.

It implements the gtk.CellLayout interface, to allow the user to add extra cells to the GtkTreeView with completion matches.

“Completion functionality” means that when the user modifies the text in the entry, GtkEntryCompletion checks which rows in the model match the current content of the entry, and displays a list of matches. By default, the matching is done by comparing the entry text case-insensitively against the text column of the model (see gtk.EntryCompletion.SetTextColumn()), but this can be overridden with a custom match function (see gtk.EntryCompletion.SetMatchFunc()).

When the user selects a completion, the content of the entry is updated. By default, the content of the entry is replaced by the text column of the model, but this can be overridden by connecting to the gtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected signal and updating the entry in the signal handler. Note that you should return TRUE from the signal handler to suppress the default behaviour.

To add completion functionality to an entry, use gtk.Entry.SetCompletion().

GtkEntryCompletion uses a gtk.TreeModelFilter model to represent the subset of the entire model that is currently matching. While the GtkEntryCompletion signals gtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected and gtk.EntryCompletion::cursor-on-match take the original model and an iter pointing to that model as arguments, other callbacks and signals (such as GtkCellLayoutDataFunc or gtk.CellArea::apply-attributes) will generally take the filter model as argument. As long as you are only calling gtk.TreeModel.Get(), this will make no difference to you. If for some reason, you need the original model, use gtk.TreeModelFilter.GetModel(). Don’t forget to use gtk.TreeModelFilter.ConvertIterToChildIter() to obtain a matching iter.

func NewEntryCompletion 

func NewEntryCompletion() *EntryCompletion

NewEntryCompletion creates a new GtkEntryCompletion object.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryCompletion: newly created GtkEntryCompletion object.

func NewEntryCompletionWithArea 

func NewEntryCompletionWithArea(area CellAreaer) *EntryCompletion

NewEntryCompletionWithArea creates a new GtkEntryCompletion object using the specified area.

The GtkCellArea is used to layout cells in the underlying GtkTreeViewColumn for the drop-down menu.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • area used to layout cells.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryCompletion: newly created GtkEntryCompletion object.

func (*EntryCompletion) Complete 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) Complete()

Complete requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the current list with completions, using the current key.

The completion list view will be updated accordingly.

func (*EntryCompletion) CompletionPrefix 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) CompletionPrefix() string

CompletionPrefix: get the original text entered by the user that triggered the completion or NULL if there’s no completion ongoing.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): prefix for the current completion.

func (*EntryCompletion) ComputePrefix 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) ComputePrefix(key string) string

ComputePrefix computes the common prefix that is shared by all rows in completion that start with key.

If no row matches key, NULL will be returned. Note that a text column must have been set for this function to work, see gtk.EntryCompletion.SetTextColumn() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: text to complete for.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): common prefix all rows starting with key or NULL if no row matches key.

func (*EntryCompletion) ConnectCursorOnMatch 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) ConnectCursorOnMatch(f func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCursorOnMatch is emitted when a match from the cursor is on a match of the list.

The default behaviour is to replace the contents of the entry with the contents of the text column in the row pointed to by iter.

Note that model is the model that was passed to gtk.EntryCompletion.SetModel().

func (*EntryCompletion) ConnectInsertPrefix 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) ConnectInsertPrefix(f func(prefix string) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertPrefix is emitted when the inline autocompletion is triggered.

The default behaviour is to make the entry display the whole prefix and select the newly inserted part.

Applications may connect to this signal in order to insert only a smaller part of the prefix into the entry - e.g. the entry used in the FileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the next '/'.

func (*EntryCompletion) ConnectMatchSelected 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) ConnectMatchSelected(f func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMatchSelected is emitted when a match from the list is selected.

The default behaviour is to replace the contents of the entry with the contents of the text column in the row pointed to by iter.

Note that model is the model that was passed to gtk.EntryCompletion.SetModel().

func (*EntryCompletion) ConnectNoMatches 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) ConnectNoMatches(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectNoMatches is emitted when the filter model has zero number of rows in completion_complete method.

In other words when GtkEntryCompletion is out of suggestions.

func (*EntryCompletion) Entry 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) Entry() Widgetter

Entry gets the entry completion has been attached to.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: entry completion has been attached to.

func (*EntryCompletion) InlineCompletion 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) InlineCompletion() bool

InlineCompletion returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should be automatically inserted in the entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if inline completion is turned on.

func (*EntryCompletion) InlineSelection 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) InlineSelection() bool

InlineSelection returns TRUE if inline-selection mode is turned on.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if inline-selection mode is on.

func (*EntryCompletion) InsertPrefix 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) InsertPrefix()

InsertPrefix requests a prefix insertion.

func (*EntryCompletion) MinimumKeyLength 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) MinimumKeyLength() int

MinimumKeyLength returns the minimum key length as set for completion.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: currently used minimum key length.

func (*EntryCompletion) Model 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model the GtkEntryCompletion is using as data source.

Returns NULL if the model is unset.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional) or NULL if none is currently being used.

func (*EntryCompletion) PopupCompletion 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) PopupCompletion() bool

PopupCompletion returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if popup completion is turned on.

func (*EntryCompletion) PopupSetWidth 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) PopupSetWidth() bool

PopupSetWidth returns whether the completion popup window will be resized to the width of the entry.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of the entry.

func (*EntryCompletion) PopupSingleMatch 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) PopupSingleMatch() bool

PopupSingleMatch returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is only a single match.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the number of matches.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetInlineCompletion 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetInlineCompletion(inlineCompletion bool)

SetInlineCompletion sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should be automatically inserted in the entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • inlineCompletion: TRUE to do inline completion.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetInlineSelection 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetInlineSelection(inlineSelection bool)

SetInlineSelection sets whether it is possible to cycle through the possible completions inside the entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • inlineSelection: TRUE to do inline selection.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetMatchFunc 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetMatchFunc(fn EntryCompletionMatchFunc)

SetMatchFunc sets the match function for completion to be func.

The match function is used to determine if a row should or should not be in the completion list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: GtkEntryCompletionMatchFunc to use.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetMinimumKeyLength 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetMinimumKeyLength(length int)

SetMinimumKeyLength requires the length of the search key for completion to be at least length.

This is useful for long lists, where completing using a small key takes a lot of time and will come up with meaningless results anyway (ie, a too large dataset).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • length: minimum length of the key in order to start completing.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetModel 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetModel(model TreeModeller)

SetModel sets the model for a GtkEntryCompletion.

If completion already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If model is NULL, then it will unset the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GtkTreeModel.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetPopupCompletion 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetPopupCompletion(popupCompletion bool)

SetPopupCompletion sets whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • popupCompletion: TRUE to do popup completion.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetPopupSetWidth 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetPopupSetWidth(popupSetWidth bool)

SetPopupSetWidth sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same width as the entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • popupSetWidth: TRUE to make the width of the popup the same as the entry.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetPopupSingleMatch 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetPopupSingleMatch(popupSingleMatch bool)

SetPopupSingleMatch sets whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is only a single match.

You may want to set this to FALSE if you are using gtk.EntryCompletion:inline-completion.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • popupSingleMatch: TRUE if the popup should appear even for a single match.

func (*EntryCompletion) SetTextColumn 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) SetTextColumn(column int)

SetTextColumn: convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a completion list with just strings.

This function will set up completion to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list, and to get those strings from column in the model of completion.

This functions creates and adds a GtkCellRendererText for the selected column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell renderer, use g_object_set() to set the gtk.EntryCompletion:text-column property directly.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column in the model of completion to get strings from.

func (*EntryCompletion) TextColumn 

func (completion *EntryCompletion) TextColumn() int

TextColumn returns the column in the model of completion to get strings from.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column containing the strings.

type EntryCompletionMatchFunc 

type EntryCompletionMatchFunc func(completion *EntryCompletion, key string, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)

EntryCompletionMatchFunc: function which decides whether the row indicated by iter matches a given key, and should be displayed as a possible completion for key.

Note that key is normalized and case-folded (see g_utf8_normalize() and g_utf8_casefold()). If this is not appropriate, match functions have access to the unmodified key via gtk_editable_get_text (GTK_EDITABLE (gtk_entry_completion_get_entry ())).

type EntryIconPosition 

type EntryIconPosition C.gint

EntryIconPosition specifies the side of the entry at which an icon is placed. 

const (
	// EntryIconPrimary: at the beginning of the entry (depending on the text
	// direction).
	EntryIconPrimary EntryIconPosition = iota
	// EntryIconSecondary: at the end of the entry (depending on the text
	// direction).
	EntryIconSecondary
)

func (EntryIconPosition) String 

func (e EntryIconPosition) String() string

String returns the name in string for EntryIconPosition.

type EntryOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type EntryOverrides struct {
	Activate func()
}

EntryOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type EventController 

type EventController struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventController: GtkEventController is the base class for event controllers.

These are ancillary objects associated to widgets, which react to GdkEvents, and possibly trigger actions as a consequence.

Event controllers are added to a widget with gtk.Widget.AddController(). It is rarely necessary to explicitly remove a controller with gtk.Widget.RemoveController().

See the chapter of input handling (input-handling.html) for an overview of the basic concepts, such as the capture and bubble phases of even propagation.

func BaseEventController 

func BaseEventController(obj EventControllerer) *EventController

BaseEventController returns the underlying base object.

func (*EventController) CurrentEvent 

func (controller *EventController) CurrentEvent() gdk.Eventer

CurrentEvent returns the event that is currently being handled by the controller, and NULL at other times.

The function returns the following values:

  • event (optional) that is currently handled by controller.

func (*EventController) CurrentEventDevice 

func (controller *EventController) CurrentEventDevice() gdk.Devicer

CurrentEventDevice returns the device of the event that is currently being handled by the controller, and NULL otherwise.

The function returns the following values:

  • device (optional) of the event is currently handled by controller.

func (*EventController) CurrentEventState 

func (controller *EventController) CurrentEventState() gdk.ModifierType

CurrentEventState returns the modifier state of the event that is currently being handled by the controller, and 0 otherwise.

The function returns the following values:

  • modifierType: modifier state of the event is currently handled by controller.

func (*EventController) CurrentEventTime 

func (controller *EventController) CurrentEventTime() uint32

CurrentEventTime returns the timestamp of the event that is currently being handled by the controller, and 0 otherwise.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint32: timestamp of the event is currently handled by controller.

func (*EventController) Name 

func (controller *EventController) Name() string

Name gets the name of controller.

The function returns the following values:

func (*EventController) PropagationLimit 

func (controller *EventController) PropagationLimit() PropagationLimit

PropagationLimit gets the propagation limit of the event controller.

The function returns the following values:

  • propagationLimit: propagation limit.

func (*EventController) PropagationPhase 

func (controller *EventController) PropagationPhase() PropagationPhase

PropagationPhase gets the propagation phase at which controller handles events.

The function returns the following values:

  • propagationPhase: propagation phase.

func (*EventController) Reset 

func (controller *EventController) Reset()

Reset resets the controller to a clean state.

func (*EventController) SetName 

func (controller *EventController) SetName(name string)

SetName sets a name on the controller that can be used for debugging.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name for controller.

func (*EventController) SetPropagationLimit 

func (controller *EventController) SetPropagationLimit(limit PropagationLimit)

SetPropagationLimit sets the event propagation limit on the event controller.

If the limit is set to GTK_LIMIT_SAME_NATIVE, the controller won't handle events that are targeted at widgets on a different surface, such as popovers.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • limit: propagation limit.

func (*EventController) SetPropagationPhase 

func (controller *EventController) SetPropagationPhase(phase PropagationPhase)

SetPropagationPhase sets the propagation phase at which a controller handles events.

If phase is GTK_PHASE_NONE, no automatic event handling will be performed, but other additional gesture maintenance will.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • phase: propagation phase.

func (*EventController) Widget 

func (controller *EventController) Widget() Widgetter

Widget returns the Widget this controller relates to.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: GtkWidget.

type EventControllerFocus 

type EventControllerFocus struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventControllerFocus: GtkEventControllerFocus is an event controller to keep track of keyboard focus.

The event controller offers gtk.EventControllerFocus::enter and gtk.EventControllerFocus::leave signals, as well as gtk.EventControllerFocus:is-focus and gtk.EventControllerFocus:contains-focus properties which are updated to reflect focus changes inside the widget hierarchy that is rooted at the controllers widget.

func NewEventControllerFocus 

func NewEventControllerFocus() *EventControllerFocus

NewEventControllerFocus creates a new event controller that will handle focus events.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerFocus: new GtkEventControllerFocus.

func (*EventControllerFocus) ConnectEnter 

func (self *EventControllerFocus) ConnectEnter(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnter is emitted whenever the focus enters into the widget or one of its descendents.

Note that this means you may not get an ::enter signal even though the widget becomes the focus location, in certain cases (such as when the focus moves from a descendent of the widget to the widget itself). If you are interested in these cases, you can monitor the gtk.EventControllerFocus:is-focus property for changes.

func (*EventControllerFocus) ConnectLeave 

func (self *EventControllerFocus) ConnectLeave(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLeave is emitted whenever the focus leaves the widget hierarchy that is rooted at the widget that the controller is attached to.

Note that this means you may not get a ::leave signal even though the focus moves away from the widget, in certain cases (such as when the focus moves from the widget to a descendent). If you are interested in these cases, you can monitor the gtk.EventControllerFocus:is-focus property for changes.

func (*EventControllerFocus) ContainsFocus 

func (self *EventControllerFocus) ContainsFocus() bool

ContainsFocus returns TRUE if focus is within self or one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus is within self or one of its children.

func (*EventControllerFocus) IsFocus 

func (self *EventControllerFocus) IsFocus() bool

IsFocus returns TRUE if focus is within self, but not one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus is within self, but not one of its children.

type EventControllerKey 

type EventControllerKey struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventControllerKey: GtkEventControllerKey is an event controller that provides access to key events.

func NewEventControllerKey 

func NewEventControllerKey() *EventControllerKey

NewEventControllerKey creates a new event controller that will handle key events.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerKey: new GtkEventControllerKey.

func (*EventControllerKey) ConnectIMUpdate 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) ConnectIMUpdate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectIMUpdate is emitted whenever the input method context filters away a keypress and prevents the controller receiving it.

See gtk.EventControllerKey.SetIMContext() and gtk.IMContext.FilterKeypress().

func (*EventControllerKey) ConnectKeyPressed 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) ConnectKeyPressed(f func(keyval, keycode uint, state gdk.ModifierType) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectKeyPressed is emitted whenever a key is pressed.

func (*EventControllerKey) ConnectKeyReleased 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) ConnectKeyReleased(f func(keyval, keycode uint, state gdk.ModifierType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectKeyReleased is emitted whenever a key is released.

func (*EventControllerKey) ConnectModifiers 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) ConnectModifiers(f func(keyval gdk.ModifierType) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectModifiers is emitted whenever the state of modifier keys and pointer buttons change.

func (*EventControllerKey) Forward 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) Forward(widget Widgetter) bool

Forward forwards the current event of this controller to a widget.

This function can only be used in handlers for the gtk.EventControllerKey::key-pressed, gtk.EventControllerKey::key-released or gtk.EventControllerKey::modifiers signals.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the widget handled the event.

func (*EventControllerKey) Group 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) Group() uint

Group gets the key group of the current event of this controller.

See gdk.KeyEvent.GetLayout().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: key group.

func (*EventControllerKey) IMContext 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) IMContext() IMContexter

IMContext gets the input method context of the key controller.

The function returns the following values:

  • imContext: GtkIMContext.

func (*EventControllerKey) SetIMContext 

func (controller *EventControllerKey) SetIMContext(imContext IMContexter)

SetIMContext sets the input method context of the key controller.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • imContext: GtkIMContext.

type EventControllerLegacy 

type EventControllerLegacy struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventControllerLegacy: GtkEventControllerLegacy is an event controller that provides raw access to the event stream.

It should only be used as a last resort if none of the other event controllers or gestures do the job.

func NewEventControllerLegacy 

func NewEventControllerLegacy() *EventControllerLegacy

NewEventControllerLegacy creates a new legacy event controller.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerLegacy: newly created event controller.

func (*EventControllerLegacy) ConnectEvent 

func (v *EventControllerLegacy) ConnectEvent(f func(event gdk.Eventer) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEvent is emitted for each GDK event delivered to controller.

type EventControllerMotion 

type EventControllerMotion struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventControllerMotion: GtkEventControllerMotion is an event controller tracking the pointer position.

The event controller offers gtk.EventControllerMotion::enter and gtk.EventControllerMotion::leave signals, as well as gtk.EventControllerMotion:is-pointer and gtk.EventControllerMotion:contains-pointer properties which are updated to reflect changes in the pointer position as it moves over the widget.

func NewEventControllerMotion 

func NewEventControllerMotion() *EventControllerMotion

NewEventControllerMotion creates a new event controller that will handle motion events.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerMotion: new GtkEventControllerMotion.

func (*EventControllerMotion) ConnectEnter 

func (self *EventControllerMotion) ConnectEnter(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnter signals that the pointer has entered the widget.

func (*EventControllerMotion) ConnectLeave 

func (self *EventControllerMotion) ConnectLeave(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLeave signals that the pointer has left the widget.

func (*EventControllerMotion) ConnectMotion 

func (self *EventControllerMotion) ConnectMotion(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMotion is emitted when the pointer moves inside the widget.

func (*EventControllerMotion) ContainsPointer 

func (self *EventControllerMotion) ContainsPointer() bool

ContainsPointer returns if a pointer is within self or one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a pointer is within self or one of its children.

func (*EventControllerMotion) IsPointer 

func (self *EventControllerMotion) IsPointer() bool

IsPointer returns if a pointer is within self, but not one of its children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a pointer is within self but not one of its children.

type EventControllerScroll 

type EventControllerScroll struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EventControllerScroll: GtkEventControllerScroll is an event controller that handles scroll events.

It is capable of handling both discrete and continuous scroll events from mice or touchpads, abstracting them both with the gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll signal. Deltas in the discrete case are multiples of 1.

In the case of continuous scroll events, GtkEventControllerScroll encloses all gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll emissions between two gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-begin and gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-end signals.

The behavior of the event controller can be modified by the flags given at creation time, or modified at a later point through gtk.EventControllerScroll.SetFlags() (e.g. because the scrolling conditions of the widget changed).

The controller can be set up to emit motion for either/both vertical and horizontal scroll events through GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_VERTICAL, GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_HORIZONTAL and GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_BOTH_AXES. If any axis is disabled, the respective gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll delta will be 0. Vertical scroll events will be translated to horizontal motion for the devices incapable of horizontal scrolling.

The event controller can also be forced to emit discrete events on all devices through GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_DISCRETE. This can be used to implement discrete actions triggered through scroll events (e.g. switching across combobox options).

The GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETIC flag toggles the emission of the gtk.EventControllerScroll::decelerate signal, emitted at the end of scrolling with two X/Y velocity arguments that are consistent with the motion that was received.

func NewEventControllerScroll 

func NewEventControllerScroll(flags EventControllerScrollFlags) *EventControllerScroll

NewEventControllerScroll creates a new event controller that will handle scroll events.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags affecting the controller behavior.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerScroll: new GtkEventControllerScroll.

func (*EventControllerScroll) ConnectDecelerate 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) ConnectDecelerate(f func(velX, velY float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDecelerate is emitted after scroll is finished if the GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETIC flag is set.

vel_x and vel_y express the initial velocity that was imprinted by the scroll events. vel_x and vel_y are expressed in pixels/ms.

func (*EventControllerScroll) ConnectScroll 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) ConnectScroll(f func(dx, dy float64) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectScroll signals that the widget should scroll by the amount specified by dx and dy.

func (*EventControllerScroll) ConnectScrollBegin 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) ConnectScrollBegin(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectScrollBegin signals that a new scrolling operation has begun.

It will only be emitted on devices capable of it.

func (*EventControllerScroll) ConnectScrollEnd 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) ConnectScrollEnd(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectScrollEnd signals that a scrolling operation has finished.

It will only be emitted on devices capable of it.

func (*EventControllerScroll) Flags 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) Flags() EventControllerScrollFlags

Flags gets the flags conditioning the scroll controller behavior.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventControllerScrollFlags: controller flags.

func (*EventControllerScroll) SetFlags 

func (scroll *EventControllerScroll) SetFlags(flags EventControllerScrollFlags)

SetFlags sets the flags conditioning scroll controller behavior.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags affecting the controller behavior.

type EventControllerScrollFlags 

type EventControllerScrollFlags C.guint

EventControllerScrollFlags describes the behavior of a GtkEventControllerScroll. 

const (
	// EventControllerScrollNone: don't emit scroll.
	EventControllerScrollNone EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b0
	// EventControllerScrollVertical: emit scroll with vertical deltas.
	EventControllerScrollVertical EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b1
	// EventControllerScrollHorizontal: emit scroll with horizontal deltas.
	EventControllerScrollHorizontal EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b10
	// EventControllerScrollDiscrete: only emit deltas that are multiples of 1.
	EventControllerScrollDiscrete EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b100
	// EventControllerScrollKinetic: emit ::decelerate after continuous scroll
	// finishes.
	EventControllerScrollKinetic EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b1000
	// EventControllerScrollBothAxes: emit scroll on both axes.
	EventControllerScrollBothAxes EventControllerScrollFlags = 0b11
)

func (EventControllerScrollFlags) Has 

func (e EventControllerScrollFlags) Has(other EventControllerScrollFlags) bool

Has returns true if e contains other.

func (EventControllerScrollFlags) String 

func (e EventControllerScrollFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for EventControllerScrollFlags.

type EventControllerer 

type EventControllerer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

EventControllerer describes types inherited from class EventController.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type EventSequenceState 

type EventSequenceState C.gint

EventSequenceState describes the state of a GdkEventSequence in a GtkGesture. 

const (
	// EventSequenceNone: sequence is handled, but not grabbed.
	EventSequenceNone EventSequenceState = iota
	// EventSequenceClaimed: sequence is handled and grabbed.
	EventSequenceClaimed
	// EventSequenceDenied: sequence is denied.
	EventSequenceDenied
)

func (EventSequenceState) String 

func (e EventSequenceState) String() string

String returns the name in string for EventSequenceState.

type EveryFilter 

type EveryFilter struct {
	MultiFilter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

EveryFilter: GtkEveryFilter matches an item when each of its filters matches.

To add filters to a GtkEveryFilter, use gtk.MultiFilter.Append().

func NewEveryFilter 

func NewEveryFilter() *EveryFilter

NewEveryFilter creates a new empty "every" filter.

Use gtk.MultiFilter.Append() to add filters to it.

This filter matches an item if each of the filters added to it matches the item. In particular, this means that if no filter has been added to it, the filter matches every item.

The function returns the following values:

  • everyFilter: new GtkEveryFilter.

type Expander 

type Expander struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Expander: GtkExpander allows the user to reveal its child by clicking on an expander triangle.

!An example GtkExpander (expander.png)

This is similar to the triangles used in a GtkTreeView.

Normally you use an expander as you would use a frame; you create the child widget and use gtk.Expander.SetChild() to add it to the expander. When the expander is toggled, it will take care of showing and hiding the child automatically.

Special Usage

There are situations in which you may prefer to show and hide the expanded widget yourself, such as when you want to actually create the widget at expansion time. In this case, create a GtkExpander but do not add a child to it. The expander widget has an [propertyGtk.Expander:expanded[ property which can be used to monitor its expansion state. You should watch this property with a signal connection as follows: 

static void
expander_callback (GObject    *object,
                   GParamSpec *param_spec,
                   gpointer    user_data)
{
  GtkExpander *expander;

  expander = GTK_EXPANDER (object);

  if (gtk_expander_get_expanded (expander))
    {
      // Show or create widgets
    }
  else
    {
      // Hide or destroy widgets
    }
}

static void
create_expander (void)
{
  GtkWidget *expander = gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic ("_More Options");
  g_signal_connect (expander, "notify::expanded",
                    G_CALLBACK (expander_callback), NULL);

  // ...
}

GtkExpander as GtkBuildable

The GtkExpander implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkExpander: 

<object class="GtkExpander">
  <child type="label">
    <object class="GtkLabel" id="expander-label"/>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkEntry" id="expander-content"/>
  </child>
</object>

CSS nodes 

expander
╰── box
    ├── title
    │   ├── arrow
    │   ╰── <label widget>
    ╰── <child>

GtkExpander has three CSS nodes, the main node with the name expander, a subnode with name title and node below it with name arrow. The arrow of an expander that is showing its child gets the :checked pseudoclass added to it.

Accessibility

GtkExpander uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTON role.

func NewExpander 

func NewExpander(label string) *Expander

NewExpander creates a new expander using label as the text of the label.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text of the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • expander: new GtkExpander widget.

func NewExpanderWithMnemonic 

func NewExpanderWithMnemonic(label string) *Expander

NewExpanderWithMnemonic creates a new expander using label as the text of the label.

If characters in label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.

Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text of the label with an underscore in front of the mnemonic character.

The function returns the following values:

  • expander: new GtkExpander widget.

func (*Expander) Child 

func (expander *Expander) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of expander.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of expander.

func (*Expander) ConnectActivate 

func (expander *Expander) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate activates the GtkExpander.

func (*Expander) Expanded 

func (expander *Expander) Expanded() bool

Expanded queries a Expander and returns its current state.

Returns TRUE if the child widget is revealed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: current state of the expander.

func (*Expander) Label 

func (expander *Expander) Label() string

Label fetches the text from a label widget.

This is including any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by gtk.Expander.SetLabel(). If the label text has not been set the return value will be NULL. This will be the case if you create an empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text of the label widget. This string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Expander) LabelWidget 

func (expander *Expander) LabelWidget() Widgetter

LabelWidget retrieves the label widget for the frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): label widget, or NULL if there is none.

func (*Expander) ResizeToplevel 

func (expander *Expander) ResizeToplevel() bool

ResizeToplevel returns whether the expander will resize the toplevel widget containing the expander upon resizing and collpasing.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: “resize toplevel” setting.

func (*Expander) SetChild 

func (expander *Expander) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of expander.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Expander) SetExpanded 

func (expander *Expander) SetExpanded(expanded bool)

SetExpanded sets the state of the expander.

Set to TRUE, if you want the child widget to be revealed, and FALSE if you want the child widget to be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expanded: whether the child widget is revealed.

func (*Expander) SetLabel 

func (expander *Expander) SetLabel(label string)

SetLabel sets the text of the label of the expander to label.

This will also clear any previously set labels.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): string.

func (*Expander) SetLabelWidget 

func (expander *Expander) SetLabelWidget(labelWidget Widgetter)

SetLabelWidget: set the label widget for the expander.

This is the widget that will appear embedded alongside the expander arrow.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • labelWidget (optional): new label widget.

func (*Expander) SetResizeToplevel 

func (expander *Expander) SetResizeToplevel(resizeToplevel bool)

SetResizeToplevel sets whether the expander will resize the toplevel widget containing the expander upon resizing and collpasing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resizeToplevel: whether to resize the toplevel.

func (*Expander) SetUseMarkup 

func (expander *Expander) SetUseMarkup(useMarkup bool)

SetUseMarkup sets whether the text of the label contains Pango markup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useMarkup: TRUE if the label’s text should be parsed for markup.

func (*Expander) SetUseUnderline 

func (expander *Expander) SetUseUnderline(useUnderline bool)

SetUseUnderline: if true, an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useUnderline: TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.

func (*Expander) UseMarkup 

func (expander *Expander) UseMarkup() bool

UseMarkup returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as Pango markup.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.

func (*Expander) UseUnderline 

func (expander *Expander) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline returns whether an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander label indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.

type Expression 

type Expression struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Expression: GtkExpression provides a way to describe references to values.

An important aspect of expressions is that the value can be obtained from a source that is several steps away. For example, an expression may describe ‘the value of property A of object1, which is itself the value of a property of object2’. And object1 may not even exist yet at the time that the expression is created. This is contrast to GObject property bindings, which can only create direct connections between the properties of two objects that must both exist for the duration of the binding.

An expression needs to be "evaluated" to obtain the value that it currently refers to. An evaluation always happens in the context of a current object called this (it mirrors the behavior of object-oriented languages), which may or may not influence the result of the evaluation. Use gtk.Expression.Evaluate() for evaluating an expression.

Various methods for defining expressions exist, from simple constants via gtk.ConstantExpression.New to looking up properties in a GObject (even recursively) via gtk.PropertyExpression.New or providing custom functions to transform and combine expressions via gtk.ClosureExpression.New.

Here is an example of a complex expression: 

color_expr = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_LIST_ITEM,
                                          NULL, "item");
expression = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_COLOR,
                                          color_expr, "name");

when evaluated with this being a GtkListItem, it will obtain the "item" property from the GtkListItem, and then obtain the "name" property from the resulting object (which is assumed to be of type GTK_TYPE_COLOR).

A more concise way to describe this would be 

this->item->name

The most likely place where you will encounter expressions is in the context of list models and list widgets using them. For example, GtkDropDown is evaluating a GtkExpression to obtain strings from the items in its model that it can then use to match against the contents of its search entry. GtkStringFilter is using a GtkExpression for similar reasons.

By default, expressions are not paying attention to changes and evaluation is just a snapshot of the current state at a given time. To get informed about changes, an expression needs to be "watched" via a gtk.ExpressionWatch, which will cause a callback to be called whenever the value of the expression may have changed; gtk.Expression.Watch() starts watching an expression, and gtk.ExpressionWatch.Unwatch() stops.

Watches can be created for automatically updating the property of an object, similar to GObject's GBinding mechanism, by using gtk.Expression.Bind().

GtkExpression in GObject properties

In order to use a GtkExpression as a GObject property, you must use the gtk_param_spec_expression when creating a GParamSpec to install in the GObject class being defined; for instance: 

obj_props[PROP_EXPRESSION] =
  gtk_param_spec_expression ("expression",
                             "Expression",
                             "The expression used by the widget",
                             G_PARAM_READWRITE |
                             G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS |
                             G_PARAM_EXPLICIT_NOTIFY);

When implementing the GObjectClass.set_property and GObjectClass.get_property virtual functions, you must use gtk_value_get_expression, to retrieve the stored GtkExpression from the GValue container, and gtk_value_set_expression, to store the GtkExpression into the GValue; for instance: 

// in set_property()...
case PROP_EXPRESSION:
  foo_widget_set_expression (foo, gtk_value_get_expression (value));
  break;

// in get_property()...
case PROP_EXPRESSION:
  gtk_value_set_expression (value, foo->expression);
  break;

GtkExpression in .ui files

GtkBuilder has support for creating expressions. The syntax here can be used where a GtkExpression object is needed like in a <property> tag for an expression property, or in a <binding> tag to bind a property to an expression.

To create an property expression, use the <lookup> element. It can have a type attribute to specify the object type, and a name attribute to specify the property to look up. The content of <lookup> can either be an element specfiying the expression to use the object, or a string that specifies the name of the object to use.

Example: 

<lookup name='search'>string_filter</lookup>

To create a constant expression, use the <constant> element. If the type attribute is specified, the element content is interpreted as a value of that type. Otherwise, it is assumed to be an object. For instance: 

<constant>string_filter</constant>
<constant type='gchararray'>Hello, world</constant>

To create a closure expression, use the <closure> element. The type and function attributes specify what function to use for the closure, the content of the element contains the expressions for the parameters. For instance: 

<closure type='gchararray' function='combine_args_somehow'>
  <constant type='gchararray'>File size:</constant>
  <lookup type='GFile' name='size'>myfile</lookup>
</closure>.

func BaseExpression 

func BaseExpression(obj Expressioner) *Expression

BaseExpression returns the underlying base object.

func (*Expression) Bind 

func (self *Expression) Bind(target *coreglib.Object, property string, this_ *coreglib.Object) *ExpressionWatch

Bind target's property named property to self.

The value that self evaluates to is set via g_object_set() on target. This is repeated whenever self changes to ensure that the object's property stays synchronized with self.

If self's evaluation fails, target's property is not updated. You can ensure that this doesn't happen by using a fallback expression.

Note that this function takes ownership of self. If you want to keep it around, you should gtk.Expression.Ref() it beforehand.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target object to bind to.
  • property: name of the property on target to bind to.
  • this_ (optional): argument for the evaluation of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • expressionWatch: GtkExpressionWatch.

func (*Expression) Evaluate 

func (self *Expression) Evaluate(this_ *coreglib.Object, value *coreglib.Value) bool

Evaluate evaluates the given expression and on success stores the result in value.

The GType of value will be the type given by gtk.Expression.GetValueType().

It is possible that expressions cannot be evaluated - for example when the expression references objects that have been destroyed or set to NULL. In that case value will remain empty and FALSE will be returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • this_ (optional): argument for the evaluation.
  • value: empty GValue.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the expression could be evaluated.

func (*Expression) IsStatic 

func (self *Expression) IsStatic() bool

IsStatic checks if the expression is static.

A static expression will never change its result when gtk.Expression.Evaluate() is called on it with the same arguments.

That means a call to gtk.Expression.Watch() is not necessary because it will never trigger a notify.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the expression is static.

func (*Expression) ValueType 

func (self *Expression) ValueType() coreglib.Type

ValueType gets the GType that this expression evaluates to.

This type is constant and will not change over the lifetime of this expression.

The function returns the following values:

  • gType: type returned from gtk.Expression.Evaluate().

func (*Expression) Watch 

func (self *Expression) Watch(this_ *coreglib.Object, notify ExpressionNotify) *ExpressionWatch

Watch installs a watch for the given expression that calls the notify function whenever the evaluation of self may have changed.

GTK cannot guarantee that the evaluation did indeed change when the notify gets invoked, but it guarantees the opposite: When it did in fact change, the notify will be invoked.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • this_ (optional): this argument to watch.
  • notify: callback to invoke when the expression changes.

The function returns the following values:

  • expressionWatch: newly installed watch. Note that the only reference held to the watch will be released when the watch is unwatched which can happen automatically, and not just via gtk.ExpressionWatch.Unwatch(). You should call gtk.ExpressionWatch.Ref() if you want to keep the watch around.

type ExpressionNotify 

type ExpressionNotify func()

ExpressionNotify: callback called by gtk_expression_watch() when the expression value changes.

type ExpressionWatch 

type ExpressionWatch struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ExpressionWatch: opaque structure representing a watched GtkExpression.

The contents of GtkExpressionWatch should only be accessed through the provided API.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ExpressionWatch) Evaluate 

func (watch *ExpressionWatch) Evaluate(value *coreglib.Value) bool

Evaluate evaluates the watched expression and on success stores the result in value.

This is equivalent to calling gtk.Expression.Evaluate() with the expression and this pointer originally used to create watch.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: empty GValue to be set.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the expression could be evaluated and value was set.

func (*ExpressionWatch) Unwatch 

func (watch *ExpressionWatch) Unwatch()

Unwatch stops watching an expression.

See gtk.Expression.Watch() for how the watch was established.

type Expressioner 

type Expressioner interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

Expressioner describes types inherited from class Expression.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

func ValueDupExpression 

func ValueDupExpression(value *coreglib.Value) Expressioner

ValueDupExpression retrieves the GtkExpression stored inside the given value, and acquires a reference to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue initialized with type GTK_TYPE_EXPRESSION.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func ValueGetExpression 

func ValueGetExpression(value *coreglib.Value) Expressioner

ValueGetExpression retrieves the GtkExpression stored inside the given value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue initialized with type GTK_TYPE_EXPRESSION.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

type FileChooser 

type FileChooser struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileChooser: GtkFileChooser is an interface that can be implemented by file selection widgets.

In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are gtk.FileChooserWidget and gtk.FileChooserDialog.

You do not need to write an object that implements the GtkFileChooser interface unless you are trying to adapt an existing file selector to expose a standard programming interface.

GtkFileChooser allows for shortcuts to various places in the filesystem. In the default implementation these are displayed in the left pane. It may be a bit confusing at first that these shortcuts come from various sources and in various flavours, so lets explain the terminology here:

- Bookmarks: are created by the user, by dragging folders from the right pane to the left pane, or by using the “Add”. Bookmarks can be renamed and deleted by the user.

- Shortcuts: can be provided by the application. For example, a Paint program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. Shortcuts cannot be modified by the user.

- Volumes: are provided by the underlying filesystem abstraction. They are the “roots” of the filesystem.

File Names and Encodings

When the user is finished selecting files in a GtkFileChooser, your program can get the selected filenames as GFiles.

Adding options

You can add extra widgets to a file chooser to provide options that are not present in the default design, by using gtk.FileChooser.AddChoice(). Each choice has an identifier and a user visible label; additionally, each choice can have multiple options. If a choice has no option, it will be rendered as a check button with the given label; if a choice has options, it will be rendered as a combo box.

FileChooser wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*FileChooser) Action 

func (chooser *FileChooser) Action() FileChooserAction

Action gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileChooserAction: action that the file selector is performing.

func (*FileChooser) AddChoice 

func (chooser *FileChooser) AddChoice(id, label string, options, optionLabels []string)

AddChoice adds a 'choice' to the file chooser.

This is typically implemented as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select a value using gtk.FileChooser.SetChoice() before the dialog is shown, and you can obtain the user-selected value in the gtk.Dialog::response signal handler using gtk.FileChooser.GetChoice().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id for the added choice.
  • label: user-visible label for the added choice.
  • options (optional) ids for the options of the choice, or NULL for a boolean choice.
  • optionLabels (optional): user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as options.

func (*FileChooser) AddFilter 

func (chooser *FileChooser) AddFilter(filter *FileFilter)

AddFilter adds filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.

When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that filter are displayed.

Note that the chooser takes ownership of the filter if it is floating, so you have to ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter: GtkFileFilter.

func (*FileChooser) AddShortcutFolder 

func (chooser *FileChooser) AddShortcutFolder(folder gio.Filer) error

AddShortcutFolder adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • folder: GFile for the folder to add.

func (*FileChooser) Choice 

func (chooser *FileChooser) Choice(id string) string

Choice gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id: ID of the choice to get.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: ID of the currently selected option.

func (*FileChooser) CreateFolders 

func (chooser *FileChooser) CreateFolders() bool

CreateFolders gets whether file chooser will offer to create new folders.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the Create Folder button should be displayed.

func (*FileChooser) CurrentFolder 

func (chooser *FileChooser) CurrentFolder() *gio.File

CurrentFolder gets the current folder of chooser as #GFile.

The function returns the following values:

  • file: GFile for the current folder.

func (*FileChooser) CurrentName 

func (chooser *FileChooser) CurrentName() string

CurrentName gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user.

This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename when the file itself does not exist yet.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry. Free with g_free(). Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are. Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.

func (*FileChooser) File 

func (chooser *FileChooser) File() *gio.File

File gets the GFile for the currently selected file in the file selector.

If multiple files are selected, one of the files will be returned at random.

If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected folder.

The function returns the following values:

  • file: selected GFile. You own the returned file; use g_object_unref() to release it.

func (*FileChooser) Files 

func (chooser *FileChooser) Files() *gio.ListModel

Files lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of chooser as #GFile.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: list model containing a GFile for each selected file and subfolder in the current folder. Free the returned list with g_object_unref().

func (*FileChooser) Filter 

func (chooser *FileChooser) Filter() *FileFilter

Filter gets the current filter.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileFilter (optional): current filter, or NULL.

func (*FileChooser) Filters 

func (chooser *FileChooser) Filters() *gio.ListModel

Filters gets the current set of user-selectable filters, as a list model.

See gtk.FileChooser.AddFilter() and gtk.FileChooser.RemoveFilter() for changing individual filters.

You should not modify the returned list model. Future changes to chooser may or may not affect the returned model.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: GListModel containing the current set of user-selectable filters.

func (*FileChooser) RemoveChoice 

func (chooser *FileChooser) RemoveChoice(id string)

RemoveChoice removes a 'choice' that has been added with gtk_file_chooser_add_choice().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id: ID of the choice to remove.

func (*FileChooser) RemoveFilter 

func (chooser *FileChooser) RemoveFilter(filter *FileFilter)

RemoveFilter removes filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter: GtkFileFilter.

func (*FileChooser) RemoveShortcutFolder 

func (chooser *FileChooser) RemoveShortcutFolder(folder gio.Filer) error

RemoveShortcutFolder removes a folder from the shortcut folders in a file chooser.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • folder: GFile for the folder to remove.

func (*FileChooser) SelectMultiple 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SelectMultiple() bool

SelectMultiple gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file chooser.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if multiple files can be selected.

func (*FileChooser) SetAction 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetAction(action FileChooserAction)

SetAction sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing.

The user interface is adapted to suit the selected action.

For example, an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • action that the file selector is performing.

func (*FileChooser) SetChoice 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetChoice(id, option string)

SetChoice selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with gtk_file_chooser_add_choice().

For a boolean choice, the possible options are "true" and "false".

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id: ID of the choice to set.
  • option: ID of the option to select.

func (*FileChooser) SetCreateFolders 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetCreateFolders(createFolders bool)

SetCreateFolders sets whether file chooser will offer to create new folders.

This is only relevant if the action is not set to be GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • createFolders: TRUE if the Create Folder button should be displayed.

func (*FileChooser) SetCurrentFolder 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetCurrentFolder(file gio.Filer) error

SetCurrentFolder sets the current folder for chooser from a #GFile.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file: GFile for the new folder.

func (*FileChooser) SetCurrentName 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetCurrentName(name string)

SetCurrentName sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered by the user.

Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8 string rather than a filename. This function is meant for such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog. You can pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the name.

If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use gtk.FileChooser.SetFile() instead.

Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using gtk.FileChooser.SetCurrentName() as well.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name to use, as a UTF-8 string.

func (*FileChooser) SetFile 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetFile(file gio.Filer) error

SetFile sets file as the current filename for the file chooser.

This includes changing to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If the chooser is in GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file’s base name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.

If the file name isn’t in the current folder of chooser, then the current folder of chooser will be changed to the folder containing filename.

Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except for the directory change.

If you are implementing a save dialog, you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then does “Save As…”. If you don’t have a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.

Instead, use something similar to this: 

static void
prepare_file_chooser (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
                      GFile          *existing_file)
{
  gboolean document_is_new = (existing_file == NULL);

  if (document_is_new)
    {
      GFile *default_file_for_saving = g_file_new_for_path ("./out.txt");
      // the user just created a new document
      gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (chooser, default_file_for_saving, NULL);
      gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
      g_object_unref (default_file_for_saving);
    }
  else
    {
      // the user edited an existing document
      gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file, NULL);
    }
}.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file: GFile to set as current.

func (*FileChooser) SetFilter 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetFilter(filter *FileFilter)

SetFilter sets the current filter.

Only the files that pass the filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters in that list.

Setting the current filter when the list of filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed set of files without letting the user change it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter: GtkFileFilter.

func (*FileChooser) SetSelectMultiple 

func (chooser *FileChooser) SetSelectMultiple(selectMultiple bool)

SetSelectMultiple sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file chooser.

This is only relevant if the action is set to be GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN or GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • selectMultiple: TRUE if multiple files can be selected.

func (*FileChooser) ShortcutFolders 

func (chooser *FileChooser) ShortcutFolders() *gio.ListModel

ShortcutFolders queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser.

You should not modify the returned list model. Future changes to chooser may or may not affect the returned model.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: list model of GFiles.

type FileChooserAction 

type FileChooserAction C.gint

FileChooserAction describes whether a GtkFileChooser is being used to open existing files or to save to a possibly new file. 

const (
	// FileChooserActionOpen indicates open mode. The file chooser will only let
	// the user pick an existing file.
	FileChooserActionOpen FileChooserAction = iota
	// FileChooserActionSave indicates save mode. The file chooser will let the
	// user pick an existing file, or type in a new filename.
	FileChooserActionSave
	// FileChooserActionSelectFolder indicates an Open mode for selecting
	// folders. The file chooser will let the user pick an existing folder.
	FileChooserActionSelectFolder
)

func (FileChooserAction) String 

func (f FileChooserAction) String() string

String returns the name in string for FileChooserAction.

type FileChooserDialog 

type FileChooserDialog struct {
	Dialog

	*coreglib.Object
	FileChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileChooserDialog: GtkFileChooserDialog is a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save” commands.

!An example GtkFileChooserDialog (filechooser.png)

This widget works by putting a gtk.FileChooserWidget inside a gtk.Dialog. It exposes the gtk.FileChooser interface, so you can use all of the gtk.FileChooser functions on the file chooser dialog as well as those for gtk.Dialog.

Note that GtkFileChooserDialog does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a gtk.FileChooser.

If you want to integrate well with the platform you should use the gtk.FileChooserNative API, which will use a platform-specific dialog if available and fall back to GtkFileChooserDialog otherwise.

Typical usage

In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use GtkFileChooserDialog to select a file for opening: 

static void
on_open_response (GtkDialog *dialog,
                  int        response)
{
  if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
    {
      GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);

      g_autoptr(GFile) file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);

      open_file (file);
    }

  gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
}

  // ...
  GtkWidget *dialog;
  GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;

  dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
                                        parent_window,
                                        action,
                                        _("_Cancel"),
                                        GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
                                        _("_Open"),
                                        GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
                                        NULL);

  gtk_widget_show (dialog);

  g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
                    G_CALLBACK (on_open_response),
                    NULL);

To use a dialog for saving, you can use this: 

static void
on_save_response (GtkDialog *dialog,
                  int        response)
{
  if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
    {
      GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);

      g_autoptr(GFile) file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);

      save_to_file (file);
    }

  gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog));
}

  // ...
  GtkWidget *dialog;
  GtkFileChooser *chooser;
  GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;

  dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Save File",
                                        parent_window,
                                        action,
                                        _("_Cancel"),
                                        GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
                                        _("_Save"),
                                        GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
                                        NULL);
  chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);

  if (user_edited_a_new_document)
    gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, _("Untitled document"));
  else
    gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_filename);

  gtk_widget_show (dialog);

  g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
                    G_CALLBACK (on_save_response),
                    NULL);

Setting up a file chooser dialog

There are various cases in which you may need to use a GtkFileChooserDialog:

- To select a file for opening, use GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.

- To save a file for the first time, use GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE, and suggest a name such as “Untitled” with gtk.FileChooser.SetCurrentName().

- To save a file under a different name, use GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE, and set the existing file with gtk.FileChooser.SetFile().

- To choose a folder instead of a filem use GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.

In general, you should only cause the file chooser to show a specific folder when it is appropriate to use gtk,filechooser.SetFile, i.e. when you are doing a “Save As” command and you already have a file saved somewhere.

Response Codes

GtkFileChooserDialog inherits from gtk.Dialog, so buttons that go in its action area have response codes such as GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT and GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL. For example, you could call gtk.FileChooserDialog.New as follows: 

GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;

dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
                                      parent_window,
                                      action,
                                      _("_Cancel"),
                                      GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
                                      _("_Open"),
                                      GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
                                      NULL);

This will create buttons for “Cancel” and “Open” that use predefined response identifiers from gtk.ResponseType. For most dialog boxes you can use your own custom response codes rather than the ones in gtk.ResponseType, but GtkFileChooserDialog assumes that its “accept”-type action, e.g. an “Open” or “Save” button, will have one of the following response codes:

- GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT

- GTK_RESPONSE_OK

- GTK_RESPONSE_YES

- GTK_RESPONSE_APPLY

This is because GtkFileChooserDialog must intercept responses and switch to folders if appropriate, rather than letting the dialog terminate — the implementation uses these known response codes to know which responses can be blocked if appropriate.

To summarize, make sure you use a predefined response code when you use GtkFileChooserDialog to ensure proper operation.

type FileChooserError 

type FileChooserError C.gint

FileChooserError: these identify the various errors that can occur while calling GtkFileChooser functions. 

const (
	// FileChooserErrorNonexistent indicates that a file does not exist.
	FileChooserErrorNonexistent FileChooserError = iota
	// FileChooserErrorBadFilename indicates a malformed filename.
	FileChooserErrorBadFilename
	// FileChooserErrorAlreadyExists indicates a duplicate path (e.g. when
	// adding a bookmark).
	FileChooserErrorAlreadyExists
	// FileChooserErrorIncompleteHostname indicates an incomplete hostname (e.g.
	// "http://foo" without a slash after that).
	FileChooserErrorIncompleteHostname
)

func (FileChooserError) String 

func (f FileChooserError) String() string

String returns the name in string for FileChooserError.

type FileChooserNative 

type FileChooserNative struct {
	NativeDialog

	*coreglib.Object
	FileChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileChooserNative: GtkFileChooserNative is an abstraction of a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save as” commands.

By default, this just uses a GtkFileChooserDialog to implement the actual dialog. However, on some platforms, such as Windows and macOS, the native platform file chooser is used instead. When the application is running in a sandboxed environment without direct filesystem access (such as Flatpak), GtkFileChooserNative may call the proper APIs (portals) to let the user choose a file and make it available to the application.

While the API of GtkFileChooserNative closely mirrors GtkFileChooserDialog, the main difference is that there is no access to any GtkWindow or GtkWidget for the dialog. This is required, as there may not be one in the case of a platform native dialog.

Showing, hiding and running the dialog is handled by the gtk.NativeDialog functions.

Note that unlike GtkFileChooserDialog, GtkFileChooserNative objects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.

Typical usage

In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use GtkFileChooserNative to select a file for opening: 

static void
on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native,
             int              response)
{
  if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
    {
      GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
      GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);

      open_file (file);

      g_object_unref (file);
    }

  g_object_unref (native);
}

  // ...
  GtkFileChooserNative *native;
  GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;

  native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Open File",
                                        parent_window,
                                        action,
                                        "_Open",
                                        "_Cancel");

  g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL);
  gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));

To use a GtkFileChooserNative for saving, you can use this: 

static void
on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native,
             int              response)
{
  if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
    {
      GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
      GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser);

      save_to_file (file);

      g_object_unref (file);
    }

  g_object_unref (native);
}

  // ...
  GtkFileChooserNative *native;
  GtkFileChooser *chooser;
  GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;

  native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Save File",
                                        parent_window,
                                        action,
                                        "_Save",
                                        "_Cancel");
  chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);

  if (user_edited_a_new_document)
    gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, _("Untitled document"));
  else
    gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file, NULL);

  g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL);
  gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));

For more information on how to best set up a file dialog, see the gtk.FileChooserDialog documentation.

Response Codes

GtkFileChooserNative inherits from gtk.NativeDialog, which means it will return GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT if the user accepted, and GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL if he pressed cancel. It can also return GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT if the window was unexpectedly closed.

Differences from FileChooserDialog

There are a few things in the gtk.FileChooser interface that are not possible to use with GtkFileChooserNative, as such use would prohibit the use of a native dialog.

No operations that change the dialog work while the dialog is visible. Set all the properties that are required before showing the dialog.

Win32 details

On windows the IFileDialog implementation (added in Windows Vista) is used. It supports many of the features that GtkFileChooser has, but there are some things it does not handle:

* Any gtk.FileFilter added using a mimetype

If any of these features are used the regular GtkFileChooserDialog will be used in place of the native one.

Portal details

When the org.freedesktop.portal.FileChooser portal is available on the session bus, it is used to bring up an out-of-process file chooser. Depending on the kind of session the application is running in, this may or may not be a GTK file chooser.

macOS details

On macOS the NSSavePanel and NSOpenPanel classes are used to provide native file chooser dialogs. Some features provided by GtkFileChooser are not supported:

* Shortcut folders.

func NewFileChooserNative 

func NewFileChooserNative(title string, parent *Window, action FileChooserAction, acceptLabel, cancelLabel string) *FileChooserNative

NewFileChooserNative creates a new GtkFileChooserNative.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional): title of the native, or NULL.
  • parent (optional): transient parent of the native, or NULL.
  • action: open or save mode for the dialog.
  • acceptLabel (optional): text to go in the accept button, or NULL for the default.
  • cancelLabel (optional): text to go in the cancel button, or NULL for the default.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileChooserNative: new GtkFileChooserNative.

func (*FileChooserNative) AcceptLabel 

func (self *FileChooserNative) AcceptLabel() string

AcceptLabel retrieves the custom label text for the accept button.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): custom label, or NULL for the default. This string is owned by GTK and should not be modified or freed.

func (*FileChooserNative) CancelLabel 

func (self *FileChooserNative) CancelLabel() string

CancelLabel retrieves the custom label text for the cancel button.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): custom label, or NULL for the default. This string is owned by GTK and should not be modified or freed.

func (*FileChooserNative) SetAcceptLabel 

func (self *FileChooserNative) SetAcceptLabel(acceptLabel string)

SetAcceptLabel sets the custom label text for the accept button.

If characters in label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.

Pressing Alt and that key should activate the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • acceptLabel (optional): custom label or NULL for the default.

func (*FileChooserNative) SetCancelLabel 

func (self *FileChooserNative) SetCancelLabel(cancelLabel string)

SetCancelLabel sets the custom label text for the cancel button.

If characters in label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.

Pressing Alt and that key should activate the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cancelLabel (optional): custom label or NULL for the default.

type FileChooserNativeClass added in v0.0.5 

type FileChooserNativeClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileChooserNativeClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*FileChooserNativeClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (f *FileChooserNativeClass) ParentClass() *NativeDialogClass

type FileChooserNativeOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FileChooserNativeOverrides struct {
}

FileChooserNativeOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FileChooserWidget 

type FileChooserWidget struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	FileChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileChooserWidget: GtkFileChooserWidget is a widget for choosing files.

It exposes the gtk.FileChooser interface, and you should use the methods of this interface to interact with the widget.

CSS nodes

GtkFileChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name filechooser.

func NewFileChooserWidget 

func NewFileChooserWidget(action FileChooserAction) *FileChooserWidget

NewFileChooserWidget creates a new GtkFileChooserWidget.

This is a file chooser widget that can be embedded in custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by GtkFileChooserDialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • action: open or save mode for the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileChooserWidget: new GtkFileChooserWidget.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectDesktopFolder 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectDesktopFolder(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDesktopFolder is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show the user's Desktop folder in the file list.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>D</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectDownFolder 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectDownFolder(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDownFolder is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser go to a child of the current folder in the file hierarchy. The subfolder that will be used is displayed in the path bar widget of the file chooser. For example, if the path bar is showing "/foo/bar/baz", with bar currently displayed, then this will cause the file chooser to switch to the "baz" subfolder.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>Down</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectHomeFolder 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectHomeFolder(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectHomeFolder is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show the user's home folder in the file list.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>Home</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationPopup 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationPopup(f func(path string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLocationPopup is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show a "Location" prompt which the user can use to manually type the name of the file he wishes to select.

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Control</kbd>-<kbd>L</kbd> with a path string of "" (the empty string). It is also bound to <kbd>/</kbd> with a path string of "/" (a slash): this lets you type / and immediately type a path name. On Unix systems, this is bound to <kbd>~</kbd> (tilde) with a path string of "~" itself for access to home directories.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationPopupOnPaste 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationPopupOnPaste(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLocationPopupOnPaste is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show a "Location" prompt when the user pastes into a GtkFileChooserWidget.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Control</kbd>-<kbd>V</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationTogglePopup 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectLocationTogglePopup(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectLocationTogglePopup is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to toggle the visibility of a "Location" prompt which the user can use to manually type the name of the file he wishes to select.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Control</kbd>-<kbd>L</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectPlacesShortcut 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectPlacesShortcut(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPlacesShortcut is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to move the focus to the places sidebar.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>P</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectQuickBookmark 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectQuickBookmark(f func(bookmarkIndex int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectQuickBookmark is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser switch to the bookmark specified in the bookmark_index parameter. For example, if you have three bookmarks, you can pass 0, 1, 2 to this signal to switch to each of them, respectively.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>1</kbd>, <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>2</kbd>, etc. until <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>0</kbd>. Note that in the default binding, that <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>1</kbd> is actually defined to switch to the bookmark at index 0, and so on successively.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectRecentShortcut 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectRecentShortcut(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRecentShortcut is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show the Recent location.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>R</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectSearchShortcut 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectSearchShortcut(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSearchShortcut is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser show the search entry.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>S</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectShowHidden 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectShowHidden(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectShowHidden is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser display hidden files.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Control</kbd>-<kbd>H</kbd>.

func (*FileChooserWidget) ConnectUpFolder 

func (v *FileChooserWidget) ConnectUpFolder(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUpFolder is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This is used to make the file chooser go to the parent of the current folder in the file hierarchy.

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Alt</kbd>-<kbd>Up</kbd>.

type FileChooserer 

type FileChooserer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// AddChoice adds a 'choice' to the file chooser.
	AddChoice(id, label string, options, optionLabels []string)
	// AddFilter adds filter to the list of filters that the user can select
	// between.
	AddFilter(filter *FileFilter)
	// AddShortcutFolder adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders
	// in a file chooser.
	AddShortcutFolder(folder gio.Filer) error
	// Action gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing.
	Action() FileChooserAction
	// Choice gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given
	// ID.
	Choice(id string) string
	// CreateFolders gets whether file chooser will offer to create new folders.
	CreateFolders() bool
	// CurrentFolder gets the current folder of chooser as #GFile.
	CurrentFolder() *gio.File
	// CurrentName gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the
	// user.
	CurrentName() string
	// File gets the GFile for the currently selected file in the file selector.
	File() *gio.File
	// Files lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder
	// of chooser as #GFile.
	Files() *gio.ListModel
	// Filter gets the current filter.
	Filter() *FileFilter
	// Filters gets the current set of user-selectable filters, as a list model.
	Filters() *gio.ListModel
	// SelectMultiple gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
	// chooser.
	SelectMultiple() bool
	// ShortcutFolders queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser.
	ShortcutFolders() *gio.ListModel
	// RemoveChoice removes a 'choice' that has been added with
	// gtk_file_chooser_add_choice().
	RemoveChoice(id string)
	// RemoveFilter removes filter from the list of filters that the user can
	// select between.
	RemoveFilter(filter *FileFilter)
	// RemoveShortcutFolder removes a folder from the shortcut folders in a file
	// chooser.
	RemoveShortcutFolder(folder gio.Filer) error
	// SetAction sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing.
	SetAction(action FileChooserAction)
	// SetChoice selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
	// gtk_file_chooser_add_choice().
	SetChoice(id, option string)
	// SetCreateFolders sets whether file chooser will offer to create new
	// folders.
	SetCreateFolders(createFolders bool)
	// SetCurrentFolder sets the current folder for chooser from a #GFile.
	SetCurrentFolder(file gio.Filer) error
	// SetCurrentName sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
	// by the user.
	SetCurrentName(name string)
	// SetFile sets file as the current filename for the file chooser.
	SetFile(file gio.Filer) error
	// SetFilter sets the current filter.
	SetFilter(filter *FileFilter)
	// SetSelectMultiple sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
	// chooser.
	SetSelectMultiple(selectMultiple bool)
}

FileChooserer describes FileChooser's interface methods.

type FileFilter 

type FileFilter struct {
	Filter

	*coreglib.Object
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FileFilter: GtkFileFilter filters files by name or mime type.

GtkFileFilter can be used to restrict the files being shown in a GtkFileChooser. Files can be filtered based on their name (with gtk.FileFilter.AddPattern()) or on their mime type (with gtk.FileFilter.AddMIMEType()).

Filtering by mime types handles aliasing and subclassing of mime types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain. Note that GtkFileFilter allows wildcards for the subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.

Normally, file filters are used by adding them to a GtkFileChooser (see gtk.FileChooser.AddFilter()), but it is also possible to manually use a file filter on any gtk.FilterListModel containing GFileInfo objects.

GtkFileFilter as GtkBuildable

The GtkFileFilter implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding rules using the <mime-types> and <patterns> elements and listing the rules within. Specifying a <mime-type> or <pattern> has the same effect as as calling gtk.FileFilter.AddMIMEType() or gtk.FileFilter.AddPattern().

An example of a UI definition fragment specifying GtkFileFilter rules: 

<object class="GtkFileFilter">
  <property name="name" translatable="yes">Text and Images</property>
  <mime-types>
    <mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
    <mime-type>image/ *</mime-type>
  </mime-types>
  <patterns>
    <pattern>*.txt</pattern>
    <pattern>*.png</pattern>
  </patterns>
</object>.

func NewFileFilter 

func NewFileFilter() *FileFilter

NewFileFilter creates a new GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.

Such a filter doesn’t accept any files, so is not particularly useful until you add rules with gtk.FileFilter.AddMIMEType(), gtk.FileFilter.AddPattern(), or gtk.FileFilter.AddPixbufFormats().

To create a filter that accepts any file, use: 

GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileFilter: new GtkFileFilter.

func NewFileFilterFromGVariant 

func NewFileFilterFromGVariant(variant *glib.Variant) *FileFilter

NewFileFilterFromGVariant: deserialize a file filter from a GVariant.

The variant must be in the format produced by gtk.FileFilter.ToGVariant().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • variant: a{sv} GVariant.

The function returns the following values:

  • fileFilter: new GtkFileFilter object.

func (*FileFilter) AddMIMEType 

func (filter *FileFilter) AddMIMEType(mimeType string)

AddMIMEType adds a rule allowing a given mime type to filter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mimeType: name of a MIME type.

func (*FileFilter) AddPattern 

func (filter *FileFilter) AddPattern(pattern string)

AddPattern adds a rule allowing a shell style glob to a filter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pattern: shell style glob.

func (*FileFilter) AddPixbufFormats 

func (filter *FileFilter) AddPixbufFormats()

AddPixbufFormats adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported by GdkPixbuf.

This is equivalent to calling gtk.FileFilter.AddMIMEType() for all the supported mime types.

func (*FileFilter) Attributes 

func (filter *FileFilter) Attributes() []string

Attributes gets the attributes that need to be filled in for the GFileInfo passed to this filter.

This function will not typically be used by applications; it is intended principally for use in the implementation of GtkFileChooser.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: attributes.

func (*FileFilter) Name 

func (filter *FileFilter) Name() string

Name gets the human-readable name for the filter.

See gtk.FileFilter.SetName().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): human-readable name of the filter, or NULL. This value is owned by GTK and must not be modified or freed.

func (*FileFilter) SetName 

func (filter *FileFilter) SetName(name string)

SetName sets a human-readable name of the filter.

This is the string that will be displayed in the file chooser if there is a selectable list of filters.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) for the filter, or NULL to remove any existing name.

func (*FileFilter) ToGVariant 

func (filter *FileFilter) ToGVariant() *glib.Variant

ToGVariant: serialize a file filter to an a{sv} variant.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant: new, floating, GVariant.

type Filter 

type Filter struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Filter: GtkFilter object describes the filtering to be performed by a GtkFilterListModel.

The model will use the filter to determine if it should include items or not by calling gtk.Filter.Match() for each item and only keeping the ones that the function returns TRUE for.

Filters may change what items they match through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the gtk.Filter::changed signal to notify that previous filter results are no longer valid and that items should be checked again via gtk.Filter.Match().

GTK provides various pre-made filter implementations for common filtering operations. These filters often include properties that can be linked to various widgets to easily allow searches.

However, in particular for large lists or complex search methods, it is also possible to subclass Filter and provide one's own filter.

func (*Filter) Changed 

func (self *Filter) Changed(change FilterChange)

Changed emits the Filter::changed signal to notify all users of the filter that the filter changed. Users of the filter should then check items again via gtk_filter_match().

Depending on the change parameter, not all items need to be changed, but only some. Refer to the FilterChange documentation for details.

This function is intended for implementors of Filter subclasses and should not be called from other functions.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • change: how the filter changed.

func (*Filter) ConnectChanged 

func (self *Filter) ConnectChanged(f func(change FilterChange)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted whenever the filter changed.

Users of the filter should then check items again via gtk.Filter.Match().

GtkFilterListModel handles this signal automatically.

Depending on the change parameter, not all items need to be checked, but only some. Refer to the gtk.FilterChange documentation for details.

func (*Filter) Match 

func (self *Filter) Match(item *coreglib.Object) bool

Match checks if the given item is matched by the filter or not.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • item to check.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the filter matches the item and a filter model should keep it, FALSE if not.

func (*Filter) Strictness 

func (self *Filter) Strictness() FilterMatch

Strictness gets the known strictness of filters. If the strictness is not known, GTK_FILTER_MATCH_SOME is returned.

This value may change after emission of the Filter::changed signal.

This function is meant purely for optimization purposes, filters can choose to omit implementing it, but FilterListModel uses it.

The function returns the following values:

  • filterMatch strictness of self.

type FilterChange 

type FilterChange C.gint

FilterChange describes changes in a filter in more detail and allows objects using the filter to optimize refiltering items.

If you are writing an implementation and are not sure which value to pass, GTK_FILTER_CHANGE_DIFFERENT is always a correct choice. 

const (
	// FilterChangeDifferent: filter change cannot be described with any of the
	// other enumeration values.
	FilterChangeDifferent FilterChange = iota
	// FilterChangeLessStrict: filter is less strict than it was before: All
	// items that it used to return TRUE for still return TRUE, others now may,
	// too.
	FilterChangeLessStrict
	// FilterChangeMoreStrict: filter is more strict than it was before:
	// All items that it used to return FALSE for still return FALSE, others now
	// may, too.
	FilterChangeMoreStrict
)

func (FilterChange) String 

func (f FilterChange) String() string

String returns the name in string for FilterChange.

type FilterClass added in v0.0.5 

type FilterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FilterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type FilterListModel 

type FilterListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FilterListModel: GtkFilterListModel is a list model that filters the elements of the underlying model according to a GtkFilter.

It hides some elements from the other model according to criteria given by a GtkFilter.

The model can be set up to do incremental searching, so that filtering long lists doesn't block the UI. See gtk.FilterListModel.SetIncremental() for details.

func NewFilterListModel 

func NewFilterListModel(model gio.ListModeller, filter *Filter) *FilterListModel

NewFilterListModel creates a new GtkFilterListModel that will filter model using the given filter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to sort, or NULL.
  • filter (optional) or NULL to not filter items.

The function returns the following values:

  • filterListModel: new GtkFilterListModel.

func (*FilterListModel) Filter 

func (self *FilterListModel) Filter() *Filter

Filter gets the GtkFilter currently set on self.

The function returns the following values:

  • filter (optional) currently in use or NULL if the list isn't filtered.

func (*FilterListModel) Incremental 

func (self *FilterListModel) Incremental() bool

Incremental returns whether incremental filtering is enabled.

See gtk.FilterListModel.SetIncremental().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if incremental filtering is enabled.

func (*FilterListModel) Model 

func (self *FilterListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model currently filtered or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model that gets filtered.

func (*FilterListModel) Pending 

func (self *FilterListModel) Pending() uint

Pending returns the number of items that have not been filtered yet.

You can use this value to check if self is busy filtering by comparing the return value to 0 or you can compute the percentage of the filter remaining by dividing the return value by the total number of items in the underlying model: 

pending = gtk_filter_list_model_get_pending (self);
model = gtk_filter_list_model_get_model (self);
percentage = pending / (double) g_list_model_get_n_items (model);

If no filter operation is ongoing - in particular when gtk.FilterListModel:incremental is FALSE - this function returns 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: number of items not yet filtered.

func (*FilterListModel) SetFilter 

func (self *FilterListModel) SetFilter(filter *Filter)

SetFilter sets the filter used to filter items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter (optional) to use or NULL to not filter items.

func (*FilterListModel) SetIncremental 

func (self *FilterListModel) SetIncremental(incremental bool)

SetIncremental sets the filter model to do an incremental sort.

When incremental filtering is enabled, the GtkFilterListModel will not run filters immediately, but will instead queue an idle handler that incrementally filters the items and adds them to the list. This of course means that items are not instantly added to the list, but only appear incrementally.

When your filter blocks the UI while filtering, you might consider turning this on. Depending on your model and filters, this may become interesting around 10,000 to 100,000 items.

By default, incremental filtering is disabled.

See gtk.FilterListModel.GetPending() for progress information about an ongoing incremental filtering operation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • incremental: TRUE to enable incremental filtering.

func (*FilterListModel) SetModel 

func (self *FilterListModel) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model to be filtered.

Note that GTK makes no effort to ensure that model conforms to the item type of self. It assumes that the caller knows what they are doing and have set up an appropriate filter to ensure that item types match.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be filtered.

type FilterListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type FilterListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FilterListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type FilterListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FilterListModelOverrides struct {
}

FilterListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FilterMatch 

type FilterMatch C.gint

FilterMatch describes the known strictness of a filter.

Note that for filters where the strictness is not known, GTK_FILTER_MATCH_SOME is always an acceptable value, even if a filter does match all or no items. 

const (
	// FilterMatchSome: filter matches some items, gtk_filter_match() may return
	// TRUE or FALSE.
	FilterMatchSome FilterMatch = iota
	// FilterMatchNone: filter does not match any item, gtk_filter_match() will
	// always return FALSE.
	FilterMatchNone
	// FilterMatchAll: filter matches all items, gtk_filter_match() will alays
	// return TRUE.
	FilterMatchAll
)

func (FilterMatch) String 

func (f FilterMatch) String() string

String returns the name in string for FilterMatch.

type FilterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FilterOverrides struct {
	// Strictness gets the known strictness of filters. If the strictness is not
	// known, GTK_FILTER_MATCH_SOME is returned.
	//
	// This value may change after emission of the Filter::changed signal.
	//
	// This function is meant purely for optimization purposes, filters can
	// choose to omit implementing it, but FilterListModel uses it.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - filterMatch strictness of self.
	//
	Strictness func() FilterMatch
	// Match checks if the given item is matched by the filter or not.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - item (optional) to check.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if the filter matches the item and a filter model should
	//     keep it, FALSE if not.
	//
	Match func(item *coreglib.Object) bool
}

FilterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Fixed 

type Fixed struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Fixed: GtkFixed places its child widgets at fixed positions and with fixed sizes.

GtkFixed performs no automatic layout management.

For most applications, you should not use this container! It keeps you from having to learn about the other GTK containers, but it results in broken applications. With GtkFixed, the following things will result in truncated text, overlapping widgets, and other display bugs:

- Themes, which may change widget sizes.

- Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.

- Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.

In addition, GtkFixed does not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately for the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language, but it can’t do that with GtkFixed. So if you need to reorder widgets depending on the text direction, you would need to manually detect it and adjust child positions accordingly.

Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.

If you know none of these things are an issue for your application, and prefer the simplicity of GtkFixed, by all means use the widget. But you should be aware of the tradeoffs.

func NewFixed 

func NewFixed() *Fixed

NewFixed creates a new GtkFixed.

The function returns the following values:

  • fixed: new GtkFixed.

func (*Fixed) ChildPosition 

func (fixed *Fixed) ChildPosition(widget Widgetter) (x, y float64)

ChildPosition retrieves the translation transformation of the given child GtkWidget in the GtkFixed.

See also: gtk.Fixed.GetChildTransform().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child of fixed.

The function returns the following values:

  • x: horizontal position of the widget.
  • y: vertical position of the widget.

func (*Fixed) ChildTransform 

func (fixed *Fixed) ChildTransform(widget Widgetter) *gsk.Transform

ChildTransform retrieves the transformation for widget set using gtk_fixed_set_child_transform().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget, child of fixed.

The function returns the following values:

  • transform (optional): GskTransform or NULL in case no transform has been set on widget.

func (*Fixed) Move 

func (fixed *Fixed) Move(widget Widgetter, x, y float64)

Move sets a translation transformation to the given x and y coordinates to the child widget of the GtkFixed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child widget.
  • x: horizontal position to move the widget to.
  • y: vertical position to move the widget to.

func (*Fixed) Put 

func (fixed *Fixed) Put(widget Widgetter, x, y float64)

Put adds a widget to a GtkFixed at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget to add.
  • x: horizontal position to place the widget at.
  • y: vertical position to place the widget at.

func (*Fixed) Remove 

func (fixed *Fixed) Remove(widget Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from fixed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child widget to remove.

func (*Fixed) SetChildTransform 

func (fixed *Fixed) SetChildTransform(widget Widgetter, transform *gsk.Transform)

SetChildTransform sets the transformation for widget.

This is a convenience function that retrieves the gtk.FixedLayoutChild instance associated to widget and calls gtk.FixedLayoutChild.SetTransform().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget, child of fixed.
  • transform (optional): transformation assigned to widget or NULL to reset widget's transform.

type FixedClass added in v0.0.5 

type FixedClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FixedClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*FixedClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (f *FixedClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type FixedLayout 

type FixedLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FixedLayout: GtkFixedLayout is a layout manager which can place child widgets at fixed positions.

Most applications should never use this layout manager; fixed positioning and sizing requires constant recalculations on where children need to be positioned and sized. Other layout managers perform this kind of work internally so that application developers don't need to do it. Specifically, widgets positioned in a fixed layout manager will need to take into account:

- Themes, which may change widget sizes.

- Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.

- Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.

In addition, GtkFixedLayout does not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately depending on the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language; GtkFixedLayout won't be able to do that for you.

Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.

func NewFixedLayout 

func NewFixedLayout() *FixedLayout

NewFixedLayout creates a new GtkFixedLayout.

The function returns the following values:

  • fixedLayout: newly created GtkFixedLayout.

type FixedLayoutChild 

type FixedLayoutChild struct {
	LayoutChild
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FixedLayoutChild: GtkLayoutChild subclass for children in a GtkFixedLayout.

func (*FixedLayoutChild) SetTransform 

func (child *FixedLayoutChild) SetTransform(transform *gsk.Transform)

SetTransform sets the transformation of the child of a GtkFixedLayout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • transform: GskTransform.

func (*FixedLayoutChild) Transform 

func (child *FixedLayoutChild) Transform() *gsk.Transform

Transform retrieves the transformation of the child.

The function returns the following values:

  • transform (optional): GskTransform.

type FixedLayoutChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type FixedLayoutChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FixedLayoutChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*FixedLayoutChildClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (f *FixedLayoutChildClass) ParentClass() *LayoutChildClass

type FixedLayoutChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FixedLayoutChildOverrides struct {
}

FixedLayoutChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FixedLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type FixedLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FixedLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*FixedLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (f *FixedLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type FixedLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FixedLayoutOverrides struct {
}

FixedLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FixedOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FixedOverrides struct {
}

FixedOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FlattenListModel 

type FlattenListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FlattenListModel: GtkFlattenListModel is a list model that concatenates other list models.

GtkFlattenListModel takes a list model containing list models, and flattens it into a single model.

func NewFlattenListModel 

func NewFlattenListModel(model gio.ListModeller) *FlattenListModel

NewFlattenListModel creates a new GtkFlattenListModel that flattens list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be flattened.

The function returns the following values:

  • flattenListModel: new GtkFlattenListModel.

func (*FlattenListModel) Model 

func (self *FlattenListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model set via gtk_flatten_list_model_set_model().

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model flattened by self.

func (*FlattenListModel) ModelForItem 

func (self *FlattenListModel) ModelForItem(position uint) *gio.ListModel

ModelForItem returns the model containing the item at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: position.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: model containing the item at position.

func (*FlattenListModel) SetModel 

func (self *FlattenListModel) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets a new model to be flattened.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): new model or NULL.

type FlattenListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type FlattenListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FlattenListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type FlattenListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FlattenListModelOverrides struct {
}

FlattenListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FlowBox 

type FlowBox struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FlowBox: GtkFlowBox puts child widgets in reflowing grid.

For instance, with the horizontal orientation, the widgets will be arranged from left to right, starting a new row under the previous row when necessary. Reducing the width in this case will require more rows, so a larger height will be requested.

Likewise, with the vertical orientation, the widgets will be arranged from top to bottom, starting a new column to the right when necessary. Reducing the height will require more columns, so a larger width will be requested.

The size request of a GtkFlowBox alone may not be what you expect; if you need to be able to shrink it along both axes and dynamically reflow its children, you may have to wrap it in a GtkScrolledWindow to enable that.

The children of a GtkFlowBox can be dynamically sorted and filtered.

Although a GtkFlowBox must have only GtkFlowBoxChild children, you can add any kind of widget to it via gtk.FlowBox.Insert(), and a GtkFlowBoxChild widget will automatically be inserted between the box and the widget.

Also see gtk.ListBox.

CSS nodes 

flowbox
├── flowboxchild
│   ╰── <child>
├── flowboxchild
│   ╰── <child>
┊
╰── [rubberband]

GtkFlowBox uses a single CSS node with name flowbox. GtkFlowBoxChild uses a single CSS node with name flowboxchild. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.

Accessibility

GtkFlowBox uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID role, and GtkFlowBoxChild uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELL role.

func NewFlowBox 

func NewFlowBox() *FlowBox

NewFlowBox creates a GtkFlowBox.

The function returns the following values:

  • flowBox: new GtkFlowBox.

func (*FlowBox) ActivateOnSingleClick 

func (box *FlowBox) ActivateOnSingleClick() bool

ActivateOnSingleClick returns whether children activate on single clicks.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if children are activated on single click, FALSE otherwise.

func (*FlowBox) BindModel 

func (box *FlowBox) BindModel(model gio.ListModeller, createWidgetFunc FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc)

BindModel binds model to box.

If box was already bound to a model, that previous binding is destroyed.

The contents of box are cleared and then filled with widgets that represent items from model. box is updated whenever model changes. If model is NULL, box is left empty.

It is undefined to add or remove widgets directly (for example, with gtk.FlowBox.Insert()) while box is bound to a model.

Note that using a model is incompatible with the filtering and sorting functionality in GtkFlowBox. When using a model, filtering and sorting should be implemented by the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to be bound to box.
  • createWidgetFunc: function that creates widgets for items.

func (*FlowBox) ChildAtIndex 

func (box *FlowBox) ChildAtIndex(idx int) *FlowBoxChild

ChildAtIndex gets the nth child in the box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • idx: position of the child.

The function returns the following values:

  • flowBoxChild (optional): child widget, which will always be a GtkFlowBoxChild or NULL in case no child widget with the given index exists.

func (*FlowBox) ChildAtPos 

func (box *FlowBox) ChildAtPos(x, y int) *FlowBoxChild

ChildAtPos gets the child in the (x, y) position.

Both x and y are assumed to be relative to the origin of box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x coordinate of the child.
  • y coordinate of the child.

The function returns the following values:

  • flowBoxChild (optional): child widget, which will always be a GtkFlowBoxChild or NULL in case no child widget exists for the given x and y coordinates.

func (*FlowBox) ColumnSpacing 

func (box *FlowBox) ColumnSpacing() uint

ColumnSpacing gets the horizontal spacing.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: horizontal spacing.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectActivateCursorChild 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectActivateCursorChild(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateCursorChild is emitted when the user activates the box.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*FlowBox) ConnectChildActivated 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectChildActivated(f func(child *FlowBoxChild)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChildActivated is emitted when a child has been activated by the user.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, count int, extend, modify bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor is emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html). Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal come in two variants, the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection, the variant without the Shift modifier does not. There are too many key combinations to list them all here.

- <kbd>←</kbd>, <kbd>→</kbd>, <kbd>↑</kbd>, <kbd>↓</kbd> move by individual children

- <kbd>Home</kbd>, <kbd>End</kbd> move to the ends of the box

- <kbd>PgUp</kbd>, <kbd>PgDn</kbd> move vertically by pages.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectSelectAll 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectSelectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectAll is emitted to select all children of the box, if the selection mode permits it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal is <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd>.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectSelectedChildrenChanged 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectSelectedChildrenChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectedChildrenChanged is emitted when the set of selected children changes.

Use gtk.FlowBox.SelectedForEach() or gtk.FlowBox.GetSelectedChildren() to obtain the selected children.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectToggleCursorChild 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectToggleCursorChild(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleCursorChild is emitted to toggle the selection of the child that has the focus.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Space</kbd>.

func (*FlowBox) ConnectUnselectAll 

func (box *FlowBox) ConnectUnselectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnselectAll is emitted to unselect all children of the box, if the selection mode permits it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal is <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd>.

func (*FlowBox) Homogeneous 

func (box *FlowBox) Homogeneous() bool

Homogeneous returns whether the box is homogeneous.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the box is homogeneous.

func (*FlowBox) Insert 

func (box *FlowBox) Insert(widget Widgetter, position int)

Insert inserts the widget into box at position.

If a sort function is set, the widget will actually be inserted at the calculated position.

If position is -1, or larger than the total number of children in the box, then the widget will be appended to the end.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget to add.
  • position to insert child in.

func (*FlowBox) InvalidateFilter 

func (box *FlowBox) InvalidateFilter()

InvalidateFilter updates the filtering for all children.

Call this function when the result of the filter function on the box is changed due ot an external factor. For instance, this would be used if the filter function just looked for a specific search term, and the entry with the string has changed.

func (*FlowBox) InvalidateSort 

func (box *FlowBox) InvalidateSort()

InvalidateSort updates the sorting for all children.

Call this when the result of the sort function on box is changed due to an external factor.

func (*FlowBox) MaxChildrenPerLine 

func (box *FlowBox) MaxChildrenPerLine() uint

MaxChildrenPerLine gets the maximum number of children per line.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: maximum number of children per line.

func (*FlowBox) MinChildrenPerLine 

func (box *FlowBox) MinChildrenPerLine() uint

MinChildrenPerLine gets the minimum number of children per line.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: minimum number of children per line.

func (*FlowBox) Remove 

func (box *FlowBox) Remove(widget Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child widget to remove.

func (*FlowBox) RowSpacing 

func (box *FlowBox) RowSpacing() uint

RowSpacing gets the vertical spacing.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: vertical spacing.

func (*FlowBox) SelectAll 

func (box *FlowBox) SelectAll()

SelectAll: select all children of box, if the selection mode allows it.

func (*FlowBox) SelectChild 

func (box *FlowBox) SelectChild(child *FlowBoxChild)

SelectChild selects a single child of box, if the selection mode allows it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of box.

func (*FlowBox) SelectedChildren 

func (box *FlowBox) SelectedChildren() []*FlowBoxChild

SelectedChildren creates a list of all selected children.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: A GList containing the GtkWidget for each selected child. Free with g_list_free() when done.

func (*FlowBox) SelectedForEach 

func (box *FlowBox) SelectedForEach(fn FlowBoxForEachFunc)

SelectedForEach calls a function for each selected child.

Note that the selection cannot be modified from within this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call for each selected child.

func (*FlowBox) SelectionMode 

func (box *FlowBox) SelectionMode() SelectionMode

SelectionMode gets the selection mode of box.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionMode: GtkSelectionMode.

func (*FlowBox) SetActivateOnSingleClick 

func (box *FlowBox) SetActivateOnSingleClick(single bool)

SetActivateOnSingleClick: if single is TRUE, children will be activated when you click on them, otherwise you need to double-click.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • single: TRUE to emit child-activated on a single click.

func (*FlowBox) SetColumnSpacing 

func (box *FlowBox) SetColumnSpacing(spacing uint)

SetColumnSpacing sets the horizontal space to add between children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing to use.

func (*FlowBox) SetFilterFunc 

func (box *FlowBox) SetFilterFunc(filterFunc FlowBoxFilterFunc)

SetFilterFunc: by setting a filter function on the box one can decide dynamically which of the children to show.

For instance, to implement a search function that only shows the children matching the search terms.

The filter_func will be called for each child after the call, and it will continue to be called each time a child changes (via gtk.FlowBoxChild.Changed()) or when gtk.FlowBox.InvalidateFilter() is called.

Note that using a filter function is incompatible with using a model (see gtk.FlowBox.BindModel()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filterFunc (optional): callback that lets you filter which children to show.

func (*FlowBox) SetHAdjustment 

func (box *FlowBox) SetHAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetHAdjustment hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in box.

The adjustment is also used for autoscrolling during rubberband selection. See gtk.ScrolledWindow.GetHAdjustment() for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment, and gtk.FlowBox.SetVAdjustment() for setting the vertical adjustment.

The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children of the box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus is moved among the descendents of container.

func (*FlowBox) SetHomogeneous 

func (box *FlowBox) SetHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetHomogeneous sets whether or not all children of box are given equal space in the box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to create equal allotments, FALSE for variable allotments.

func (*FlowBox) SetMaxChildrenPerLine 

func (box *FlowBox) SetMaxChildrenPerLine(nChildren uint)

SetMaxChildrenPerLine sets the maximum number of children to request and allocate space for in box’s orientation.

Setting the maximum number of children per line limits the overall natural size request to be no more than n_children children long in the given orientation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChildren: maximum number of children per line.

func (*FlowBox) SetMinChildrenPerLine 

func (box *FlowBox) SetMinChildrenPerLine(nChildren uint)

SetMinChildrenPerLine sets the minimum number of children to line up in box’s orientation before flowing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChildren: minimum number of children per line.

func (*FlowBox) SetRowSpacing 

func (box *FlowBox) SetRowSpacing(spacing uint)

SetRowSpacing sets the vertical space to add between children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing to use.

func (*FlowBox) SetSelectionMode 

func (box *FlowBox) SetSelectionMode(mode SelectionMode)

SetSelectionMode sets how selection works in box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: new selection mode.

func (*FlowBox) SetSortFunc 

func (box *FlowBox) SetSortFunc(sortFunc FlowBoxSortFunc)

SetSortFunc: by setting a sort function on the box, one can dynamically reorder the children of the box, based on the contents of the children.

The sort_func will be called for each child after the call, and will continue to be called each time a child changes (via gtk.FlowBoxChild.Changed()) and when gtk.FlowBox.InvalidateSort() is called.

Note that using a sort function is incompatible with using a model (see gtk.FlowBox.BindModel()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortFunc (optional): sort function.

func (*FlowBox) SetVAdjustment 

func (box *FlowBox) SetVAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetVAdjustment hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in box.

The adjustment is also used for autoscrolling during rubberband selection. See gtk.ScrolledWindow.GetVAdjustment() for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment, and gtk.FlowBox.SetHAdjustment() for setting the horizontal adjustment.

The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children of the box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus is moved among the descendents of container.

func (*FlowBox) UnselectAll 

func (box *FlowBox) UnselectAll()

UnselectAll: unselect all children of box, if the selection mode allows it.

func (*FlowBox) UnselectChild 

func (box *FlowBox) UnselectChild(child *FlowBoxChild)

UnselectChild unselects a single child of box, if the selection mode allows it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of box.

type FlowBoxChild 

type FlowBoxChild struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FlowBoxChild: GtkFlowBoxChild is the kind of widget that can be added to a GtkFlowBox.

func NewFlowBoxChild 

func NewFlowBoxChild() *FlowBoxChild

NewFlowBoxChild creates a new GtkFlowBoxChild.

This should only be used as a child of a GtkFlowBox.

The function returns the following values:

  • flowBoxChild: new GtkFlowBoxChild.

func (*FlowBoxChild) Changed 

func (child *FlowBoxChild) Changed()

Changed marks child as changed, causing any state that depends on this to be updated.

This affects sorting and filtering.

Note that calls to this method must be in sync with the data used for the sorting and filtering functions. For instance, if the list is mirroring some external data set, and *two* children changed in the external data set when you call gtk_flow_box_child_changed() on the first child, the sort function must only read the new data for the first of the two changed children, otherwise the resorting of the children will be wrong.

This generally means that if you don’t fully control the data model, you have to duplicate the data that affects the sorting and filtering functions into the widgets themselves.

Another alternative is to call gtk.FlowBox.InvalidateSort() on any model change, but that is more expensive.

func (*FlowBoxChild) Child 

func (self *FlowBoxChild) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of self.

func (*FlowBoxChild) ConnectActivate 

func (child *FlowBoxChild) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when the user activates a child widget in a GtkFlowBox.

This can be happen either by clicking or double-clicking, or via a keybinding.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html), but it can be used by applications for their own purposes.

The default bindings are <kbd>Space</kbd> and <kbd>Enter</kbd>.

func (*FlowBoxChild) Index 

func (child *FlowBoxChild) Index() int

Index gets the current index of the child in its GtkFlowBox container.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the child, or -1 if the child is not in a flow box.

func (*FlowBoxChild) IsSelected 

func (child *FlowBoxChild) IsSelected() bool

IsSelected returns whether the child is currently selected in its GtkFlowBox container.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if child is selected.

func (*FlowBoxChild) SetChild 

func (self *FlowBoxChild) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

type FlowBoxChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type FlowBoxChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FlowBoxChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type FlowBoxChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FlowBoxChildOverrides struct {
	Activate func()
}

FlowBoxChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc 

type FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc func(item *coreglib.Object) (widget Widgetter)

FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc: called for flow boxes that are bound to a GListModel.

This function is called for each item that gets added to the model.

type FlowBoxFilterFunc 

type FlowBoxFilterFunc func(child *FlowBoxChild) (ok bool)

FlowBoxFilterFunc: function that will be called whenever a child changes or is added.

It lets you control if the child should be visible or not.

type FlowBoxForEachFunc 

type FlowBoxForEachFunc func(box *FlowBox, child *FlowBoxChild)

FlowBoxForEachFunc: function used by gtk_flow_box_selected_foreach().

It will be called on every selected child of the box.

type FlowBoxSortFunc 

type FlowBoxSortFunc func(child1, child2 *FlowBoxChild) (gint int)

FlowBoxSortFunc: function to compare two children to determine which should come first.

type FontButton 

type FontButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	FontChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FontButton: GtkFontButton allows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font.

!An example GtkFontButton (font-button.png)

It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.

CSS nodes 

fontbutton
╰── button.font
    ╰── [content]

GtkFontButton has a single CSS node with name fontbutton which contains a button node with the .font style class.

func NewFontButton 

func NewFontButton() *FontButton

NewFontButton creates a new font picker widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontButton: new font picker widget.

func NewFontButtonWithFont 

func NewFontButtonWithFont(fontname string) *FontButton

NewFontButtonWithFont creates a new font picker widget showing the given font.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fontname: name of font to display in font chooser dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontButton: new font picker widget.

func (*FontButton) ConnectFontSet 

func (fontButton *FontButton) ConnectFontSet(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectFontSet is emitted when the user selects a font.

When handling this signal, use gtk.FontChooser.GetFont() to find out which font was just selected.

Note that this signal is only emitted when the user changes the font. If you need to react to programmatic font changes as well, use the notify::font signal.

func (*FontButton) Modal 

func (fontButton *FontButton) Modal() bool

Modal gets whether the dialog is modal.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the dialog is modal.

func (*FontButton) SetModal 

func (fontButton *FontButton) SetModal(modal bool)

SetModal sets whether the dialog should be modal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modal: TRUE to make the dialog modal.

func (*FontButton) SetTitle 

func (fontButton *FontButton) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title for the font chooser dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title: string containing the font chooser dialog title.

func (*FontButton) SetUseFont 

func (fontButton *FontButton) SetUseFont(useFont bool)

SetUseFont: if use_font is TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected font.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useFont: if TRUE, font name will be written using font chosen.

func (*FontButton) SetUseSize 

func (fontButton *FontButton) SetUseSize(useSize bool)

SetUseSize: if use_size is TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useSize: if TRUE, font name will be written using the selected size.

func (*FontButton) Title 

func (fontButton *FontButton) Title() string

Title retrieves the title of the font chooser dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: internal copy of the title string which must not be freed.

func (*FontButton) UseFont 

func (fontButton *FontButton) UseFont() bool

UseFont returns whether the selected font is used in the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the selected font is used in the label.

func (*FontButton) UseSize 

func (fontButton *FontButton) UseSize() bool

UseSize returns whether the selected size is used in the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the selected size is used in the label.

type FontChooser 

type FontChooser struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FontChooser: GtkFontChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets for choosing fonts.

In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are gtk.FontChooserWidget, gtk.FontChooserDialog and gtk.FontButton.

FontChooser wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*FontChooser) ConnectFontActivated 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) ConnectFontActivated(f func(fontname string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectFontActivated is emitted when a font is activated.

This usually happens when the user double clicks an item, or an item is selected and the user presses one of the keys Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter.

func (*FontChooser) Font 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) Font() string

Font gets the currently-selected font name.

Note that this can be a different string than what you set with gtk.FontChooser.SetFont(), as the font chooser widget may normalize font names and thus return a string with a different structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.

Use pango.FontDescription.Equal() if you want to compare two font descriptions.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): string with the name of the current font, or NULL if no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().

func (*FontChooser) FontDesc 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontDesc() *pango.FontDescription

FontDesc gets the currently-selected font.

Note that this can be a different string than what you set with gtk.FontChooser.SetFont(), as the font chooser widget may normalize font names and thus return a string with a different structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.

Use pango.FontDescription.Equal() if you want to compare two font descriptions.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontDescription (optional): PangoFontDescription for the current font, or NULL if no font is selected.

func (*FontChooser) FontFace 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontFace() pango.FontFacer

FontFace gets the PangoFontFace representing the selected font group details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).

If the selected font is not installed, returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontFace (optional): PangoFontFace representing the selected font group details, or NULL. The returned object is owned by fontchooser and must not be modified or freed.

func (*FontChooser) FontFamily 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontFamily() pango.FontFamilier

FontFamily gets the PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.

Font families are a collection of font faces.

If the selected font is not installed, returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontFamily (optional): PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family, or NULL. The returned object is owned by fontchooser and must not be modified or freed.

func (*FontChooser) FontFeatures 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontFeatures() string

FontFeatures gets the currently-selected font features.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: currently selected font features.

func (*FontChooser) FontMap 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontMap() pango.FontMapper

FontMap gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget, or NULL if it does not have one.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontMap (optional): PangoFontMap, or NULL.

func (*FontChooser) FontSize 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) FontSize() int

FontSize: selected font size.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: n integer representing the selected font size, or -1 if no font size is selected.

func (*FontChooser) Language 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) Language() string

Language gets the language that is used for font features.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: currently selected language.

func (*FontChooser) Level 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) Level() FontChooserLevel

Level returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontChooserLevel: current granularity level.

func (*FontChooser) PreviewText 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) PreviewText() string

PreviewText gets the text displayed in the preview area.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: text displayed in the preview area.

func (*FontChooser) SetFilterFunc 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetFilterFunc(filter FontFilterFunc)

SetFilterFunc adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display in the font chooser.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter (optional): GtkFontFilterFunc, or NULL.

func (*FontChooser) SetFont 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetFont(fontname string)

SetFont sets the currently-selected font.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fontname: font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”.

func (*FontChooser) SetFontDesc 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetFontDesc(fontDesc *pango.FontDescription)

SetFontDesc sets the currently-selected font from font_desc.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fontDesc: PangoFontDescription.

func (*FontChooser) SetFontMap 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetFontMap(fontmap pango.FontMapper)

SetFontMap sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.

A custom font map can be used to present application-specific fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts. 

FcConfig *config;
PangoFontMap *fontmap;

config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);

fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);

gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);

Note that other GTK widgets will only be able to use the application-specific font if it is present in the font map they use: 

context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fontmap (optional): PangoFontMap.

func (*FontChooser) SetLanguage 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetLanguage(language string)

SetLanguage sets the language to use for font features.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • language: language.

func (*FontChooser) SetLevel 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetLevel(level FontChooserLevel)

SetLevel sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • level: desired level of granularity.

func (*FontChooser) SetPreviewText 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetPreviewText(text string)

SetPreviewText sets the text displayed in the preview area.

The text is used to show how the selected font looks.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text to display in the preview area.

func (*FontChooser) SetShowPreviewEntry 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) SetShowPreviewEntry(showPreviewEntry bool)

SetShowPreviewEntry shows or hides the editable preview entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showPreviewEntry: whether to show the editable preview entry or not.

func (*FontChooser) ShowPreviewEntry 

func (fontchooser *FontChooser) ShowPreviewEntry() bool

ShowPreviewEntry returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the preview entry is shown or FALSE if it is hidden.

type FontChooserDialog 

type FontChooserDialog struct {
	Dialog

	*coreglib.Object
	FontChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FontChooserDialog: GtkFontChooserDialog widget is a dialog for selecting a font.

!An example GtkFontChooserDialog (fontchooser.png)

GtkFontChooserDialog implements the gtk.FontChooser interface and does not provide much API of its own.

To create a GtkFontChooserDialog, use gtk.FontChooserDialog.New.

GtkFontChooserDialog as GtkBuildable

The GtkFontChooserDialog implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the buttons with the names “select_button” and “cancel_button”.

func NewFontChooserDialog 

func NewFontChooserDialog(title string, parent *Window) *FontChooserDialog

NewFontChooserDialog creates a new GtkFontChooserDialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional): title of the dialog, or NULL.
  • parent (optional): transient parent of the dialog, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontChooserDialog: new GtkFontChooserDialog.

type FontChooserIface added in v0.0.5 

type FontChooserIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FontChooserIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type FontChooserLevel 

type FontChooserLevel C.guint

FontChooserLevel specifies the granularity of font selection that is desired in a GtkFontChooser.

This enumeration may be extended in the future; applications should ignore unknown values. 

const (
	// FontChooserLevelFamily: allow selecting a font family.
	FontChooserLevelFamily FontChooserLevel = 0b0
	// FontChooserLevelStyle: allow selecting a specific font face.
	FontChooserLevelStyle FontChooserLevel = 0b1
	// FontChooserLevelSize: allow selecting a specific font size.
	FontChooserLevelSize FontChooserLevel = 0b10
	// FontChooserLevelVariations: allow changing OpenType font variation axes.
	FontChooserLevelVariations FontChooserLevel = 0b100
	// FontChooserLevelFeatures: allow selecting specific OpenType font
	// features.
	FontChooserLevelFeatures FontChooserLevel = 0b1000
)

func (FontChooserLevel) Has 

func (f FontChooserLevel) Has(other FontChooserLevel) bool

Has returns true if f contains other.

func (FontChooserLevel) String 

func (f FontChooserLevel) String() string

String returns the names in string for FontChooserLevel.

type FontChooserWidget 

type FontChooserWidget struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	FontChooser
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FontChooserWidget: GtkFontChooserWidget widget lets the user select a font.

It is used in the GtkFontChooserDialog widget to provide a dialog for selecting fonts.

To set the font which is initially selected, use gtk.FontChooser.SetFont() or gtk.FontChooser.SetFontDesc().

To get the selected font use gtk.FontChooser.GetFont() or gtk.FontChooser.GetFontDesc().

To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use gtk.FontChooser.SetPreviewText().

CSS nodes

GtkFontChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name fontchooser.

func NewFontChooserWidget 

func NewFontChooserWidget() *FontChooserWidget

NewFontChooserWidget creates a new GtkFontChooserWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontChooserWidget: new GtkFontChooserWidget.

type FontChooserer 

type FontChooserer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Font gets the currently-selected font name.
	Font() string
	// FontDesc gets the currently-selected font.
	FontDesc() *pango.FontDescription
	// FontFace gets the PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
	// details (i.e.
	FontFace() pango.FontFacer
	// FontFamily gets the PangoFontFamily representing the selected font
	// family.
	FontFamily() pango.FontFamilier
	// FontFeatures gets the currently-selected font features.
	FontFeatures() string
	// FontMap gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget, or NULL if
	// it does not have one.
	FontMap() pango.FontMapper
	// FontSize: selected font size.
	FontSize() int
	// Language gets the language that is used for font features.
	Language() string
	// Level returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.
	Level() FontChooserLevel
	// PreviewText gets the text displayed in the preview area.
	PreviewText() string
	// ShowPreviewEntry returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
	ShowPreviewEntry() bool
	// SetFilterFunc adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
	// in the font chooser.
	SetFilterFunc(filter FontFilterFunc)
	// SetFont sets the currently-selected font.
	SetFont(fontname string)
	// SetFontDesc sets the currently-selected font from font_desc.
	SetFontDesc(fontDesc *pango.FontDescription)
	// SetFontMap sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
	SetFontMap(fontmap pango.FontMapper)
	// SetLanguage sets the language to use for font features.
	SetLanguage(language string)
	// SetLevel sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.
	SetLevel(level FontChooserLevel)
	// SetPreviewText sets the text displayed in the preview area.
	SetPreviewText(text string)
	// SetShowPreviewEntry shows or hides the editable preview entry.
	SetShowPreviewEntry(showPreviewEntry bool)

	// Font-activated is emitted when a font is activated.
	ConnectFontActivated(func(fontname string)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

FontChooserer describes FontChooser's interface methods.

type FontFilterFunc 

type FontFilterFunc func(family pango.FontFamilier, face pango.FontFacer) (ok bool)

FontFilterFunc: type of function that is used for deciding what fonts get shown in a GtkFontChooser.

See gtk.FontChooser.SetFilterFunc().

type Frame 

type Frame struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Frame: GtkFrame is a widget that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label.

!An example GtkFrame (frame.png)

If present, the label is drawn inside the top edge of the frame. The horizontal position of the label can be controlled with gtk.Frame.SetLabelAlign().

GtkFrame clips its child. You can use this to add rounded corners to widgets, but be aware that it also cuts off shadows.

GtkFrame as GtkBuildable

The GtkFrame implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkFrame: 

<object class="GtkFrame">
  <child type="label">
    <object class="GtkLabel" id="frame_label"/>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkEntry" id="frame_content"/>
  </child>
</object>

CSS nodes 

frame
├── <label widget>
╰── <child>

GtkFrame has a main CSS node with name “frame”, which is used to draw the visible border. You can set the appearance of the border using CSS properties like “border-style” on this node.

func NewFrame 

func NewFrame(label string) *Frame

NewFrame creates a new GtkFrame, with optional label label.

If label is NULL, the label is omitted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text to use as the label of the frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • frame: new GtkFrame widget.

func (*Frame) Child 

func (frame *Frame) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of frame.

func (*Frame) Label 

func (frame *Frame) Label() string

Label returns the frame labels text.

If the frame's label widget is not a GtkLabel, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text in the label, or NULL if there was no label widget or the label widget was not a GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Frame) LabelAlign 

func (frame *Frame) LabelAlign() float32

LabelAlign retrieves the X alignment of the frame’s label.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat frames X alignment.

func (*Frame) LabelWidget 

func (frame *Frame) LabelWidget() Widgetter

LabelWidget retrieves the label widget for the frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): label widget, or NULL if there is none.

func (*Frame) SetChild 

func (frame *Frame) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of frame.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Frame) SetLabel 

func (frame *Frame) SetLabel(label string)

SetLabel creates a new GtkLabel with the label and sets it as the frame's label widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional): text to use as the label of the frame.

func (*Frame) SetLabelAlign 

func (frame *Frame) SetLabelAlign(xalign float32)

SetLabelAlign sets the X alignment of the frame widget’s label.

The default value for a newly created frame is 0.0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: position of the label along the top edge of the widget. A value of 0.0 represents left alignment; 1.0 represents right alignment.

func (*Frame) SetLabelWidget 

func (frame *Frame) SetLabelWidget(labelWidget Widgetter)

SetLabelWidget sets the label widget for the frame.

This is the widget that will appear embedded in the top edge of the frame as a title.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • labelWidget (optional): new label widget.

type FrameClass added in v0.0.5 

type FrameClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

FrameClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*FrameClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (f *FrameClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type FrameOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type FrameOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	ComputeChildAllocation func(allocation *Allocation)
}

FrameOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type GLArea 

type GLArea struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GLArea: GtkGLArea is a widget that allows drawing with OpenGL.

!An example GtkGLArea (glarea.png)

GtkGLArea sets up its own gdk.GLContext, and creates a custom GL framebuffer that the widget will do GL rendering onto. It also ensures that this framebuffer is the default GL rendering target when rendering.

In order to draw, you have to connect to the gtk.GLArea::render signal, or subclass GtkGLArea and override the GtkGLAreaClass.render virtual function.

The GtkGLArea widget ensures that the GdkGLContext is associated with the widget's drawing area, and it is kept updated when the size and position of the drawing area changes.

Drawing with GtkGLArea

The simplest way to draw using OpenGL commands in a GtkGLArea is to create a widget instance and connect to the gtk.GLArea::render signal:

The render() function will be called when the GtkGLArea is ready for you to draw its content: 

static gboolean
render (GtkGLArea *area, GdkGLContext *context)
{
  // inside this function it's safe to use GL; the given
  // GLContext has been made current to the drawable
  // surface used by the GtkGLArea and the viewport has
  // already been set to be the size of the allocation

  // we can start by clearing the buffer
  glClearColor (0, 0, 0, 0);
  glClear (GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);

  // draw your object
  // draw_an_object ();

  // we completed our drawing; the draw commands will be
  // flushed at the end of the signal emission chain, and
  // the buffers will be drawn on the window
  return TRUE;
}

void setup_glarea (void)
{
  // create a GtkGLArea instance
  GtkWidget *gl_area = gtk_gl_area_new ();

  // connect to the "render" signal
  g_signal_connect (gl_area, "render", G_CALLBACK (render), NULL);
}

If you need to initialize OpenGL state, e.g. buffer objects or shaders, you should use the gtk.Widget::realize signal; you can use the gtk.Widget::unrealize signal to clean up. Since the GdkGLContext creation and initialization may fail, you will need to check for errors, using gtk.GLArea.GetError().

An example of how to safely initialize the GL state is: 

static void
on_realize (GtkGLarea *area)
{
  // We need to make the context current if we want to
  // call GL API
  gtk_gl_area_make_current (area);

  // If there were errors during the initialization or
  // when trying to make the context current, this
  // function will return a #GError for you to catch
  if (gtk_gl_area_get_error (area) != NULL)
    return;

  // You can also use gtk_gl_area_set_error() in order
  // to show eventual initialization errors on the
  // GtkGLArea widget itself
  GError *internal_error = NULL;
  init_buffer_objects (&error);
  if (error != NULL)
    {
      gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
      g_error_free (error);
      return;
    }

  init_shaders (&error);
  if (error != NULL)
    {
      gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
      g_error_free (error);
      return;
    }
}

If you need to change the options for creating the GdkGLContext you should use the gtk.GLArea::create-context signal.

func NewGLArea 

func NewGLArea() *GLArea

NewGLArea creates a new GtkGLArea widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • glArea: new GtkGLArea.

func (*GLArea) AttachBuffers 

func (area *GLArea) AttachBuffers()

AttachBuffers binds buffers to the framebuffer.

Ensures that the area framebuffer object is made the current draw and read target, and that all the required buffers for the area are created and bound to the framebuffer.

This function is automatically called before emitting the gtk.GLArea::render signal, and doesn't normally need to be called by application code.

func (*GLArea) AutoRender 

func (area *GLArea) AutoRender() bool

AutoRender returns whether the area is in auto render mode or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the area is auto rendering, FALSE otherwise.

func (*GLArea) ConnectCreateContext 

func (area *GLArea) ConnectCreateContext(f func() (glContext gdk.GLContexter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCreateContext is emitted when the widget is being realized.

This allows you to override how the GL context is created. This is useful when you want to reuse an existing GL context, or if you want to try creating different kinds of GL options.

If context creation fails then the signal handler can use gtk.GLArea.SetError() to register a more detailed error of how the construction failed.

func (*GLArea) ConnectRender 

func (area *GLArea) ConnectRender(f func(context gdk.GLContexter) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRender is emitted every time the contents of the GtkGLArea should be redrawn.

The context is bound to the area prior to emitting this function, and the buffers are painted to the window once the emission terminates.

func (*GLArea) ConnectResize 

func (area *GLArea) ConnectResize(f func(width, height int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectResize is emitted once when the widget is realized, and then each time the widget is changed while realized.

This is useful in order to keep GL state up to date with the widget size, like for instance camera properties which may depend on the width/height ratio.

The GL context for the area is guaranteed to be current when this signal is emitted.

The default handler sets up the GL viewport.

func (*GLArea) Context 

func (area *GLArea) Context() gdk.GLContexter

Context retrieves the GdkGLContext used by area.

The function returns the following values:

  • glContext: GdkGLContext.

func (*GLArea) Error 

func (area *GLArea) Error() error

Error gets the current error set on the area.

The function returns the following values:

  • err (optional) or NULL.

func (*GLArea) HasDepthBuffer 

func (area *GLArea) HasDepthBuffer() bool

HasDepthBuffer returns whether the area has a depth buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the area has a depth buffer, FALSE otherwise.

func (*GLArea) HasStencilBuffer 

func (area *GLArea) HasStencilBuffer() bool

HasStencilBuffer returns whether the area has a stencil buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the area has a stencil buffer, FALSE otherwise.

func (*GLArea) MakeCurrent 

func (area *GLArea) MakeCurrent()

MakeCurrent ensures that the GdkGLContext used by area is associated with the GtkGLArea.

This function is automatically called before emitting the gtk.GLArea::render signal, and doesn't normally need to be called by application code.

func (*GLArea) QueueRender 

func (area *GLArea) QueueRender()

QueueRender marks the currently rendered data (if any) as invalid, and queues a redraw of the widget.

This ensures that the gtk.GLArea::render signal is emitted during the draw.

This is only needed when gtk.GLArea.SetAutoRender() has been called with a FALSE value. The default behaviour is to emit gtk.GLArea::render on each draw.

func (*GLArea) RequiredVersion 

func (area *GLArea) RequiredVersion() (major, minor int)

RequiredVersion retrieves the required version of OpenGL.

See gtk.GLArea.SetRequiredVersion().

The function returns the following values:

  • major: return location for the required major version.
  • minor: return location for the required minor version.

func (*GLArea) SetAutoRender 

func (area *GLArea) SetAutoRender(autoRender bool)

SetAutoRender sets whether the GtkGLArea is in auto render mode.

If auto_render is TRUE the gtk.GLArea::render signal will be emitted every time the widget draws. This is the default and is useful if drawing the widget is faster.

If auto_render is FALSE the data from previous rendering is kept around and will be used for drawing the widget the next time, unless the window is resized. In order to force a rendering gtk.GLArea.QueueRender() must be called. This mode is useful when the scene changes seldom, but takes a long time to redraw.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • autoRender: boolean.

func (*GLArea) SetError 

func (area *GLArea) SetError(err error)

SetError sets an error on the area which will be shown instead of the GL rendering.

This is useful in the gtk.GLArea::create-context signal if GL context creation fails.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • err (optional): new GError, or NULL to unset the error.

func (*GLArea) SetHasDepthBuffer 

func (area *GLArea) SetHasDepthBuffer(hasDepthBuffer bool)

SetHasDepthBuffer sets whether the GtkGLArea should use a depth buffer.

If has_depth_buffer is TRUE the widget will allocate and enable a depth buffer for the target framebuffer. Otherwise there will be none.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasDepthBuffer: TRUE to add a depth buffer.

func (*GLArea) SetHasStencilBuffer 

func (area *GLArea) SetHasStencilBuffer(hasStencilBuffer bool)

SetHasStencilBuffer sets whether the GtkGLArea should use a stencil buffer.

If has_stencil_buffer is TRUE the widget will allocate and enable a stencil buffer for the target framebuffer. Otherwise there will be none.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasStencilBuffer: TRUE to add a stencil buffer.

func (*GLArea) SetRequiredVersion 

func (area *GLArea) SetRequiredVersion(major, minor int)

SetRequiredVersion sets the required version of OpenGL to be used when creating the context for the widget.

This function must be called before the area has been realized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • major version.
  • minor version.

func (*GLArea) SetUseES 

func (area *GLArea) SetUseES(useEs bool)

SetUseES sets whether the area should create an OpenGL or an OpenGL ES context.

You should check the capabilities of the GLContext before drawing with either API.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useEs: whether to use OpenGL or OpenGL ES.

func (*GLArea) UseES 

func (area *GLArea) UseES() bool

UseES returns whether the GtkGLArea should use OpenGL ES.

See gtk.GLArea.SetUseES().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the GtkGLArea should create an OpenGL ES context and FALSE otherwise.

type GLAreaClass added in v0.0.5 

type GLAreaClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GLAreaClass: GtkGLAreaClass structure contains only private data.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type GLAreaOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type GLAreaOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Render func(context gdk.GLContexter) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - width
	//   - height
	//
	Resize func(width, height int)
}

GLAreaOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Gesture 

type Gesture struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Gesture: GtkGesture is the base class for gesture recognition.

Although GtkGesture is quite generalized to serve as a base for multi-touch gestures, it is suitable to implement single-touch and pointer-based gestures (using the special NULL GdkEventSequence value for these).

The number of touches that a GtkGesture need to be recognized is controlled by the gtk.Gesture:n-points property, if a gesture is keeping track of less or more than that number of sequences, it won't check whether the gesture is recognized.

As soon as the gesture has the expected number of touches, it will check regularly if it is recognized, the criteria to consider a gesture as "recognized" is left to GtkGesture subclasses.

A recognized gesture will then emit the following signals:

- gtk.Gesture::begin when the gesture is recognized.

- gtk.Gesture::update, whenever an input event is processed.

- gtk.Gesture::end when the gesture is no longer recognized.

Event propagation

In order to receive events, a gesture needs to set a propagation phase through gtk.EventController.SetPropagationPhase().

In the capture phase, events are propagated from the toplevel down to the target widget, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with the event before it reaches the target.

In the bubble phase, events are propagated up from the target widget to the toplevel, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with events that have not been handled yet.

States of a sequence

Whenever input interaction happens, a single event may trigger a cascade of GtkGestures, both across the parents of the widget receiving the event and in parallel within an individual widget. It is a responsibility of the widgets using those gestures to set the state of touch sequences accordingly in order to enable cooperation of gestures around the GdkEventSequences triggering those.

Within a widget, gestures can be grouped through gtk.Gesture.Group(). Grouped gestures synchronize the state of sequences, so calling gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState() on one will effectively propagate the state throughout the group.

By default, all sequences start out in the GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONE state, sequences in this state trigger the gesture event handler, but event propagation will continue unstopped by gestures.

If a sequence enters into the GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED state, the gesture group will effectively ignore the sequence, letting events go unstopped through the gesture, but the "slot" will still remain occupied while the touch is active.

If a sequence enters in the GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED state, the gesture group will grab all interaction on the sequence, by:

- Setting the same sequence to GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED on every other gesture group within the widget, and every gesture on parent widgets in the propagation chain.

- Emitting gtk.Gesture::cancel on every gesture in widgets underneath in the propagation chain.

- Stopping event propagation after the gesture group handles the event.

Note: if a sequence is set early to GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED on GDK_TOUCH_BEGIN/GDK_BUTTON_PRESS (so those events are captured before reaching the event widget, this implies GTK_PHASE_CAPTURE), one similar event will emulated if the sequence changes to GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED. This way event coherence is preserved before event propagation is unstopped again.

Sequence states can't be changed freely. See gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState() to know about the possible lifetimes of a GdkEventSequence.

Touchpad gestures

On the platforms that support it, GtkGesture will handle transparently touchpad gesture events. The only precautions users of GtkGesture should do to enable this support are:

- If the gesture has GTK_PHASE_NONE, ensuring events of type GDK_TOUCHPAD_SWIPE and GDK_TOUCHPAD_PINCH are handled by the GtkGesture.

func BaseGesture 

func BaseGesture(obj Gesturer) *Gesture

BaseGesture returns the underlying base object.

func (*Gesture) BoundingBox 

func (gesture *Gesture) BoundingBox() (*gdk.Rectangle, bool)

BoundingBox: if there are touch sequences being currently handled by gesture, returns TRUE and fills in rect with the bounding box containing all active touches.

Otherwise, FALSE will be returned.

Note: This function will yield unexpected results on touchpad gestures. Since there is no correlation between physical and pixel distances, these will look as if constrained in an infinitely small area, rect width and height will thus be 0 regardless of the number of touchpoints.

The function returns the following values:

  • rect: bounding box containing all active touches.
  • ok: TRUE if there are active touches, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Gesture) BoundingBoxCenter 

func (gesture *Gesture) BoundingBoxCenter() (x, y float64, ok bool)

BoundingBoxCenter: if there are touch sequences being currently handled by gesture, returns TRUE and fills in x and y with the center of the bounding box containing all active touches.

Otherwise, FALSE will be returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • x: x coordinate for the bounding box center.
  • y: y coordinate for the bounding box center.
  • ok: FALSE if no active touches are present, TRUE otherwise.

func (*Gesture) ConnectBegin 

func (gesture *Gesture) ConnectBegin(f func(sequence *gdk.EventSequence)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBegin is emitted when the gesture is recognized.

This means the number of touch sequences matches gtk.Gesture:n-points.

Note: These conditions may also happen when an extra touch (eg. a third touch on a 2-touches gesture) is lifted, in that situation sequence won't pertain to the current set of active touches, so don't rely on this being true.

func (*Gesture) ConnectCancel 

func (gesture *Gesture) ConnectCancel(f func(sequence *gdk.EventSequence)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCancel is emitted whenever a sequence is cancelled.

This usually happens on active touches when gtk.EventController.Reset() is called on gesture (manually, due to grabs...), or the individual sequence was claimed by parent widgets' controllers (see gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState()).

gesture must forget everything about sequence as in response to this signal.

func (*Gesture) ConnectEnd 

func (gesture *Gesture) ConnectEnd(f func(sequence *gdk.EventSequence)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnd is emitted when gesture either stopped recognizing the event sequences as something to be handled, or the number of touch sequences became higher or lower than gtk.Gesture:n-points.

Note: sequence might not pertain to the group of sequences that were previously triggering recognition on gesture (ie. a just pressed touch sequence that exceeds gtk.Gesture:n-points). This situation may be detected by checking through gtk.Gesture.HandlesSequence().

func (*Gesture) ConnectSequenceStateChanged 

func (gesture *Gesture) ConnectSequenceStateChanged(f func(sequence *gdk.EventSequence, state EventSequenceState)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSequenceStateChanged is emitted whenever a sequence state changes.

See gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState() to know more about the expectable sequence lifetimes.

func (*Gesture) ConnectUpdate 

func (gesture *Gesture) ConnectUpdate(f func(sequence *gdk.EventSequence)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUpdate is emitted whenever an event is handled while the gesture is recognized.

sequence is guaranteed to pertain to the set of active touches.

func (*Gesture) Device 

func (gesture *Gesture) Device() gdk.Devicer

Device returns the logical GdkDevice that is currently operating on gesture.

This returns NULL if the gesture is not being interacted.

The function returns the following values:

  • device (optional): GdkDevice, or NULL.

func (*Gesture) GetGroup 

func (gesture *Gesture) GetGroup() []Gesturer

GetGroup returns all gestures in the group of gesture.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: list of GtkGestures, free with g_list_free().

func (*Gesture) Group 

func (groupGesture *Gesture) Group(gesture Gesturer)

Group adds gesture to the same group than group_gesture.

Gestures are by default isolated in their own groups.

Both gestures must have been added to the same widget before they can be grouped.

When gestures are grouped, the state of GdkEventSequences is kept in sync for all of those, so calling gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState(), on one will transfer the same value to the others.

Groups also perform an "implicit grabbing" of sequences, if a GdkEventSequence state is set to GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED on one group, every other gesture group attached to the same GtkWidget will switch the state for that sequence to GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • gesture: GtkGesture.

func (*Gesture) HandlesSequence 

func (gesture *Gesture) HandlesSequence(sequence *gdk.EventSequence) bool

HandlesSequence returns TRUE if gesture is currently handling events corresponding to sequence.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sequence (optional): GdkEventSequence or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if gesture is handling sequence, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Gesture) IsActive 

func (gesture *Gesture) IsActive() bool

IsActive returns TRUE if the gesture is currently active.

A gesture is active while there are touch sequences interacting with it.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if gesture is active.

func (*Gesture) IsGroupedWith 

func (gesture *Gesture) IsGroupedWith(other Gesturer) bool

IsGroupedWith returns TRUE if both gestures pertain to the same group.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other GtkGesture.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the gestures are grouped.

func (*Gesture) IsRecognized 

func (gesture *Gesture) IsRecognized() bool

IsRecognized returns TRUE if the gesture is currently recognized.

A gesture is recognized if there are as many interacting touch sequences as required by gesture.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if gesture is recognized.

func (*Gesture) LastEvent 

func (gesture *Gesture) LastEvent(sequence *gdk.EventSequence) gdk.Eventer

LastEvent returns the last event that was processed for sequence.

Note that the returned pointer is only valid as long as the sequence is still interpreted by the gesture. If in doubt, you should make a copy of the event.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sequence (optional): GdkEventSequence.

The function returns the following values:

  • event (optional): last event from sequence.

func (*Gesture) LastUpdatedSequence 

func (gesture *Gesture) LastUpdatedSequence() *gdk.EventSequence

LastUpdatedSequence returns the GdkEventSequence that was last updated on gesture.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventSequence (optional): last updated sequence.

func (*Gesture) Point 

func (gesture *Gesture) Point(sequence *gdk.EventSequence) (x, y float64, ok bool)

Point: if sequence is currently being interpreted by gesture, returns TRUE and fills in x and y with the last coordinates stored for that event sequence.

The coordinates are always relative to the widget allocation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sequence (optional): GdkEventSequence, or NULL for pointer events.

The function returns the following values:

  • x (optional): return location for X axis of the sequence coordinates.
  • y (optional): return location for Y axis of the sequence coordinates.
  • ok: TRUE if sequence is currently interpreted.

func (*Gesture) SequenceState 

func (gesture *Gesture) SequenceState(sequence *gdk.EventSequence) EventSequenceState

SequenceState returns the sequence state, as seen by gesture.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sequence: EventSequence.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventSequenceState: sequence state in gesture.

func (*Gesture) Sequences 

func (gesture *Gesture) Sequences() []*gdk.EventSequence

Sequences returns the list of GdkEventSequences currently being interpreted by gesture.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: list of GdkEventSequence, the list elements are owned by GTK and must not be freed or modified, the list itself must be deleted through g_list_free().

func (*Gesture) SetSequenceState 

func (gesture *Gesture) SetSequenceState(sequence *gdk.EventSequence, state EventSequenceState) bool

SetSequenceState sets the state of sequence in gesture.

Sequences start in state GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONE, and whenever they change state, they can never go back to that state. Likewise, sequences in state GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED cannot turn back to a not denied state. With these rules, the lifetime of an event sequence is constrained to the next four:

* None * None → Denied * None → Claimed * None → Claimed → Denied

Note: Due to event handling ordering, it may be unsafe to set the state on another gesture within a gtk.Gesture::begin signal handler, as the callback might be executed before the other gesture knows about the sequence. A safe way to perform this could be: 

static void
first_gesture_begin_cb (GtkGesture       *first_gesture,
                        GdkEventSequence *sequence,
                        gpointer          user_data)
{
  gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (first_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED);
  gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (second_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED);
}

static void
second_gesture_begin_cb (GtkGesture       *second_gesture,
                         GdkEventSequence *sequence,
                         gpointer          user_data)
{
  if (gtk_gesture_get_sequence_state (first_gesture, sequence) == GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED)
    gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (second_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED);
}

If both gestures are in the same group, just set the state on the gesture emitting the event, the sequence will be already be initialized to the group's global state when the second gesture processes the event.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sequence: GdkEventSequence.
  • state: sequence state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if sequence is handled by gesture, and the state is changed successfully.

func (*Gesture) SetState 

func (gesture *Gesture) SetState(state EventSequenceState) bool

SetState sets the state of all sequences that gesture is currently interacting with.

See gtk.Gesture.SetSequenceState() for more details on sequence states.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • state: sequence state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the state of at least one sequence was changed successfully.

func (*Gesture) Ungroup 

func (gesture *Gesture) Ungroup()

Ungroup separates gesture into an isolated group.

type GestureClick 

type GestureClick struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureClick: GtkGestureClick is a GtkGesture implementation for clicks.

It is able to recognize multiple clicks on a nearby zone, which can be listened for through the gtk.GestureClick::pressed signal. Whenever time or distance between clicks exceed the GTK defaults, gtk.GestureClick::stopped is emitted, and the click counter is reset.

func NewGestureClick 

func NewGestureClick() *GestureClick

NewGestureClick returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes single and multiple presses.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureClick: newly created GtkGestureClick.

func (*GestureClick) ConnectPressed 

func (v *GestureClick) ConnectPressed(f func(nPress int, x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPressed is emitted whenever a button or touch press happens.

func (*GestureClick) ConnectReleased 

func (v *GestureClick) ConnectReleased(f func(nPress int, x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectReleased is emitted when a button or touch is released.

n_press will report the number of press that is paired to this event, note that gtk.GestureClick::stopped may have been emitted between the press and its release, n_press will only start over at the next press.

func (*GestureClick) ConnectStopped 

func (v *GestureClick) ConnectStopped(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStopped is emitted whenever any time/distance threshold has been exceeded.

func (*GestureClick) ConnectUnpairedRelease 

func (v *GestureClick) ConnectUnpairedRelease(f func(x, y float64, button uint, sequence *gdk.EventSequence)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnpairedRelease is emitted whenever the gesture receives a release event that had no previous corresponding press.

Due to implicit grabs, this can only happen on situations where input is grabbed elsewhere mid-press or the pressed widget voluntarily relinquishes its implicit grab.

type GestureDrag 

type GestureDrag struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureDrag: GtkGestureDrag is a GtkGesture implementation for drags.

The drag operation itself can be tracked throughout the gtk.GestureDrag::drag-begin, gtk.GestureDrag::drag-update and gtk.GestureDrag::drag-end signals, and the relevant coordinates can be extracted through gtk.GestureDrag.GetOffset() and gtk.GestureDrag.GetStartPoint().

func NewGestureDrag 

func NewGestureDrag() *GestureDrag

NewGestureDrag returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes drags.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureDrag: newly created GtkGestureDrag.

func (*GestureDrag) ConnectDragBegin 

func (gesture *GestureDrag) ConnectDragBegin(f func(startX, startY float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragBegin is emitted whenever dragging starts.

func (*GestureDrag) ConnectDragEnd 

func (gesture *GestureDrag) ConnectDragEnd(f func(offsetX, offsetY float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragEnd is emitted whenever the dragging is finished.

func (*GestureDrag) ConnectDragUpdate 

func (gesture *GestureDrag) ConnectDragUpdate(f func(offsetX, offsetY float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDragUpdate is emitted whenever the dragging point moves.

func (*GestureDrag) Offset 

func (gesture *GestureDrag) Offset() (x, y float64, ok bool)

Offset gets the offset from the start point.

If the gesture is active, this function returns TRUE and fills in x and y with the coordinates of the current point, as an offset to the starting drag point.

The function returns the following values:

  • x (optional): x offset for the current point.
  • y (optional): y offset for the current point.
  • ok: TRUE if the gesture is active.

func (*GestureDrag) StartPoint 

func (gesture *GestureDrag) StartPoint() (x, y float64, ok bool)

StartPoint gets the point where the drag started.

If the gesture is active, this function returns TRUE and fills in x and y with the drag start coordinates, in surface-relative coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • x (optional): x coordinate for the drag start point.
  • y (optional): y coordinate for the drag start point.
  • ok: TRUE if the gesture is active.

type GestureLongPress 

type GestureLongPress struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureLongPress: GtkGestureLongPress is a GtkGesture for long presses.

This gesture is also known as “Press and Hold”.

When the timeout is exceeded, the gesture is triggering the gtk.GestureLongPress::pressed signal.

If the touchpoint is lifted before the timeout passes, or if it drifts too far of the initial press point, the gtk.GestureLongPress::cancelled signal will be emitted.

How long the timeout is before the ::pressed signal gets emitted is determined by the gtk.Settings:gtk-long-press-time setting. It can be modified by the gtk.GestureLongPress:delay-factor property.

func NewGestureLongPress 

func NewGestureLongPress() *GestureLongPress

NewGestureLongPress returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes long presses.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureLongPress: newly created GtkGestureLongPress.

func (*GestureLongPress) ConnectCancelled 

func (gesture *GestureLongPress) ConnectCancelled(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCancelled is emitted whenever a press moved too far, or was released before gtk.GestureLongPress::pressed happened.

func (*GestureLongPress) ConnectPressed 

func (gesture *GestureLongPress) ConnectPressed(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPressed is emitted whenever a press goes unmoved/unreleased longer than what the GTK defaults tell.

func (*GestureLongPress) DelayFactor 

func (gesture *GestureLongPress) DelayFactor() float64

DelayFactor returns the delay factor.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: delay factor.

func (*GestureLongPress) SetDelayFactor 

func (gesture *GestureLongPress) SetDelayFactor(delayFactor float64)

SetDelayFactor applies the given delay factor.

The default long press time will be multiplied by this value. Valid values are in the range [0.5..2.0].

The function takes the following parameters:

  • delayFactor: delay factor to apply.

type GesturePan 

type GesturePan struct {
	GestureDrag
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GesturePan: GtkGesturePan is a GtkGesture for pan gestures.

These are drags that are locked to happen along one axis. The axis that a GtkGesturePan handles is defined at construct time, and can be changed through gtk.GesturePan.SetOrientation().

When the gesture starts to be recognized, GtkGesturePan will attempt to determine as early as possible whether the sequence is moving in the expected direction, and denying the sequence if this does not happen.

Once a panning gesture along the expected axis is recognized, the gtk.GesturePan::pan signal will be emitted as input events are received, containing the offset in the given axis.

func NewGesturePan 

func NewGesturePan(orientation Orientation) *GesturePan

NewGesturePan returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes pan gestures.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: expected orientation.

The function returns the following values:

  • gesturePan: newly created GtkGesturePan.

func (*GesturePan) ConnectPan 

func (gesture *GesturePan) ConnectPan(f func(direction PanDirection, offset float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPan is emitted once a panning gesture along the expected axis is detected.

func (*GesturePan) Orientation 

func (gesture *GesturePan) Orientation() Orientation

Orientation returns the orientation of the pan gestures that this gesture expects.

The function returns the following values:

  • orientation: expected orientation for pan gestures.

func (*GesturePan) SetOrientation 

func (gesture *GesturePan) SetOrientation(orientation Orientation)

SetOrientation sets the orientation to be expected on pan gestures.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: expected orientation.

type GestureRotate 

type GestureRotate struct {
	Gesture
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureRotate: GtkGestureRotate is a GtkGesture for 2-finger rotations.

Whenever the angle between both handled sequences changes, the gtk.GestureRotate::angle-changed signal is emitted.

func NewGestureRotate 

func NewGestureRotate() *GestureRotate

NewGestureRotate returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes 2-touch rotation gestures.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureRotate: newly created GtkGestureRotate.

func (*GestureRotate) AngleDelta 

func (gesture *GestureRotate) AngleDelta() float64

AngleDelta gets the angle delta in radians.

If gesture is active, this function returns the angle difference in radians since the gesture was first recognized. If gesture is not active, 0 is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: angle delta in radians.

func (*GestureRotate) ConnectAngleChanged 

func (gesture *GestureRotate) ConnectAngleChanged(f func(angle, angleDelta float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAngleChanged is emitted when the angle between both tracked points changes.

type GestureSingle 

type GestureSingle struct {
	Gesture
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureSingle: GtkGestureSingle is a GtkGestures subclass optimized for singe-touch and mouse gestures.

Under interaction, these gestures stick to the first interacting sequence, which is accessible through gtk.GestureSingle.GetCurrentSequence() while the gesture is being interacted with.

By default gestures react to both GDK_BUTTON_PRIMARY and touch events. gtk.GestureSingle.SetTouchOnly() can be used to change the touch behavior. Callers may also specify a different mouse button number to interact with through gtk.GestureSingle.SetButton(), or react to any mouse button by setting it to 0. While the gesture is active, the button being currently pressed can be known through gtk.GestureSingle.GetCurrentButton().

func (*GestureSingle) Button 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) Button() uint

Button returns the button number gesture listens for.

If this is 0, the gesture reacts to any button press.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: button number, or 0 for any button.

func (*GestureSingle) CurrentButton 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) CurrentButton() uint

CurrentButton returns the button number currently interacting with gesture, or 0 if there is none.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: current button number.

func (*GestureSingle) CurrentSequence 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) CurrentSequence() *gdk.EventSequence

CurrentSequence returns the event sequence currently interacting with gesture.

This is only meaningful if gtk.Gesture.IsActive() returns TRUE.

The function returns the following values:

  • eventSequence (optional): current sequence.

func (*GestureSingle) Exclusive 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) Exclusive() bool

Exclusive gets whether a gesture is exclusive.

For more information, see gtk.GestureSingle.SetExclusive().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the gesture is exclusive.

func (*GestureSingle) SetButton 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) SetButton(button uint)

SetButton sets the button number gesture listens to.

If non-0, every button press from a different button number will be ignored. Touch events implicitly match with button 1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • button number to listen to, or 0 for any button.

func (*GestureSingle) SetExclusive 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) SetExclusive(exclusive bool)

SetExclusive sets whether gesture is exclusive.

An exclusive gesture will only handle pointer and "pointer emulated" touch events, so at any given time, there is only one sequence able to interact with those.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • exclusive: TRUE to make gesture exclusive.

func (*GestureSingle) SetTouchOnly 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) SetTouchOnly(touchOnly bool)

SetTouchOnly sets whether to handle only touch events.

If touch_only is TRUE, gesture will only handle events of type GDK_TOUCH_BEGIN, GDK_TOUCH_UPDATE or GDK_TOUCH_END. If FALSE, mouse events will be handled too.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • touchOnly: whether gesture handles only touch events.

func (*GestureSingle) TouchOnly 

func (gesture *GestureSingle) TouchOnly() bool

TouchOnly returns TRUE if the gesture is only triggered by touch events.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the gesture only handles touch events.

type GestureStylus 

type GestureStylus struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureStylus: GtkGestureStylus is a GtkGesture specific to stylus input.

The provided signals just relay the basic information of the stylus events.

func NewGestureStylus 

func NewGestureStylus() *GestureStylus

NewGestureStylus creates a new GtkGestureStylus.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureStylus: newly created stylus gesture.

func (*GestureStylus) Axis 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) Axis(axis gdk.AxisUse) (float64, bool)

Axis returns the current value for the requested axis.

This function must be called from the handler of one of the gtk.GestureStylus::down, gtk.GestureStylus::motion, gtk.GestureStylus::up or gtk.GestureStylus::proximity signals.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • axis: requested device axis.

The function returns the following values:

  • value: return location for the axis value.
  • ok: TRUE if there is a current value for the axis.

func (*GestureStylus) Backlog 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) Backlog() ([]gdk.TimeCoord, bool)

Backlog returns the accumulated backlog of tracking information.

By default, GTK will limit rate of input events. On stylus input where accuracy of strokes is paramount, this function returns the accumulated coordinate/timing state before the emission of the current [Gtk.GestureStylus::motion] signal.

This function may only be called within a gtk.GestureStylus::motion signal handler, the state given in this signal and obtainable through gtk.GestureStylus.GetAxis() express the latest (most up-to-date) state in motion history.

The backlog is provided in chronological order.

The function returns the following values:

  • backlog coordinates and times for the backlog events.
  • ok: TRUE if there is a backlog to unfold in the current state.

func (*GestureStylus) ConnectDown 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) ConnectDown(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDown is emitted when the stylus touches the device.

func (*GestureStylus) ConnectMotion 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) ConnectMotion(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMotion is emitted when the stylus moves while touching the device.

func (*GestureStylus) ConnectProximity 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) ConnectProximity(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectProximity is emitted when the stylus is in proximity of the device.

func (*GestureStylus) ConnectUp 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) ConnectUp(f func(x, y float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUp is emitted when the stylus no longer touches the device.

func (*GestureStylus) DeviceTool 

func (gesture *GestureStylus) DeviceTool() *gdk.DeviceTool

DeviceTool returns the GdkDeviceTool currently driving input through this gesture.

This function must be called from the handler of one of the gtk.GestureStylus::down, gtk.GestureStylus::motion, gtk.GestureStylus::up or gtk.GestureStylus::proximity signals.

The function returns the following values:

  • deviceTool (optional): current stylus tool.

type GestureSwipe 

type GestureSwipe struct {
	GestureSingle
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureSwipe: GtkGestureSwipe is a GtkGesture for swipe gestures.

After a press/move/.../move/release sequence happens, the gtk.GestureSwipe::swipe signal will be emitted, providing the velocity and directionality of the sequence at the time it was lifted.

If the velocity is desired in intermediate points, gtk.GestureSwipe.GetVelocity() can be called in a gtk.Gesture::update handler.

All velocities are reported in pixels/sec units.

func NewGestureSwipe 

func NewGestureSwipe() *GestureSwipe

NewGestureSwipe returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes swipes.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureSwipe: newly created GtkGestureSwipe.

func (*GestureSwipe) ConnectSwipe 

func (gesture *GestureSwipe) ConnectSwipe(f func(velocityX, velocityY float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSwipe is emitted when the recognized gesture is finished.

Velocity and direction are a product of previously recorded events.

func (*GestureSwipe) Velocity 

func (gesture *GestureSwipe) Velocity() (velocityX, velocityY float64, ok bool)

Velocity gets the current velocity.

If the gesture is recognized, this function returns TRUE and fills in velocity_x and velocity_y with the recorded velocity, as per the last events processed.

The function returns the following values:

  • velocityX: return value for the velocity in the X axis, in pixels/sec.
  • velocityY: return value for the velocity in the Y axis, in pixels/sec.
  • ok: whether velocity could be calculated.

type GestureZoom 

type GestureZoom struct {
	Gesture
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GestureZoom: GtkGestureZoom is a GtkGesture for 2-finger pinch/zoom gestures.

Whenever the distance between both tracked sequences changes, the gtk.GestureZoom::scale-changed signal is emitted to report the scale factor.

func NewGestureZoom 

func NewGestureZoom() *GestureZoom

NewGestureZoom returns a newly created GtkGesture that recognizes pinch/zoom gestures.

The function returns the following values:

  • gestureZoom: newly created GtkGestureZoom.

func (*GestureZoom) ConnectScaleChanged 

func (gesture *GestureZoom) ConnectScaleChanged(f func(scale float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectScaleChanged is emitted whenever the distance between both tracked sequences changes.

func (*GestureZoom) ScaleDelta 

func (gesture *GestureZoom) ScaleDelta() float64

ScaleDelta gets the scale delta.

If gesture is active, this function returns the zooming difference since the gesture was recognized (hence the starting point is considered 1:1). If gesture is not active, 1 is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: scale delta.

type Gesturer 

type Gesturer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

Gesturer describes types inherited from class Gesture.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type Grid 

type Grid struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Grid: GtkGrid is a container which arranges its child widgets in rows and columns.

!An example GtkGrid (grid.png)

It supports arbitrary positions and horizontal/vertical spans.

Children are added using gtk.Grid.Attach(). They can span multiple rows or columns. It is also possible to add a child next to an existing child, using gtk.Grid.AttachNextTo(). To remove a child from the grid, use gtk.Grid.Remove().

The behaviour of GtkGrid when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.

GtkGrid as GtkBuildable

Every child in a GtkGrid has access to a custom gtk.Buildable element, called ´<layout>´. It can by used to specify a position in the grid and optionally spans. All properties that can be used in the ´<layout>´ element are implemented by gtk.GridLayoutChild.

It is implemented by GtkWidget using gtk.LayoutManager.

To showcase it, here is a simple example: 

<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
      <property name="label">Button 1</property>
      <layout>
        <property name="column">0</property>
        <property name="row">0</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button2">
      <property name="label">Button 2</property>
      <layout>
        <property name="column">1</property>
        <property name="row">0</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button3">
      <property name="label">Button 3</property>
      <layout>
        <property name="column">2</property>
        <property name="row">0</property>
        <property name="row-span">2</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkButton" id="button4">
      <property name="label">Button 4</property>
      <layout>
        <property name="column">0</property>
        <property name="row">1</property>
        <property name="column-span">2</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

It organizes the first two buttons side-by-side in one cell each. The third button is in the last column but spans across two rows. This is defined by the ´row-span´ property. The last button is located in the second row and spans across two columns, which is defined by the ´column-span´ property.

CSS nodes

GtkGrid uses a single CSS node with name grid.

Accessibility

GtkGrid uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewGrid 

func NewGrid() *Grid

NewGrid creates a new grid widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • grid: new GtkGrid.

func (*Grid) Attach 

func (grid *Grid) Attach(child Widgetter, column, row, width, height int)

Attach adds a widget to the grid.

The position of child is determined by column and row. The number of “cells” that child will occupy is determined by width and height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.
  • column number to attach the left side of child to.
  • row number to attach the top side of child to.
  • width: number of columns that child will span.
  • height: number of rows that child will span.

func (*Grid) AttachNextTo 

func (grid *Grid) AttachNextTo(child, sibling Widgetter, side PositionType, width, height int)

AttachNextTo adds a widget to the grid.

The widget is placed next to sibling, on the side determined by side. When sibling is NULL, the widget is placed in row (for left or right placement) or column 0 (for top or bottom placement), at the end indicated by side.

Attaching widgets labeled [1], [2], [3] with sibling == NULL and side == GTK_POS_LEFT yields a layout of [3][2][1].

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.
  • sibling (optional): child of grid that child will be placed next to, or NULL to place child at the beginning or end.
  • side of sibling that child is positioned next to.
  • width: number of columns that child will span.
  • height: number of rows that child will span.

func (*Grid) BaselineRow 

func (grid *Grid) BaselineRow() int

BaselineRow returns which row defines the global baseline of grid.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: row index defining the global baseline.

func (*Grid) ChildAt 

func (grid *Grid) ChildAt(column, row int) Widgetter

ChildAt gets the child of grid whose area covers the grid cell at column, row.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: left edge of the cell.
  • row: top edge of the cell.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child at the given position, or NULL.

func (*Grid) ColumnHomogeneous 

func (grid *Grid) ColumnHomogeneous() bool

ColumnHomogeneous returns whether all columns of grid have the same width.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether all columns of grid have the same width.

func (*Grid) ColumnSpacing 

func (grid *Grid) ColumnSpacing() uint

ColumnSpacing returns the amount of space between the columns of grid.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: column spacing of grid.

func (*Grid) InsertColumn 

func (grid *Grid) InsertColumn(position int)

InsertColumn inserts a column at the specified position.

Children which are attached at or to the right of this position are moved one column to the right. Children which span across this position are grown to span the new column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to insert the column at.

func (*Grid) InsertNextTo 

func (grid *Grid) InsertNextTo(sibling Widgetter, side PositionType)

InsertNextTo inserts a row or column at the specified position.

The new row or column is placed next to sibling, on the side determined by side. If side is GTK_POS_TOP or GTK_POS_BOTTOM, a row is inserted. If side is GTK_POS_LEFT of GTK_POS_RIGHT, a column is inserted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sibling: child of grid that the new row or column will be placed next to.
  • side of sibling that child is positioned next to.

func (*Grid) InsertRow 

func (grid *Grid) InsertRow(position int)

InsertRow inserts a row at the specified position.

Children which are attached at or below this position are moved one row down. Children which span across this position are grown to span the new row.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to insert the row at.

func (*Grid) QueryChild 

func (grid *Grid) QueryChild(child Widgetter) (column, row, width, height int)

QueryChild queries the attach points and spans of child inside the given GtkGrid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget child of grid.

The function returns the following values:

  • column (optional) used to attach the left side of child.
  • row (optional) used to attach the top side of child.
  • width (optional): number of columns child spans.
  • height (optional): number of rows child spans.

func (*Grid) Remove 

func (grid *Grid) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from grid.

The child must have been added with gtk.Grid.Attach() or gtk.Grid.AttachNextTo().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child widget to remove.

func (*Grid) RemoveColumn 

func (grid *Grid) RemoveColumn(position int)

RemoveColumn removes a column from the grid.

Children that are placed in this column are removed, spanning children that overlap this column have their width reduced by one, and children after the column are moved to the left.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the column to remove.

func (*Grid) RemoveRow 

func (grid *Grid) RemoveRow(position int)

RemoveRow removes a row from the grid.

Children that are placed in this row are removed, spanning children that overlap this row have their height reduced by one, and children below the row are moved up.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the row to remove.

func (*Grid) RowBaselinePosition 

func (grid *Grid) RowBaselinePosition(row int) BaselinePosition

RowBaselinePosition returns the baseline position of row.

See gtk.Grid.SetRowBaselinePosition().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: baseline position of row.

func (*Grid) RowHomogeneous 

func (grid *Grid) RowHomogeneous() bool

RowHomogeneous returns whether all rows of grid have the same height.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether all rows of grid have the same height.

func (*Grid) RowSpacing 

func (grid *Grid) RowSpacing() uint

RowSpacing returns the amount of space between the rows of grid.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: row spacing of grid.

func (*Grid) SetBaselineRow 

func (grid *Grid) SetBaselineRow(row int)

SetBaselineRow sets which row defines the global baseline for the entire grid.

Each row in the grid can have its own local baseline, but only one of those is global, meaning it will be the baseline in the parent of the grid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.

func (*Grid) SetColumnHomogeneous 

func (grid *Grid) SetColumnHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetColumnHomogeneous sets whether all columns of grid will have the same width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to make columns homogeneous.

func (*Grid) SetColumnSpacing 

func (grid *Grid) SetColumnSpacing(spacing uint)

SetColumnSpacing sets the amount of space between columns of grid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: amount of space to insert between columns.

func (*Grid) SetRowBaselinePosition 

func (grid *Grid) SetRowBaselinePosition(row int, pos BaselinePosition)

SetRowBaselinePosition sets how the baseline should be positioned on row of the grid, in case that row is assigned more space than is requested.

The default baseline position is GTK_BASELINE_POSITION_CENTER.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.
  • pos: GtkBaselinePosition.

func (*Grid) SetRowHomogeneous 

func (grid *Grid) SetRowHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetRowHomogeneous sets whether all rows of grid will have the same height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to make rows homogeneous.

func (*Grid) SetRowSpacing 

func (grid *Grid) SetRowSpacing(spacing uint)

SetRowSpacing sets the amount of space between rows of grid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: amount of space to insert between rows.

type GridClass added in v0.0.5 

type GridClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*GridClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (g *GridClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type GridLayout 

type GridLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridLayout: GtkGridLayout is a layout manager which arranges child widgets in rows and columns.

Children have an "attach point" defined by the horizontal and vertical index of the cell they occupy; children can span multiple rows or columns. The layout properties for setting the attach points and spans are set using the gtk.GridLayoutChild associated to each child widget.

The behaviour of GtkGridLayout when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.

GtkGridLayout can be used like a GtkBoxLayout if all children are attached to the same row or column; however, if you only ever need a single row or column, you should consider using GtkBoxLayout.

func NewGridLayout 

func NewGridLayout() *GridLayout

NewGridLayout creates a new GtkGridLayout.

The function returns the following values:

  • gridLayout: newly created GtkGridLayout.

func (*GridLayout) BaselineRow 

func (grid *GridLayout) BaselineRow() int

BaselineRow retrieves the row set with gtk_grid_layout_set_baseline_row().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: global baseline row.

func (*GridLayout) ColumnHomogeneous 

func (grid *GridLayout) ColumnHomogeneous() bool

ColumnHomogeneous checks whether all columns of grid should have the same width.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the columns are homogeneous, and FALSE otherwise.

func (*GridLayout) ColumnSpacing 

func (grid *GridLayout) ColumnSpacing() uint

ColumnSpacing retrieves the spacing set with gtk_grid_layout_set_column_spacing().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: spacing between consecutive columns.

func (*GridLayout) RowBaselinePosition 

func (grid *GridLayout) RowBaselinePosition(row int) BaselinePosition

RowBaselinePosition returns the baseline position of row.

If no value has been set with gtk.GridLayout.SetRowBaselinePosition(), the default value of GTK_BASELINE_POSITION_CENTER is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.

The function returns the following values:

  • baselinePosition: baseline position of row.

func (*GridLayout) RowHomogeneous 

func (grid *GridLayout) RowHomogeneous() bool

RowHomogeneous checks whether all rows of grid should have the same height.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the rows are homogeneous, and FALSE otherwise.

func (*GridLayout) RowSpacing 

func (grid *GridLayout) RowSpacing() uint

RowSpacing retrieves the spacing set with gtk_grid_layout_set_row_spacing().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: spacing between consecutive rows.

func (*GridLayout) SetBaselineRow 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetBaselineRow(row int)

SetBaselineRow sets which row defines the global baseline for the entire grid.

Each row in the grid can have its own local baseline, but only one of those is global, meaning it will be the baseline in the parent of the grid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.

func (*GridLayout) SetColumnHomogeneous 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetColumnHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetColumnHomogeneous sets whether all columns of grid should have the same width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to make columns homogeneous.

func (*GridLayout) SetColumnSpacing 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetColumnSpacing(spacing uint)

SetColumnSpacing sets the amount of space to insert between consecutive columns.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: amount of space between columns, in pixels.

func (*GridLayout) SetRowBaselinePosition 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetRowBaselinePosition(row int, pos BaselinePosition)

SetRowBaselinePosition sets how the baseline should be positioned on row of the grid, in case that row is assigned more space than is requested.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row index.
  • pos: GtkBaselinePosition.

func (*GridLayout) SetRowHomogeneous 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetRowHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

SetRowHomogeneous sets whether all rows of grid should have the same height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • homogeneous: TRUE to make rows homogeneous.

func (*GridLayout) SetRowSpacing 

func (grid *GridLayout) SetRowSpacing(spacing uint)

SetRowSpacing sets the amount of space to insert between consecutive rows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: amount of space between rows, in pixels.

type GridLayoutChild 

type GridLayoutChild struct {
	LayoutChild
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridLayoutChild: GtkLayoutChild subclass for children in a GtkGridLayout.

func (*GridLayoutChild) Column 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) Column() int

Column retrieves the column number to which child attaches its left side.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column number.

func (*GridLayoutChild) ColumnSpan 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) ColumnSpan() int

ColumnSpan retrieves the number of columns that child spans to.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns.

func (*GridLayoutChild) Row 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) Row() int

Row retrieves the row number to which child attaches its top side.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: row number.

func (*GridLayoutChild) RowSpan 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) RowSpan() int

RowSpan retrieves the number of rows that child spans to.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of row.

func (*GridLayoutChild) SetColumn 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) SetColumn(column int)

SetColumn sets the column number to attach the left side of child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: attach point for child.

func (*GridLayoutChild) SetColumnSpan 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) SetColumnSpan(span int)

SetColumnSpan sets the number of columns child spans to.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • span of child.

func (*GridLayoutChild) SetRow 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) SetRow(row int)

SetRow sets the row to place child in.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row for child.

func (*GridLayoutChild) SetRowSpan 

func (child *GridLayoutChild) SetRowSpan(span int)

SetRowSpan sets the number of rows child spans to.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • span of child.

type GridLayoutChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type GridLayoutChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridLayoutChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*GridLayoutChildClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (g *GridLayoutChildClass) ParentClass() *LayoutChildClass

type GridLayoutChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type GridLayoutChildOverrides struct {
}

GridLayoutChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type GridLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type GridLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*GridLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (g *GridLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type GridLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type GridLayoutOverrides struct {
}

GridLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type GridOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type GridOverrides struct {
}

GridOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type GridView 

type GridView struct {
	ListBase
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

GridView: GtkGridView presents a large dynamic grid of items.

GtkGridView uses its factory to generate one child widget for each visible item and shows them in a grid. The orientation of the grid view determines if the grid reflows vertically or horizontally.

GtkGridView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on _rubberband selection_, using gtk.GridView:enable-rubberband.

To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview (section-list-widget.html).

CSS nodes 

gridview
├── child
│
├── child
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]

GtkGridView uses a single CSS node with name gridview. Each child uses a single CSS node with name child. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.

Accessibility

GtkGridView uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID role, and the items use the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELL role.

func NewGridView 

func NewGridView(model SelectionModeller, factory *ListItemFactory) *GridView

NewGridView creates a new GtkGridView that uses the given factory for mapping items to widgets.

The function takes ownership of the arguments, so you can write code like 

grid_view = gtk_grid_view_new (create_model (),
  gtk_builder_list_item_factory_new_from_resource ("/resource.ui"));.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use, or NULL.
  • factory (optional) to populate items with, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • gridView: new GtkGridView using the given model and factory.

func (*GridView) ConnectActivate 

func (self *GridView) ConnectActivate(f func(position uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when a cell has been activated by the user, usually via activating the GtkGridView|list.activate-item action.

This allows for a convenient way to handle activation in a gridview. See gtk.ListItem:activatable for details on how to use this signal.

func (*GridView) EnableRubberband 

func (self *GridView) EnableRubberband() bool

EnableRubberband returns whether rows can be selected by dragging with the mouse.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rubberband selection is enabled.

func (*GridView) Factory 

func (self *GridView) Factory() *ListItemFactory

Factory gets the factory that's currently used to populate list items.

The function returns the following values:

  • listItemFactory (optional): factory in use.

func (*GridView) MaxColumns 

func (self *GridView) MaxColumns() uint

MaxColumns gets the maximum number of columns that the grid will use.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: maximum number of columns.

func (*GridView) MinColumns 

func (self *GridView) MinColumns() uint

MinColumns gets the minimum number of columns that the grid will use.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: minimum number of columns.

func (*GridView) Model 

func (self *GridView) Model() *SelectionModel

Model gets the model that's currently used to read the items displayed.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionModel (optional): model in use.

func (*GridView) SetEnableRubberband 

func (self *GridView) SetEnableRubberband(enableRubberband bool)

SetEnableRubberband sets whether selections can be changed by dragging with the mouse.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableRubberband: TRUE to enable rubberband selection.

func (*GridView) SetFactory 

func (self *GridView) SetFactory(factory *ListItemFactory)

SetFactory sets the GtkListItemFactory to use for populating list items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factory (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*GridView) SetMaxColumns 

func (self *GridView) SetMaxColumns(maxColumns uint)

SetMaxColumns sets the maximum number of columns to use.

This number must be at least 1.

If max_columns is smaller than the minimum set via gtk.GridView.SetMinColumns(), that value is used instead.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • maxColumns: maximum number of columns.

func (*GridView) SetMinColumns 

func (self *GridView) SetMinColumns(minColumns uint)

SetMinColumns sets the minimum number of columns to use.

This number must be at least 1.

If min_columns is smaller than the minimum set via gtk.GridView.SetMaxColumns(), that value is ignored.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • minColumns: minimum number of columns.

func (*GridView) SetModel 

func (self *GridView) SetModel(model SelectionModeller)

SetModel sets the imodel to use.

This must be a gtk.SelectionModel.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*GridView) SetSingleClickActivate 

func (self *GridView) SetSingleClickActivate(singleClickActivate bool)

SetSingleClickActivate sets whether items should be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • singleClickActivate: TRUE to activate items on single click.

func (*GridView) SingleClickActivate 

func (self *GridView) SingleClickActivate() bool

SingleClickActivate returns whether items will be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if items are activated on single click.

type HeaderBar 

type HeaderBar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

HeaderBar: GtkHeaderBar is a widget for creating custom title bars for windows.

!An example GtkHeaderBar (headerbar.png)

GtkHeaderBar is similar to a horizontal GtkCenterBox. It allows children to be placed at the start or the end. In addition, it allows the window title to be displayed. The title will be centered with respect to the width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.

GtkHeaderBar can add typical window frame controls, such as minimize, maximize and close buttons, or the window icon.

For these reasons, GtkHeaderBar is the natural choice for use as the custom titlebar widget of a `GtkWindow (see gtk.Window.SetTitlebar()), as it gives features typical of titlebars while allowing the addition of child widgets.

GtkHeaderBar as GtkBuildable

The GtkHeaderBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding children at the start or end sides by specifying “start” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element, or setting the title widget by specifying “title” value.

By default the GtkHeaderBar uses a GtkLabel displaying the title of the window it is contained in as the title widget, equivalent to the following UI definition: 

<object class="GtkHeaderBar">
  <property name="title-widget">
    <object class="GtkLabel">
      <property name="label" translatable="yes">Label</property>
      <property name="single-line-mode">True</property>
      <property name="ellipsize">end</property>
      <property name="width-chars">5</property>
      <style>
        <class name="title"/>
      </style>
    </object>
  </property>
</object>

CSS nodes 

headerbar
╰── windowhandle
    ╰── box
        ├── box.start
        │   ├── windowcontrols.start
        │   ╰── [other children]
        ├── [Title Widget]
        ╰── box.end
            ├── [other children]
            ╰── windowcontrols.end

A GtkHeaderBar's CSS node is called headerbar. It contains a windowhandle subnode, which contains a box subnode, which contains two box subnodes at the start and end of the header bar, as well as a center node that represents the title.

Each of the boxes contains a windowcontrols subnode, see gtk.WindowControls for details, as well as other children.

Accessibility

GtkHeaderBar uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewHeaderBar 

func NewHeaderBar() *HeaderBar

NewHeaderBar creates a new GtkHeaderBar widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • headerBar: new GtkHeaderBar.

func (*HeaderBar) DecorationLayout 

func (bar *HeaderBar) DecorationLayout() string

DecorationLayout gets the decoration layout of the GtkHeaderBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): decoration layout.

func (*HeaderBar) PackEnd 

func (bar *HeaderBar) PackEnd(child Widgetter)

PackEnd adds child to bar, packed with reference to the end of the bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to be added to bar.

func (*HeaderBar) PackStart 

func (bar *HeaderBar) PackStart(child Widgetter)

PackStart adds child to bar, packed with reference to the start of the bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to be added to bar.

func (*HeaderBar) Remove 

func (bar *HeaderBar) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from the GtkHeaderBar.

The child must have been added with gtk.HeaderBar.PackStart(), gtk.HeaderBar.PackEnd() or gtk.HeaderBar.SetTitleWidget().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.

func (*HeaderBar) SetDecorationLayout 

func (bar *HeaderBar) SetDecorationLayout(layout string)

SetDecorationLayout sets the decoration layout for this header bar.

This property overrides the gtk.Settings:gtk-decoration-layout setting.

There can be valid reasons for overriding the setting, such as a header bar design that does not allow for buttons to take room on the right, or only offers room for a single close button. Split header bars are another example for overriding the setting.

The format of the string is button names, separated by commas. A colon separates the buttons that should appear on the left from those on the right. Recognized button names are minimize, maximize, close and icon (the window icon).

For example, “icon:minimize,maximize,close” specifies a icon on the left, and minimize, maximize and close buttons on the right.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • layout (optional): decoration layout, or NULL to unset the layout.

func (*HeaderBar) SetShowTitleButtons 

func (bar *HeaderBar) SetShowTitleButtons(setting bool)

SetShowTitleButtons sets whether this header bar shows the standard window title buttons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to show standard title buttons.

func (*HeaderBar) SetTitleWidget 

func (bar *HeaderBar) SetTitleWidget(titleWidget Widgetter)

SetTitleWidget sets the title for the GtkHeaderBar.

When set to NULL, the headerbar will display the title of the window it is contained in.

The title should help a user identify the current view. To achieve the same style as the builtin title, use the “title” style class.

You should set the title widget to NULL, for the window title label to be visible again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • titleWidget (optional): widget to use for a title.

func (*HeaderBar) ShowTitleButtons 

func (bar *HeaderBar) ShowTitleButtons() bool

ShowTitleButtons returns whether this header bar shows the standard window title buttons.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if title buttons are shown.

func (*HeaderBar) TitleWidget 

func (bar *HeaderBar) TitleWidget() Widgetter

TitleWidget retrieves the title widget of the header.

See gtk.HeaderBar.SetTitleWidget().

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): title widget of the header, or NULL if none has been set explicitly.

type IMContext 

type IMContext struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMContext: GtkIMContext defines the interface for GTK input methods.

GtkIMContext is used by GTK text input widgets like GtkText to map from key events to Unicode character strings.

By default, GTK uses a platform-dependent default input method. On Windows, the default implementation is IME-based and on Wayland, it is using the Wayland text protocol. The choice can be overridden programmatically via the gtk.Settings:gtk-im-module setting. Users may set the GTK_IM_MODULE environment variable to override the default.

Text widgets have a :im-module property (e.g. gtk.TextView:im-module) that may also be used to set input methods for specific widget instances. For instance, a certain entry widget might be expected to contain certain characters which would be easier to input with a specific input method.

An input method may consume multiple key events in sequence before finally outputting the composed result. This is called *preediting*, and an input method may provide feedback about this process by displaying the intermediate composition states as preedit text.

For instance, the built-in GTK input method GtkIMContextSimple implements the input of arbitrary Unicode code points by holding down the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys and then typing <kbd>U</kbd> followed by the hexadecimal digits of the code point. When releasing the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys, preediting ends and the character is inserted as text. For example, 

Ctrl+Shift+u 2 0 A C

results in the € sign.

Additional input methods can be made available for use by GTK widgets as loadable modules. An input method module is a small shared library which provides a GIOExtension for the extension point named "gtk-im-module".

func BaseIMContext 

func BaseIMContext(obj IMContexter) *IMContext

BaseIMContext returns the underlying base object.

func (*IMContext) ConnectCommit 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectCommit(f func(str string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCommit signal is emitted when a complete input sequence has been entered by the user. This can be a single character immediately after a key press or the final result of preediting.

func (*IMContext) ConnectDeleteSurrounding 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectDeleteSurrounding(f func(offset, nChars int) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeleteSurrounding signal is emitted when the input method needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.

func (*IMContext) ConnectPreeditChanged 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectPreeditChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreeditChanged signal is emitted whenever the preedit sequence currently being entered has changed. It is also emitted at the end of a preedit sequence, in which case gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string() returns the empty string.

func (*IMContext) ConnectPreeditEnd 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectPreeditEnd(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreeditEnd signal is emitted when a preediting sequence has been completed or canceled.

func (*IMContext) ConnectPreeditStart 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectPreeditStart(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreeditStart signal is emitted when a new preediting sequence starts.

func (*IMContext) ConnectRetrieveSurrounding 

func (context *IMContext) ConnectRetrieveSurrounding(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRetrieveSurrounding signal is emitted when the input method requires the context surrounding the cursor. The callback should set the input method surrounding context by calling the gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() method.

func (*IMContext) DeleteSurrounding 

func (context *IMContext) DeleteSurrounding(offset, nChars int) bool

DeleteSurrounding asks the widget that the input context is attached to delete characters around the cursor position by emitting the GtkIMContext::delete_surrounding signal.

Note that offset and n_chars are in characters not in bytes which differs from the usage other places in IMContext.

In order to use this function, you should first call gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to get the current context, and call this function immediately afterwards to make sure that you know what you are deleting. You should also account for the fact that even if the signal was handled, the input context might not have deleted all the characters that were requested to be deleted.

This function is used by an input method that wants to make subsitutions in the existing text in response to new input. It is not useful for applications.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • offset from cursor position in chars; a negative value means start before the cursor.
  • nChars: number of characters to delete.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the signal was handled.

func (*IMContext) FilterKey 

func (context *IMContext) FilterKey(press bool, surface gdk.Surfacer, device gdk.Devicer, time uint32, keycode uint, state gdk.ModifierType, group int) bool

FilterKey: allow an input method to forward key press and release events to another input methodm without necessarily having a GdkEvent available.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • press: whether to forward a key press or release event.
  • surface the event is for.
  • device that the event is for.
  • time: timestamp for the event.
  • keycode for the event.
  • state: modifier state for the event.
  • group: active keyboard group for the event.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the input method handled the key event.

func (*IMContext) FilterKeypress 

func (context *IMContext) FilterKeypress(event gdk.Eventer) bool

FilterKeypress: allow an input method to internally handle key press and release events.

If this function returns TRUE, then no further processing should be done for this key event.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event: key event.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the input method handled the key event.

func (*IMContext) FocusIn 

func (context *IMContext) FocusIn()

FocusIn: notify the input method that the widget to which this input context corresponds has gained focus.

The input method may, for example, change the displayed feedback to reflect this change.

func (*IMContext) FocusOut 

func (context *IMContext) FocusOut()

FocusOut: notify the input method that the widget to which this input context corresponds has lost focus.

The input method may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts state to reflect this change.

func (*IMContext) PreeditString 

func (context *IMContext) PreeditString() (string, *pango.AttrList, int)

PreeditString: retrieve the current preedit string for the input context, and a list of attributes to apply to the string.

This string should be displayed inserted at the insertion point.

The function returns the following values:

  • str: location to store the retrieved string. The string retrieved must be freed with g_free().
  • attrs: location to store the retrieved attribute list. When you are done with this list, you must unreference it with pango_attr_list_unref().
  • cursorPos: location to store position of cursor (in characters) within the preedit string.

func (*IMContext) Reset 

func (context *IMContext) Reset()

Reset: notify the input method that a change such as a change in cursor position has been made.

This will typically cause the input method to clear the preedit state.

func (*IMContext) SetClientWidget 

func (context *IMContext) SetClientWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetClientWidget: set the client widget for the input context.

This is the GtkWidget holding the input focus. This widget is used in order to correctly position status windows, and may also be used for purposes internal to the input method.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): client widget. This may be NULL to indicate that the previous client widget no longer exists.

func (*IMContext) SetCursorLocation 

func (context *IMContext) SetCursorLocation(area *gdk.Rectangle)

SetCursorLocation: notify the input method that a change in cursor position has been made.

The location is relative to the client window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • area: new location.

func (*IMContext) SetSurrounding deprecated 

func (context *IMContext) SetSurrounding(text string, len, cursorIndex int)

SetSurrounding sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit string.

This function is expected to be called in response to the gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal, and will likely have no effect if called at other times.

Deprecated: Use gtk.IMContext.SetSurroundingWithSelection() instead.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8. the preedit string should not be included within text.
  • len: length of text, or -1 if text is nul-terminated.
  • cursorIndex: byte index of the insertion cursor within text.

func (*IMContext) SetSurroundingWithSelection 

func (context *IMContext) SetSurroundingWithSelection(text string, len, cursorIndex, anchorIndex int)

SetSurroundingWithSelection sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit string. This function is expected to be called in response to the GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will likely have no effect if called at other times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8. the preedit string should not be included within text.
  • len: length of text, or -1 if text is nul-terminated.
  • cursorIndex: byte index of the insertion cursor within text.
  • anchorIndex: byte index of the selection bound within text.

func (*IMContext) SetUsePreedit 

func (context *IMContext) SetUsePreedit(usePreedit bool)

SetUsePreedit sets whether the IM context should use the preedit string to display feedback.

If use_preedit is FALSE (default is TRUE), then the IM context may use some other method to display feedback, such as displaying it in a child of the root window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • usePreedit: whether the IM context should use the preedit string.

func (*IMContext) Surrounding deprecated 

func (context *IMContext) Surrounding() (string, int, bool)

Surrounding retrieves context around the insertion point.

Input methods typically want context in order to constrain input text based on existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where only some sequences of characters are allowed.

This function is implemented by emitting the gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal on the input method; in response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling gtk.IMContext.SetSurrounding().

Note that there is no obligation for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve-surrounding signal, so input methods must be prepared to function without context.

Deprecated: Use gtk.IMContext.GetSurroundingWithSelection() instead.

The function returns the following values:

  • text: location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text holding context around the insertion point. If the function returns TRUE, then you must free the result stored in this location with g_free().
  • cursorIndex: location to store byte index of the insertion cursor within text.
  • ok: TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case you must free the result stored in text.

func (*IMContext) SurroundingWithSelection 

func (context *IMContext) SurroundingWithSelection() (text string, cursorIndex, anchorIndex int, ok bool)

SurroundingWithSelection retrieves context around the insertion point.

Input methods typically want context in order to constrain input text based on existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where only some sequences of characters are allowed.

This function is implemented by emitting the gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal on the input method; in response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling gtk.IMContext.SetSurroundingWithSelection().

Note that there is no obligation for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve-surrounding signal, so input methods must be prepared to function without context.

The function returns the following values:

  • text: location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text holding context around the insertion point. If the function returns TRUE, then you must free the result stored in this location with g_free().
  • cursorIndex: location to store byte index of the insertion cursor within text.
  • anchorIndex: location to store byte index of the selection bound within text.
  • ok: TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case you must free the result stored in text.

type IMContextClass added in v0.0.5 

type IMContextClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMContextClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type IMContextOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type IMContextOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	Commit func(str string)
	// DeleteSurrounding asks the widget that the input context is attached
	// to delete characters around the cursor position by emitting the
	// GtkIMContext::delete_surrounding signal.
	//
	// Note that offset and n_chars are in characters not in bytes which differs
	// from the usage other places in IMContext.
	//
	// In order to use this function, you should first call
	// gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to get the current context, and call
	// this function immediately afterwards to make sure that you know what
	// you are deleting. You should also account for the fact that even if the
	// signal was handled, the input context might not have deleted all the
	// characters that were requested to be deleted.
	//
	// This function is used by an input method that wants to make subsitutions
	// in the existing text in response to new input. It is not useful for
	// applications.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - offset from cursor position in chars; a negative value means start
	//     before the cursor.
	//   - nChars: number of characters to delete.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if the signal was handled.
	//
	DeleteSurrounding func(offset, nChars int) bool
	// FilterKeypress: allow an input method to internally handle key press and
	// release events.
	//
	// If this function returns TRUE, then no further processing should be done
	// for this key event.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - event: key event.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
	//
	FilterKeypress func(event gdk.Eventer) bool
	// FocusIn: notify the input method that the widget to which this input
	// context corresponds has gained focus.
	//
	// The input method may, for example, change the displayed feedback to
	// reflect this change.
	FocusIn func()
	// FocusOut: notify the input method that the widget to which this input
	// context corresponds has lost focus.
	//
	// The input method may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset
	// the contexts state to reflect this change.
	FocusOut func()
	// PreeditString: retrieve the current preedit string for the input context,
	// and a list of attributes to apply to the string.
	//
	// This string should be displayed inserted at the insertion point.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - str: location to store the retrieved string. The string retrieved
	//     must be freed with g_free().
	//   - attrs: location to store the retrieved attribute list.
	//     When you are done with this list, you must unreference it with
	//     pango_attr_list_unref().
	//   - cursorPos: location to store position of cursor (in characters)
	//     within the preedit string.
	//
	PreeditString func() (string, *pango.AttrList, int)
	// Surrounding retrieves context around the insertion point.
	//
	// Input methods typically want context in order to constrain input text
	// based on existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai
	// where only some sequences of characters are allowed.
	//
	// This function is implemented by emitting the
	// gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal on the input method;
	// in response to this signal, a widget should provide as much
	// context as is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
	// gtk.IMContext.SetSurrounding().
	//
	// Note that there is no obligation for a widget to respond to the
	// ::retrieve-surrounding signal, so input methods must be prepared to
	// function without context.
	//
	// Deprecated: Use gtk.IMContext.GetSurroundingWithSelection() instead.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - text: location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text holding
	//     context around the insertion point. If the function returns TRUE,
	//     then you must free the result stored in this location with g_free().
	//   - cursorIndex: location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
	//     within text.
	//   - ok: TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case you must free
	//     the result stored in text.
	//
	Surrounding func() (string, int, bool)
	// SurroundingWithSelection retrieves context around the insertion point.
	//
	// Input methods typically want context in order to constrain input text
	// based on existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai
	// where only some sequences of characters are allowed.
	//
	// This function is implemented by emitting the
	// gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal on the input method;
	// in response to this signal, a widget should provide as much
	// context as is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
	// gtk.IMContext.SetSurroundingWithSelection().
	//
	// Note that there is no obligation for a widget to respond to the
	// ::retrieve-surrounding signal, so input methods must be prepared to
	// function without context.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - text: location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text holding
	//     context around the insertion point. If the function returns TRUE,
	//     then you must free the result stored in this location with g_free().
	//   - cursorIndex: location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
	//     within text.
	//   - anchorIndex: location to store byte index of the selection bound
	//     within text.
	//   - ok: TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case you must free
	//     the result stored in text.
	//
	SurroundingWithSelection func() (text string, cursorIndex, anchorIndex int, ok bool)
	PreeditChanged           func()
	PreeditEnd               func()
	PreeditStart             func()
	// Reset: notify the input method that a change such as a change in cursor
	// position has been made.
	//
	// This will typically cause the input method to clear the preedit state.
	Reset func()
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	RetrieveSurrounding func() bool
	// SetClientWidget: set the client widget for the input context.
	//
	// This is the GtkWidget holding the input focus. This widget is used in
	// order to correctly position status windows, and may also be used for
	// purposes internal to the input method.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget (optional): client widget. This may be NULL to indicate that
	//     the previous client widget no longer exists.
	//
	SetClientWidget func(widget Widgetter)
	// SetCursorLocation: notify the input method that a change in cursor
	// position has been made.
	//
	// The location is relative to the client window.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - area: new location.
	//
	SetCursorLocation func(area *gdk.Rectangle)
	// SetSurrounding sets surrounding context around the insertion point and
	// preedit string.
	//
	// This function is expected to be called in response to the
	// gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal, and will likely have no
	// effect if called at other times.
	//
	// Deprecated: Use gtk.IMContext.SetSurroundingWithSelection() instead.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8. the preedit string
	//     should not be included within text.
	//   - len: length of text, or -1 if text is nul-terminated.
	//   - cursorIndex: byte index of the insertion cursor within text.
	//
	SetSurrounding func(text string, len, cursorIndex int)
	// SetSurroundingWithSelection sets surrounding context around the insertion
	// point and preedit string. This function is expected to be called in
	// response to the GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will
	// likely have no effect if called at other times.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8. the preedit string
	//     should not be included within text.
	//   - len: length of text, or -1 if text is nul-terminated.
	//   - cursorIndex: byte index of the insertion cursor within text.
	//   - anchorIndex: byte index of the selection bound within text.
	//
	SetSurroundingWithSelection func(text string, len, cursorIndex, anchorIndex int)
	// SetUsePreedit sets whether the IM context should use the preedit string
	// to display feedback.
	//
	// If use_preedit is FALSE (default is TRUE), then the IM context may use
	// some other method to display feedback, such as displaying it in a child
	// of the root window.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - usePreedit: whether the IM context should use the preedit string.
	//
	SetUsePreedit func(usePreedit bool)
}

IMContextOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type IMContextSimple 

type IMContextSimple struct {
	IMContext
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMContextSimple: GtkIMContextSimple is an input method supporting table-based input methods.

GtkIMContextSimple has a built-in table of compose sequences that is derived from the X11 Compose files.

GtkIMContextSimple reads additional compose sequences from the first of the following files that is found: ~/.config/gtk-4.0/Compose, ~/.XCompose, /usr/share/X11/locale/$locale/Compose (for locales that have a nontrivial Compose file). The syntax of these files is described in the Compose(5) manual page.

Unicode characters

GtkIMContextSimple also supports numeric entry of Unicode characters by typing <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>u</kbd>, followed by a hexadecimal Unicode codepoint.

For example, 

Ctrl-Shift-u 1 2 3 Enter

yields U+0123 LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA, i.e. ģ.

func NewIMContextSimple 

func NewIMContextSimple() *IMContextSimple

NewIMContextSimple creates a new IMContextSimple.

The function returns the following values:

  • imContextSimple: new IMContextSimple.

func (*IMContextSimple) AddComposeFile 

func (contextSimple *IMContextSimple) AddComposeFile(composeFile string)

AddComposeFile adds an additional table from the X11 compose file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • composeFile: path of compose file.

type IMContextSimpleClass added in v0.0.5 

type IMContextSimpleClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMContextSimpleClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*IMContextSimpleClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (i *IMContextSimpleClass) ParentClass() *IMContextClass

type IMContextSimpleOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type IMContextSimpleOverrides struct {
}

IMContextSimpleOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type IMContexter 

type IMContexter interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

IMContexter describes types inherited from class IMContext.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type IMMulticontext 

type IMMulticontext struct {
	IMContext
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMMulticontext: GtkIMMulticontext is input method supporting multiple, switchable input methods.

Text widgets such as GtkText or GtkTextView use a GtkIMMultiContext to implement their im-module property for switching between different input methods.

func NewIMMulticontext 

func NewIMMulticontext() *IMMulticontext

NewIMMulticontext creates a new GtkIMMulticontext.

The function returns the following values:

  • imMulticontext: new GtkIMMulticontext.

func (*IMMulticontext) ContextID 

func (context *IMMulticontext) ContextID() string

ContextID gets the id of the currently active delegate of the context.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: id of the currently active delegate.

func (*IMMulticontext) SetContextID 

func (context *IMMulticontext) SetContextID(contextId string)

SetContextID sets the context id for context.

This causes the currently active delegate of context to be replaced by the delegate corresponding to the new context id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextId: id to use.

type IMMulticontextClass added in v0.0.5 

type IMMulticontextClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IMMulticontextClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*IMMulticontextClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (i *IMMulticontextClass) ParentClass() *IMContextClass

type IMMulticontextOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type IMMulticontextOverrides struct {
}

IMMulticontextOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type IconLookupFlags 

type IconLookupFlags C.guint

IconLookupFlags: used to specify options for gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(). 

const (
	// IconLookupForceRegular: try to always load regular icons, even when
	// symbolic icon names are given.
	IconLookupForceRegular IconLookupFlags = 0b1
	// IconLookupForceSymbolic: try to always load symbolic icons, even when
	// regular icon names are given.
	IconLookupForceSymbolic IconLookupFlags = 0b10
	// IconLookupPreload starts loading the texture in the background so it is
	// ready when later needed.
	IconLookupPreload IconLookupFlags = 0b100
)

func (IconLookupFlags) Has 

func (i IconLookupFlags) Has(other IconLookupFlags) bool

Has returns true if i contains other.

func (IconLookupFlags) String 

func (i IconLookupFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for IconLookupFlags.

type IconPaintable 

type IconPaintable struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gdk.Paintable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IconPaintable contains information found when looking up an icon in GtkIconTheme.

GtkIconPaintable implements GdkPaintable.

func NewIconPaintableForFile 

func NewIconPaintableForFile(file gio.Filer, size, scale int) *IconPaintable

NewIconPaintableForFile creates a GtkIconPaintable for a file with a given size and scale.

The icon can then be rendered by using it as a GdkPaintable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file: GFile.
  • size: desired icon size.
  • scale: desired scale.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconPaintable: GtkIconPaintable containing for the icon. Unref with g_object_unref().

func (*IconPaintable) File 

func (self *IconPaintable) File() *gio.File

File gets the GFile that was used to load the icon.

Returns NULL if the icon was not loaded from a file.

The function returns the following values:

  • file (optional) for the icon, or NULL. Free with g_object_unref().

func (*IconPaintable) IconName 

func (self *IconPaintable) IconName() string

IconName: get the icon name being used for this icon.

When an icon looked up in the icon theme was not available, the icon theme may use fallback icons - either those specified to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() or the always-available "image-missing". The icon chosen is returned by this function.

If the icon was created without an icon theme, this function returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • filename (optional): themed icon-name for the icon, or NULL if its not a themed icon.

func (*IconPaintable) IsSymbolic 

func (self *IconPaintable) IsSymbolic() bool

IsSymbolic checks if the icon is symbolic or not.

This currently uses only the file name and not the file contents for determining this. This behaviour may change in the future.

Note that to render a symbolic GtkIconPaintable properly (with recoloring), you have to set its icon name on a GtkImage.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the icon is symbolic, FALSE otherwise.

type IconSize 

type IconSize C.gint

IconSize: built-in icon sizes.

Icon sizes default to being inherited. Where they cannot be inherited, text size is the default.

All widgets which use GtkIconSize set the normal-icons or large-icons style classes correspondingly, and let themes determine the actual size to be used with the -gtk-icon-size CSS property. 

const (
	// IconSizeInherit: keep the size of the parent element.
	IconSizeInherit IconSize = iota
	// IconSizeNormal: size similar to text size.
	IconSizeNormal
	// IconSizeLarge: large size, for example in an icon view.
	IconSizeLarge
)

func (IconSize) String 

func (i IconSize) String() string

String returns the name in string for IconSize.

type IconTheme 

type IconTheme struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IconTheme: GtkIconTheme provides a facility for loading themed icons.

The main reason for using a name rather than simply providing a filename is to allow different icons to be used depending on what “icon theme” is selected by the user. The operation of icon themes on Linux and Unix follows the Icon Theme Specification (http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/icon-theme-spec) There is a fallback icon theme, named hicolor, where applications should install their icons, but additional icon themes can be installed as operating system vendors and users choose.

In many cases, named themes are used indirectly, via gtk.Image rather than directly, but looking up icons directly is also simple. The GtkIconTheme object acts as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You can create new GtkIconTheme objects, but it’s much more efficient to use the standard icon theme of the GtkWidget so that the icon information is shared with other people looking up icons. 

GtkIconTheme *icon_theme;
GtkIconPaintable *icon;
GdkPaintable *paintable;

icon_theme = gtk_icon_theme_get_for_display (gtk_widget_get_display (my_widget));
icon = gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon (icon_theme,
                                   "my-icon-name", // icon name
                                   48, // icon size
                                   1,  // scale
                                   0,  // flags);
paintable = GDK_PAINTABLE (icon);
// Use the paintable
g_object_unref (icon);.

func IconThemeGetForDisplay 

func IconThemeGetForDisplay(display *gdk.Display) *IconTheme

IconThemeGetForDisplay gets the icon theme object associated with display.

If this function has not previously been called for the given display, a new icon theme object will be created and associated with the display. Icon theme objects are fairly expensive to create, so using this function is usually a better choice than calling gtk.IconTheme.New and setting the display yourself; by using this function a single icon theme object will be shared between users.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconTheme: unique GtkIconTheme associated with the given display. This icon theme is associated with the display and can be used as long as the display is open. Do not ref or unref it.

func NewIconTheme 

func NewIconTheme() *IconTheme

NewIconTheme creates a new icon theme object.

Icon theme objects are used to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme. Usually, you’ll want to use gtk.IconTheme().GetForDisplay rather than creating a new icon theme object for scratch.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconTheme: newly created GtkIconTheme object.

func (*IconTheme) AddResourcePath 

func (self *IconTheme) AddResourcePath(path string)

AddResourcePath adds a resource path that will be looked at when looking for icons, similar to search paths.

See gtk.IconTheme.SetResourcePath().

This function should be used to make application-specific icons available as part of the icon theme.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: resource path.

func (*IconTheme) AddSearchPath 

func (self *IconTheme) AddSearchPath(path string)

AddSearchPath appends a directory to the search path.

See gtk.IconTheme.SetSearchPath().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: directory name to append to the icon path.

func (*IconTheme) ConnectChanged 

func (self *IconTheme) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when the icon theme changes.

This can happen becuase current icon theme is switched or because GTK detects that a change has occurred in the contents of the current icon theme.

func (*IconTheme) Display 

func (self *IconTheme) Display() *gdk.Display

Display returns the display that the GtkIconTheme object was created for.

The function returns the following values:

  • display (optional) of icon_theme.

func (*IconTheme) HasGIcon 

func (self *IconTheme) HasGIcon(gicon gio.Iconner) bool

HasGIcon checks whether an icon theme includes an icon for a particular GIcon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • gicon: GIcon.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self includes an icon for gicon.

func (*IconTheme) HasIcon 

func (self *IconTheme) HasIcon(iconName string) bool

HasIcon checks whether an icon theme includes an icon for a particular name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName: name of an icon.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self includes an icon for icon_name.

func (*IconTheme) IconNames 

func (self *IconTheme) IconNames() []string

IconNames lists the names of icons in the current icon theme.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: string array holding the names of all the icons in the theme. You must free the array using g_strfreev().

func (*IconTheme) IconSizes 

func (self *IconTheme) IconSizes(iconName string) []int

IconSizes returns an array of integers describing the sizes at which the icon is available without scaling.

A size of -1 means that the icon is available in a scalable format. The array is zero-terminated.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName: name of an icon.

The function returns the following values:

  • gints: newly allocated array describing the sizes at which the icon is available. The array should be freed with g_free() when it is no longer needed.

func (*IconTheme) LookupByGIcon 

func (self *IconTheme) LookupByGIcon(icon gio.Iconner, size, scale int, direction TextDirection, flags IconLookupFlags) *IconPaintable

LookupByGIcon looks up a icon for a desired size and window scale.

The icon can then be rendered by using it as a GdkPaintable, or you can get information such as the filename and size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • icon: GIcon to look up.
  • size: desired icon size.
  • scale: desired scale.
  • direction: text direction the icon will be displayed in.
  • flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconPaintable: GtkIconPaintable containing information about the icon. Unref with g_object_unref().

func (*IconTheme) LookupIcon 

func (self *IconTheme) LookupIcon(iconName string, fallbacks []string, size, scale int, direction TextDirection, flags IconLookupFlags) *IconPaintable

LookupIcon looks up a named icon for a desired size and window scale, returning a GtkIconPaintable.

The icon can then be rendered by using it as a GdkPaintable, or you can get information such as the filename and size.

If the available icon_name is not available and fallbacks are provided, they will be tried in order.

If no matching icon is found, then a paintable that renders the "missing icon" icon is returned. If you need to do something else for missing icons you need to use gtk.IconTheme.HasIcon().

Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and update the icon. This is usually done by overriding the GtkWidgetClass.css-changed() function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName: name of the icon to lookup.
  • fallbacks (optional)
  • size: desired icon size.
  • scale: window scale this will be displayed on.
  • direction: text direction the icon will be displayed in.
  • flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconPaintable: GtkIconPaintable object containing the icon.

func (*IconTheme) ResourcePath 

func (self *IconTheme) ResourcePath() []string

ResourcePath gets the current resource path.

See gtk.IconTheme.SetResourcePath().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s (optional): A list of resource paths or NULL. The returned value should be freed with g_strfreev().

func (*IconTheme) SearchPath 

func (self *IconTheme) SearchPath() []string

SearchPath gets the current search path.

See gtk.IconTheme.SetSearchPath().

The function returns the following values:

  • filenames (optional): a list of icon theme path directories or NULL. The returned value should be freed with g_strfreev().

func (*IconTheme) SetSearchPath 

func (self *IconTheme) SetSearchPath(path []string)

SetSearchPath sets the search path for the icon theme object.

When looking for an icon theme, GTK will search for a subdirectory of one or more of the directories in path with the same name as the icon theme containing an index.theme file. (Themes from multiple of the path elements are combined to allow themes to be extended by adding icons in the user’s home directory.)

In addition if an icon found isn’t found either in the current icon theme or the default icon theme, and an image file with the right name is found directly in one of the elements of path, then that image will be used for the icon name. (This is legacy feature, and new icons should be put into the fallback icon theme, which is called hicolor, rather than directly on the icon path.).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional): NULL-terminated array of directories that are searched for icon themes.

func (*IconTheme) SetThemeName 

func (self *IconTheme) SetThemeName(themeName string)

SetThemeName sets the name of the icon theme that the GtkIconTheme object uses overriding system configuration.

This function cannot be called on the icon theme objects returned from gtk.IconTheme.GetForDisplay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • themeName (optional): name of icon theme to use instead of configured theme, or NULL to unset a previously set custom theme.

func (*IconTheme) ThemeName 

func (self *IconTheme) ThemeName() string

ThemeName gets the current icon theme name.

Returns (transfer full): the current icon theme name,.

The function returns the following values:

type IconThemeError 

type IconThemeError C.gint

IconThemeError: error codes for GtkIconTheme operations. 

const (
	// IconThemeNotFound: icon specified does not exist in the theme.
	IconThemeNotFound IconThemeError = iota
	// IconThemeFailed: unspecified error occurred.
	IconThemeFailed
)

func (IconThemeError) String 

func (i IconThemeError) String() string

String returns the name in string for IconThemeError.

type IconView 

type IconView struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	CellLayout
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

IconView: GtkIconView is a widget which displays data in a grid of icons.

GtkIconView provides an alternative view on a GtkTreeModel. It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like gtk.TreeView, it allows to select one or multiple items (depending on the selection mode, see gtk.IconView.SetSelectionMode()). In addition to selection with the arrow keys, GtkIconView supports rubberband selection, which is controlled by dragging the pointer.

Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious), IconView will only display the first level of the tree and ignore the tree’s branches.

CSS nodes 

iconview.view
╰── [rubberband]

GtkIconView has a single CSS node with name iconview and style class .view. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.

func NewIconView 

func NewIconView() *IconView

NewIconView creates a new IconView widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconView: newly created IconView widget.

func NewIconViewWithArea 

func NewIconViewWithArea(area CellAreaer) *IconView

NewIconViewWithArea creates a new IconView widget using the specified area to layout cells inside the icons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • area to use to layout cells.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconView: newly created IconView widget.

func NewIconViewWithModel 

func NewIconViewWithModel(model TreeModeller) *IconView

NewIconViewWithModel creates a new IconView widget with the model model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: model.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconView: newly created IconView widget.

func (*IconView) ActivateOnSingleClick 

func (iconView *IconView) ActivateOnSingleClick() bool

ActivateOnSingleClick gets the setting set by gtk_icon_view_set_activate_on_single_click().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if item-activated will be emitted on a single click.

func (*IconView) CellRect 

func (iconView *IconView) CellRect(path *TreePath, cell CellRendererer) (*gdk.Rectangle, bool)

CellRect fills the bounding rectangle in widget coordinates for the cell specified by path and cell. If cell is NULL the main cell area is used.

This function is only valid if icon_view is realized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: TreePath.
  • cell (optional) or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • rect: rectangle to fill with cell rect.
  • ok: FALSE if there is no such item, TRUE otherwise.

func (*IconView) ColumnSpacing 

func (iconView *IconView) ColumnSpacing() int

ColumnSpacing returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: space between columns.

func (*IconView) Columns 

func (iconView *IconView) Columns() int

Columns returns the value of the ::columns property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns, or -1.

func (*IconView) ConnectActivateCursorItem 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectActivateCursorItem(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateCursorItem: [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user activates the currently focused item.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control activation programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal are Space, Return and Enter.

func (*IconView) ConnectItemActivated 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectItemActivated(f func(path *TreePath)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectItemActivated signal is emitted when the method gtk_icon_view_item_activated() is called, when the user double clicks an item with the "activate-on-single-click" property set to FALSE, or when the user single clicks an item when the "activate-on-single-click" property set to TRUE. It is also emitted when a non-editable item is selected and one of the keys: Space, Return or Enter is pressed.

func (*IconView) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, count int, extend, modify bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal include

- Arrow keys which move by individual steps

- Home/End keys which move to the first/last item

- PageUp/PageDown which move by "pages" All of these will extend the selection when combined with the Shift modifier.

func (*IconView) ConnectSelectAll 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectSelectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectAll: [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user selects all items.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection programmatically.

The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-a.

func (*IconView) ConnectSelectCursorItem 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectSelectCursorItem(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectCursorItem: [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user selects the item that is currently focused.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection programmatically.

There is no default binding for this signal.

func (*IconView) ConnectSelectionChanged 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectSelectionChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectionChanged signal is emitted when the selection (i.e. the set of selected items) changes.

func (*IconView) ConnectToggleCursorItem 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectToggleCursorItem(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleCursorItem: [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user toggles whether the currently focused item is selected or not. The exact effect of this depend on the selection mode.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection programmatically.

There is no default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Space.

func (*IconView) ConnectUnselectAll 

func (iconView *IconView) ConnectUnselectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnselectAll: [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user unselects all items.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection programmatically.

The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-a.

func (*IconView) CreateDragIcon 

func (iconView *IconView) CreateDragIcon(path *TreePath) *gdk.Paintable

CreateDragIcon creates a #cairo_surface_t representation of the item at path. This image is used for a drag icon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path in icon_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable: newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.

func (*IconView) Cursor 

func (iconView *IconView) Cursor() (*TreePath, CellRendererer, bool)

Cursor fills in path and cell with the current cursor path and cell. If the cursor isn’t currently set, then *path will be NULL. If no cell currently has focus, then *cell will be NULL.

The returned TreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the current cursor path, or NULL.
  • cell (optional): return location the current focus cell, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if the cursor is set.

func (*IconView) DestItemAtPos 

func (iconView *IconView) DestItemAtPos(dragX, dragY int) (*TreePath, IconViewDropPosition, bool)

DestItemAtPos determines the destination item for a given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dragX: position to determine the destination item for.
  • dragY: position to determine the destination item for.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the path of the item, or NULL.
  • pos (optional): return location for the drop position, or NULL.
  • ok: whether there is an item at the given position.

func (*IconView) DragDestItem 

func (iconView *IconView) DragDestItem() (*TreePath, IconViewDropPosition)

DragDestItem gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the path of the highlighted item, or NULL.
  • pos (optional): return location for the drop position, or NULL.

func (*IconView) EnableModelDragDest 

func (iconView *IconView) EnableModelDragDest(formats *gdk.ContentFormats, actions gdk.DragAction)

EnableModelDragDest turns icon_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling this method sets IconView:reorderable to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • formats that the drag will support.
  • actions: bitmask of possible actions for a drag to this widget.

func (*IconView) EnableModelDragSource 

func (iconView *IconView) EnableModelDragSource(startButtonMask gdk.ModifierType, formats *gdk.ContentFormats, actions gdk.DragAction)

EnableModelDragSource turns icon_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this method sets IconView:reorderable to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startButtonMask: mask of allowed buttons to start drag.
  • formats that the drag will support.
  • actions: bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget.

func (*IconView) ItemActivated 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemActivated(path *TreePath)

ItemActivated activates the item determined by path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be activated.

func (*IconView) ItemAtPos 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemAtPos(x, y int) (*TreePath, CellRendererer, bool)

ItemAtPos gets the path and cell for the icon at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position to be identified.
  • y position to be identified.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the path, or NULL.
  • cell (optional): return location for the renderer responsible for the cell at (x, y), or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if an item exists at the specified position.

func (*IconView) ItemColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemColumn(path *TreePath) int

ItemColumn gets the column in which the item path is currently displayed. Column numbers start at 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path of the item.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column in which the item is displayed.

func (*IconView) ItemOrientation 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemOrientation() Orientation

ItemOrientation returns the value of the ::item-orientation property which determines whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.

The function returns the following values:

  • orientation: relative position of texts and icons.

func (*IconView) ItemPadding 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemPadding() int

ItemPadding returns the value of the ::item-padding property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: padding around items.

func (*IconView) ItemRow 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemRow(path *TreePath) int

ItemRow gets the row in which the item path is currently displayed. Row numbers start at 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path of the item.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: row in which the item is displayed.

func (*IconView) ItemWidth 

func (iconView *IconView) ItemWidth() int

ItemWidth returns the value of the ::item-width property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: width of a single item, or -1.

func (*IconView) Margin 

func (iconView *IconView) Margin() int

Margin returns the value of the ::margin property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: space at the borders.

func (*IconView) MarkupColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) MarkupColumn() int

MarkupColumn returns the column with markup text for icon_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: markup column, or -1 if it’s unset.

func (*IconView) Model 

func (iconView *IconView) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model the IconView is based on. Returns NULL if the model is unset.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional) or NULL if none is currently being used.

func (*IconView) PathAtPos 

func (iconView *IconView) PathAtPos(x, y int) *TreePath

PathAtPos gets the path for the icon at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position to be identified.
  • y position to be identified.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional) corresponding to the icon or NULL if no icon exists at that position.

func (*IconView) PathIsSelected 

func (iconView *IconView) PathIsSelected(path *TreePath) bool

PathIsSelected returns TRUE if the icon pointed to by path is currently selected. If path does not point to a valid location, FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to check selection on.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if path is selected.

func (*IconView) PixbufColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) PixbufColumn() int

PixbufColumn returns the column with pixbufs for icon_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: pixbuf column, or -1 if it’s unset.

func (*IconView) Reorderable 

func (iconView *IconView) Reorderable() bool

Reorderable retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop. See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the list can be reordered.

func (*IconView) RowSpacing 

func (iconView *IconView) RowSpacing() int

RowSpacing returns the value of the ::row-spacing property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: space between rows.

func (*IconView) ScrollToPath 

func (iconView *IconView) ScrollToPath(path *TreePath, useAlign bool, rowAlign, colAlign float32)

ScrollToPath moves the alignments of icon_view to the position specified by path. row_align determines where the row is placed, and col_align determines where column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0. 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means center.

If use_align is FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen. This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.

This function only works if the model is set, and path is a valid row on the model. If the model changes before the icon_view is realized, the centered path will be modified to reflect this change.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path of the item to move to.
  • useAlign: whether to use alignment arguments, or FALSE.
  • rowAlign: vertical alignment of the item specified by path.
  • colAlign: horizontal alignment of the item specified by path.

func (*IconView) SelectAll 

func (iconView *IconView) SelectAll()

SelectAll selects all the icons. icon_view must has its selection mode set to K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.

func (*IconView) SelectPath 

func (iconView *IconView) SelectPath(path *TreePath)

SelectPath selects the row at path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be selected.

func (*IconView) SelectedForEach 

func (iconView *IconView) SelectedForEach(fn IconViewForEachFunc)

SelectedForEach calls a function for each selected icon. Note that the model or selection cannot be modified from within this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call for each selected icon.

func (*IconView) SelectedItems 

func (iconView *IconView) SelectedItems() []*TreePath

SelectedItems creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may want to convert the returned list into a list of TreeRowReferences. To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().

To free the return value, use: 

g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);.

The function returns the following values:

  • list containing a TreePath for each selected row.

func (*IconView) SelectionMode 

func (iconView *IconView) SelectionMode() SelectionMode

SelectionMode gets the selection mode of the icon_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionMode: current selection mode.

func (*IconView) SetActivateOnSingleClick 

func (iconView *IconView) SetActivateOnSingleClick(single bool)

SetActivateOnSingleClick causes the IconView::item-activated signal to be emitted on a single click instead of a double click.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • single: TRUE to emit item-activated on a single click.

func (*IconView) SetColumnSpacing 

func (iconView *IconView) SetColumnSpacing(columnSpacing int)

SetColumnSpacing sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • columnSpacing: column spacing.

func (*IconView) SetColumns 

func (iconView *IconView) SetColumns(columns int)

SetColumns sets the ::columns property which determines in how many columns the icons are arranged. If columns is -1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically to fill the available area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • columns: number of columns.

func (*IconView) SetCursor 

func (iconView *IconView) SetCursor(path *TreePath, cell CellRendererer, startEditing bool)

SetCursor sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular item. If cell is not NULL, then focus is given to the cell specified by it. Additionally, if start_editing is TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.

This function is often followed by gtk_widget_grab_focus (icon_view) in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: TreePath.
  • cell (optional): one of the cell renderers of icon_view, or NULL.
  • startEditing: TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.

func (*IconView) SetDragDestItem 

func (iconView *IconView) SetDragDestItem(path *TreePath, pos IconViewDropPosition)

SetDragDestItem sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) of the item to highlight, or NULL.
  • pos specifies where to drop, relative to the item.

func (*IconView) SetItemOrientation 

func (iconView *IconView) SetItemOrientation(orientation Orientation)

SetItemOrientation sets the ::item-orientation property which determines whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: relative position of texts and icons.

func (*IconView) SetItemPadding 

func (iconView *IconView) SetItemPadding(itemPadding int)

SetItemPadding sets the IconView:item-padding property which specifies the padding around each of the icon view’s items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • itemPadding: item padding.

func (*IconView) SetItemWidth 

func (iconView *IconView) SetItemWidth(itemWidth int)

SetItemWidth sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will automatically determine a suitable item size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • itemWidth: width for each item.

func (*IconView) SetMargin 

func (iconView *IconView) SetMargin(margin int)

SetMargin sets the ::margin property which specifies the space which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right of the icon view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: margin.

func (*IconView) SetMarkupColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) SetMarkupColumn(column int)

SetMarkupColumn sets the column with markup information for icon_view to be column. The markup column must be of type TYPE_STRING. If the markup column is set to something, it overrides the text column set by gtk_icon_view_set_text_column().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.

func (*IconView) SetModel 

func (iconView *IconView) SetModel(model TreeModeller)

SetModel sets the model for a IconView. If the icon_view already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If model is NULL, then it will unset the old model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): model.

func (*IconView) SetPixbufColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) SetPixbufColumn(column int)

SetPixbufColumn sets the column with pixbufs for icon_view to be column. The pixbuf column must be of type K_TYPE_PIXBUF.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable.

func (*IconView) SetReorderable 

func (iconView *IconView) SetReorderable(reorderable bool)

SetReorderable: this function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models that support the TreeDragSourceIface and the TreeDragDestIface. Both TreeStore and ListStore support these. If reorderable is TRUE, then the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up the icon view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.

This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably handle drag and drop manually.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • reorderable: TRUE, if the list of items can be reordered.

func (*IconView) SetRowSpacing 

func (iconView *IconView) SetRowSpacing(rowSpacing int)

SetRowSpacing sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rowSpacing: row spacing.

func (*IconView) SetSelectionMode 

func (iconView *IconView) SetSelectionMode(mode SelectionMode)

SetSelectionMode sets the selection mode of the icon_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: selection mode.

func (*IconView) SetSpacing 

func (iconView *IconView) SetSpacing(spacing int)

SetSpacing sets the ::spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the cells (i.e. the icon and the text) of an item.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: spacing.

func (*IconView) SetTextColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) SetTextColumn(column int)

SetTextColumn sets the column with text for icon_view to be column. The text column must be of type TYPE_STRING.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.

func (*IconView) SetTooltipCell 

func (iconView *IconView) SetTooltipCell(tooltip *Tooltip, path *TreePath, cell CellRendererer)

SetTooltipCell sets the tip area of tooltip to the area which cell occupies in the item pointed to by path. See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().

See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tooltip: Tooltip.
  • path: TreePath.
  • cell (optional) or NULL.

func (*IconView) SetTooltipColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) SetTooltipColumn(column int)

SetTooltipColumn: if you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you can use this function to have IconView handle these automatically for you. column should be set to the column in icon_view’s model containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.

When enabled, Widget:has-tooltip will be set to TRUE and icon_view will connect a Widget::query-tooltip signal handler.

Note that the signal handler sets the text with gtk_tooltip_set_markup(), so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: integer, which is a valid column number for icon_view’s model.

func (*IconView) SetTooltipItem 

func (iconView *IconView) SetTooltipItem(tooltip *Tooltip, path *TreePath)

SetTooltipItem sets the tip area of tooltip to be the area covered by the item at path. See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative. See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tooltip: Tooltip.
  • path: TreePath.

func (*IconView) Spacing 

func (iconView *IconView) Spacing() int

Spacing returns the value of the ::spacing property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: space between cells.

func (*IconView) TextColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) TextColumn() int

TextColumn returns the column with text for icon_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: text column, or -1 if it’s unset.

func (*IconView) TooltipColumn 

func (iconView *IconView) TooltipColumn() int

TooltipColumn returns the column of icon_view’s model which is being used for displaying tooltips on icon_view’s rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the tooltip column that is currently being used, or -1 if this is disabled.

func (*IconView) TooltipContext 

func (iconView *IconView) TooltipContext(x, y int, keyboardTip bool) (*TreeModel, *TreePath, *TreeIter, bool)

TooltipContext: this function is supposed to be used in a Widget::query-tooltip signal handler for IconView. The x, y and keyboard_tip values which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this function without modification.

The return value indicates whether there is an icon view item at the given coordinates (TRUE) or not (FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When TRUE, then any of model, path and iter which have been provided will be set to point to that row and the corresponding model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates).
  • y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates).
  • keyboardTip: whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • model (optional): pointer to receive a TreeModel or NULL.
  • path (optional): pointer to receive a TreePath or NULL.
  • iter (optional): pointer to receive a TreeIter or NULL.
  • ok: whether or not the given tooltip context points to an item.

func (*IconView) UnselectAll 

func (iconView *IconView) UnselectAll()

UnselectAll unselects all the icons.

func (*IconView) UnselectPath 

func (iconView *IconView) UnselectPath(path *TreePath)

UnselectPath unselects the row at path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be unselected.

func (*IconView) UnsetModelDragDest 

func (iconView *IconView) UnsetModelDragDest()

UnsetModelDragDest undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets IconView:reorderable to FALSE.

func (*IconView) UnsetModelDragSource 

func (iconView *IconView) UnsetModelDragSource()

UnsetModelDragSource undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this method sets IconView:reorderable to FALSE.

func (*IconView) VisibleRange 

func (iconView *IconView) VisibleRange() (startPath, endPath *TreePath, ok bool)

VisibleRange sets start_path and end_path to be the first and last visible path. Note that there may be invisible paths in between.

Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.

The function returns the following values:

  • startPath (optional): return location for start of region, or NULL.
  • endPath (optional): return location for end of region, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE, if valid paths were placed in start_path and end_path.

type IconViewDropPosition 

type IconViewDropPosition C.gint

IconViewDropPosition: enum for determining where a dropped item goes. 

const (
	// IconViewNoDrop: no drop possible.
	IconViewNoDrop IconViewDropPosition = iota
	// IconViewDropInto: dropped item replaces the item.
	IconViewDropInto
	// IconViewDropLeft: dropped item is inserted to the left.
	IconViewDropLeft
	// IconViewDropRight: dropped item is inserted to the right.
	IconViewDropRight
	// IconViewDropAbove: dropped item is inserted above.
	IconViewDropAbove
	// IconViewDropBelow: dropped item is inserted below.
	IconViewDropBelow
)

func (IconViewDropPosition) String 

func (i IconViewDropPosition) String() string

String returns the name in string for IconViewDropPosition.

type IconViewForEachFunc 

type IconViewForEachFunc func(iconView *IconView, path *TreePath)

IconViewForEachFunc: function used by gtk_icon_view_selected_foreach() to map all selected rows.

It will be called on every selected row in the view.

type Image 

type Image struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Image: GtkImage widget displays an image.

!An example GtkImage (image.png)

Various kinds of object can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a GdkTexture from a file, using the convenience function gtk.Image.NewFromFile, for instance: 

GtkWidget *image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");

If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the image will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers.

If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with gdk.Texture.NewFromFile, then create the GtkImage with gtk.Image.NewFromPaintable.

Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of GResource inside GIO, for details. In this case, gtk.Image:resource, gtk.Image.NewFromResource, and gtk.Image.SetFromResource() should be used.

GtkImage displays its image as an icon, with a size that is determined by the application. See gtk.Picture if you want to show an image at is actual size.

CSS nodes

GtkImage has a single CSS node with the name image. The style classes .normal-icons or .large-icons may appear, depending on the gtk.Image:icon-size property.

Accessibility

GtkImage uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_IMG role.

func NewImage 

func NewImage() *Image

NewImage creates a new empty GtkImage widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: newly created GtkImage widget.

func NewImageFromFile 

func NewImageFromFile(filename string) *Image

NewImageFromFile creates a new GtkImage displaying the file filename.

If the file isn’t found or can’t be loaded, the resulting GtkImage will display a “broken image” icon. This function never returns NULL, it always returns a valid GtkImage widget.

If you need to detect failures to load the file, use gdk.Texture.NewFromFile to load the file yourself, then create the GtkImage from the texture.

The storage type (see gtk.Image.GetStorageType()) of the returned image is not defined, it will be whatever is appropriate for displaying the file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename: filename.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage.

func NewImageFromGIcon 

func NewImageFromGIcon(icon gio.Iconner) *Image

NewImageFromGIcon creates a GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.

If the icon name isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated appropriately.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • icon: icon.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage displaying the themed icon.

func NewImageFromIconName 

func NewImageFromIconName(iconName string) *Image

NewImageFromIconName creates a GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.

If the icon name isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated appropriately.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName (optional): icon name or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage displaying the themed icon.

func NewImageFromPaintable 

func NewImageFromPaintable(paintable gdk.Paintabler) *Image

NewImageFromPaintable creates a new GtkImage displaying paintable.

The GtkImage does not assume a reference to the paintable; you still need to unref it if you own references. GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.

The GtkImage will track changes to the paintable and update its size and contents in response to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage.

func NewImageFromPixbuf 

func NewImageFromPixbuf(pixbuf *gdkpixbuf.Pixbuf) *Image

NewImageFromPixbuf creates a new GtkImage displaying pixbuf.

The GtkImage does not assume a reference to the pixbuf; you still need to unref it if you own references. GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.

This is a helper for gtk.Image.NewFromPaintable, and you can't get back the exact pixbuf once this is called, only a texture.

Note that this function just creates an GtkImage from the pixbuf. The GtkImage created will not react to state changes. Should you want that, you should use gtk.Image.NewFromIconName.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixbuf (optional): GdkPixbuf, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage.

func NewImageFromResource 

func NewImageFromResource(resourcePath string) *Image

NewImageFromResource creates a new GtkImage displaying the resource file resource_path.

If the file isn’t found or can’t be loaded, the resulting GtkImage will display a “broken image” icon. This function never returns NULL, it always returns a valid GtkImage widget.

If you need to detect failures to load the file, use gdkpixbuf.Pixbuf.NewFromFile to load the file yourself, then create the GtkImage from the pixbuf.

The storage type (see gtk.Image.GetStorageType()) of the returned image is not defined, it will be whatever is appropriate for displaying the file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: resource path.

The function returns the following values:

  • image: new GtkImage.

func (*Image) Clear 

func (image *Image) Clear()

Clear resets the image to be empty.

func (*Image) GIcon 

func (image *Image) GIcon() *gio.Icon

GIcon gets the GIcon being displayed by the GtkImage.

The storage type of the image must be GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk.Image.GetStorageType()). The caller of this function does not own a reference to the returned GIcon.

The function returns the following values:

  • icon (optional): GIcon, or NULL.

func (*Image) IconName 

func (image *Image) IconName() string

IconName gets the icon name and size being displayed by the GtkImage.

The storage type of the image must be GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or GTK_IMAGE_ICON_NAME (see gtk.Image.GetStorageType()). The returned string is owned by the GtkImage and should not be freed.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): icon name, or NULL.

func (*Image) IconSize 

func (image *Image) IconSize() IconSize

IconSize gets the icon size used by the image when rendering icons.

The function returns the following values:

  • iconSize: image size used by icons.

func (*Image) Paintable 

func (image *Image) Paintable() *gdk.Paintable

Paintable gets the image GdkPaintable being displayed by the GtkImage.

The storage type of the image must be GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or GTK_IMAGE_PAINTABLE (see gtk.Image.GetStorageType()). The caller of this function does not own a reference to the returned paintable.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable (optional): displayed paintable, or NULL if the image is empty.

func (*Image) PixelSize 

func (image *Image) PixelSize() int

PixelSize gets the pixel size used for named icons.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: pixel size used for named icons.

func (*Image) SetFromFile 

func (image *Image) SetFromFile(filename string)

SetFromFile sets a GtkImage to show a file.

See gtk.Image.NewFromFile for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional) or NULL.

func (*Image) SetFromGIcon 

func (image *Image) SetFromGIcon(icon gio.Iconner)

SetFromGIcon sets a GtkImage to show a GIcon.

See gtk.Image.NewFromGIcon for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • icon: icon.

func (*Image) SetFromIconName 

func (image *Image) SetFromIconName(iconName string)

SetFromIconName sets a GtkImage to show a named icon.

See gtk.Image.NewFromIconName for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName (optional): icon name or NULL.

func (*Image) SetFromPaintable 

func (image *Image) SetFromPaintable(paintable gdk.Paintabler)

SetFromPaintable sets a GtkImage to show a GdkPaintable.

See gtk.Image.NewFromPaintable for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable or NULL.

func (*Image) SetFromPixbuf 

func (image *Image) SetFromPixbuf(pixbuf *gdkpixbuf.Pixbuf)

SetFromPixbuf sets a GtkImage to show a GdkPixbuf.

See gtk.Image.NewFromPixbuf for details.

Note: This is a helper for gtk.Image.SetFromPaintable(), and you can't get back the exact pixbuf once this is called, only a paintable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixbuf (optional): GdkPixbuf or NULL.

func (*Image) SetFromResource 

func (image *Image) SetFromResource(resourcePath string)

SetFromResource sets a GtkImage to show a resource.

See gtk.Image.NewFromResource for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): resource path or NULL.

func (*Image) SetIconSize 

func (image *Image) SetIconSize(iconSize IconSize)

SetIconSize suggests an icon size to the theme for named icons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconSize: new icon size.

func (*Image) SetPixelSize 

func (image *Image) SetPixelSize(pixelSize int)

SetPixelSize sets the pixel size to use for named icons.

If the pixel size is set to a value != -1, it is used instead of the icon size set by gtk.Image.SetFromIconName().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixelSize: new pixel size.

func (*Image) StorageType 

func (image *Image) StorageType() ImageType

StorageType gets the type of representation being used by the GtkImage to store image data.

If the GtkImage has no image data, the return value will be GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.

The function returns the following values:

  • imageType: image representation being used.

type ImageType 

type ImageType C.gint

ImageType describes the image data representation used by a gtk.Image.

If you want to get the image from the widget, you can only get the currently-stored representation; for instance, if the gtk_image_get_storage_type() returns GTK_IMAGE_PAINTABLE, then you can call gtk_image_get_paintable().

For empty images, you can request any storage type (call any of the "get" functions), but they will all return NULL values. 

const (
	// ImageEmpty: there is no image displayed by the widget.
	ImageEmpty ImageType = iota
	// ImageIconName: widget contains a named icon.
	ImageIconName
	// ImageGIcon: widget contains a #GIcon.
	ImageGIcon
	// ImagePaintable: widget contains a Paintable.
	ImagePaintable
)

func (ImageType) String 

func (i ImageType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ImageType.

type InfoBar 

type InfoBar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

InfoBar: GtkInfoBar can be show messages to the user without a dialog.

!An example GtkInfoBar (info-bar.png)

It is often temporarily shown at the top or bottom of a document. In contrast to gtk.Dialog, which has an action area at the bottom, GtkInfoBar has an action area at the side.

The API of GtkInfoBar is very similar to GtkDialog, allowing you to add buttons to the action area with gtk.InfoBar.AddButton() or gtk.InfoBar.NewWithButtons. The sensitivity of action widgets can be controlled with gtk.InfoBar.SetResponseSensitive().

To add widgets to the main content area of a GtkInfoBar, use gtk.InfoBar.AddChild().

Similar to gtk.MessageDialog, the contents of a GtkInfoBar can by classified as error message, warning, informational message, etc, by using gtk.InfoBar.SetMessageType(). GTK may use the message type to determine how the message is displayed.

A simple example for using a GtkInfoBar: 

GtkWidget *message_label;
GtkWidget *widget;
GtkWidget *grid;
GtkInfoBar *bar;

// set up info bar
widget = gtk_info_bar_new ();
bar = GTK_INFO_BAR (widget);
grid = gtk_grid_new ();

message_label = gtk_label_new ("");
gtk_info_bar_add_child (bar, message_label);
gtk_info_bar_add_button (bar,
                         _("_OK"),
                         GTK_RESPONSE_OK);
g_signal_connect (bar,
                  "response",
                  G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_hide),
                  NULL);
gtk_grid_attach (GTK_GRID (grid),
                 widget,
                 0, 2, 1, 1);

// ...

// show an error message
gtk_label_set_text (GTK_LABEL (message_label), "An error occurred!");
gtk_info_bar_set_message_type (bar, GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR);
gtk_widget_show (bar);

GtkInfoBar as GtkBuildable

The GtkInfoBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the content area and action area as internal children with the names “content_area” and “action_area”.

GtkInfoBar supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs action_area).

CSS nodes

GtkInfoBar has a single CSS node with name infobar. The node may get one of the style classes .info, .warning, .error or .question, depending on the message type. If the info bar shows a close button, that button will have the .close style class applied.

func NewInfoBar 

func NewInfoBar() *InfoBar

NewInfoBar creates a new GtkInfoBar object.

The function returns the following values:

  • infoBar: new GtkInfoBar object.

func (*InfoBar) AddActionWidget 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) AddActionWidget(child Widgetter, responseId int)

AddActionWidget: add an activatable widget to the action area of a GtkInfoBar.

This also connects a signal handler that will emit the gtk.InfoBar::response signal on the message area when the widget is activated. The widget is appended to the end of the message areas action area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: activatable widget.
  • responseId: response ID for child.

func (*InfoBar) AddButton 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) AddButton(buttonText string, responseId int) *Button

AddButton adds a button with the given text.

Clicking the button will emit the gtk.InfoBar::response signal with the given response_id. The button is appended to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is returned, but usually you don't need it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buttonText: text of button.
  • responseId: response ID for the button.

The function returns the following values:

  • button: GtkButton widget that was added.

func (*InfoBar) AddChild 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) AddChild(widget Widgetter)

AddChild adds a widget to the content area of the info bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child to be added.

func (*InfoBar) ConnectClose 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) ConnectClose(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClose gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to dismiss the info bar.

The ::close signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.

func (*InfoBar) ConnectResponse 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) ConnectResponse(f func(responseId int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectResponse is emitted when an action widget is clicked.

The signal is also emitted when the application programmer calls gtk.InfoBar.Response(). The response_id depends on which action widget was clicked.

func (*InfoBar) MessageType 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) MessageType() MessageType

MessageType returns the message type of the message area.

The function returns the following values:

  • messageType: message type of the message area.

func (*InfoBar) RemoveActionWidget 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) RemoveActionWidget(widget Widgetter)

RemoveActionWidget removes a widget from the action area of info_bar.

The widget must have been put there by a call to gtk.InfoBar.AddActionWidget() or gtk.InfoBar.AddButton().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: action widget to remove.

func (*InfoBar) RemoveChild 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) RemoveChild(widget Widgetter)

RemoveChild removes a widget from the content area of the info bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: child that has been added to the content area.

func (*InfoBar) Response 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) Response(responseId int)

Response emits the “response” signal with the given response_id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.

func (*InfoBar) Revealed 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) Revealed() bool

Revealed returns whether the info bar is currently revealed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: current value of the gtk.InfoBar:revealed property.

func (*InfoBar) SetDefaultResponse 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) SetDefaultResponse(responseId int)

SetDefaultResponse sets the last widget in the info bar’s action area with the given response_id as the default widget for the dialog.

Pressing “Enter” normally activates the default widget.

Note that this function currently requires info_bar to be added to a widget hierarchy.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.

func (*InfoBar) SetMessageType 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) SetMessageType(messageType MessageType)

SetMessageType sets the message type of the message area.

GTK uses this type to determine how the message is displayed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • messageType: MessageType.

func (*InfoBar) SetResponseSensitive 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) SetResponseSensitive(responseId int, setting bool)

SetResponseSensitive sets the sensitivity of action widgets for response_id.

Calls gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, setting) for each widget in the info bars’s action area with the given response_id. A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize buttons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • responseId: response ID.
  • setting: TRUE for sensitive.

func (*InfoBar) SetRevealed 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) SetRevealed(revealed bool)

SetRevealed sets whether the GtkInfoBar is revealed.

Changing this will make info_bar reveal or conceal itself via a sliding transition.

Note: this does not show or hide info_bar in the gtk.Widget:visible sense, so revealing has no effect if gtk.Widget:visible is FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • revealed: new value of the property.

func (*InfoBar) SetShowCloseButton 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) SetShowCloseButton(setting bool)

SetShowCloseButton: if true, a standard close button is shown.

When clicked it emits the response GTK_RESPONSE_CLOSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to include a close button.

func (*InfoBar) ShowCloseButton 

func (infoBar *InfoBar) ShowCloseButton() bool

ShowCloseButton returns whether the widget will display a standard close button.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget displays standard close button.

type InputHints 

type InputHints C.guint

InputHints describes hints that might be taken into account by input methods or applications.

Note that input methods may already tailor their behaviour according to the GtkInputPurpose of the entry.

Some common sense is expected when using these flags - mixing GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE with any of the uppercase hints makes no sense.

This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should ignore unknown values. 

const (
	// InputHintNone: no special behaviour suggested.
	InputHintNone InputHints = 0b0
	// InputHintSpellcheck: suggest checking for typos.
	InputHintSpellcheck InputHints = 0b1
	// InputHintNoSpellcheck: suggest not checking for typos.
	InputHintNoSpellcheck InputHints = 0b10
	// InputHintWordCompletion: suggest word completion.
	InputHintWordCompletion InputHints = 0b100
	// InputHintLowercase: suggest to convert all text to lowercase.
	InputHintLowercase InputHints = 0b1000
	// InputHintUppercaseChars: suggest to capitalize all text.
	InputHintUppercaseChars InputHints = 0b10000
	// InputHintUppercaseWords: suggest to capitalize the first character of
	// each word.
	InputHintUppercaseWords InputHints = 0b100000
	// InputHintUppercaseSentences: suggest to capitalize the first word of each
	// sentence.
	InputHintUppercaseSentences InputHints = 0b1000000
	// InputHintInhibitOSK: suggest to not show an onscreen keyboard (e.g for a
	// calculator that already has all the keys).
	InputHintInhibitOSK InputHints = 0b10000000
	// InputHintVerticalWriting: text is vertical.
	InputHintVerticalWriting InputHints = 0b100000000
	// InputHintEmoji: suggest offering Emoji support.
	InputHintEmoji InputHints = 0b1000000000
	// InputHintNoEmoji: suggest not offering Emoji support.
	InputHintNoEmoji InputHints = 0b10000000000
	// InputHintPrivate: request that the input method should not update
	// personalized data (like typing history).
	InputHintPrivate InputHints = 0b100000000000
)

func (InputHints) Has 

func (i InputHints) Has(other InputHints) bool

Has returns true if i contains other.

func (InputHints) String 

func (i InputHints) String() string

String returns the names in string for InputHints.

type InputPurpose 

type InputPurpose C.gint

InputPurpose describes primary purpose of the input widget.

This information is useful for on-screen keyboards and similar input methods to decide which keys should be presented to the user.

Note that the purpose is not meant to impose a totally strict rule about allowed characters, and does not replace input validation. It is fine for an on-screen keyboard to let the user override the character set restriction that is expressed by the purpose. The application is expected to validate the entry contents, even if it specified a purpose.

The difference between GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_DIGITS and GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_NUMBER is that the former accepts only digits while the latter also some punctuation (like commas or points, plus, minus) and “e” or “E” as in 3.14E+000.

This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should interpret unknown values as “free form”. 

const (
	// InputPurposeFreeForm: allow any character.
	InputPurposeFreeForm InputPurpose = iota
	// InputPurposeAlpha: allow only alphabetic characters.
	InputPurposeAlpha
	// InputPurposeDigits: allow only digits.
	InputPurposeDigits
	// InputPurposeNumber: edited field expects numbers.
	InputPurposeNumber
	// InputPurposePhone: edited field expects phone number.
	InputPurposePhone
	// InputPurposeURL: edited field expects URL.
	InputPurposeURL
	// InputPurposeEmail: edited field expects email address.
	InputPurposeEmail
	// InputPurposeName: edited field expects the name of a person.
	InputPurposeName
	// InputPurposePassword: like GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_FREE_FORM, but characters
	// are hidden.
	InputPurposePassword
	// InputPurposePIN: like GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_DIGITS, but characters are
	// hidden.
	InputPurposePIN
	// InputPurposeTerminal: allow any character, in addition to control codes.
	InputPurposeTerminal
)

func (InputPurpose) String 

func (i InputPurpose) String() string

String returns the name in string for InputPurpose.

type Justification 

type Justification C.gint

Justification: used for justifying the text inside a GtkLabel widget. 

const (
	// JustifyLeft: text is placed at the left edge of the label.
	JustifyLeft Justification = iota
	// JustifyRight: text is placed at the right edge of the label.
	JustifyRight
	// JustifyCenter: text is placed in the center of the label.
	JustifyCenter
	// JustifyFill: text is placed is distributed across the label.
	JustifyFill
)

func (Justification) String 

func (j Justification) String() string

String returns the name in string for Justification.

type KeyvalTrigger 

type KeyvalTrigger struct {
	ShortcutTrigger
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

KeyvalTrigger: GtkShortcutTrigger that triggers when a specific keyval and modifiers are pressed.

func NewKeyvalTrigger 

func NewKeyvalTrigger(keyval uint, modifiers gdk.ModifierType) *KeyvalTrigger

NewKeyvalTrigger creates a GtkShortcutTrigger that will trigger whenever the key with the given keyval and modifiers is pressed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyval to trigger for.
  • modifiers that need to be present.

The function returns the following values:

  • keyvalTrigger: new GtkShortcutTrigger.

func (*KeyvalTrigger) Keyval 

func (self *KeyvalTrigger) Keyval() uint

Keyval gets the keyval that must be pressed to succeed triggering self.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: keyval.

func (*KeyvalTrigger) Modifiers 

func (self *KeyvalTrigger) Modifiers() gdk.ModifierType

Modifiers gets the modifiers that must be present to succeed triggering self.

The function returns the following values:

  • modifierType: modifiers.

type Label 

type Label struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Label: GtkLabel widget displays a small amount of text.

As the name implies, most labels are used to label another widget such as a button.

!An example GtkLabel (label.png)

CSS nodes 

label
├── [selection]
├── [link]
┊
╰── [link]

GtkLabel has a single CSS node with the name label. A wide variety of style classes may be applied to labels, such as .title, .subtitle, .dim-label, etc. In the GtkShortcutsWindow, labels are used with the .keycap style class.

If the label has a selection, it gets a subnode with name selection.

If the label has links, there is one subnode per link. These subnodes carry the link or visited state depending on whether they have been visited. In this case, label node also gets a .link style class.

GtkLabel as GtkBuildable

The GtkLabel implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify pango.Attribute values for this label.

An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes: 

<object class="GtkLabel">
  <attributes>
    <attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
    <attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
  </attributes>
</object>

The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.

Accessibility

GtkLabel uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LABEL role.

Mnemonics

Labels may contain “mnemonics”. Mnemonics are underlined characters in the label, used for keyboard navigation. Mnemonics are created by providing a string with an underscore before the mnemonic character, such as "_File", to the functions gtk.Label.NewWithMnemonic or gtk.Label.SetTextWithMnemonic().

Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is inside, such as a gtk.Button; if the label is not inside the mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target using gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget. Here’s a simple example where the label is inside a button: 

// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_button_set_child (GTK_BUTTON (button), label);

There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label already inside: 

// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");

To create a mnemonic for a widget alongside the label, such as a gtk.Entry, you have to point the label at the entry with gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget(): 

// Pressing Alt+H will focus the entry
GtkWidget *entry = gtk_entry_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GTK_LABEL (label), entry);

Markup (styled text)

To make it easy to format text in a label (changing colors, fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple markup format:

Here’s how to create a label with a small font: 

GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");

(See the Pango manual for complete documentation] of available tags, pango.ParseMarkup())

The markup passed to gtk_label_set_markup() must be valid; for example, literal <, > and & characters must be escaped as &lt;, &gt;, and &amp;. If you pass text obtained from the user, file, or a network to gtk.Label.SetMarkup(), you’ll want to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or g_markup_printf_escaped().

Markup strings are just a convenient way to set the pango.AttrList on a label; gtk.Label.SetAttributes() may be a simpler way to set attributes in some cases. Be careful though; pango.AttrList tends to cause internationalization problems, unless you’re applying attributes to the entire string (i.e. unless you set the range of each attribute to [0, G_MAXINT)). The reason is that specifying the start_index and end_index for a pango.Attribute requires knowledge of the exact string being displayed, so translations will cause problems.

Selectable labels

Labels can be made selectable with gtk.Label.SetSelectable(). Selectable labels allow the user to copy the label contents to the clipboard. Only labels that contain useful-to-copy information — such as error messages — should be made selectable.

Text layout

A label can contain any number of paragraphs, but will have performance problems if it contains more than a small number. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separators understood by Pango.

Labels can automatically wrap text if you call gtk.Label.SetWrap().

gtk.Label.SetJustify() sets how the lines in a label align with one another. If you want to set how the label as a whole aligns in its available space, see the gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties.

The gtk.Label:width-chars and gtk.Label:max-width-chars properties can be used to control the size allocation of ellipsized or wrapped labels. For ellipsizing labels, if either is specified (and less than the actual text size), it is used as the minimum width, and the actual text size is used as the natural width of the label. For wrapping labels, width-chars is used as the minimum width, if specified, and max-width-chars is used as the natural width. Even if max-width-chars specified, wrapping labels will be rewrapped to use all of the available width.

GTK supports markup for clickable hyperlinks in addition to regular Pango markup. The markup for links is borrowed from HTML, using the <a> with “href“, “title“ and “class“ attributes. GTK renders links similar to the way they appear in web browsers, with colored, underlined text. The “title“ attribute is displayed as a tooltip on the link. The “class“ attribute is used as style class on the CSS node for the link.

An example looks like this: 

const char *text =
"Go to the"
"<a href=\"http://www.gtk.org title=\"&lt;i&gt;Our&lt;/i&gt; website\">"
"GTK website</a> for more...";
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), text);

It is possible to implement custom handling for links and their tooltips with the gtk.Label::activate-link signal and the gtk.Label.GetCurrentURI() function.

func NewLabel 

func NewLabel(str string) *Label

NewLabel creates a new label with the given text inside it.

You can pass NULL to get an empty label widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str (optional): text of the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • label: new GtkLabel.

func NewLabelWithMnemonic 

func NewLabelWithMnemonic(str string) *Label

NewLabelWithMnemonic creates a new GtkLabel, containing the text in str.

If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget().

If gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget() is not called, then the first activatable ancestor of the GtkLabel will be chosen as the mnemonic widget. For instance, if the label is inside a button or menu item, the button or menu item will automatically become the mnemonic widget and be activated by the mnemonic.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str (optional): text of the label, with an underscore in front of the mnemonic character.

The function returns the following values:

  • label: new GtkLabel.

func (*Label) Attributes 

func (self *Label) Attributes() *pango.AttrList

Attributes gets the labels attribute list.

This is the pango.AttrList that was set on the label using gtk.Label.SetAttributes(), if any. This function does not reflect attributes that come from the labels markup (see gtk.Label.SetMarkup()). If you want to get the effective attributes for the label, use pango_layout_get_attribute (gtk_label_get_layout (self)).

The function returns the following values:

  • attrList (optional): attribute list, or NULL if none was set.
func (self *Label) ConnectActivateCurrentLink(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateCurrentLink gets emitted when the user activates a link in the label.

The ::activate-current-link is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications may also emit the signal with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control activation of URIs programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key. 

func (self *Label) ConnectActivateLink(f func(uri string) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateLink gets emitted to activate a URI.

Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour, which is to call gtk_show_uri().

func (*Label) ConnectCopyClipboard 

func (self *Label) ConnectCopyClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCopyClipboard gets emitted to copy the slection to the clipboard.

The ::copy-clipboard signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-c.

func (*Label) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (self *Label) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, count int, extendSelection bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.

The ::move-cursor signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html). If the cursor is not visible in entry, this signal causes the viewport to be moved instead.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal come in two variants, the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection, the variant without the Shift modifier does not. There are too many key combinations to list them all here.

- Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines

- Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs

- Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer.

func (*Label) CurrentURI 

func (self *Label) CurrentURI() string

CurrentURI returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.

The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently positioned.

This function is intended for use in a gtk.Label::activate-link handler or for use in a gtk.Widget::query-tooltip handler.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): currently active URI or NULL if there is none. The string is owned by GTK and must not be freed or modified.

func (*Label) Ellipsize 

func (self *Label) Ellipsize() pango.EllipsizeMode

Ellipsize returns the ellipsizing position of the label.

See gtk.Label.SetEllipsize().

The function returns the following values:

  • ellipsizeMode: PangoEllipsizeMode.

func (*Label) ExtraMenu 

func (self *Label) ExtraMenu() gio.MenuModeller

ExtraMenu gets the extra menu model of label.

See gtk.Label.SetExtraMenu().

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional): menu model.

func (*Label) Justify 

func (self *Label) Justify() Justification

Justify returns the justification of the label.

See gtk.Label.SetJustify().

The function returns the following values:

  • justification: GtkJustification.

func (*Label) Label 

func (self *Label) Label() string

Label fetches the text from a label.

The returned text includes any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. (See gtk.Label.GetText()).

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: text of the label widget. This string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Label) Layout 

func (self *Label) Layout() *pango.Layout

Layout gets the PangoLayout used to display the label.

The layout is useful to e.g. convert text positions to pixel positions, in combination with gtk.Label.GetLayoutOffsets(). The returned layout is owned by the label so need not be freed by the caller. The label is free to recreate its layout at any time, so it should be considered read-only.

The function returns the following values:

  • layout: pango.Layout for this label.

func (*Label) LayoutOffsets 

func (self *Label) LayoutOffsets() (x, y int)

LayoutOffsets obtains the coordinates where the label will draw its PangoLayout.

The coordinates are useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the pango.Layout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the label is clicked. Remember when using the pango.Layout functions you need to convert to and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or pango.SCALE.

The function returns the following values:

  • x (optional): location to store X offset of layout, or NULL.
  • y (optional): location to store Y offset of layout, or NULL.

func (*Label) Lines 

func (self *Label) Lines() int

Lines gets the number of lines to which an ellipsized, wrapping label should be limited.

See gtk.Label.SetLines().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of lines.

func (*Label) MaxWidthChars 

func (self *Label) MaxWidthChars() int

MaxWidthChars retrieves the desired maximum width of label, in characters.

See gtk.Label.SetWidthChars().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum width of the label in characters.

func (*Label) MnemonicKeyval 

func (self *Label) MnemonicKeyval() uint

MnemonicKeyval: return the mnemonic accelerator.

If the label has been set so that it has a mnemonic key this function returns the keyval used for the mnemonic accelerator. If there is no mnemonic set up it returns GDK_KEY_VoidSymbol.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or GDK_KEY_VoidSymbol.

func (*Label) MnemonicWidget 

func (self *Label) MnemonicWidget() Widgetter

MnemonicWidget retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this label.

See gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget().

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): target of the label’s mnemonic, or NULL if none has been set and the default algorithm will be used.

func (*Label) SelectRegion 

func (self *Label) SelectRegion(startOffset, endOffset int)

SelectRegion selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.

See gtk.Label.SetSelectable(). If the label is not selectable, this function has no effect. If start_offset or end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startOffset: start offset (in characters not bytes).
  • endOffset: end offset (in characters not bytes).

func (*Label) Selectable 

func (self *Label) Selectable() bool

Selectable returns whether the label is selectable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the user can copy text from the label.

func (*Label) SelectionBounds 

func (self *Label) SelectionBounds() (start, end int, ok bool)

SelectionBounds gets the selected range of characters in the label.

The function returns the following values:

  • start: return location for start of selection, as a character offset.
  • end: return location for end of selection, as a character offset.
  • ok: TRUE if selection is non-empty.

func (*Label) SetAttributes 

func (self *Label) SetAttributes(attrs *pango.AttrList)

SetAttributes: apply attributes to the label text.

The attributes set with this function will be applied and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way of the gtk.Label:use-underline or gtk.Label:use-markup properties. While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied to the label after the markup string is parsed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attrs (optional): pango.AttrList, or NULL.

func (*Label) SetEllipsize 

func (self *Label) SetEllipsize(mode pango.EllipsizeMode)

SetEllipsize sets the mode used to ellipsizei the text.

The text will be ellipsized if there is not enough space to render the entire string.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: PangoEllipsizeMode.

func (*Label) SetExtraMenu 

func (self *Label) SetExtraMenu(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetExtraMenu sets a menu model to add when constructing the context menu for label.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*Label) SetJustify 

func (self *Label) SetJustify(jtype Justification)

SetJustify sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to each other.

GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the widget is first created with gtk.Label.New. If you instead want to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use gtk.Widget.SetHAlign() instead. gtk.Label.SetJustify() has no effect on labels containing only a single line.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • jtype: GtkJustification.

func (*Label) SetLabel 

func (self *Label) SetLabel(str string)

SetLabel sets the text of the label.

The label is interpreted as including embedded underlines and/or Pango markup depending on the values of the gtk.Label:use-underline and gtk.Label:use-markup properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: new text to set for the label.

func (*Label) SetLines 

func (self *Label) SetLines(lines int)

SetLines sets the number of lines to which an ellipsized, wrapping label should be limited.

This has no effect if the label is not wrapping or ellipsized. Set this to -1 if you don’t want to limit the number of lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lines: desired number of lines, or -1.

func (*Label) SetMarkup 

func (self *Label) SetMarkup(str string)

SetMarkup sets the labels text and attributes from markup.

The string must be marked up with Pango markup (see pango.ParseMarkup()).

If the str is external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or g_markup_printf_escaped(): 

GtkWidget *self = gtk_label_new (NULL);
const char *str = "...";
const char *format = "<span style=\"italic\">\s</span>";
char *markup;

markup = g_markup_printf_escaped (format, str);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (self), markup);
g_free (markup);

This function will set the gtk.Label:use-markup property to TRUE as a side effect.

If you set the label contents using the gtk.Label:label property you should also ensure that you set the gtk.Label:use-markup property accordingly.

See also: gtk.Label.SetText().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: markup string.

func (*Label) SetMarkupWithMnemonic 

func (self *Label) SetMarkupWithMnemonic(str string)

SetMarkupWithMnemonic sets the labels text, attributes and mnemonic from markup.

Parses str which is marked up with Pango markup (see pango.ParseMarkup()), setting the label’s text and attribute list based on the parse results. If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.

The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using methodGtk.Label.set_mnemonic_widget].

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: markup string.

func (*Label) SetMaxWidthChars 

func (self *Label) SetMaxWidthChars(nChars int)

SetMaxWidthChars sets the desired maximum width in characters of label to n_chars.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChars: new desired maximum width, in characters.

func (*Label) SetMnemonicWidget 

func (self *Label) SetMnemonicWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetMnemonicWidget: associate the label with its mnemonic target.

If the label has been set so that it has a mnemonic key (using i.e. gtk.Label.SetMarkupWithMnemonic(), gtk.Label.SetTextWithMnemonic(), gtk.Label.NewWithMnemonic or the gtk.Label:useUnderline property) the label can be associated with a widget that is the target of the mnemonic. When the label is inside a widget (like a gtk.Button or a gtk.Notebook tab) it is automatically associated with the correct widget, but sometimes (i.e. when the target is a gtk.Entry next to the label) you need to set it explicitly using this function.

The target widget will be accelerated by emitting the gtkwidget::mnemonic-activate signal on it. The default handler for this signal will activate the widget if there are no mnemonic collisions and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): target Widget, or NULL to unset.

func (*Label) SetSelectable 

func (self *Label) SetSelectable(setting bool)

SetSelectable makes text in the label selectable.

Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for copy-and-paste.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to allow selecting text in the label.

func (*Label) SetSingleLineMode 

func (self *Label) SetSingleLineMode(singleLineMode bool)

SetSingleLineMode sets whether the label is in single line mode.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • singleLineMode: TRUE if the label should be in single line mode.

func (*Label) SetText 

func (self *Label) SetText(str string)

SetText sets the text within the GtkLabel widget.

It overwrites any text that was there before.

This function will clear any previously set mnemonic accelerators, and set the gtk.Label:use-underline property to FALSE as a side effect.

This function will set the gtk.Label:use-markup property to FALSE as a side effect.

See also: gtk.Label.SetMarkup().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: text you want to set.

func (*Label) SetTextWithMnemonic 

func (self *Label) SetTextWithMnemonic(str string)

SetTextWithMnemonic sets the label’s text from the string str.

If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string.

func (*Label) SetUseMarkup 

func (self *Label) SetUseMarkup(setting bool)

SetUseMarkup sets whether the text of the label contains markup.

See gtk.Label.SetMarkup().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE if the label’s text should be parsed for markup.

func (*Label) SetUseUnderline 

func (self *Label) SetUseUnderline(setting bool)

SetUseUnderline sets whether underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.

func (*Label) SetWidthChars 

func (self *Label) SetWidthChars(nChars int)

SetWidthChars sets the desired width in characters of label to n_chars.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nChars: new desired width, in characters.

func (*Label) SetWrap 

func (self *Label) SetWrap(wrap bool)

SetWrap toggles line wrapping within the GtkLabel widget.

TRUE makes it break lines if text exceeds the widget’s size. FALSE lets the text get cut off by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.

Note that setting line wrapping to TRUE does not make the label wrap at its parent container’s width, because GTK widgets conceptually can’t make their requisition depend on the parent container’s size. For a label that wraps at a specific position, set the label’s width using gtk.Widget.SetSizeRequest().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wrap: setting.

func (*Label) SetWrapMode 

func (self *Label) SetWrapMode(wrapMode pango.WrapMode)

SetWrapMode controls how line wrapping is done.

This only affects the label if line wrapping is on. (See gtk.Label.SetWrap()) The default is PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means wrap on word boundaries.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wrapMode: line wrapping mode.

func (*Label) SetXAlign 

func (self *Label) SetXAlign(xalign float32)

SetXAlign sets the xalign of the label.

See the gtk.Label:xalign property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: new xalign value, between 0 and 1.

func (*Label) SetYAlign 

func (self *Label) SetYAlign(yalign float32)

SetYAlign sets the yalign of the label.

See the gtk.Label:yalign property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • yalign: new yalign value, between 0 and 1.

func (*Label) SingleLineMode 

func (self *Label) SingleLineMode() bool

SingleLineMode returns whether the label is in single line mode.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE when the label is in single line mode.

func (*Label) Text 

func (self *Label) Text() string

Text fetches the text from a label.

The returned text is as it appears on screen. This does not include any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics or Pango markup. (See gtk.Label.GetLabel()).

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: text in the label widget. This is the internal string used by the label, and must not be modified.

func (*Label) UseMarkup 

func (self *Label) UseMarkup() bool

UseMarkup returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as Pango markup.

See gtk.Label.SetUseMarkup().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.

func (*Label) UseUnderline 

func (self *Label) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline returns whether an embedded underlines in the label indicate mnemonics.

See gtk.Label.SetUseUnderline().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.

func (*Label) WidthChars 

func (self *Label) WidthChars() int

WidthChars retrieves the desired width of label, in characters.

See gtk.Label.SetWidthChars().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: width of the label in characters.

func (*Label) Wrap 

func (self *Label) Wrap() bool

Wrap returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped.

See gtk.Label.SetWrap().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.

func (*Label) WrapMode 

func (self *Label) WrapMode() pango.WrapMode

WrapMode returns line wrap mode used by the label.

See gtk.Label.SetWrapMode().

The function returns the following values:

  • wrapMode: TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.

func (*Label) XAlign 

func (self *Label) XAlign() float32

XAlign gets the xalign of the label.

See the gtk.Label:xalign property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: xalign property.

func (*Label) YAlign 

func (self *Label) YAlign() float32

YAlign gets the yalign of the label.

See the gtk.Label:yalign property.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: yalign property.

type LayoutChild 

type LayoutChild struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LayoutChild: GtkLayoutChild is the base class for objects that are meant to hold layout properties.

If a GtkLayoutManager has per-child properties, like their packing type, or the horizontal and vertical span, or the icon name, then the layout manager should use a GtkLayoutChild implementation to store those properties.

A GtkLayoutChild instance is only ever valid while a widget is part of a layout.

func BaseLayoutChild 

func BaseLayoutChild(obj LayoutChilder) *LayoutChild

BaseLayoutChild returns the underlying base object.

func (*LayoutChild) ChildWidget 

func (layoutChild *LayoutChild) ChildWidget() Widgetter

ChildWidget retrieves the GtkWidget associated to the given layout_child.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: Widget.

func (*LayoutChild) LayoutManager 

func (layoutChild *LayoutChild) LayoutManager() LayoutManagerer

LayoutManager retrieves the GtkLayoutManager instance that created the given layout_child.

The function returns the following values:

  • layoutManager: GtkLayoutManager.

type LayoutChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type LayoutChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LayoutChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type LayoutChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type LayoutChildOverrides struct {
}

LayoutChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type LayoutChilder 

type LayoutChilder interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

LayoutChilder describes types inherited from class LayoutChild.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type LayoutManager 

type LayoutManager struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LayoutManager: layout managers are delegate classes that handle the preferred size and the allocation of a widget.

You typically subclass GtkLayoutManager if you want to implement a layout policy for the children of a widget, or if you want to determine the size of a widget depending on its contents.

Each GtkWidget can only have a GtkLayoutManager instance associated to it at any given time; it is possible, though, to replace the layout manager instance using gtk.Widget.SetLayoutManager().

Layout properties

A layout manager can expose properties for controlling the layout of each child, by creating an object type derived from gtk.LayoutChild and installing the properties on it as normal GObject properties.

Each GtkLayoutChild instance storing the layout properties for a specific child is created through the gtk.LayoutManager.GetLayoutChild() method; a GtkLayoutManager controls the creation of its GtkLayoutChild instances by overriding the GtkLayoutManagerClass.create_layout_child() virtual function. The typical implementation should look like: 

static GtkLayoutChild *
create_layout_child (GtkLayoutManager *manager,
                     GtkWidget        *container,
                     GtkWidget        *child)
{
  return g_object_new (your_layout_child_get_type (),
                       "layout-manager", manager,
                       "child-widget", child,
                       NULL);
}

The gtk.LayoutChild:layout-manager and gtk.LayoutChild:child-widget properties on the newly created GtkLayoutChild instance are mandatory. The GtkLayoutManager will cache the newly created GtkLayoutChild instance until the widget is removed from its parent, or the parent removes the layout manager.

Each GtkLayoutManager instance creating a GtkLayoutChild should use gtk.LayoutManager.GetLayoutChild() every time it needs to query the layout properties; each GtkLayoutChild instance should call gtk.LayoutManager.LayoutChanged() every time a property is updated, in order to queue a new size measuring and allocation.

func BaseLayoutManager 

func BaseLayoutManager(obj LayoutManagerer) *LayoutManager

BaseLayoutManager returns the underlying base object.

func (*LayoutManager) Allocate 

func (manager *LayoutManager) Allocate(widget Widgetter, width, height, baseline int)

Allocate assigns the given width, height, and baseline to a widget, and computes the position and sizes of the children of the widget using the layout management policy of manager.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget using manager.
  • width: new width of the widget.
  • height: new height of the widget.
  • baseline position of the widget, or -1.

func (*LayoutManager) LayoutChanged 

func (manager *LayoutManager) LayoutChanged()

LayoutChanged queues a resize on the GtkWidget using manager, if any.

This function should be called by subclasses of GtkLayoutManager in response to changes to their layout management policies.

func (*LayoutManager) LayoutChild 

func (manager *LayoutManager) LayoutChild(child Widgetter) LayoutChilder

LayoutChild retrieves a GtkLayoutChild instance for the GtkLayoutManager, creating one if necessary.

The child widget must be a child of the widget using manager.

The GtkLayoutChild instance is owned by the GtkLayoutManager, and is guaranteed to exist as long as child is a child of the GtkWidget using the given GtkLayoutManager.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • layoutChild: GtkLayoutChild.

func (*LayoutManager) Measure 

func (manager *LayoutManager) Measure(widget Widgetter, orientation Orientation, forSize int) (minimum, natural, minimumBaseline, naturalBaseline int)

Measure measures the size of the widget using manager, for the given orientation and size.

See the gtk.Widget documentation on layout management for more details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget using manager.
  • orientation to measure.
  • forSize: size for the opposite of orientation; for instance, if the orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, this is the height of the widget; if the orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, this is the width of the widget. This allows to measure the height for the given width, and the width for the given height. Use -1 if the size is not known.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimum (optional) size for the given size and orientation.
  • natural (optional): natural, or preferred size for the given size and orientation.
  • minimumBaseline (optional): baseline position for the minimum size.
  • naturalBaseline (optional): baseline position for the natural size.

func (*LayoutManager) RequestMode 

func (manager *LayoutManager) RequestMode() SizeRequestMode

RequestMode retrieves the request mode of manager.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeRequestMode: GtkSizeRequestMode.

func (*LayoutManager) Widget 

func (manager *LayoutManager) Widget() Widgetter

Widget retrieves the GtkWidget using the given GtkLayoutManager.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): GtkWidget.

type LayoutManagerClass added in v0.0.5 

type LayoutManagerClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LayoutManagerClass: GtkLayoutManagerClass structure contains only private data, and should only be accessed through the provided API, or when subclassing LayoutManager.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*LayoutManagerClass) LayoutChildType added in v0.0.5 

func (l *LayoutManagerClass) LayoutChildType() coreglib.Type

LayoutChildType: type of LayoutChild used by this layout manager.

type LayoutManagerOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type LayoutManagerOverrides struct {
	// Allocate assigns the given width, height, and baseline to a widget,
	// and computes the position and sizes of the children of the widget using
	// the layout management policy of manager.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget: GtkWidget using manager.
	//   - width: new width of the widget.
	//   - height: new height of the widget.
	//   - baseline position of the widget, or -1.
	//
	Allocate func(widget Widgetter, width, height, baseline int)
	// CreateLayoutChild: create a LayoutChild instance for the given for_child
	// widget.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget using the manager.
	//   - forChild: child of widget.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - layoutChild: LayoutChild.
	//
	CreateLayoutChild func(widget, forChild Widgetter) LayoutChilder
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	RequestMode func(widget Widgetter) SizeRequestMode
	// Measure measures the size of the widget using manager, for the given
	// orientation and size.
	//
	// See the gtk.Widget documentation on layout management for more details.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget: GtkWidget using manager.
	//   - orientation to measure.
	//   - forSize: size for the opposite of orientation; for instance, if the
	//     orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, this is the height of the
	//     widget; if the orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, this is the
	//     width of the widget. This allows to measure the height for the given
	//     width, and the width for the given height. Use -1 if the size is not
	//     known.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimum (optional) size for the given size and orientation.
	//   - natural (optional): natural, or preferred size for the given size and
	//     orientation.
	//   - minimumBaseline (optional): baseline position for the minimum size.
	//   - naturalBaseline (optional): baseline position for the natural size.
	//
	Measure func(widget Widgetter, orientation Orientation, forSize int) (minimum, natural, minimumBaseline, naturalBaseline int)
	Root    func()
	Unroot  func()
}

LayoutManagerOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type LayoutManagerer 

type LayoutManagerer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

LayoutManagerer describes types inherited from class LayoutManager.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type LevelBar 

type LevelBar struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LevelBar: GtkLevelBar is a widget that can be used as a level indicator.

Typical use cases are displaying the strength of a password, or showing the charge level of a battery.

!An example GtkLevelBar (levelbar.png)

Use gtk.LevelBar.SetValue() to set the current value, and gtk.LevelBar.AddOffsetValue() to set the value offsets at which the bar will be considered in a different state. GTK will add a few offsets by default on the level bar: GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW, GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH and GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL, with values 0.25, 0.75 and 1.0 respectively.

Note that it is your responsibility to update preexisting offsets when changing the minimum or maximum value. GTK will simply clamp them to the new range.

Adding a custom offset on the bar 

static GtkWidget *
create_level_bar (void)
{
  GtkWidget *widget;
  GtkLevelBar *bar;

  widget = gtk_level_bar_new ();
  bar = GTK_LEVEL_BAR (widget);

  // This changes the value of the default low offset

  gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar,
                                  GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,
                                  0.10);

  // This adds a new offset to the bar; the application will
  // be able to change its color CSS like this:
  //
  // levelbar block.my-offset {
  //   background-color: magenta;
  //   border-style: solid;
  //   border-color: black;
  //   border-style: 1px;
  // }

  gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, "my-offset", 0.60);

  return widget;
}

The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to modify the interval using gtk.LevelBar.SetMinValue() and gtk.LevelBar.SetMaxValue(). The value will be always drawn in proportion to the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between 10 and 20 is equivalent to a value of 0.5 with an interval between 0 and 1. When K_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_DISCRETE is used, the bar level is rendered as a finite number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by the admissible interval.

For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator mode to discrete.

GtkLevelBar as GtkBuildable

The GtkLevelBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <offsets> element, which can contain any number of <offset> elements, each of which must have name and value attributes.

CSS nodes 

levelbar[.discrete]
╰── trough
    ├── block.filled.level-name
    ┊
    ├── block.empty
    ┊

GtkLevelBar has a main CSS node with name levelbar and one of the style classes .discrete or .continuous and a subnode with name trough. Below the trough node are a number of nodes with name block and style class .filled or .empty. In continuous mode, there is exactly one node of each, in discrete mode, the number of filled and unfilled nodes corresponds to blocks that are drawn. The block.filled nodes also get a style class .level-name corresponding to the level for the current value.

In horizontal orientation, the nodes are always arranged from left to right, regardless of text direction.

Accessibility

GtkLevelBar uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_METER role.

func NewLevelBar 

func NewLevelBar() *LevelBar

NewLevelBar creates a new GtkLevelBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • levelBar: GtkLevelBar.

func NewLevelBarForInterval 

func NewLevelBarForInterval(minValue, maxValue float64) *LevelBar

NewLevelBarForInterval creates a new GtkLevelBar for the specified interval.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • minValue: positive value.
  • maxValue: positive value.

The function returns the following values:

  • levelBar: GtkLevelBar.

func (*LevelBar) AddOffsetValue 

func (self *LevelBar) AddOffsetValue(name string, value float64)

AddOffsetValue adds a new offset marker on self at the position specified by value.

When the bar value is in the interval topped by value (or between value and gtk.LevelBar:max-value in case the offset is the last one on the bar) a style class named level-name will be applied when rendering the level bar fill.

If another offset marker named name exists, its value will be replaced by value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the new offset.
  • value for the new offset.

func (*LevelBar) ConnectOffsetChanged 

func (self *LevelBar) ConnectOffsetChanged(f func(name string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectOffsetChanged is emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value.

This typically is the result of a gtk.LevelBar.AddOffsetValue() call.

The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when the value of offset "x" changes.

func (*LevelBar) Inverted 

func (self *LevelBar) Inverted() bool

Inverted returns whether the levelbar is inverted.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the level bar is inverted.

func (*LevelBar) MaxValue 

func (self *LevelBar) MaxValue() float64

MaxValue returns the max-value of the GtkLevelBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: positive value.

func (*LevelBar) MinValue 

func (self *LevelBar) MinValue() float64

MinValue returns the min-value of the GtkLevelBar`.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: positive value.

func (*LevelBar) Mode 

func (self *LevelBar) Mode() LevelBarMode

Mode returns the mode of the GtkLevelBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • levelBarMode: GtkLevelBarMode.

func (*LevelBar) OffsetValue 

func (self *LevelBar) OffsetValue(name string) (float64, bool)

OffsetValue fetches the value specified for the offset marker name in self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) of an offset in the bar.

The function returns the following values:

  • value: location where to store the value.
  • ok: TRUE if the specified offset is found.

func (*LevelBar) RemoveOffsetValue 

func (self *LevelBar) RemoveOffsetValue(name string)

RemoveOffsetValue removes an offset marker from a GtkLevelBar.

The marker must have been previously added with gtk.LevelBar.AddOffsetValue().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) of an offset in the bar.

func (*LevelBar) SetInverted 

func (self *LevelBar) SetInverted(inverted bool)

SetInverted sets whether the GtkLevelBar is inverted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • inverted: TRUE to invert the level bar.

func (*LevelBar) SetMaxValue 

func (self *LevelBar) SetMaxValue(value float64)

SetMaxValue sets the max-value of the GtkLevelBar.

You probably want to update preexisting level offsets after calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: positive value.

func (*LevelBar) SetMinValue 

func (self *LevelBar) SetMinValue(value float64)

SetMinValue sets the min-value of the GtkLevelBar.

You probably want to update preexisting level offsets after calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: positive value.

func (*LevelBar) SetMode 

func (self *LevelBar) SetMode(mode LevelBarMode)

SetMode sets the mode of the GtkLevelBar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: GtkLevelBarMode.

func (*LevelBar) SetValue 

func (self *LevelBar) SetValue(value float64)

SetValue sets the value of the GtkLevelBar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value in the interval between gtk.LevelBar:min-value and gtk.LevelBar:max-value.

func (*LevelBar) Value 

func (self *LevelBar) Value() float64

Value returns the value of the GtkLevelBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: value in the interval between GtkLevelBar:min-value and GtkLevelBar:max-value.

type LevelBarMode 

type LevelBarMode C.gint

LevelBarMode describes how GtkLevelBar contents should be rendered.

Note that this enumeration could be extended with additional modes in the future. 

const (
	// LevelBarModeContinuous: bar has a continuous mode.
	LevelBarModeContinuous LevelBarMode = iota
	// LevelBarModeDiscrete: bar has a discrete mode.
	LevelBarModeDiscrete
)

func (LevelBarMode) String 

func (l LevelBarMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for LevelBarMode.

type License 

type License C.gint

License: type of license for an application.

This enumeration can be expanded at later date. 

const (
	// LicenseUnknown: no license specified.
	LicenseUnknown License = iota
	// LicenseCustom: license text is going to be specified by the developer.
	LicenseCustom
	// LicenseGPL20: GNU General Public License, version 2.0 or later.
	LicenseGPL20
	// LicenseGPL30: GNU General Public License, version 3.0 or later.
	LicenseGPL30
	// LicenseLGPL21: GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 or later.
	LicenseLGPL21
	// LicenseLGPL30: GNU Lesser General Public License, version 3.0 or later.
	LicenseLGPL30
	// LicenseBSD: BSD standard license.
	LicenseBSD
	// LicenseMITX11: MIT/X11 standard license.
	LicenseMITX11
	// LicenseArtistic: artistic License, version 2.0.
	LicenseArtistic
	// LicenseGPL20_Only: GNU General Public License, version 2.0 only.
	LicenseGPL20_Only
	// LicenseGPL30_Only: GNU General Public License, version 3.0 only.
	LicenseGPL30_Only
	// LicenseLGPL21_Only: GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 only.
	LicenseLGPL21_Only
	// LicenseLGPL30_Only: GNU Lesser General Public License, version 3.0 only.
	LicenseLGPL30_Only
	// LicenseAGPL30: GNU Affero General Public License, version 3.0 or later.
	LicenseAGPL30
	// LicenseAGPL30_Only: GNU Affero General Public License, version 3.0 only.
	LicenseAGPL30_Only
	// LicenseBSD3: 3-clause BSD licence.
	LicenseBSD3
	// LicenseApache20: apache License, version 2.0.
	LicenseApache20
	// LicenseMPL20: mozilla Public License, version 2.0.
	LicenseMPL20
)

func (License) String 

func (l License) String() string

String returns the name in string for License.

type LinkButton 

type LinkButton struct {
	Button
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LinkButton: GtkLinkButton is a button with a hyperlink.

!An example GtkLinkButton (link-button.png)

It is useful to show quick links to resources.

A link button is created by calling either gtk.LinkButton.New or gtk.LinkButton.NewWithLabel. If using the former, the URI you pass to the constructor is used as a label for the widget.

The URI bound to a GtkLinkButton can be set specifically using gtk.LinkButton.SetURI().

By default, GtkLinkButton calls gtk.ShowURI() when the button is clicked. This behaviour can be overridden by connecting to the gtk.LinkButton::activate-link signal and returning TRUE from the signal handler.

CSS nodes

GtkLinkButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain GtkButton, it gets the .link style class.

Accessibility

GtkLinkButton uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LINK role.

func NewLinkButton 

func NewLinkButton(uri string) *LinkButton

NewLinkButton creates a new GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: valid URI.

The function returns the following values:

  • linkButton: new link button widget.

func NewLinkButtonWithLabel 

func NewLinkButtonWithLabel(uri, label string) *LinkButton

NewLinkButtonWithLabel creates a new GtkLinkButton containing a label.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: valid URI.
  • label (optional): text of the button.

The function returns the following values:

  • linkButton: new link button widget.
func (linkButton *LinkButton) ConnectActivateLink(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateLink is emitted each time the GtkLinkButton is clicked.

The default handler will call gtk.ShowURI() with the URI stored inside the gtk.LinkButton:uri property.

To override the default behavior, you can connect to the ::activate-link signal and stop the propagation of the signal by returning TRUE from your handler.

func (*LinkButton) SetURI 

func (linkButton *LinkButton) SetURI(uri string)

SetURI sets uri as the URI where the GtkLinkButton points.

As a side-effect this unsets the “visited” state of the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: valid URI.

func (*LinkButton) SetVisited 

func (linkButton *LinkButton) SetVisited(visited bool)

SetVisited sets the “visited” state of the GtkLinkButton.

See gtk.LinkButton.GetVisited() for more details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visited: new “visited” state.

func (*LinkButton) URI 

func (linkButton *LinkButton) URI() string

URI retrieves the URI of the GtkLinkButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button and should not be modified or freed.

func (*LinkButton) Visited 

func (linkButton *LinkButton) Visited() bool

Visited retrieves the “visited” state of the GtkLinkButton.

The button becomes visited when it is clicked. If the URI is changed on the button, the “visited” state is unset again.

The state may also be changed using gtk.LinkButton.SetVisited().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the link has been visited, FALSE otherwise.

type ListBase 

type ListBase struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListBase: GtkListBase is the abstract base class for GTK's list widgets.

func BaseListBase 

func BaseListBase(obj ListBaser) *ListBase

BaseListBase returns the underlying base object.

type ListBaser 

type ListBaser interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ListBaser describes types inherited from class ListBase.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type ListBox 

type ListBox struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListBox: GtkListBox is a vertical list.

A GtkListBox only contains GtkListBoxRow children. These rows can by dynamically sorted and filtered, and headers can be added dynamically depending on the row content. It also allows keyboard and mouse navigation and selection like a typical list.

Using GtkListBox is often an alternative to GtkTreeView, especially when the list contents has a more complicated layout than what is allowed by a GtkCellRenderer, or when the contents is interactive (i.e. has a button in it).

Although a GtkListBox must have only GtkListBoxRow children, you can add any kind of widget to it via gtk.ListBox.Prepend(), gtk.ListBox.Append() and gtk.ListBox.Insert() and a GtkListBoxRow widget will automatically be inserted between the list and the widget.

GtkListBoxRows can be marked as activatable or selectable. If a row is activatable, gtk.ListBox::row-activated will be emitted for it when the user tries to activate it. If it is selectable, the row will be marked as selected when the user tries to select it.

GtkListBox as GtkBuildable

The GtkListBox implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports setting a child as the placeholder by specifying “placeholder” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. See gtk.ListBox.SetPlaceholder() for info.

CSS nodes 

list[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar]
╰── row[.activatable]

GtkListBox uses a single CSS node named list. It may carry the .separators style class, when the gtk.ListBox:show-separators property is set. Each GtkListBoxRow uses a single CSS node named row. The row nodes get the .activatable style class added when appropriate.

The main list node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation (section-list-widget.html#list-styles): .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.

Accessibility

GtkListBox uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST role and GtkListBoxRow uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST_ITEM role.

func NewListBox 

func NewListBox() *ListBox

NewListBox creates a new GtkListBox container.

The function returns the following values:

  • listBox: new GtkListBox.

func (*ListBox) ActivateOnSingleClick 

func (box *ListBox) ActivateOnSingleClick() bool

ActivateOnSingleClick returns whether rows activate on single clicks.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rows are activated on single click, FALSE otherwise.

func (*ListBox) Adjustment 

func (box *ListBox) Adjustment() *Adjustment

Adjustment gets the adjustment (if any) that the widget uses to for vertical scrolling.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: adjustment.

func (*ListBox) Append 

func (box *ListBox) Append(child Widgetter)

Append a widget to the list.

If a sort function is set, the widget will actually be inserted at the calculated position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to add.

func (*ListBox) BindModel 

func (box *ListBox) BindModel(model gio.ListModeller, createWidgetFunc ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc)

BindModel binds model to box.

If box was already bound to a model, that previous binding is destroyed.

The contents of box are cleared and then filled with widgets that represent items from model. box is updated whenever model changes. If model is NULL, box is left empty.

It is undefined to add or remove widgets directly (for example, with gtk.ListBox.Insert()) while box is bound to a model.

Note that using a model is incompatible with the filtering and sorting functionality in GtkListBox. When using a model, filtering and sorting should be implemented by the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to be bound to box.
  • createWidgetFunc (optional): function that creates widgets for items or NULL in case you also passed NULL as model.

func (*ListBox) ConnectActivateCursorRow 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectActivateCursorRow(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*ListBox) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(object MovementStep, p0 int, p1, p2 bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*ListBox) ConnectRowActivated 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectRowActivated(f func(row *ListBoxRow)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowActivated is emitted when a row has been activated by the user.

func (*ListBox) ConnectRowSelected 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectRowSelected(f func(row *ListBoxRow)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowSelected is emitted when a new row is selected, or (with a NULL row) when the selection is cleared.

When the box is using GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, this signal will not give you the full picture of selection changes, and you should use the gtk.ListBox::selected-rows-changed signal instead.

func (*ListBox) ConnectSelectAll 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectSelectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectAll is emitted to select all children of the box, if the selection mode permits it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd>.

func (*ListBox) ConnectSelectedRowsChanged 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectSelectedRowsChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectedRowsChanged is emitted when the set of selected rows changes.

func (*ListBox) ConnectToggleCursorRow 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectToggleCursorRow(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*ListBox) ConnectUnselectAll 

func (box *ListBox) ConnectUnselectAll(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnselectAll is emitted to unselect all children of the box, if the selection mode permits it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd>.

func (*ListBox) DragHighlightRow 

func (box *ListBox) DragHighlightRow(row *ListBoxRow)

DragHighlightRow: add a drag highlight to a row.

This is a helper function for implementing DnD onto a GtkListBox. The passed in row will be highlighted by setting the GTK_STATE_FLAG_DROP_ACTIVE state and any previously highlighted row will be unhighlighted.

The row will also be unhighlighted when the widget gets a drag leave event.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row: GtkListBoxRow.

func (*ListBox) DragUnhighlightRow 

func (box *ListBox) DragUnhighlightRow()

DragUnhighlightRow: if a row has previously been highlighted via gtk_list_box_drag_highlight_row(), it will have the highlight removed.

func (*ListBox) Insert 

func (box *ListBox) Insert(child Widgetter, position int)

Insert the child into the box at position.

If a sort function is set, the widget will actually be inserted at the calculated position.

If position is -1, or larger than the total number of items in the box, then the child will be appended to the end.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to add.
  • position to insert child in.

func (*ListBox) InvalidateFilter 

func (box *ListBox) InvalidateFilter()

InvalidateFilter: update the filtering for all rows.

Call this when result of the filter function on the box is changed due to an external factor. For instance, this would be used if the filter function just looked for a specific search string and the entry with the search string has changed.

func (*ListBox) InvalidateHeaders 

func (box *ListBox) InvalidateHeaders()

InvalidateHeaders: update the separators for all rows.

Call this when result of the header function on the box is changed due to an external factor.

func (*ListBox) InvalidateSort 

func (box *ListBox) InvalidateSort()

InvalidateSort: update the sorting for all rows.

Call this when result of the sort function on the box is changed due to an external factor.

func (*ListBox) Prepend 

func (box *ListBox) Prepend(child Widgetter)

Prepend a widget to the list.

If a sort function is set, the widget will actually be inserted at the calculated position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to add.

func (*ListBox) Remove 

func (box *ListBox) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child from box.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.

func (*ListBox) RowAtIndex 

func (box *ListBox) RowAtIndex(index_ int) *ListBoxRow

RowAtIndex gets the n-th child in the list (not counting headers).

If index_ is negative or larger than the number of items in the list, NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: index of the row.

The function returns the following values:

  • listBoxRow (optional): child GtkWidget or NULL.

func (*ListBox) RowAtY 

func (box *ListBox) RowAtY(y int) *ListBoxRow

RowAtY gets the row at the y position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • y: position.

The function returns the following values:

  • listBoxRow (optional): row or NULL in case no row exists for the given y coordinate.

func (*ListBox) SelectAll 

func (box *ListBox) SelectAll()

SelectAll: select all children of box, if the selection mode allows it.

func (*ListBox) SelectRow 

func (box *ListBox) SelectRow(row *ListBoxRow)

SelectRow: make row the currently selected row.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row (optional) to select or NULL.

func (*ListBox) SelectedForEach 

func (box *ListBox) SelectedForEach(fn ListBoxForEachFunc)

SelectedForEach calls a function for each selected child.

Note that the selection cannot be modified from within this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call for each selected child.

func (*ListBox) SelectedRow 

func (box *ListBox) SelectedRow() *ListBoxRow

SelectedRow gets the selected row, or NULL if no rows are selected.

Note that the box may allow multiple selection, in which case you should use gtk.ListBox.SelectedForEach() to find all selected rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • listBoxRow (optional): selected row or NULL.

func (*ListBox) SelectedRows 

func (box *ListBox) SelectedRows() []*ListBoxRow

SelectedRows creates a list of all selected children.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: A GList containing the GtkWidget for each selected child. Free with g_list_free() when done.

func (*ListBox) SelectionMode 

func (box *ListBox) SelectionMode() SelectionMode

SelectionMode gets the selection mode of the listbox.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionMode: GtkSelectionMode.

func (*ListBox) SetActivateOnSingleClick 

func (box *ListBox) SetActivateOnSingleClick(single bool)

SetActivateOnSingleClick: if single is TRUE, rows will be activated when you click on them, otherwise you need to double-click.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • single: boolean.

func (*ListBox) SetAdjustment 

func (box *ListBox) SetAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetAdjustment sets the adjustment (if any) that the widget uses to for vertical scrolling.

For instance, this is used to get the page size for PageUp/Down key handling.

In the normal case when the box is packed inside a GtkScrolledWindow the adjustment from that will be picked up automatically, so there is no need to manually do that.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment (optional): adjustment, or NULL.

func (*ListBox) SetFilterFunc 

func (box *ListBox) SetFilterFunc(filterFunc ListBoxFilterFunc)

SetFilterFunc: by setting a filter function on the box one can decide dynamically which of the rows to show.

For instance, to implement a search function on a list that filters the original list to only show the matching rows.

The filter_func will be called for each row after the call, and it will continue to be called each time a row changes (via gtk.ListBoxRow.Changed()) or when gtk.ListBox.InvalidateFilter() is called.

Note that using a filter function is incompatible with using a model (see gtk.ListBox.BindModel()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filterFunc (optional): callback that lets you filter which rows to show.

func (*ListBox) SetHeaderFunc 

func (box *ListBox) SetHeaderFunc(updateHeader ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc)

SetHeaderFunc sets a header function.

By setting a header function on the box one can dynamically add headers in front of rows, depending on the contents of the row and its position in the list.

For instance, one could use it to add headers in front of the first item of a new kind, in a list sorted by the kind.

The update_header can look at the current header widget using gtk.ListBoxRow.GetHeader() and either update the state of the widget as needed, or set a new one using gtk.ListBoxRow.SetHeader(). If no header is needed, set the header to NULL.

Note that you may get many calls update_header to this for a particular row when e.g. changing things that don’t affect the header. In this case it is important for performance to not blindly replace an existing header with an identical one.

The update_header function will be called for each row after the call, and it will continue to be called each time a row changes (via gtk.ListBoxRow.Changed()) and when the row before changes (either by gtk.ListBoxRow.Changed() on the previous row, or when the previous row becomes a different row). It is also called for all rows when gtk.ListBox.InvalidateHeaders() is called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • updateHeader (optional): callback that lets you add row headers.

func (*ListBox) SetPlaceholder 

func (box *ListBox) SetPlaceholder(placeholder Widgetter)

SetPlaceholder sets the placeholder widget that is shown in the list when it doesn't display any visible children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • placeholder (optional) or NULL.

func (*ListBox) SetSelectionMode 

func (box *ListBox) SetSelectionMode(mode SelectionMode)

SetSelectionMode sets how selection works in the listbox.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: GtkSelectionMode.

func (*ListBox) SetShowSeparators 

func (box *ListBox) SetShowSeparators(showSeparators bool)

SetShowSeparators sets whether the list box should show separators between rows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showSeparators: TRUE to show separators.

func (*ListBox) SetSortFunc 

func (box *ListBox) SetSortFunc(sortFunc ListBoxSortFunc)

SetSortFunc sets a sort function.

By setting a sort function on the box one can dynamically reorder the rows of the list, based on the contents of the rows.

The sort_func will be called for each row after the call, and will continue to be called each time a row changes (via gtk.ListBoxRow.Changed()) and when gtk.ListBox.InvalidateSort() is called.

Note that using a sort function is incompatible with using a model (see gtk.ListBox.BindModel()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortFunc (optional): sort function.

func (*ListBox) ShowSeparators 

func (box *ListBox) ShowSeparators() bool

ShowSeparators returns whether the list box should show separators between rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the list box shows separators.

func (*ListBox) UnselectAll 

func (box *ListBox) UnselectAll()

UnselectAll: unselect all children of box, if the selection mode allows it.

func (*ListBox) UnselectRow 

func (box *ListBox) UnselectRow(row *ListBoxRow)

UnselectRow unselects a single row of box, if the selection mode allows it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • row to unselected.

type ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc 

type ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc func(item *coreglib.Object) (widget Widgetter)

ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc: called for list boxes that are bound to a GListModel with gtk_list_box_bind_model() for each item that gets added to the model.

type ListBoxFilterFunc 

type ListBoxFilterFunc func(row *ListBoxRow) (ok bool)

ListBoxFilterFunc will be called whenever the row changes or is added and lets you control if the row should be visible or not.

type ListBoxForEachFunc 

type ListBoxForEachFunc func(box *ListBox, row *ListBoxRow)

ListBoxForEachFunc: function used by gtk_list_box_selected_foreach().

It will be called on every selected child of the box.

type ListBoxRow 

type ListBoxRow struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Actionable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListBoxRow: GtkListBoxRow is the kind of widget that can be added to a GtkListBox.

func NewListBoxRow 

func NewListBoxRow() *ListBoxRow

NewListBoxRow creates a new GtkListBoxRow.

The function returns the following values:

  • listBoxRow: new GtkListBoxRow.

func (*ListBoxRow) Activatable 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Activatable() bool

Activatable gets whether the row is activatable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row is activatable.

func (*ListBoxRow) Changed 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Changed()

Changed marks row as changed, causing any state that depends on this to be updated.

This affects sorting, filtering and headers.

Note that calls to this method must be in sync with the data used for the row functions. For instance, if the list is mirroring some external data set, and *two* rows changed in the external data set then when you call gtk_list_box_row_changed() on the first row the sort function must only read the new data for the first of the two changed rows, otherwise the resorting of the rows will be wrong.

This generally means that if you don’t fully control the data model you have to duplicate the data that affects the listbox row functions into the row widgets themselves. Another alternative is to call gtk.ListBox.InvalidateSort() on any model change, but that is more expensive.

func (*ListBoxRow) Child 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of row.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of row.

func (*ListBoxRow) ConnectActivate 

func (row *ListBoxRow) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate: this is a keybinding signal, which will cause this row to be activated.

If you want to be notified when the user activates a row (by key or not), use the gtk.ListBox::row-activated signal on the row’s parent GtkListBox.

func (*ListBoxRow) Header 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Header() Widgetter

Header returns the current header of the row.

This can be used in a gtk.ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc to see if there is a header set already, and if so to update the state of it.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): current header, or NULL if none.

func (*ListBoxRow) Index 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Index() int

Index gets the current index of the row in its GtkListBox container.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the row, or -1 if the row is not in a listbox.

func (*ListBoxRow) IsSelected 

func (row *ListBoxRow) IsSelected() bool

IsSelected returns whether the child is currently selected in its GtkListBox container.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if row is selected.

func (*ListBoxRow) Selectable 

func (row *ListBoxRow) Selectable() bool

Selectable gets whether the row can be selected.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row is selectable.

func (*ListBoxRow) SetActivatable 

func (row *ListBoxRow) SetActivatable(activatable bool)

SetActivatable: set whether the row is activatable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • activatable: TRUE to mark the row as activatable.

func (*ListBoxRow) SetChild 

func (row *ListBoxRow) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*ListBoxRow) SetHeader 

func (row *ListBoxRow) SetHeader(header Widgetter)

SetHeader sets the current header of the row.

This is only allowed to be called from a gtk.ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc. It will replace any existing header in the row, and be shown in front of the row in the listbox.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • header (optional): header, or NULL.

func (*ListBoxRow) SetSelectable 

func (row *ListBoxRow) SetSelectable(selectable bool)

SetSelectable: set whether the row can be selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • selectable: TRUE to mark the row as selectable.

type ListBoxRowClass added in v0.0.5 

type ListBoxRowClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListBoxRowClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ListBoxRowClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (l *ListBoxRowClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type ListBoxRowOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ListBoxRowOverrides struct {
	Activate func()
}

ListBoxRowOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ListBoxSortFunc 

type ListBoxSortFunc func(row1, row2 *ListBoxRow) (gint int)

ListBoxSortFunc: compare two rows to determine which should be first.

type ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc 

type ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc func(row, before *ListBoxRow)

ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc: whenever row changes or which row is before row changes this is called, which lets you update the header on row.

You may remove or set a new one via gtk.ListBoxRow.SetHeader() or just change the state of the current header widget.

type ListItem 

type ListItem struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListItem: GtkListItem is used by list widgets to represent items in a GListModel.

The GtkListItems are managed by the list widget (with its factory) and cannot be created by applications, but they need to be populated by application code. This is done by calling gtk.ListItem.SetChild().

GtkListItems exist in 2 stages:

1. The unbound stage where the listitem is not currently connected to an item in the list. In that case, the gtk.ListItem:item property is set to NULL.

2. The bound stage where the listitem references an item from the list. The gtk.ListItem:item property is not NULL.

func (*ListItem) Activatable 

func (self *ListItem) Activatable() bool

Activatable checks if a list item has been set to be activatable via gtk_list_item_set_activatable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the item is activatable.

func (*ListItem) Child 

func (self *ListItem) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child previously set via gtk_list_item_set_child() or NULL if none was set.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child.

func (*ListItem) Item 

func (self *ListItem) Item() *coreglib.Object

Item gets the model item that associated with self.

If self is unbound, this function returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): item displayed.

func (*ListItem) Position 

func (self *ListItem) Position() uint

Position gets the position in the model that self currently displays.

If self is unbound, GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: position of this item.

func (*ListItem) Selectable 

func (self *ListItem) Selectable() bool

Selectable checks if a list item has been set to be selectable via gtk_list_item_set_selectable().

Do not confuse this function with gtk.ListItem.GetSelected().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the item is selectable.

func (*ListItem) Selected 

func (self *ListItem) Selected() bool

Selected checks if the item is displayed as selected.

The selected state is maintained by the liste widget and its model and cannot be set otherwise.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the item is selected.

func (*ListItem) SetActivatable 

func (self *ListItem) SetActivatable(activatable bool)

SetActivatable sets self to be activatable.

If an item is activatable, double-clicking on the item, using the Return key or calling gtk_widget_activate() will activate the item. Activating instructs the containing view to handle activation. GtkListView for example will be emitting the gtk.ListView::activate signal.

By default, list items are activatable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • activatable: if the item should be activatable.

func (*ListItem) SetChild 

func (self *ListItem) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child to be used for this listitem.

This function is typically called by applications when setting up a listitem so that the widget can be reused when binding it multiple times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): list item's child or NULL to unset.

func (*ListItem) SetSelectable 

func (self *ListItem) SetSelectable(selectable bool)

SetSelectable sets self to be selectable.

If an item is selectable, clicking on the item or using the keyboard will try to select or unselect the item. If this succeeds is up to the model to determine, as it is managing the selected state.

Note that this means that making an item non-selectable has no influence on the selected state at all. A non-selectable item may still be selected.

By default, list items are selectable. When rebinding them to a new item, they will also be reset to be selectable by GTK.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • selectable: if the item should be selectable.

type ListItemFactory 

type ListItemFactory struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListItemFactory: GtkListItemFactory creates widgets for the items taken from a GListModel.

This is one of the core concepts of handling list widgets such as gtk.ListView or gtk.GridView.

The GtkListItemFactory is tasked with creating widgets for items taken from the model when the views need them and updating them as the items displayed by the view change.

A view is usually only able to display anything after both a factory and a model have been set on the view. So it is important that you do not skip this step when setting up your first view.

Because views do not display the whole list at once but only a few items, they only need to maintain a few widgets at a time. They will instruct the GtkListItemFactory to create these widgets and bind them to the items that are currently displayed.

As the list model changes or the user scrolls to the list, the items will change and the view will instruct the factory to bind the widgets to those new items.

The actual widgets used for displaying those widgets is provided by you.

When the factory needs widgets created, it will create a GtkListItem and hand it to your code to set up a widget for. This list item will provide various properties with information about what item to display and provide you with some opportunities to configure its behavior. See the gtk.ListItem documentation for further details.

Various implementations of GtkListItemFactory exist to allow you different ways to provide those widgets. The most common implementations are gtk.BuilderListItemFactory which takes a GtkBuilder .ui file and then creates widgets and manages everything automatically from the information in that file and gtk.SignalListItemFactory which allows you to connect to signals with your own code and retain full control over how the widgets are setup and managed.

A GtkListItemFactory is supposed to be final - that means its behavior should not change and the first widget created from it should behave the same way as the last widget created from it. If you intend to do changes to the behavior, it is recommended that you create a new GtkListItemFactory which will allow the views to recreate its widgets.

Once you have chosen your factory and created it, you need to set it on the view widget you want to use it with, such as via gtk.ListView.SetFactory(). Reusing factories across different views is allowed, but very uncommon.

type ListStore 

type ListStore struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Buildable
	TreeDragDest
	TreeDragSource
	TreeSortable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListStore: list-like data structure that can be used with the GtkTreeView

The ListStore object is a list model for use with a TreeView widget. It implements the TreeModel interface, and consequentialy, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the TreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree [drag and drop][gtk4-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop] interfaces.

The ListStore can accept most GObject types as a column type, though it can’t accept all custom types. Internally, it will keep a copy of data passed in (such as a string or a boxed pointer). Columns that accept #GObjects are handled a little differently. The ListStore will keep a reference to the object instead of copying the value. As a result, if the object is modified, it is up to the application writer to call gtk_tree_model_row_changed() to emit the TreeModel::row_changed signal. This most commonly affects lists with Textures stored.

An example for creating a simple list store: 

<object class="GtkListStore">
  <columns>
    <column type="gchararray"/>
    <column type="gchararray"/>
    <column type="gint"/>
  </columns>
  <data>
    <row>
      <col id="0">John</col>
      <col id="1">Doe</col>
      <col id="2">25</col>
    </row>
    <row>
      <col id="0">Johan</col>
      <col id="1">Dahlin</col>
      <col id="2">50</col>
    </row>
  </data>
</object>.

func NewListStore 

func NewListStore(types []coreglib.Type) *ListStore

NewListStore: non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types: array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last.

The function returns the following values:

  • listStore: new ListStore.

func (*ListStore) Append 

func (listStore *ListStore) Append() *TreeIter

Append appends a new row to list_store. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the appended row.

func (*ListStore) Clear 

func (listStore *ListStore) Clear()

Clear removes all rows from the list store.

func (*ListStore) Insert 

func (listStore *ListStore) Insert(position int) *TreeIter

Insert creates a new row at position. iter will be changed to point to this new row. If position is -1 or is larger than the number of rows on the list, then the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to insert the new row, or -1 for last.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*ListStore) InsertAfter 

func (listStore *ListStore) InsertAfter(sibling *TreeIter) *TreeIter

InsertAfter inserts a new row after sibling. If sibling is NULL, then the row will be prepended to the beginning of the list. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sibling (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*ListStore) InsertBefore 

func (listStore *ListStore) InsertBefore(sibling *TreeIter) *TreeIter

InsertBefore inserts a new row before sibling. If sibling is NULL, then the row will be appended to the end of the list. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sibling (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*ListStore) InsertWithValues 

func (listStore *ListStore) InsertWithValues(position int, columns []int, values []coreglib.Value) *TreeIter

InsertWithValues: variant of gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() which takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs.

This function is mainly intended for language-bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to insert the new row, or -1 for last.
  • columns: array of column numbers.
  • values: array of GValues.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter (optional): unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*ListStore) IterIsValid 

func (listStore *ListStore) IterIsValid(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterIsValid: > This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing > purposes.

Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this ListStore.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the iter is valid, FALSE if the iter is invalid.

func (*ListStore) MoveAfter 

func (store *ListStore) MoveAfter(iter, position *TreeIter)

MoveAfter moves iter in store to the position after position. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores. If position is NULL, iter will be moved to the start of the list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.
  • position (optional) or NULL.

func (*ListStore) MoveBefore 

func (store *ListStore) MoveBefore(iter, position *TreeIter)

MoveBefore moves iter in store to the position before position. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores. If position is NULL, iter will be moved to the end of the list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.
  • position (optional) or NULL.

func (*ListStore) Prepend 

func (listStore *ListStore) Prepend() *TreeIter

Prepend prepends a new row to list_store. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the prepend row.

func (*ListStore) Remove 

func (listStore *ListStore) Remove(iter *TreeIter) bool

Remove removes the given row from the list store. After being removed, iter is set to be the next valid row, or invalidated if it pointed to the last row in list_store.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is valid, FALSE if not.

func (*ListStore) Reorder 

func (store *ListStore) Reorder(newOrder []int)

Reorder reorders store to follow the order indicated by new_order. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • newOrder: array of integers mapping the new position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering, i.e. new_order[newpos] = oldpos. It must have exactly as many items as the list store’s length.

func (*ListStore) Set 

func (listStore *ListStore) Set(iter *TreeIter, columns []int, values []coreglib.Value)

Set: variant of gtk_list_store_set_valist() which takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs. This function is mainly intended for language-bindings and in case the number of columns to change is not known until run-time.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter for the row being modified.
  • columns: array of column numbers.
  • values: array of GValues.

func (*ListStore) SetColumnTypes 

func (listStore *ListStore) SetColumnTypes(types []coreglib.Type)

SetColumnTypes: this function is meant primarily for #GObjects that inherit from ListStore, and should only be used when constructing a new ListStore. It will not function after a row has been added, or a method on the TreeModel interface is called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types: array length n of #GTypes.

func (*ListStore) SetValue 

func (listStore *ListStore) SetValue(iter *TreeIter, column int, value *coreglib.Value)

SetValue sets the data in the cell specified by iter and column. The type of value must be convertible to the type of the column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter for the row being modified.
  • column number to modify.
  • value: new value for the cell.

func (*ListStore) Swap 

func (store *ListStore) Swap(a, b *TreeIter)

Swap swaps a and b in store. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • a: TreeIter.
  • b: another TreeIter.

type ListStoreClass added in v0.0.5 

type ListStoreClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListStoreClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ListStoreOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ListStoreOverrides struct {
}

ListStoreOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ListView 

type ListView struct {
	ListBase
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListView: GtkListView presents a large dynamic list of items.

GtkListView uses its factory to generate one row widget for each visible item and shows them in a linear display, either vertically or horizontally.

The gtk.ListView:show-separators property offers a simple way to display separators between the rows.

GtkListView allows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on _rubberband selection_, using gtk.ListView:enable-rubberband.

If you need multiple columns with headers, see gtk.ColumnView.

To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview (section-list-widget.html).

An example of using GtkListView: 

static void
setup_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory,
                   GtkListItem        *list_item)
{
  GtkWidget *image;

  image = gtk_image_new ();
  gtk_image_set_icon_size (GTK_IMAGE (image), GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE);
  gtk_list_item_set_child (list_item, image);
}

static void
bind_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory,
                  GtkListItem        *list_item)
{
  GtkWidget *image;
  GAppInfo *app_info;

  image = gtk_list_item_get_child (list_item);
  app_info = gtk_list_item_get_item (list_item);
  gtk_image_set_from_gicon (GTK_IMAGE (image), g_app_info_get_icon (app_info));
}

static void
activate_cb (GtkListView  *list,
             guint         position,
             gpointer      unused)
{
  GAppInfo *app_info;

  app_info = g_list_model_get_item (G_LIST_MODEL (gtk_list_view_get_model (list)), position);
  g_app_info_launch (app_info, NULL, NULL, NULL);
  g_object_unref (app_info);
}

...

  model = create_application_list ();

  factory = gtk_signal_list_item_factory_new ();
  g_signal_connect (factory, "setup", G_CALLBACK (setup_listitem_cb), NULL);
  g_signal_connect (factory, "bind", G_CALLBACK (bind_listitem_cb), NULL);

  list = gtk_list_view_new (GTK_SELECTION_MODEL (gtk_single_selection_new (model)), factory);

  g_signal_connect (list, "activate", G_CALLBACK (activate_cb), NULL);

  gtk_scrolled_window_set_child (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (sw), list);

CSS nodes 

listview[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table]
├── row
│
├── row
│
┊
╰── [rubberband]

GtkListView uses a single CSS node named listview. It may carry the .separators style class, when GtkListView:show-separators property is set. Each child widget uses a single CSS node named row. For rubberband selection, a node with name rubberband is used.

The main listview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation (ListContainers.html#list-styles): .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.

Accessibility

GtkListView uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST role, and the list items use the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST_ITEM role.

func NewListView 

func NewListView(model SelectionModeller, factory *ListItemFactory) *ListView

NewListView creates a new GtkListView that uses the given factory for mapping items to widgets.

The function takes ownership of the arguments, so you can write code like 

list_view = gtk_list_view_new (create_model (),
  gtk_builder_list_item_factory_new_from_resource ("/resource.ui"));.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use, or NULL.
  • factory (optional) to populate items with, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • listView: new GtkListView using the given model and factory.

func (*ListView) ConnectActivate 

func (self *ListView) ConnectActivate(f func(position uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when a row has been activated by the user, usually via activating the GtkListView|list.activate-item action.

This allows for a convenient way to handle activation in a listview. See gtk.ListItem.SetActivatable() for details on how to use this signal.

func (*ListView) EnableRubberband 

func (self *ListView) EnableRubberband() bool

EnableRubberband returns whether rows can be selected by dragging with the mouse.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rubberband selection is enabled.

func (*ListView) Factory 

func (self *ListView) Factory() *ListItemFactory

Factory gets the factory that's currently used to populate list items.

The function returns the following values:

  • listItemFactory (optional): factory in use.

func (*ListView) Model 

func (self *ListView) Model() *SelectionModel

Model gets the model that's currently used to read the items displayed.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionModel (optional): model in use.

func (*ListView) SetEnableRubberband 

func (self *ListView) SetEnableRubberband(enableRubberband bool)

SetEnableRubberband sets whether selections can be changed by dragging with the mouse.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableRubberband: TRUE to enable rubberband selection.

func (*ListView) SetFactory 

func (self *ListView) SetFactory(factory *ListItemFactory)

SetFactory sets the GtkListItemFactory to use for populating list items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factory (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*ListView) SetModel 

func (self *ListView) SetModel(model SelectionModeller)

SetModel sets the model to use.

This must be a gtk.SelectionModel to use.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use or NULL for none.

func (*ListView) SetShowSeparators 

func (self *ListView) SetShowSeparators(showSeparators bool)

SetShowSeparators sets whether the list box should show separators between rows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showSeparators: TRUE to show separators.

func (*ListView) SetSingleClickActivate 

func (self *ListView) SetSingleClickActivate(singleClickActivate bool)

SetSingleClickActivate sets whether rows should be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • singleClickActivate: TRUE to activate items on single click.

func (*ListView) ShowSeparators 

func (self *ListView) ShowSeparators() bool

ShowSeparators returns whether the list box should show separators between rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the list box shows separators.

func (*ListView) SingleClickActivate 

func (self *ListView) SingleClickActivate() bool

SingleClickActivate returns whether rows will be activated on single click and selected on hover.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rows are activated on single click.

type LockButton 

type LockButton struct {
	Button
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

LockButton: GtkLockButton is a widget to obtain and revoke authorizations needed to operate the controls.

!An example GtkLockButton (lock-button.png)

It is typically used in preference dialogs or control panels.

The required authorization is represented by a GPermission object. Concrete implementations of GPermission may use PolicyKit or some other authorization framework. To obtain a PolicyKit-based GPermission, use polkit_permission_new().

If the user is not currently allowed to perform the action, but can obtain the permission, the widget looks like this:

! (lockbutton-locked.png)

and the user can click the button to request the permission. Depending on the platform, this may pop up an authentication dialog or ask the user to authenticate in some other way. Once the user has obtained the permission, the widget changes to this:

! (lockbutton-unlocked.png)

and the permission can be dropped again by clicking the button. If the user is not able to obtain the permission at all, the widget looks like this:

! (lockbutton-sorry.png)

If the user has the permission and cannot drop it, the button is hidden.

The text (and tooltips) that are shown in the various cases can be adjusted with the gtk.LockButton:text-lock, gtk.LockButton:text-unlock, gtk.LockButton:tooltip-lock, gtk.LockButton:tooltip-unlock and gtk.LockButton:tooltip-not-authorized properties.

func NewLockButton 

func NewLockButton(permission gio.Permissioner) *LockButton

NewLockButton creates a new lock button which reflects the permission.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • permission (optional): GPermission.

The function returns the following values:

  • lockButton: new GtkLockButton.

func (*LockButton) Permission 

func (button *LockButton) Permission() gio.Permissioner

Permission obtains the GPermission object that controls button.

The function returns the following values:

  • permission: GPermission of button.

func (*LockButton) SetPermission 

func (button *LockButton) SetPermission(permission gio.Permissioner)

SetPermission sets the GPermission object that controls button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • permission (optional): GPermission object, or NULL.

type MapListModel 

type MapListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MapListModel: GtkMapListModel maps the items in a list model to different items.

GtkMapListModel uses a gtk.MapListModelMapFunc.

Example: Create a list of GtkEventControllers 

static gpointer
map_to_controllers (gpointer widget,
                    gpointer data)
{
  gpointer result = gtk_widget_observe_controllers (widget);
  g_object_unref (widget);
  return result;
}

widgets = gtk_widget_observe_children (widget);

controllers = gtk_map_list_model_new (G_TYPE_LIST_MODEL,
                                      widgets,
                                      map_to_controllers,
                                      NULL, NULL);

model = gtk_flatten_list_model_new (GTK_TYPE_EVENT_CONTROLLER,
                                    controllers);

GtkMapListModel will attempt to discard the mapped objects as soon as they are no longer needed and recreate them if necessary.

func NewMapListModel 

func NewMapListModel(model gio.ListModeller, mapFunc MapListModelMapFunc) *MapListModel

NewMapListModel creates a new GtkMapListModel for the given arguments.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to map or NULL for none.
  • mapFunc (optional): map function or NULL to not map items.

The function returns the following values:

  • mapListModel: new GtkMapListModel.

func (*MapListModel) HasMap 

func (self *MapListModel) HasMap() bool

HasMap checks if a map function is currently set on self.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a map function is set.

func (*MapListModel) Model 

func (self *MapListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model that is currently being mapped or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model that gets mapped.

func (*MapListModel) SetMapFunc 

func (self *MapListModel) SetMapFunc(mapFunc MapListModelMapFunc)

SetMapFunc sets the function used to map items.

The function will be called whenever an item needs to be mapped and must return the item to use for the given input item.

Note that GtkMapListModel may call this function multiple times on the same item, because it may delete items it doesn't need anymore.

GTK makes no effort to ensure that map_func conforms to the item type of self. It assumes that the caller knows what they are doing and the map function returns items of the appropriate type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mapFunc (optional): map function or NULL to not map items.

func (*MapListModel) SetModel 

func (self *MapListModel) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model to be mapped.

GTK makes no effort to ensure that model conforms to the item type expected by the map function. It assumes that the caller knows what they are doing and have set up an appropriate map function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be mapped.

type MapListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type MapListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MapListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type MapListModelMapFunc 

type MapListModelMapFunc func(item *coreglib.Object) (object *coreglib.Object)

MapListModelMapFunc: user function that is called to map an item of the original model to an item expected by the map model.

The returned items must conform to the item type of the model they are used with.

type MapListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MapListModelOverrides struct {
}

MapListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MediaControls 

type MediaControls struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaControls: GtkMediaControls is a widget to show controls for a video.

!An example GtkMediaControls (media-controls.png)

Usually, GtkMediaControls is used as part of gtk.Video.

func NewMediaControls 

func NewMediaControls(stream MediaStreamer) *MediaControls

NewMediaControls creates a new GtkMediaControls managing the stream passed to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream (optional) to manage or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaControls: new GtkMediaControls.

func (*MediaControls) MediaStream 

func (controls *MediaControls) MediaStream() MediaStreamer

MediaStream gets the media stream managed by controls or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaStream (optional): media stream managed by controls.

func (*MediaControls) SetMediaStream 

func (controls *MediaControls) SetMediaStream(stream MediaStreamer)

SetMediaStream sets the stream that is controlled by controls.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream (optional): GtkMediaStream, or NULL.

type MediaControlsClass added in v0.0.5 

type MediaControlsClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaControlsClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*MediaControlsClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (m *MediaControlsClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type MediaControlsOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MediaControlsOverrides struct {
}

MediaControlsOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MediaFile 

type MediaFile struct {
	MediaStream
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaFile: GtkMediaFile implements GtkMediaStream for files.

This provides a simple way to play back video files with GTK.

GTK provides a GIO extension point for GtkMediaFile implementations to allow for external implementations using various media frameworks.

GTK itself includes implementations using GStreamer and ffmpeg.

func BaseMediaFile 

func BaseMediaFile(obj MediaFiler) *MediaFile

BaseMediaFile returns the underlying base object.

func NewMediaFile 

func NewMediaFile() *MediaFile

NewMediaFile creates a new empty media file.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaFile: new GtkMediaFile.

func NewMediaFileForFile 

func NewMediaFileForFile(file gio.Filer) *MediaFile

NewMediaFileForFile creates a new media file to play file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file to play.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaFile: new GtkMediaFile playing file.

func NewMediaFileForFilename 

func NewMediaFileForFilename(filename string) *MediaFile

NewMediaFileForFilename creates a new media file for the given filename.

This is a utility function that converts the given filename to a GFile and calls gtk.MediaFile.NewForFile.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename to open.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaFile: new GtkMediaFile playing filename.

func NewMediaFileForInputStream 

func NewMediaFileForInputStream(stream gio.InputStreamer) *MediaFile

NewMediaFileForInputStream creates a new media file to play stream.

If you want the resulting media to be seekable, the stream should implement the GSeekable interface.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream to play.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaFile: new GtkMediaFile.

func NewMediaFileForResource 

func NewMediaFileForResource(resourcePath string) *MediaFile

NewMediaFileForResource creates a new new media file for the given resource.

This is a utility function that converts the given resource to a GFile and calls gtk.MediaFile.NewForFile.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath: resource path to open.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaFile: new GtkMediaFile playing resource_path.

func (*MediaFile) Clear 

func (self *MediaFile) Clear()

Clear resets the media file to be empty.

func (*MediaFile) File 

func (self *MediaFile) File() *gio.File

File returns the file that self is currently playing from.

When self is not playing or not playing from a file, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • file (optional): currently playing file or NULL if not playing from a file.

func (*MediaFile) InputStream 

func (self *MediaFile) InputStream() gio.InputStreamer

InputStream returns the stream that self is currently playing from.

When self is not playing or not playing from a stream, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • inputStream (optional): currently playing stream or NULL if not playing from a stream.

func (*MediaFile) SetFile 

func (self *MediaFile) SetFile(file gio.Filer)

SetFile sets the GtkMediaFile to play the given file.

If any file is still playing, stop playing it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional) to play.

func (*MediaFile) SetFilename 

func (self *MediaFile) SetFilename(filename string)

SetFilename sets the `GtkMediaFile to play the given file.

This is a utility function that converts the given filename to a GFile and calls gtk.MediaFile.SetFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional): name of file to play.

func (*MediaFile) SetInputStream 

func (self *MediaFile) SetInputStream(stream gio.InputStreamer)

SetInputStream sets the GtkMediaFile to play the given stream.

If anything is still playing, stop playing it.

Full control about the stream is assumed for the duration of playback. The stream will not be closed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream (optional) to play from.

func (*MediaFile) SetResource 

func (self *MediaFile) SetResource(resourcePath string)

SetResource sets the `GtkMediaFile to play the given resource.

This is a utility function that converts the given resource_path to a GFile and calls gtk.MediaFile.SetFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): path to resource to play.

type MediaFileClass added in v0.0.5 

type MediaFileClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaFileClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*MediaFileClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (m *MediaFileClass) ParentClass() *MediaStreamClass

type MediaFileOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MediaFileOverrides struct {
	Close func()
	Open  func()
}

MediaFileOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MediaFiler 

type MediaFiler interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

MediaFiler describes types inherited from class MediaFile.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type MediaStream 

type MediaStream struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gdk.Paintable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaStream: GtkMediaStream is the integration point for media playback inside GTK.

GTK provides an implementation of the GtkMediaStream interface that is called gtk.MediaFile.

Apart from application-facing API for stream playback, GtkMediaStream has a number of APIs that are only useful for implementations and should not be used in applications: gtk.MediaStream.Prepared(), gtk.MediaStream.Unprepared(), gtk.MediaStream.Update(), gtk.MediaStream.Ended(), gtk.MediaStream.SeekSuccess(), gtk.MediaStream.SeekFailed(), gtk.MediaStream.GError(), gtk.MediaStream.Error(), gtk.MediaStream.ErrorValist().

func BaseMediaStream 

func BaseMediaStream(obj MediaStreamer) *MediaStream

BaseMediaStream returns the underlying base object.

func (*MediaStream) Duration 

func (self *MediaStream) Duration() int64

Duration gets the duration of the stream.

If the duration is not known, 0 will be returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint64: duration of the stream or 0 if not known.

func (*MediaStream) Ended 

func (self *MediaStream) Ended()

Ended pauses the media stream and marks it as ended.

This is a hint only, calls to GtkMediaStream.play() may still happen.

The media stream must be prepared when this function is called.

func (*MediaStream) Error 

func (self *MediaStream) Error() error

Error: if the stream is in an error state, returns the GError explaining that state.

Any type of error can be reported here depending on the implementation of the media stream.

A media stream in an error cannot be operated on, calls like gtk.MediaStream.Play() or gtk.MediaStream.Seek() will not have any effect.

GtkMediaStream itself does not provide a way to unset an error, but implementations may provide options. For example, a gtk.MediaFile will unset errors when a new source is set, e.g. with gtk.MediaFile.SetFile().

The function returns the following values:

  • err (optional): NULL if not in an error state or the GError of the stream.

func (*MediaStream) GError 

func (self *MediaStream) GError(err error)

GError sets self into an error state.

This will pause the stream (you can check for an error via gtk.MediaStream.GetError() in your GtkMediaStream.pause() implementation), abort pending seeks and mark the stream as prepared.

if the stream is already in an error state, this call will be ignored and the existing error will be retained.

To unset an error, the stream must be reset via a call to gtk.MediaStream.Unprepared().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • err: GError to set.

func (*MediaStream) GetEnded 

func (self *MediaStream) GetEnded() bool

GetEnded returns whether the streams playback is finished.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if playback is finished.

func (*MediaStream) HasAudio 

func (self *MediaStream) HasAudio() bool

HasAudio returns whether the stream has audio.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream has audio.

func (*MediaStream) HasVideo 

func (self *MediaStream) HasVideo() bool

HasVideo returns whether the stream has video.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream has video.

func (*MediaStream) IsPrepared 

func (self *MediaStream) IsPrepared() bool

IsPrepared returns whether the stream has finished initializing.

At this point the existence of audio and video is known.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream is prepared.

func (*MediaStream) IsSeekable 

func (self *MediaStream) IsSeekable() bool

IsSeekable checks if a stream may be seekable.

This is meant to be a hint. Streams may not allow seeking even if this function returns TRUE. However, if this function returns FALSE, streams are guaranteed to not be seekable and user interfaces may hide controls that allow seeking.

It is allowed to call gtk.MediaStream.Seek() on a non-seekable stream, though it will not do anything.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream may support seeking.

func (*MediaStream) IsSeeking 

func (self *MediaStream) IsSeeking() bool

IsSeeking checks if there is currently a seek operation going on.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a seek operation is ongoing.

func (*MediaStream) Loop 

func (self *MediaStream) Loop() bool

Loop returns whether the stream is set to loop.

See gtk.MediaStream.SetLoop() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream should loop.

func (*MediaStream) Muted 

func (self *MediaStream) Muted() bool

Muted returns whether the audio for the stream is muted.

See gtk.MediaStream.SetMuted() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream is muted.

func (*MediaStream) Pause 

func (self *MediaStream) Pause()

Pause pauses playback of the stream.

If the stream is not playing, do nothing.

func (*MediaStream) Play 

func (self *MediaStream) Play()

Play starts playing the stream.

If the stream is in error or already playing, do nothing.

func (*MediaStream) Playing 

func (self *MediaStream) Playing() bool

Playing: return whether the stream is currently playing.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the stream is playing.

func (*MediaStream) Prepared 

func (self *MediaStream) Prepared(hasAudio, hasVideo, seekable bool, duration int64)

Prepared: called by GtkMediaStream implementations to advertise the stream being ready to play and providing details about the stream.

Note that the arguments are hints. If the stream implementation cannot determine the correct values, it is better to err on the side of caution and return TRUE. User interfaces will use those values to determine what controls to show.

This function may not be called again until the stream has been reset via gtk.MediaStream.Unprepared().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasAudio: TRUE if the stream should advertise audio support.
  • hasVideo: TRUE if the stream should advertise video support.
  • seekable: TRUE if the stream should advertise seekability.
  • duration of the stream or 0 if unknown.

func (*MediaStream) Realize 

func (self *MediaStream) Realize(surface gdk.Surfacer)

Realize: called by users to attach the media stream to a GdkSurface they manage.

The stream can then access the resources of surface for its rendering purposes. In particular, media streams might want to create a GdkGLContext or sync to the GdkFrameClock.

Whoever calls this function is responsible for calling gtk.MediaStream.Unrealize() before either the stream or surface get destroyed.

Multiple calls to this function may happen from different users of the video, even with the same surface. Each of these calls must be followed by its own call to gtk.MediaStream.Unrealize().

It is not required to call this function to make a media stream work.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • surface: GdkSurface.

func (*MediaStream) Seek 

func (self *MediaStream) Seek(timestamp int64)

Seek: start a seek operation on self to timestamp.

If timestamp is out of range, it will be clamped.

Seek operations may not finish instantly. While a seek operation is in process, the gtk.MediaStream:seeking property will be set.

When calling gtk_media_stream_seek() during an ongoing seek operation, the new seek will override any pending seek.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • timestamp to seek to.

func (*MediaStream) SeekFailed 

func (self *MediaStream) SeekFailed()

SeekFailed ends a seek operation started via GtkMediaStream.seek() as a failure.

This will not cause an error on the stream and will assume that playback continues as if no seek had happened.

See gtk.MediaStream.SeekSuccess() for the other way of ending a seek.

func (*MediaStream) SeekSuccess 

func (self *MediaStream) SeekSuccess()

SeekSuccess ends a seek operation started via GtkMediaStream.seek() successfully.

This function will unset the GtkMediaStream:ended property if it was set.

See gtk.MediaStream.SeekFailed() for the other way of ending a seek.

func (*MediaStream) SetLoop 

func (self *MediaStream) SetLoop(loop bool)

SetLoop sets whether the stream should loop.

In this case, it will attempt to restart playback from the beginning instead of stopping at the end.

Not all streams may support looping, in particular non-seekable streams. Those streams will ignore the loop setting and just end.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • loop: TRUE if the stream should loop.

func (*MediaStream) SetMuted 

func (self *MediaStream) SetMuted(muted bool)

SetMuted sets whether the audio stream should be muted.

Muting a stream will cause no audio to be played, but it does not modify the volume. This means that muting and then unmuting the stream will restore the volume settings.

If the stream has no audio, calling this function will still work but it will not have an audible effect.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • muted: TRUE if the stream should be muted.

func (*MediaStream) SetPlaying 

func (self *MediaStream) SetPlaying(playing bool)

SetPlaying starts or pauses playback of the stream.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • playing: whether to start or pause playback.

func (*MediaStream) SetVolume 

func (self *MediaStream) SetVolume(volume float64)

SetVolume sets the volume of the audio stream.

This function call will work even if the stream is muted.

The given volume should range from 0.0 for silence to 1.0 for as loud as possible. Values outside of this range will be clamped to the nearest value.

If the stream has no audio or is muted, calling this function will still work but it will not have an immediate audible effect. When the stream is unmuted, the new volume setting will take effect.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • volume: new volume of the stream from 0.0 to 1.0.

func (*MediaStream) Timestamp 

func (self *MediaStream) Timestamp() int64

Timestamp returns the current presentation timestamp in microseconds.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint64: timestamp in microseconds.

func (*MediaStream) Unprepared 

func (self *MediaStream) Unprepared()

Unprepared resets a given media stream implementation.

gtk.MediaStream.Prepared() can then be called again.

This function will also reset any error state the stream was in.

func (*MediaStream) Unrealize 

func (self *MediaStream) Unrealize(surface gdk.Surfacer)

Unrealize undoes a previous call to gtk_media_stream_realize().

This causes the stream to release all resources it had allocated from surface.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • surface: GdkSurface the stream was realized with.

func (*MediaStream) Update 

func (self *MediaStream) Update(timestamp int64)

Update: media stream implementations should regularly call this function to update the timestamp reported by the stream.

It is up to implementations to call this at the frequency they deem appropriate.

The media stream must be prepared when this function is called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • timestamp: new timestamp.

func (*MediaStream) Volume 

func (self *MediaStream) Volume() float64

Volume returns the volume of the audio for the stream.

See gtk.MediaStream.SetVolume() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: volume of the stream from 0.0 to 1.0.

type MediaStreamClass added in v0.0.5 

type MediaStreamClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MediaStreamClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type MediaStreamOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MediaStreamOverrides struct {
	// Pause pauses playback of the stream.
	//
	// If the stream is not playing, do nothing.
	Pause func()
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Play func() bool
	// Realize: called by users to attach the media stream to a GdkSurface they
	// manage.
	//
	// The stream can then access the resources of surface for its rendering
	// purposes. In particular, media streams might want to create a
	// GdkGLContext or sync to the GdkFrameClock.
	//
	// Whoever calls this function is responsible for calling
	// gtk.MediaStream.Unrealize() before either the stream or surface get
	// destroyed.
	//
	// Multiple calls to this function may happen from different users of the
	// video, even with the same surface. Each of these calls must be followed
	// by its own call to gtk.MediaStream.Unrealize().
	//
	// It is not required to call this function to make a media stream work.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - surface: GdkSurface.
	//
	Realize func(surface gdk.Surfacer)
	// Seek: start a seek operation on self to timestamp.
	//
	// If timestamp is out of range, it will be clamped.
	//
	// Seek operations may not finish instantly. While a seek operation is in
	// process, the gtk.MediaStream:seeking property will be set.
	//
	// When calling gtk_media_stream_seek() during an ongoing seek operation,
	// the new seek will override any pending seek.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - timestamp to seek to.
	//
	Seek func(timestamp int64)
	// Unrealize undoes a previous call to gtk_media_stream_realize().
	//
	// This causes the stream to release all resources it had allocated from
	// surface.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - surface: GdkSurface the stream was realized with.
	//
	Unrealize func(surface gdk.Surfacer)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - muted
	//   - volume
	//
	UpdateAudio func(muted bool, volume float64)
}

MediaStreamOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MediaStreamer 

type MediaStreamer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

MediaStreamer describes types inherited from class MediaStream.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type. 

type MenuButton struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MenuButton: GtkMenuButton widget is used to display a popup when clicked.

!An example GtkMenuButton (menu-button.png)

This popup can be provided either as a GtkPopover or as an abstract GMenuModel.

The GtkMenuButton widget can show either an icon (set with the gtk.MenuButton:icon-name property) or a label (set with the gtk.MenuButton:label property). If neither is explicitly set, a gtk.Image is automatically created, using an arrow image oriented according to gtk.MenuButton:direction or the generic “open-menu-symbolic” icon if the direction is not set.

The positioning of the popup is determined by the gtk.MenuButton:direction property of the menu button.

For menus, the gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties of the menu are also taken into account. For example, when the direction is GTK_ARROW_DOWN and the horizontal alignment is GTK_ALIGN_START, the menu will be positioned below the button, with the starting edge (depending on the text direction) of the menu aligned with the starting edge of the button. If there is not enough space below the button, the menu is popped up above the button instead. If the alignment would move part of the menu offscreen, it is “pushed in”.

| | start | center | end | | - | --- | --- | --- | | **down** | ! (down-start.png) | ! (down-center.png) | ! (down-end.png) | | **up** | ! (up-start.png) | ! (up-center.png) | ! (up-end.png) | | **left** | ! (left-start.png) | ! (left-center.png) | ! (left-end.png) | | **right** | ! (right-start.png) | ! (right-center.png) | ! (right-end.png) |

CSS nodes 

menubutton
╰── button.toggle
    ╰── <content>
         ╰── [arrow]

GtkMenuButton has a single CSS node with name menubutton which contains a button node with a .toggle style class.

Inside the toggle button content, there is an arrow node for the indicator, which will carry one of the .none, .up, .down, .left or .right style classes to indicate the direction that the menu will appear in. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image for each of these cases using the -gtk-icon-source property.

Optionally, the menubutton node can carry the .circular style class to request a round appearance.

Accessibility

GtkMenuButton uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTON role.

func NewMenuButton 

func NewMenuButton() *MenuButton

NewMenuButton creates a new GtkMenuButton widget with downwards-pointing arrow as the only child.

You can replace the child widget with another GtkWidget should you wish to.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuButton: newly created GtkMenuButton.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) Direction() ArrowType

Direction returns the direction the popup will be pointing at when popped up.

The function returns the following values:

  • arrowType: GtkArrowType value.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) HasFrame() bool

HasFrame returns whether the button has a frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the button has a frame.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) IconName() string

IconName gets the name of the icon shown in the button.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of the icon shown in the button.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) Label() string

Label gets the label shown in the button.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: label shown in the button.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) MenuModel() gio.MenuModeller

MenuModel returns the GMenuModel used to generate the popup.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional): GMenuModel or NULL.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) Popdown()

Popdown dismiss the menu. 

func (menuButton *MenuButton) Popover() *Popover

Popover returns the GtkPopover that pops out of the button.

If the button is not using a GtkPopover, this function returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • popover (optional): GtkPopover or NULL.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) Popup()

Popup: pop up the menu. 

func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetCreatePopupFunc(fn MenuButtonCreatePopupFunc)

SetCreatePopupFunc sets func to be called when a popup is about to be shown.

func should use one of

  • gtk.MenuButton.SetPopover()
  • gtk.MenuButton.SetMenuModel()

to set a popup for menu_button. If func is non-NULL, menu_button will always be sensitive.

Using this function will not reset the menu widget attached to menu_button. Instead, this can be done manually in func.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): function to call when a popup is about to be shown, but none has been provided via other means, or NULL to reset to default behavior.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetDirection(direction ArrowType)

SetDirection sets the direction in which the popup will be popped up.

If the button is automatically populated with an arrow icon, its direction will be changed to match.

If the does not fit in the available space in the given direction, GTK will its best to keep it inside the screen and fully visible.

If you pass GTK_ARROW_NONE for a direction, the popup will behave as if you passed GTK_ARROW_DOWN (although you won’t see any arrows).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • direction: GtkArrowType.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetHasFrame(hasFrame bool)

SetHasFrame sets the style of the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasFrame: whether the button should have a visible frame.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetIconName(iconName string)

SetIconName sets the name of an icon to show inside the menu button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName: icon name.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetLabel(label string)

SetLabel sets the label to show inside the menu button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: label.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetMenuModel(menuModel gio.MenuModeller)

SetMenuModel sets the GMenuModel from which the popup will be constructed.

If menu_model is NULL, the button is disabled.

A gtk.Popover will be created from the menu model with gtk.PopoverMenu.NewFromModel. Actions will be connected as documented for this function.

If gtk.MenuButton:popover is already set, it will be dissociated from the menu_button, and the property is set to NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • menuModel (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL to unset and disable the button.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetPopover(popover Widgetter)

SetPopover sets the GtkPopover that will be popped up when the menu_button is clicked.

If popover is NULL, the button is disabled.

If gtk.MenuButton:menu-model is set, the menu model is dissociated from the menu_button, and the property is set to NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • popover (optional): GtkPopover, or NULL to unset and disable the button.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) SetUseUnderline(useUnderline bool)

SetUseUnderline: if true, an underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useUnderline: TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.
func (menuButton *MenuButton) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline returns whether an embedded underline in the text indicates a mnemonic.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE whether an embedded underline in the text indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
type MenuButtonCreatePopupFunc func(menuButton *MenuButton)

MenuButtonCreatePopupFunc: user-provided callback function to create a popup for a GtkMenuButton on demand.

This function is called when the popup of menu_button is shown, but none has been provided via gtk.MenuButton.SetPopover() or gtk.MenuButton.SetMenuModel().

type MessageDialog 

type MessageDialog struct {
	Dialog
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MessageDialog: GtkMessageDialog presents a dialog with some message text.

!An example GtkMessageDialog (messagedialog.png)

It’s simply a convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of GtkMessageDialog from GtkDialog without too much effort, but GtkMessageDialog saves typing.

The easiest way to do a modal message dialog is to use the GTK_DIALOG_MODAL flag, which will call gtk.Window.SetModal() internally. The dialog will prevent interaction with the parent window until it's hidden or destroyed. You can use the gtk.Dialog::response signal to know when the user dismissed the dialog.

An example for using a modal dialog: 

GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT | GTK_DIALOG_MODAL;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
                                 flags,
                                 GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
                                 GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
                                 "Error reading “s”: s",
                                 filename,
                                 g_strerror (errno));
// Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
// (e.g. clicks a button)

g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
                  G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
                  NULL);

You might do a non-modal GtkMessageDialog simply by omitting the GTK_DIALOG_MODAL flag: 

GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
                                 flags,
                                 GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
                                 GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
                                 "Error reading “s”: s",
                                 filename,
                                 g_strerror (errno));

// Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
// (e.g. clicks a button)
g_signal_connect (dialog, "response",
                  G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy),
                  NULL);

GtkMessageDialog as GtkBuildable

The GtkMessageDialog implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the message area as an internal child with the name “message_area”.

func NewMessageDialog 

func NewMessageDialog(parent *Window, flags DialogFlags, typ MessageType, buttons ButtonsType) *MessageDialog

NewMessageDialog creates a new message dialog. This is a simple dialog with some text taht the user may want to see. When the user clicks a button, a "response" signal is emitted with response IDs from ResponseType.

func (*MessageDialog) MessageArea 

func (messageDialog *MessageDialog) MessageArea() Widgetter

MessageArea returns the message area of the dialog.

This is the box where the dialog’s primary and secondary labels are packed. You can add your own extra content to that box and it will appear below those labels. See gtk.Dialog.GetContentArea() for the corresponding function in the parent gtk.Dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: GtkBox corresponding to the “message area” in the message_dialog.

func (*MessageDialog) SetMarkup 

func (messageDialog *MessageDialog) SetMarkup(str string)

SetMarkup sets the text of the message dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string with Pango markup.

type MessageType 

type MessageType C.gint

MessageType: type of message being displayed in a GtkMessageDialog. 

const (
	// MessageInfo: informational message.
	MessageInfo MessageType = iota
	// MessageWarning: non-fatal warning message.
	MessageWarning
	// MessageQuestion: question requiring a choice.
	MessageQuestion
	// MessageError: fatal error message.
	MessageError
	// MessageOther: none of the above.
	MessageOther
)

func (MessageType) String 

func (m MessageType) String() string

String returns the name in string for MessageType.

type MnemonicAction 

type MnemonicAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MnemonicAction: GtkShortcutAction that calls gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate().

func MnemonicActionGet 

func MnemonicActionGet() *MnemonicAction

MnemonicActionGet gets the mnemonic action.

This is an action that calls gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate() on the given widget upon activation.

The function returns the following values:

  • mnemonicAction: mnemonic action.

type MnemonicTrigger 

type MnemonicTrigger struct {
	ShortcutTrigger
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MnemonicTrigger: GtkShortcutTrigger that triggers when a specific mnemonic is pressed.

Mnemonics require a *mnemonic modifier* (typically <kbd>Alt</kbd>) to be pressed together with the mnemonic key.

func NewMnemonicTrigger 

func NewMnemonicTrigger(keyval uint) *MnemonicTrigger

NewMnemonicTrigger creates a GtkShortcutTrigger that will trigger whenever the key with the given keyval is pressed and mnemonics have been activated.

Mnemonics are activated by calling code when a key event with the right modifiers is detected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyval to trigger for.

The function returns the following values:

  • mnemonicTrigger: new GtkShortcutTrigger.

func (*MnemonicTrigger) Keyval 

func (self *MnemonicTrigger) Keyval() uint

Keyval gets the keyval that must be pressed to succeed triggering self.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: keyval.

type MountOperation 

type MountOperation struct {
	gio.MountOperation
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MountOperation: GtkMountOperation is an implementation of GMountOperation.

The functions and objects described here make working with GTK and GIO more convenient.

GtkMountOperation is needed when mounting volumes: It is an implementation of GMountOperation that can be used with GIO functions for mounting volumes such as g_file_mount_enclosing_volume(), g_file_mount_mountable(), g_volume_mount(), g_mount_unmount_with_operation() and others.

When necessary, GtkMountOperation shows dialogs to let the user enter passwords, ask questions or show processes blocking unmount.

func NewMountOperation 

func NewMountOperation(parent *Window) *MountOperation

NewMountOperation creates a new GtkMountOperation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): transient parent of the window, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • mountOperation: new GtkMountOperation.

func (*MountOperation) Display 

func (op *MountOperation) Display() *gdk.Display

Display gets the display on which windows of the GtkMountOperation will be shown.

The function returns the following values:

  • display on which windows of op are shown.

func (*MountOperation) IsShowing 

func (op *MountOperation) IsShowing() bool

IsShowing returns whether the GtkMountOperation is currently displaying a window.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if op is currently displaying a window.

func (*MountOperation) Parent 

func (op *MountOperation) Parent() *Window

Parent gets the transient parent used by the GtkMountOperation.

The function returns the following values:

  • window: transient parent for windows shown by op.

func (*MountOperation) SetDisplay 

func (op *MountOperation) SetDisplay(display *gdk.Display)

SetDisplay sets the display to show windows of the GtkMountOperation on.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

func (*MountOperation) SetParent 

func (op *MountOperation) SetParent(parent *Window)

SetParent sets the transient parent for windows shown by the GtkMountOperation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): transient parent of the window, or NULL.

type MountOperationClass added in v0.0.5 

type MountOperationClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MountOperationClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*MountOperationClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (m *MountOperationClass) ParentClass() *gio.MountOperationClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type MountOperationOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MountOperationOverrides struct {
}

MountOperationOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MovementStep 

type MovementStep C.gint

MovementStep: passed as argument to various keybinding signals for moving the cursor position. 

const (
	// MovementLogicalPositions: move forward or back by graphemes.
	MovementLogicalPositions MovementStep = iota
	// MovementVisualPositions: move left or right by graphemes.
	MovementVisualPositions
	// MovementWords: move forward or back by words.
	MovementWords
	// MovementDisplayLines: move up or down lines (wrapped lines).
	MovementDisplayLines
	// MovementDisplayLineEnds: move to either end of a line.
	MovementDisplayLineEnds
	// MovementParagraphs: move up or down paragraphs (newline-ended lines).
	MovementParagraphs
	// MovementParagraphEnds: move to either end of a paragraph.
	MovementParagraphEnds
	// MovementPages: move by pages.
	MovementPages
	// MovementBufferEnds: move to ends of the buffer.
	MovementBufferEnds
	// MovementHorizontalPages: move horizontally by pages.
	MovementHorizontalPages
)

func (MovementStep) String 

func (m MovementStep) String() string

String returns the name in string for MovementStep.

type MultiFilter 

type MultiFilter struct {
	Filter

	*coreglib.Object
	gio.ListModel
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MultiFilter: GtkMultiFilter is the base class for filters that combine multiple filters.

func BaseMultiFilter 

func BaseMultiFilter(obj MultiFilterer) *MultiFilter

BaseMultiFilter returns the underlying base object.

func (*MultiFilter) Append 

func (self *MultiFilter) Append(filter *Filter)

Append adds a filter to self to use for matching.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filter: new filter to use.

func (*MultiFilter) Remove 

func (self *MultiFilter) Remove(position uint)

Remove removes the filter at the given position from the list of filters used by self.

If position is larger than the number of filters, nothing happens and the function returns.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of filter to remove.

type MultiFilterer 

type MultiFilterer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

MultiFilterer describes types inherited from class MultiFilter.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type MultiSelection 

type MultiSelection struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	SelectionModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MultiSelection: GtkMultiSelection is a GtkSelectionModel that allows selecting multiple elements.

func NewMultiSelection 

func NewMultiSelection(model gio.ListModeller) *MultiSelection

NewMultiSelection creates a new selection to handle model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to manage, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • multiSelection: new GtkMultiSelection.

func (*MultiSelection) Model 

func (self *MultiSelection) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model returns the underlying model of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: underlying model.

func (*MultiSelection) SetModel 

func (self *MultiSelection) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model that self should wrap.

If model is NULL, self will be empty.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to wrap.

type MultiSelectionClass added in v0.0.5 

type MultiSelectionClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MultiSelectionClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type MultiSelectionOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MultiSelectionOverrides struct {
}

MultiSelectionOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type MultiSorter 

type MultiSorter struct {
	Sorter

	*coreglib.Object
	gio.ListModel
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MultiSorter: GtkMultiSorter combines multiple sorters by trying them in turn.

If the first sorter compares two items as equal, the second is tried next, and so on.

func NewMultiSorter 

func NewMultiSorter() *MultiSorter

NewMultiSorter creates a new multi sorter.

This sorter compares items by trying each of the sorters in turn, until one returns non-zero. In particular, if no sorter has been added to it, it will always compare items as equal.

The function returns the following values:

  • multiSorter: new GtkMultiSorter.

func (*MultiSorter) Append 

func (self *MultiSorter) Append(sorter *Sorter)

Append: add sorter to self to use for sorting at the end.

self will consult all existing sorters before it will sort with the given sorter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sorter to add.

func (*MultiSorter) Remove 

func (self *MultiSorter) Remove(position uint)

Remove removes the sorter at the given position from the list of sorter used by self.

If position is larger than the number of sorters, nothing happens.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of sorter to remove.

type MultiSorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type MultiSorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MultiSorterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*MultiSorterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (m *MultiSorterClass) ParentClass() *SorterClass

type MultiSorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type MultiSorterOverrides struct {
}

MultiSorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type NamedAction 

type NamedAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NamedAction: GtkShortcutAction that activates an action by name.

func NewNamedAction 

func NewNamedAction(name string) *NamedAction

NewNamedAction creates an action that when activated, activates the named action on the widget.

It also passes the given arguments to it.

See gtk.Widget.InsertActionGroup() for how to add actions to widgets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name: detailed name of the action.

The function returns the following values:

  • namedAction: new GtkShortcutAction.

func (*NamedAction) ActionName 

func (self *NamedAction) ActionName() string

ActionName returns the name of the action that will be activated.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of the action to activate.

type NativeDialog 

type NativeDialog struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NativeDialog: native dialogs are platform dialogs that don't use GtkDialog.

They are used in order to integrate better with a platform, by looking the same as other native applications and supporting platform specific features.

The gtk.Dialog functions cannot be used on such objects, but we need a similar API in order to drive them. The GtkNativeDialog object is an API that allows you to do this. It allows you to set various common properties on the dialog, as well as show and hide it and get a gtk.NativeDialog::response signal when the user finished with the dialog.

Note that unlike GtkDialog, GtkNativeDialog objects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.

func BaseNativeDialog 

func BaseNativeDialog(obj NativeDialogger) *NativeDialog

BaseNativeDialog returns the underlying base object.

func (*NativeDialog) ConnectResponse 

func (self *NativeDialog) ConnectResponse(f func(responseId int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectResponse is emitted when the user responds to the dialog.

When this is called the dialog has been hidden.

If you call gtk.NativeDialog.Hide() before the user responds to the dialog this signal will not be emitted.

func (*NativeDialog) Destroy 

func (self *NativeDialog) Destroy()

Destroy destroys a dialog.

When a dialog is destroyed, it will break any references it holds to other objects.

If it is visible it will be hidden and any underlying window system resources will be destroyed.

Note that this does not release any reference to the object (as opposed to destroying a GtkWindow) because there is no reference from the windowing system to the GtkNativeDialog.

func (*NativeDialog) Hide 

func (self *NativeDialog) Hide()

Hide hides the dialog if it is visible, aborting any interaction.

Once this is called the gtk.NativeDialog::response signal will *not* be emitted until after the next call to gtk.NativeDialog.Show().

If the dialog is not visible this does nothing.

func (*NativeDialog) Modal 

func (self *NativeDialog) Modal() bool

Modal returns whether the dialog is modal.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the dialog is set to be modal.

func (*NativeDialog) SetModal 

func (self *NativeDialog) SetModal(modal bool)

SetModal sets a dialog modal or non-modal.

Modal dialogs prevent interaction with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs on top of main application windows, use gtk.NativeDialog.SetTransientFor() to make the dialog transient for the parent; most window managers will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modal: whether the window is modal.

func (*NativeDialog) SetTitle 

func (self *NativeDialog) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title of the GtkNativeDialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title of the dialog.

func (*NativeDialog) SetTransientFor 

func (self *NativeDialog) SetTransientFor(parent *Window)

SetTransientFor: dialog windows should be set transient for the main application window they were spawned from.

This allows window managers to e.g. keep the dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the main window.

Passing NULL for parent unsets the current transient window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional) window, or NULL.

func (*NativeDialog) Show 

func (self *NativeDialog) Show()

Show shows the dialog on the display.

When the user accepts the state of the dialog the dialog will be automatically hidden and the gtk.NativeDialog::response signal will be emitted.

Multiple calls while the dialog is visible will be ignored.

func (*NativeDialog) Title 

func (self *NativeDialog) Title() string

Title gets the title of the GtkNativeDialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): title of the dialog, or NULL if none has been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*NativeDialog) TransientFor 

func (self *NativeDialog) TransientFor() *Window

TransientFor fetches the transient parent for this window.

The function returns the following values:

  • window (optional): transient parent for this window, or NULL if no transient parent has been set.

func (*NativeDialog) Visible 

func (self *NativeDialog) Visible() bool

Visible determines whether the dialog is visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the dialog is visible.

type NativeDialogClass added in v0.0.5 

type NativeDialogClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NativeDialogClass class structure for NativeDialog.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type NativeDialogOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type NativeDialogOverrides struct {
	// Hide hides the dialog if it is visible, aborting any interaction.
	//
	// Once this is called the gtk.NativeDialog::response signal will *not* be
	// emitted until after the next call to gtk.NativeDialog.Show().
	//
	// If the dialog is not visible this does nothing.
	Hide func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	Response func(responseId int)
	// Show shows the dialog on the display.
	//
	// When the user accepts the state of the dialog the dialog will be
	// automatically hidden and the gtk.NativeDialog::response signal will be
	// emitted.
	//
	// Multiple calls while the dialog is visible will be ignored.
	Show func()
}

NativeDialogOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type NativeDialogger 

type NativeDialogger interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

NativeDialogger describes types inherited from class NativeDialog.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type NativeSurface 

type NativeSurface struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NativeSurface: GtkNative is the interface implemented by all widgets that have their own GdkSurface.

The obvious example of a GtkNative is GtkWindow.

Every widget that is not itself a GtkNative is contained in one, and you can get it with gtk.Widget.GetNative().

To get the surface of a GtkNative, use gtk.Native.GetSurface(). It is also possible to find the GtkNative to which a surface belongs, with gtk.Native().GetForSurface.

In addition to a gdk.Surface, a GtkNative also provides a gsk.Renderer for rendering on that surface. To get the renderer, use gtk.Native.GetRenderer().

This type has been renamed from Native.

NativeSurface wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func NativeSurfaceGetForSurface 

func NativeSurfaceGetForSurface(surface gdk.Surfacer) *NativeSurface

NativeSurfaceGetForSurface finds the GtkNative associated with the surface.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • surface: GdkSurface.

The function returns the following values:

  • native: GtkNative that is associated with surface.

func (*NativeSurface) Realize 

func (self *NativeSurface) Realize()

Realize realizes a GtkNative.

This should only be used by subclasses.

func (*NativeSurface) Renderer 

func (self *NativeSurface) Renderer() gsk.Rendererer

Renderer returns the renderer that is used for this GtkNative.

The function returns the following values:

  • renderer for self.

func (*NativeSurface) Surface 

func (self *NativeSurface) Surface() gdk.Surfacer

Surface returns the surface of this GtkNative.

The function returns the following values:

  • surface of self.

func (*NativeSurface) SurfaceTransform 

func (self *NativeSurface) SurfaceTransform() (x, y float64)

SurfaceTransform retrieves the surface transform of self.

This is the translation from self's surface coordinates into self's widget coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • x: return location for the x coordinate.
  • y: return location for the y coordinate.

func (*NativeSurface) Unrealize 

func (self *NativeSurface) Unrealize()

Unrealize unrealizes a GtkNative.

This should only be used by subclasses.

type NativeSurfacer 

type NativeSurfacer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Renderer returns the renderer that is used for this GtkNative.
	Renderer() gsk.Rendererer
	// Surface returns the surface of this GtkNative.
	Surface() gdk.Surfacer
	// SurfaceTransform retrieves the surface transform of self.
	SurfaceTransform() (x, y float64)
	// Realize realizes a GtkNative.
	Realize()
	// Unrealize unrealizes a GtkNative.
	Unrealize()
}

NativeSurfacer describes NativeSurface's interface methods.

type NeverTrigger 

type NeverTrigger struct {
	ShortcutTrigger
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NeverTrigger: GtkShortcutTrigger that never triggers.

func NeverTriggerGet 

func NeverTriggerGet() *NeverTrigger

NeverTriggerGet gets the never trigger.

This is a singleton for a trigger that never triggers. Use this trigger instead of NULL because it implements all virtual functions.

The function returns the following values:

  • neverTrigger: never trigger.

type NoSelection 

type NoSelection struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	SelectionModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NoSelection: GtkNoSelection is a GtkSelectionModel that does not allow selecting anything.

This model is meant to be used as a simple wrapper around a GListModel when a GtkSelectionModel is required.

func NewNoSelection 

func NewNoSelection(model gio.ListModeller) *NoSelection

NewNoSelection creates a new selection to handle model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to manage, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • noSelection: new GtkNoSelection.

func (*NoSelection) Model 

func (self *NoSelection) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model that self is wrapping.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: model being wrapped.

func (*NoSelection) SetModel 

func (self *NoSelection) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model that self should wrap.

If model is NULL, this model will be empty.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to wrap.

type NoSelectionClass added in v0.0.5 

type NoSelectionClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NoSelectionClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type NoSelectionOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type NoSelectionOverrides struct {
}

NoSelectionOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Notebook 

type Notebook struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Notebook: GtkNotebook is a container whose children are pages switched between using tabs.

!An example GtkNotebook (notebook.png)

There are many configuration options for GtkNotebook. Among other things, you can choose on which edge the tabs appear (see gtk.Notebook.SetTabPos()), whether, if there are too many tabs to fit the notebook should be made bigger or scrolling arrows added (see gtk.Notebook.SetScrollable()), and whether there will be a popup menu allowing the users to switch pages. (see gtk.Notebook.PopupEnable()).

GtkNotebook as GtkBuildable

The GtkNotebook implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing children into tabs by specifying “tab” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. Note that the content of the tab must be created before the tab can be filled. A tab child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.

To add a child widget in the notebooks action area, specify "action-start" or “action-end” as the “type” attribute of the <child> element.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkNotebook: 

<object class="GtkNotebook">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-content">
      <property name="label">Content</property>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child type="tab">
    <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-tab">
      <property name="label">Tab</property>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

CSS nodes 

notebook
├── header.top
│   ├── [<action widget>]
│   ├── tabs
│   │   ├── [arrow]
│   │   ├── tab
│   │   │   ╰── <tab label>
┊   ┊   ┊
│   │   ├── tab[.reorderable-page]
│   │   │   ╰── <tab label>
│   │   ╰── [arrow]
│   ╰── [<action widget>]
│
╰── stack
    ├── <child>
    ┊
    ╰── <child>

GtkNotebook has a main CSS node with name notebook, a subnode with name header and below that a subnode with name tabs which contains one subnode per tab with name tab.

If action widgets are present, their CSS nodes are placed next to the tabs node. If the notebook is scrollable, CSS nodes with name arrow are placed as first and last child of the tabs node.

The main node gets the .frame style class when the notebook has a border (see gtk.Notebook.SetShowBorder()).

The header node gets one of the style class .top, .bottom, .left or .right, depending on where the tabs are placed. For reorderable pages, the tab node gets the .reorderable-page class.

A tab node gets the .dnd style class while it is moved with drag-and-drop.

The nodes are always arranged from left-to-right, regardless of text direction.

Accessibility

GtkNotebook uses the following roles:

  • GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP for the notebook widget
  • GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_LIST for the list of tabs
  • GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB role for each tab
  • GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_PANEL for each page.

func NewNotebook 

func NewNotebook() *Notebook

NewNotebook creates a new GtkNotebook widget with no pages.

The function returns the following values:

  • notebook: newly created GtkNotebook.

func (*Notebook) ActionWidget 

func (notebook *Notebook) ActionWidget(packType PackType) Widgetter

ActionWidget gets one of the action widgets.

See gtk.Notebook.SetActionWidget().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • packType: pack type of the action widget to receive.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): action widget with the given pack_type or NULL when this action widget has not been set.

func (*Notebook) AppendPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) AppendPage(child, tabLabel Widgetter) int

AppendPage appends a page to notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional): GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the appended page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails.

func (*Notebook) AppendPageMenu 

func (notebook *Notebook) AppendPageMenu(child, tabLabel, menuLabel Widgetter) int

AppendPageMenu appends a page to notebook, specifying the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional): GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.
  • menuLabel (optional): widget to use as a label for the page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If NULL, and tab_label is a Label or NULL, then the menu label will be a newly created label with the same text as tab_label; if tab_label is not a GtkLabel, menu_label must be specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the appended page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails.

func (*Notebook) ConnectChangeCurrentPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectChangeCurrentPage(f func(object int) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*Notebook) ConnectCreateWindow 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectCreateWindow(f func(page Widgetter) (notebook *Notebook)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCreateWindow signal is emitted when a detachable tab is dropped on the root window.

A handler for this signal can create a window containing a notebook where the tab will be attached. It is also responsible for moving/resizing the window and adding the necessary properties to the notebook (e.g. the GtkNotebook:group-name ).

func (*Notebook) ConnectFocusTab 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectFocusTab(f func(object NotebookTab) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*Notebook) ConnectMoveFocusOut 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectMoveFocusOut(f func(object DirectionType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*Notebook) ConnectPageAdded 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectPageAdded(f func(child Widgetter, pageNum uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPageAdded signal is emitted in the notebook right after a page is added to the notebook.

func (*Notebook) ConnectPageRemoved 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectPageRemoved(f func(child Widgetter, pageNum uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPageRemoved signal is emitted in the notebook right after a page is removed from the notebook.

func (*Notebook) ConnectPageReordered 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectPageReordered(f func(child Widgetter, pageNum uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPageReordered signal is emitted in the notebook right after a page has been reordered.

func (*Notebook) ConnectReorderTab 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectReorderTab(f func(object DirectionType, p0 bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*Notebook) ConnectSelectPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectSelectPage(f func(object bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*Notebook) ConnectSwitchPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) ConnectSwitchPage(f func(page Widgetter, pageNum uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSwitchPage is emitted when the user or a function changes the current page.

func (*Notebook) CurrentPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) CurrentPage() int

CurrentPage returns the page number of the current page.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the current page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then -1 will be returned.

func (*Notebook) DetachTab 

func (notebook *Notebook) DetachTab(child Widgetter)

DetachTab removes the child from the notebook.

This function is very similar to gtk.Notebook.RemovePage(), but additionally informs the notebook that the removal is happening as part of a tab DND operation, which should not be cancelled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: child.

func (*Notebook) GroupName 

func (notebook *Notebook) GroupName() string

GroupName gets the current group name for notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): group name, or NULL if none is set.

func (*Notebook) InsertPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) InsertPage(child, tabLabel Widgetter, position int) int

InsertPage: insert a page into notebook at the given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional): GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.
  • position: index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page, or -1 to append the page after all other pages.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the inserted page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails.

func (*Notebook) InsertPageMenu 

func (notebook *Notebook) InsertPageMenu(child, tabLabel, menuLabel Widgetter, position int) int

InsertPageMenu: insert a page into notebook at the given position, specifying the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional): GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.
  • menuLabel (optional): widget to use as a label for the page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If NULL, and tab_label is a Label or NULL, then the menu label will be a newly created label with the same text as tab_label; if tab_label is not a Label, menu_label must be specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
  • position: index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page, or -1 to append the page after all other pages.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the inserted page in the notebook.

func (*Notebook) MenuLabel 

func (notebook *Notebook) MenuLabel(child Widgetter) Widgetter

MenuLabel retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget contained in a page of notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): menu label, or NULL if the notebook page does not have a menu label other than the default (the tab label).

func (*Notebook) MenuLabelText 

func (notebook *Notebook) MenuLabelText(child Widgetter) string

MenuLabelText retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child widget of a page of the notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text of the tab label, or NULL if the widget does not have a menu label other than the default menu label, or the menu label widget is not a GtkLabel. The string is owned by the widget and must not be freed.

func (*Notebook) NPages 

func (notebook *Notebook) NPages() int

NPages gets the number of pages in a notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of pages in the notebook.

func (*Notebook) NextPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) NextPage()

NextPage switches to the next page.

Nothing happens if the current page is the last page.

func (*Notebook) NthPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) NthPage(pageNum int) Widgetter

NthPage returns the child widget contained in page number page_num.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of a page in the notebook, or -1 to get the last page.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget, or NULL if page_num is out of bounds.

func (*Notebook) Page 

func (notebook *Notebook) Page(child Widgetter) *NotebookPage

Page returns the GtkNotebookPage for child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • notebookPage: GtkNotebookPage for child.

func (*Notebook) PageNum 

func (notebook *Notebook) PageNum(child Widgetter) int

PageNum finds the index of the page which contains the given child widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the page containing child, or -1 if child is not in the notebook.

func (*Notebook) Pages 

func (notebook *Notebook) Pages() *gio.ListModel

Pages returns a GListModel that contains the pages of the notebook.

This can be used to keep an up-to-date view. The model also implements gtk.SelectionModel and can be used to track and modify the visible page.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: a GListModel for the notebook's children.

func (*Notebook) PopupDisable 

func (notebook *Notebook) PopupDisable()

PopupDisable disables the popup menu.

func (*Notebook) PopupEnable 

func (notebook *Notebook) PopupEnable()

PopupEnable enables the popup menu.

If the user clicks with the right mouse button on the tab labels, a menu with all the pages will be popped up.

func (*Notebook) PrependPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) PrependPage(child, tabLabel Widgetter) int

PrependPage prepends a page to notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional) to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the prepended page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails.

func (*Notebook) PrependPageMenu 

func (notebook *Notebook) PrependPageMenu(child, tabLabel, menuLabel Widgetter) int

PrependPageMenu prepends a page to notebook, specifying the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
  • tabLabel (optional): GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page, or NULL to use the default label, “page N”.
  • menuLabel (optional): widget to use as a label for the page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If NULL, and tab_label is a Label or NULL, then the menu label will be a newly created label with the same text as tab_label; if tab_label is not a Label, menu_label must be specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index (starting from 0) of the prepended page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails.

func (*Notebook) PrevPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) PrevPage()

PrevPage switches to the previous page.

Nothing happens if the current page is the first page.

func (*Notebook) RemovePage 

func (notebook *Notebook) RemovePage(pageNum int)

RemovePage removes a page from the notebook given its index in the notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of a notebook page, starting from 0. If -1, the last page will be removed.

func (*Notebook) ReorderChild 

func (notebook *Notebook) ReorderChild(child Widgetter, position int)

ReorderChild reorders the page containing child, so that it appears in position position.

If position is greater than or equal to the number of children in the list or negative, child will be moved to the end of the list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to move.
  • position: new position, or -1 to move to the end.

func (*Notebook) Scrollable 

func (notebook *Notebook) Scrollable() bool

Scrollable returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if arrows for scrolling are present.

func (*Notebook) SetActionWidget 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetActionWidget(widget Widgetter, packType PackType)

SetActionWidget sets widget as one of the action widgets.

Depending on the pack type the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use a GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: Widget.
  • packType: pack type of the action widget.

func (*Notebook) SetCurrentPage 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetCurrentPage(pageNum int)

SetCurrentPage switches to the page number page_num.

Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible. Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before adding them to a notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNum: index of the page to switch to, starting from 0. If negative, the last page will be used. If greater than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing will be done.

func (*Notebook) SetGroupName 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetGroupName(groupName string)

SetGroupName sets a group name for notebook.

Notebooks with the same name will be able to exchange tabs via drag and drop. A notebook with a NULL group name will not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • groupName (optional): name of the notebook group, or NULL to unset it.

func (*Notebook) SetMenuLabel 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetMenuLabel(child, menuLabel Widgetter)

SetMenuLabel changes the menu label for the page containing child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child widget.
  • menuLabel (optional): menu label, or NULL for default.

func (*Notebook) SetMenuLabelText 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetMenuLabelText(child Widgetter, menuText string)

SetMenuLabelText creates a new label and sets it as the menu label of child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child widget.
  • menuText: label text.

func (*Notebook) SetScrollable 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetScrollable(scrollable bool)

SetScrollable sets whether the tab label area will have arrows for scrolling if there are too many tabs to fit in the area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scrollable: TRUE if scroll arrows should be added.

func (*Notebook) SetShowBorder 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetShowBorder(showBorder bool)

SetShowBorder sets whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages.

This only has a visual effect when the tabs are not shown.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showBorder: TRUE if a bevel should be drawn around the notebook.

func (*Notebook) SetShowTabs 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetShowTabs(showTabs bool)

SetShowTabs sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showTabs: TRUE if the tabs should be shown.

func (*Notebook) SetTabDetachable 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetTabDetachable(child Widgetter, detachable bool)

SetTabDetachable sets whether the tab can be detached from notebook to another notebook or widget.

Note that two notebooks must share a common group identificator (see gtk.Notebook.SetGroupName()) to allow automatic tabs interchange between them.

If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD (i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop destination and accept the target “GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB”. The notebook will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.

Note that you should use gtk.Notebook.DetachTab() instead of gtk.Notebook.RemovePage() if you want to remove the tab from the source notebook as part of accepting a drop. Otherwise, the source notebook will think that the dragged tab was removed from underneath the ongoing drag operation, and will initiate a drag cancel animation. 

static void
on_drag_data_received (GtkWidget        *widget,
                       GdkDrop          *drop,
                       GtkSelectionData *data,
                       guint             time,
                       gpointer          user_data)
{
  GtkDrag *drag;
  GtkWidget *notebook;
  GtkWidget **child;

  drag = gtk_drop_get_drag (drop);
  notebook = g_object_get_data (drag, "gtk-notebook-drag-origin");
  child = (void*) gtk_selection_data_get_data (data);

  // process_widget (*child);

  gtk_notebook_detach_tab (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), *child);
}

If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets, you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child GtkWidget.
  • detachable: whether the tab is detachable or not.

func (*Notebook) SetTabLabel 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetTabLabel(child, tabLabel Widgetter)

SetTabLabel changes the tab label for child.

If NULL is specified for tab_label, then the page will have the label “page N”.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: page.
  • tabLabel (optional): tab label widget to use, or NULL for default tab label.

func (*Notebook) SetTabLabelText 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetTabLabelText(child Widgetter, tabText string)

SetTabLabelText creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page containing child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: page.
  • tabText: label text.

func (*Notebook) SetTabPos 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetTabPos(pos PositionType)

SetTabPos sets the edge at which the tabs are drawn.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pos: edge to draw the tabs at.

func (*Notebook) SetTabReorderable 

func (notebook *Notebook) SetTabReorderable(child Widgetter, reorderable bool)

SetTabReorderable sets whether the notebook tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child GtkWidget.
  • reorderable: whether the tab is reorderable or not.

func (*Notebook) ShowBorder 

func (notebook *Notebook) ShowBorder() bool

ShowBorder returns whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the bevel is drawn.

func (*Notebook) ShowTabs 

func (notebook *Notebook) ShowTabs() bool

ShowTabs returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the tabs are shown.

func (*Notebook) TabDetachable 

func (notebook *Notebook) TabDetachable(child Widgetter) bool

TabDetachable returns whether the tab contents can be detached from notebook.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the tab is detachable.

func (*Notebook) TabLabel 

func (notebook *Notebook) TabLabel(child Widgetter) Widgetter

TabLabel returns the tab label widget for the page child.

NULL is returned if child is not in notebook or if no tab label has specifically been set for child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: page.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): tab label.

func (*Notebook) TabLabelText 

func (notebook *Notebook) TabLabelText(child Widgetter) string

TabLabelText retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget contained in a page of notebook.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text of the tab label, or NULL if the tab label idget is not a GtkLabel. The string is owned by the widget and must not be freed.

func (*Notebook) TabPos 

func (notebook *Notebook) TabPos() PositionType

TabPos gets the edge at which the tabs are drawn.

The function returns the following values:

  • positionType: edge at which the tabs are drawn.

func (*Notebook) TabReorderable 

func (notebook *Notebook) TabReorderable(child Widgetter) bool

TabReorderable gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the tab is reorderable.

type NotebookPage 

type NotebookPage struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NotebookPage: GtkNotebookPage is an auxiliary object used by GtkNotebook.

func (*NotebookPage) Child 

func (page *NotebookPage) Child() Widgetter

Child returns the notebook child to which page belongs.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: child to which page belongs.

type NotebookTab 

type NotebookTab C.gint

NotebookTab: parameter used in the action signals of GtkNotebook. 

const (
	// NotebookTabFirst: first tab in the notebook.
	NotebookTabFirst NotebookTab = iota
	// NotebookTabLast: last tab in the notebook.
	NotebookTabLast
)

func (NotebookTab) String 

func (n NotebookTab) String() string

String returns the name in string for NotebookTab.

type NothingAction 

type NothingAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NothingAction: GtkShortcutAction that does nothing.

func NothingActionGet 

func NothingActionGet() *NothingAction

NothingActionGet gets the nothing action.

This is an action that does nothing and where activating it always fails.

The function returns the following values:

  • nothingAction: nothing action.

type NumberUpLayout 

type NumberUpLayout C.gint

NumberUpLayout: used to determine the layout of pages on a sheet when printing multiple pages per sheet. 

const (
	// NumberUpLayoutLeftToRightTopToBottom: ! (layout-lrtb.png).
	NumberUpLayoutLeftToRightTopToBottom NumberUpLayout = iota
	// NumberUpLayoutLeftToRightBottomToTop: ! (layout-lrbt.png).
	NumberUpLayoutLeftToRightBottomToTop
	// NumberUpLayoutRightToLeftTopToBottom: ! (layout-rltb.png).
	NumberUpLayoutRightToLeftTopToBottom
	// NumberUpLayoutRightToLeftBottomToTop: ! (layout-rlbt.png).
	NumberUpLayoutRightToLeftBottomToTop
	// NumberUpLayoutTopToBottomLeftToRight: ! (layout-tblr.png).
	NumberUpLayoutTopToBottomLeftToRight
	// NumberUpLayoutTopToBottomRightToLeft: ! (layout-tbrl.png).
	NumberUpLayoutTopToBottomRightToLeft
	// NumberUpLayoutBottomToTopLeftToRight: ! (layout-btlr.png).
	NumberUpLayoutBottomToTopLeftToRight
	// NumberUpLayoutBottomToTopRightToLeft: ! (layout-btrl.png).
	NumberUpLayoutBottomToTopRightToLeft
)

func (NumberUpLayout) String 

func (n NumberUpLayout) String() string

String returns the name in string for NumberUpLayout.

type NumericSorter 

type NumericSorter struct {
	Sorter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NumericSorter: GtkNumericSorter is a GtkSorter that compares numbers.

To obtain the numbers to compare, this sorter evaluates a gtk.Expression.

func NewNumericSorter 

func NewNumericSorter(expression Expressioner) *NumericSorter

NewNumericSorter creates a new numeric sorter using the given expression.

Smaller numbers will be sorted first. You can call gtk.NumericSorter.SetSortOrder() to change this.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional) to evaluate.

The function returns the following values:

  • numericSorter: new GtkNumericSorter.

func (*NumericSorter) Expression 

func (self *NumericSorter) Expression() Expressioner

Expression gets the expression that is evaluated to obtain numbers from items.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression, or NULL.

func (*NumericSorter) SetExpression 

func (self *NumericSorter) SetExpression(expression Expressioner)

SetExpression sets the expression that is evaluated to obtain numbers from items.

Unless an expression is set on self, the sorter will always compare items as invalid.

The expression must have a return type that can be compared numerically, such as G_TYPE_INT or G_TYPE_DOUBLE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression, or NULL.

func (*NumericSorter) SetSortOrder 

func (self *NumericSorter) SetSortOrder(sortOrder SortType)

SetSortOrder sets whether to sort smaller numbers before larger ones.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortOrder: whether to sort smaller numbers first.

func (*NumericSorter) SortOrder 

func (self *NumericSorter) SortOrder() SortType

SortOrder gets whether this sorter will sort smaller numbers first.

The function returns the following values:

  • sortType: order of the numbers.

type NumericSorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type NumericSorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

NumericSorterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*NumericSorterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (n *NumericSorterClass) ParentClass() *SorterClass

type NumericSorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type NumericSorterOverrides struct {
}

NumericSorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ObjectExpression 

type ObjectExpression struct {
	Expression
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ObjectExpression: GObject value in a GtkExpression.

func NewObjectExpression 

func NewObjectExpression(object *coreglib.Object) *ObjectExpression

NewObjectExpression creates an expression evaluating to the given object with a weak reference.

Once the object is disposed, it will fail to evaluate.

This expression is meant to break reference cycles.

If you want to keep a reference to object, use gtk.ConstantExpression.New.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • object to watch.

The function returns the following values:

  • objectExpression: new GtkExpression.

func (*ObjectExpression) Object 

func (expression *ObjectExpression) Object() *coreglib.Object

Object gets the object that the expression evaluates to.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): object, or NULL.

type Ordering 

type Ordering C.gint

Ordering describes the way two values can be compared.

These values can be used with a GCompareFunc. However, a GCompareFunc is allowed to return any integer values. For converting such a value to a GtkOrdering value, use gtk.Ordering().FromCmpfunc. 

const (
	// OrderingSmaller: first value is smaller than the second.
	OrderingSmaller Ordering = -1
	// OrderingEqual: two values are equal.
	OrderingEqual Ordering = 0
	// OrderingLarger: first value is larger than the second.
	OrderingLarger Ordering = 1
)

func OrderingFromCmpfunc 

func OrderingFromCmpfunc(cmpfuncResult int) Ordering

OrderingFromCmpfunc converts the result of a GCompareFunc like strcmp() to a GtkOrdering value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cmpfuncResult: result of a comparison function.

The function returns the following values:

  • ordering: corresponding GtkOrdering.

func (Ordering) String 

func (o Ordering) String() string

String returns the name in string for Ordering.

type Orientable 

type Orientable struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Orientable: GtkOrientable interface is implemented by all widgets that can be oriented horizontally or vertically.

GtkOrientable is more flexible in that it allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to “flip”.

Orientable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Orientable) Orientation 

func (orientable *Orientable) Orientation() Orientation

Orientation retrieves the orientation of the orientable.

The function returns the following values:

  • orientation of the orientable.

func (*Orientable) SetOrientation 

func (orientable *Orientable) SetOrientation(orientation Orientation)

SetOrientation sets the orientation of the orientable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation orientable’s new orientation.

type OrientableIface added in v0.0.5 

type OrientableIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OrientableIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type OrientableOverrider 

type OrientableOverrider interface {
}

OrientableOverrider contains methods that are overridable.

type Orientabler 

type Orientabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Orientation retrieves the orientation of the orientable.
	Orientation() Orientation
	// SetOrientation sets the orientation of the orientable.
	SetOrientation(orientation Orientation)
}

Orientabler describes Orientable's interface methods.

type Orientation 

type Orientation C.gint

Orientation represents the orientation of widgets and other objects.

Typical examples are GtkBox or GtkGesturePan`. 

const (
	// OrientationHorizontal: element is in horizontal orientation.
	OrientationHorizontal Orientation = iota
	// OrientationVertical: element is in vertical orientation.
	OrientationVertical
)

func (Orientation) String 

func (o Orientation) String() string

String returns the name in string for Orientation.

type Overflow 

type Overflow C.gint

Overflow defines how content overflowing a given area should be handled.

This is used in gtk.Widget.SetOverflow(). The gtk.Widget:overflow property is modeled after the CSS overflow property, but implements it only partially. 

const (
	// OverflowVisible: no change is applied. Content is drawn at the specified
	// position.
	OverflowVisible Overflow = iota
	// OverflowHidden: content is clipped to the bounds of the area. Content
	// outside the area is not drawn and cannot be interacted with.
	OverflowHidden
)

func (Overflow) String 

func (o Overflow) String() string

String returns the name in string for Overflow.

type Overlay 

type Overlay struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Overlay: GtkOverlay is a container which contains a single main child, on top of which it can place “overlay” widgets.

!An example GtkOverlay (overlay.png)

The position of each overlay widget is determined by its gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties. E.g. a widget with both alignments set to GTK_ALIGN_START will be placed at the top left corner of the GtkOverlay container, whereas an overlay with halign set to GTK_ALIGN_CENTER and valign set to GTK_ALIGN_END will be placed a the bottom edge of the GtkOverlay, horizontally centered. The position can be adjusted by setting the margin properties of the child to non-zero values.

More complicated placement of overlays is possible by connecting to the gtk.Overlay::get-child-position signal.

An overlay’s minimum and natural sizes are those of its main child. The sizes of overlay children are not considered when measuring these preferred sizes.

GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable

The GtkOverlay implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child as an overlay by specifying “overlay” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.

CSS nodes

GtkOverlay has a single CSS node with the name “overlay”. Overlay children whose alignments cause them to be positioned at an edge get the style classes “.left”, “.right”, “.top”, and/or “.bottom” according to their position.

func NewOverlay 

func NewOverlay() *Overlay

NewOverlay creates a new GtkOverlay.

The function returns the following values:

  • overlay: new GtkOverlay object.

func (*Overlay) AddOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) AddOverlay(widget Widgetter)

AddOverlay adds widget to overlay.

The widget will be stacked on top of the main widget added with gtk.Overlay.SetChild().

The position at which widget is placed is determined from its gtk.Widget:halign and gtk.Widget:valign properties.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget to be added to the container.

func (*Overlay) Child 

func (overlay *Overlay) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of overlay.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of overlay.

func (*Overlay) ClipOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) ClipOverlay(widget Widgetter) bool

ClipOverlay gets whether widget should be clipped within the parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: overlay child of GtkOverlay.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the widget is clipped within the parent.

func (*Overlay) ConnectGetChildPosition 

func (overlay *Overlay) ConnectGetChildPosition(f func(widget Widgetter) (allocation *gdk.Rectangle, ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectGetChildPosition is emitted to determine the position and size of any overlay child widgets.

A handler for this signal should fill allocation with the desired position and size for widget, relative to the 'main' child of overlay.

The default handler for this signal uses the widget's halign and valign properties to determine the position and gives the widget its natural size (except that an alignment of GTK_ALIGN_FILL will cause the overlay to be full-width/height). If the main child is a GtkScrolledWindow, the overlays are placed relative to its contents.

func (*Overlay) MeasureOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) MeasureOverlay(widget Widgetter) bool

MeasureOverlay gets whether widget's size is included in the measurement of overlay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: overlay child of GtkOverlay.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the widget is measured.

func (*Overlay) RemoveOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) RemoveOverlay(widget Widgetter)

RemoveOverlay removes an overlay that was added with gtk_overlay_add_overlay().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget to be removed.

func (*Overlay) SetChild 

func (overlay *Overlay) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of overlay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Overlay) SetClipOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) SetClipOverlay(widget Widgetter, clipOverlay bool)

SetClipOverlay sets whether widget should be clipped within the parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: overlay child of GtkOverlay.
  • clipOverlay: whether the child should be clipped.

func (*Overlay) SetMeasureOverlay 

func (overlay *Overlay) SetMeasureOverlay(widget Widgetter, measure bool)

SetMeasureOverlay sets whether widget is included in the measured size of overlay.

The overlay will request the size of the largest child that has this property set to TRUE. Children who are not included may be drawn outside of overlay's allocation if they are too large.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: overlay child of GtkOverlay.
  • measure: whether the child should be measured.

type OverlayLayout 

type OverlayLayout struct {
	LayoutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OverlayLayout: GtkOverlayLayout is the layout manager used by GtkOverlay.

It places widgets as overlays on top of the main child.

This is not a reusable layout manager, since it expects its widget to be a GtkOverlay. It only listed here so that its layout properties get documented.

func NewOverlayLayout 

func NewOverlayLayout() *OverlayLayout

NewOverlayLayout creates a new GtkOverlayLayout instance.

The function returns the following values:

  • overlayLayout: newly created instance.

type OverlayLayoutChild 

type OverlayLayoutChild struct {
	LayoutChild
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OverlayLayoutChild: GtkLayoutChild subclass for children in a GtkOverlayLayout.

func (*OverlayLayoutChild) ClipOverlay 

func (child *OverlayLayoutChild) ClipOverlay() bool

ClipOverlay retrieves whether the child is clipped.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the child is clipped.

func (*OverlayLayoutChild) Measure 

func (child *OverlayLayoutChild) Measure() bool

Measure retrieves whether the child is measured.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the child is measured.

func (*OverlayLayoutChild) SetClipOverlay 

func (child *OverlayLayoutChild) SetClipOverlay(clipOverlay bool)

SetClipOverlay sets whether to clip this child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipOverlay: whether to clip this child.

func (*OverlayLayoutChild) SetMeasure 

func (child *OverlayLayoutChild) SetMeasure(measure bool)

SetMeasure sets whether to measure this child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • measure: whether to measure this child.

type OverlayLayoutChildClass added in v0.0.5 

type OverlayLayoutChildClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OverlayLayoutChildClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*OverlayLayoutChildClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (o *OverlayLayoutChildClass) ParentClass() *LayoutChildClass

type OverlayLayoutChildOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type OverlayLayoutChildOverrides struct {
}

OverlayLayoutChildOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type OverlayLayoutClass added in v0.0.5 

type OverlayLayoutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OverlayLayoutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*OverlayLayoutClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (o *OverlayLayoutClass) ParentClass() *LayoutManagerClass

type OverlayLayoutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type OverlayLayoutOverrides struct {
}

OverlayLayoutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type PackType 

type PackType C.gint

PackType represents the packing location of a children in its parent.

See GtkWindowControls for example. 

const (
	// PackStart: child is packed into the start of the widget.
	PackStart PackType = iota
	// PackEnd: child is packed into the end of the widget.
	PackEnd
)

func (PackType) String 

func (p PackType) String() string

String returns the name in string for PackType.

type PadActionEntry 

type PadActionEntry struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PadActionEntry: struct defining a pad action entry.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*PadActionEntry) ActionName 

func (p *PadActionEntry) ActionName() string

ActionName: action name that will be activated in the Group.

func (*PadActionEntry) Index 

func (p *PadActionEntry) Index() int

Index: 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action entry.

func (*PadActionEntry) Label 

func (p *PadActionEntry) Label() string

Label: human readable description of this action entry, this string should be deemed user-visible.

func (*PadActionEntry) Mode 

func (p *PadActionEntry) Mode() int

Mode: mode that will trigger this action entry, or -1 for all modes.

func (*PadActionEntry) SetIndex 

func (p *PadActionEntry) SetIndex(index int)

Index: 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action entry.

func (*PadActionEntry) SetMode 

func (p *PadActionEntry) SetMode(mode int)

Mode: mode that will trigger this action entry, or -1 for all modes.

func (*PadActionEntry) Type 

func (p *PadActionEntry) Type() PadActionType

Type: type of pad feature that will trigger this action entry.

type PadActionType 

type PadActionType C.gint

PadActionType: type of a pad action. 

const (
	// PadActionButton: action is triggered by a pad button.
	PadActionButton PadActionType = iota
	// PadActionRing: action is triggered by a pad ring.
	PadActionRing
	// PadActionStrip: action is triggered by a pad strip.
	PadActionStrip
)

func (PadActionType) String 

func (p PadActionType) String() string

String returns the name in string for PadActionType.

type PadController 

type PadController struct {
	EventController
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PadController: GtkPadController is an event controller for the pads found in drawing tablets.

Pads are the collection of buttons and tactile sensors often found around the stylus-sensitive area.

These buttons and sensors have no implicit meaning, and by default they perform no action. GtkPadController is provided to map those to GAction objects, thus letting the application give them a more semantic meaning.

Buttons and sensors are not constrained to triggering a single action, some GDK_SOURCE_TABLET_PAD devices feature multiple "modes". All these input elements have one current mode, which may determine the final action being triggered.

Pad devices often divide buttons and sensors into groups. All elements in a group share the same current mode, but different groups may have different modes. See gdk.DevicePad.GetNGroups() and gdk.DevicePad.GetGroupNModes().

Each of the actions that a given button/strip/ring performs for a given mode is defined by a gtk.PadActionEntry. It contains an action name that will be looked up in the given GActionGroup and activated whenever the specified input element and mode are triggered.

A simple example of GtkPadController usage: Assigning button 1 in all modes and pad devices to an "invert-selection" action: 

GtkPadActionEntry *pad_actions[] = {
  { GTK_PAD_ACTION_BUTTON, 1, -1, "Invert selection", "pad-actions.invert-selection" },
  …
};

…
action_group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
action = g_simple_action_new ("pad-actions.invert-selection", NULL);
g_signal_connect (action, "activate", on_invert_selection_activated, NULL);
g_action_map_add_action (G_ACTION_MAP (action_group), action);
…
pad_controller = gtk_pad_controller_new (action_group, NULL);

The actions belonging to rings/strips will be activated with a parameter of type G_VARIANT_TYPE_DOUBLE bearing the value of the given axis, it is required that those are made stateful and accepting this GVariantType.

func NewPadController 

func NewPadController(group gio.ActionGrouper, pad gdk.Devicer) *PadController

NewPadController creates a new GtkPadController that will associate events from pad to actions.

A NULL pad may be provided so the controller manages all pad devices generically, it is discouraged to mix GtkPadController objects with NULL and non-NULL pad argument on the same toplevel window, as execution order is not guaranteed.

The GtkPadController is created with no mapped actions. In order to map pad events to actions, use gtk.PadController.SetActionEntries() or gtk.PadController.SetAction().

Be aware that pad events will only be delivered to GtkWindows, so adding a pad controller to any other type of widget will not have an effect.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • group: GActionGroup to trigger actions from.
  • pad (optional): GDK_SOURCE_TABLET_PAD device, or NULL to handle all pads.

The function returns the following values:

  • padController: newly created GtkPadController.

func (*PadController) SetAction 

func (controller *PadController) SetAction(typ PadActionType, index, mode int, label, actionName string)

SetAction adds an individual action to controller.

This action will only be activated if the given button/ring/strip number in index is interacted while the current mode is mode. -1 may be used for simple cases, so the action is triggered on all modes.

The given label should be considered user-visible, so internationalization rules apply. Some windowing systems may be able to use those for user feedback.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: type of pad feature that will trigger this action.
  • index: 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action.
  • mode that will trigger this action, or -1 for all modes.
  • label: human readable description of this action, this string should be deemed user-visible.
  • actionName: action name that will be activated in the Group.

func (*PadController) SetActionEntries 

func (controller *PadController) SetActionEntries(entries []PadActionEntry)

SetActionEntries: convenience function to add a group of action entries on controller.

See gtk.PadActionEntry and gtk.PadController.SetAction().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • entries: action entries to set on controller.

type PageOrientation 

type PageOrientation C.gint

PageOrientation: see also gtk_print_settings_set_orientation(). 

const (
	// PageOrientationPortrait: portrait mode.
	PageOrientationPortrait PageOrientation = iota
	// PageOrientationLandscape: landscape mode.
	PageOrientationLandscape
	// PageOrientationReversePortrait: reverse portrait mode.
	PageOrientationReversePortrait
	// PageOrientationReverseLandscape: reverse landscape mode.
	PageOrientationReverseLandscape
)

func (PageOrientation) String 

func (p PageOrientation) String() string

String returns the name in string for PageOrientation.

type PageRange 

type PageRange struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PageRange: range of pages to print.

See also gtk.PrintSettings.SetPageRanges().

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewPageRange 

func NewPageRange(start, end int) PageRange

NewPageRange creates a new PageRange instance from the given fields. Beware that this function allocates on the Go heap; be careful when using it!

func (*PageRange) End 

func (p *PageRange) End() int

End: end of page range.

func (*PageRange) SetEnd 

func (p *PageRange) SetEnd(end int)

End: end of page range.

func (*PageRange) SetStart 

func (p *PageRange) SetStart(start int)

Start: start of page range.

func (*PageRange) Start 

func (p *PageRange) Start() int

Start: start of page range.

type PageSet 

type PageSet C.gint

PageSet: see also gtk_print_job_set_page_set(). 

const (
	// PageSetAll: all pages.
	PageSetAll PageSet = iota
	// PageSetEven: even pages.
	PageSetEven
	// PageSetOdd: odd pages.
	PageSetOdd
)

func (PageSet) String 

func (p PageSet) String() string

String returns the name in string for PageSet.

type PageSetup 

type PageSetup struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PageSetup: GtkPageSetup object stores the page size, orientation and margins.

The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog and then pass it to the GtkPrintOperation when printing. The benefit of splitting this out of the GtkPrintSettings is that these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set long before user prints.

Margins

The margins specified in this object are the “print margins”, i.e. the parts of the page that the printer cannot print on. These are different from the layout margins that a word processor uses; they are typically used to determine the minimal size for the layout margins.

To obtain a GtkPageSetup use gtk.PageSetup.New to get the defaults, or use gtk.PrintRunPageSetupDialog() to show the page setup dialog and receive the resulting page setup.

A page setup dialog 

static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
static GtkPageSetup *page_setup = NULL;

static void
do_page_setup (void)
{
  GtkPageSetup *new_page_setup;

  if (settings == NULL)
    settings = gtk_print_settings_new ();

  new_page_setup = gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog (GTK_WINDOW (main_window),
                                                    page_setup, settings);

  if (page_setup)
    g_object_unref (page_setup);

  page_setup = new_page_setup;
}.

func NewPageSetup 

func NewPageSetup() *PageSetup

NewPageSetup creates a new GtkPageSetup.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: new GtkPageSetup.

func NewPageSetupFromFile 

func NewPageSetupFromFile(fileName string) (*PageSetup, error)

NewPageSetupFromFile reads the page setup from the file file_name.

Returns a new GtkPageSetup object with the restored page setup, or NULL if an error occurred. See gtk.PageSetup.ToFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: filename to read the page setup from.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: restored GtkPageSetup.

func NewPageSetupFromGVariant 

func NewPageSetupFromGVariant(variant *glib.Variant) *PageSetup

NewPageSetupFromGVariant: desrialize a page setup from an a{sv} variant.

The variant must be in the format produced by gtk.PageSetup.ToGVariant().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • variant: a{sv} GVariant.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: new GtkPageSetup object.

func NewPageSetupFromKeyFile 

func NewPageSetupFromKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string) (*PageSetup, error)

NewPageSetupFromKeyFile reads the page setup from the group group_name in the key file key_file.

Returns a new GtkPageSetup object with the restored page setup, or NULL if an error occurred.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from.
  • groupName (optional): name of the group in the key_file to read, or NULL to use the default name “Page Setup”.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: restored GtkPageSetup.

func PrintRunPageSetupDialog 

func PrintRunPageSetupDialog(parent *Window, pageSetup *PageSetup, settings *PrintSettings) *PageSetup

PrintRunPageSetupDialog runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from page_setup. If the user cancels the dialog, the returned PageSetup is identical to the passed in page_setup, otherwise it contains the modifications done in the dialog.

Note that this function may use a recursive mainloop to show the page setup dialog. See gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async() if this is a problem.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): transient parent.
  • pageSetup (optional): existing PageSetup.
  • settings: PrintSettings.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: new PageSetup.

func (*PageSetup) BottomMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) BottomMargin(unit Unit) float64

BottomMargin gets the bottom margin in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: bottom margin.

func (*PageSetup) Copy 

func (other *PageSetup) Copy() *PageSetup

Copy copies a GtkPageSetup.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: copy of other.

func (*PageSetup) LeftMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) LeftMargin(unit Unit) float64

LeftMargin gets the left margin in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: left margin.

func (*PageSetup) LoadFile 

func (setup *PageSetup) LoadFile(fileName string) error

LoadFile reads the page setup from the file file_name.

See gtk.PageSetup.ToFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: filename to read the page setup from.

func (*PageSetup) LoadKeyFile 

func (setup *PageSetup) LoadKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string) error

LoadKeyFile reads the page setup from the group group_name in the key file key_file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from.
  • groupName (optional): name of the group in the key_file to read, or NULL to use the default name “Page Setup”.

func (*PageSetup) Orientation 

func (setup *PageSetup) Orientation() PageOrientation

Orientation gets the page orientation of the GtkPageSetup.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageOrientation: page orientation.

func (*PageSetup) PageHeight 

func (setup *PageSetup) PageHeight(unit Unit) float64

PageHeight returns the page height in units of unit.

Note that this function takes orientation and margins into consideration. See gtk.PageSetup.GetPaperHeight().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: page height.

func (*PageSetup) PageWidth 

func (setup *PageSetup) PageWidth(unit Unit) float64

PageWidth returns the page width in units of unit.

Note that this function takes orientation and margins into consideration. See gtk.PageSetup.GetPaperWidth().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: page width.

func (*PageSetup) PaperHeight 

func (setup *PageSetup) PaperHeight(unit Unit) float64

PaperHeight returns the paper height in units of unit.

Note that this function takes orientation, but not margins into consideration. See gtk.PageSetup.GetPageHeight().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper height.

func (*PageSetup) PaperSize 

func (setup *PageSetup) PaperSize() *PaperSize

PaperSize gets the paper size of the GtkPageSetup.

The function returns the following values:

  • paperSize: paper size.

func (*PageSetup) PaperWidth 

func (setup *PageSetup) PaperWidth(unit Unit) float64

PaperWidth returns the paper width in units of unit.

Note that this function takes orientation, but not margins into consideration. See gtk.PageSetup.GetPageWidth().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper width.

func (*PageSetup) RightMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) RightMargin(unit Unit) float64

RightMargin gets the right margin in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: right margin.

func (*PageSetup) SetBottomMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetBottomMargin(margin float64, unit Unit)

SetBottomMargin sets the bottom margin of the GtkPageSetup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: new bottom margin in units of unit.
  • unit units for margin.

func (*PageSetup) SetLeftMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetLeftMargin(margin float64, unit Unit)

SetLeftMargin sets the left margin of the GtkPageSetup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: new left margin in units of unit.
  • unit units for margin.

func (*PageSetup) SetOrientation 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetOrientation(orientation PageOrientation)

SetOrientation sets the page orientation of the GtkPageSetup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: PageOrientation value.

func (*PageSetup) SetPaperSize 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetPaperSize(size *PaperSize)

SetPaperSize sets the paper size of the GtkPageSetup without changing the margins.

See gtk.PageSetup.SetPaperSizeAndDefaultMargins().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • size: PaperSize.

func (*PageSetup) SetPaperSizeAndDefaultMargins 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetPaperSizeAndDefaultMargins(size *PaperSize)

SetPaperSizeAndDefaultMargins sets the paper size of the GtkPageSetup and modifies the margins according to the new paper size.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • size: PaperSize.

func (*PageSetup) SetRightMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetRightMargin(margin float64, unit Unit)

SetRightMargin sets the right margin of the GtkPageSetup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: new right margin in units of unit.
  • unit units for margin.

func (*PageSetup) SetTopMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) SetTopMargin(margin float64, unit Unit)

SetTopMargin sets the top margin of the GtkPageSetup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: new top margin in units of unit.
  • unit units for margin.

func (*PageSetup) ToFile 

func (setup *PageSetup) ToFile(fileName string) error

ToFile: this function saves the information from setup to file_name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: file to save to.

func (*PageSetup) ToGVariant 

func (setup *PageSetup) ToGVariant() *glib.Variant

ToGVariant: serialize page setup to an a{sv} variant.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant: new, floating, #GVariant.

func (*PageSetup) ToKeyFile 

func (setup *PageSetup) ToKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string)

ToKeyFile: this function adds the page setup from setup to key_file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to save the page setup to.
  • groupName (optional): group to add the settings to in key_file, or NULL to use the default name “Page Setup”.

func (*PageSetup) TopMargin 

func (setup *PageSetup) TopMargin(unit Unit) float64

TopMargin gets the top margin in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: top margin.

type PageSetupDoneFunc 

type PageSetupDoneFunc func(pageSetup *PageSetup)

PageSetupDoneFunc: type of function that is passed to gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async().

This function will be called when the page setup dialog is dismissed, and also serves as destroy notify for data.

type PanDirection 

type PanDirection C.gint

PanDirection describes the panning direction of a GtkGesturePan. 

const (
	// PanDirectionLeft: panned towards the left.
	PanDirectionLeft PanDirection = iota
	// PanDirectionRight: panned towards the right.
	PanDirectionRight
	// PanDirectionUp: panned upwards.
	PanDirectionUp
	// PanDirectionDown: panned downwards.
	PanDirectionDown
)

func (PanDirection) String 

func (p PanDirection) String() string

String returns the name in string for PanDirection.

type Paned 

type Paned struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Paned: GtkPaned has two panes, arranged either horizontally or vertically.

!An example GtkPaned (panes.png)

The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle.

Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with gtk.Paned.SetStartChild() and gtk.Paned.SetEndChild(). The division between the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.

A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter.) Often, it is useful to put each child inside a gtk.Frame so that the gutter appears as a ridge. No separator is drawn if one of the children is missing.

Each child has two options that can be set, resize and shrink. If resize is true, then when the GtkPaned is resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If shrink is true, then that child can be made smaller than its requisition by the user. Setting shrink to FALSE allows the application to set a minimum size. If resize is false for both children, then this is treated as if resize is true for both children.

The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling gtk.Paned.SetPosition().

CSS nodes 

paned
├── <child>
├── separator[.wide]
╰── <child>

GtkPaned has a main CSS node with name paned, and a subnode for the separator with name separator. The subnode gets a .wide style class when the paned is supposed to be wide.

In horizontal orientation, the nodes are arranged based on the text direction, so in left-to-right mode, :first-child will select the leftmost child, while it will select the rightmost child in RTL layouts.

Creating a paned widget with minimum sizes. 

GtkWidget *hpaned = gtk_paned_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
GtkWidget *frame1 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
GtkWidget *frame2 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);

gtk_widget_set_size_request (hpaned, 200, -1);

gtk_paned_set_start_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame1);
gtk_paned_set_start_child_resize (GTK_PANED (hpaned), TRUE);
gtk_paned_set_start_child_shrink (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame1, 50, -1);

gtk_paned_set_end_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame2);
gtk_paned_set_end_child_resize (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_paned_set_end_child_shrink (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame2, 50, -1);.

func NewPaned 

func NewPaned(orientation Orientation) *Paned

NewPaned creates a new GtkPaned widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation paned’s orientation.

The function returns the following values:

  • paned: new GtkPaned.

func (*Paned) ConnectAcceptPosition 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectAcceptPosition(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAcceptPosition is emitted to accept the current position of the handle when moving it using key bindings.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is Return or Space.

func (*Paned) ConnectCancelPosition 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectCancelPosition(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCancelPosition is emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key bindings.

The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to moving it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is Escape.

func (*Paned) ConnectCycleChildFocus 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectCycleChildFocus(f func(reversed bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCycleChildFocus is emitted to cycle the focus between the children of the paned.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding is F6.

func (*Paned) ConnectCycleHandleFocus 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectCycleHandleFocus(f func(reversed bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCycleHandleFocus is emitted to cycle whether the paned should grab focus to allow the user to change position of the handle by using key bindings.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is F8.

func (*Paned) ConnectMoveHandle 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectMoveHandle(f func(scrollType ScrollType) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveHandle is emitted to move the handle with key bindings.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*Paned) ConnectToggleHandleFocus 

func (paned *Paned) ConnectToggleHandleFocus(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleHandleFocus is emitted to accept the current position of the handle and then move focus to the next widget in the focus chain.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding is Tab.

func (*Paned) EndChild 

func (paned *Paned) EndChild() Widgetter

EndChild retrieves the end child of the given GtkPaned.

See also: GtkPaned:end-child.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): end child widget.

func (*Paned) Position 

func (paned *Paned) Position() int

Position obtains the position of the divider between the two panes.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: position of the divider.

func (*Paned) ResizeEndChild 

func (paned *Paned) ResizeEndChild() bool

ResizeEndChild returns whether the end child can be resized.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the end child is resizable.

func (*Paned) ResizeStartChild 

func (paned *Paned) ResizeStartChild() bool

ResizeStartChild returns whether the start child can be resized.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the start child is resizable.

func (*Paned) SetEndChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetEndChild(child Widgetter)

SetEndChild sets the end child of paned to child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.

func (*Paned) SetPosition 

func (paned *Paned) SetPosition(position int)

SetPosition sets the position of the divider between the two panes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: pixel position of divider, a negative value means that the position is unset.

func (*Paned) SetResizeEndChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetResizeEndChild(resize bool)

SetResizeEndChild sets the GtkPaned:resize-end-child property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resize: TRUE to let the end child be resized.

func (*Paned) SetResizeStartChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetResizeStartChild(resize bool)

SetResizeStartChild sets the GtkPaned:resize-start-child property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resize: TRUE to let the start child be resized.

func (*Paned) SetShrinkEndChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetShrinkEndChild(resize bool)

SetShrinkEndChild sets the GtkPaned:shrink-end-child property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resize: TRUE to let the end child be shrunk.

func (*Paned) SetShrinkStartChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetShrinkStartChild(resize bool)

SetShrinkStartChild sets the GtkPaned:shrink-start-child property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resize: TRUE to let the start child be shrunk.

func (*Paned) SetStartChild 

func (paned *Paned) SetStartChild(child Widgetter)

SetStartChild sets the start child of paned to child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.

func (*Paned) SetWideHandle 

func (paned *Paned) SetWideHandle(wide bool)

SetWideHandle sets whether the separator should be wide.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wide: new value for the gtk.Paned:wide-handle property.

func (*Paned) ShrinkEndChild 

func (paned *Paned) ShrinkEndChild() bool

ShrinkEndChild returns whether the end child can be shrunk.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the end child is shrinkable.

func (*Paned) ShrinkStartChild 

func (paned *Paned) ShrinkStartChild() bool

ShrinkStartChild returns whether the start child can be shrunk.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the start child is shrinkable.

func (*Paned) StartChild 

func (paned *Paned) StartChild() Widgetter

StartChild retrieves the start child of the given GtkPaned.

See also: GtkPaned:start-child.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): start child widget.

func (*Paned) WideHandle 

func (paned *Paned) WideHandle() bool

WideHandle gets whether the separator should be wide.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the paned should have a wide handle.

type PaperSize 

type PaperSize struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PaperSize: GtkPaperSize handles paper sizes.

It uses the standard called PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG: Standard for Media Standardized Names (http://www.pwg.org/standards.html) to name the paper sizes (and to get the data for the page sizes). In addition to standard paper sizes, GtkPaperSize allows to construct custom paper sizes with arbitrary dimensions.

The GtkPaperSize object stores not only the dimensions (width and height) of a paper size and its name, it also provides default print margins.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewPaperSize 

func NewPaperSize(name string) *PaperSize

NewPaperSize constructs a struct PaperSize.

func NewPaperSizeCustom 

func NewPaperSizeCustom(name string, displayName string, width float64, height float64, unit Unit) *PaperSize

NewPaperSizeCustom constructs a struct PaperSize.

func NewPaperSizeFromGVariant 

func NewPaperSizeFromGVariant(variant *glib.Variant) *PaperSize

NewPaperSizeFromGVariant constructs a struct PaperSize.

func NewPaperSizeFromIPP 

func NewPaperSizeFromIPP(ippName string, width float64, height float64) *PaperSize

NewPaperSizeFromIPP constructs a struct PaperSize.

func NewPaperSizeFromKeyFile 

func NewPaperSizeFromKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string) (*PaperSize, error)

NewPaperSizeFromKeyFile constructs a struct PaperSize.

func NewPaperSizeFromPPD 

func NewPaperSizeFromPPD(ppdName string, ppdDisplayName string, width float64, height float64) *PaperSize

NewPaperSizeFromPPD constructs a struct PaperSize.

func PaperSizeGetPaperSizes 

func PaperSizeGetPaperSizes(includeCustom bool) []*PaperSize

PaperSizeGetPaperSizes creates a list of known paper sizes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • includeCustom: whether to include custom paper sizes as defined in the page setup dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: newly allocated list of newly allocated GtkPaperSize objects.

func (*PaperSize) Copy 

func (other *PaperSize) Copy() *PaperSize

Copy copies an existing GtkPaperSize.

The function returns the following values:

  • paperSize: copy of other.

func (*PaperSize) DefaultBottomMargin 

func (size *PaperSize) DefaultBottomMargin(unit Unit) float64

DefaultBottomMargin gets the default bottom margin for the GtkPaperSize.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: default bottom margin.

func (*PaperSize) DefaultLeftMargin 

func (size *PaperSize) DefaultLeftMargin(unit Unit) float64

DefaultLeftMargin gets the default left margin for the GtkPaperSize.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: default left margin.

func (*PaperSize) DefaultRightMargin 

func (size *PaperSize) DefaultRightMargin(unit Unit) float64

DefaultRightMargin gets the default right margin for the GtkPaperSize.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: default right margin.

func (*PaperSize) DefaultTopMargin 

func (size *PaperSize) DefaultTopMargin(unit Unit) float64

DefaultTopMargin gets the default top margin for the GtkPaperSize.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: default top margin.

func (*PaperSize) DisplayName 

func (size *PaperSize) DisplayName() string

DisplayName gets the human-readable name of the GtkPaperSize.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: human-readable name of size.

func (*PaperSize) Height 

func (size *PaperSize) Height(unit Unit) float64

Height gets the paper height of the GtkPaperSize, in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper height.

func (*PaperSize) IsCustom 

func (size *PaperSize) IsCustom() bool

IsCustom returns TRUE if size is not a standard paper size.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether size is a custom paper size.

func (*PaperSize) IsEqual 

func (size1 *PaperSize) IsEqual(size2 *PaperSize) bool

IsEqual compares two GtkPaperSize objects.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • size2: another GtkPaperSize object.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if size1 and size2 represent the same paper size.

func (*PaperSize) IsIPP 

func (size *PaperSize) IsIPP() bool

IsIPP returns TRUE if size is an IPP standard paper size.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether size is not an IPP custom paper size.

func (*PaperSize) Name 

func (size *PaperSize) Name() string

Name gets the name of the GtkPaperSize.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of size.

func (*PaperSize) PPDName 

func (size *PaperSize) PPDName() string

PPDName gets the PPD name of the GtkPaperSize, which may be NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: PPD name of size.

func (*PaperSize) SetSize 

func (size *PaperSize) SetSize(width float64, height float64, unit Unit)

SetSize changes the dimensions of a size to width x height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: new width in units of unit.
  • height: new height in units of unit.
  • unit for width and height.

func (*PaperSize) ToGVariant 

func (paperSize *PaperSize) ToGVariant() *glib.Variant

ToGVariant: serialize a paper size to an a{sv} variant.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant: new, floating, GVariant.

func (*PaperSize) ToKeyFile 

func (size *PaperSize) ToKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string)

ToKeyFile: this function adds the paper size from size to key_file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to save the paper size to.
  • groupName: group to add the settings to in key_file.

func (*PaperSize) Width 

func (size *PaperSize) Width(unit Unit) float64

Width gets the paper width of the GtkPaperSize, in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value, not GTK_UNIT_NONE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper width.

type PasswordEntry 

type PasswordEntry struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	EditableTextWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PasswordEntry: GtkPasswordEntry is an entry that has been tailored for entering secrets.

!An example GtkPasswordEntry (password-entry.png)

It does not show its contents in clear text, does not allow to copy it to the clipboard, and it shows a warning when Caps Lock is engaged. If the underlying platform allows it, GtkPasswordEntry will also place the text in a non-pageable memory area, to avoid it being written out to disk by the operating system.

Optionally, it can offer a way to reveal the contents in clear text.

GtkPasswordEntry provides only minimal API and should be used with the gtk.Editable API.

CSS Nodes 

entry.password
╰── text
    ├── image.caps-lock-indicator
    ┊

GtkPasswordEntry has a single CSS node with name entry that carries a .passwordstyle class. The text Css node below it has a child with name image and style class .caps-lock-indicator for the Caps Lock icon, and possibly other children.

Accessibility

GtkPasswordEntry uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOX role.

func NewPasswordEntry 

func NewPasswordEntry() *PasswordEntry

NewPasswordEntry creates a GtkPasswordEntry.

The function returns the following values:

  • passwordEntry: new GtkPasswordEntry.

func (*PasswordEntry) ConnectActivate 

func (entry *PasswordEntry) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when the entry is activated.

The keybindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.

func (*PasswordEntry) ExtraMenu 

func (entry *PasswordEntry) ExtraMenu() gio.MenuModeller

ExtraMenu gets the menu model set with gtk_password_entry_set_extra_menu().

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel: (nullable): the menu model.

func (*PasswordEntry) SetExtraMenu 

func (entry *PasswordEntry) SetExtraMenu(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetExtraMenu sets a menu model to add when constructing the context menu for entry.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*PasswordEntry) SetShowPeekIcon 

func (entry *PasswordEntry) SetShowPeekIcon(showPeekIcon bool)

SetShowPeekIcon sets whether the entry should have a clickable icon to reveal the contents.

Setting this to FALSE also hides the text again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showPeekIcon: whether to show the peek icon.

func (*PasswordEntry) ShowPeekIcon 

func (entry *PasswordEntry) ShowPeekIcon() bool

ShowPeekIcon returns whether the entry is showing an icon to reveal the contents.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if an icon is shown.

type PickFlags 

type PickFlags C.guint

PickFlags flags that influence the behavior of gtk_widget_pick(). 

const (
	// PickDefault: default behavior, include widgets that are receiving events.
	PickDefault PickFlags = 0b0
	// PickInsensitive: include widgets that are insensitive.
	PickInsensitive PickFlags = 0b1
	// PickNonTargetable: include widgets that are marked as non-targetable.
	// See Widget:can-target.
	PickNonTargetable PickFlags = 0b10
)

func (PickFlags) Has 

func (p PickFlags) Has(other PickFlags) bool

Has returns true if p contains other.

func (PickFlags) String 

func (p PickFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for PickFlags.

type Picture 

type Picture struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Picture: GtkPicture widget displays a GdkPaintable.

!An example GtkPicture (picture.png)

Many convenience functions are provided to make pictures simple to use. For example, if you want to load an image from a file, and then display it, there’s a convenience function to do this: 

GtkWidget *widget = gtk_picture_new_for_filename ("myfile.png");

If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the picture will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers. If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with gdk.Texture.NewFromFile, then create the GtkPicture with gtk.Picture.NewForPaintable.

Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of GResource for details. In this case, gtk.Picture.NewForResource and gtk.Picture.SetResource() should be used.

GtkPicture displays an image at its natural size. See gtk.Image if you want to display a fixed-size image, such as an icon.

Sizing the paintable

You can influence how the paintable is displayed inside the GtkPicture. By turning off gtk.Picture:keep-aspect-ratio you can allow the paintable to get stretched. gtk.Picture:can-shrink can be unset to make sure that paintables are never made smaller than their ideal size - but be careful if you do not know the size of the paintable in use (like when displaying user-loaded images). This can easily cause the picture to grow larger than the screen. And gtkwidget:halign and gtkwidget:valign can be used to make sure the paintable doesn't fill all available space but is instead displayed at its original size.

CSS nodes

GtkPicture has a single CSS node with the name picture.

Accessibility

GtkPicture uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_IMG role.

func NewPicture 

func NewPicture() *Picture

NewPicture creates a new empty GtkPicture widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: newly created GtkPicture widget.

func NewPictureForFile 

func NewPictureForFile(file gio.Filer) *Picture

NewPictureForFile creates a new GtkPicture displaying the given file.

If the file isn’t found or can’t be loaded, the resulting GtkPicture is empty.

If you need to detect failures to load the file, use gdk.Texture.NewFromFile to load the file yourself, then create the GtkPicture from the texture.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional): GFile.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: new GtkPicture.

func NewPictureForFilename 

func NewPictureForFilename(filename string) *Picture

NewPictureForFilename creates a new GtkPicture displaying the file filename.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.NewForFile. See that function for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional): filename.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: new GtkPicture.

func NewPictureForPaintable 

func NewPictureForPaintable(paintable gdk.Paintabler) *Picture

NewPictureForPaintable creates a new GtkPicture displaying paintable.

The GtkPicture will track changes to the paintable and update its size and contents in response to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: new GtkPicture.

func NewPictureForPixbuf 

func NewPictureForPixbuf(pixbuf *gdkpixbuf.Pixbuf) *Picture

NewPictureForPixbuf creates a new GtkPicture displaying pixbuf.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.NewForPaintable, See that function for details.

The pixbuf must not be modified after passing it to this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixbuf (optional): GdkPixbuf, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: new GtkPicture.

func NewPictureForResource 

func NewPictureForResource(resourcePath string) *Picture

NewPictureForResource creates a new GtkPicture displaying the resource at resource_path.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.NewForFile. See that function for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): resource path to play back.

The function returns the following values:

  • picture: new GtkPicture.

func (*Picture) AlternativeText 

func (self *Picture) AlternativeText() string

AlternativeText gets the alternative textual description of the picture.

The returned string will be NULL if the picture cannot be described textually.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): alternative textual description of self.

func (*Picture) CanShrink 

func (self *Picture) CanShrink() bool

CanShrink returns whether the GtkPicture respects its contents size.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the picture can be made smaller than its contents.

func (*Picture) File 

func (self *Picture) File() *gio.File

File gets the GFile currently displayed if self is displaying a file.

If self is not displaying a file, for example when gtk.Picture.SetPaintable() was used, then NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • file (optional): GFile displayed by self.

func (*Picture) KeepAspectRatio 

func (self *Picture) KeepAspectRatio() bool

KeepAspectRatio returns whether the GtkPicture preserves its contents aspect ratio.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the self tries to keep the contents' aspect ratio.

func (*Picture) Paintable 

func (self *Picture) Paintable() *gdk.Paintable

Paintable gets the GdkPaintable being displayed by the GtkPicture.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable (optional): displayed paintable, or NULL if the picture is empty.

func (*Picture) SetAlternativeText 

func (self *Picture) SetAlternativeText(alternativeText string)

SetAlternativeText sets an alternative textual description for the picture contents.

It is equivalent to the "alt" attribute for images on websites.

This text will be made available to accessibility tools.

If the picture cannot be described textually, set this property to NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • alternativeText (optional): textual description of the contents.

func (*Picture) SetCanShrink 

func (self *Picture) SetCanShrink(canShrink bool)

SetCanShrink: if set to TRUE, the self can be made smaller than its contents.

The contents will then be scaled down when rendering.

If you want to still force a minimum size manually, consider using gtk.Widget.SetSizeRequest().

Also of note is that a similar function for growing does not exist because the grow behavior can be controlled via gtk.Widget.SetHAlign() and gtk.Widget.SetVAlign().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canShrink: if self can be made smaller than its contents.

func (*Picture) SetFile 

func (self *Picture) SetFile(file gio.Filer)

SetFile makes self load and display file.

See gtk.Picture.NewForFile for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional): GFile or NULL.

func (*Picture) SetFilename 

func (self *Picture) SetFilename(filename string)

SetFilename makes self load and display the given filename.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.SetFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional) to play.

func (*Picture) SetKeepAspectRatio 

func (self *Picture) SetKeepAspectRatio(keepAspectRatio bool)

SetKeepAspectRatio: if set to TRUE, the self will render its contents according to their aspect ratio.

That means that empty space may show up at the top/bottom or left/right of self.

If set to FALSE or if the contents provide no aspect ratio, the contents will be stretched over the picture's whole area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keepAspectRatio: whether to keep aspect ratio.

func (*Picture) SetPaintable 

func (self *Picture) SetPaintable(paintable gdk.Paintabler)

SetPaintable makes self display the given paintable.

If paintable is NULL, nothing will be displayed.

See gtk.Picture.NewForPaintable for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional): GdkPaintable or NULL.

func (*Picture) SetPixbuf 

func (self *Picture) SetPixbuf(pixbuf *gdkpixbuf.Pixbuf)

SetPixbuf sets a GtkPicture to show a GdkPixbuf.

See gtk.Picture.NewForPixbuf for details.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.SetPaintable().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixbuf (optional): GdkPixbuf or NULL.

func (*Picture) SetResource 

func (self *Picture) SetResource(resourcePath string)

SetResource makes self load and display the resource at the given resource_path.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Picture.SetFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): resource to set.

type PictureClass added in v0.0.5 

type PictureClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PictureClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*PictureClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (p *PictureClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type PictureOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type PictureOverrides struct {
}

PictureOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type PolicyType 

type PolicyType C.gint

PolicyType determines how the size should be computed to achieve the one of the visibility mode for the scrollbars. 

const (
	// PolicyAlways: scrollbar is always visible. The view size is independent
	// of the content.
	PolicyAlways PolicyType = iota
	// PolicyAutomatic: scrollbar will appear and disappear as necessary.
	// For example, when all of a GtkTreeView can not be seen.
	PolicyAutomatic
	// PolicyNever: scrollbar should never appear. In this mode the content
	// determines the size.
	PolicyNever
	// PolicyExternal: don't show a scrollbar, but don't force the size to
	// follow the content. This can be used e.g. to make multiple scrolled
	// windows share a scrollbar.
	PolicyExternal
)

func (PolicyType) String 

func (p PolicyType) String() string

String returns the name in string for PolicyType.

type Popover 

type Popover struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	NativeSurface
	ShortcutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Popover: GtkPopover is a bubble-like context popup.

!An example GtkPopover (popover.png)

It is primarily meant to provide context-dependent information or options. Popovers are attached to a parent widget. By default, they point to the whole widget area, although this behavior can be changed with gtk.Popover.SetPointingTo().

The position of a popover relative to the widget it is attached to can also be changed with gtk.Popover.SetPosition()

By default, GtkPopover performs a grab, in order to ensure input events get redirected to it while it is shown, and also so the popover is dismissed in the expected situations (clicks outside the popover, or the Escape key being pressed). If no such modal behavior is desired on a popover, gtk.Popover.SetAutohide() may be called on it to tweak its behavior.

GtkPopover as menu replacement

GtkPopover is often used to replace menus. The best was to do this is to use the gtk.PopoverMenu subclass which supports being populated from a GMenuModel with gtk.PopoverMenu.NewFromModel. 

<section>
  <attribute name="display-hint">horizontal-buttons</attribute>
  <item>
    <attribute name="label">Cut</attribute>
    <attribute name="action">app.cut</attribute>
    <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-cut-symbolic</attribute>
  </item>
  <item>
    <attribute name="label">Copy</attribute>
    <attribute name="action">app.copy</attribute>
    <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-copy-symbolic</attribute>
  </item>
  <item>
    <attribute name="label">Paste</attribute>
    <attribute name="action">app.paste</attribute>
    <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-paste-symbolic</attribute>
  </item>
</section>

CSS nodes 

popover[.menu]
├── arrow
╰── contents.background
    ╰── <child>

The contents child node always gets the .background style class and the popover itself gets the .menu style class if the popover is menu-like (i.e. GtkPopoverMenu).

Particular uses of GtkPopover, such as touch selection popups or magnifiers in GtkEntry or GtkTextView get style classes like .touch-selection or .magnifier to differentiate from plain popovers.

When styling a popover directly, the popover node should usually not have any background. The visible part of the popover can have a shadow. To specify it in CSS, set the box-shadow of the contents node.

Note that, in order to accomplish appropriate arrow visuals, GtkPopover uses custom drawing for the arrow node. This makes it possible for the arrow to change its shape dynamically, but it also limits the possibilities of styling it using CSS. In particular, the arrow gets drawn over the content node's border and shadow, so they look like one shape, which means that the border width of the content node and the arrow node should be the same. The arrow also does not support any border shape other than solid, no border-radius, only one border width (border-bottom-width is used) and no box-shadow.

func NewPopover 

func NewPopover() *Popover

NewPopover creates a new GtkPopover.

The function returns the following values:

  • popover: new GtkPopover.

func (*Popover) Autohide 

func (popover *Popover) Autohide() bool

Autohide returns whether the popover is modal.

See gtk.Popover.SetAutohide() for the implications of this.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if popover is modal.

func (*Popover) CascadePopdown 

func (popover *Popover) CascadePopdown() bool

CascadePopdown returns whether the popover will close after a modal child is closed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if popover will close after a modal child.

func (*Popover) Child 

func (popover *Popover) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of popover.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of popover.

func (*Popover) ConnectActivateDefault 

func (popover *Popover) ConnectActivateDefault(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateDefault is emitted whend the user activates the default widget.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*Popover) ConnectClosed 

func (popover *Popover) ConnectClosed(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClosed is emitted when the popover is closed.

func (*Popover) HasArrow 

func (popover *Popover) HasArrow() bool

HasArrow gets whether this popover is showing an arrow pointing at the widget that it is relative to.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the popover has an arrow.

func (*Popover) MnemonicsVisible 

func (popover *Popover) MnemonicsVisible() bool

MnemonicsVisible gets whether mnemonics are visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if mnemonics are supposed to be visible in this popover.

func (*Popover) Offset 

func (popover *Popover) Offset() (xOffset, yOffset int)

Offset gets the offset previous set with gtk_popover_set_offset().

The function returns the following values:

  • xOffset (optional): location for the x_offset.
  • yOffset (optional): location for the y_offset.

func (*Popover) PointingTo 

func (popover *Popover) PointingTo() (*gdk.Rectangle, bool)

PointingTo gets the rectangle that the popover points to.

If a rectangle to point to has been set, this function will return TRUE and fill in rect with such rectangle, otherwise it will return FALSE and fill in rect with the parent widget coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • rect: location to store the rectangle.
  • ok: TRUE if a rectangle to point to was set.

func (*Popover) Popdown 

func (popover *Popover) Popdown()

Popdown pops popover down.

This is different from a gtk.Widget.Hide() call in that it may show the popover with a transition. If you want to hide the popover without a transition, just use gtk.Widget.Hide().

func (*Popover) Popup 

func (popover *Popover) Popup()

Popup pops popover up.

This is different from a gtk.Widget.Show() call in that it may show the popover with a transition(). If you want to show the popover without a transition, just use [methodGtk.Widget.show.

func (*Popover) Position 

func (popover *Popover) Position() PositionType

Position returns the preferred position of popover.

The function returns the following values:

  • positionType: preferred position.

func (*Popover) Present 

func (popover *Popover) Present()

Present presents the popover to the user.

func (*Popover) SetAutohide 

func (popover *Popover) SetAutohide(autohide bool)

SetAutohide sets whether popover is modal.

A modal popover will grab the keyboard focus on it when being displayed. Clicking outside the popover area or pressing Esc will dismiss the popover.

Called this function on an already showing popup with a new autohide value different from the current one, will cause the popup to be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • autohide: TRUE to dismiss the popover on outside clicks.

func (*Popover) SetCascadePopdown 

func (popover *Popover) SetCascadePopdown(cascadePopdown bool)

SetCascadePopdown: if cascade_popdown is TRUE, the popover will be closed when a child modal popover is closed.

If FALSE, popover will stay visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cascadePopdown: TRUE if the popover should follow a child closing.

func (*Popover) SetChild 

func (popover *Popover) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of popover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Popover) SetDefaultWidget 

func (popover *Popover) SetDefaultWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetDefaultWidget sets the default widget of a GtkPopover.

The default widget is the widget that’s activated when the user presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or unsets the default widget for a GtkPopover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): child widget of popover to set as the default, or NULL to unset the default widget for the popover.

func (*Popover) SetHasArrow 

func (popover *Popover) SetHasArrow(hasArrow bool)

SetHasArrow sets whether this popover should draw an arrow pointing at the widget it is relative to.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasArrow: TRUE to draw an arrow.

func (*Popover) SetMnemonicsVisible 

func (popover *Popover) SetMnemonicsVisible(mnemonicsVisible bool)

SetMnemonicsVisible sets whether mnemonics should be visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mnemonicsVisible: new value.

func (*Popover) SetOffset 

func (popover *Popover) SetOffset(xOffset, yOffset int)

SetOffset sets the offset to use when calculating the position of the popover.

These values are used when preparing the gdk.PopupLayout for positioning the popover.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xOffset: x offset to adjust the position by.
  • yOffset: y offset to adjust the position by.

func (*Popover) SetPointingTo 

func (popover *Popover) SetPointingTo(rect *gdk.Rectangle)

SetPointingTo sets the rectangle that popover points to.

This is in the coordinate space of the popover parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rect: rectangle to point to.

func (*Popover) SetPosition 

func (popover *Popover) SetPosition(position PositionType)

SetPosition sets the preferred position for popover to appear.

If the popover is currently visible, it will be immediately updated.

This preference will be respected where possible, although on lack of space (eg. if close to the window edges), the GtkPopover may choose to appear on the opposite side.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: preferred popover position.

type PopoverClass added in v0.0.5 

type PopoverClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PopoverClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*PopoverClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (p *PopoverClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type PopoverMenu 

type PopoverMenu struct {
	Popover
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PopoverMenu: GtkPopoverMenu is a subclass of GtkPopover that implements menu behavior.

!An example GtkPopoverMenu (menu.png)

GtkPopoverMenu treats its children like menus and allows switching between them. It can open submenus as traditional, nested submenus, or in a more touch-friendly sliding fashion.

GtkPopoverMenu is meant to be used primarily with menu models, using gtk.PopoverMenu.NewFromModel. If you need to put other widgets such as a GtkSpinButton or a GtkSwitch into a popover, you can use gtk.PopoverMenu.AddChild().

For more dialog-like behavior, use a plain GtkPopover.

Menu models

The XML format understood by GtkBuilder for GMenuModel consists of a toplevel <menu> element, which contains one or more <item> elements. Each <item> element contains <attribute> and <link> elements with a mandatory name attribute. <link> elements have the same content model as <menu>. Instead of <link name="submenu> or <link name="section">, you can use <submenu> or <section> elements. 

<menu id='app-menu'>
  <section>
    <item>
      <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_New Window</attribute>
      <attribute name='action'>app.new</attribute>
    </item>
    <item>
      <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_About Sunny</attribute>
      <attribute name='action'>app.about</attribute>
    </item>
    <item>
      <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Quit</attribute>
      <attribute name='action'>app.quit</attribute>
    </item>
  </section>
</menu>

Attribute values can be translated using gettext, like other GtkBuilder content. <attribute> elements can be marked for translation with a translatable="yes" attribute. It is also possible to specify message context and translator comments, using the context and comments attributes. To make use of this, the Builder must have been given the gettext domain to use.

The following attributes are used when constructing menu items:

- "label": a user-visible string to display

- "action": the prefixed name of the action to trigger

- "target": the parameter to use when activating the action

- "icon" and "verb-icon": names of icons that may be displayed

- "submenu-action": name of an action that may be used to determine if a submenu can be opened

- "hidden-when": a string used to determine when the item will be hidden. Possible values include "action-disabled", "action-missing", "macos-menubar". This is mainly useful for exported menus, see gtk.Application.SetMenubar().

- "custom": a string used to match against the ID of a custom child added with gtk.PopoverMenu.AddChild(), gtk.PopoverMenuBar.AddChild(), or in the ui file with <child type="ID">.

The following attributes are used when constructing sections:

- "label": a user-visible string to use as section heading

- "display-hint": a string used to determine special formatting for the section. Possible values include "horizontal-buttons", "circular-buttons" and "inline-buttons". They all indicate that section should be displayed as a horizontal row of buttons.

- "text-direction": a string used to determine the GtkTextDirection to use when "display-hint" is set to "horizontal-buttons". Possible values include "rtl", "ltr", and "none".

The following attributes are used when constructing submenus:

- "label": a user-visible string to display

- "icon": icon name to display

Menu items will also show accelerators, which are usually associated with actions via gtk.Application.SetAccelsForAction(), gtk_widget_class_add_binding_action or gtk.ShortcutController.AddShortcut().

CSS Nodes

GtkPopoverMenu is just a subclass of GtkPopover that adds custom content to it, therefore it has the same CSS nodes. It is one of the cases that add a .menu style class to the popover's main node.

Accessibility

GtkPopoverMenu uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU role, and its items use the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM, GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM_CHECKBOX or GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM_RADIO roles, depending on the action they are connected to.

func NewPopoverMenuFromModel 

func NewPopoverMenuFromModel(model gio.MenuModeller) *PopoverMenu

NewPopoverMenuFromModel creates a GtkPopoverMenu and populates it according to model.

The created buttons are connected to actions found in the GtkApplicationWindow to which the popover belongs - typically by means of being attached to a widget that is contained within the GtkApplicationWindows widget hierarchy.

Actions can also be added using gtk.Widget.InsertActionGroup() on the menus attach widget or on any of its parent widgets.

This function creates menus with sliding submenus. See gtk.PopoverMenu.NewFromModelFull for a way to control this.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • popoverMenu: new GtkPopoverMenu.

func NewPopoverMenuFromModelFull 

func NewPopoverMenuFromModelFull(model gio.MenuModeller, flags PopoverMenuFlags) *PopoverMenu

NewPopoverMenuFromModelFull creates a GtkPopoverMenu and populates it according to model.

The created buttons are connected to actions found in the action groups that are accessible from the parent widget. This includes the GtkApplicationWindow to which the popover belongs. Actions can also be added using gtk.Widget.InsertActionGroup() on the parent widget or on any of its parent widgets.

The only flag that is supported currently is GTK_POPOVER_MENU_NESTED, which makes GTK create traditional, nested submenus instead of the default sliding submenus.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: GMenuModel.
  • flags that affect how the menu is created.

The function returns the following values:

  • popoverMenu: new GtkPopoverMenu.

func (*PopoverMenu) AddChild 

func (popover *PopoverMenu) AddChild(child Widgetter, id string) bool

AddChild adds a custom widget to a generated menu.

For this to work, the menu model of popover must have an item with a custom attribute that matches id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to add.
  • id: ID to insert child at.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if id was found and the widget added.

func (*PopoverMenu) MenuModel 

func (popover *PopoverMenu) MenuModel() gio.MenuModeller

MenuModel returns the menu model used to populate the popover.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel: menu model of popover.

func (*PopoverMenu) RemoveChild 

func (popover *PopoverMenu) RemoveChild(child Widgetter) bool

RemoveChild removes a widget that has previously been added with gtk_popover_menu_add_child().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to remove.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget was removed.

func (*PopoverMenu) SetMenuModel 

func (popover *PopoverMenu) SetMenuModel(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetMenuModel sets a new menu model on popover.

The existing contents of popover are removed, and the popover is populated with new contents according to model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL.

type PopoverMenuBar 

type PopoverMenuBar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PopoverMenuBar: GtkPopoverMenuBar presents a horizontal bar of items that pop up popover menus when clicked.

!An example GtkPopoverMenuBar (menubar.png)

The only way to create instances of GtkPopoverMenuBar is from a GMenuModel.

CSS nodes 

menubar
├── item[.active]
┊   ╰── popover
╰── item
    ╰── popover

GtkPopoverMenuBar has a single CSS node with name menubar, below which each item has its CSS node, and below that the corresponding popover.

The item whose popover is currently open gets the .active style class.

Accessibility

GtkPopoverMenuBar uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_BAR role, the menu items use the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM role and the menus use the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU role.

func NewPopoverMenuBarFromModel 

func NewPopoverMenuBarFromModel(model gio.MenuModeller) *PopoverMenuBar

NewPopoverMenuBarFromModel creates a GtkPopoverMenuBar from a GMenuModel.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • popoverMenuBar: new GtkPopoverMenuBar.

func (*PopoverMenuBar) AddChild 

func (bar *PopoverMenuBar) AddChild(child Widgetter, id string) bool

AddChild adds a custom widget to a generated menubar.

For this to work, the menu model of bar must have an item with a custom attribute that matches id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget to add.
  • id: ID to insert child at.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if id was found and the widget added.

func (*PopoverMenuBar) MenuModel 

func (bar *PopoverMenuBar) MenuModel() gio.MenuModeller

MenuModel returns the model from which the contents of bar are taken.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel: GMenuModel.

func (*PopoverMenuBar) RemoveChild 

func (bar *PopoverMenuBar) RemoveChild(child Widgetter) bool

RemoveChild removes a widget that has previously been added with gtk_popover_menu_bar_add_child().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget was removed.

func (*PopoverMenuBar) SetMenuModel 

func (bar *PopoverMenuBar) SetMenuModel(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetMenuModel sets a menu model from which bar should take its contents.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel, or NULL.

type PopoverMenuFlags 

type PopoverMenuFlags C.guint

PopoverMenuFlags flags that affect how popover menus are created from a menu model. 

const (
	// PopoverMenuNested: create submenus as nested popovers. Without this flag,
	// submenus are created as sliding pages that replace the main menu.
	PopoverMenuNested PopoverMenuFlags = 0b1
)

func (PopoverMenuFlags) Has 

func (p PopoverMenuFlags) Has(other PopoverMenuFlags) bool

Has returns true if p contains other.

func (PopoverMenuFlags) String 

func (p PopoverMenuFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for PopoverMenuFlags.

type PopoverOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type PopoverOverrides struct {
	ActivateDefault func()
	Closed          func()
}

PopoverOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type PositionType 

type PositionType C.gint

PositionType describes which edge of a widget a certain feature is positioned at.

For examples, see the tabs of a GtkNotebook, or the label of a GtkScale. 

const (
	// PosLeft: feature is at the left edge.
	PosLeft PositionType = iota
	// PosRight: feature is at the right edge.
	PosRight
	// PosTop: feature is at the top edge.
	PosTop
	// PosBottom: feature is at the bottom edge.
	PosBottom
)

func (PositionType) String 

func (p PositionType) String() string

String returns the name in string for PositionType.

type PrintContext 

type PrintContext struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintContext: GtkPrintContext encapsulates context information that is required when drawing pages for printing.

This includes the cairo context and important parameters like page size and resolution. It also lets you easily create pango.Layout and pango.Context objects that match the font metrics of the cairo surface.

GtkPrintContext objects get passed to the gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print, gtk.PrintOperation::end-print, gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup and gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page signals on the gtk.PrintOperation object.

Using GtkPrintContext in a ::draw-page callback 

static void
draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
           GtkPrintContext   *context,
           int                page_nr)
{
  cairo_t *cr;
  PangoLayout *layout;
  PangoFontDescription *desc;

  cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);

  // Draw a red rectangle, as wide as the paper (inside the margins)
  cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 1.0, 0, 0);
  cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, gtk_print_context_get_width (context), 50);

  cairo_fill (cr);

  // Draw some lines
  cairo_move_to (cr, 20, 10);
  cairo_line_to (cr, 40, 20);
  cairo_arc (cr, 60, 60, 20, 0, M_PI);
  cairo_line_to (cr, 80, 20);

  cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0, 0);
  cairo_set_line_width (cr, 5);
  cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND);
  cairo_set_line_join (cr, CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND);

  cairo_stroke (cr);

  // Draw some text
  layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
  pango_layout_set_text (layout, "Hello World! Printing is easy", -1);
  desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 28");
  pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
  pango_font_description_free (desc);

  cairo_move_to (cr, 30, 20);
  pango_cairo_layout_path (cr, layout);

  // Font Outline
  cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.93, 1.0, 0.47);
  cairo_set_line_width (cr, 0.5);
  cairo_stroke_preserve (cr);

  // Font Fill
  cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0.0, 1.0);
  cairo_fill (cr);

  g_object_unref (layout);
}.

func (*PrintContext) CairoContext 

func (context *PrintContext) CairoContext() *cairo.Context

CairoContext obtains the cairo context that is associated with the GtkPrintContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret: cairo context of context.

func (*PrintContext) CreatePangoContext 

func (context *PrintContext) CreatePangoContext() *pango.Context

CreatePangoContext creates a new PangoContext that can be used with the GtkPrintContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret: new Pango context for context.

func (*PrintContext) CreatePangoLayout 

func (context *PrintContext) CreatePangoLayout() *pango.Layout

CreatePangoLayout creates a new PangoLayout that is suitable for use with the GtkPrintContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • layout: new Pango layout for context.

func (*PrintContext) DPIX 

func (context *PrintContext) DPIX() float64

DPIX obtains the horizontal resolution of the GtkPrintContext, in dots per inch.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: horizontal resolution of context.

func (*PrintContext) DPIY 

func (context *PrintContext) DPIY() float64

DPIY obtains the vertical resolution of the GtkPrintContext, in dots per inch.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: vertical resolution of context.

func (*PrintContext) HardMargins 

func (context *PrintContext) HardMargins() (top, bottom, left, right float64, ok bool)

HardMargins obtains the hardware printer margins of the GtkPrintContext, in units.

The function returns the following values:

  • top hardware printer margin.
  • bottom hardware printer margin.
  • left hardware printer margin.
  • right hardware printer margin.
  • ok: TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved.

func (*PrintContext) Height 

func (context *PrintContext) Height() float64

Height obtains the height of the GtkPrintContext, in pixels.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: height of context.

func (*PrintContext) PageSetup 

func (context *PrintContext) PageSetup() *PageSetup

PageSetup obtains the GtkPageSetup that determines the page dimensions of the GtkPrintContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: page setup of context.

func (*PrintContext) PangoFontmap 

func (context *PrintContext) PangoFontmap() pango.FontMapper

PangoFontmap returns a PangoFontMap that is suitable for use with the GtkPrintContext.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontMap: font map of context.

func (*PrintContext) SetCairoContext 

func (context *PrintContext) SetCairoContext(cr *cairo.Context, dpiX, dpiY float64)

SetCairoContext sets a new cairo context on a print context.

This function is intended to be used when implementing an internal print preview, it is not needed for printing, since GTK itself creates a suitable cairo context in that case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cr: cairo context.
  • dpiX: horizontal resolution to use with cr.
  • dpiY: vertical resolution to use with cr.

func (*PrintContext) Width 

func (context *PrintContext) Width() float64

Width obtains the width of the GtkPrintContext, in pixels.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: width of context.

type PrintDuplex 

type PrintDuplex C.gint

PrintDuplex: see also gtk_print_settings_set_duplex(). 

const (
	// PrintDuplexSimplex: no duplex.
	PrintDuplexSimplex PrintDuplex = iota
	// PrintDuplexHorizontal: horizontal duplex.
	PrintDuplexHorizontal
	// PrintDuplexVertical: vertical duplex.
	PrintDuplexVertical
)

func (PrintDuplex) String 

func (p PrintDuplex) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintDuplex.

type PrintError 

type PrintError C.gint

PrintError: error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using the GTK printing support. 

const (
	// PrintErrorGeneral: unspecified error occurred.
	PrintErrorGeneral PrintError = iota
	// PrintErrorInternalError: internal error occurred.
	PrintErrorInternalError
	// PrintErrorNOMEM: memory allocation failed.
	PrintErrorNOMEM
	// PrintErrorInvalidFile: error occurred while loading a page setup or paper
	// size from a key file.
	PrintErrorInvalidFile
)

func (PrintError) String 

func (p PrintError) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintError.

type PrintOperation 

type PrintOperation struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	PrintOperationPreview
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintOperation: GtkPrintOperation is the high-level, portable printing API.

It looks a bit different than other GTK dialogs such as the GtkFileChooser, since some platforms don’t expose enough infrastructure to implement a good print dialog. On such platforms, GtkPrintOperation uses the native print dialog. On platforms which do not provide a native print dialog, GTK uses its own, see gtk.PrintUnixDialog.

The typical way to use the high-level printing API is to create a GtkPrintOperation object with gtk.PrintOperation.New when the user selects to print. Then you set some properties on it, e.g. the page size, any gtk.PrintSettings from previous print operations, the number of pages, the current page, etc.

Then you start the print operation by calling gtk.PrintOperation.Run(). It will then show a dialog, let the user select a printer and options. When the user finished the dialog, various signals will be emitted on the GtkPrintOperation, the main one being gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page, which you are supposed to handle and render the page on the provided gtk.PrintContext using Cairo.

The high-level printing API 

static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;

static void
do_print (void)
{
  GtkPrintOperation *print;
  GtkPrintOperationResult res;

  print = gtk_print_operation_new ();

  if (settings != NULL)
    gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);

  g_signal_connect (print, "begin_print", G_CALLBACK (begin_print), NULL);
  g_signal_connect (print, "draw_page", G_CALLBACK (draw_page), NULL);

  res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
                                 GTK_WINDOW (main_window), NULL);

  if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
    {
      if (settings != NULL)
        g_object_unref (settings);
      settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
    }

  g_object_unref (print);
}

By default GtkPrintOperation uses an external application to do print preview. To implement a custom print preview, an application must connect to the preview signal. The functions gtk.PrintOperationPreview.RenderPage(), gtk.PrintOperationPreview.EndPreview() and gtk.PrintOperationPreview.IsSelected() are useful when implementing a print preview.

func NewPrintOperation 

func NewPrintOperation() *PrintOperation

NewPrintOperation creates a new GtkPrintOperation.

The function returns the following values:

  • printOperation: new GtkPrintOperation.

func (*PrintOperation) Cancel 

func (op *PrintOperation) Cancel()

Cancel cancels a running print operation.

This function may be called from a gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print, gtk.PrintOperation::paginate or gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page signal handler to stop the currently running print operation.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectBeginPrint 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectBeginPrint(f func(context *PrintContext)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBeginPrint is emitted after the user has finished changing print settings in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.

A typical use for ::begin-print is to use the parameters from the gtk.PrintContext and paginate the document accordingly, and then set the number of pages with gtk.PrintOperation.SetNPages().

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectCreateCustomWidget 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectCreateCustomWidget(f func() (object *coreglib.Object)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCreateCustomWidget is emitted when displaying the print dialog.

If you return a widget in a handler for this signal it will be added to a custom tab in the print dialog. You typically return a container widget with multiple widgets in it.

The print dialog owns the returned widget, and its lifetime is not controlled by the application. However, the widget is guaranteed to stay around until the gtk.PrintOperation::custom-widget-apply signal is emitted on the operation. Then you can read out any information you need from the widgets.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectCustomWidgetApply 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectCustomWidgetApply(f func(widget Widgetter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCustomWidgetApply is emitted right before ::begin-print if you added a custom widget in the ::create-custom-widget handler.

When you get this signal you should read the information from the custom widgets, as the widgets are not guaranteed to be around at a later time.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectDone 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectDone(f func(result PrintOperationResult)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDone is emitted when the print operation run has finished doing everything required for printing.

result gives you information about what happened during the run. If result is GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR then you can call gtk.PrintOperation.GetError() for more information.

If you enabled print status tracking then gtk.PrintOperation.IsFinished() may still return FALSE after the ::done signal was emitted.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectDrawPage 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectDrawPage(f func(context *PrintContext, pageNr int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDrawPage is emitted for every page that is printed.

The signal handler must render the page_nr's page onto the cairo context obtained from context using gtk.PrintContext.GetCairoContext(). 

static void
draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
           GtkPrintContext   *context,
           int                page_nr,
           gpointer           user_data)
{
  cairo_t *cr;
  PangoLayout *layout;
  double width, text_height;
  int layout_height;
  PangoFontDescription *desc;

  cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
  width = gtk_print_context_get_width (context);

  cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, width, HEADER_HEIGHT);

  cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.8, 0.8, 0.8);
  cairo_fill (cr);

  layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);

  desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 14");
  pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
  pango_font_description_free (desc);

  pango_layout_set_text (layout, "some text", -1);
  pango_layout_set_width (layout, width * PANGO_SCALE);
  pango_layout_set_alignment (layout, PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER);

  pango_layout_get_size (layout, NULL, &layout_height);
  text_height = (double)layout_height / PANGO_SCALE;

  cairo_move_to (cr, width / 2,  (HEADER_HEIGHT - text_height) / 2);
  pango_cairo_show_layout (cr, layout);

  g_object_unref (layout);
}

Use gtk.PrintOperation.SetUseFullPage() and gtk.PrintOperation.SetUnit() before starting the print operation to set up the transformation of the cairo context according to your needs.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectEndPrint 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectEndPrint(f func(context *PrintContext)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEndPrint is emitted after all pages have been rendered.

A handler for this signal can clean up any resources that have been allocated in the gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print handler.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectPaginate 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectPaginate(f func(context *PrintContext) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPaginate is emitted after the ::begin-print signal, but before the actual rendering starts.

It keeps getting emitted until a connected signal handler returns TRUE.

The ::paginate signal is intended to be used for paginating a document in small chunks, to avoid blocking the user interface for a long time. The signal handler should update the number of pages using gtk.PrintOperation.SetNPages(), and return TRUE if the document has been completely paginated.

If you don't need to do pagination in chunks, you can simply do it all in the ::begin-print handler, and set the number of pages from there.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectPreview 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectPreview(f func(preview PrintOperationPreviewer, context *PrintContext, parent *Window) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreview gets emitted when a preview is requested from the native dialog.

The default handler for this signal uses an external viewer application to preview.

To implement a custom print preview, an application must return TRUE from its handler for this signal. In order to use the provided context for the preview implementation, it must be given a suitable cairo context with gtk.PrintContext.SetCairoContext().

The custom preview implementation can use gtk.PrintOperationPreview.IsSelected() and gtk.PrintOperationPreview.RenderPage() to find pages which are selected for print and render them. The preview must be finished by calling gtk.PrintOperationPreview.EndPreview() (typically in response to the user clicking a close button).

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectRequestPageSetup 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectRequestPageSetup(f func(context *PrintContext, pageNr int, setup *PageSetup)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRequestPageSetup is emitted once for every page that is printed.

This gives the application a chance to modify the page setup. Any changes done to setup will be in force only for printing this page.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectStatusChanged 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectStatusChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStatusChanged is emitted at between the various phases of the print operation.

See gtk.PrintStatus for the phases that are being discriminated. Use gtk.PrintOperation.GetStatus() to find out the current status.

func (*PrintOperation) ConnectUpdateCustomWidget 

func (op *PrintOperation) ConnectUpdateCustomWidget(f func(widget Widgetter, setup *PageSetup, settings *PrintSettings)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUpdateCustomWidget is emitted after change of selected printer.

The actual page setup and print settings are passed to the custom widget, which can actualize itself according to this change.

func (*PrintOperation) DefaultPageSetup 

func (op *PrintOperation) DefaultPageSetup() *PageSetup

DefaultPageSetup returns the default page setup.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSetup: default page setup.

func (*PrintOperation) DrawPageFinish 

func (op *PrintOperation) DrawPageFinish()

DrawPageFinish: signal that drawing of particular page is complete.

It is called after completion of page drawing (e.g. drawing in another thread). If gtk.PrintOperation.SetDeferDrawing() was called before, then this function has to be called by application. Otherwise it is called by GTK itself.

func (*PrintOperation) EmbedPageSetup 

func (op *PrintOperation) EmbedPageSetup() bool

EmbedPageSetup gets whether page setup selection combos are embedded.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether page setup selection combos are embedded.

func (*PrintOperation) Error 

func (op *PrintOperation) Error() error

Error: call this when the result of a print operation is GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR.

It can be called either after gtk.PrintOperation.Run() returns, or in the gtk.PrintOperation::done signal handler.

The returned GError will contain more details on what went wrong.

func (*PrintOperation) HasSelection 

func (op *PrintOperation) HasSelection() bool

HasSelection gets whether there is a selection.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether there is a selection.

func (*PrintOperation) IsFinished 

func (op *PrintOperation) IsFinished() bool

IsFinished: convenience function to find out if the print operation is finished.

a print operation is finished if its status is either GTK_PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED or GTK_PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED_ABORTED.

Note: when you enable print status tracking the print operation can be in a non-finished state even after done has been called, as the operation status then tracks the print job status on the printer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if the print operation is finished.

func (*PrintOperation) NPagesToPrint 

func (op *PrintOperation) NPagesToPrint() int

NPagesToPrint returns the number of pages that will be printed.

Note that this value is set during print preparation phase (GTK_PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING), so this function should never be called before the data generation phase (GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA). You can connect to the gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed signal and call gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print() when print status is GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA.

This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of pages that will be printed.

func (*PrintOperation) PrintSettings 

func (op *PrintOperation) PrintSettings() *PrintSettings

PrintSettings returns the current print settings.

Note that the return value is NULL until either gtk.PrintOperation.SetPrintSettings() or gtk.PrintOperation.Run() have been called.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: current print settings of op.

func (*PrintOperation) Run 

func (op *PrintOperation) Run(action PrintOperationAction, parent *Window) (PrintOperationResult, error)

Run runs the print operation.

Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all pages is complete. You can connect to the gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed signal on op to obtain some information about the progress of the print operation.

Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.

If you set the [Gtk.PrintOperation:allow-async] property, the operation will run asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The gtk.PrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when the print succeeds or fails). 

if (settings != NULL)
  gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);

if (page_setup != NULL)
  gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);

g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
                  G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
                  G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);

res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
                               GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
                               parent,
                               &error);

if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
 {
   error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
  			                     GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
					     GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
					     GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
					     "Error printing file:\ns",
					     error->message);
   g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
                     G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy), NULL);
   gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
   g_error_free (error);
 }
else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
 {
   if (settings != NULL)
g_object_unref (settings);
   settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
 }

Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a given GtkPrintOperation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • action to start.
  • parent (optional): transient parent of the dialog.

The function returns the following values:

  • printOperationResult: result of the print operation. A return value of GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain the used print settings with gtk.PrintOperation.GetPrintSettings() and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running asynchronously, and will emit the gtk.PrintOperation::done signal when done.

func (*PrintOperation) SetAllowAsync 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetAllowAsync(allowAsync bool)

SetAllowAsync sets whether gtk_print_operation_run() may return before the print operation is completed.

Note that some platforms may not allow asynchronous operation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • allowAsync: TRUE to allow asynchronous operation.

func (*PrintOperation) SetCurrentPage 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetCurrentPage(currentPage int)

SetCurrentPage sets the current page.

If this is called before gtk.PrintOperation.Run(), the user will be able to select to print only the current page.

Note that this only makes sense for pre-paginated documents.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • currentPage: current page, 0-based.

func (*PrintOperation) SetCustomTabLabel 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetCustomTabLabel(label string)

SetCustomTabLabel sets the label for the tab holding custom widgets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label (optional) to use, or NULL to use the default label.

func (*PrintOperation) SetDefaultPageSetup 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetDefaultPageSetup(defaultPageSetup *PageSetup)

SetDefaultPageSetup makes default_page_setup the default page setup for op.

This page setup will be used by gtk.PrintOperation.Run(), but it can be overridden on a per-page basis by connecting to the gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • defaultPageSetup (optional): GtkPageSetup, or NULL.

func (*PrintOperation) SetDeferDrawing 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetDeferDrawing()

SetDeferDrawing sets up the GtkPrintOperation to wait for calling of [methodGtk.PrintOperation.draw_page_finish from application.

This can be used for drawing page in another thread.

This function must be called in the callback of the gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page signal.

func (*PrintOperation) SetEmbedPageSetup 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetEmbedPageSetup(embed bool)

SetEmbedPageSetup: embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.

Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in GtkPrintOperation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • embed: TRUE to embed page setup selection in the GtkPrintUnixDialog.

func (*PrintOperation) SetExportFilename 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetExportFilename(filename string)

SetExportFilename sets up the GtkPrintOperation to generate a file instead of showing the print dialog.

The intended use of this function is for implementing “Export to PDF” actions. Currently, PDF is the only supported format.

“Print to PDF” support is independent of this and is done by letting the user pick the “Print to PDF” item from the list of printers in the print dialog.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename for the exported file.

func (*PrintOperation) SetHasSelection 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetHasSelection(hasSelection bool)

SetHasSelection sets whether there is a selection to print.

Application has to set number of pages to which the selection will draw by gtk.PrintOperation.SetNPages() in a handler for the gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasSelection: TRUE indicates that a selection exists.

func (*PrintOperation) SetJobName 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetJobName(jobName string)

SetJobName sets the name of the print job.

The name is used to identify the job (e.g. in monitoring applications like eggcups).

If you don’t set a job name, GTK picks a default one by numbering successive print jobs.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • jobName: string that identifies the print job.

func (*PrintOperation) SetNPages 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetNPages(nPages int)

SetNPages sets the number of pages in the document.

This must be set to a positive number before the rendering starts. It may be set in a gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print signal handler.

Note that the page numbers passed to the gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup and gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal will be for page n_pages - 1.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • nPages: number of pages.

func (*PrintOperation) SetPrintSettings 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetPrintSettings(printSettings *PrintSettings)

SetPrintSettings sets the print settings for op.

This is typically used to re-establish print settings from a previous print operation, see gtk.PrintOperation.Run().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • printSettings (optional): GtkPrintSettings.

func (*PrintOperation) SetShowProgress 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetShowProgress(showProgress bool)

SetShowProgress: if show_progress is TRUE, the print operation will show a progress dialog during the print operation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showProgress: TRUE to show a progress dialog.

func (*PrintOperation) SetSupportSelection 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetSupportSelection(supportSelection bool)

SetSupportSelection sets whether selection is supported by GtkPrintOperation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • supportSelection: TRUE to support selection.

func (*PrintOperation) SetTrackPrintStatus 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetTrackPrintStatus(trackStatus bool)

SetTrackPrintStatus: if track_status is TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer.

This can allow your application to show things like “out of paper” issues, and when the print job actually reaches the printer.

This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should not be enabled unless needed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • trackStatus: TRUE to track status after printing.

func (*PrintOperation) SetUnit 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetUnit(unit Unit)

SetUnit sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from GtkPrintContext in such a way that distances are measured in units of unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit to use.

func (*PrintOperation) SetUseFullPage 

func (op *PrintOperation) SetUseFullPage(fullPage bool)

SetUseFullPage: if full_page is TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context obtained from GtkPrintContext puts the origin at the top left corner of the page.

This may not be the top left corner of the sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fullPage: TRUE to set up the GtkPrintContext for the full page.

func (*PrintOperation) Status 

func (op *PrintOperation) Status() PrintStatus

Status returns the status of the print operation.

Also see gtk.PrintOperation.GetStatusString().

The function returns the following values:

  • printStatus status of the print operation.

func (*PrintOperation) StatusString 

func (op *PrintOperation) StatusString() string

StatusString returns a string representation of the status of the print operation.

The string is translated and suitable for displaying the print status e.g. in a GtkStatusbar.

Use gtk.PrintOperation.GetStatus() to obtain a status value that is suitable for programmatic use.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: string representation of the status of the print operation.

func (*PrintOperation) SupportSelection 

func (op *PrintOperation) SupportSelection() bool

SupportSelection gets whether the application supports print of selection.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the application supports print of selection.

type PrintOperationAction 

type PrintOperationAction C.gint

PrintOperationAction determines what action the print operation should perform.

A parameter of this typs is passed to gtk.PrintOperation.Run(). 

const (
	// PrintOperationActionPrintDialog: show the print dialog.
	PrintOperationActionPrintDialog PrintOperationAction = iota
	// PrintOperationActionPrint: start to print without showing the print
	// dialog, based on the current print settings.
	PrintOperationActionPrint
	// PrintOperationActionPreview: show the print preview.
	PrintOperationActionPreview
	// PrintOperationActionExport: export to a file. This requires the
	// export-filename property to be set.
	PrintOperationActionExport
)

func (PrintOperationAction) String 

func (p PrintOperationAction) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintOperationAction.

type PrintOperationClass added in v0.0.5 

type PrintOperationClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintOperationClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type PrintOperationOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type PrintOperationOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	BeginPrint func(context *PrintContext)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	CustomWidgetApply func(widget Widgetter)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	Done func(result PrintOperationResult)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context
	//   - pageNr
	//
	DrawPage func(context *PrintContext, pageNr int)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	EndPrint func(context *PrintContext)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Paginate func(context *PrintContext) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - preview
	//   - context
	//   - parent
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Preview func(preview PrintOperationPreviewer, context *PrintContext, parent *Window) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - context
	//   - pageNr
	//   - setup
	//
	RequestPageSetup func(context *PrintContext, pageNr int, setup *PageSetup)
	StatusChanged    func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - widget
	//   - setup
	//   - settings
	//
	UpdateCustomWidget func(widget Widgetter, setup *PageSetup, settings *PrintSettings)
}

PrintOperationOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type PrintOperationPreview 

type PrintOperationPreview struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintOperationPreview: GtkPrintOperationPreview is the interface that is used to implement print preview.

A GtkPrintOperationPreview object is passed to the gtk.PrintOperation::preview signal by gtk.PrintOperation.

PrintOperationPreview wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*PrintOperationPreview) ConnectGotPageSize 

func (preview *PrintOperationPreview) ConnectGotPageSize(f func(context *PrintContext, pageSetup *PageSetup)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectGotPageSize is emitted once for each page that gets rendered to the preview.

A handler for this signal should update the context according to page_setup and set up a suitable cairo context, using gtk.PrintContext.SetCairoContext().

func (*PrintOperationPreview) ConnectReady 

func (preview *PrintOperationPreview) ConnectReady(f func(context *PrintContext)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectReady signal gets emitted once per preview operation, before the first page is rendered.

A handler for this signal can be used for setup tasks.

func (*PrintOperationPreview) EndPreview 

func (preview *PrintOperationPreview) EndPreview()

EndPreview ends a preview.

This function must be called to finish a custom print preview.

func (*PrintOperationPreview) IsSelected 

func (preview *PrintOperationPreview) IsSelected(pageNr int) bool

IsSelected returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that have been selected for printing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNr: page number.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the page has been selected for printing.

func (*PrintOperationPreview) RenderPage 

func (preview *PrintOperationPreview) RenderPage(pageNr int)

RenderPage renders a page to the preview.

This is using the print context that was passed to the gtk.PrintOperation::preview handler together with preview.

A custom print preview should use this function to render the currently selected page.

Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to be associated with the print context.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageNr: page to render.

type PrintOperationPreviewIface added in v0.0.5 

type PrintOperationPreviewIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintOperationPreviewIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type PrintOperationPreviewer 

type PrintOperationPreviewer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// EndPreview ends a preview.
	EndPreview()
	// IsSelected returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages
	// that have been selected for printing.
	IsSelected(pageNr int) bool
	// RenderPage renders a page to the preview.
	RenderPage(pageNr int)

	// Got-page-size is emitted once for each page that gets rendered to the
	// preview.
	ConnectGotPageSize(func(context *PrintContext, pageSetup *PageSetup)) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Ready signal gets emitted once per preview operation, before the first
	// page is rendered.
	ConnectReady(func(context *PrintContext)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

PrintOperationPreviewer describes PrintOperationPreview's interface methods.

type PrintOperationResult 

type PrintOperationResult C.gint

PrintOperationResult: result of a print operation.

A value of this type is returned by gtk.PrintOperation.Run(). 

const (
	// PrintOperationResultError: error has occurred.
	PrintOperationResultError PrintOperationResult = iota
	// PrintOperationResultApply: print settings should be stored.
	PrintOperationResultApply
	// PrintOperationResultCancel: print operation has been canceled, the print
	// settings should not be stored.
	PrintOperationResultCancel
	// PrintOperationResultInProgress: print operation is not complete yet.
	// This value will only be returned when running asynchronously.
	PrintOperationResultInProgress
)

func (PrintOperationResult) String 

func (p PrintOperationResult) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintOperationResult.

type PrintPages 

type PrintPages C.gint

PrintPages: see also gtk_print_job_set_pages(). 

const (
	// PrintPagesAll: all pages.
	PrintPagesAll PrintPages = iota
	// PrintPagesCurrent: current page.
	PrintPagesCurrent
	// PrintPagesRanges: range of pages.
	PrintPagesRanges
	// PrintPagesSelection: selected pages.
	PrintPagesSelection
)

func (PrintPages) String 

func (p PrintPages) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintPages.

type PrintQuality 

type PrintQuality C.gint

PrintQuality: see also gtk_print_settings_set_quality(). 

const (
	// PrintQualityLow: low quality.
	PrintQualityLow PrintQuality = iota
	// PrintQualityNormal: normal quality.
	PrintQualityNormal
	// PrintQualityHigh: high quality.
	PrintQualityHigh
	// PrintQualityDraft: draft quality.
	PrintQualityDraft
)

func (PrintQuality) String 

func (p PrintQuality) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintQuality.

type PrintSettings 

type PrintSettings struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PrintSettings: GtkPrintSettings object represents the settings of a print dialog in a system-independent way.

The main use for this object is that once you’ve printed you can get a settings object that represents the settings the user chose, and the next time you print you can pass that object in so that the user doesn’t have to re-set all his settings.

Its also possible to enumerate the settings so that you can easily save the settings for the next time your app runs, or even store them in a document. The predefined keys try to use shared values as much as possible so that moving such a document between systems still works.

func NewPrintSettings 

func NewPrintSettings() *PrintSettings

NewPrintSettings creates a new GtkPrintSettings object.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: new GtkPrintSettings object.

func NewPrintSettingsFromFile 

func NewPrintSettingsFromFile(fileName string) (*PrintSettings, error)

NewPrintSettingsFromFile reads the print settings from file_name.

Returns a new GtkPrintSettings object with the restored settings, or NULL if an error occurred. If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either a GFileError or GKeyFileError.

See gtk.PrintSettings.ToFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: filename to read the settings from.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: restored GtkPrintSettings.

func NewPrintSettingsFromGVariant 

func NewPrintSettingsFromGVariant(variant *glib.Variant) *PrintSettings

NewPrintSettingsFromGVariant: deserialize print settings from an a{sv} variant.

The variant must be in the format produced by gtk.PrintSettings.ToGVariant().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • variant: a{sv} GVariant.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: new GtkPrintSettings object.

func NewPrintSettingsFromKeyFile 

func NewPrintSettingsFromKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string) (*PrintSettings, error)

NewPrintSettingsFromKeyFile reads the print settings from the group group_name in key_file.

Returns a new GtkPrintSettings object with the restored settings, or NULL if an error occurred. If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either GFileError or GKeyFileError.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from.
  • groupName (optional): name of the group to use, or NULL to use the default “Print Settings”.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: restored GtkPrintSettings.

func (*PrintSettings) Bool 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Bool(key string) bool

Bool returns the boolean represented by the value that is associated with key.

The string “true” represents TRUE, any other string FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if key maps to a true value.

func (*PrintSettings) Collate 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Collate() bool

Collate gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether to collate the printed pages.

func (*PrintSettings) Copy 

func (other *PrintSettings) Copy() *PrintSettings

Copy copies a GtkPrintSettings object.

The function returns the following values:

  • printSettings: newly allocated copy of other.

func (*PrintSettings) DefaultSource 

func (settings *PrintSettings) DefaultSource() string

DefaultSource gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: default source.

func (*PrintSettings) Dither 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Dither() string

Dither gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: dithering that is used.

func (*PrintSettings) Double 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Double(key string) float64

Double returns the double value associated with key, or 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: double value of key.

func (*PrintSettings) DoubleWithDefault 

func (settings *PrintSettings) DoubleWithDefault(key string, def float64) float64

DoubleWithDefault returns the floating point number represented by the value that is associated with key, or default_val if the value does not represent a floating point number.

Floating point numbers are parsed with g_ascii_strtod().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • def: default value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: floating point number associated with key.

func (*PrintSettings) Duplex 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Duplex() PrintDuplex

Duplex gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.

The function returns the following values:

  • printDuplex: whether to print the output in duplex.

func (*PrintSettings) Finishings 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Finishings() string

Finishings gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: finishings.

func (*PrintSettings) ForEach 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ForEach(fn PrintSettingsFunc)

ForEach calls func for each key-value pair of settings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call.

func (*PrintSettings) Get 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Get(key string) string

Get looks up the string value associated with key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: string value for key.

func (*PrintSettings) HasKey 

func (settings *PrintSettings) HasKey(key string) bool

HasKey returns TRUE, if a value is associated with key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if key has a value.

func (*PrintSettings) Int 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Int(key string) int

Int returns the integer value of key, or 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: integer value of key.

func (*PrintSettings) IntWithDefault 

func (settings *PrintSettings) IntWithDefault(key string, def int) int

IntWithDefault returns the value of key, interpreted as an integer, or the default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • def: default value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: integer value of key.

func (*PrintSettings) Length 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Length(key string, unit Unit) float64

Length returns the value associated with key, interpreted as a length.

The returned value is converted to units.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • unit of the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: length value of key, converted to unit.

func (*PrintSettings) LoadFile 

func (settings *PrintSettings) LoadFile(fileName string) error

LoadFile reads the print settings from file_name.

If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either a GFileError or GKeyFileError.

See gtk.PrintSettings.ToFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: filename to read the settings from.

func (*PrintSettings) LoadKeyFile 

func (settings *PrintSettings) LoadKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string) error

LoadKeyFile reads the print settings from the group group_name in key_file.

If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either a GFileError or GKeyFileError.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from.
  • groupName (optional): name of the group to use, or NULL to use the default “Print Settings”.

func (*PrintSettings) MediaType 

func (settings *PrintSettings) MediaType() string

MediaType gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.

The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: media type.

func (*PrintSettings) NCopies 

func (settings *PrintSettings) NCopies() int

NCopies gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of copies to print.

func (*PrintSettings) NumberUp 

func (settings *PrintSettings) NumberUp() int

NumberUp gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of pages per sheet.

func (*PrintSettings) NumberUpLayout 

func (settings *PrintSettings) NumberUpLayout() NumberUpLayout

NumberUpLayout gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.

The function returns the following values:

  • numberUpLayout: layout of page in number-up mode.

func (*PrintSettings) Orientation 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Orientation() PageOrientation

Orientation: get the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION, converted to a GtkPageOrientation.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageOrientation: orientation.

func (*PrintSettings) OutputBin 

func (settings *PrintSettings) OutputBin() string

OutputBin gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: output bin.

func (*PrintSettings) PageRanges 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PageRanges() []PageRange

PageRanges gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageRanges: array of GtkPageRanges. Use g_free() to free the array when it is no longer needed.

func (*PrintSettings) PageSet 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PageSet() PageSet

PageSet gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.

The function returns the following values:

  • pageSet: set of pages to print.

func (*PrintSettings) PaperHeight 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PaperHeight(unit Unit) float64

PaperHeight gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT, converted to unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper height, in units of unit.

func (*PrintSettings) PaperSize 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PaperSize() *PaperSize

PaperSize gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT, converted to a GtkPaperSize.

The function returns the following values:

  • paperSize: paper size.

func (*PrintSettings) PaperWidth 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PaperWidth(unit Unit) float64

PaperWidth gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH, converted to unit.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • unit for the return value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: paper width, in units of unit.

func (*PrintSettings) PrintPages 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PrintPages() PrintPages

PrintPages gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.

The function returns the following values:

  • printPages: which pages to print.

func (*PrintSettings) Printer 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Printer() string

Printer: convenience function to obtain the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: printer name.

func (*PrintSettings) PrinterLpi 

func (settings *PrintSettings) PrinterLpi() float64

PrinterLpi gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: resolution in lpi (lines per inch).

func (*PrintSettings) Quality 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Quality() PrintQuality

Quality gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.

The function returns the following values:

  • printQuality: print quality.

func (*PrintSettings) Resolution 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Resolution() int

Resolution gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: resolution in dpi.

func (*PrintSettings) ResolutionX 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ResolutionX() int

ResolutionX gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: horizontal resolution in dpi.

func (*PrintSettings) ResolutionY 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ResolutionY() int

ResolutionY gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: vertical resolution in dpi.

func (*PrintSettings) Reverse 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Reverse() bool

Reverse gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether to reverse the order of the printed pages.

func (*PrintSettings) Scale 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Scale() float64

Scale gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: scale in percent.

func (*PrintSettings) Set 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Set(key, value string)

Set associates value with key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • value (optional): string value, or NULL.

func (*PrintSettings) SetBool 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetBool(key string, value bool)

SetBool sets key to a boolean value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • value: boolean.

func (*PrintSettings) SetCollate 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetCollate(collate bool)

SetCollate sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • collate: whether to collate the output.

func (*PrintSettings) SetDefaultSource 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetDefaultSource(defaultSource string)

SetDefaultSource sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • defaultSource: default source.

func (*PrintSettings) SetDither 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetDither(dither string)

SetDither sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dither: dithering that is used.

func (*PrintSettings) SetDouble 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetDouble(key string, value float64)

SetDouble sets key to a double value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • value: double value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetDuplex 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetDuplex(duplex PrintDuplex)

SetDuplex sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • duplex: PrintDuplex value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetFinishings 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetFinishings(finishings string)

SetFinishings sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • finishings: finishings.

func (*PrintSettings) SetInt 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetInt(key string, value int)

SetInt sets key to an integer value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • value: integer.

func (*PrintSettings) SetLength 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetLength(key string, value float64, unit Unit)

SetLength associates a length in units of unit with key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.
  • value: length.
  • unit of length.

func (*PrintSettings) SetMediaType 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetMediaType(mediaType string)

SetMediaType sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.

The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mediaType: media type.

func (*PrintSettings) SetNCopies 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetNCopies(numCopies int)

SetNCopies sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • numCopies: number of copies.

func (*PrintSettings) SetNumberUp 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetNumberUp(numberUp int)

SetNumberUp sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • numberUp: number of pages per sheet.

func (*PrintSettings) SetNumberUpLayout 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetNumberUpLayout(numberUpLayout NumberUpLayout)

SetNumberUpLayout sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • numberUpLayout: NumberUpLayout value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetOrientation 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetOrientation(orientation PageOrientation)

SetOrientation sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: page orientation.

func (*PrintSettings) SetOutputBin 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetOutputBin(outputBin string)

SetOutputBin sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • outputBin: output bin.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPageRanges 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPageRanges(pageRanges []PageRange)

SetPageRanges sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageRanges: array of GtkPageRanges.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPageSet 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPageSet(pageSet PageSet)

SetPageSet sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pageSet: PageSet value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPaperHeight 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPaperHeight(height float64, unit Unit)

SetPaperHeight sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • height: paper height.
  • unit units of height.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPaperSize 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPaperSize(paperSize *PaperSize)

SetPaperSize sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT, GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH and GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paperSize: paper size.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPaperWidth 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPaperWidth(width float64, unit Unit)

SetPaperWidth sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: paper width.
  • unit units of width.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPrintPages 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPrintPages(pages PrintPages)

SetPrintPages sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pages PrintPages value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPrinter 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPrinter(printer string)

SetPrinter: convenience function to set GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER to printer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • printer name.

func (*PrintSettings) SetPrinterLpi 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetPrinterLpi(lpi float64)

SetPrinterLpi sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lpi: resolution in lpi (lines per inch).

func (*PrintSettings) SetQuality 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetQuality(quality PrintQuality)

SetQuality sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • quality: PrintQuality value.

func (*PrintSettings) SetResolution 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetResolution(resolution int)

SetResolution sets the values of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION, GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resolution in dpi.

func (*PrintSettings) SetResolutionXY 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetResolutionXY(resolutionX, resolutionY int)

SetResolutionXY sets the values of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION, GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resolutionX: horizontal resolution in dpi.
  • resolutionY: vertical resolution in dpi.

func (*PrintSettings) SetReverse 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetReverse(reverse bool)

SetReverse sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • reverse: whether to reverse the output.

func (*PrintSettings) SetScale 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetScale(scale float64)

SetScale sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scale in percent.

func (*PrintSettings) SetUseColor 

func (settings *PrintSettings) SetUseColor(useColor bool)

SetUseColor sets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • useColor: whether to use color.

func (*PrintSettings) ToFile 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ToFile(fileName string) error

ToFile: this function saves the print settings from settings to file_name.

If the file could not be written then error is set to either a GFileError or GKeyFileError.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fileName: file to save to.

func (*PrintSettings) ToGVariant 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ToGVariant() *glib.Variant

ToGVariant: serialize print settings to an a{sv} variant.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant: new, floating, GVariant.

func (*PrintSettings) ToKeyFile 

func (settings *PrintSettings) ToKeyFile(keyFile *glib.KeyFile, groupName string)

ToKeyFile: this function adds the print settings from settings to key_file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • keyFile: GKeyFile to save the print settings to.
  • groupName (optional): group to add the settings to in key_file, or NULL to use the default “Print Settings”.

func (*PrintSettings) Unset 

func (settings *PrintSettings) Unset(key string)

Unset removes any value associated with key.

This has the same effect as setting the value to NULL.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • key: key.

func (*PrintSettings) UseColor 

func (settings *PrintSettings) UseColor() bool

UseColor gets the value of GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether to use color.

type PrintSettingsFunc 

type PrintSettingsFunc func(key, value string)

type PrintStatus 

type PrintStatus C.gint

PrintStatus status gives a rough indication of the completion of a running print operation. 

const (
	// PrintStatusInitial: printing has not started yet; this status is set
	// initially, and while the print dialog is shown.
	PrintStatusInitial PrintStatus = iota
	// PrintStatusPreparing: this status is set while the begin-print signal is
	// emitted and during pagination.
	PrintStatusPreparing
	// PrintStatusGeneratingData: this status is set while the pages are being
	// rendered.
	PrintStatusGeneratingData
	// PrintStatusSendingData: print job is being sent off to the printer.
	PrintStatusSendingData
	// PrintStatusPending: print job has been sent to the printer, but is not
	// printed for some reason, e.g. the printer may be stopped.
	PrintStatusPending
	// PrintStatusPendingIssue: some problem has occurred during printing, e.g.
	// a paper jam.
	PrintStatusPendingIssue
	// PrintStatusPrinting: printer is processing the print job.
	PrintStatusPrinting
	// PrintStatusFinished: printing has been completed successfully.
	PrintStatusFinished
	// PrintStatusFinishedAborted: printing has been aborted.
	PrintStatusFinishedAborted
)

func (PrintStatus) String 

func (p PrintStatus) String() string

String returns the name in string for PrintStatus.

type ProgressBar 

type ProgressBar struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ProgressBar: GtkProgressBar is typically used to display the progress of a long running operation.

It provides a visual clue that processing is underway. GtkProgressBar can be used in two different modes: percentage mode and activity mode.

!An example GtkProgressBar (progressbar.png)

When an application can determine how much work needs to take place (e.g. read a fixed number of bytes from a file) and can monitor its progress, it can use the GtkProgressBar in percentage mode and the user sees a growing bar indicating the percentage of the work that has been completed. In this mode, the application is required to call gtk.ProgressBar.SetFraction() periodically to update the progress bar.

When an application has no accurate way of knowing the amount of work to do, it can use the GtkProgressBar in activity mode, which shows activity by a block moving back and forth within the progress area. In this mode, the application is required to call gtk.ProgressBar.Pulse() periodically to update the progress bar.

There is quite a bit of flexibility provided to control the appearance of the GtkProgressBar. Functions are provided to control the orientation of the bar, optional text can be displayed along with the bar, and the step size used in activity mode can be set.

CSS nodes 

progressbar[.osd]
├── [text]
╰── trough[.empty][.full]
    ╰── progress[.pulse]

GtkProgressBar has a main CSS node with name progressbar and subnodes with names text and trough, of which the latter has a subnode named progress. The text subnode is only present if text is shown. The progress subnode has the style class .pulse when in activity mode. It gets the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom added when the progress 'touches' the corresponding end of the GtkProgressBar. The .osd class on the progressbar node is for use in overlays like the one Epiphany has for page loading progress.

Accessibility

GtkProgressBar uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_PROGRESS_BAR role.

func NewProgressBar 

func NewProgressBar() *ProgressBar

NewProgressBar creates a new GtkProgressBar.

The function returns the following values:

  • progressBar: GtkProgressBar.

func (*ProgressBar) Ellipsize 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) Ellipsize() pango.EllipsizeMode

Ellipsize returns the ellipsizing position of the progress bar.

See gtk.ProgressBar.SetEllipsize().

The function returns the following values:

  • ellipsizeMode: PangoEllipsizeMode.

func (*ProgressBar) Fraction 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) Fraction() float64

Fraction returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.

func (*ProgressBar) Inverted 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) Inverted() bool

Inverted returns whether the progress bar is inverted.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the progress bar is inverted.

func (*ProgressBar) Pulse 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) Pulse()

Pulse indicates that some progress has been made, but you don’t know how much.

Causes the progress bar to enter “activity mode,” where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk.ProgressBar.Pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by gtk.ProgressBar.SetPulseStep()).

func (*ProgressBar) PulseStep 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) PulseStep() float64

PulseStep retrieves the pulse step.

See gtk.ProgressBar.SetPulseStep().

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.

func (*ProgressBar) SetEllipsize 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetEllipsize(mode pango.EllipsizeMode)

SetEllipsize sets the mode used to ellipsize the text.

The text is ellipsized if there is not enough space to render the entire string.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: PangoEllipsizeMode.

func (*ProgressBar) SetFraction 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetFraction(fraction float64)

SetFraction causes the progress bar to “fill in” the given fraction of the bar.

The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fraction of the task that’s been completed.

func (*ProgressBar) SetInverted 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetInverted(inverted bool)

SetInverted sets whether the progress bar is inverted.

Progress bars normally grow from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted progress bars grow in the opposite direction.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • inverted: TRUE to invert the progress bar.

func (*ProgressBar) SetPulseStep 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetPulseStep(fraction float64)

SetPulseStep sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the bouncing block.

The bouncing block is moved when gtk.ProgressBar.Pulse() is called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fraction between 0.0 and 1.0.

func (*ProgressBar) SetShowText 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetShowText(showText bool)

SetShowText sets whether the progress bar will show text next to the bar.

The shown text is either the value of the gtk.ProgressBar:text property or, if that is NULL, the gtk.ProgressBar:fraction value, as a percentage.

To make a progress bar that is styled and sized suitably for containing text (even if the actual text is blank), set gtk.ProgressBar:show-text to TRUE and gtk.ProgressBar:text to the empty string (not NULL).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showText: whether to show text.

func (*ProgressBar) SetText 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) SetText(text string)

SetText causes the given text to appear next to the progress bar.

If text is NULL and gtk.ProgressBar:show-text is TRUE, the current value of gtk.ProgressBar:fraction will be displayed as a percentage.

If text is non-NULL and gtk.ProgressBar:show-text is TRUE, the text will be displayed. In this case, it will not display the progress percentage. If text is the empty string, the progress bar will still be styled and sized suitably for containing text, as long as gtk.ProgressBar:show-text is TRUE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional): UTF-8 string, or NULL.

func (*ProgressBar) ShowText 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) ShowText() bool

ShowText returns whether the GtkProgressBar shows text.

See gtk.ProgressBar.SetShowText().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if text is shown in the progress bar.

func (*ProgressBar) Text 

func (pbar *ProgressBar) Text() string

Text retrieves the text that is displayed with the progress bar.

The return value is a reference to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid if you change the text in the progress bar.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): text, or NULL; this string is owned by the widget and should not be modified or freed.

type PropagationLimit 

type PropagationLimit C.gint

PropagationLimit describes limits of a GtkEventController for handling events targeting other widgets. 

const (
	// LimitNone events are handled regardless of what their target is.
	LimitNone PropagationLimit = iota
	// LimitSameNative events are only handled if their target is in the same
	// Native as the event controllers widget. Note that some event types have
	// two targets (origin and destination).
	LimitSameNative
)

func (PropagationLimit) String 

func (p PropagationLimit) String() string

String returns the name in string for PropagationLimit.

type PropagationPhase 

type PropagationPhase C.gint

PropagationPhase describes the stage at which events are fed into a GtkEventController. 

const (
	// PhaseNone events are not delivered.
	PhaseNone PropagationPhase = iota
	// PhaseCapture events are delivered in the capture phase. The capture phase
	// happens before the bubble phase, runs from the toplevel down to the event
	// widget. This option should only be used on containers that might possibly
	// handle events before their children do.
	PhaseCapture
	// PhaseBubble events are delivered in the bubble phase. The bubble phase
	// happens after the capture phase, and before the default handlers are run.
	// This phase runs from the event widget, up to the toplevel.
	PhaseBubble
	// PhaseTarget events are delivered in the default widget event handlers,
	// note that widget implementations must chain up on button, motion,
	// touch and grab broken handlers for controllers in this phase to be run.
	PhaseTarget
)

func (PropagationPhase) String 

func (p PropagationPhase) String() string

String returns the name in string for PropagationPhase.

type PropertyExpression 

type PropertyExpression struct {
	Expression
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PropertyExpression: GObject property value in a GtkExpression.

func NewPropertyExpression 

func NewPropertyExpression(thisType coreglib.Type, expression Expressioner, propertyName string) *PropertyExpression

NewPropertyExpression creates an expression that looks up a property via the given expression or the this argument when expression is NULL.

If the resulting object conforms to this_type, its property named property_name will be queried. Otherwise, this expression's evaluation will fail.

The given this_type must have a property with property_name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • thisType: type to expect for the this type.
  • expression (optional): expression to evaluate to get the object to query or NULL to query the this object.
  • propertyName: name of the property.

The function returns the following values:

  • propertyExpression: new GtkExpression.

func (*PropertyExpression) GetExpression 

func (expression *PropertyExpression) GetExpression() Expressioner

GetExpression gets the expression specifying the object of a property expression.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret: object expression.

type Range 

type Range struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Range: GtkRange is the common base class for widgets which visualize an adjustment.

Widgets that are derived from GtkRange include gtk.Scale and gtk.Scrollbar.

Apart from signals for monitoring the parameters of the adjustment, GtkRange provides properties and methods for setting a “fill level” on range widgets. See gtk.Range.SetFillLevel().

func (*Range) Adjustment 

func (_range *Range) Adjustment() *Adjustment

Adjustment: get the adjustment which is the “model” object for GtkRange.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: GtkAdjustment.

func (*Range) ConnectAdjustBounds 

func (_range *Range) ConnectAdjustBounds(f func(value float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectAdjustBounds is emitted before clamping a value, to give the application a chance to adjust the bounds.

func (*Range) ConnectChangeValue 

func (_range *Range) ConnectChangeValue(f func(scroll ScrollType, value float64) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChangeValue is emitted when a scroll action is performed on a range.

It allows an application to determine the type of scroll event that occurred and the resultant new value. The application can handle the event itself and return TRUE to prevent further processing. Or, by returning FALSE, it can pass the event to other handlers until the default GTK handler is reached.

The value parameter is unrounded. An application that overrides the ::change-value signal is responsible for clamping the value to the desired number of decimal digits; the default GTK handler clamps the value based on gtk.Range:round-digits.

func (*Range) ConnectMoveSlider 

func (_range *Range) ConnectMoveSlider(f func(step ScrollType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveSlider: virtual function that moves the slider.

Used for keybindings.

func (*Range) ConnectValueChanged 

func (_range *Range) ConnectValueChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectValueChanged is emitted when the range value changes.

func (*Range) FillLevel 

func (_range *Range) FillLevel() float64

FillLevel gets the current position of the fill level indicator.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current fill level.

func (*Range) Flippable 

func (_range *Range) Flippable() bool

Flippable gets whether the GtkRange respects text direction.

See gtk.Range.SetFlippable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the range is flippable.

func (*Range) Inverted 

func (_range *Range) Inverted() bool

Inverted gets whether the range is inverted.

See gtk.Range.SetInverted().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the range is inverted.

func (*Range) RangeRect 

func (_range *Range) RangeRect() *gdk.Rectangle

RangeRect: this function returns the area that contains the range’s trough, in coordinates relative to range's origin.

This function is useful mainly for GtkRange subclasses.

The function returns the following values:

  • rangeRect: return location for the range rectangle.

func (*Range) RestrictToFillLevel 

func (_range *Range) RestrictToFillLevel() bool

RestrictToFillLevel gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if range is restricted to the fill level.

func (*Range) RoundDigits 

func (_range *Range) RoundDigits() int

RoundDigits gets the number of digits to round the value to when it changes.

See gtk.Range::change-value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of digits to round to.

func (*Range) SetAdjustment 

func (_range *Range) SetAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetAdjustment sets the adjustment to be used as the “model” object for the GtkRange

The adjustment indicates the current range value, the minimum and maximum range values, the step/page increments used for keybindings and scrolling, and the page size.

The page size is normally 0 for GtkScale and nonzero for GtkScrollbar, and indicates the size of the visible area of the widget being scrolled. The page size affects the size of the scrollbar slider.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment: GtkAdjustment.

func (*Range) SetFillLevel 

func (_range *Range) SetFillLevel(fillLevel float64)

SetFillLevel: set the new position of the fill level indicator.

The “fill level” is probably best described by its most prominent use case, which is an indicator for the amount of pre-buffering in a streaming media player. In that use case, the value of the range would indicate the current play position, and the fill level would be the position up to which the file/stream has been downloaded.

This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range’s trough and is themeable separately from the trough. To enable fill level display, use gtk.Range.SetShowFillLevel(). The range defaults to not showing the fill level.

Additionally, it’s possible to restrict the range’s slider position to values which are smaller than the fill level. This is controlled by gtk.Range.SetRestrictToFillLevel() and is by default enabled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fillLevel: new position of the fill level indicator.

func (*Range) SetFlippable 

func (_range *Range) SetFlippable(flippable bool)

SetFlippable sets whether the GtkRange respects text direction.

If a range is flippable, it will switch its direction if it is horizontal and its direction is GTK_TEXT_DIR_RTL.

See gtk.Widget.GetDirection().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flippable: TRUE to make the range flippable.

func (*Range) SetIncrements 

func (_range *Range) SetIncrements(step, page float64)

SetIncrements sets the step and page sizes for the range.

The step size is used when the user clicks the GtkScrollbar arrows or moves a GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • step size.
  • page size.

func (*Range) SetInverted 

func (_range *Range) SetInverted(setting bool)

SetInverted sets whether to invert the range.

Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than on the bottom or left.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to invert the range.

func (*Range) SetRange 

func (_range *Range) SetRange(min, max float64)

SetRange sets the allowable values in the GtkRange.

The range value is clamped to be between min and max. (If the range has a non-zero page size, it is clamped between min and max - page-size.).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • min: minimum range value.
  • max: maximum range value.

func (*Range) SetRestrictToFillLevel 

func (_range *Range) SetRestrictToFillLevel(restrictToFillLevel bool)

SetRestrictToFillLevel sets whether the slider is restricted to the fill level.

See gtk.Range.SetFillLevel() for a general description of the fill level concept.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • restrictToFillLevel: whether the fill level restricts slider movement.

func (*Range) SetRoundDigits 

func (_range *Range) SetRoundDigits(roundDigits int)

SetRoundDigits sets the number of digits to round the value to when it changes.

See gtk.Range::change-value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • roundDigits: precision in digits, or -1.

func (*Range) SetShowFillLevel 

func (_range *Range) SetShowFillLevel(showFillLevel bool)

SetShowFillLevel sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough.

See gtk.Range.SetFillLevel() for a general description of the fill level concept.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • showFillLevel: whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.

func (*Range) SetSliderSizeFixed 

func (_range *Range) SetSliderSizeFixed(sizeFixed bool)

SetSliderSizeFixed sets whether the range’s slider has a fixed size, or a size that depends on its adjustment’s page size.

This function is useful mainly for GtkRange subclasses.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sizeFixed: TRUE to make the slider size constant.

func (*Range) SetValue 

func (_range *Range) SetValue(value float64)

SetValue sets the current value of the range.

If the value is outside the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside them. The range emits the gtk.Range::value-changed signal if the value changes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: new value of the range.

func (*Range) ShowFillLevel 

func (_range *Range) ShowFillLevel() bool

ShowFillLevel gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if range shows the fill level.

func (*Range) SliderRange 

func (_range *Range) SliderRange() (sliderStart, sliderEnd int)

SliderRange: this function returns sliders range along the long dimension, in widget->window coordinates.

This function is useful mainly for GtkRange subclasses.

The function returns the following values:

  • sliderStart (optional): return location for the slider's start, or NULL.
  • sliderEnd (optional): return location for the slider's end, or NULL.

func (*Range) SliderSizeFixed 

func (_range *Range) SliderSizeFixed() bool

SliderSizeFixed: this function is useful mainly for GtkRange subclasses.

See gtk.Range.SetSliderSizeFixed().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the range’s slider has a fixed size.

func (*Range) Value 

func (_range *Range) Value() float64

Value gets the current value of the range.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current value of the range.

type RangeClass added in v0.0.5 

type RangeClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RangeClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*RangeClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (r *RangeClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type RangeOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type RangeOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	AdjustBounds func(newValue float64)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - scroll
	//   - newValue
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	ChangeValue func(scroll ScrollType, newValue float64) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	RangeBorder func(border_ *Border)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	MoveSlider   func(scroll ScrollType)
	ValueChanged func()
}

RangeOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type RecentData 

type RecentData struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RecentData: meta-data to be passed to gtk_recent_manager_add_full() when registering a recently used resource.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*RecentData) AppExec 

func (r *RecentData) AppExec() string

AppExec: command line used to launch this resource; may contain the “\f” and “\u” escape characters which will be expanded to the resource file path and URI respectively when the command line is retrieved;.

func (*RecentData) AppName 

func (r *RecentData) AppName() string

AppName: name of the application that is registering this recently used resource;.

func (*RecentData) Description 

func (r *RecentData) Description() string

Description: UTF-8 encoded string, containing a short description of the resource, or NULL;.

func (*RecentData) DisplayName 

func (r *RecentData) DisplayName() string

DisplayName: UTF-8 encoded string, containing the name of the recently used resource to be displayed, or NULL;.

func (*RecentData) Groups 

func (r *RecentData) Groups() []string

Groups: vector of strings containing groups names;.

func (*RecentData) IsPrivate 

func (r *RecentData) IsPrivate() bool

IsPrivate: whether this resource should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it or not.

func (*RecentData) MIMEType 

func (r *RecentData) MIMEType() string

MIMEType: MIME type of the resource;.

func (*RecentData) SetIsPrivate 

func (r *RecentData) SetIsPrivate(isPrivate bool)

IsPrivate: whether this resource should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it or not.

type RecentInfo 

type RecentInfo struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RecentInfo: GtkRecentInfo contains the metadata associated with an item in the recently used files list.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*RecentInfo) Added 

func (info *RecentInfo) Added() *glib.DateTime

Added gets the the time when the resource was added to the recently used resources list.

The function returns the following values:

  • dateTime for the time when the resource was added.

func (*RecentInfo) Age 

func (info *RecentInfo) Age() int

Age gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource pointed by info.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: positive integer containing the number of days elapsed since the time this resource was last modified.

func (*RecentInfo) ApplicationInfo 

func (info *RecentInfo) ApplicationInfo(appName string) (string, uint, *glib.DateTime, bool)

ApplicationInfo gets the data regarding the application that has registered the resource pointed by info.

If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the storage specification, they will be expanded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • appName: name of the application that has registered this item.

The function returns the following values:

  • appExec: return location for the string containing the command line.
  • count: return location for the number of times this item was registered.
  • stamp: return location for the time this item was last registered for this application.
  • ok: TRUE if an application with app_name has registered this resource inside the recently used list, or FALSE otherwise. The app_exec string is owned by the GtkRecentInfo and should not be modified or freed.

func (*RecentInfo) Applications 

func (info *RecentInfo) Applications() []string

Applications retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: newly allocated NULL-terminated array of strings. Use g_strfreev() to free it.

func (*RecentInfo) CreateAppInfo 

func (info *RecentInfo) CreateAppInfo(appName string) (*gio.AppInfo, error)

CreateAppInfo creates a GAppInfo for the specified GtkRecentInfo.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • appName (optional): name of the application that should be mapped to a GAppInfo; if NULL is used then the default application for the MIME type is used.

The function returns the following values:

  • appInfo (optional): newly created GAppInfo, or NULL. In case of error, error will be set either with a GTK_RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR or a G_IO_ERROR.

func (*RecentInfo) Description 

func (info *RecentInfo) Description() string

Description gets the (short) description of the resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: description of the resource. The returned string is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.

func (*RecentInfo) DisplayName 

func (info *RecentInfo) DisplayName() string

DisplayName gets the name of the resource.

If none has been defined, the basename of the resource is obtained.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: display name of the resource. The returned string is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.

func (*RecentInfo) Exists 

func (info *RecentInfo) Exists() bool

Exists checks whether the resource pointed by info still exists. At the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the resource exists.

func (*RecentInfo) GIcon 

func (info *RecentInfo) GIcon() *gio.Icon

GIcon retrieves the icon associated to the resource MIME type.

The function returns the following values:

  • icon (optional) containing the icon, or NULL. Use g_object_unref() when finished using the icon.

func (*RecentInfo) Groups 

func (info *RecentInfo) Groups() []string

Groups returns all groups registered for the recently used item info.

The array of returned group names will be NULL terminated, so length might optionally be NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: a newly allocated NULL terminated array of strings. Use g_strfreev() to free it.

func (*RecentInfo) HasApplication 

func (info *RecentInfo) HasApplication(appName string) bool

HasApplication checks whether an application registered this resource using app_name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • appName: string containing an application name.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if an application with name app_name was found, FALSE otherwise.

func (*RecentInfo) HasGroup 

func (info *RecentInfo) HasGroup(groupName string) bool

HasGroup checks whether group_name appears inside the groups registered for the recently used item info.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • groupName: name of a group.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the group was found.

func (*RecentInfo) IsLocal 

func (info *RecentInfo) IsLocal() bool

IsLocal checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the scheme of its URI.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the resource is local.

func (*RecentInfo) LastApplication 

func (info *RecentInfo) LastApplication() string

LastApplication gets the name of the last application that have registered the recently used resource represented by info.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: application name. Use g_free() to free it.

func (*RecentInfo) MIMEType 

func (info *RecentInfo) MIMEType() string

MIMEType gets the MIME type of the resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: MIME type of the resource. The returned string is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.

func (*RecentInfo) Match 

func (infoA *RecentInfo) Match(infoB *RecentInfo) bool

Match checks whether two GtkRecentInfo point to the same resource.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • infoB: GtkRecentInfo.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if both GtkRecentInfo point to the same resource, FALSE otherwise.

func (*RecentInfo) Modified 

func (info *RecentInfo) Modified() *glib.DateTime

Modified gets the time when the meta-data for the resource was last modified.

The function returns the following values:

  • dateTime for the time when the resource was last modified.

func (*RecentInfo) PrivateHint 

func (info *RecentInfo) PrivateHint() bool

PrivateHint gets the value of the “private” flag.

Resources in the recently used list that have this flag set to TRUE should only be displayed by the applications that have registered them.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the private flag was found, FALSE otherwise.

func (*RecentInfo) ShortName 

func (info *RecentInfo) ShortName() string

ShortName computes a valid UTF-8 string that can be used as the name of the item in a menu or list.

For example, calling this function on an item that refers to “file:///foo/bar.txt” will yield “bar.txt”.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding free it with g_free().

func (*RecentInfo) URI 

func (info *RecentInfo) URI() string

URI gets the URI of the resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: URI of the resource. The returned string is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.

func (*RecentInfo) URIDisplay 

func (info *RecentInfo) URIDisplay() string

URIDisplay gets a displayable version of the resource’s URI.

If the resource is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local, it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk.RecentInfo.GetURI().

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the resource’s URI or NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.

func (*RecentInfo) Visited 

func (info *RecentInfo) Visited() *glib.DateTime

Visited gets the time when the meta-data for the resource was last visited.

The function returns the following values:

  • dateTime for the time when the resource was last visited.

type RecentManager 

type RecentManager struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RecentManager: GtkRecentManager manages and looks up recently used files.

Each recently used file is identified by its URI, and has meta-data associated to it, like the names and command lines of the applications that have registered it, the number of time each application has registered the same file, the mime type of the file and whether the file should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it.

The recently used files list is per user.

GtkRecentManager acts like a database of all the recently used files. You can create new GtkRecentManager objects, but it is more efficient to use the default manager created by GTK.

Adding a new recently used file is as simple as: 

GtkRecentManager *manager;

manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
gtk_recent_manager_add_item (manager, file_uri);

The GtkRecentManager will try to gather all the needed information from the file itself through GIO.

Looking up the meta-data associated with a recently used file given its URI requires calling gtk.RecentManager.LookupItem(): 

GtkRecentManager *manager;
GtkRecentInfo *info;
GError *error = NULL;

manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
info = gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (manager, file_uri, &error);
if (error)
  {
    g_warning ("Could not find the file: s", error->message);
    g_error_free (error);
  }
else
 {
   // Use the info object
   gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
 }

In order to retrieve the list of recently used files, you can use gtk.RecentManager.GetItems(), which returns a list of gtk.RecentInfo.

Note that the maximum age of the recently used files list is controllable through the gtk.Settings:gtk-recent-files-max-age property.

func NewRecentManager 

func NewRecentManager() *RecentManager

NewRecentManager creates a new recent manager object.

Recent manager objects are used to handle the list of recently used resources. A GtkRecentManager object monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the gtk.RecentManager::changed signal each time something inside the list changes.

GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when needed. You should use gtk.RecentManager.GetDefault instead.

The function returns the following values:

  • recentManager: newly created GtkRecentManager object.

func RecentManagerGetDefault 

func RecentManagerGetDefault() *RecentManager

RecentManagerGetDefault gets a unique instance of GtkRecentManager that you can share in your application without caring about memory management.

The function returns the following values:

  • recentManager: unique GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.

func (*RecentManager) AddFull 

func (manager *RecentManager) AddFull(uri string, recentData *RecentData) bool

AddFull adds a new resource, pointed by uri, into the recently used resources list, using the metadata specified inside the GtkRecentData passed in recent_data.

The passed URI will be used to identify this resource inside the list.

In order to register the new recently used resource, metadata about the resource must be passed as well as the URI; the metadata is stored in a GtkRecentData, which must contain the MIME type of the resource pointed by the URI; the name of the application that is registering the item, and a command line to be used when launching the item.

Optionally, a GtkRecentData might contain a UTF-8 string to be used when viewing the item instead of the last component of the URI; a short description of the item; whether the item should be considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: valid URI.
  • recentData: metadata of the resource.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the recently used resources list, FALSE otherwise.

func (*RecentManager) AddItem 

func (manager *RecentManager) AddItem(uri string) bool

AddItem adds a new resource, pointed by uri, into the recently used resources list.

This function automatically retrieves some of the needed metadata and setting other metadata to common default values; it then feeds the data to gtk.RecentManager.AddFull().

See gtk.RecentManager.AddFull() if you want to explicitly define the metadata for the resource pointed by uri.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: valid URI.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the recently used resources list.

func (*RecentManager) ConnectChanged 

func (manager *RecentManager) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when the current recently used resources manager changes its contents.

This can happen either by calling gtk.RecentManager.AddItem() or by another application.

func (*RecentManager) HasItem 

func (manager *RecentManager) HasItem(uri string) bool

HasItem checks whether there is a recently used resource registered with uri inside the recent manager.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: URI.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the resource was found, FALSE otherwise.

func (*RecentManager) Items 

func (manager *RecentManager) Items() []*RecentInfo

Items gets the list of recently used resources.

The function returns the following values:

  • list of newly allocated GtkRecentInfo objects. Use gtk.RecentInfo.Unref() on each item inside the list, and then free the list itself using g_list_free().

func (*RecentManager) LookupItem 

func (manager *RecentManager) LookupItem(uri string) (*RecentInfo, error)

LookupItem searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and returns a GtkRecentInfo containing information about the resource like its MIME type, or its display name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: URI.

The function returns the following values:

  • recentInfo (optional): GtkRecentInfo containing information about the resource pointed by uri, or NULL if the URI was not registered in the recently used resources list. Free with gtk.RecentInfo.Unref().

func (*RecentManager) MoveItem 

func (manager *RecentManager) MoveItem(uri, newUri string) error

MoveItem changes the location of a recently used resource from uri to new_uri.

Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: URI of a recently used resource.
  • newUri (optional): new URI of the recently used resource, or NULL to remove the item pointed by uri in the list.

func (*RecentManager) PurgeItems 

func (manager *RecentManager) PurgeItems() (int, error)

PurgeItems purges every item from the recently used resources list.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of items that have been removed from the recently used resources list.

func (*RecentManager) RemoveItem 

func (manager *RecentManager) RemoveItem(uri string) error

RemoveItem removes a resource pointed by uri from the recently used resources list handled by a recent manager.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • uri: URI of the item you wish to remove.

type RecentManagerClass added in v0.0.5 

type RecentManagerClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RecentManagerClass contains only private data.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type RecentManagerError 

type RecentManagerError C.gint

RecentManagerError: error codes for RecentManager operations. 

const (
	// RecentManagerErrorNotFound: URI specified does not exists in the recently
	// used resources list.
	RecentManagerErrorNotFound RecentManagerError = iota
	// RecentManagerErrorInvalidURI: URI specified is not valid.
	RecentManagerErrorInvalidURI
	// RecentManagerErrorInvalidEncoding: supplied string is not UTF-8 encoded.
	RecentManagerErrorInvalidEncoding
	// RecentManagerErrorNotRegistered: no application has registered the
	// specified item.
	RecentManagerErrorNotRegistered
	// RecentManagerErrorRead: failure while reading the recently used resources
	// file.
	RecentManagerErrorRead
	// RecentManagerErrorWrite: failure while writing the recently used
	// resources file.
	RecentManagerErrorWrite
	// RecentManagerErrorUnknown: unspecified error.
	RecentManagerErrorUnknown
)

func (RecentManagerError) String 

func (r RecentManagerError) String() string

String returns the name in string for RecentManagerError.

type RecentManagerOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type RecentManagerOverrides struct {
	Changed func()
}

RecentManagerOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type RequestedSize 

type RequestedSize struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

RequestedSize represents a request of a screen object in a given orientation. These are primarily used in container implementations when allocating a natural size for children calling. See gtk_distribute_natural_allocation().

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*RequestedSize) Data 

func (r *RequestedSize) Data() unsafe.Pointer

Data: client pointer.

func (*RequestedSize) MinimumSize 

func (r *RequestedSize) MinimumSize() int

MinimumSize: minimum size needed for allocation in a given orientation.

func (*RequestedSize) NaturalSize 

func (r *RequestedSize) NaturalSize() int

NaturalSize: natural size for allocation in a given orientation.

func (*RequestedSize) SetMinimumSize 

func (r *RequestedSize) SetMinimumSize(minimumSize int)

MinimumSize: minimum size needed for allocation in a given orientation.

func (*RequestedSize) SetNaturalSize 

func (r *RequestedSize) SetNaturalSize(naturalSize int)

NaturalSize: natural size for allocation in a given orientation.

type Requisition 

type Requisition struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Requisition represents the desired size of a widget. See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for more information.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewRequisition 

func NewRequisition() *Requisition

NewRequisition constructs a struct Requisition.

func (*Requisition) Copy 

func (requisition *Requisition) Copy() *Requisition

Copy copies a GtkRequisition.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret: copy of requisition.

func (*Requisition) Height 

func (r *Requisition) Height() int

Height widget’s desired height.

func (*Requisition) SetHeight 

func (r *Requisition) SetHeight(height int)

Height widget’s desired height.

func (*Requisition) SetWidth 

func (r *Requisition) SetWidth(width int)

Width widget’s desired width.

func (*Requisition) Width 

func (r *Requisition) Width() int

Width widget’s desired width.

type ResponseType 

type ResponseType C.gint

ResponseType: predefined values for use as response ids in gtk_dialog_add_button().

All predefined values are negative; GTK leaves values of 0 or greater for application-defined response ids. 

const (
	// ResponseNone: returned if an action widget has no response id, or if the
	// dialog gets programmatically hidden or destroyed.
	ResponseNone ResponseType = -1
	// ResponseReject: generic response id, not used by GTK dialogs.
	ResponseReject ResponseType = -2
	// ResponseAccept: generic response id, not used by GTK dialogs.
	ResponseAccept ResponseType = -3
	// ResponseDeleteEvent: returned if the dialog is deleted.
	ResponseDeleteEvent ResponseType = -4
	// ResponseOK: returned by OK buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseOK ResponseType = -5
	// ResponseCancel: returned by Cancel buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseCancel ResponseType = -6
	// ResponseClose: returned by Close buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseClose ResponseType = -7
	// ResponseYes: returned by Yes buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseYes ResponseType = -8
	// ResponseNo: returned by No buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseNo ResponseType = -9
	// ResponseApply: returned by Apply buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseApply ResponseType = -10
	// ResponseHelp: returned by Help buttons in GTK dialogs.
	ResponseHelp ResponseType = -11
)

func (ResponseType) String 

func (r ResponseType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ResponseType.

type Revealer 

type Revealer struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Revealer: GtkRevealer animates the transition of its child from invisible to visible.

The style of transition can be controlled with gtk.Revealer.SetTransitionType().

These animations respect the gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations setting.

CSS nodes

GtkRevealer has a single CSS node with name revealer. When styling GtkRevealer using CSS, remember that it only hides its contents, not itself. That means applied margin, padding and borders will be visible even when the gtk.Revealer:reveal-child property is set to FALSE.

Accessibility

GtkRevealer uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

The child of GtkRevealer, if set, is always available in the accessibility tree, regardless of the state of the revealer widget.

func NewRevealer 

func NewRevealer() *Revealer

NewRevealer creates a new GtkRevealer.

The function returns the following values:

  • revealer: newly created GtkRevealer.

func (*Revealer) Child 

func (revealer *Revealer) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of revealer.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of revealer.

func (*Revealer) ChildRevealed 

func (revealer *Revealer) ChildRevealed() bool

ChildRevealed returns whether the child is fully revealed.

In other words, this returns whether the transition to the revealed state is completed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the child is fully revealed.

func (*Revealer) RevealChild 

func (revealer *Revealer) RevealChild() bool

RevealChild returns whether the child is currently revealed.

This function returns TRUE as soon as the transition is to the revealed state is started. To learn whether the child is fully revealed (ie the transition is completed), use gtk.Revealer.GetChildRevealed().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the child is revealed.

func (*Revealer) SetChild 

func (revealer *Revealer) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of revealer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Revealer) SetRevealChild 

func (revealer *Revealer) SetRevealChild(revealChild bool)

SetRevealChild tells the GtkRevealer to reveal or conceal its child.

The transition will be animated with the current transition type of revealer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • revealChild: TRUE to reveal the child.

func (*Revealer) SetTransitionDuration 

func (revealer *Revealer) SetTransitionDuration(duration uint)

SetTransitionDuration sets the duration that transitions will take.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • duration: new duration, in milliseconds.

func (*Revealer) SetTransitionType 

func (revealer *Revealer) SetTransitionType(transition RevealerTransitionType)

SetTransitionType sets the type of animation that will be used for transitions in revealer.

Available types include various kinds of fades and slides.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • transition: new transition type.

func (*Revealer) TransitionDuration 

func (revealer *Revealer) TransitionDuration() uint

TransitionDuration returns the amount of time (in milliseconds) that transitions will take.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: transition duration.

func (*Revealer) TransitionType 

func (revealer *Revealer) TransitionType() RevealerTransitionType

TransitionType gets the type of animation that will be used for transitions in revealer.

The function returns the following values:

  • revealerTransitionType: current transition type of revealer.

type RevealerTransitionType 

type RevealerTransitionType C.gint

RevealerTransitionType: these enumeration values describe the possible transitions when the child of a GtkRevealer widget is shown or hidden. 

const (
	// RevealerTransitionTypeNone: no transition.
	RevealerTransitionTypeNone RevealerTransitionType = iota
	// RevealerTransitionTypeCrossfade: fade in.
	RevealerTransitionTypeCrossfade
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSlideRight: slide in from the left.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSlideRight
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSlideLeft: slide in from the right.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSlideLeft
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSlideUp: slide in from the bottom.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSlideUp
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSlideDown: slide in from the top.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSlideDown
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSwingRight: floop in from the left.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSwingRight
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSwingLeft: floop in from the right.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSwingLeft
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSwingUp: floop in from the bottom.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSwingUp
	// RevealerTransitionTypeSwingDown: floop in from the top.
	RevealerTransitionTypeSwingDown
)

func (RevealerTransitionType) String 

func (r RevealerTransitionType) String() string

String returns the name in string for RevealerTransitionType.

type Root 

type Root struct {
	NativeSurface
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Root: GtkRoot is the interface implemented by all widgets that can act as a toplevel widget.

The root widget takes care of providing the connection to the windowing system and manages layout, drawing and event delivery for its widget hierarchy.

The obvious example of a GtkRoot is GtkWindow.

To get the display to which a GtkRoot belongs, use gtk.Root.GetDisplay().

GtkRoot also maintains the location of keyboard focus inside its widget hierarchy, with gtk.Root.SetFocus() and gtk.Root.GetFocus().

Root wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Root) Display 

func (self *Root) Display() *gdk.Display

Display returns the display that this GtkRoot is on.

The function returns the following values:

  • display of root.

func (*Root) Focus 

func (self *Root) Focus() Widgetter

Focus retrieves the current focused widget within the root.

Note that this is the widget that would have the focus if the root is active; if the root is not focused then gtk_widget_has_focus (widget) will be FALSE for the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): currently focused widget, or NULL if there is none.

func (*Root) SetFocus 

func (self *Root) SetFocus(focus Widgetter)

SetFocus: if focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets it as the focus widget for the root.

If focus is NULL, unsets the focus widget for the root.

To set the focus to a particular widget in the root, it is usually more convenient to use gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() instead of this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • focus (optional): widget to be the new focus widget, or NULL to unset the focus widget.

type Rooter 

type Rooter interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Display returns the display that this GtkRoot is on.
	Display() *gdk.Display
	// Focus retrieves the current focused widget within the root.
	Focus() Widgetter
	// SetFocus: if focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable,
	// sets it as the focus widget for the root.
	SetFocus(focus Widgetter)
}

Rooter describes Root's interface methods.

type Scale 

type Scale struct {
	Range
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Scale: GtkScale is a slider control used to select a numeric value.

!An example GtkScale (scales.png)

To use it, you’ll probably want to investigate the methods on its base class, gtkrange, in addition to the methods for GtkScale itself. To set the value of a scale, you would normally use gtk.Range.SetValue(). To detect changes to the value, you would normally use the gtk.Range::value-changed signal.

Note that using the same upper and lower bounds for the GtkScale (through the GtkRange methods) will hide the slider itself. This is useful for applications that want to show an undeterminate value on the scale, without changing the layout of the application (such as movie or music players).

GtkScale as GtkBuildable

GtkScale supports a custom <marks> element, which can contain multiple <mark\> elements. The “value” and “position” attributes have the same meaning as gtk.Scale.AddMark() parameters of the same name. If the element is not empty, its content is taken as the markup to show at the mark. It can be translated with the usual ”translatable” and “context” attributes.

CSS nodes 

scale[.fine-tune][.marks-before][.marks-after]
├── [value][.top][.right][.bottom][.left]
├── marks.top
│   ├── mark
│   ┊    ├── [label]
│   ┊    ╰── indicator
┊   ┊
│   ╰── mark
├── marks.bottom
│   ├── mark
│   ┊    ├── indicator
│   ┊    ╰── [label]
┊   ┊
│   ╰── mark
╰── trough
    ├── [fill]
    ├── [highlight]
    ╰── slider

GtkScale has a main CSS node with name scale and a subnode for its contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.

The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scale is in 'fine-tuning' mode.

If the scale has an origin (see gtk.Scale.SetHasOrigin()), there is a subnode with name highlight below the trough node that is used for rendering the highlighted part of the trough.

If the scale is showing a fill level (see gtk.Range.SetShowFillLevel()), there is a subnode with name fill below the trough node that is used for rendering the filled in part of the trough.

If marks are present, there is a marks subnode before or after the trough node, below which each mark gets a node with name mark. The marks nodes get either the .top or .bottom style class.

The mark node has a subnode named indicator. If the mark has text, it also has a subnode named label. When the mark is either above or left of the scale, the label subnode is the first when present. Otherwise, the indicator subnode is the first.

The main CSS node gets the 'marks-before' and/or 'marks-after' style classes added depending on what marks are present.

If the scale is displaying the value (see gtk.Scale:draw-value), there is subnode with name value. This node will get the .top or .bottom style classes similar to the marks node.

Accessibility

GtkScale uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SLIDER role.

func NewScale 

func NewScale(orientation Orientation, adjustment *Adjustment) *Scale

NewScale creates a new GtkScale.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation scale’s orientation.
  • adjustment (optional): gtk.Adjustment which sets the range of the scale, or NULL to create a new adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • scale: new GtkScale.

func NewScaleWithRange 

func NewScaleWithRange(orientation Orientation, min, max, step float64) *Scale

NewScaleWithRange creates a new scale widget with a range from min to max.

The returns scale will have the given orientation and will let the user input a number between min and max (including min and max) with the increment step. step must be nonzero; it’s the distance the slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale value.

Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if step is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your needs, use gtk.Scale.SetDigits() to correct it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation scale’s orientation.
  • min: minimum value.
  • max: maximum value.
  • step increment (tick size) used with keyboard shortcuts.

The function returns the following values:

  • scale: new Scale.

func (*Scale) AddMark 

func (scale *Scale) AddMark(value float64, position PositionType, markup string)

AddMark adds a mark at value.

A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale, and GTK makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the marks value.

If markup is not NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.

To remove marks from a scale, use gtk.Scale.ClearMarks().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value at which the mark is placed, must be between the lower and upper limits of the scales’ adjustment.
  • position: where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, K_POS_TOP and GTK_POS_LEFT are drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale, K_POS_LEFT and GTK_POS_TOP are drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the right.
  • markup (optional): text to be shown at the mark, using Pango markup, or NULL.

func (*Scale) ClearMarks 

func (scale *Scale) ClearMarks()

ClearMarks removes any marks that have been added.

func (*Scale) Digits 

func (scale *Scale) Digits() int

Digits gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of decimal places that are displayed.

func (*Scale) DrawValue 

func (scale *Scale) DrawValue() bool

DrawValue returns whether the current value is displayed as a string next to the slider.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the current value is displayed as a string.

func (*Scale) HasOrigin 

func (scale *Scale) HasOrigin() bool

HasOrigin returns whether the scale has an origin.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the scale has an origin.

func (*Scale) Layout 

func (scale *Scale) Layout() *pango.Layout

Layout gets the PangoLayout used to display the scale.

The returned object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by the caller.

The function returns the following values:

  • layout (optional): pango.Layout for this scale, or NULL if the gtkscale:draw-value property is FALSE.

func (*Scale) LayoutOffsets 

func (scale *Scale) LayoutOffsets() (x, y int)

LayoutOffsets obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the PangoLayout representing the text in the scale.

Remember when using the PangoLayout function you need to convert to and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or PANGO_SCALE.

If the gtkscale:draw-value property is FALSE, the return values are undefined.

The function returns the following values:

  • x (optional): location to store X offset of layout, or NULL.
  • y (optional): location to store Y offset of layout, or NULL.

func (*Scale) SetDigits 

func (scale *Scale) SetDigits(digits int)

SetDigits sets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.

Also causes the value of the adjustment to be rounded to this number of digits, so the retrieved value matches the displayed one, if gtkscale:draw-value is TRUE when the value changes. If you want to enforce rounding the value when gtkscale:draw-value is FALSE, you can set gtkrange:round-digits instead.

Note that rounding to a small number of digits can interfere with the smooth autoscrolling that is built into GtkScale. As an alternative, you can use gtk.Scale.SetFormatValueFunc() to format the displayed value yourself.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • digits: number of decimal places to display, e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc.

func (*Scale) SetDrawValue 

func (scale *Scale) SetDrawValue(drawValue bool)

SetDrawValue specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next to the slider.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drawValue: TRUE to draw the value.

func (*Scale) SetFormatValueFunc 

func (scale *Scale) SetFormatValueFunc(fn ScaleFormatValueFunc)

SetFormatValueFunc: func allows you to change how the scale value is displayed.

The given function will return an allocated string representing value. That string will then be used to display the scale's value.

If LL is passed as func, the value will be displayed on its own, rounded according to the value of the gtkscale:digits property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): function that formats the value.

func (*Scale) SetHasOrigin 

func (scale *Scale) SetHasOrigin(hasOrigin bool)

SetHasOrigin sets whether the scale has an origin.

If gtkscale:has-origin is set to TRUE (the default), the scale will highlight the part of the trough between the origin (bottom or left side) and the current value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasOrigin: TRUE if the scale has an origin.

func (*Scale) SetValuePos 

func (scale *Scale) SetValuePos(pos PositionType)

SetValuePos sets the position in which the current value is displayed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pos: position in which the current value is displayed.

func (*Scale) ValuePos 

func (scale *Scale) ValuePos() PositionType

ValuePos gets the position in which the current value is displayed.

The function returns the following values:

  • positionType: position in which the current value is displayed.

type ScaleButton 

type ScaleButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ScaleButton: GtkScaleButton provides a button which pops up a scale widget.

This kind of widget is commonly used for volume controls in multimedia applications, and GTK provides a gtk.VolumeButton subclass that is tailored for this use case.

CSS nodes

GtkScaleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain GtkButton, it gets the .scale style class.

func NewScaleButton 

func NewScaleButton(min, max, step float64, icons []string) *ScaleButton

NewScaleButton creates a GtkScaleButton.

The new scale button has a range between min and max, with a stepping of step.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • min: minimum value of the scale (usually 0).
  • max: maximum value of the scale (usually 100).
  • step: stepping of value when a scroll-wheel event, or up/down arrow event occurs (usually 2).
  • icons (optional): NULL-terminated array of icon names, or NULL if you want to set the list later with gtk_scale_button_set_icons().

The function returns the following values:

  • scaleButton: new GtkScaleButton.

func (*ScaleButton) Adjustment 

func (button *ScaleButton) Adjustment() *Adjustment

Adjustment gets the GtkAdjustment associated with the GtkScaleButton’s scale.

See gtk.Range.GetAdjustment() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment associated with the scale.

func (*ScaleButton) ConnectPopdown 

func (button *ScaleButton) ConnectPopdown(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPopdown is emitted to dismiss the popup.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Escape</kbd>.

func (*ScaleButton) ConnectPopup 

func (button *ScaleButton) ConnectPopup(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPopup is emitted to popup the scale widget.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Space</kbd>, <kbd>Enter</kbd> and <kbd>Return</kbd>.

func (*ScaleButton) ConnectValueChanged 

func (button *ScaleButton) ConnectValueChanged(f func(value float64)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectValueChanged is emitted when the value field has changed.

func (*ScaleButton) MinusButton 

func (button *ScaleButton) MinusButton() *Button

MinusButton retrieves the minus button of the GtkScaleButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret minus button of the GtkScaleButton.

func (*ScaleButton) PlusButton 

func (button *ScaleButton) PlusButton() *Button

PlusButton retrieves the plus button of the GtkScaleButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret plus button of the GtkScaleButton.

func (*ScaleButton) Popup 

func (button *ScaleButton) Popup() Widgetter

Popup retrieves the popup of the GtkScaleButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: popup of the GtkScaleButton.

func (*ScaleButton) SetAdjustment 

func (button *ScaleButton) SetAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetAdjustment sets the GtkAdjustment to be used as a model for the GtkScaleButton’s scale.

See gtk.Range.SetAdjustment() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment: GtkAdjustment.

func (*ScaleButton) SetIcons 

func (button *ScaleButton) SetIcons(icons []string)

SetIcons sets the icons to be used by the scale button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • icons: NULL-terminated array of icon names.

func (*ScaleButton) SetValue 

func (button *ScaleButton) SetValue(value float64)

SetValue sets the current value of the scale.

If the value is outside the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside them.

The scale button emits the gtk.ScaleButton::value-changed signal if the value changes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: new value of the scale button.

func (*ScaleButton) Value 

func (button *ScaleButton) Value() float64

Value gets the current value of the scale button.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: current value of the scale button.

type ScaleButtonClass added in v0.0.5 

type ScaleButtonClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ScaleButtonClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ScaleButtonClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (s *ScaleButtonClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type ScaleButtonOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ScaleButtonOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	ValueChanged func(value float64)
}

ScaleButtonOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ScaleClass added in v0.0.5 

type ScaleClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ScaleClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ScaleClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (s *ScaleClass) ParentClass() *RangeClass

type ScaleFormatValueFunc 

type ScaleFormatValueFunc func(scale *Scale, value float64) (utf8 string)

type ScaleOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ScaleOverrides struct {
	// LayoutOffsets obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
	// PangoLayout representing the text in the scale.
	//
	// Remember when using the PangoLayout function you need to convert to and
	// from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or PANGO_SCALE.
	//
	// If the gtkscale:draw-value property is FALSE, the return values are
	// undefined.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - x (optional): location to store X offset of layout, or NULL.
	//   - y (optional): location to store Y offset of layout, or NULL.
	//
	LayoutOffsets func() (x, y int)
}

ScaleOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ScrollStep 

type ScrollStep C.gint

ScrollStep: passed as argument to various keybinding signals. 

const (
	// ScrollSteps: scroll in steps.
	ScrollSteps ScrollStep = iota
	// ScrollPages: scroll by pages.
	ScrollPages
	// ScrollEnds: scroll to ends.
	ScrollEnds
	// ScrollHorizontalSteps: scroll in horizontal steps.
	ScrollHorizontalSteps
	// ScrollHorizontalPages: scroll by horizontal pages.
	ScrollHorizontalPages
	// ScrollHorizontalEnds: scroll to the horizontal ends.
	ScrollHorizontalEnds
)

func (ScrollStep) String 

func (s ScrollStep) String() string

String returns the name in string for ScrollStep.

type ScrollType 

type ScrollType C.gint

ScrollType: scrolling types. 

const (
	// ScrollNone: no scrolling.
	ScrollNone ScrollType = iota
	// ScrollJump: jump to new location.
	ScrollJump
	// ScrollStepBackward: step backward.
	ScrollStepBackward
	// ScrollStepForward: step forward.
	ScrollStepForward
	// ScrollPageBackward: page backward.
	ScrollPageBackward
	// ScrollPageForward: page forward.
	ScrollPageForward
	// ScrollStepUp: step up.
	ScrollStepUp
	// ScrollStepDown: step down.
	ScrollStepDown
	// ScrollPageUp: page up.
	ScrollPageUp
	// ScrollPageDown: page down.
	ScrollPageDown
	// ScrollStepLeft: step to the left.
	ScrollStepLeft
	// ScrollStepRight: step to the right.
	ScrollStepRight
	// ScrollPageLeft: page to the left.
	ScrollPageLeft
	// ScrollPageRight: page to the right.
	ScrollPageRight
	// ScrollStart: scroll to start.
	ScrollStart
	// ScrollEnd: scroll to end.
	ScrollEnd
)

func (ScrollType) String 

func (s ScrollType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ScrollType.

type Scrollable 

type Scrollable struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Scrollable: GtkScrollable is an interface for widgets with native scrolling ability.

To implement this interface you should override the gtk.Scrollable:hadjustment and gtk.Scrollable:vadjustment properties.

Creating a scrollable widget

All scrollable widgets should do the following.

- When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments, the widget should populate the adjustments’ gtk.Adjustment:lower, gtk.Adjustment:upper, gtk.Adjustment:step-increment, gtk.Adjustment:page-increment and gtk.Adjustment:page-size properties and connect to the gtk.Adjustment::value-changed signal.

- Because its preferred size is the size for a fully expanded widget, the scrollable widget must be able to cope with underallocations. This means that it must accept any value passed to its GtkWidgetClass.size_allocate() function.

- When the parent allocates space to the scrollable child widget, the widget should update the adjustments’ properties with new values.

- When any of the adjustments emits the gtk.Adjustment::value-changed signal, the scrollable widget should scroll its contents.

Scrollable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*Scrollable) Border 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) Border() (*Border, bool)

Border returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the outside of the scrollable.

An example for this would be treeview headers. GTK can use this information to display overlaid graphics, like the overshoot indication, at the right position.

The function returns the following values:

  • border: return location for the results.
  • ok: TRUE if border has been set.

func (*Scrollable) HAdjustment 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) HAdjustment() *Adjustment

HAdjustment retrieves the GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: horizontal GtkAdjustment.

func (*Scrollable) HScrollPolicy 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) HScrollPolicy() ScrollablePolicy

HScrollPolicy gets the horizontal GtkScrollablePolicy.

The function returns the following values:

  • scrollablePolicy: horizontal GtkScrollablePolicy.

func (*Scrollable) SetHAdjustment 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) SetHAdjustment(hadjustment *Adjustment)

SetHAdjustment sets the horizontal adjustment of the GtkScrollable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hadjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment.

func (*Scrollable) SetHScrollPolicy 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) SetHScrollPolicy(policy ScrollablePolicy)

SetHScrollPolicy sets the GtkScrollablePolicy.

The policy determines whether horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or below the natural width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • policy: horizontal GtkScrollablePolicy.

func (*Scrollable) SetVAdjustment 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) SetVAdjustment(vadjustment *Adjustment)

SetVAdjustment sets the vertical adjustment of the GtkScrollable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • vadjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment.

func (*Scrollable) SetVScrollPolicy 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) SetVScrollPolicy(policy ScrollablePolicy)

SetVScrollPolicy sets the GtkScrollablePolicy.

The policy determines whether vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or below the natural height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • policy: vertical GtkScrollablePolicy.

func (*Scrollable) VAdjustment 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) VAdjustment() *Adjustment

VAdjustment retrieves the GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: vertical GtkAdjustment.

func (*Scrollable) VScrollPolicy 

func (scrollable *Scrollable) VScrollPolicy() ScrollablePolicy

VScrollPolicy gets the vertical GtkScrollablePolicy.

The function returns the following values:

  • scrollablePolicy: vertical GtkScrollablePolicy.

type ScrollableInterface added in v0.0.5 

type ScrollableInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ScrollableInterface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ScrollablePolicy 

type ScrollablePolicy C.gint

ScrollablePolicy defines the policy to be used in a scrollable widget when updating the scrolled window adjustments in a given orientation. 

const (
	// ScrollMinimum: scrollable adjustments are based on the minimum size.
	ScrollMinimum ScrollablePolicy = iota
	// ScrollNatural: scrollable adjustments are based on the natural size.
	ScrollNatural
)

func (ScrollablePolicy) String 

func (s ScrollablePolicy) String() string

String returns the name in string for ScrollablePolicy.

type Scrollabler 

type Scrollabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Border returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the outside of
	// the scrollable.
	Border() (*Border, bool)
	// HAdjustment retrieves the GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
	HAdjustment() *Adjustment
	// HScrollPolicy gets the horizontal GtkScrollablePolicy.
	HScrollPolicy() ScrollablePolicy
	// VAdjustment retrieves the GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
	VAdjustment() *Adjustment
	// VScrollPolicy gets the vertical GtkScrollablePolicy.
	VScrollPolicy() ScrollablePolicy
	// SetHAdjustment sets the horizontal adjustment of the GtkScrollable.
	SetHAdjustment(hadjustment *Adjustment)
	// SetHScrollPolicy sets the GtkScrollablePolicy.
	SetHScrollPolicy(policy ScrollablePolicy)
	// SetVAdjustment sets the vertical adjustment of the GtkScrollable.
	SetVAdjustment(vadjustment *Adjustment)
	// SetVScrollPolicy sets the GtkScrollablePolicy.
	SetVScrollPolicy(policy ScrollablePolicy)
}

Scrollabler describes Scrollable's interface methods.

type Scrollbar 

type Scrollbar struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Scrollbar: GtkScrollbar widget is a horizontal or vertical scrollbar.

!An example GtkScrollbar (scrollbar.png)

Its position and movement are controlled by the adjustment that is passed to or created by gtk.Scrollbar.New. See [class.Gtk.Adjustment] for more details. The gtk.Adjustment:value field sets the position of the thumb and must be between gtk.Adjustment:lower and gtk.Adjustment:upper - gtk.Adjustment:page-size. The gtk.Adjustment:page-size represents the size of the visible scrollable area.

The fields gtk.Adjustment:step-increment and gtk.Adjustment:page-increment fields are added to or subtracted from the gtk.Adjustment:value when the user asks to move by a step (using e.g. the cursor arrow keys) or by a page (using e.g. the Page Down/Up keys).

CSS nodes 

scrollbar
╰── range[.fine-tune]
    ╰── trough
        ╰── slider

GtkScrollbar has a main CSS node with name scrollbar and a subnode for its contents. The main node gets the .horizontal or .vertical style classes applied, depending on the scrollbar's orientation.

The range node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scrollbar is in 'fine-tuning' mode.

Other style classes that may be added to scrollbars inside gtk.ScrolledWindow include the positional classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering).

Accessibility

GtkScrollbar uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SCROLLBAR role.

func NewScrollbar 

func NewScrollbar(orientation Orientation, adjustment *Adjustment) *Scrollbar

NewScrollbar creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation scrollbar’s orientation.
  • adjustment (optional): gtk.Adjustment to use, or NULL to create a new adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • scrollbar: new GtkScrollbar.

func (*Scrollbar) Adjustment 

func (self *Scrollbar) Adjustment() *Adjustment

Adjustment returns the scrollbar's adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment scrollbar's adjustment.

func (*Scrollbar) SetAdjustment 

func (self *Scrollbar) SetAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetAdjustment makes the scrollbar use the given adjustment.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment (optional) to set.

type ScrolledWindow 

type ScrolledWindow struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ScrolledWindow: GtkScrolledWindow is a container that makes its child scrollable.

It does so using either internally added scrollbars or externally associated adjustments, and optionally draws a frame around the child.

Widgets with native scrolling support, i.e. those whose classes implement the gtk.Scrollable interface, are added directly. For other types of widget, the class gtk.Viewport acts as an adaptor, giving scrollability to other widgets. gtk.ScrolledWindow.SetChild() intelligently accounts for whether or not the added child is a GtkScrollable. If it isn’t, then it wraps the child in a GtkViewport. Therefore, you can just add any child widget and not worry about the details.

If gtk.ScrolledWindow.SetChild() has added a GtkViewport for you, you can remove both your added child widget from the GtkViewport, and the GtkViewport from the GtkScrolledWindow, like this: 

GtkWidget *scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new ();
GtkWidget *child_widget = gtk_button_new ();

// GtkButton is not a GtkScrollable, so GtkScrolledWindow will automatically
// add a GtkViewport.
gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window), child_widget);

// Either of these will result in child_widget being unparented:
gtk_box_remove (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window), child_widget);
// or
gtk_box_remove (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window),
                      gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (scrolled_window)));

Unless gtk.ScrolledWindow:hscrollbar-policy and gtk.ScrolledWindow:vscrollbar-policy are GTK_POLICY_NEVER or GTK_POLICY_EXTERNAL, GtkScrolledWindow adds internal GtkScrollbar widgets around its child. The scroll position of the child, and if applicable the scrollbars, is controlled by the gtk.ScrolledWindow:hadjustment and gtk.ScrolledWindow:vadjustment that are associated with the GtkScrolledWindow. See the docs on gtk.Scrollbar for the details, but note that the “step_increment” and “page_increment” fields are only effective if the policy causes scrollbars to be present.

If a GtkScrolledWindow doesn’t behave quite as you would like, or doesn’t have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up your own scrolling with GtkScrollbar and for example a GtkGrid.

Touch support

GtkScrolledWindow has built-in support for touch devices. When a touchscreen is used, swiping will move the scrolled window, and will expose 'kinetic' behavior. This can be turned off with the gtk.ScrolledWindow:kinetic-scrolling property if it is undesired.

GtkScrolledWindow also displays visual 'overshoot' indication when the content is pulled beyond the end, and this situation can be captured with the gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-overshot signal.

If no mouse device is present, the scrollbars will overlaid as narrow, auto-hiding indicators over the content. If traditional scrollbars are desired although no mouse is present, this behaviour can be turned off with the gtk.ScrolledWindow:overlay-scrolling property.

CSS nodes

GtkScrolledWindow has a main CSS node with name scrolledwindow. It gets a .frame style class added when gtk.ScrolledWindow:has-frame is TRUE.

It uses subnodes with names overshoot and undershoot to draw the overflow and underflow indications. These nodes get the .left, .right, .top or .bottom style class added depending on where the indication is drawn.

GtkScrolledWindow also sets the positional style classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering) on its scrollbars.

If both scrollbars are visible, the area where they meet is drawn with a subnode named junction.

Accessibility

GtkScrolledWindow uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewScrolledWindow 

func NewScrolledWindow() *ScrolledWindow

NewScrolledWindow creates a new scrolled window.

The function returns the following values:

  • scrolledWindow: new scrolled window.

func (*ScrolledWindow) Child 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of scrolled_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of scrolled_window.

func (*ScrolledWindow) ConnectEdgeOvershot 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) ConnectEdgeOvershot(f func(pos PositionType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEdgeOvershot is emitted whenever user initiated scrolling makes the scrolled window firmly surpass the limits defined by the adjustment in that orientation.

A similar behavior without edge resistance is provided by the gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-reached signal.

Note: The pos argument is LTR/RTL aware, so callers should be aware too if intending to provide behavior on horizontal edges.

func (*ScrolledWindow) ConnectEdgeReached 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) ConnectEdgeReached(f func(pos PositionType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEdgeReached is emitted whenever user-initiated scrolling makes the scrolled window exactly reach the lower or upper limits defined by the adjustment in that orientation.

A similar behavior with edge resistance is provided by the gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-overshot signal.

Note: The pos argument is LTR/RTL aware, so callers should be aware too if intending to provide behavior on horizontal edges.

func (*ScrolledWindow) ConnectMoveFocusOut 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) ConnectMoveFocusOut(f func(directionType DirectionType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveFocusOut is emitted when focus is moved away from the scrolled window by a keybinding.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl + Tab to move forward and Ctrl + Shift + Tab to move backward.

func (*ScrolledWindow) ConnectScrollChild 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) ConnectScrollChild(f func(scroll ScrollType, horizontal bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectScrollChild is emitted when a keybinding that scrolls is pressed.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The horizontal or vertical adjustment is updated which triggers a signal that the scrolled window’s child may listen to and scroll itself.

func (*ScrolledWindow) HAdjustment 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) HAdjustment() *Adjustment

HAdjustment returns the horizontal scrollbar’s adjustment.

This is the adjustment used to connect the horizontal scrollbar to the child widget’s horizontal scroll functionality.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: horizontal GtkAdjustment.

func (*ScrolledWindow) HScrollbar 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) HScrollbar() Widgetter

HScrollbar returns the horizontal scrollbar of scrolled_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window.

func (*ScrolledWindow) HasFrame 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) HasFrame() bool

HasFrame gets whether the scrolled window draws a frame.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the scrolled_window has a frame.

func (*ScrolledWindow) KineticScrolling 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) KineticScrolling() bool

KineticScrolling returns the specified kinetic scrolling behavior.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: scrolling behavior flags.

func (*ScrolledWindow) MaxContentHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) MaxContentHeight() int

MaxContentHeight returns the maximum content height set.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum content height, or -1.

func (*ScrolledWindow) MaxContentWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) MaxContentWidth() int

MaxContentWidth returns the maximum content width set.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum content width, or -1.

func (*ScrolledWindow) MinContentHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) MinContentHeight() int

MinContentHeight gets the minimal content height of scrolled_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: minimal content height.

func (*ScrolledWindow) MinContentWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) MinContentWidth() int

MinContentWidth gets the minimum content width of scrolled_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: minimum content width.

func (*ScrolledWindow) OverlayScrolling 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) OverlayScrolling() bool

OverlayScrolling returns whether overlay scrolling is enabled for this scrolled window.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if overlay scrolling is enabled.

func (*ScrolledWindow) Placement 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) Placement() CornerType

Placement gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars.

The function returns the following values:

  • cornerType: current placement value.

func (*ScrolledWindow) Policy 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) Policy() (hscrollbarPolicy, vscrollbarPolicy PolicyType)

Policy retrieves the current policy values for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.

See gtk.ScrolledWindow.SetPolicy().

The function returns the following values:

  • hscrollbarPolicy (optional): location to store the policy for the horizontal scrollbar, or NULL.
  • vscrollbarPolicy (optional): location to store the policy for the vertical scrollbar, or NULL.

func (*ScrolledWindow) PropagateNaturalHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) PropagateNaturalHeight() bool

PropagateNaturalHeight reports whether the natural height of the child will be calculated and propagated through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether natural height propagation is enabled.

func (*ScrolledWindow) PropagateNaturalWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) PropagateNaturalWidth() bool

PropagateNaturalWidth reports whether the natural width of the child will be calculated and propagated through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether natural width propagation is enabled.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetChild 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of scrolled_window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetHAdjustment 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetHAdjustment(hadjustment *Adjustment)

SetHAdjustment sets the GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hadjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment to use, or NULL to create a new one.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetHasFrame 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetHasFrame(hasFrame bool)

SetHasFrame changes the frame drawn around the contents of scrolled_window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasFrame: whether to draw a frame around scrolled window contents.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetKineticScrolling 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetKineticScrolling(kineticScrolling bool)

SetKineticScrolling turns kinetic scrolling on or off.

Kinetic scrolling only applies to devices with source GDK_SOURCE_TOUCHSCREEN.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • kineticScrolling: TRUE to enable kinetic scrolling.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetMaxContentHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetMaxContentHeight(height int)

SetMaxContentHeight sets the maximum height that scrolled_window should keep visible.

The scrolled_window will grow up to this height before it starts scrolling the content.

It is a programming error to set the maximum content height to a value smaller than gtk.ScrolledWindow:min-content-height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • height: maximum content height.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetMaxContentWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetMaxContentWidth(width int)

SetMaxContentWidth sets the maximum width that scrolled_window should keep visible.

The scrolled_window will grow up to this width before it starts scrolling the content.

It is a programming error to set the maximum content width to a value smaller than gtk.ScrolledWindow:min-content-width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: maximum content width.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetMinContentHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetMinContentHeight(height int)

SetMinContentHeight sets the minimum height that scrolled_window should keep visible.

Note that this can and (usually will) be smaller than the minimum size of the content.

It is a programming error to set the minimum content height to a value greater than gtk.ScrolledWindow:max-content-height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • height: minimal content height.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetMinContentWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetMinContentWidth(width int)

SetMinContentWidth sets the minimum width that scrolled_window should keep visible.

Note that this can and (usually will) be smaller than the minimum size of the content.

It is a programming error to set the minimum content width to a value greater than gtk.ScrolledWindow:max-content-width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: minimal content width.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetOverlayScrolling 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetOverlayScrolling(overlayScrolling bool)

SetOverlayScrolling enables or disables overlay scrolling for this scrolled window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • overlayScrolling: whether to enable overlay scrolling.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetPlacement 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetPlacement(windowPlacement CornerType)

SetPlacement sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars for the scrolled window.

The default is GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right. Other values in gtk.CornerType are GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT, GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.

See also gtk.ScrolledWindow.GetPlacement() and gtk.ScrolledWindow.UnsetPlacement().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • windowPlacement: position of the child window.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetPolicy 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetPolicy(hscrollbarPolicy, vscrollbarPolicy PolicyType)

SetPolicy sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.

The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value from the gtk.PolicyType enumeration. If GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the scrollbar is always present; if GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is never present; if GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller than the trough — the display is larger than the page size).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hscrollbarPolicy: policy for horizontal bar.
  • vscrollbarPolicy: policy for vertical bar.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetPropagateNaturalHeight 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetPropagateNaturalHeight(propagate bool)

SetPropagateNaturalHeight sets whether the natural height of the child should be calculated and propagated through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • propagate: whether to propagate natural height.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetPropagateNaturalWidth 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetPropagateNaturalWidth(propagate bool)

SetPropagateNaturalWidth sets whether the natural width of the child should be calculated and propagated through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • propagate: whether to propagate natural width.

func (*ScrolledWindow) SetVAdjustment 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) SetVAdjustment(vadjustment *Adjustment)

SetVAdjustment sets the GtkAdjustment for the vertical scrollbar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • vadjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment to use, or NULL to create a new one.

func (*ScrolledWindow) UnsetPlacement 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) UnsetPlacement()

UnsetPlacement unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars.

If no window placement is set for a scrolled window, it defaults to GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT.

func (*ScrolledWindow) VAdjustment 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) VAdjustment() *Adjustment

VAdjustment returns the vertical scrollbar’s adjustment.

This is the adjustment used to connect the vertical scrollbar to the child widget’s vertical scroll functionality.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: vertical GtkAdjustment.

func (*ScrolledWindow) VScrollbar 

func (scrolledWindow *ScrolledWindow) VScrollbar() Widgetter

VScrollbar returns the vertical scrollbar of scrolled_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window.
type SearchBar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SearchBar: GtkSearchBar is a container made to have a search entry.

!An example GtkSearchBar (search-bar.png)

It can also contain additional widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons. The search bar would appear when a search is started through typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.

For keyboard presses to start a search, the search bar must be told of a widget to capture key events from through gtk.SearchBar.SetKeyCaptureWidget(). This widget will typically be the top-level window, or a parent container of the search bar. Common shortcuts such as Ctrl+F should be handled as an application action, or through the menu items.

You will also need to tell the search bar about which entry you are using as your search entry using gtk.SearchBar.ConnectEntry().

The following example shows you how to create a more complex search entry.

A simple example (https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/tree/master/examples/search-bar.c)

CSS nodes 

searchbar
╰── revealer
    ╰── box
         ├── [child]
         ╰── [button.close]

GtkSearchBar has a main CSS node with name searchbar. It has a child node with name revealer that contains a node with name box. The box node contains both the CSS node of the child widget as well as an optional button node which gets the .close style class applied.

Accessibility

GtkSearchBar uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEARCH role.

func NewSearchBar 

func NewSearchBar() *SearchBar

NewSearchBar creates a GtkSearchBar.

You will need to tell it about which widget is going to be your text entry using gtk.SearchBar.ConnectEntry().

The function returns the following values:

  • searchBar: new GtkSearchBar.

func (*SearchBar) Child 

func (bar *SearchBar) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of bar.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of bar.

func (*SearchBar) ConnectEntry 

func (bar *SearchBar) ConnectEntry(entry EditableTextWidgetter)

ConnectEntry connects the `GtkEditable widget passed as the one to be used in this search bar.

The entry should be a descendant of the search bar. Calling this function manually is only required if the entry isn’t the direct child of the search bar (as in our main example).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • entry: GtkEditable.

func (*SearchBar) KeyCaptureWidget 

func (bar *SearchBar) KeyCaptureWidget() Widgetter

KeyCaptureWidget gets the widget that bar is capturing key events from.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: key capture widget.

func (*SearchBar) SearchMode 

func (bar *SearchBar) SearchMode() bool

SearchMode returns whether the search mode is on or off.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether search mode is toggled on.

func (*SearchBar) SetChild 

func (bar *SearchBar) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of bar.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*SearchBar) SetKeyCaptureWidget 

func (bar *SearchBar) SetKeyCaptureWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetKeyCaptureWidget sets widget as the widget that bar will capture key events from.

If key events are handled by the search bar, the bar will be shown, and the entry populated with the entered text.

Note that despite the name of this function, the events are only 'captured' in the bubble phase, which means that editable child widgets of widget will receive text input before it gets captured. If that is not desired, you can capture and forward the events yourself with gtk.EventControllerKey.Forward().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): GtkWidget.

func (*SearchBar) SetSearchMode 

func (bar *SearchBar) SetSearchMode(searchMode bool)

SetSearchMode switches the search mode on or off.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • searchMode: new state of the search mode.

func (*SearchBar) SetShowCloseButton 

func (bar *SearchBar) SetShowCloseButton(visible bool)

SetShowCloseButton shows or hides the close button.

Applications that already have a “search” toggle button should not show a close button in their search bar, as it duplicates the role of the toggle button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: whether the close button will be shown or not.

func (*SearchBar) ShowCloseButton 

func (bar *SearchBar) ShowCloseButton() bool

ShowCloseButton returns whether the close button is shown.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the close button is shown.

type SearchEntry 

type SearchEntry struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	EditableTextWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SearchEntry: GtkSearchEntry is an entry widget that has been tailored for use as a search entry.

The main API for interacting with a GtkSearchEntry as entry is the GtkEditable interface.

!An example GtkSearchEntry (search-entry.png)

It will show an inactive symbolic “find” icon when the search entry is empty, and a symbolic “clear” icon when there is text. Clicking on the “clear” icon will empty the search entry.

To make filtering appear more reactive, it is a good idea to not react to every change in the entry text immediately, but only after a short delay. To support this, GtkSearchEntry emits the gtk.SearchEntry::search-changed signal which can be used instead of the gtk.Editable::changed signal.

The gtk.SearchEntry::previous-match, gtk.SearchEntry::next-match and gtk.SearchEntry::stop-search signals can be used to implement moving between search results and ending the search.

Often, GtkSearchEntry will be fed events by means of being placed inside a gtk.SearchBar. If that is not the case, you can use gtk.SearchEntry.SetKeyCaptureWidget() to let it capture key input from another widget.

GtkSearchEntry provides only minimal API and should be used with the gtk.Editable API.

CSS Nodes 

entry.search
╰── text

GtkSearchEntry has a single CSS node with name entry that carries a .search style class, and the text node is a child of that.

Accessibility

GtkSearchEntry uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEARCH_BOX role.

func NewSearchEntry 

func NewSearchEntry() *SearchEntry

NewSearchEntry creates a GtkSearchEntry.

The function returns the following values:

  • searchEntry: new GtkSearchEntry.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectActivate 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when the entry is activated.

The keybindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectNextMatch 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectNextMatch(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectNextMatch is emitted when the user initiates a move to the next match for the current search string.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications should connect to it, to implement moving between matches.

The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-g.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectPreviousMatch 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectPreviousMatch(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreviousMatch is emitted when the user initiates a move to the previous match for the current search string.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications should connect to it, to implement moving between matches.

The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-g.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectSearchChanged 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectSearchChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSearchChanged is emitted with a short delay of 150 milliseconds after the last change to the entry text.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectSearchStarted 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectSearchStarted(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSearchStarted is emitted when the user initiated a search on the entry.

func (*SearchEntry) ConnectStopSearch 

func (entry *SearchEntry) ConnectStopSearch(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStopSearch is emitted when the user stops a search via keyboard input.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications should connect to it, to implement hiding the search entry in this case.

The default bindings for this signal is Escape.

func (*SearchEntry) KeyCaptureWidget 

func (entry *SearchEntry) KeyCaptureWidget() Widgetter

KeyCaptureWidget gets the widget that entry is capturing key events from.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: key capture widget.

func (*SearchEntry) SetKeyCaptureWidget 

func (entry *SearchEntry) SetKeyCaptureWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetKeyCaptureWidget sets widget as the widget that entry will capture key events from.

Key events are consumed by the search entry to start or continue a search.

If the entry is part of a GtkSearchBar, it is preferable to call gtk.SearchBar.SetKeyCaptureWidget() instead, which will reveal the entry in addition to triggering the search entry.

Note that despite the name of this function, the events are only 'captured' in the bubble phase, which means that editable child widgets of widget will receive text input before it gets captured. If that is not desired, you can capture and forward the events yourself with gtk.EventControllerKey.Forward().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): Widget.

type SelectionFilterModel 

type SelectionFilterModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SelectionFilterModel: GtkSelectionFilterModel is a list model that presents the selection from a GtkSelectionModel.

func NewSelectionFilterModel 

func NewSelectionFilterModel(model SelectionModeller) *SelectionFilterModel

NewSelectionFilterModel creates a new GtkSelectionFilterModel that will include the selected items from the underlying selection model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): selection model to filter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionFilterModel: new GtkSelectionFilterModel.

func (*SelectionFilterModel) Model 

func (self *SelectionFilterModel) Model() *SelectionModel

Model gets the model currently filtered or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionModel (optional): model that gets filtered.

func (*SelectionFilterModel) SetModel 

func (self *SelectionFilterModel) SetModel(model SelectionModeller)

SetModel sets the model to be filtered.

Note that GTK makes no effort to ensure that model conforms to the item type of self. It assumes that the caller knows what they are doing and have set up an appropriate filter to ensure that item types match.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be filtered.

type SelectionFilterModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type SelectionFilterModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SelectionFilterModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SelectionFilterModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type SelectionFilterModelOverrides struct {
}

SelectionFilterModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type SelectionMode 

type SelectionMode C.gint

SelectionMode: used to control what selections users are allowed to make. 

const (
	// SelectionNone: no selection is possible.
	SelectionNone SelectionMode = iota
	// SelectionSingle: zero or one element may be selected.
	SelectionSingle
	// SelectionBrowse: exactly one element is selected. In some circumstances,
	// such as initially or during a search operation, it’s possible for no
	// element to be selected with GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE. What is really enforced
	// is that the user can’t deselect a currently selected element except by
	// selecting another element.
	SelectionBrowse
	// SelectionMultiple: any number of elements may be selected. The Ctrl key
	// may be used to enlarge the selection, and Shift key to select between the
	// focus and the child pointed to. Some widgets may also allow Click-drag to
	// select a range of elements.
	SelectionMultiple
)

func (SelectionMode) String 

func (s SelectionMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for SelectionMode.

type SelectionModel 

type SelectionModel struct {
	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SelectionModel: GtkSelectionModel is an interface that add support for selection to list models.

This support is then used by widgets using list models to add the ability to select and unselect various items.

GTK provides default implementations of the most common selection modes such as gtk.SingleSelection, so you will only need to implement this interface if you want detailed control about how selections should be handled.

A GtkSelectionModel supports a single boolean per item indicating if an item is selected or not. This can be queried via gtk.SelectionModel.IsSelected(). When the selected state of one or more items changes, the model will emit the gtk.SelectionModel::selection-changed signal by calling the gtk.SelectionModel.SelectionChanged() function. The positions given in that signal may have their selection state changed, though that is not a requirement. If new items added to the model via the ::items-changed signal are selected or not is up to the implementation.

Note that items added via ::items-changed may already be selected and no [Gtk.SelectionModel::selection-changed] will be emitted for them. So to track which items are selected, it is necessary to listen to both signals.

Additionally, the interface can expose functionality to select and unselect items. If these functions are implemented, GTK's list widgets will allow users to select and unselect items. However, GtkSelectionModels are free to only implement them partially or not at all. In that case the widgets will not support the unimplemented operations.

When selecting or unselecting is supported by a model, the return values of the selection functions do *not* indicate if selection or unselection happened. They are only meant to indicate complete failure, like when this mode of selecting is not supported by the model.

Selections may happen asynchronously, so the only reliable way to find out when an item was selected is to listen to the signals that indicate selection.

SelectionModel wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*SelectionModel) ConnectSelectionChanged 

func (model *SelectionModel) ConnectSelectionChanged(f func(position, nItems uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectionChanged is emitted when the selection state of some of the items in model changes.

Note that this signal does not specify the new selection state of the items, they need to be queried manually. It is also not necessary for a model to change the selection state of any of the items in the selection model, though it would be rather useless to emit such a signal.

func (*SelectionModel) IsSelected 

func (model *SelectionModel) IsSelected(position uint) bool

IsSelected checks if the given item is selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the item to query.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the item is selected.

func (*SelectionModel) SelectAll 

func (model *SelectionModel) SelectAll() bool

SelectAll requests to select all items in the model.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean that all items are now selected.

func (*SelectionModel) SelectItem 

func (model *SelectionModel) SelectItem(position uint, unselectRest bool) bool

SelectItem requests to select an item in the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the item to select.
  • unselectRest: whether previously selected items should be unselected.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean the item was selected.

func (*SelectionModel) SelectRange 

func (model *SelectionModel) SelectRange(position, nItems uint, unselectRest bool) bool

SelectRange requests to select a range of items in the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: first item to select.
  • nItems: number of items to select.
  • unselectRest: whether previously selected items should be unselected.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean the range was selected.

func (*SelectionModel) Selection 

func (model *SelectionModel) Selection() *Bitset

Selection gets the set containing all currently selected items in the model.

This function may be slow, so if you are only interested in single item, consider using gtk.SelectionModel.IsSelected() or if you are only interested in a few, consider gtk.SelectionModel.GetSelectionInRange().

The function returns the following values:

  • bitset: GtkBitset containing all the values currently selected in model. If no items are selected, the bitset is empty. The bitset must not be modified.

func (*SelectionModel) SelectionChanged 

func (model *SelectionModel) SelectionChanged(position, nItems uint)

SelectionChanged: helper function for implementations of GtkSelectionModel.

Call this when a the selection changes to emit the gtk.SelectionModel::selection-changed signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: first changed item.
  • nItems: number of changed items.

func (*SelectionModel) SelectionInRange 

func (model *SelectionModel) SelectionInRange(position, nItems uint) *Bitset

SelectionInRange gets the set of selected items in a range.

This function is an optimization for gtk.SelectionModel.GetSelection() when you are only interested in part of the model's selected state. A common use case is in response to the gtk.SelectionModel::selection-changed signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: start of the queired range.
  • nItems: number of items in the queried range.

The function returns the following values:

  • bitset: GtkBitset that matches the selection state for the given range with all other values being undefined. The bitset must not be modified.

func (*SelectionModel) SetSelection 

func (model *SelectionModel) SetSelection(selected, mask *Bitset) bool

SetSelection: make selection changes.

This is the most advanced selection updating method that allows the most fine-grained control over selection changes. If you can, you should try the simpler versions, as implementations are more likely to implement support for those.

Requests that the selection state of all positions set in mask be updated to the respective value in the selected bitmask.

In pseudocode, it would look something like this: 

for (i = 0; i < n_items; i++)
  {
    // don't change values not in the mask
    if (!gtk_bitset_contains (mask, i))
      continue;

    if (gtk_bitset_contains (selected, i))
      select_item (i);
    else
      unselect_item (i);
  }

gtk_selection_model_selection_changed (model,
                                       first_changed_item,
                                       n_changed_items);

mask and selected must not be modified. They may refer to the same bitset, which would mean that every item in the set should be selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • selected: bitmask specifying if items should be selected or unselected.
  • mask specifying which items should be updated.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean that all items were updated according to the inputs.

func (*SelectionModel) UnselectAll 

func (model *SelectionModel) UnselectAll() bool

UnselectAll requests to unselect all items in the model.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean that all items are now unselected.

func (*SelectionModel) UnselectItem 

func (model *SelectionModel) UnselectItem(position uint) bool

UnselectItem requests to unselect an item in the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the item to unselect.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean the item was unselected.

func (*SelectionModel) UnselectRange 

func (model *SelectionModel) UnselectRange(position, nItems uint) bool

UnselectRange requests to unselect a range of items in the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: first item to unselect.
  • nItems: number of items to unselect.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was supported and no fallback should be tried. This does not mean the range was unselected.

type SelectionModelInterface added in v0.0.5 

type SelectionModelInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SelectionModelInterface: list of virtual functions for the SelectionModel interface. No function must be implemented, but unless SelectionModel::is_selected() is implemented, it will not be possible to select items in the set.

The model does not need to implement any functions to support either selecting or unselecting items. Of course, if the model does not do that, it means that users cannot select or unselect items in a list widget using the model.

All selection functions fall back to SelectionModel::set_selection() so it is sufficient to implement just that function for full selection support.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SelectionModeller 

type SelectionModeller interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// Selection gets the set containing all currently selected items in the
	// model.
	Selection() *Bitset
	// SelectionInRange gets the set of selected items in a range.
	SelectionInRange(position, nItems uint) *Bitset
	// IsSelected checks if the given item is selected.
	IsSelected(position uint) bool
	// SelectAll requests to select all items in the model.
	SelectAll() bool
	// SelectItem requests to select an item in the model.
	SelectItem(position uint, unselectRest bool) bool
	// SelectRange requests to select a range of items in the model.
	SelectRange(position, nItems uint, unselectRest bool) bool
	// SelectionChanged: helper function for implementations of
	// GtkSelectionModel.
	SelectionChanged(position, nItems uint)
	// SetSelection: make selection changes.
	SetSelection(selected, mask *Bitset) bool
	// UnselectAll requests to unselect all items in the model.
	UnselectAll() bool
	// UnselectItem requests to unselect an item in the model.
	UnselectItem(position uint) bool
	// UnselectRange requests to unselect a range of items in the model.
	UnselectRange(position, nItems uint) bool

	// Selection-changed is emitted when the selection state of some of the
	// items in model changes.
	ConnectSelectionChanged(func(position, nItems uint)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

SelectionModeller describes SelectionModel's interface methods.

type SensitivityType 

type SensitivityType C.gint

SensitivityType determines how GTK handles the sensitivity of various controls, such as combo box buttons. 

const (
	// SensitivityAuto: control is made insensitive if no action can be
	// triggered.
	SensitivityAuto SensitivityType = iota
	// SensitivityOn: control is always sensitive.
	SensitivityOn
	// SensitivityOff: control is always insensitive.
	SensitivityOff
)

func (SensitivityType) String 

func (s SensitivityType) String() string

String returns the name in string for SensitivityType.

type Separator 

type Separator struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Separator: GtkSeparator is a horizontal or vertical separator widget.

!An example GtkSeparator (separators.png)

A GtkSeparator can be used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.

CSS nodes

GtkSeparator has a single CSS node with name separator. The node gets one of the .horizontal or .vertical style classes.

Accessibility

GtkSeparator uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEPARATOR role.

func NewSeparator 

func NewSeparator(orientation Orientation) *Separator

NewSeparator creates a new GtkSeparator with the given orientation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation separator’s orientation.

The function returns the following values:

  • separator: new GtkSeparator.

type Settings 

type Settings struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	StyleProvider
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings: GtkSettings provides a mechanism to share global settings between applications.

On the X window system, this sharing is realized by an XSettings (http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/xsettings-spec) manager that is usually part of the desktop environment, along with utilities that let the user change these settings.

On Wayland, the settings are obtained either via a settings portal, or by reading desktop settings from DConf.

In the absence of these sharing mechanisms, GTK reads default values for settings from settings.ini files in /etc/gtk-4.0, $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS/gtk-4.0 and $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0. These files must be valid key files (see GKeyFile), and have a section called Settings. Themes can also provide default values for settings by installing a settings.ini file next to their gtk.css file.

Applications can override system-wide settings by setting the property of the GtkSettings object with g_object_set(). This should be restricted to special cases though; GtkSettings are not meant as an application configuration facility.

There is one GtkSettings instance per display. It can be obtained with gtksettings.GetForDisplay, but in many cases, it is more convenient to use gtk.Widget.GetSettings().

func SettingsGetDefault 

func SettingsGetDefault() *Settings

SettingsGetDefault gets the GtkSettings object for the default display, creating it if necessary.

See gtk.Settings.GetForDisplay.

The function returns the following values:

  • settings (optional): GtkSettings object. If there is no default display, then returns NULL.

func SettingsGetForDisplay 

func SettingsGetForDisplay(display *gdk.Display) *Settings

SettingsGetForDisplay gets the GtkSettings object for display, creating it if necessary.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

The function returns the following values:

  • settings: GtkSettings object.

func (*Settings) ResetProperty 

func (settings *Settings) ResetProperty(name string)

ResetProperty undoes the effect of calling g_object_set() to install an application-specific value for a setting.

After this call, the setting will again follow the session-wide value for this setting.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the setting to reset.

type Shortcut 

type Shortcut struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Shortcut: GtkShortcut describes a keyboard shortcut.

It contains a description of how to trigger the shortcut via a gtk.ShortcutTrigger and a way to activate the shortcut on a widget via a gtk.ShortcutAction.

The actual work is usually done via gtk.ShortcutController, which decides if and when to activate a shortcut. Using that controller directly however is rarely necessary as various higher level convenience APIs exist on Widgets that make it easier to use shortcuts in GTK.

GtkShortcut does provide functionality to make it easy for users to work with shortcuts, either by providing informational strings for display purposes or by allowing shortcuts to be configured.

func NewShortcut 

func NewShortcut(trigger ShortcutTriggerer, action ShortcutActioner) *Shortcut

NewShortcut creates a new GtkShortcut that is triggered by trigger and then activates action.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • trigger (optional) that will trigger the shortcut.
  • action (optional) that will be activated upon triggering.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcut: new GtkShortcut.

func (*Shortcut) Action 

func (self *Shortcut) Action() ShortcutActioner

Action gets the action that is activated by this shortcut.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutAction (optional): action.

func (*Shortcut) Arguments 

func (self *Shortcut) Arguments() *glib.Variant

Arguments gets the arguments that are passed when activating the shortcut.

The function returns the following values:

  • variant (optional): arguments.

func (*Shortcut) SetAction 

func (self *Shortcut) SetAction(action ShortcutActioner)

SetAction sets the new action for self to be action.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • action (optional): new action. If the action is NULL, the nothing action will be used.

func (*Shortcut) SetArguments 

func (self *Shortcut) SetArguments(args *glib.Variant)

SetArguments sets the arguments to pass when activating the shortcut.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • args (optional) arguments to pass when activating self.

func (*Shortcut) SetTrigger 

func (self *Shortcut) SetTrigger(trigger ShortcutTriggerer)

SetTrigger sets the new trigger for self to be trigger.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • trigger (optional): new trigger. If the trigger is NULL, the never trigger will be used.

func (*Shortcut) Trigger 

func (self *Shortcut) Trigger() ShortcutTriggerer

Trigger gets the trigger used to trigger self.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutTrigger (optional): trigger used.

type ShortcutAction 

type ShortcutAction struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutAction: GtkShortcutAction encodes an action that can be triggered by a keyboard shortcut.

GtkShortcutActions contain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.

All GtkShortcutActions are immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a action, you have to replace it with a new one. If you need to pass arguments to an action, these are specified by the higher-level GtkShortcut object.

To activate a GtkShortcutAction manually, gtk.ShortcutAction.Activate() can be called.

GTK provides various actions:

  • gtk.MnemonicAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate()
  • gtk.CallbackAction: a shortcut action that invokes a given callback
  • gtk.SignalAction: a shortcut action that emits a given signal
  • gtk.ActivateAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk_widget_activate()
  • gtk.NamedAction: a shortcut action that calls gtk_widget_activate_action()
  • gtk.NothingAction: a shortcut action that does nothing.

func BaseShortcutAction 

func BaseShortcutAction(obj ShortcutActioner) *ShortcutAction

BaseShortcutAction returns the underlying base object.

func NewShortcutActionParseString 

func NewShortcutActionParseString(str string) *ShortcutAction

NewShortcutActionParseString tries to parse the given string into an action.

On success, the parsed action is returned. When parsing failed, NULL is returned.

The accepted strings are:

- nothing, for GtkNothingAction

- activate, for GtkActivateAction

- mnemonic-activate, for GtkMnemonicAction

- action(NAME), for a GtkNamedAction for the action named NAME

- signal(NAME), for a GtkSignalAction for the signal NAME.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string to parse.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutAction (optional): new GtkShortcutAction or NULL on error.

func (*ShortcutAction) Activate 

func (self *ShortcutAction) Activate(flags ShortcutActionFlags, widget Widgetter, args *glib.Variant) bool

Activate activates the action on the widget with the given args.

Note that some actions ignore the passed in flags, widget or args.

Activation of an action can fail for various reasons. If the action is not supported by the widget, if the args don't match the action or if the activation otherwise had no effect, FALSE will be returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags to activate with.
  • widget: target of the activation.
  • args (optional) arguments to pass.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if this action was activated successfully.

func (*ShortcutAction) String 

func (self *ShortcutAction) String() string

String prints the given action into a human-readable string.

This is a small wrapper around gtk.ShortcutAction.Print() to help when debugging.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: new string.

type ShortcutActionFlags 

type ShortcutActionFlags C.guint

ShortcutActionFlags: list of flags that can be passed to action activation.

More flags may be added in the future. 

const (
	// ShortcutActionExclusive: action is the only action that can be activated.
	// If this flag is not set, a future activation may select a different
	// action.
	ShortcutActionExclusive ShortcutActionFlags = 0b1
)

func (ShortcutActionFlags) Has 

func (s ShortcutActionFlags) Has(other ShortcutActionFlags) bool

Has returns true if s contains other.

func (ShortcutActionFlags) String 

func (s ShortcutActionFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for ShortcutActionFlags.

type ShortcutActioner 

type ShortcutActioner interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ShortcutActioner describes types inherited from class ShortcutAction.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type ShortcutClass added in v0.0.5 

type ShortcutClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ShortcutController 

type ShortcutController struct {
	EventController

	*coreglib.Object
	gio.ListModel
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutController: GtkShortcutController is an event controller that manages shortcuts.

Most common shortcuts are using this controller implicitly, e.g. by adding a mnemonic underline to a GtkLabel, or by installing a key binding using gtk_widget_class_add_binding(), or by adding accelerators to global actions using gtk_application_set_accels_for_action().

But it is possible to create your own shortcut controller, and add shortcuts to it.

GtkShortcutController implements GListModel for querying the shortcuts that have been added to it.

GtkShortcutController as a GtkBuildable

GtkShortcutControllers can be creates in ui files to set up shortcuts in the same place as the widgets.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkShortcutController: 

<object class='GtkButton'>
  <child>
    <object class='GtkShortcutController'>
      <property name='scope'>managed</property>
      <child>
        <object class='GtkShortcut'>
          <property name='trigger'>&amp;lt;Control&amp;gt;k</property>
          <property name='action'>activate</property>
        </object>
      </child>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

This example creates a gtk.ActivateAction for triggering the activate signal of the GtkButton. See gtk.ShortcutAction.ParseString for the syntax for other kinds of GtkShortcutAction. See gtk.ShortcutTrigger.ParseString to learn more about the syntax for triggers.

func NewShortcutController 

func NewShortcutController() *ShortcutController

NewShortcutController creates a new shortcut controller.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutController: newly created shortcut controller.

func NewShortcutControllerForModel 

func NewShortcutControllerForModel(model gio.ListModeller) *ShortcutController

NewShortcutControllerForModel creates a new shortcut controller that takes its shortcuts from the given list model.

A controller created by this function does not let you add or remove individual shortcuts using the shortcut controller api, but you can change the contents of the model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: GListModel containing shortcuts.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutController: newly created shortcut controller.

func (*ShortcutController) AddShortcut 

func (self *ShortcutController) AddShortcut(shortcut *Shortcut)

AddShortcut adds shortcut to the list of shortcuts handled by self.

If this controller uses an external shortcut list, this function does nothing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • shortcut: GtkShortcut.

func (*ShortcutController) MnemonicsModifiers 

func (self *ShortcutController) MnemonicsModifiers() gdk.ModifierType

MnemonicsModifiers gets the mnemonics modifiers for when this controller activates its shortcuts.

The function returns the following values:

  • modifierType controller's mnemonics modifiers.

func (*ShortcutController) RemoveShortcut 

func (self *ShortcutController) RemoveShortcut(shortcut *Shortcut)

RemoveShortcut removes shortcut from the list of shortcuts handled by self.

If shortcut had not been added to controller or this controller uses an external shortcut list, this function does nothing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • shortcut: GtkShortcut.

func (*ShortcutController) Scope 

func (self *ShortcutController) Scope() ShortcutScope

Scope gets the scope for when this controller activates its shortcuts. See gtk_shortcut_controller_set_scope() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutScope controller's scope.

func (*ShortcutController) SetMnemonicsModifiers 

func (self *ShortcutController) SetMnemonicsModifiers(modifiers gdk.ModifierType)

SetMnemonicsModifiers sets the controller to have the given mnemonics_modifiers.

The mnemonics modifiers determines which modifiers need to be pressed to allow activation of shortcuts with mnemonics triggers.

GTK normally uses the Alt modifier for mnemonics, except in PopoverMenus, where mnemonics can be triggered without any modifiers. It should be very rarely necessary to change this, and doing so is likely to interfere with other shortcuts.

This value is only relevant for local shortcut controllers. Global and managed shortcut controllers will have their shortcuts activated from other places which have their own modifiers for activating mnemonics.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modifiers: new mnemonics_modifiers to use.

func (*ShortcutController) SetScope 

func (self *ShortcutController) SetScope(scope ShortcutScope)

SetScope sets the controller to have the given scope.

The scope allows shortcuts to be activated outside of the normal event propagation. In particular, it allows installing global keyboard shortcuts that can be activated even when a widget does not have focus.

With GTK_SHORTCUT_SCOPE_LOCAL, shortcuts will only be activated when the widget has focus.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scope: new scope to use.

type ShortcutFunc 

type ShortcutFunc func(widget Widgetter, args *glib.Variant) (ok bool)

ShortcutFunc: prototype for shortcuts based on user callbacks.

type ShortcutLabel 

type ShortcutLabel struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutLabel: GtkShortcutLabel displays a single keyboard shortcut or gesture.

The main use case for GtkShortcutLabel is inside a gtk.ShortcutsWindow.

func NewShortcutLabel 

func NewShortcutLabel(accelerator string) *ShortcutLabel

NewShortcutLabel creates a new GtkShortcutLabel with accelerator set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accelerator: initial accelerator.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutLabel: newly-allocated GtkShortcutLabel.

func (*ShortcutLabel) Accelerator 

func (self *ShortcutLabel) Accelerator() string

Accelerator retrieves the current accelerator of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): current accelerator.

func (*ShortcutLabel) DisabledText 

func (self *ShortcutLabel) DisabledText() string

DisabledText retrieves the text that is displayed when no accelerator is set.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): current text displayed when no accelerator is set.

func (*ShortcutLabel) SetAccelerator 

func (self *ShortcutLabel) SetAccelerator(accelerator string)

SetAccelerator sets the accelerator to be displayed by self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accelerator: new accelerator.

func (*ShortcutLabel) SetDisabledText 

func (self *ShortcutLabel) SetDisabledText(disabledText string)

SetDisabledText sets the text to be displayed by self when no accelerator is set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • disabledText: text to be displayed when no accelerator is set.

type ShortcutManager 

type ShortcutManager struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutManager: GtkShortcutManager interface is used to implement shortcut scopes.

This is important for gtk.Native widgets that have their own surface, since the event controllers that are used to implement managed and global scopes are limited to the same native.

Examples for widgets implementing GtkShortcutManager are gtk.Window and gtk.Popover.

Every widget that implements GtkShortcutManager will be used as a GTK_SHORTCUT_SCOPE_MANAGED.

ShortcutManager wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func BaseShortcutManager 

func BaseShortcutManager(obj ShortcutManagerer) *ShortcutManager

BaseShortcutManager returns the underlying base object.

type ShortcutManagerInterface added in v0.0.5 

type ShortcutManagerInterface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutManagerInterface: list of functions that can be implemented for the ShortcutManager interface.

Note that no function is mandatory to implement, the default implementation will work fine.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type ShortcutManagerer 

type ShortcutManagerer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ShortcutManagerer describes ShortcutManager's interface methods.

type ShortcutOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ShortcutOverrides struct {
}

ShortcutOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type ShortcutScope 

type ShortcutScope C.gint

ShortcutScope describes where GtkShortcuts added to a GtkShortcutController get handled. 

const (
	// ShortcutScopeLocal shortcuts are handled inside the widget the controller
	// belongs to.
	ShortcutScopeLocal ShortcutScope = iota
	// ShortcutScopeManaged shortcuts are handled by the first ancestor that is
	// a ShortcutManager.
	ShortcutScopeManaged
	// ShortcutScopeGlobal shortcuts are handled by the root widget.
	ShortcutScopeGlobal
)

func (ShortcutScope) String 

func (s ShortcutScope) String() string

String returns the name in string for ShortcutScope.

type ShortcutTrigger 

type ShortcutTrigger struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutTrigger: GtkShortcutTrigger tracks how a GtkShortcut should be activated.

To find out if a GtkShortcutTrigger triggers, you can call gtk.ShortcutTrigger.Trigger() on a GdkEvent.

GtkShortcutTriggers contain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.

All GtkShortcutTriggers are immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a trigger, you have to replace it with a new one.

func BaseShortcutTrigger 

func BaseShortcutTrigger(obj ShortcutTriggerer) *ShortcutTrigger

BaseShortcutTrigger returns the underlying base object.

func NewShortcutTriggerParseString 

func NewShortcutTriggerParseString(str string) *ShortcutTrigger

NewShortcutTriggerParseString tries to parse the given string into a trigger.

On success, the parsed trigger is returned. When parsing failed, NULL is returned.

The accepted strings are:

  • never, for GtkNeverTrigger
  • a string parsed by gtk_accelerator_parse(), for a GtkKeyvalTrigger, e.g. <Control>C
  • underscore, followed by a single character, for GtkMnemonicTrigger, e.g. _l
  • two valid trigger strings, separated by a | character, for a GtkAlternativeTrigger: <Control>q|<Control>w

Note that you will have to escape the < and > characters when specifying triggers in XML files, such as GtkBuilder ui files. Use &lt; instead of < and &gt; instead of >.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string to parse.

The function returns the following values:

  • shortcutTrigger (optional): new GtkShortcutTrigger or NULL on error.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) Compare 

func (trigger1 *ShortcutTrigger) Compare(trigger2 ShortcutTriggerer) int

Compare types of trigger1 and trigger2 are #gconstpointer only to allow use of this function as a Func.

They must each be a GtkShortcutTrigger.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • trigger2: GtkShortcutTrigger.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if trigger1 is found, respectively, to be less than, to match, or be greater than trigger2.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) Equal 

func (trigger1 *ShortcutTrigger) Equal(trigger2 ShortcutTriggerer) bool

Equal checks if trigger1 and trigger2 trigger under the same conditions.

The types of one and two are #gconstpointer only to allow use of this function with Table. They must each be a GtkShortcutTrigger.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • trigger2: GtkShortcutTrigger.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if trigger1 and trigger2 are equal.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) Hash 

func (trigger *ShortcutTrigger) Hash() uint

Hash generates a hash value for a GtkShortcutTrigger.

The output of this function is guaranteed to be the same for a given value only per-process. It may change between different processor architectures or even different versions of GTK. Do not use this function as a basis for building protocols or file formats.

The types of trigger is #gconstpointer only to allow use of this function with Table. They must each be a GtkShortcutTrigger.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: hash value corresponding to trigger.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) String 

func (self *ShortcutTrigger) String() string

String prints the given trigger into a human-readable string.

This is a small wrapper around gtk.ShortcutTrigger.Print() to help when debugging.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: new string.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) ToLabel 

func (self *ShortcutTrigger) ToLabel(display *gdk.Display) string

ToLabel gets textual representation for the given trigger.

This function is returning a translated string for presentation to end users for example in menu items or in help texts.

The display in use may influence the resulting string in various forms, such as resolving hardware keycodes or by causing display-specific modifier names.

The form of the representation may change at any time and is not guaranteed to stay identical.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay to print for.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: new string.

func (*ShortcutTrigger) Trigger 

func (self *ShortcutTrigger) Trigger(event gdk.Eventer, enableMnemonics bool) gdk.KeyMatch

Trigger checks if the given event triggers self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event to check.
  • enableMnemonics: TRUE if mnemonics should trigger. Usually the value of this property is determined by checking that the passed in event is a Key event and has the right modifiers set.

The function returns the following values:

  • keyMatch: whether the event triggered the shortcut.

type ShortcutTriggerer 

type ShortcutTriggerer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

ShortcutTriggerer describes types inherited from class ShortcutTrigger.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

type ShortcutType 

type ShortcutType C.gint

ShortcutType specifies the kind of shortcut that is being described.

More values may be added to this enumeration over time. 

const (
	// ShortcutAccelerator: shortcut is a keyboard accelerator. The
	// GtkShortcutsShortcut:accelerator property will be used.
	ShortcutAccelerator ShortcutType = iota
	// ShortcutGesturePinch: shortcut is a pinch gesture. GTK provides an icon
	// and subtitle.
	ShortcutGesturePinch
	// ShortcutGestureStretch: shortcut is a stretch gesture. GTK provides an
	// icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureStretch
	// ShortcutGestureRotateClockwise: shortcut is a clockwise rotation gesture.
	// GTK provides an icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureRotateClockwise
	// ShortcutGestureRotateCounterclockwise: shortcut is a counterclockwise
	// rotation gesture. GTK provides an icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureRotateCounterclockwise
	// ShortcutGestureTwoFingerSwipeLeft: shortcut is a two-finger swipe
	// gesture. GTK provides an icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureTwoFingerSwipeLeft
	// ShortcutGestureTwoFingerSwipeRight: shortcut is a two-finger swipe
	// gesture. GTK provides an icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureTwoFingerSwipeRight
	// ShortcutGesture: shortcut is a gesture. The GtkShortcutsShortcut:icon
	// property will be used.
	ShortcutGesture
	// ShortcutGestureSwipeLeft: shortcut is a swipe gesture. GTK provides an
	// icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureSwipeLeft
	// ShortcutGestureSwipeRight: shortcut is a swipe gesture. GTK provides an
	// icon and subtitle.
	ShortcutGestureSwipeRight
)

func (ShortcutType) String 

func (s ShortcutType) String() string

String returns the name in string for ShortcutType.

type ShortcutsGroup 

type ShortcutsGroup struct {
	Box
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutsGroup: GtkShortcutsGroup represents a group of related keyboard shortcuts or gestures.

The group has a title. It may optionally be associated with a view of the application, which can be used to show only relevant shortcuts depending on the application context.

This widget is only meant to be used with gtk.ShortcutsWindow.

type ShortcutsSection 

type ShortcutsSection struct {
	Box
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutsSection: GtkShortcutsSection collects all the keyboard shortcuts and gestures for a major application mode.

If your application needs multiple sections, you should give each section a unique gtk.ShortcutsSection:section-name and a gtk.ShortcutsSection:title that can be shown in the section selector of the gtk.ShortcutsWindow.

The gtk.ShortcutsSection:max-height property can be used to influence how the groups in the section are distributed over pages and columns.

This widget is only meant to be used with gtk.ShortcutsWindow.

func (*ShortcutsSection) ConnectChangeCurrentPage 

func (v *ShortcutsSection) ConnectChangeCurrentPage(f func(object int) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

type ShortcutsShortcut 

type ShortcutsShortcut struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutsShortcut: GtkShortcutsShortcut represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture with a short text.

This widget is only meant to be used with GtkShortcutsWindow.

type ShortcutsWindow 

type ShortcutsWindow struct {
	Window
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ShortcutsWindow: GtkShortcutsWindow shows information about the keyboard shortcuts and gestures of an application.

The shortcuts can be grouped, and you can have multiple sections in this window, corresponding to the major modes of your application.

Additionally, the shortcuts can be filtered by the current view, to avoid showing information that is not relevant in the current application context.

The recommended way to construct a GtkShortcutsWindow is with gtk.Builder, by populating a GtkShortcutsWindow with one or more GtkShortcutsSection objects, which contain GtkShortcutsGroups that in turn contain objects of class GtkShortcutsShortcut.

A simple example:

! (gedit-shortcuts.png)

This example has as single section. As you can see, the shortcut groups are arranged in columns, and spread across several pages if there are too many to find on a single page.

The .ui file for this example can be found here (https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/tree/master/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-gedit.ui).

An example with multiple views:

! (clocks-shortcuts.png)

This example shows a GtkShortcutsWindow that has been configured to show only the shortcuts relevant to the "stopwatch" view.

The .ui file for this example can be found here (https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/tree/master/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-clocks.ui).

An example with multiple sections:

! (builder-shortcuts.png)

This example shows a GtkShortcutsWindow with two sections, "Editor Shortcuts" and "Terminal Shortcuts".

The .ui file for this example can be found here (https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/tree/master/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-builder.ui).

func (*ShortcutsWindow) ConnectClose 

func (v *ShortcutsWindow) ConnectClose(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClose is emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the window.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.

func (*ShortcutsWindow) ConnectSearch 

func (v *ShortcutsWindow) ConnectSearch(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSearch is emitted when the user uses a keybinding to start a search.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is Control-F.

type SignalAction 

type SignalAction struct {
	ShortcutAction
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SignalAction: GtkShortcutAction that emits a signal.

Signals that are used in this way are referred to as keybinding signals, and they are expected to be defined with the G_SIGNAL_ACTION flag.

func NewSignalAction 

func NewSignalAction(signalName string) *SignalAction

NewSignalAction creates an action that when activated, emits the given action signal on the provided widget.

It will also unpack the args into arguments passed to the signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • signalName: name of the signal to emit.

The function returns the following values:

  • signalAction: new GtkShortcutAction.

func (*SignalAction) SignalName 

func (self *SignalAction) SignalName() string

SignalName returns the name of the signal that will be emitted.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of the signal to emit.

type SignalListItemFactory 

type SignalListItemFactory struct {
	ListItemFactory
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SignalListItemFactory: GtkSignalListItemFactory is a GtkListItemFactory that emits signals to to manage listitems.

Signals are emitted for every listitem in the same order:

  1. gtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup is emitted to set up permanent things on the listitem. This usually means constructing the widgets used in the row and adding them to the listitem.

  2. gtk.SignalListItemFactory::bind is emitted to bind the item passed via gtk.ListItem:item to the widgets that have been created in step 1 or to add item-specific widgets. Signals are connected to listen to changes - both to changes in the item to update the widgets or to changes in the widgets to update the item. After this signal has been called, the listitem may be shown in a list widget.

  3. gtk.SignalListItemFactory::unbind is emitted to undo everything done in step 2. Usually this means disconnecting signal handlers. Once this signal has been called, the listitem will no longer be used in a list widget.

  4. gtk.SignalListItemFactory::bind and gtk.SignalListItemFactory::unbind may be emitted multiple times again to bind the listitem for use with new items. By reusing listitems, potentially costly setup can be avoided. However, it means code needs to make sure to properly clean up the listitem in step 3 so that no information from the previous use leaks into the next use.

5. gtk.SignalListItemFactory::teardown is emitted to allow undoing the effects of gtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup. After this signal was emitted on a listitem, the listitem will be destroyed and not be used again.

Note that during the signal emissions, changing properties on the ListItems passed will not trigger notify signals as the listitem's notifications are frozen. See g_object_freeze_notify() for details.

For tracking changes in other properties in the GtkListItem, the ::notify signal is recommended. The signal can be connected in the gtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup signal and removed again during gtk.SignalListItemFactory::teardown.

func NewSignalListItemFactory 

func NewSignalListItemFactory() *SignalListItemFactory

NewSignalListItemFactory creates a new GtkSignalListItemFactory.

You need to connect signal handlers before you use it.

The function returns the following values:

  • signalListItemFactory: new GtkSignalListItemFactory.

func (*SignalListItemFactory) ConnectBind 

func (v *SignalListItemFactory) ConnectBind(f func(listitem *ListItem)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBind is emitted when a new gtk.ListItem:item has been set on the listitem and should be bound for use.

After this signal was emitted, the listitem might be shown in a gtk.ListView or other list widget.

The gtk.SignalListItemFactory::unbind signal is the opposite of this signal and can be used to undo everything done in this signal.

func (*SignalListItemFactory) ConnectSetup 

func (v *SignalListItemFactory) ConnectSetup(f func(listitem *ListItem)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSetup is emitted when a new listitem has been created and needs to be setup for use.

It is the first signal emitted for every listitem.

The gtk.SignalListItemFactory::teardown signal is the opposite of this signal and can be used to undo everything done in this signal.

func (*SignalListItemFactory) ConnectTeardown 

func (v *SignalListItemFactory) ConnectTeardown(f func(listitem *ListItem)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTeardown is emitted when a listitem is about to be destroyed.

It is the last signal ever emitted for this listitem.

This signal is the opposite of the gtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup signal and should be used to undo everything done in that signal.

func (*SignalListItemFactory) ConnectUnbind 

func (v *SignalListItemFactory) ConnectUnbind(f func(listitem *ListItem)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnbind is emitted when a listitem has been removed from use in a list widget and its new gtk.ListItem:item is about to be unset.

This signal is the opposite of the gtk.SignalListItemFactory::bind signal and should be used to undo everything done in that signal.

type SingleSelection 

type SingleSelection struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	SelectionModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SingleSelection: GtkSingleSelection is a GtkSelectionModel that allows selecting a single item.

Note that the selection is *persistent* -- if the selected item is removed and re-added in the same ::items-changed emission, it stays selected. In particular, this means that changing the sort order of an underlying sort model will preserve the selection.

func NewSingleSelection 

func NewSingleSelection(model gio.ListModeller) *SingleSelection

NewSingleSelection creates a new selection to handle model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to manage, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • singleSelection: new GtkSingleSelection.

func (*SingleSelection) Autoselect 

func (self *SingleSelection) Autoselect() bool

Autoselect checks if autoselect has been enabled or disabled via gtk_single_selection_set_autoselect().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if autoselect is enabled.

func (*SingleSelection) CanUnselect 

func (self *SingleSelection) CanUnselect() bool

CanUnselect: if TRUE, gtk_selection_model_unselect_item() is supported and allows unselecting the selected item.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE to support unselecting.

func (*SingleSelection) Model 

func (self *SingleSelection) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model that self is wrapping.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: model being wrapped.

func (*SingleSelection) Selected 

func (self *SingleSelection) Selected() uint

Selected gets the position of the selected item.

If no item is selected, GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: position of the selected item.

func (*SingleSelection) SelectedItem 

func (self *SingleSelection) SelectedItem() *coreglib.Object

SelectedItem gets the selected item.

If no item is selected, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): selected item.

func (*SingleSelection) SetAutoselect 

func (self *SingleSelection) SetAutoselect(autoselect bool)

SetAutoselect enables or disables autoselect.

If autoselect is TRUE, self will enforce that an item is always selected. It will select a new item when the currently selected item is deleted and it will disallow unselecting the current item.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • autoselect: TRUE to always select an item.

func (*SingleSelection) SetCanUnselect 

func (self *SingleSelection) SetCanUnselect(canUnselect bool)

SetCanUnselect: if TRUE, unselecting the current item via gtk_selection_model_unselect_item() is supported.

Note that setting gtk.SingleSelection:autoselect will cause unselecting to not work, so it practically makes no sense to set both at the same time the same time.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canUnselect: TRUE to allow unselecting.

func (*SingleSelection) SetModel 

func (self *SingleSelection) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model that self should wrap.

If model is NULL, self will be empty.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GListModel to wrap.

func (*SingleSelection) SetSelected 

func (self *SingleSelection) SetSelected(position uint)

SetSelected selects the item at the given position.

If the list does not have an item at position or GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION is given, the behavior depends on the value of the gtk.SingleSelection:autoselect property: If it is set, no change will occur and the old item will stay selected. If it is unset, the selection will be unset and no item will be selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: item to select or GTK_INVALID_LIST_POSITION.

type SingleSelectionClass added in v0.0.5 

type SingleSelectionClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SingleSelectionClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SingleSelectionOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type SingleSelectionOverrides struct {
}

SingleSelectionOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type SizeGroup 

type SizeGroup struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SizeGroup: GtkSizeGroup groups widgets together so they all request the same size.

This is typically useful when you want a column of widgets to have the same size, but you can’t use a GtkGrid.

In detail, the size requested for each widget in a GtkSizeGroup is the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode of the size group (see gtk.SizeGroup.SetMode()) determines whether this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.

Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in a GtkSizeGroup to actually be the same size, you need to pack them in such a way that they get the size they request and not more.

GtkSizeGroup objects are referenced by each widget in the size group, so once you have added all widgets to a GtkSizeGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the size group with g_object_unref(). If the widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the size group and drop their references on the size group; when all widgets have been removed, the size group will be freed.

Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK will compute the horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type GTK_SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL or GTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH, and the vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type GTK_SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL or GTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH.

Note that only non-contextual sizes of every widget are ever consulted by size groups (since size groups have no knowledge of what size a widget will be allocated in one dimension, it cannot derive how much height a widget will receive for a given width). When grouping widgets that trade height for width in mode GTK_SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL or GTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH: the height for the minimum width will be the requested height for all widgets in the group. The same is of course true when horizontally grouping width for height widgets.

Widgets that trade height-for-width should set a reasonably large minimum width by way of gtk.Label:width-chars for instance. Widgets with static sizes as well as widgets that grow (such as ellipsizing text) need no such considerations.

GtkSizeGroup as GtkBuildable

Size groups can be specified in a UI definition by placing an <object> element with class="GtkSizeGroup" somewhere in the UI definition. The widgets that belong to the size group are specified by a <widgets> element that may contain multiple <widget> elements, one for each member of the size group. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkSizeGroup: 

<object class="GtkSizeGroup">
  <property name="mode">horizontal</property>
  <widgets>
    <widget name="radio1"/>
    <widget name="radio2"/>
  </widgets>
</object>.

func NewSizeGroup 

func NewSizeGroup(mode SizeGroupMode) *SizeGroup

NewSizeGroup: create a new GtkSizeGroup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode for the new size group.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeGroup: newly created GtkSizeGroup.

func (*SizeGroup) AddWidget 

func (sizeGroup *SizeGroup) AddWidget(widget Widgetter)

AddWidget adds a widget to a GtkSizeGroup.

In the future, the requisition of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group. Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk.SizeGroup.SetMode().

When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will be removed from the size group.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget to add.

func (*SizeGroup) Mode 

func (sizeGroup *SizeGroup) Mode() SizeGroupMode

Mode gets the current mode of the size group.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeGroupMode: current mode of the size group.

func (*SizeGroup) RemoveWidget 

func (sizeGroup *SizeGroup) RemoveWidget(widget Widgetter)

RemoveWidget removes a widget from a GtkSizeGroup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget: GtkWidget to remove.

func (*SizeGroup) SetMode 

func (sizeGroup *SizeGroup) SetMode(mode SizeGroupMode)

SetMode sets the GtkSizeGroupMode of the size group.

The mode of the size group determines whether the widgets in the size group should all have the same horizontal requisition (GTK_SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL) all have the same vertical requisition (GTK_SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL), or should all have the same requisition in both directions (GTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode to set for the size group.

func (*SizeGroup) Widgets 

func (sizeGroup *SizeGroup) Widgets() []Widgetter

Widgets returns the list of widgets associated with size_group.

The function returns the following values:

  • sList: GSList of widgets. The list is owned by GTK and should not be modified.

type SizeGroupMode 

type SizeGroupMode C.gint

SizeGroupMode: mode of the size group determines the directions in which the size group affects the requested sizes of its component widgets. 

const (
	// SizeGroupNone: group has no effect.
	SizeGroupNone SizeGroupMode = iota
	// SizeGroupHorizontal: group affects horizontal requisition.
	SizeGroupHorizontal
	// SizeGroupVertical: group affects vertical requisition.
	SizeGroupVertical
	// SizeGroupBoth: group affects both horizontal and vertical requisition.
	SizeGroupBoth
)

func (SizeGroupMode) String 

func (s SizeGroupMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for SizeGroupMode.

type SizeRequestMode 

type SizeRequestMode C.gint

SizeRequestMode specifies a preference for height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management. 

const (
	// SizeRequestHeightForWidth: prefer height-for-width geometry management.
	SizeRequestHeightForWidth SizeRequestMode = iota
	// SizeRequestWidthForHeight: prefer width-for-height geometry management.
	SizeRequestWidthForHeight
	// SizeRequestConstantSize: don’t trade height-for-width or
	// width-for-height.
	SizeRequestConstantSize
)

func (SizeRequestMode) String 

func (s SizeRequestMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for SizeRequestMode.

type SliceListModel 

type SliceListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SliceListModel: GtkSliceListModel is a list model that presents a slice of another model.

This is useful when implementing paging by setting the size to the number of elements per page and updating the offset whenever a different page is opened.

func NewSliceListModel 

func NewSliceListModel(model gio.ListModeller, offset, size uint) *SliceListModel

NewSliceListModel creates a new slice model.

It presents the slice from offset to offset + size of the given model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to use, or NULL.
  • offset of the slice.
  • size: maximum size of the slice.

The function returns the following values:

  • sliceListModel: new GtkSliceListModel.

func (*SliceListModel) Model 

func (self *SliceListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model that is currently being used or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model in use.

func (*SliceListModel) Offset 

func (self *SliceListModel) Offset() uint

Offset gets the offset set via gtk_slice_list_model_set_offset().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: offset.

func (*SliceListModel) SetModel 

func (self *SliceListModel) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model to show a slice of.

The model's item type must conform to self's item type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be sliced.

func (*SliceListModel) SetOffset 

func (self *SliceListModel) SetOffset(offset uint)

SetOffset sets the offset into the original model for this slice.

If the offset is too large for the sliced model, self will end up empty.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • offset: new offset to use.

func (*SliceListModel) SetSize 

func (self *SliceListModel) SetSize(size uint)

SetSize sets the maximum size. self will never have more items than size.

It can however have fewer items if the offset is too large or the model sliced from doesn't have enough items.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • size: maximum size.

func (*SliceListModel) Size 

func (self *SliceListModel) Size() uint

Size gets the size set via gtk_slice_list_model_set_size().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: size.

type SliceListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type SliceListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SliceListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SliceListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type SliceListModelOverrides struct {
}

SliceListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Snapshot 

type Snapshot struct {
	gdk.Snapshot
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Snapshot: GtkSnapshot assists in creating GskRenderNodes for widgets.

It functions in a similar way to a cairo context, and maintains a stack of render nodes and their associated transformations.

The node at the top of the stack is the the one that gtk_snapshot_append_… functions operate on. Use the gtk_snapshot_push_… functions and gtk_snapshot_pop() to change the current node.

The typical way to obtain a GtkSnapshot object is as an argument to the GtkWidgetClass.snapshot() vfunc. If you need to create your own GtkSnapshot, use gtk.Snapshot.New.

func NewSnapshot 

func NewSnapshot() *Snapshot

NewSnapshot creates a new GtkSnapshot.

The function returns the following values:

  • snapshot: newly-allocated GtkSnapshot.

func (*Snapshot) AppendBorder 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendBorder(outline *gsk.RoundedRect, borderWidth [4]float32, borderColor [4]gdk.RGBA)

AppendBorder appends a stroked border rectangle inside the given outline.

The four sides of the border can have different widths and colors.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • outline: GskRoundedRect describing the outline of the border.
  • borderWidth: stroke width of the border on the top, right, bottom and left side respectively.
  • borderColor: color used on the top, right, bottom and left side.

func (*Snapshot) AppendCairo 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendCairo(bounds *graphene.Rect) *cairo.Context

AppendCairo creates a new GskCairoNode and appends it to the current render node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds for the new node.

The function returns the following values:

  • context: cairo_t suitable for drawing the contents of the newly created render node.

func (*Snapshot) AppendColor 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendColor(color *gdk.RGBA, bounds *graphene.Rect)

AppendColor creates a new render node drawing the color into the given bounds and appends it to the current render node of snapshot.

You should try to avoid calling this function if color is transparent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • color: GdkRGBA to draw.
  • bounds for the new node.

func (*Snapshot) AppendConicGradient 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendConicGradient(bounds *graphene.Rect, center *graphene.Point, rotation float32, stops []gsk.ColorStop)

AppendConicGradient appends a conic gradient node with the given stops to snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to render the gradient into.
  • center point of the conic gradient.
  • rotation: clockwise rotation in degrees of the starting angle. 0 means the starting angle is the top.
  • stops: pointer to an array of GskColorStop defining the gradient.

func (*Snapshot) AppendInsetShadow 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendInsetShadow(outline *gsk.RoundedRect, color *gdk.RGBA, dx, dy, spread, blurRadius float32)

AppendInsetShadow appends an inset shadow into the box given by outline.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • outline of the region surrounded by shadow.
  • color of the shadow.
  • dx: horizontal offset of shadow.
  • dy: vertical offset of shadow.
  • spread: how far the shadow spreads towards the inside.
  • blurRadius: how much blur to apply to the shadow.

func (*Snapshot) AppendLayout 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendLayout(layout *pango.Layout, color *gdk.RGBA)

The function takes the following parameters:

  • layout
  • color

func (*Snapshot) AppendLinearGradient 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendLinearGradient(bounds *graphene.Rect, startPoint, endPoint *graphene.Point, stops []gsk.ColorStop)

AppendLinearGradient appends a linear gradient node with the given stops to snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to render the linear gradient into.
  • startPoint: point at which the linear gradient will begin.
  • endPoint: point at which the linear gradient will finish.
  • stops: pointer to an array of GskColorStop defining the gradient.

func (*Snapshot) AppendNode 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendNode(node gsk.RenderNoder)

AppendNode appends node to the current render node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

If snapshot does not have a current node yet, node will become the initial node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • node: RenderNode.

func (*Snapshot) AppendOutsetShadow 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendOutsetShadow(outline *gsk.RoundedRect, color *gdk.RGBA, dx, dy, spread, blurRadius float32)

AppendOutsetShadow appends an outset shadow node around the box given by outline.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • outline of the region surrounded by shadow.
  • color of the shadow.
  • dx: horizontal offset of shadow.
  • dy: vertical offset of shadow.
  • spread: how far the shadow spreads towards the outside.
  • blurRadius: how much blur to apply to the shadow.

func (*Snapshot) AppendRadialGradient 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendRadialGradient(bounds *graphene.Rect, center *graphene.Point, hradius, vradius, start, end float32, stops []gsk.ColorStop)

AppendRadialGradient appends a radial gradient node with the given stops to snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to render the readial gradient into.
  • center point for the radial gradient.
  • hradius: horizontal radius.
  • vradius: vertical radius.
  • start position (on the horizontal axis).
  • end position (on the horizontal axis).
  • stops: pointer to an array of GskColorStop defining the gradient.

func (*Snapshot) AppendRepeatingLinearGradient 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendRepeatingLinearGradient(bounds *graphene.Rect, startPoint, endPoint *graphene.Point, stops []gsk.ColorStop)

AppendRepeatingLinearGradient appends a repeating linear gradient node with the given stops to snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to render the linear gradient into.
  • startPoint: point at which the linear gradient will begin.
  • endPoint: point at which the linear gradient will finish.
  • stops: pointer to an array of GskColorStop defining the gradient.

func (*Snapshot) AppendRepeatingRadialGradient 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendRepeatingRadialGradient(bounds *graphene.Rect, center *graphene.Point, hradius, vradius, start, end float32, stops []gsk.ColorStop)

AppendRepeatingRadialGradient appends a repeating radial gradient node with the given stops to snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to render the readial gradient into.
  • center point for the radial gradient.
  • hradius: horizontal radius.
  • vradius: vertical radius.
  • start position (on the horizontal axis).
  • end position (on the horizontal axis).
  • stops: pointer to an array of GskColorStop defining the gradient.

func (*Snapshot) AppendTexture 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) AppendTexture(texture gdk.Texturer, bounds *graphene.Rect)

AppendTexture creates a new render node drawing the texture into the given bounds and appends it to the current render node of snapshot.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • texture: GdkTexture to render.
  • bounds for the new node.

func (*Snapshot) GLShaderPopTexture 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) GLShaderPopTexture()

GLShaderPopTexture removes the top element from the stack of render nodes and adds it to the nearest GskGLShaderNode below it.

This must be called the same number of times as the number of textures is needed for the shader in gtk.Snapshot.PushGLShader().

func (*Snapshot) Perspective 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Perspective(depth float32)

Perspective applies a perspective projection transform.

See gsk.Transform.Perspective() for a discussion on the details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • depth: distance of the z=0 plane.

func (*Snapshot) Pop 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Pop()

Pop removes the top element from the stack of render nodes, and appends it to the node underneath it.

func (*Snapshot) PushBlend 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushBlend(blendMode gsk.BlendMode)

PushBlend blends together two images with the given blend mode.

Until the first call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop(), the bottom image for the blend operation will be recorded. After that call, the top image to be blended will be recorded until the second call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

Calling this function requires two subsequent calls to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • blendMode: blend mode to use.

func (*Snapshot) PushBlur 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushBlur(radius float64)

PushBlur blurs an image.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • radius: blur radius to use.

func (*Snapshot) PushClip 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushClip(bounds *graphene.Rect)

PushClip clips an image to a rectangle.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rectangle to clip to.

func (*Snapshot) PushColorMatrix 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushColorMatrix(colorMatrix *graphene.Matrix, colorOffset *graphene.Vec4)

PushColorMatrix modifies the colors of an image by applying an affine transformation in RGB space.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • colorMatrix: color matrix to use.
  • colorOffset: color offset to use.

func (*Snapshot) PushCrossFade 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushCrossFade(progress float64)

PushCrossFade snapshots a cross-fade operation between two images with the given progress.

Until the first call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop(), the start image will be snapshot. After that call, the end image will be recorded until the second call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

Calling this function requires two subsequent calls to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • progress between 0.0 and 1.0.

func (*Snapshot) PushGLShader 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushGLShader(shader *gsk.GLShader, bounds *graphene.Rect, takeArgs *glib.Bytes)

PushGLShader: push a GskGLShaderNode.

The node uses the given gsk.GLShader and uniform values Additionally this takes a list of n_children other nodes which will be passed to the GskGLShaderNode.

The take_args argument is a block of data to use for uniform arguments, as per types and offsets defined by the shader. Normally this is generated by gsk.GLShader.FormatArgs() or gsk.ShaderArgsBuilder.

The snapshotter takes ownership of take_args, so the caller should not free it after this.

If the renderer doesn't support GL shaders, or if there is any problem when compiling the shader, then the node will draw pink. You should use gsk.GLShader.Compile() to ensure the shader will work for the renderer before using it.

If the shader requires textures (see gsk.GLShader.GetNTextures()), then it is expected that you call gtk.Snapshot.GLShaderPopTexture() the number of times that are required. Each of these calls will generate a node that is added as a child to the GskGLShaderNode, which in turn will render these offscreen and pass as a texture to the shader.

Once all textures (if any) are pop:ed, you must call the regular gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

If you want to use pre-existing textures as input to the shader rather than rendering new ones, use gtk.Snapshot.AppendTexture() to push a texture node. These will be used directly rather than being re-rendered.

For details on how to write shaders, see gsk.GLShader.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • shader: code to run.
  • bounds: rectangle to render into.
  • takeArgs: data block with arguments for the shader.

func (*Snapshot) PushOpacity 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushOpacity(opacity float64)

PushOpacity modifies the opacity of an image.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • opacity to use.

func (*Snapshot) PushRepeat 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushRepeat(bounds, childBounds *graphene.Rect)

PushRepeat creates a node that repeats the child node.

The child is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds within which to repeat.
  • childBounds (optional) bounds of the child or NULL to use the full size of the collected child node.

func (*Snapshot) PushRoundedClip 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushRoundedClip(bounds *gsk.RoundedRect)

PushRoundedClip clips an image to a rounded rectangle.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bounds: rounded rectangle to clip to.

func (*Snapshot) PushShadow 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) PushShadow(shadow *gsk.Shadow, nShadows uint)

PushShadow applies a shadow to an image.

The image is recorded until the next call to gtk.Snapshot.Pop().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • shadow: first shadow specification.
  • nShadows: number of shadow specifications.

func (*Snapshot) RenderBackground 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) RenderBackground(context *StyleContext, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderBackground creates a render node for the CSS background according to context, and appends it to the current node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: GtkStyleContext to use.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func (*Snapshot) RenderFocus 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) RenderFocus(context *StyleContext, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderFocus creates a render node for the focus outline according to context, and appends it to the current node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: GtkStyleContext to use.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func (*Snapshot) RenderFrame 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) RenderFrame(context *StyleContext, x, y, width, height float64)

RenderFrame creates a render node for the CSS border according to context, and appends it to the current node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: GtkStyleContext to use.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • width: rectangle width.
  • height: rectangle height.

func (*Snapshot) RenderInsertionCursor 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) RenderInsertionCursor(context *StyleContext, x, y float64, layout *pango.Layout, index int, direction pango.Direction)

RenderInsertionCursor draws a text caret using snapshot at the specified index of layout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: GtkStyleContext.
  • x: x origin.
  • y: y origin.
  • layout: PangoLayout of the text.
  • index in the Layout.
  • direction of the text.

func (*Snapshot) RenderLayout 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) RenderLayout(context *StyleContext, x, y float64, layout *pango.Layout)

RenderLayout creates a render node for rendering layout according to the style information in context, and appends it to the current node of snapshot, without changing the current node.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • context: GtkStyleContext to use.
  • x: x origin of the rectangle.
  • y: y origin of the rectangle.
  • layout to render.

func (*Snapshot) Restore 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Restore()

Restore restores snapshot to the state saved by a preceding call to gtk_snapshot_save() and removes that state from the stack of saved states.

func (*Snapshot) Rotate 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Rotate(angle float32)

Rotate rotates @snapshot's coordinate system by angle degrees in 2D space - or in 3D speak, rotates around the Z axis.

To rotate around other axes, use gsk.Transform.Rotate3D().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • angle: rotation angle, in degrees (clockwise).

func (*Snapshot) Rotate3D 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Rotate3D(angle float32, axis *graphene.Vec3)

Rotate3D rotates snapshot's coordinate system by angle degrees around axis.

For a rotation in 2D space, use gsk.Transform.Rotate().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • angle: rotation angle, in degrees (clockwise).
  • axis: rotation axis.

func (*Snapshot) Save 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Save()

Save makes a copy of the current state of snapshot and saves it on an internal stack.

When gtk.Snapshot.Restore() is called, snapshot will be restored to the saved state. Multiple calls to gtk_snapshot_save() and gtk_snapshot_restore() can be nested; each call to gtk_snapshot_restore() restores the state from the matching paired gtk_snapshot_save().

It is necessary to clear all saved states with corresponding calls to gtk_snapshot_restore().

func (*Snapshot) Scale 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Scale(factorX, factorY float32)

Scale scales snapshot's coordinate system in 2-dimensional space by the given factors.

Use gtk.Snapshot.Scale3D() to scale in all 3 dimensions.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factorX: scaling factor on the X axis.
  • factorY: scaling factor on the Y axis.

func (*Snapshot) Scale3D 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Scale3D(factorX, factorY, factorZ float32)

Scale3D scales snapshot's coordinate system by the given factors.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • factorX: scaling factor on the X axis.
  • factorY: scaling factor on the Y axis.
  • factorZ: scaling factor on the Z axis.

func (*Snapshot) ToNode 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) ToNode() gsk.RenderNoder

ToNode returns the render node that was constructed by snapshot.

After calling this function, it is no longer possible to add more nodes to snapshot. The only function that should be called after this is g_object_unref().

The function returns the following values:

  • renderNode: constructed GskRenderNode.

func (*Snapshot) ToPaintable 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) ToPaintable(size *graphene.Size) *gdk.Paintable

ToPaintable returns a paintable encapsulating the render node that was constructed by snapshot.

After calling this function, it is no longer possible to add more nodes to snapshot. The only function that should be called after this is g_object_unref().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • size (optional) of the resulting paintable or NULL to use the bounds of the snapshot.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable: new Paintable.

func (*Snapshot) Transform 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Transform(transform *gsk.Transform)

Transform transforms snapshot's coordinate system with the given transform.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • transform (optional) to apply.

func (*Snapshot) TransformMatrix 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) TransformMatrix(matrix *graphene.Matrix)

TransformMatrix transforms snapshot's coordinate system with the given matrix.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • matrix to multiply the transform with.

func (*Snapshot) Translate 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Translate(point *graphene.Point)

Translate translates snapshot's coordinate system by point in 2-dimensional space.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • point to translate the snapshot by.

func (*Snapshot) Translate3D 

func (snapshot *Snapshot) Translate3D(point *graphene.Point3D)

Translate3D translates snapshot's coordinate system by point.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • point to translate the snapshot by.

type SortListModel 

type SortListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SortListModel: GtkSortListModel is a list model that sorts the elements of the underlying model according to a GtkSorter.

The model can be set up to do incremental sorting, so that sorting long lists doesn't block the UI. See gtk.SortListModel.SetIncremental() for details.

GtkSortListModel is a generic model and because of that it cannot take advantage of any external knowledge when sorting. If you run into performance issues with GtkSortListModel, it is strongly recommended that you write your own sorting list model.

func NewSortListModel 

func NewSortListModel(model gio.ListModeller, sorter *Sorter) *SortListModel

NewSortListModel creates a new sort list model that uses the sorter to sort model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to sort, or NULL.
  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter to sort model with, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • sortListModel: new GtkSortListModel.

func (*SortListModel) Incremental 

func (self *SortListModel) Incremental() bool

Incremental returns whether incremental sorting is enabled.

See gtk.SortListModel.SetIncremental().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if incremental sorting is enabled.

func (*SortListModel) Model 

func (self *SortListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the model currently sorted or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model that gets sorted.

func (*SortListModel) Pending 

func (self *SortListModel) Pending() uint

Pending estimates progress of an ongoing sorting operation.

The estimate is the number of items that would still need to be sorted to finish the sorting operation if this was a linear algorithm. So this number is not related to how many items are already correctly sorted.

If you want to estimate the progress, you can use code like this: 

pending = gtk_sort_list_model_get_pending (self);
model = gtk_sort_list_model_get_model (self);
progress = 1.0 - pending / (double) MAX (1, g_list_model_get_n_items (model));

If no sort operation is ongoing - in particular when gtk.SortListModel:incremental is FALSE - this function returns 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint progress estimate of remaining items to sort.

func (*SortListModel) SetIncremental 

func (self *SortListModel) SetIncremental(incremental bool)

SetIncremental sets the sort model to do an incremental sort.

When incremental sorting is enabled, the GtkSortListModel will not do a complete sort immediately, but will instead queue an idle handler that incrementally sorts the items towards their correct position. This of course means that items do not instantly appear in the right place. It also means that the total sorting time is a lot slower.

When your filter blocks the UI while sorting, you might consider turning this on. Depending on your model and sorters, this may become interesting around 10,000 to 100,000 items.

By default, incremental sorting is disabled.

See gtk.SortListModel.GetPending() for progress information about an ongoing incremental sorting operation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • incremental: TRUE to sort incrementally.

func (*SortListModel) SetModel 

func (self *SortListModel) SetModel(model gio.ListModeller)

SetModel sets the model to be sorted.

The model's item type must conform to the item type of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional) to be sorted.

func (*SortListModel) SetSorter 

func (self *SortListModel) SetSorter(sorter *Sorter)

SetSorter sets a new sorter on self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter to sort model with.

func (*SortListModel) Sorter 

func (self *SortListModel) Sorter() *Sorter

Sorter gets the sorter that is used to sort self.

The function returns the following values:

  • sorter (optional) of #self.

type SortListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type SortListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SortListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SortListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type SortListModelOverrides struct {
}

SortListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type SortType 

type SortType C.gint

SortType determines the direction of a sort. 

const (
	// SortAscending: sorting is in ascending order.
	SortAscending SortType = iota
	// SortDescending: sorting is in descending order.
	SortDescending
)

func (SortType) String 

func (s SortType) String() string

String returns the name in string for SortType.

type Sorter 

type Sorter struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Sorter: GtkSorter is an object to describe sorting criteria.

Its primary user is gtk.SortListModel

The model will use a sorter to determine the order in which its items should appear by calling gtk.Sorter.Compare() for pairs of items.

Sorters may change their sorting behavior through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the gtk.Sorter::changed signal to notify that the sort order is no longer valid and should be updated by calling gtk_sorter_compare() again.

GTK provides various pre-made sorter implementations for common sorting operations. gtk.ColumnView has built-in support for sorting lists via the gtk.ColumnViewColumn:sorter property, where the user can change the sorting by clicking on list headers.

Of course, in particular for large lists, it is also possible to subclass GtkSorter and provide one's own sorter.

func (*Sorter) Changed 

func (self *Sorter) Changed(change SorterChange)

Changed emits the gtk.Sorter::changed signal to notify all users of the sorter that it has changed.

Users of the sorter should then update the sort order via gtk_sorter_compare().

Depending on the change parameter, it may be possible to update the sort order without a full resorting. Refer to the gtk.SorterChange documentation for details.

This function is intended for implementors of GtkSorter subclasses and should not be called from other functions.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • change: how the sorter changed.

func (*Sorter) Compare 

func (self *Sorter) Compare(item1, item2 *coreglib.Object) Ordering

Compare compares two given items according to the sort order implemented by the sorter.

Sorters implement a partial order:

* It is reflexive, ie a = a * It is antisymmetric, ie if a < b and b < a, then a = b * It is transitive, ie given any 3 items with a ≤ b and b ≤ c, then a ≤ c

The sorter may signal it conforms to additional constraints via the return value of gtk.Sorter.GetOrder().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • item1: first item to compare.
  • item2: second item to compare.

The function returns the following values:

  • ordering: GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL if item1 == item2, GTK_ORDERING_SMALLER if item1 < item2, GTK_ORDERING_LARGER if item1 > item2.

func (*Sorter) ConnectChanged 

func (self *Sorter) ConnectChanged(f func(change SorterChange)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted whenever the sorter changed.

Users of the sorter should then update the sort order again via gtk_sorter_compare().

gtk.SortListModel handles this signal automatically.

Depending on the change parameter, it may be possible to update the sort order without a full resorting. Refer to the gtk.SorterChange documentation for details.

func (*Sorter) Order 

func (self *Sorter) Order() SorterOrder

Order gets the order that self conforms to.

See gtk.SorterOrder for details of the possible return values.

This function is intended to allow optimizations.

The function returns the following values:

  • sorterOrder: order.

type SorterChange 

type SorterChange C.gint

SorterChange describes changes in a sorter in more detail and allows users to optimize resorting. 

const (
	// SorterChangeDifferent: sorter change cannot be described by any of the
	// other enumeration values.
	SorterChangeDifferent SorterChange = iota
	// SorterChangeInverted: sort order was inverted. Comparisons that returned
	// GTK_ORDERING_SMALLER now return GTK_ORDERING_LARGER and vice versa.
	// Other comparisons return the same values as before.
	SorterChangeInverted
	// SorterChangeLessStrict: sorter is less strict: Comparisons may now return
	// GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL that did not do so before.
	SorterChangeLessStrict
	// SorterChangeMoreStrict: sorter is more strict: Comparisons that did
	// return GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL may not do so anymore.
	SorterChangeMoreStrict
)

func (SorterChange) String 

func (s SorterChange) String() string

String returns the name in string for SorterChange.

type SorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type SorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SorterClass: virtual table for GtkSorter.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type SorterOrder 

type SorterOrder C.gint

SorterOrder describes the type of order that a GtkSorter may produce. 

const (
	// SorterOrderPartial: partial order. Any Ordering is possible.
	SorterOrderPartial SorterOrder = iota
	// SorterOrderNone: no order, all elements are considered equal.
	// gtk_sorter_compare() will only return GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL.
	SorterOrderNone
	// SorterOrderTotal: total order. gtk_sorter_compare() will only return
	// GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL if an item is compared with itself. Two different
	// items will never cause this value to be returned.
	SorterOrderTotal
)

func (SorterOrder) String 

func (s SorterOrder) String() string

String returns the name in string for SorterOrder.

type SorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type SorterOverrides struct {
	// Compare compares two given items according to the sort order implemented
	// by the sorter.
	//
	// Sorters implement a partial order:
	//
	// * It is reflexive, ie a = a * It is antisymmetric, ie if a < b and b < a,
	// then a = b * It is transitive, ie given any 3 items with a ≤ b and b ≤ c,
	// then a ≤ c
	//
	// The sorter may signal it conforms to additional constraints via the
	// return value of gtk.Sorter.GetOrder().
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - item1 (optional): first item to compare.
	//   - item2 (optional): second item to compare.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ordering: GTK_ORDERING_EQUAL if item1 == item2, GTK_ORDERING_SMALLER
	//     if item1 < item2, GTK_ORDERING_LARGER if item1 > item2.
	//
	Compare func(item1, item2 *coreglib.Object) Ordering
	// Order gets the order that self conforms to.
	//
	// See gtk.SorterOrder for details of the possible return values.
	//
	// This function is intended to allow optimizations.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - sorterOrder: order.
	//
	Order func() SorterOrder
}

SorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type SpinButton 

type SpinButton struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned
	Accessible
	Buildable
	CellEditable
	ConstraintTarget
	EditableTextWidget
	Orientable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

SpinButton: GtkSpinButton is an ideal way to allow the user to set the value of some attribute.

!An example GtkSpinButton (spinbutton.png)

Rather than having to directly type a number into a GtkEntry, GtkSpinButton allows the user to click on one of two arrows to increment or decrement the displayed value. A value can still be typed in, with the bonus that it can be checked to ensure it is in a given range.

The main properties of a GtkSpinButton are through an adjustment. See the gtk.Adjustment documentation for more details about an adjustment's properties.

Note that GtkSpinButton will by default make its entry large enough to accommodate the lower and upper bounds of the adjustment. If this is not desired, the automatic sizing can be turned off by explicitly setting gtk.Editable:width-chars to a value != -1.

Using a GtkSpinButton to get an integer 

// Provides a function to retrieve an integer value from a GtkSpinButton
// and creates a spin button to model percentage values.

int
grab_int_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
                gpointer       user_data)
{
  return gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (button);
}

void
create_integer_spin_button (void)
{

  GtkWidget *window, *button;
  GtkAdjustment *adjustment;

  adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (50.0, 0.0, 100.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0);

  window = gtk_window_new ();

  // creates the spinbutton, with no decimal places
  button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 1.0, 0);
  gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button);

  gtk_widget_show (window);
}

Using a GtkSpinButton to get a floating point value 

// Provides a function to retrieve a floating point value from a
// GtkSpinButton, and creates a high precision spin button.

float
grab_float_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
                  gpointer       user_data)
{
  return gtk_spin_button_get_value (button);
}

void
create_floating_spin_button (void)
{
  GtkWidget *window, *button;
  GtkAdjustment *adjustment;

  adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (2.500, 0.0, 5.0, 0.001, 0.1, 0.0);

  window = gtk_window_new ();

  // creates the spinbutton, with three decimal places
  button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 0.001, 3);
  gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button);

  gtk_widget_show (window);
}

CSS nodes 

spinbutton.horizontal
├── text
│    ├── undershoot.left
│    ╰── undershoot.right
├── button.down
╰── button.up

spinbutton.vertical
├── button.up
├── text
│    ├── undershoot.left
│    ╰── undershoot.right
╰── button.down

GtkSpinButtons main CSS node has the name spinbutton. It creates subnodes for the entry and the two buttons, with these names. The button nodes have the style classes .up and .down. The GtkText subnodes (if present) are put below the text node. The orientation of the spin button is reflected in the .vertical or .horizontal style class on the main node.

Accessiblity

GtkSpinButton uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SPIN_BUTTON role.

func NewSpinButton 

func NewSpinButton(adjustment *Adjustment, climbRate float64, digits uint) *SpinButton

NewSpinButton creates a new GtkSpinButton.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment that this spin button should use, or NULL.
  • climbRate specifies by how much the rate of change in the value will accelerate if you continue to hold down an up/down button or arrow key.
  • digits: number of decimal places to display.

The function returns the following values:

  • spinButton: new GtkSpinButton.

func NewSpinButtonWithRange 

func NewSpinButtonWithRange(min, max, step float64) *SpinButton

NewSpinButtonWithRange creates a new GtkSpinButton with the given properties.

This is a convenience constructor that allows creation of a numeric GtkSpinButton without manually creating an adjustment. The value is initially set to the minimum value and a page increment of 10 * step is the default. The precision of the spin button is equivalent to the precision of step.

Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if step is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your needs, use gtk.SpinButton.SetDigits() to correct it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • min: minimum allowable value.
  • max: maximum allowable value.
  • step: increment added or subtracted by spinning the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • spinButton: new GtkSpinButton.

func (*SpinButton) Adjustment 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Adjustment() *Adjustment

Adjustment: get the adjustment associated with a GtkSpinButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • adjustment: GtkAdjustment of spin_button.

func (*SpinButton) ClimbRate 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ClimbRate() float64

ClimbRate returns the acceleration rate for repeated changes.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: acceleration rate.

func (*SpinButton) Configure 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Configure(adjustment *Adjustment, climbRate float64, digits uint)

Configure changes the properties of an existing spin button.

The adjustment, climb rate, and number of decimal places are updated accordingly.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment (optional): GtkAdjustment to replace the spin button’s existing adjustment, or NULL to leave its current adjustment unchanged.
  • climbRate: new climb rate.
  • digits: number of decimal places to display in the spin button.

func (*SpinButton) ConnectChangeValue 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ConnectChangeValue(f func(scroll ScrollType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChangeValue is emitted when the user initiates a value change.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal are Up/Down and PageUp/PageDown.

func (*SpinButton) ConnectOutput 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ConnectOutput(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectOutput is emitted to tweak the formatting of the value for display. 

// show leading zeros
static gboolean
on_output (GtkSpinButton *spin,
           gpointer       data)
{
   GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
   char *text;
   int value;

   adjustment = gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment (spin);
   value = (int)gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
   text = g_strdup_printf ("02d", value);
   gtk_spin_button_set_text (spin, text):
   g_free (text);

   return TRUE;
}.

func (*SpinButton) ConnectValueChanged 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ConnectValueChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectValueChanged is emitted when the value is changed.

Also see the gtk.SpinButton::output signal.

func (*SpinButton) ConnectWrapped 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ConnectWrapped(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectWrapped is emitted right after the spinbutton wraps from its maximum to its minimum value or vice-versa.

func (*SpinButton) Digits 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Digits() uint

Digits fetches the precision of spin_button.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: current precision.

func (*SpinButton) Increments 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Increments() (step, page float64)

Increments gets the current step and page the increments used by spin_button.

See gtk.SpinButton.SetIncrements().

The function returns the following values:

  • step (optional): location to store step increment, or NULL.
  • page (optional): location to store page increment, or NULL.

func (*SpinButton) Numeric 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Numeric() bool

Numeric returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if only numeric text can be entered.

func (*SpinButton) Range 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Range() (min, max float64)

Range gets the range allowed for spin_button.

See gtk.SpinButton.SetRange().

The function returns the following values:

  • min (optional): location to store minimum allowed value, or NULL.
  • max (optional): location to store maximum allowed value, or NULL.

func (*SpinButton) SetAdjustment 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetAdjustment(adjustment *Adjustment)

SetAdjustment replaces the GtkAdjustment associated with spin_button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • adjustment: GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment.

func (*SpinButton) SetClimbRate 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetClimbRate(climbRate float64)

SetClimbRate sets the acceleration rate for repeated changes when you hold down a button or key.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • climbRate: rate of acceleration, must be >= 0.

func (*SpinButton) SetDigits 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetDigits(digits uint)

SetDigits: set the precision to be displayed by spin_button.

Up to 20 digit precision is allowed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • digits: number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button’s value.

func (*SpinButton) SetIncrements 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetIncrements(step, page float64)

SetIncrements sets the step and page increments for spin_button.

This affects how quickly the value changes when the spin button’s arrows are activated.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • step: increment applied for a button 1 press.
  • page: increment applied for a button 2 press.

func (*SpinButton) SetNumeric 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetNumeric(numeric bool)

SetNumeric sets the flag that determines if non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • numeric: flag indicating if only numeric entry is allowed.

func (*SpinButton) SetRange 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetRange(min, max float64)

SetRange sets the minimum and maximum allowable values for spin_button.

If the current value is outside this range, it will be adjusted to fit within the range, otherwise it will remain unchanged.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • min: minimum allowable value.
  • max: maximum allowable value.

func (*SpinButton) SetSnapToTicks 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetSnapToTicks(snapToTicks bool)

SetSnapToTicks sets the policy as to whether values are corrected to the nearest step increment when a spin button is activated after providing an invalid value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • snapToTicks: flag indicating if invalid values should be corrected.

func (*SpinButton) SetUpdatePolicy 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetUpdatePolicy(policy SpinButtonUpdatePolicy)

SetUpdatePolicy sets the update behavior of a spin button.

This determines whether the spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • policy: GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value.

func (*SpinButton) SetValue 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetValue(value float64)

SetValue sets the value of spin_button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: new value.

func (*SpinButton) SetWrap 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SetWrap(wrap bool)

SetWrap sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wrap: flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.

func (*SpinButton) SnapToTicks 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) SnapToTicks() bool

SnapToTicks returns whether the values are corrected to the nearest step.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if values are snapped to the nearest step.

func (*SpinButton) Spin 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Spin(direction SpinType, increment float64)

Spin: increment or decrement a spin button’s value in a specified direction by a specified amount.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • direction: GtkSpinType indicating the direction to spin.
  • increment: step increment to apply in the specified direction.

func (*SpinButton) Update 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Update()

Update: manually force an update of the spin button.

func (*SpinButton) UpdatePolicy 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) UpdatePolicy() SpinButtonUpdatePolicy

UpdatePolicy gets the update behavior of a spin button.

See gtk.SpinButton.SetUpdatePolicy().

The function returns the following values:

  • spinButtonUpdatePolicy: current update policy.

func (*SpinButton) Value 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Value() float64

Value: get the value in the spin_button.

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: value of spin_button.

func (*SpinButton) ValueAsInt 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) ValueAsInt() int

ValueAsInt: get the value spin_button represented as an integer.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: value of spin_button.

func (*SpinButton) Wrap 

func (spinButton *SpinButton) Wrap() bool

Wrap returns whether the spin button’s value wraps around to the opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the spin button wraps around.

type SpinButtonUpdatePolicy 

type SpinButtonUpdatePolicy C.gint

SpinButtonUpdatePolicy determines whether the spin button displays values outside the adjustment bounds.

See gtk.SpinButton.SetUpdatePolicy(). 

const (
	// UpdateAlways: when refreshing your SpinButton, the value is always
	// displayed.
	UpdateAlways SpinButtonUpdatePolicy = iota
	// UpdateIfValid: when refreshing your SpinButton, the value is only
	// displayed if it is valid within the bounds of the spin button's
	// adjustment.
	UpdateIfValid
)

func (SpinButtonUpdatePolicy) String 

func (s SpinButtonUpdatePolicy) String() string

String returns the name in string for SpinButtonUpdatePolicy.

type SpinType 

type SpinType C.gint

SpinType values of the GtkSpinType enumeration are used to specify the change to make in gtk_spin_button_spin(). 

const (
	// SpinStepForward: increment by the adjustments step increment.
	SpinStepForward SpinType = iota
	// SpinStepBackward: decrement by the adjustments step increment.
	SpinStepBackward
	// SpinPageForward: increment by the adjustments page increment.
	SpinPageForward
	// SpinPageBackward: decrement by the adjustments page increment.
	SpinPageBackward
	// SpinHome: go to the adjustments lower bound.
	SpinHome
	// SpinEnd: go to the adjustments upper bound.
	SpinEnd
	// SpinUserDefined: change by a specified amount.
	SpinUserDefined
)

func (SpinType) String 

func (s SpinType) String() string

String returns the name in string for SpinType.

type Spinner 

type Spinner struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Spinner: GtkSpinner widget displays an icon-size spinning animation.

It is often used as an alternative to a gtk.ProgressBar for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.

!An example GtkSpinner (spinner.png)

To start the animation, use gtk.Spinner.Start(), to stop it use gtk.Spinner.Stop().

CSS nodes

GtkSpinner has a single CSS node with the name spinner. When the animation is active, the :checked pseudoclass is added to this node.

func NewSpinner 

func NewSpinner() *Spinner

NewSpinner returns a new spinner widget. Not yet started.

The function returns the following values:

  • spinner: new GtkSpinner.

func (*Spinner) SetSpinning 

func (spinner *Spinner) SetSpinning(spinning bool)

SetSpinning sets the activity of the spinner.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spinning: whether the spinner should be spinning.

func (*Spinner) Spinning 

func (spinner *Spinner) Spinning() bool

Spinning returns whether the spinner is spinning.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the spinner is active.

func (*Spinner) Start 

func (spinner *Spinner) Start()

Start starts the animation of the spinner.

func (*Spinner) Stop 

func (spinner *Spinner) Stop()

Stop stops the animation of the spinner.

type Stack 

type Stack struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Stack: GtkStack is a container which only shows one of its children at a time.

In contrast to GtkNotebook, GtkStack does not provide a means for users to change the visible child. Instead, a separate widget such as gtk.StackSwitcher or gtk.StackSidebar can be used with GtkStack to provide this functionality.

Transitions between pages can be animated as slides or fades. This can be controlled with gtk.Stack.SetTransitionType(). These animations respect the gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations setting.

GtkStack maintains a gtk.StackPage object for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain the GtkStackPage for a child with gtk.Stack.GetPage() and you can obtain a GtkSelectionModel containing all the pages with gtk.Stack.GetPages().

GtkStack as GtkBuildable

To set child-specific properties in a .ui file, create GtkStackPage objects explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it: 

<object class="GtkStack" id="stack">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkStackPage">
      <property name="name">page1</property>
      <property name="title">In the beginning…</property>
      <property name="child">
        <object class="GtkLabel">
          <property name="label">It was dark</property>
        </object>
      </property>
    </object>
  </child>

CSS nodes

GtkStack has a single CSS node named stack.

Accessibility

GtkStack uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_PANEL for the stack pages, which are the accessible parent objects of the child widgets.

func NewStack 

func NewStack() *Stack

NewStack creates a new GtkStack.

The function returns the following values:

  • stack: new GtkStack.

func (*Stack) AddChild 

func (stack *Stack) AddChild(child Widgetter) *StackPage

AddChild adds a child to stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackPage: GtkStackPage for child.

func (*Stack) AddNamed 

func (stack *Stack) AddNamed(child Widgetter, name string) *StackPage

AddNamed adds a child to stack.

The child is identified by the name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.
  • name (optional) for child or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackPage: GtkStackPage for child.

func (*Stack) AddTitled 

func (stack *Stack) AddTitled(child Widgetter, name, title string) *StackPage

AddTitled adds a child to stack.

The child is identified by the name. The title will be used by GtkStackSwitcher to represent child in a tab bar, so it should be short.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget to add.
  • name (optional) for child.
  • title: human-readable title for child.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackPage: GtkStackPage for child.

func (*Stack) ChildByName 

func (stack *Stack) ChildByName(name string) Widgetter

ChildByName finds the child with the name given as the argument.

Returns NULL if there is no child with this name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the child to find.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): requested child of the GtkStack.

func (*Stack) Hhomogeneous 

func (stack *Stack) Hhomogeneous() bool

Hhomogeneous gets whether stack is horizontally homogeneous.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether stack is horizontally homogeneous.

func (*Stack) InterpolateSize 

func (stack *Stack) InterpolateSize() bool

InterpolateSize returns whether the Stack is set up to interpolate between the sizes of children on page switch.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if child sizes are interpolated.

func (*Stack) Page 

func (stack *Stack) Page(child Widgetter) *StackPage

Page returns the GtkStackPage object for child.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of stack.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackPage: GtkStackPage for child.

func (*Stack) Pages 

func (stack *Stack) Pages() *SelectionModel

Pages returns a GListModel that contains the pages of the stack.

This can be used to keep an up-to-date view. The model also implements gtk.SelectionModel and can be used to track and modify the visible page.

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionModel: GtkSelectionModel for the stack's children.

func (*Stack) Remove 

func (stack *Stack) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child widget from stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.

func (*Stack) SetHhomogeneous 

func (stack *Stack) SetHhomogeneous(hhomogeneous bool)

SetHhomogeneous sets the GtkStack to be horizontally homogeneous or not.

If it is homogeneous, the GtkStack will request the same width for all its children. If it isn't, the stack may change width when a different child becomes visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hhomogeneous: TRUE to make stack horizontally homogeneous.

func (*Stack) SetInterpolateSize 

func (stack *Stack) SetInterpolateSize(interpolateSize bool)

SetInterpolateSize sets whether or not stack will interpolate its size when changing the visible child.

If the gtk.Stack:interpolate-size property is set to TRUE, stack will interpolate its size between the current one and the one it'll take after changing the visible child, according to the set transition duration.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • interpolateSize: new value.

func (*Stack) SetTransitionDuration 

func (stack *Stack) SetTransitionDuration(duration uint)

SetTransitionDuration sets the duration that transitions between pages in stack will take.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • duration: new duration, in milliseconds.

func (*Stack) SetTransitionType 

func (stack *Stack) SetTransitionType(transition StackTransitionType)

SetTransitionType sets the type of animation that will be used for transitions between pages in stack.

Available types include various kinds of fades and slides.

The transition type can be changed without problems at runtime, so it is possible to change the animation based on the page that is about to become current.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • transition: new transition type.

func (*Stack) SetVhomogeneous 

func (stack *Stack) SetVhomogeneous(vhomogeneous bool)

SetVhomogeneous sets the Stack to be vertically homogeneous or not.

If it is homogeneous, the GtkStack will request the same height for all its children. If it isn't, the stack may change height when a different child becomes visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • vhomogeneous: TRUE to make stack vertically homogeneous.

func (*Stack) SetVisibleChild 

func (stack *Stack) SetVisibleChild(child Widgetter)

SetVisibleChild makes child the visible child of stack.

If child is different from the currently visible child, the transition between the two will be animated with the current transition type of stack.

Note that the child widget has to be visible itself (see gtk.Widget.Show()) in order to become the visible child of stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of stack.

func (*Stack) SetVisibleChildFull 

func (stack *Stack) SetVisibleChildFull(name string, transition StackTransitionType)

SetVisibleChildFull makes the child with the given name visible.

Note that the child widget has to be visible itself (see gtk.Widget.Show()) in order to become the visible child of stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the child to make visible.
  • transition type to use.

func (*Stack) SetVisibleChildName 

func (stack *Stack) SetVisibleChildName(name string)

SetVisibleChildName makes the child with the given name visible.

If child is different from the currently visible child, the transition between the two will be animated with the current transition type of stack.

Note that the child widget has to be visible itself (see gtk.Widget.Show()) in order to become the visible child of stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the child to make visible.

func (*Stack) TransitionDuration 

func (stack *Stack) TransitionDuration() uint

TransitionDuration returns the amount of time (in milliseconds) that transitions between pages in stack will take.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: transition duration.

func (*Stack) TransitionRunning 

func (stack *Stack) TransitionRunning() bool

TransitionRunning returns whether the stack is currently in a transition from one page to another.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the transition is currently running, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Stack) TransitionType 

func (stack *Stack) TransitionType() StackTransitionType

TransitionType gets the type of animation that will be used for transitions between pages in stack.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackTransitionType: current transition type of stack.

func (*Stack) Vhomogeneous 

func (stack *Stack) Vhomogeneous() bool

Vhomogeneous gets whether stack is vertically homogeneous.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether stack is vertically homogeneous.

func (*Stack) VisibleChild 

func (stack *Stack) VisibleChild() Widgetter

VisibleChild gets the currently visible child of stack.

Returns NULL if there are no visible children.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): visible child of the GtkStack.

func (*Stack) VisibleChildName 

func (stack *Stack) VisibleChildName() string

VisibleChildName returns the name of the currently visible child of stack.

Returns NULL if there is no visible child.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): name of the visible child of the GtkStack.

type StackPage 

type StackPage struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Accessible
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StackPage: GtkStackPage is an auxiliary class used by GtkStack.

func (*StackPage) Child 

func (self *StackPage) Child() Widgetter

Child returns the stack child to which self belongs.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: child to which self belongs.

func (*StackPage) IconName 

func (self *StackPage) IconName() string

IconName returns the icon name of the page.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): value of the gtk.StackPage:icon-name property.

func (*StackPage) Name 

func (self *StackPage) Name() string

Name returns the name of the page.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): value of the gtk.StackPage:name property.

func (*StackPage) NeedsAttention 

func (self *StackPage) NeedsAttention() bool

NeedsAttention returns whether the page is marked as “needs attention”.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of the gtk.StackPage:needs-attention property.

func (*StackPage) SetIconName 

func (self *StackPage) SetIconName(setting string)

SetIconName sets the icon name of the page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*StackPage) SetName 

func (self *StackPage) SetName(setting string)

SetName sets the name of the page.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*StackPage) SetNeedsAttention 

func (self *StackPage) SetNeedsAttention(setting bool)

SetNeedsAttention sets whether the page is marked as “needs attention”.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*StackPage) SetTitle 

func (self *StackPage) SetTitle(setting string)

SetTitle sets the page title.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*StackPage) SetUseUnderline 

func (self *StackPage) SetUseUnderline(setting bool)

SetUseUnderline sets whether underlines in the page title indicate mnemonics.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value to set.

func (*StackPage) SetVisible 

func (self *StackPage) SetVisible(visible bool)

SetVisible sets whether page is visible in its GtkStack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: new property value.

func (*StackPage) Title 

func (self *StackPage) Title() string

Title gets the page title.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): value of the gtk.StackPage:title property.

func (*StackPage) UseUnderline 

func (self *StackPage) UseUnderline() bool

UseUnderline gets whether underlines in the page title indicate mnemonics.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: value of the gtk.StackPage:use-underline property.

func (*StackPage) Visible 

func (self *StackPage) Visible() bool

Visible returns whether page is visible in its GtkStack.

This is independent from the gtk.Widget:visible property of its widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if page is visible.

type StackSidebar 

type StackSidebar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StackSidebar: GtkStackSidebar uses a sidebar to switch between GtkStack pages.

In order to use a GtkStackSidebar, you simply use a GtkStack to organize your UI flow, and add the sidebar to your sidebar area. You can use gtk.StackSidebar.SetStack() to connect the GtkStackSidebar to the GtkStack.

CSS nodes

GtkStackSidebar has a single CSS node with name stacksidebar and style class .sidebar.

When circumstances require it, GtkStackSidebar adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.

func NewStackSidebar 

func NewStackSidebar() *StackSidebar

NewStackSidebar creates a new GtkStackSidebar.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackSidebar: new GtkStackSidebar.

func (*StackSidebar) SetStack 

func (self *StackSidebar) SetStack(stack *Stack)

SetStack: set the GtkStack associated with this GtkStackSidebar.

The sidebar widget will automatically update according to the order and items within the given GtkStack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stack: GtkStack.

func (*StackSidebar) Stack 

func (self *StackSidebar) Stack() *Stack

Stack retrieves the stack.

The function returns the following values:

  • stack (optional): associated Stack or NULL if none has been set explicitly.

type StackSwitcher 

type StackSwitcher struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StackSwitcher: GtkStackSwitcher shows a row of buttons to switch between GtkStack pages.

!An example GtkStackSwitcher (stackswitcher.png)

It acts as a controller for the associated GtkStack.

All the content for the buttons comes from the properties of the stacks gtk.StackPage objects; the button visibility in a GtkStackSwitcher widget is controlled by the visibility of the child in the GtkStack.

It is possible to associate multiple GtkStackSwitcher widgets with the same GtkStack widget.

CSS nodes

GtkStackSwitcher has a single CSS node named stackswitcher and style class .stack-switcher.

When circumstances require it, GtkStackSwitcher adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.

Accessibility

GtkStackSwitcher uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_LIST role and uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB for its buttons.

func NewStackSwitcher 

func NewStackSwitcher() *StackSwitcher

NewStackSwitcher: create a new GtkStackSwitcher.

The function returns the following values:

  • stackSwitcher: new GtkStackSwitcher.

func (*StackSwitcher) SetStack 

func (switcher *StackSwitcher) SetStack(stack *Stack)

SetStack sets the stack to control.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stack (optional): GtkStack.

func (*StackSwitcher) Stack 

func (switcher *StackSwitcher) Stack() *Stack

Stack retrieves the stack.

The function returns the following values:

  • stack (optional): stack, or NULL if none has been set explicitly.

type StackTransitionType 

type StackTransitionType C.gint

StackTransitionType: possible transitions between pages in a GtkStack widget.

New values may be added to this enumeration over time. 

const (
	// StackTransitionTypeNone: no transition.
	StackTransitionTypeNone StackTransitionType = iota
	// StackTransitionTypeCrossfade: cross-fade.
	StackTransitionTypeCrossfade
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideRight: slide from left to right.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideRight
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideLeft: slide from right to left.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideLeft
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideUp: slide from bottom up.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideUp
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideDown: slide from top down.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideDown
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideLeftRight: slide from left or right according to
	// the children order.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideLeftRight
	// StackTransitionTypeSlideUpDown: slide from top down or bottom up
	// according to the order.
	StackTransitionTypeSlideUpDown
	// StackTransitionTypeOverUp: cover the old page by sliding up.
	StackTransitionTypeOverUp
	// StackTransitionTypeOverDown: cover the old page by sliding down.
	StackTransitionTypeOverDown
	// StackTransitionTypeOverLeft: cover the old page by sliding to the left.
	StackTransitionTypeOverLeft
	// StackTransitionTypeOverRight: cover the old page by sliding to the right.
	StackTransitionTypeOverRight
	// StackTransitionTypeUnderUp: uncover the new page by sliding up.
	StackTransitionTypeUnderUp
	// StackTransitionTypeUnderDown: uncover the new page by sliding down.
	StackTransitionTypeUnderDown
	// StackTransitionTypeUnderLeft: uncover the new page by sliding to the
	// left.
	StackTransitionTypeUnderLeft
	// StackTransitionTypeUnderRight: uncover the new page by sliding to the
	// right.
	StackTransitionTypeUnderRight
	// StackTransitionTypeOverUpDown: cover the old page sliding up or uncover
	// the new page sliding down, according to order.
	StackTransitionTypeOverUpDown
	// StackTransitionTypeOverDownUp: cover the old page sliding down or uncover
	// the new page sliding up, according to order.
	StackTransitionTypeOverDownUp
	// StackTransitionTypeOverLeftRight: cover the old page sliding left or
	// uncover the new page sliding right, according to order.
	StackTransitionTypeOverLeftRight
	// StackTransitionTypeOverRightLeft: cover the old page sliding right or
	// uncover the new page sliding left, according to order.
	StackTransitionTypeOverRightLeft
	// StackTransitionTypeRotateLeft: pretend the pages are sides of a cube and
	// rotate that cube to the left.
	StackTransitionTypeRotateLeft
	// StackTransitionTypeRotateRight: pretend the pages are sides of a cube and
	// rotate that cube to the right.
	StackTransitionTypeRotateRight
	// StackTransitionTypeRotateLeftRight: pretend the pages are sides of a
	// cube and rotate that cube to the left or right according to the children
	// order.
	StackTransitionTypeRotateLeftRight
)

func (StackTransitionType) String 

func (s StackTransitionType) String() string

String returns the name in string for StackTransitionType.

type StateFlags 

type StateFlags C.guint

StateFlags describes a widget state.

Widget states are used to match the widget against CSS pseudo-classes. Note that GTK extends the regular CSS classes and sometimes uses different names. 

const (
	// StateFlagNormal: state during normal operation.
	StateFlagNormal StateFlags = 0b0
	// StateFlagActive: widget is active.
	StateFlagActive StateFlags = 0b1
	// StateFlagPrelight: widget has a mouse pointer over it.
	StateFlagPrelight StateFlags = 0b10
	// StateFlagSelected: widget is selected.
	StateFlagSelected StateFlags = 0b100
	// StateFlagInsensitive: widget is insensitive.
	StateFlagInsensitive StateFlags = 0b1000
	// StateFlagInconsistent: widget is inconsistent.
	StateFlagInconsistent StateFlags = 0b10000
	// StateFlagFocused: widget has the keyboard focus.
	StateFlagFocused StateFlags = 0b100000
	// StateFlagBackdrop: widget is in a background toplevel window.
	StateFlagBackdrop StateFlags = 0b1000000
	// StateFlagDirLTR: widget is in left-to-right text direction.
	StateFlagDirLTR StateFlags = 0b10000000
	// StateFlagDirRTL: widget is in right-to-left text direction.
	StateFlagDirRTL StateFlags = 0b100000000
	// StateFlagLink: widget is a link.
	StateFlagLink StateFlags = 0b1000000000
	// StateFlagVisited: location the widget points to has already been visited.
	StateFlagVisited StateFlags = 0b10000000000
	// StateFlagChecked: widget is checked.
	StateFlagChecked StateFlags = 0b100000000000
	// StateFlagDropActive: widget is highlighted as a drop target for DND.
	StateFlagDropActive StateFlags = 0b1000000000000
	// StateFlagFocusVisible: widget has the visible focus.
	StateFlagFocusVisible StateFlags = 0b10000000000000
	// StateFlagFocusWithin: widget contains the keyboard focus.
	StateFlagFocusWithin StateFlags = 0b100000000000000
)

func (StateFlags) Has 

func (s StateFlags) Has(other StateFlags) bool

Has returns true if s contains other.

func (StateFlags) String 

func (s StateFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for StateFlags.

type Statusbar 

type Statusbar struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Statusbar: GtkStatusbar widget is usually placed along the bottom of an application's main gtk.Window.

!An example GtkStatusbar (statusbar.png)

A GtkStatusBar may provide a regular commentary of the application's status (as is usually the case in a web browser, for example), or may be used to simply output a message when the status changes, (when an upload is complete in an FTP client, for example).

Status bars in GTK maintain a stack of messages. The message at the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.

Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a context id that is used to uniquely identify the source of a message. This context id can be generated by gtk.Statusbar.GetContextID(), given a message and the statusbar that it will be added to. Note that messages are stored in a stack, and when choosing which message to display, the stack structure is adhered to, regardless of the context identifier of a message.

One could say that a statusbar maintains one stack of messages for display purposes, but allows multiple message producers to maintain sub-stacks of the messages they produced (via context ids).

Status bars are created using gtk.Statusbar.New.

Messages are added to the bar’s stack with gtk.Statusbar.Push().

The message at the top of the stack can be removed using gtk.Statusbar.Pop(). A message can be removed from anywhere in the stack if its message id was recorded at the time it was added. This is done using gtk.Statusbar.Remove().

CSS node

GtkStatusbar has a single CSS node with name statusbar.

func NewStatusbar 

func NewStatusbar() *Statusbar

NewStatusbar creates a new GtkStatusbar ready for messages.

The function returns the following values:

  • statusbar: new GtkStatusbar.

func (*Statusbar) ConnectTextPopped 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) ConnectTextPopped(f func(contextId uint, text string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTextPopped is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.

func (*Statusbar) ConnectTextPushed 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) ConnectTextPushed(f func(contextId uint, text string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTextPushed is emitted whenever a new message gets pushed onto a statusbar's stack.

func (*Statusbar) ContextID 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) ContextID(contextDescription string) uint

ContextID returns a new context identifier, given a description of the actual context.

Note that the description is not shown in the UI.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextDescription: textual description of what context the new message is being used in.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: integer id.

func (*Statusbar) Pop 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) Pop(contextId uint)

Pop removes the first message in the GtkStatusbar’s stack with the given context id.

Note that this may not change the displayed message, if the message at the top of the stack has a different context id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextId: context identifier.

func (*Statusbar) Push 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) Push(contextId uint, text string) uint

Push pushes a new message onto a statusbar’s stack.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextId message’s context id, as returned by gtk_statusbar_get_context_id().
  • text: message to add to the statusbar.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: message id that can be used with gtk.Statusbar.Remove().

func (*Statusbar) Remove 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) Remove(contextId, messageId uint)

Remove forces the removal of a message from a statusbar’s stack. The exact context_id and message_id must be specified.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextId: context identifier.
  • messageId: message identifier, as returned by gtk.Statusbar.Push().

func (*Statusbar) RemoveAll 

func (statusbar *Statusbar) RemoveAll(contextId uint)

RemoveAll forces the removal of all messages from a statusbar's stack with the exact context_id.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • contextId: context identifier.

type StringFilter 

type StringFilter struct {
	Filter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringFilter: GtkStringFilter determines whether to include items by comparing strings to a fixed search term.

The strings are obtained from the items by evaluating a GtkExpression set with gtk.StringFilter.SetExpression(), and they are compared against a search term set with gtk.StringFilter.SetSearch().

GtkStringFilter has several different modes of comparison - it can match the whole string, just a prefix, or any substring. Use gtk.StringFilter.SetMatchMode() choose a mode.

It is also possible to make case-insensitive comparisons, with gtk.StringFilter.SetIgnoreCase().

func NewStringFilter 

func NewStringFilter(expression Expressioner) *StringFilter

NewStringFilter creates a new string filter.

You will want to set up the filter by providing a string to search for and by providing a property to look up on the item.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional) to evaluate or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • stringFilter: new GtkStringFilter.

func (*StringFilter) Expression 

func (self *StringFilter) Expression() Expressioner

Expression gets the expression that the string filter uses to obtain strings from items.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func (*StringFilter) IgnoreCase 

func (self *StringFilter) IgnoreCase() bool

IgnoreCase returns whether the filter ignores case differences.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the filter ignores case.

func (*StringFilter) MatchMode 

func (self *StringFilter) MatchMode() StringFilterMatchMode

MatchMode returns the match mode that the filter is using.

The function returns the following values:

  • stringFilterMatchMode: match mode of the filter.

func (*StringFilter) Search 

func (self *StringFilter) Search() string

Search gets the search term.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): search term.

func (*StringFilter) SetExpression 

func (self *StringFilter) SetExpression(expression Expressioner)

SetExpression sets the expression that the string filter uses to obtain strings from items.

The expression must have a value type of G_TYPE_STRING.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression.

func (*StringFilter) SetIgnoreCase 

func (self *StringFilter) SetIgnoreCase(ignoreCase bool)

SetIgnoreCase sets whether the filter ignores case differences.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ignoreCase: TRUE to ignore case.

func (*StringFilter) SetMatchMode 

func (self *StringFilter) SetMatchMode(mode StringFilterMatchMode)

SetMatchMode sets the match mode for the filter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mode: new match mode.

func (*StringFilter) SetSearch 

func (self *StringFilter) SetSearch(search string)

SetSearch sets the string to search for.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • search (optional): string to search for or NULL to clear the search.

type StringFilterClass added in v0.0.5 

type StringFilterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringFilterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*StringFilterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (s *StringFilterClass) ParentClass() *FilterClass

type StringFilterMatchMode 

type StringFilterMatchMode C.gint

StringFilterMatchMode specifies how search strings are matched inside text. 

const (
	// StringFilterMatchModeExact: search string and text must match exactly.
	StringFilterMatchModeExact StringFilterMatchMode = iota
	// StringFilterMatchModeSubstring: search string must be contained as a
	// substring inside the text.
	StringFilterMatchModeSubstring
	// StringFilterMatchModePrefix: text must begin with the search string.
	StringFilterMatchModePrefix
)

func (StringFilterMatchMode) String 

func (s StringFilterMatchMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for StringFilterMatchMode.

type StringFilterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type StringFilterOverrides struct {
}

StringFilterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type StringList added in v0.0.6 

type StringList struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringList: GtkStringList is a list model that wraps an array of strings.

The objects in the model have a "string" property.

GtkStringList is well-suited for any place where you would typically use a char*[], but need a list model.

GtkStringList as GtkBuildable

The GtkStringList implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.

Here is a UI definition fragment specifying a GtkStringList 

<object class="GtkStringList">
  <items>
    <item translatable="yes">Factory</item>
    <item translatable="yes">Home</item>
    <item translatable="yes">Subway</item>
  </items>
</object>.

func NewStringList added in v0.0.6 

func NewStringList(strings []string) *StringList

NewStringList creates a new GtkStringList with the given strings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • strings (optional) to put in the model.

The function returns the following values:

  • stringList: new GtkStringList.

func (*StringList) Append added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringList) Append(str string)

Append appends string to self.

The string will be copied. See gtk.StringList.Take() for a way to avoid that.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string to insert.

func (*StringList) Remove added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringList) Remove(position uint)

Remove removes the string at position from self.

position must be smaller than the current length of the list.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the string that is to be removed.

func (*StringList) Splice added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringList) Splice(position, nRemovals uint, additions []string)

Splice changes self by removing n_removals strings and adding additions to it.

This function is more efficient than gtk.StringList.Append() and gtk.StringList.Remove(), because it only emits the ::items-changed signal once for the change.

This function copies the strings in additions.

The parameters position and n_removals must be correct (ie: position + n_removals must be less than or equal to the length of the list at the time this function is called).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position at which to make the change.
  • nRemovals: number of strings to remove.
  • additions (optional) strings to add.

func (*StringList) String added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringList) String(position uint) string

String gets the string that is at position in self.

If self does not contain position items, NULL is returned.

This function returns the const char *. To get the object wrapping it, use g_list_model_get_item().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position to get the string for.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): string at the given position.

func (*StringList) Take added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringList) Take(str string)

Take adds string to self at the end, and takes ownership of it.

This variant of gtk.StringList.Append() is convenient for formatting strings: 

gtk_string_list_take (self, g_strdup_print ("d dollars", lots));.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string to insert.

type StringListClass added in v0.0.6 

type StringListClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringListClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type StringListOverrides added in v0.0.6 

type StringListOverrides struct {
}

StringListOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type StringObject added in v0.0.6 

type StringObject struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringObject: GtkStringObject is the type of items in a GtkStringList.

A GtkStringObject is a wrapper around a const char*; it has a gtk.StringObject:string property.

func NewStringObject added in v0.0.6 

func NewStringObject(str string) *StringObject

NewStringObject wraps a string in an object for use with GListModel.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: string to wrap.

The function returns the following values:

  • stringObject: new GtkStringObject.

func (*StringObject) String added in v0.0.6 

func (self *StringObject) String() string

String returns the string contained in a GtkStringObject.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: string of self.

type StringObjectClass added in v0.0.6 

type StringObjectClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringObjectClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type StringObjectOverrides added in v0.0.6 

type StringObjectOverrides struct {
}

StringObjectOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type StringSorter 

type StringSorter struct {
	Sorter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringSorter: GtkStringSorter is a GtkSorter that compares strings.

It does the comparison in a linguistically correct way using the current locale by normalizing Unicode strings and possibly case-folding them before performing the comparison.

To obtain the strings to compare, this sorter evaluates a gtk.Expression.

func NewStringSorter 

func NewStringSorter(expression Expressioner) *StringSorter

NewStringSorter creates a new string sorter that compares items using the given expression.

Unless an expression is set on it, this sorter will always compare items as invalid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional) to evaluate.

The function returns the following values:

  • stringSorter: new GtkStringSorter.

func (*StringSorter) Expression 

func (self *StringSorter) Expression() Expressioner

Expression gets the expression that is evaluated to obtain strings from items.

The function returns the following values:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression, or NULL.

func (*StringSorter) IgnoreCase 

func (self *StringSorter) IgnoreCase() bool

IgnoreCase gets whether the sorter ignores case differences.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self is ignoring case differences.

func (*StringSorter) SetExpression 

func (self *StringSorter) SetExpression(expression Expressioner)

SetExpression sets the expression that is evaluated to obtain strings from items.

The expression must have the type G_TYPE_STRING.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expression (optional): GtkExpression, or NULL.

func (*StringSorter) SetIgnoreCase 

func (self *StringSorter) SetIgnoreCase(ignoreCase bool)

SetIgnoreCase sets whether the sorter will ignore case differences.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ignoreCase: TRUE to ignore case differences.

type StringSorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type StringSorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StringSorterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*StringSorterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (s *StringSorterClass) ParentClass() *SorterClass

type StringSorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type StringSorterOverrides struct {
}

StringSorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type StyleContext 

type StyleContext struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StyleContext: GtkStyleContext stores styling information affecting a widget.

In order to construct the final style information, GtkStyleContext queries information from all attached GtkStyleProviders. Style providers can be either attached explicitly to the context through gtk.StyleContext.AddProvider(), or to the display through gtk.StyleContext().AddProviderForDisplay. The resulting style is a combination of all providers’ information in priority order.

For GTK widgets, any GtkStyleContext returned by gtk.Widget.GetStyleContext() will already have a GdkDisplay and RTL/LTR information set. The style context will also be updated automatically if any of these settings change on the widget.

Style Classes

Widgets can add style classes to their context, which can be used to associate different styles by class. The documentation for individual widgets lists which style classes it uses itself, and which style classes may be added by applications to affect their appearance.

Custom styling in UI libraries and applications

If you are developing a library with custom widgets that render differently than standard components, you may need to add a GtkStyleProvider yourself with the GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority, either a GtkCssProvider or a custom object implementing the GtkStyleProvider interface. This way themes may still attempt to style your UI elements in a different way if needed so.

If you are using custom styling on an applications, you probably want then to make your style information prevail to the theme’s, so you must use a GtkStyleProvider with the GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION priority, keep in mind that the user settings in XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.css will still take precedence over your changes, as it uses the GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER priority.

func (*StyleContext) AddClass 

func (context *StyleContext) AddClass(className string)

AddClass adds a style class to context, so later uses of the style context will make use of this new class for styling.

In the CSS file format, a GtkEntry defining a “search” class, would be matched by: 

entry.search { ... }

While any widget defining a “search” class would be matched by: 

.search { ... }.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • className class name to use in styling.

func (*StyleContext) AddProvider 

func (context *StyleContext) AddProvider(provider StyleProviderer, priority uint)

AddProvider adds a style provider to context, to be used in style construction.

Note that a style provider added by this function only affects the style of the widget to which context belongs. If you want to affect the style of all widgets, use gtk.StyleContext().AddProviderForDisplay.

Note: If both priorities are the same, a GtkStyleProvider added through this function takes precedence over another added through gtk.StyleContext().AddProviderForDisplay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • provider: GtkStyleProvider.
  • priority of the style provider. The lower it is, the earlier it will be used in the style construction. Typically this will be in the range between GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK and GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER.

func (*StyleContext) Border 

func (context *StyleContext) Border() *Border

Border gets the border for a given state as a GtkBorder.

The function returns the following values:

  • border: return value for the border settings.

func (*StyleContext) Color 

func (context *StyleContext) Color() *gdk.RGBA

Color gets the foreground color for a given state.

The function returns the following values:

  • color: return value for the foreground color.

func (*StyleContext) Display 

func (context *StyleContext) Display() *gdk.Display

Display returns the GdkDisplay to which context is attached.

The function returns the following values:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

func (*StyleContext) HasClass 

func (context *StyleContext) HasClass(className string) bool

HasClass returns TRUE if context currently has defined the given class name.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • className class name.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if context has class_name defined.

func (*StyleContext) LookupColor 

func (context *StyleContext) LookupColor(colorName string) (*gdk.RGBA, bool)

LookupColor looks up and resolves a color name in the context color map.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • colorName: color name to lookup.

The function returns the following values:

  • color: return location for the looked up color.
  • ok: TRUE if color_name was found and resolved, FALSE otherwise.

func (*StyleContext) Margin 

func (context *StyleContext) Margin() *Border

Margin gets the margin for a given state as a GtkBorder.

The function returns the following values:

  • margin: return value for the margin settings.

func (*StyleContext) Padding 

func (context *StyleContext) Padding() *Border

Padding gets the padding for a given state as a GtkBorder.

The function returns the following values:

  • padding: return value for the padding settings.

func (*StyleContext) RemoveClass 

func (context *StyleContext) RemoveClass(className string)

RemoveClass removes class_name from context.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • className class name to remove.

func (*StyleContext) RemoveProvider 

func (context *StyleContext) RemoveProvider(provider StyleProviderer)

RemoveProvider removes provider from the style providers list in context.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • provider: GtkStyleProvider.

func (*StyleContext) Restore 

func (context *StyleContext) Restore()

Restore restores context state to a previous stage.

See gtk.StyleContext.Save().

func (*StyleContext) Save 

func (context *StyleContext) Save()

Save saves the context state.

This allows temporary modifications done through gtk.StyleContext.AddClass(), gtk.StyleContext.RemoveClass(), gtk.StyleContext.SetState() to be quickly reverted in one go through gtk.StyleContext.Restore().

The matching call to gtk.StyleContext.Restore() must be done before GTK returns to the main loop.

func (*StyleContext) Scale 

func (context *StyleContext) Scale() int

Scale returns the scale used for assets.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: scale.

func (*StyleContext) SetDisplay 

func (context *StyleContext) SetDisplay(display *gdk.Display)

SetDisplay attaches context to the given display.

The display is used to add style information from “global” style providers, such as the display's GtkSettings instance.

If you are using a GtkStyleContext returned from gtk.Widget.GetStyleContext(), you do not need to call this yourself.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

func (*StyleContext) SetScale 

func (context *StyleContext) SetScale(scale int)

SetScale sets the scale to use when getting image assets for the style.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scale: scale.

func (*StyleContext) SetState 

func (context *StyleContext) SetState(flags StateFlags)

SetState sets the state to be used for style matching.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags: state to represent.

func (*StyleContext) State 

func (context *StyleContext) State() StateFlags

State returns the state used for style matching.

This method should only be used to retrieve the GtkStateFlags to pass to GtkStyleContext methods, like gtk.StyleContext.GetPadding(). If you need to retrieve the current state of a GtkWidget, use gtk.Widget.GetStateFlags().

The function returns the following values:

  • stateFlags: state flags.

func (*StyleContext) String 

func (context *StyleContext) String(flags StyleContextPrintFlags) string

String converts the style context into a string representation.

The string representation always includes information about the name, state, id, visibility and style classes of the CSS node that is backing context. Depending on the flags, more information may be included.

This function is intended for testing and debugging of the CSS implementation in GTK. There are no guarantees about the format of the returned string, it may change.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags flags that determine what to print.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: newly allocated string representing context.

type StyleContextClass added in v0.0.5 

type StyleContextClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StyleContextClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type StyleContextOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type StyleContextOverrides struct {
	Changed func()
}

StyleContextOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type StyleContextPrintFlags 

type StyleContextPrintFlags C.guint

StyleContextPrintFlags flags that modify the behavior of gtk_style_context_to_string().

New values may be added to this enumeration. 

const (
	// StyleContextPrintNone: default value.
	StyleContextPrintNone StyleContextPrintFlags = 0b0
	// StyleContextPrintRecurse: print the entire tree of CSS nodes starting at
	// the style context's node.
	StyleContextPrintRecurse StyleContextPrintFlags = 0b1
	// StyleContextPrintShowStyle: show the values of the CSS properties for
	// each node.
	StyleContextPrintShowStyle StyleContextPrintFlags = 0b10
	// StyleContextPrintShowChange: show information about what changes affect
	// the styles.
	StyleContextPrintShowChange StyleContextPrintFlags = 0b100
)

func (StyleContextPrintFlags) Has 

func (s StyleContextPrintFlags) Has(other StyleContextPrintFlags) bool

Has returns true if s contains other.

func (StyleContextPrintFlags) String 

func (s StyleContextPrintFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for StyleContextPrintFlags.

type StyleProvider 

type StyleProvider struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

StyleProvider: GtkStyleProvider is an interface for style information used by GtkStyleContext.

See gtk.StyleContext.AddProvider() and gtk.StyleContext().AddProviderForDisplay for adding GtkStyleProviders.

GTK uses the GtkStyleProvider implementation for CSS in gtk.CSSProvider.

StyleProvider wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func BaseStyleProvider 

func BaseStyleProvider(obj StyleProviderer) *StyleProvider

BaseStyleProvider returns the underlying base object.

func (*StyleProvider) ConnectGTKPrivateChanged 

func (v *StyleProvider) ConnectGTKPrivateChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

type StyleProviderer 

type StyleProviderer interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

StyleProviderer describes StyleProvider's interface methods.

type Switch 

type Switch struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Actionable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Switch: GtkSwitch is a "light switch" that has two states: on or off.

!An example GtkSwitch (switch.png)

The user can control which state should be active by clicking the empty area, or by dragging the handle.

GtkSwitch can also handle situations where the underlying state changes with a delay. See gtkswitch::state-set for details.

CSS nodes 

switch
├── label
├── label
╰── slider

GtkSwitch has four css nodes, the main node with the name switch and subnodes for the slider and the on and off labels. Neither of them is using any style classes.

Accessibility

GtkSwitch uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SWITCH role.

func NewSwitch 

func NewSwitch() *Switch

NewSwitch creates a new GtkSwitch widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • _switch: newly created GtkSwitch instance.

func (*Switch) Active 

func (self *Switch) Active() bool

Active gets whether the GtkSwitch is in its “on” or “off” state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the GtkSwitch is active, and FALSE otherwise.

func (*Switch) ConnectActivate 

func (self *Switch) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted to animate the switch.

Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the gtk.Switch:active property.

func (*Switch) ConnectStateSet 

func (self *Switch) ConnectStateSet(f func(state bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStateSet is emitted to change the underlying state.

The ::state-set signal is emitted when the user changes the switch position. The default handler keeps the state in sync with the gtk.Switch:active property.

To implement delayed state change, applications can connect to this signal, initiate the change of the underlying state, and call gtk.Switch.SetState() when the underlying state change is complete. The signal handler should return TRUE to prevent the default handler from running.

Visually, the underlying state is represented by the trough color of the switch, while the gtk.Switch`:active property is represented by the position of the switch.

func (*Switch) SetActive 

func (self *Switch) SetActive(isActive bool)

SetActive changes the state of self to the desired one.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • isActive: TRUE if self should be active, and FALSE otherwise.

func (*Switch) SetState 

func (self *Switch) SetState(state bool)

SetState sets the underlying state of the GtkSwitch.

Normally, this is the same as gtk.Switch:active, unless the switch is set up for delayed state changes. This function is typically called from a gtk.Switch`::state-set signal handler.

See gtk.Switch::state-set for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • state: new state.

func (*Switch) State 

func (self *Switch) State() bool

State gets the underlying state of the GtkSwitch.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: underlying state.

type SystemSetting 

type SystemSetting C.gint

SystemSetting values that can be passed to the GtkWidgetClass.system_setting_changed vfunc.

The values indicate which system setting has changed. Widgets may need to drop caches, or react otherwise.

Most of the values correspond to GtkSettings properties.

More values may be added over time. 

const (
	// SystemSettingDPI setting has changed.
	SystemSettingDPI SystemSetting = iota
	// SystemSettingFontName setting has changed.
	SystemSettingFontName
	// SystemSettingFontConfig: font configuration has changed in
	// a way that requires text to be redrawn. This can be any of
	// the Settings:gtk-xft-antialias, Settings:gtk-xft-hinting,
	// Settings:gtk-xft-hintstyle, Settings:gtk-xft-rgba or
	// Settings:gtk-fontconfig-timestamp settings.
	SystemSettingFontConfig
	// SystemSettingDisplay: display has changed.
	SystemSettingDisplay
	// SystemSettingIconTheme: icon theme has changed in a way that requires
	// icons to be looked up again.
	SystemSettingIconTheme
)

func (SystemSetting) String 

func (s SystemSetting) String() string

String returns the name in string for SystemSetting.

type Text 

type Text struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	EditableTextWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Text: GtkText widget is a single-line text entry widget.

GtkText is the common implementation of single-line text editing that is shared between GtkEntry, GtkPasswordEntry, GtkSpinButton and other widgets. In all of these, GtkText` is used as the delegate for the gtk.Editable implementation.

A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.

When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using gtk.Text.SetVisibility(). In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.Text.SetInvisibleChar().

If you are looking to add icons or progress display in an entry, look at GtkEntry. There other alternatives for more specialized use cases, such as GtkSearchEntry.

If you need multi-line editable text, look at GtkTextView.

CSS nodes 

text[.read-only]
├── placeholder
├── undershoot.left
├── undershoot.right
├── [selection]
├── [block-cursor]
╰── [window.popup]

GtkText has a main node with the name text. Depending on the properties of the widget, the .read-only style class may appear.

When the entry has a selection, it adds a subnode with the name selection.

When the entry is in overwrite mode, it adds a subnode with the name block-cursor that determines how the block cursor is drawn.

The CSS node for a context menu is added as a subnode below text as well.

The undershoot nodes are used to draw the underflow indication when content is scrolled out of view. These nodes get the .left and .right style classes added depending on where the indication is drawn.

When touch is used and touch selection handles are shown, they are using CSS nodes with name cursor-handle. They get the .top or .bottom style class depending on where they are shown in relation to the selection. If there is just a single handle for the text cursor, it gets the style class .insertion-cursor.

Accessibility

GtkText uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_NONE role, which causes it to be skipped for accessibility. This is because GtkText is expected to be used as a delegate for a GtkEditable implementation that will be represented to accessibility.

func NewText 

func NewText() *Text

NewText creates a new GtkText.

The function returns the following values:

  • text: new GtkText.

func NewTextWithBuffer 

func NewTextWithBuffer(buffer *EntryBuffer) *Text

NewTextWithBuffer creates a new GtkText with the specified text buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer to use for the new GtkText.

The function returns the following values:

  • text: new GtkText.

func (*Text) ActivatesDefault 

func (self *Text) ActivatesDefault() bool

ActivatesDefault retrieves the value set by gtk_text_set_activates_default().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the GtkText will activate the default widget.

func (*Text) Attributes 

func (self *Text) Attributes() *pango.AttrList

Attributes gets the attribute list that was set on the GtkText using gtk_text_set_attributes().

The function returns the following values:

  • attrList (optional): attribute list, or NULL if none was set.

func (*Text) Buffer 

func (self *Text) Buffer() *EntryBuffer

Buffer: get the GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for this self.

The function returns the following values:

  • entryBuffer: GtkEntryBuffer object.

func (*Text) ConnectActivate 

func (self *Text) ConnectActivate(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivate is emitted when the user hits the Enter key.

The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the <kbd>Enter</kbd> key.

func (*Text) ConnectBackspace 

func (self *Text) ConnectBackspace(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBackspace is emitted when the user asks for it.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Backspace</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Backspace</kbd>.

func (*Text) ConnectCopyClipboard 

func (self *Text) ConnectCopyClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCopyClipboard is emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>c</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*Text) ConnectCutClipboard 

func (self *Text) ConnectCutClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCutClipboard is emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>x</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Delete</kbd>.

func (*Text) ConnectDeleteFromCursor 

func (self *Text) ConnectDeleteFromCursor(f func(typ DeleteType, count int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeleteFromCursor is emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

If the type is GTK_DELETE_CHARS, GTK deletes the selection if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number of characters.

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Delete</kbd> for deleting a character and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Delete</kbd> for deleting a word.

func (*Text) ConnectInsertAtCursor 

func (self *Text) ConnectInsertAtCursor(f func(str string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertAtCursor is emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a fixed string at the cursor.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This signal has no default bindings.

func (*Text) ConnectInsertEmoji 

func (self *Text) ConnectInsertEmoji(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertEmoji is emitted to present the Emoji chooser for the self.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>.</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>;</kbd>.

func (*Text) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (self *Text) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, count int, extend bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor is emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.

If the cursor is not visible in self, this signal causes the viewport to be moved instead.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically.

The default bindings for this signal come in two variants, the variant with the <kbd>Shift</kbd> modifier extends the selection, the variant without it does not. There are too many key combinations to list them all here.

- <kbd>←</kbd>, <kbd>→</kbd>, <kbd>↑</kbd>, <kbd>↓</kbd> move by individual characters/lines

- <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>→</kbd>, etc. move by words/paragraphs

- <kbd>Home</kbd>, <kbd>End</kbd> move to the ends of the buffer.

func (*Text) ConnectPasteClipboard 

func (self *Text) ConnectPasteClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPasteClipboard is emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>v</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*Text) ConnectPreeditChanged 

func (self *Text) ConnectPreeditChanged(f func(preedit string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreeditChanged is emitted when the preedit text changes.

If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text, connect to this signal.

func (*Text) ConnectToggleOverwrite 

func (self *Text) ConnectToggleOverwrite(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleOverwrite is emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the GtkText.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal is <kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*Text) EnableEmojiCompletion 

func (self *Text) EnableEmojiCompletion() bool

EnableEmojiCompletion returns whether Emoji completion is enabled for this GtkText widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if Emoji completion is enabled.

func (*Text) ExtraMenu 

func (self *Text) ExtraMenu() gio.MenuModeller

ExtraMenu gets the menu model set with gtk_text_set_extra_menu().

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel (optional): menu model.

func (*Text) GrabFocusWithoutSelecting 

func (self *Text) GrabFocusWithoutSelecting() bool

GrabFocusWithoutSelecting causes self to have keyboard focus.

It behaves like gtk.Widget.GrabFocus(), except that it doesn't select the contents of self. You only want to call this on some special entries which the user usually doesn't want to replace all text in, such as search-as-you-type entries.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus is now inside self.

func (*Text) InputHints 

func (self *Text) InputHints() InputHints

InputHints gets the input hints of the GtkText.

The function returns the following values:

func (*Text) InputPurpose 

func (self *Text) InputPurpose() InputPurpose

InputPurpose gets the input purpose of the GtkText.

The function returns the following values:

func (*Text) InvisibleChar 

func (self *Text) InvisibleChar() uint32

InvisibleChar retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters for entries with visibility set to false.

Note that GTK does not compute this value unless it needs it, so the value returned by this function is not very useful unless it has been explicitly set with gtk.Text.SetInvisibleChar().

The function returns the following values:

  • gunichar: current invisible char, or 0, if text does not show invisible text at all.

func (*Text) MaxLength 

func (self *Text) MaxLength() int

MaxLength retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in self.

See gtk.Text.SetMaxLength().

This is equivalent to getting self's GtkEntryBuffer and calling gtk.EntryBuffer.GetMaxLength() on it.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum allowed number of characters in GtkText, or 0 if there is no maximum.

func (*Text) OverwriteMode 

func (self *Text) OverwriteMode() bool

OverwriteMode gets the value set by gtk_text_set_overwrite_mode().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the text is overwritten when typing.

func (*Text) PlaceholderText 

func (self *Text) PlaceholderText() string

PlaceholderText retrieves the text that will be displayed when self is empty and unfocused.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): pointer to the placeholder text as a string. This string points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not be freed, modified or stored. If no placeholder text has been set, NULL will be returned.

func (*Text) PropagateTextWidth 

func (self *Text) PropagateTextWidth() bool

PropagateTextWidth returns whether the GtkText will grow and shrink with the content.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self will propagate the text width.

func (*Text) SetActivatesDefault 

func (self *Text) SetActivatesDefault(activates bool)

SetActivatesDefault: if activates is TRUE, pressing Enter in the self will activate the default widget for the window containing self.

This usually means that the dialog containing the GtkText will be closed, since the default widget is usually one of the dialog buttons.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • activates: TRUE to activate window’s default widget on Enter keypress.

func (*Text) SetAttributes 

func (self *Text) SetAttributes(attrs *pango.AttrList)

SetAttributes sets attributes that are applied to the text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • attrs (optional): PangoAttrList or NULL to unset.

func (*Text) SetBuffer 

func (self *Text) SetBuffer(buffer *EntryBuffer)

SetBuffer: set the GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for this widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer: GtkEntryBuffer.

func (*Text) SetEnableEmojiCompletion 

func (self *Text) SetEnableEmojiCompletion(enableEmojiCompletion bool)

SetEnableEmojiCompletion sets whether Emoji completion is enabled.

If it is, typing ':', followed by a recognized keyword, will pop up a window with suggested Emojis matching the keyword.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableEmojiCompletion: TRUE to enable Emoji completion.

func (*Text) SetExtraMenu 

func (self *Text) SetExtraMenu(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetExtraMenu sets a menu model to add when constructing the context menu for self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*Text) SetInputHints 

func (self *Text) SetInputHints(hints InputHints)

SetInputHints sets input hints that allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hints: hints.

func (*Text) SetInputPurpose 

func (self *Text) SetInputPurpose(purpose InputPurpose)

SetInputPurpose sets the input purpose of the GtkText.

This can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input methods to adjust their behaviour.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • purpose: purpose.

func (*Text) SetInvisibleChar 

func (self *Text) SetInvisibleChar(ch uint32)

SetInvisibleChar sets the character to use in place of the actual text when in “password mode”.

By default, GTK picks the best invisible char available in the current font. If you set the invisible char to 0, then the user will get no feedback at all; there will be no text on the screen as they type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ch: unicode character.

func (*Text) SetMaxLength 

func (self *Text) SetMaxLength(length int)

SetMaxLength sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the widget.

If the current contents are longer than the given length, then they will be truncated to fit.

This is equivalent to getting self's GtkEntryBuffer and calling gtk.EntryBuffer.SetMaxLength() on it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • length: maximum length of the GtkText, or 0 for no maximum. (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will be clamped to the range 0-65536.

func (*Text) SetOverwriteMode 

func (self *Text) SetOverwriteMode(overwrite bool)

SetOverwriteMode sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the GtkText.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • overwrite: new value.

func (*Text) SetPlaceholderText 

func (self *Text) SetPlaceholderText(text string)

SetPlaceholderText sets text to be displayed in self when it is empty.

This can be used to give a visual hint of the expected contents of the GtkText.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional): string to be displayed when self is empty and unfocused, or NULL.

func (*Text) SetPropagateTextWidth 

func (self *Text) SetPropagateTextWidth(propagateTextWidth bool)

SetPropagateTextWidth sets whether the GtkText should grow and shrink with the content.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • propagateTextWidth: TRUE to propagate the text width.

func (*Text) SetTabs 

func (self *Text) SetTabs(tabs *pango.TabArray)

SetTabs sets tabstops that are applied to the text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tabs (optional): PangoTabArray.

func (*Text) SetTruncateMultiline 

func (self *Text) SetTruncateMultiline(truncateMultiline bool)

SetTruncateMultiline sets whether the GtkText should truncate multi-line text that is pasted into the widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • truncateMultiline: TRUE to truncate multi-line text.

func (*Text) SetVisibility 

func (self *Text) SetVisibility(visible bool)

SetVisibility sets whether the contents of the GtkText are visible or not.

When visibility is set to FALSE, characters are displayed as the invisible char, and will also appear that way when the text in the widget is copied to the clipboard.

By default, GTK picks the best invisible character available in the current font, but it can be changed with gtk.Text.SetInvisibleChar().

Note that you probably want to set gtk.Text:input-purpose to GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_PASSWORD or GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_PIN to inform input methods about the purpose of this self, in addition to setting visibility to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: TRUE if the contents of the GtkText are displayed as plaintext.

func (*Text) Tabs 

func (self *Text) Tabs() *pango.TabArray

Tabs gets the tabstops that were set on the GtkText using gtk_text_set_tabs().

The function returns the following values:

  • tabArray (optional): tabstops, or NULL if none was set.

func (*Text) TextLength 

func (self *Text) TextLength() uint16

TextLength retrieves the current length of the text in self.

This is equivalent to getting self's GtkEntryBuffer and calling gtk.EntryBuffer.GetLength() on it.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint16: current number of characters in GtkText, or 0 if there are none.

func (*Text) TruncateMultiline 

func (self *Text) TruncateMultiline() bool

TruncateMultiline returns whether the GtkText will truncate multi-line text that is pasted into the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if self will truncate multi-line text.

func (*Text) UnsetInvisibleChar 

func (self *Text) UnsetInvisibleChar()

UnsetInvisibleChar unsets the invisible char.

After calling this, the default invisible char is used again.

func (*Text) Visibility 

func (self *Text) Visibility() bool

Visibility retrieves whether the text in self is visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the text is currently visible.

type TextBuffer 

type TextBuffer struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextBuffer stores text and attributes for display in a GtkTextView.

You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

func NewTextBuffer 

func NewTextBuffer(table *TextTagTable) *TextBuffer

NewTextBuffer creates a new text buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • table (optional): tag table, or NULL to create a new one.

The function returns the following values:

  • textBuffer: new text buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) AddMark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) AddMark(mark *TextMark, where *TextIter)

AddMark adds the mark at position where.

The mark must not be added to another buffer, and if its name is not NULL then there must not be another mark in the buffer with the same name.

Emits the GtkTextBuffer::mark-set signal as notification of the mark's initial placement.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark to add.
  • where: location to place mark.

func (*TextBuffer) AddSelectionClipboard 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) AddSelectionClipboard(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard)

AddSelectionClipboard adds clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection contents of buffer are available.

In most cases, clipboard will be the GdkClipboard returned by gtk.Widget.GetPrimaryClipboard() for a view of buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipboard: GdkClipboard.

func (*TextBuffer) ApplyTag 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ApplyTag(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)

ApplyTag emits the “apply-tag” signal on buffer.

The default handler for the signal applies tag to the given range. start and end do not have to be in order.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag: GtkTextTag.
  • start: one bound of range to be tagged.
  • end: other bound of range to be tagged.

func (*TextBuffer) ApplyTagByName 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ApplyTagByName(name string, start, end *TextIter)

ApplyTagByName emits the “apply-tag” signal on buffer.

Calls gtk.TextTagTable.Lookup() on the buffer’s tag table to get a GtkTextTag, then calls gtk.TextBuffer.ApplyTag().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of a named GtkTextTag.
  • start: one bound of range to be tagged.
  • end: other bound of range to be tagged.

func (*TextBuffer) Backspace 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Backspace(iter *TextIter, interactive, defaultEditable bool) bool

Backspace performs the appropriate action as if the user hit the delete key with the cursor at the position specified by iter.

In the normal case a single character will be deleted, but when combining accents are involved, more than one character can be deleted, and when precomposed character and accent combinations are involved, less than one character will be deleted.

Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after calling this function; however, the iter will be re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: position in buffer.
  • interactive: whether the deletion is caused by user interaction.
  • defaultEditable: whether the buffer is editable by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the buffer was modified.

func (*TextBuffer) BeginIrreversibleAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) BeginIrreversibleAction()

BeginIrreversibleAction denotes the beginning of an action that may not be undone.

This will cause any previous operations in the undo/redo queue to be cleared.

This should be paired with a call to gtk.TextBuffer.EndIrreversibleAction() after the irreversible action has completed.

You may nest calls to gtk_text_buffer_begin_irreversible_action() and gtk_text_buffer_end_irreversible_action() pairs.

func (*TextBuffer) BeginUserAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) BeginUserAction()

BeginUserAction: called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single user-visible operation.

The operations between gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating an undo stack. GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the “begin-user-action” and “end-user-action” signals only for the outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions from other user actions.

The “interactive” buffer mutation functions, such as gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive(), automatically call begin/end user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a single call to one of those functions.

func (*TextBuffer) Bounds 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Bounds() (start, end *TextIter)

Bounds retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the entire buffer lies within the range [start,end).

The function returns the following values:

  • start: iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer.
  • end: iterator to initialize with the end iterator.

func (*TextBuffer) CanRedo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CanRedo() bool

CanRedo gets whether there is a redoable action in the history.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if there is an redoable action.

func (*TextBuffer) CanUndo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CanUndo() bool

CanUndo gets whether there is an undoable action in the history.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if there is an undoable action.

func (*TextBuffer) CharCount 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CharCount() int

CharCount gets the number of characters in the buffer.

Note that characters and bytes are not the same, you can’t e.g. expect the contents of the buffer in string form to be this many bytes long.

The character count is cached, so this function is very fast.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of characters in the buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectApplyTag 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectApplyTag(f func(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectApplyTag is emitted to apply a tag to a range of text in a GtkTextBuffer.

Applying actually occurs in the default handler.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the start and end iters (or has to revalidate them).

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.ApplyTag(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertWithTags(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertRange().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectBeginUserAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectBeginUserAction(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBeginUserAction is emitted at the beginning of a single user-visible operation on a GtkTextBuffer.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.BeginUserAction(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertRangeInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.Backspace(), gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteSelection().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectChanged 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted when the content of a GtkTextBuffer has changed.

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectDeleteRange 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectDeleteRange(f func(start, end *TextIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeleteRange is emitted to delete a range from a GtkTextBuffer.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the start and end iters (or has to revalidate them). The default signal handler revalidates the start and end iters to both point to the location where text was deleted. Handlers which run after the default handler (see g_signal_connect_after()) do not have access to the deleted text.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.Delete().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectEndUserAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectEndUserAction(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEndUserAction is emitted at the end of a single user-visible operation on the GtkTextBuffer.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.EndUserAction(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.InsertRangeInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteInteractive(), gtk.TextBuffer.Backspace(), gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteSelection(), gtk.TextBuffer.Backspace().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectInsertChildAnchor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectInsertChildAnchor(f func(location *TextIter, anchor *TextChildAnchor)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertChildAnchor is emitted to insert a GtkTextChildAnchor in a GtkTextBuffer.

Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the location iter (or has to revalidate it). The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the inserted anchor.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.InsertChildAnchor().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectInsertPaintable 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectInsertPaintable(f func(location *TextIter, paintable gdk.Paintabler)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertPaintable is emitted to insert a GdkPaintable in a GtkTextBuffer.

Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the location iter (or has to revalidate it). The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the inserted paintable.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.InsertPaintable().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectInsertText 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectInsertText(f func(location *TextIter, text string, len int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertText is emitted to insert text in a GtkTextBuffer.

Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the location iter (or has to revalidate it). The default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the inserted text.

See also: gtk,textbuffer.Insert, gtk.TextBuffer.InsertRange().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectMarkDeleted 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectMarkDeleted(f func(mark *TextMark)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMarkDeleted is emitted as notification after a GtkTextMark is deleted.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteMark().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectMarkSet 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectMarkSet(f func(location *TextIter, mark *TextMark)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMarkSet is emitted as notification after a GtkTextMark is set.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.CreateMark(), gtk.TextBuffer.MoveMark().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectModifiedChanged 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectModifiedChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectModifiedChanged is emitted when the modified bit of a GtkTextBuffer flips.

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.SetModified().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectPasteDone 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectPasteDone(f func(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPasteDone is emitted after paste operation has been completed.

This is useful to properly scroll the view to the end of the pasted text. See gtk.TextBuffer.PasteClipboard() for more details.

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectRedo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectRedo(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRedo is emitted when a request has been made to redo the previously undone operation.

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectRemoveTag 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectRemoveTag(f func(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRemoveTag is emitted to remove all occurrences of tag from a range of text in a GtkTextBuffer.

Removal actually occurs in the default handler.

Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not invalidate the start and end iters (or has to revalidate them).

See also: gtk.TextBuffer.RemoveTag().

func (*TextBuffer) ConnectUndo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) ConnectUndo(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUndo is emitted when a request has been made to undo the previous operation or set of operations that have been grouped together.

func (*TextBuffer) CopyClipboard 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CopyClipboard(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard)

CopyClipboard copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipboard: GdkClipboard object to copy to.

func (*TextBuffer) CreateChildAnchor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CreateChildAnchor(iter *TextIter) *TextChildAnchor

CreateChildAnchor creates and inserts a child anchor.

This is a convenience function which simply creates a child anchor with gtk.TextChildAnchor.New and inserts it into the buffer with gtk.TextBuffer.InsertChildAnchor().

The new anchor is owned by the buffer; no reference count is returned to the caller of this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: location in the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • textChildAnchor: created child anchor.

func (*TextBuffer) CreateMark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CreateMark(markName string, where *TextIter, leftGravity bool) *TextMark

CreateMark creates a mark at position where.

If mark_name is NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieved by name using gtk.TextBuffer.GetMark(). If a mark has left gravity, and text is inserted at the mark’s current location, the mark will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity (left_gravity = FALSE), the mark will end up on the right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right side of the text you’re typing).

The caller of this function does not own a reference to the returned TextMark, so you can ignore the return value if you like. Marks are owned by the buffer and go away when the buffer does.

Emits the GtkTextBuffer::mark-set signal as notification of the mark's initial placement.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • markName (optional): name for mark, or NULL.
  • where: location to place mark.
  • leftGravity: whether the mark has left gravity.

The function returns the following values:

  • textMark: new TextMark object.

func (*TextBuffer) CutClipboard 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) CutClipboard(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard, defaultEditable bool)

CutClipboard copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard, then deletes said text if it’s editable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipboard: GdkClipboard object to cut to.
  • defaultEditable: default editability of the buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) Delete 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Delete(start, end *TextIter)

Delete deletes text between start and end.

The order of start and end is not actually relevant; gtk_text_buffer_delete() will reorder them.

This function actually emits the “delete-range” signal, and the default handler of that signal deletes the text. Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after calling this function; however, the start and end will be re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: position in buffer.
  • end: another position in buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) DeleteInteractive 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) DeleteInteractive(startIter, endIter *TextIter, defaultEditable bool) bool

DeleteInteractive deletes all editable text in the given range.

Calls gtk.TextBuffer.Delete() for each editable sub-range of [start,end). start and end are revalidated to point to the location of the last deleted range, or left untouched if no text was deleted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startIter: start of range to delete.
  • endIter: end of range.
  • defaultEditable: whether the buffer is editable by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether some text was actually deleted.

func (*TextBuffer) DeleteMark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) DeleteMark(mark *TextMark)

DeleteMark deletes mark, so that it’s no longer located anywhere in the buffer.

Removes the reference the buffer holds to the mark, so if you haven’t called g_object_ref() on the mark, it will be freed. Even if the mark isn’t freed, most operations on mark become invalid, until it gets added to a buffer again with gtk.TextBuffer.AddMark(). Use gtk.TextMark.GetDeleted() to find out if a mark has been removed from its buffer.

The gtk.TextBuffer::mark-deleted signal will be emitted as notification after the mark is deleted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark: GtkTextMark in buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) DeleteMarkByName 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) DeleteMarkByName(name string)

DeleteMarkByName deletes the mark named name; the mark must exist.

See gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteMark() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of a mark in buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) DeleteSelection 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) DeleteSelection(interactive, defaultEditable bool) bool

DeleteSelection deletes the range between the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks, that is, the currently-selected text.

If interactive is TRUE, the editability of the selection will be considered (users can’t delete uneditable text).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • interactive: whether the deletion is caused by user interaction.
  • defaultEditable: whether the buffer is editable by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether there was a non-empty selection to delete.

func (*TextBuffer) EnableUndo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) EnableUndo() bool

EnableUndo gets whether the buffer is saving modifications to the buffer to allow for undo and redo actions.

See gtk.TextBuffer.BeginIrreversibleAction() and gtk.TextBuffer.EndIrreversibleAction() to create changes to the buffer that cannot be undone.

The function returns the following values:

func (*TextBuffer) EndIrreversibleAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) EndIrreversibleAction()

EndIrreversibleAction denotes the end of an action that may not be undone.

This will cause any previous operations in the undo/redo queue to be cleared.

This should be called after completing modifications to the text buffer after gtk_text_buffer_begin_irreversible_action() was called.

You may nest calls to gtk_text_buffer_begin_irreversible_action() and gtk_text_buffer_end_irreversible_action() pairs.

func (*TextBuffer) EndIter 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) EndIter() *TextIter

EndIter initializes iter with the “end iterator,” one past the last valid character in the text buffer.

If dereferenced with gtk.TextIter.GetChar(), the end iterator has a character value of 0. The entire buffer lies in the range from the first position in the buffer (call gtk.TextBuffer.GetStartIter() to get character position 0) to the end iterator.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.

func (*TextBuffer) EndUserAction 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) EndUserAction()

EndUserAction ends a user-visible operation.

Should be paired with a call to gtk.TextBuffer.BeginUserAction(). See that function for a full explanation.

func (*TextBuffer) GetInsert 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) GetInsert() *TextMark

GetInsert returns the mark that represents the cursor (insertion point).

Equivalent to calling gtk.TextBuffer.GetMark() to get the mark named “insert”, but very slightly more efficient, and involves less typing.

The function returns the following values:

  • textMark: insertion point mark.

func (*TextBuffer) HasSelection 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) HasSelection() bool

HasSelection indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the there is text selected.

func (*TextBuffer) Insert 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Insert(iter *TextIter, text string)

Insert inserts len bytes of text at position iter.

If len is -1, text must be nul-terminated and will be inserted in its entirety. Emits the “insert-text” signal; insertion actually occurs in the default handler for the signal. iter is invalidated when insertion occurs (because the buffer contents change), but the default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the inserted text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: position in the buffer.
  • text in UTF-8 format.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertAtCursor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertAtCursor(text string)

InsertAtCursor inserts text in buffer.

Simply calls gtk.TextBuffer.Insert(), using the current cursor position as the insertion point.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text in UTF-8 format.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertChildAnchor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertChildAnchor(iter *TextIter, anchor *TextChildAnchor)

InsertChildAnchor inserts a child widget anchor into the text buffer at iter.

The anchor will be counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include this character for child anchors, but the “text” variants do not. E.g. see gtk.TextBuffer.GetSlice() and gtk.TextBuffer.GetText().

Consider gtk.TextBuffer.CreateChildAnchor() as a more convenient alternative to this function. The buffer will add a reference to the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: location to insert the anchor.
  • anchor: GtkTextChildAnchor.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertInteractive 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertInteractive(iter *TextIter, text string, defaultEditable bool) bool

InsertInteractive inserts text in buffer.

Like gtk.TextBuffer.Insert(), but the insertion will not occur if iter is at a non-editable location in the buffer. Usually you want to prevent insertions at ineditable locations if the insertion results from a user action (is interactive).

default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the result of gtk.TextView.GetEditable() is appropriate here.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: position in buffer.
  • text: some UTF-8 text.
  • defaultEditable: default editability of buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether text was actually inserted.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertInteractiveAtCursor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertInteractiveAtCursor(text string, defaultEditable bool) bool

InsertInteractiveAtCursor inserts text in buffer.

Calls gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive() at the cursor position.

default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the result of gtk.TextView.GetEditable() is appropriate here.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text in UTF-8 format.
  • defaultEditable: default editability of buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether text was actually inserted.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertMarkup 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertMarkup(iter *TextIter, markup string)

InsertMarkup inserts the text in markup at position iter.

markup will be inserted in its entirety and must be nul-terminated and valid UTF-8. Emits the gtk.TextBuffer::insert-text signal, possibly multiple times; insertion actually occurs in the default handler for the signal. iter will point to the end of the inserted text on return.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: location to insert the markup.
  • markup: nul-terminated UTF-8 string containing Pango markup.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertPaintable 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertPaintable(iter *TextIter, paintable gdk.Paintabler)

InsertPaintable inserts an image into the text buffer at iter.

The image will be counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include this character for paintable, but the “text” variants do not. e.g. see gtk.TextBuffer.GetSlice() and gtk.TextBuffer.GetText().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: location to insert the paintable.
  • paintable: GdkPaintable.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertRange 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertRange(iter, start, end *TextIter)

InsertRange copies text, tags, and paintables between start and end and inserts the copy at iter.

The order of start and end doesn’t matter.

Used instead of simply getting/inserting text because it preserves images and tags. If start and end are in a different buffer from buffer, the two buffers must share the same tag table.

Implemented via emissions of the insert_text and apply_tag signals, so expect those.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: position in buffer.
  • start: position in a GtkTextBuffer.
  • end: another position in the same buffer as start.

func (*TextBuffer) InsertRangeInteractive 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) InsertRangeInteractive(iter, start, end *TextIter, defaultEditable bool) bool

InsertRangeInteractive copies text, tags, and paintables between start and end and inserts the copy at iter.

Same as gtk.TextBuffer.InsertRange(), but does nothing if the insertion point isn’t editable. The default_editable parameter indicates whether the text is editable at iter if no tags enclosing iter affect editability. Typically the result of gtk.TextView.GetEditable() is appropriate here.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: position in buffer.
  • start: position in a GtkTextBuffer.
  • end: another position in the same buffer as start.
  • defaultEditable: default editability of the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether an insertion was possible at iter.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtChildAnchor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtChildAnchor(anchor *TextChildAnchor) *TextIter

IterAtChildAnchor obtains the location of anchor within buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • anchor: child anchor that appears in buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to be initialized.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtLine 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtLine(lineNumber int) (*TextIter, bool)

IterAtLine initializes iter to the start of the given line.

If line_number is greater than or equal to the number of lines in the buffer, the end iterator is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lineNumber: line number counting from 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.
  • ok: whether the exact position has been found.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtLineIndex 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtLineIndex(lineNumber, byteIndex int) (*TextIter, bool)

IterAtLineIndex obtains an iterator pointing to byte_index within the given line.

byte_index must be the start of a UTF-8 character. Note bytes, not characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.

If line_number is greater than or equal to the number of lines in the buffer, the end iterator is returned. And if byte_index is off the end of the line, the iterator at the end of the line is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lineNumber: line number counting from 0.
  • byteIndex: byte index from start of line.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.
  • ok: whether the exact position has been found.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtLineOffset 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtLineOffset(lineNumber, charOffset int) (*TextIter, bool)

IterAtLineOffset obtains an iterator pointing to char_offset within the given line.

Note characters, not bytes; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.

If line_number is greater than or equal to the number of lines in the buffer, the end iterator is returned. And if char_offset is off the end of the line, the iterator at the end of the line is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lineNumber: line number counting from 0.
  • charOffset: char offset from start of line.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.
  • ok: whether the exact position has been found.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtMark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtMark(mark *TextMark) *TextIter

IterAtMark initializes iter with the current position of mark.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark: GtkTextMark in buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.

func (*TextBuffer) IterAtOffset 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) IterAtOffset(charOffset int) *TextIter

IterAtOffset initializes iter to a position char_offset chars from the start of the entire buffer.

If char_offset is -1 or greater than the number of characters in the buffer, iter is initialized to the end iterator, the iterator one past the last valid character in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • charOffset: char offset from start of buffer, counting from 0, or -1.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.

func (*TextBuffer) LineCount 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) LineCount() int

LineCount obtains the number of lines in the buffer.

This value is cached, so the function is very fast.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of lines in the buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) Mark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Mark(name string) *TextMark

Mark returns the mark named name in buffer buffer, or NULL if no such mark exists in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name: mark name.

The function returns the following values:

  • textMark (optional) or NULL.

func (*TextBuffer) MaxUndoLevels 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) MaxUndoLevels() uint

MaxUndoLevels gets the maximum number of undo levels to perform.

If 0, unlimited undo actions may be performed. Note that this may have a memory usage impact as it requires storing an additional copy of the inserted or removed text within the text buffer.

The function returns the following values:

func (*TextBuffer) Modified 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Modified() bool

Modified indicates whether the buffer has been modified since the last call to gtk.TextBuffer.SetModified() set the modification flag to FALSE.

Used for example to enable a “save” function in a text editor.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the buffer has been modified.

func (*TextBuffer) MoveMark 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) MoveMark(mark *TextMark, where *TextIter)

MoveMark moves mark to the new location where.

Emits the GtkTextBuffer::mark-set signal as notification of the move.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark: GtkTextMark.
  • where: new location for mark in buffer.

func (*TextBuffer) MoveMarkByName 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) MoveMarkByName(name string, where *TextIter)

MoveMarkByName moves the mark named name (which must exist) to location where.

See gtk.TextBuffer.MoveMark() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of a mark.
  • where: new location for mark.

func (*TextBuffer) PasteClipboard 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) PasteClipboard(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard, overrideLocation *TextIter, defaultEditable bool)

PasteClipboard pastes the contents of a clipboard.

If override_location is NULL, the pasted text will be inserted at the cursor position, or the buffer selection will be replaced if the selection is non-empty.

Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we’ll ask for the paste data and return, and at some point later after the main loop runs, the paste data will be inserted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipboard: GdkClipboard to paste from.
  • overrideLocation (optional): location to insert pasted text, or NULL.
  • defaultEditable: whether the buffer is editable by default.

func (*TextBuffer) PlaceCursor 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) PlaceCursor(where *TextIter)

PlaceCursor: this function moves the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks simultaneously.

If you move them to the same place in two steps with gtk.TextBuffer.MoveMark(), you will temporarily select a region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can be optimized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • where to put the cursor.

func (*TextBuffer) Redo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Redo()

Redo redoes the next redoable action on the buffer, if there is one.

func (*TextBuffer) RemoveAllTags 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) RemoveAllTags(start, end *TextIter)

RemoveAllTags removes all tags in the range between start and end.

Be careful with this function; it could remove tags added in code unrelated to the code you’re currently writing. That is, using this function is probably a bad idea if you have two or more unrelated code sections that add tags.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start: one bound of range to be untagged.
  • end: other bound of range to be untagged.

func (*TextBuffer) RemoveSelectionClipboard 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) RemoveSelectionClipboard(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard)

RemoveSelectionClipboard removes a GdkClipboard added with gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clipboard: GdkClipboard added to buffer by gtk.TextBuffer.AddSelectionClipboard().

func (*TextBuffer) RemoveTag 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) RemoveTag(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)

RemoveTag emits the “remove-tag” signal.

The default handler for the signal removes all occurrences of tag from the given range. start and end don’t have to be in order.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag: GtkTextTag.
  • start: one bound of range to be untagged.
  • end: other bound of range to be untagged.

func (*TextBuffer) RemoveTagByName 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) RemoveTagByName(name string, start, end *TextIter)

RemoveTagByName emits the “remove-tag” signal.

Calls gtk.TextTagTable.Lookup() on the buffer’s tag table to get a GtkTextTag, then calls gtk.TextBuffer.RemoveTag().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of a GtkTextTag.
  • start: one bound of range to be untagged.
  • end: other bound of range to be untagged.

func (*TextBuffer) SelectRange 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SelectRange(ins, bound *TextIter)

SelectRange: this function moves the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks simultaneously.

If you move them in two steps with gtk.TextBuffer.MoveMark(), you will temporarily select a region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can be optimized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ins: where to put the “insert” mark.
  • bound: where to put the “selection_bound” mark.

func (*TextBuffer) SelectionBound 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SelectionBound() *TextMark

SelectionBound returns the mark that represents the selection bound.

Equivalent to calling gtk.TextBuffer.GetMark() to get the mark named “selection_bound”, but very slightly more efficient, and involves less typing.

The currently-selected text in buffer is the region between the “selection_bound” and “insert” marks. If “selection_bound” and “insert” are in the same place, then there is no current selection. gtk.TextBuffer.GetSelectionBounds() is another convenient function for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there’s a selection and what its bounds are.

The function returns the following values:

  • textMark: selection bound mark.

func (*TextBuffer) SelectionBounds 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SelectionBounds() (start, end *TextIter, ok bool)

SelectionBounds returns TRUE if some text is selected; places the bounds of the selection in start and end.

If the selection has length 0, then start and end are filled in with the same value. start and end will be in ascending order. If start and end are NULL, then they are not filled in, but the return value still indicates whether text is selected.

The function returns the following values:

  • start: iterator to initialize with selection start.
  • end: iterator to initialize with selection end.
  • ok: whether the selection has nonzero length.

func (*TextBuffer) SelectionContent 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SelectionContent() *gdk.ContentProvider

SelectionContent: get a content provider for this buffer.

It can be used to make the content of buffer available in a GdkClipboard, see gdk.Clipboard.SetContent().

The function returns the following values:

  • contentProvider: new GdkContentProvider.

func (*TextBuffer) SetEnableUndo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SetEnableUndo(enableUndo bool)

SetEnableUndo sets whether or not to enable undoable actions in the text buffer.

If enabled, the user will be able to undo the last number of actions up to gtk.TextBuffer.GetMaxUndoLevels().

See gtk.TextBuffer.BeginIrreversibleAction() and gtk.TextBuffer.EndIrreversibleAction() to create changes to the buffer that cannot be undone.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableUndo: TRUE to enable undo.

func (*TextBuffer) SetMaxUndoLevels 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SetMaxUndoLevels(maxUndoLevels uint)

SetMaxUndoLevels sets the maximum number of undo levels to perform.

If 0, unlimited undo actions may be performed. Note that this may have a memory usage impact as it requires storing an additional copy of the inserted or removed text within the text buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • maxUndoLevels: maximum number of undo actions to perform.

func (*TextBuffer) SetModified 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SetModified(setting bool)

SetModified: used to keep track of whether the buffer has been modified since the last time it was saved.

Whenever the buffer is saved to disk, call gtk_text_buffer_set_modified (buffer, FALSE). When the buffer is modified, it will automatically toggled on the modified bit again. When the modified bit flips, the buffer emits the gtk.TextBuffer::modified-changed signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: modification flag setting.

func (*TextBuffer) SetText 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) SetText(text string)

SetText deletes current contents of buffer, and inserts text instead.

If len is -1, text must be nul-terminated. text must be valid UTF-8.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text: UTF-8 text to insert.

func (*TextBuffer) Slice 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Slice(start, end *TextIter, includeHiddenChars bool) string

Slice returns the text in the range [start,end).

Excludes undisplayed text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if include_hidden_chars is FALSE. The returned string includes a 0xFFFC character whenever the buffer contains embedded images, so byte and character indexes into the returned string do correspond to byte and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with gtk.TextBuffer.GetText(). Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a paintable or widget is in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start of a range.
  • end of a range.
  • includeHiddenChars: whether to include invisible text.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: allocated UTF-8 string.

func (*TextBuffer) StartIter 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) StartIter() *TextIter

StartIter: initialized iter with the first position in the text buffer.

This is the same as using gtk.TextBuffer.GetIterAtOffset() to get the iter at character offset 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: iterator to initialize.

func (*TextBuffer) TagTable 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) TagTable() *TextTagTable

TagTable: get the GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • textTagTable buffer’s tag table.

func (*TextBuffer) Text 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Text(start, end *TextIter, includeHiddenChars bool) string

Text returns the text in the range [start,end).

Excludes undisplayed text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if include_hidden_chars is FALSE. Does not include characters representing embedded images, so byte and character indexes into the returned string do not correspond to byte and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with gtk.TextBuffer.GetSlice().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start of a range.
  • end of a range.
  • includeHiddenChars: whether to include invisible text.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: allocated UTF-8 string.

func (*TextBuffer) Undo 

func (buffer *TextBuffer) Undo()

Undo undoes the last undoable action on the buffer, if there is one.

type TextBufferClass added in v0.0.5 

type TextBufferClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextBufferClass class structure for TextBuffer.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TextBufferOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TextBufferOverrides struct {
	// ApplyTag emits the “apply-tag” signal on buffer.
	//
	// The default handler for the signal applies tag to the given range.
	// start and end do not have to be in order.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - tag: GtkTextTag.
	//   - start: one bound of range to be tagged.
	//   - end: other bound of range to be tagged.
	//
	ApplyTag func(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)
	// BeginUserAction: called to indicate that the buffer operations between
	// here and a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
	// user-visible operation.
	//
	// The operations between gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
	// gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when
	// creating an undo stack. GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
	// gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with a call
	// to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the “begin-user-action”
	// and “end-user-action” signals only for the outermost pair of calls.
	// This allows you to build user actions from other user actions.
	//
	// The “interactive” buffer mutation functions, such as
	// gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive(), automatically call begin/end user
	// action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's no need to
	// add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a single call to
	// one of those functions.
	BeginUserAction func()
	Changed         func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - start
	//   - end
	//
	DeleteRange func(start, end *TextIter)
	// EndUserAction ends a user-visible operation.
	//
	// Should be paired with a call to gtk.TextBuffer.BeginUserAction().
	// See that function for a full explanation.
	EndUserAction func()
	// InsertChildAnchor inserts a child widget anchor into the text buffer at
	// iter.
	//
	// The anchor will be counted as one character in character counts,
	// and when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented
	// by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the
	// “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
	// this character for child anchors, but the “text” variants do not. E.g.
	// see gtk.TextBuffer.GetSlice() and gtk.TextBuffer.GetText().
	//
	// Consider gtk.TextBuffer.CreateChildAnchor() as a more convenient
	// alternative to this function. The buffer will add a reference to the
	// anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter: location to insert the anchor.
	//   - anchor: GtkTextChildAnchor.
	//
	InsertChildAnchor func(iter *TextIter, anchor *TextChildAnchor)
	// InsertPaintable inserts an image into the text buffer at iter.
	//
	// The image will be counted as one character in character counts,
	// and when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented
	// by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the
	// “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
	// this character for paintable, but the “text” variants do not. e.g.
	// see gtk.TextBuffer.GetSlice() and gtk.TextBuffer.GetText().
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter: location to insert the paintable.
	//   - paintable: GdkPaintable.
	//
	InsertPaintable func(iter *TextIter, paintable gdk.Paintabler)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - pos
	//   - newText
	//   - newTextLength
	//
	InsertText func(pos *TextIter, newText string, newTextLength int)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	MarkDeleted func(mark *TextMark)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - location
	//   - mark
	//
	MarkSet         func(location *TextIter, mark *TextMark)
	ModifiedChanged func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	PasteDone func(clipboard *gdk.Clipboard)
	// Redo redoes the next redoable action on the buffer, if there is one.
	Redo func()
	// RemoveTag emits the “remove-tag” signal.
	//
	// The default handler for the signal removes all occurrences of tag from
	// the given range. start and end don’t have to be in order.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - tag: GtkTextTag.
	//   - start: one bound of range to be untagged.
	//   - end: other bound of range to be untagged.
	//
	RemoveTag func(tag *TextTag, start, end *TextIter)
	// Undo undoes the last undoable action on the buffer, if there is one.
	Undo func()
}

TextBufferOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TextCharPredicate 

type TextCharPredicate func(ch uint32) (ok bool)

TextCharPredicate: predicate function used by gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char() and gtk_text_iter_backward_find_char().

type TextChildAnchor 

type TextChildAnchor struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextChildAnchor: GtkTextChildAnchor is a spot in a GtkTextBuffer where child widgets can be “anchored”.

The anchor can have multiple widgets anchored, to allow for multiple views.

func NewTextChildAnchor 

func NewTextChildAnchor() *TextChildAnchor

NewTextChildAnchor creates a new GtkTextChildAnchor.

Usually you would then insert it into a GtkTextBuffer with gtk.TextBuffer.InsertChildAnchor(). To perform the creation and insertion in one step, use the convenience function gtk.TextBuffer.CreateChildAnchor().

The function returns the following values:

  • textChildAnchor: new GtkTextChildAnchor.

func (*TextChildAnchor) Deleted 

func (anchor *TextChildAnchor) Deleted() bool

Deleted determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from the buffer.

Keep in mind that the child anchor will be unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors will also be finalized.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer.

func (*TextChildAnchor) Widgets 

func (anchor *TextChildAnchor) Widgets() []Widgetter

Widgets gets a list of all widgets anchored at this child anchor.

The order in which the widgets are returned is not defined.

The function returns the following values:

  • widgets: an array of widgets anchored at anchor.

type TextChildAnchorClass added in v0.0.5 

type TextChildAnchorClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextChildAnchorClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TextChildAnchorOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TextChildAnchorOverrides struct {
}

TextChildAnchorOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TextDirection 

type TextDirection C.gint

TextDirection: reading directions for text. 

const (
	// TextDirNone: no direction.
	TextDirNone TextDirection = iota
	// TextDirLTR: left to right text direction.
	TextDirLTR
	// TextDirRTL: right to left text direction.
	TextDirRTL
)

func GetLocaleDirection 

func GetLocaleDirection() TextDirection

GetLocaleDirection: get the direction of the current locale. This is the expected reading direction for text and UI.

This function depends on the current locale being set with setlocale() and will default to setting the GTK_TEXT_DIR_LTR direction otherwise. GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE will never be returned.

GTK sets the default text direction according to the locale during gtk_init(), and you should normally use gtk_widget_get_direction() or gtk_widget_get_default_direction() to obtain the current direction.

This function is only needed rare cases when the locale is changed after GTK has already been initialized. In this case, you can use it to update the default text direction as follows: 

setlocale (LC_ALL, new_locale);
direction = gtk_get_locale_direction ();
gtk_widget_set_default_direction (direction);.

The function returns the following values:

  • textDirection of the current locale.

func WidgetGetDefaultDirection 

func WidgetGetDefaultDirection() TextDirection

WidgetGetDefaultDirection obtains the current default reading direction.

See gtk.Widget().SetDefaultDirection.

The function returns the following values:

  • textDirection: current default direction.

func (TextDirection) String 

func (t TextDirection) String() string

String returns the name in string for TextDirection.

type TextExtendSelection 

type TextExtendSelection C.gint

TextExtendSelection: granularity types that extend the text selection. Use the TextView::extend-selection signal to customize the selection. 

const (
	// TextExtendSelectionWord selects the current word. It is triggered by a
	// double-click for example.
	TextExtendSelectionWord TextExtendSelection = iota
	// TextExtendSelectionLine selects the current line. It is triggered by a
	// triple-click for example.
	TextExtendSelectionLine
)

func (TextExtendSelection) String 

func (t TextExtendSelection) String() string

String returns the name in string for TextExtendSelection.

type TextIter 

type TextIter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextIter: iterator for the contents of a GtkTextBuffer.

You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TextIter) Assign 

func (iter *TextIter) Assign(other *TextIter)

Assign assigns the value of other to iter.

This function is not useful in applications, because iterators can be assigned with GtkTextIter i = j;.

The function is used by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • other GtkTextIter.

func (*TextIter) BackwardChar 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardChar() bool

BackwardChar moves backward by one character offset.

Returns TRUE if movement was possible; if iter was the first in the buffer (character offset 0), this function returns FALSE for convenience when writing loops.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether movement was possible.

func (*TextIter) BackwardChars 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardChars(count int) bool

BackwardChars moves count characters backward, if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of characters to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardCursorPosition 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardCursorPosition() bool

BackwardCursorPosition: like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved.

func (*TextIter) BackwardCursorPositions 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardCursorPositions(count int) bool

BackwardCursorPositions moves up to count cursor positions.

See gtk.TextIter.ForwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of positions to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardFindChar 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardFindChar(pred TextCharPredicate, limit *TextIter) bool

BackwardFindChar: same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from iter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pred: function to be called on each character.
  • limit (optional): search limit, or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether a match was found.

func (*TextIter) BackwardLine 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardLine() bool

BackwardLine moves iter to the start of the previous line.

Returns TRUE if iter could be moved; i.e. if iter was at character offset 0, this function returns FALSE. Therefore, if iter was already on line 0, but not at the start of the line, iter is snapped to the start of the line and the function returns TRUE. (Note that this implies that in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.).

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved.

func (*TextIter) BackwardLines 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardLines(count int) bool

BackwardLines moves count lines backward, if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves forward by 0 - count lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of lines to move backward.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardSearch 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardSearch(str string, flags TextSearchFlags, limit *TextIter) (matchStart *TextIter, matchEnd *TextIter, ok bool)

BackwardSearch: same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.

match_end will never be set to a GtkTextIter located after iter, even if there is a possible match_start before or at iter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: search string.
  • flags: bitmask of flags affecting the search.
  • limit (optional): location of last possible match_start, or NULL for start of buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • matchStart (optional): return location for start of match, or NULL.
  • matchEnd (optional): return location for end of match, or NULL.
  • ok: whether a match was found.

func (*TextIter) BackwardSentenceStart 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardSentenceStart() bool

BackwardSentenceStart moves backward to the previous sentence start.

If iter is already at the start of a sentence, moves backward to the next one.

Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) BackwardSentenceStarts 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardSentenceStarts(count int) bool

BackwardSentenceStarts calls gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_start() up to count times.

If count is negative, moves forward instead of backward.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of sentences to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) BackwardToTagToggle 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardToTagToggle(tag *TextTag) bool

BackwardToTagToggle moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if tag is NULL.

If no matching tag toggles are found, returns FALSE, otherwise TRUE. Does not return toggles located at iter, only toggles before iter. Sets iter to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer if no toggle is found.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag (optional): GtkTextTag, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether we found a tag toggle before iter.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleCursorPosition 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleCursorPosition() bool

BackwardVisibleCursorPosition moves iter forward to the previous visible cursor position.

See gtk.TextIter.BackwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleCursorPositions 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleCursorPositions(count int) bool

BackwardVisibleCursorPositions moves up to count visible cursor positions.

See gtk.TextIter.BackwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of positions to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleLine 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleLine() bool

BackwardVisibleLine moves iter to the start of the previous visible line.

Returns TRUE if iter could be moved; i.e. if iter was at character offset 0, this function returns FALSE. Therefore if iter was already on line 0, but not at the start of the line, iter is snapped to the start of the line and the function returns TRUE. (Note that this implies that in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.).

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleLines 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleLines(count int) bool

BackwardVisibleLines moves count visible lines backward, if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves forward by 0 - count lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of lines to move backward.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleWordStart 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleWordStart() bool

BackwardVisibleWordStart moves backward to the previous visible word start.

If iter is currently on a word start, moves backward to the next one after that.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) BackwardVisibleWordStarts 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardVisibleWordStarts(count int) bool

BackwardVisibleWordStarts calls gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start() up to count times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of times to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) BackwardWordStart 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardWordStart() bool

BackwardWordStart moves backward to the previous word start.

If iter is currently on a word start, moves backward to the next one after that.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) BackwardWordStarts 

func (iter *TextIter) BackwardWordStarts(count int) bool

BackwardWordStarts calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to count times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of times to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) Buffer 

func (iter *TextIter) Buffer() *TextBuffer

Buffer returns the GtkTextBuffer this iterator is associated with.

The function returns the following values:

  • textBuffer: buffer.

func (*TextIter) BytesInLine 

func (iter *TextIter) BytesInLine() int

BytesInLine returns the number of bytes in the line containing iter, including the paragraph delimiters.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of bytes in the line.

func (*TextIter) CanInsert 

func (iter *TextIter) CanInsert(defaultEditability bool) bool

CanInsert: considering the default editability of the buffer, and tags that affect editability, determines whether text inserted at iter would be editable.

If text inserted at iter would be editable then the user should be allowed to insert text at iter. gtk.TextBuffer.InsertInteractive() uses this function to decide whether insertions are allowed at a given position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • defaultEditability: TRUE if text is editable by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether text inserted at iter would be editable.

func (*TextIter) Char 

func (iter *TextIter) Char() uint32

Char: unicode character at this iterator is returned.

Equivalent to operator* on a C++ iterator. If the element at this iterator is a non-character element, such as an image embedded in the buffer, the Unicode “unknown” character 0xFFFC is returned. If invoked on the end iterator, zero is returned; zero is not a valid Unicode character.

So you can write a loop which ends when this function returns 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • gunichar: unicode character, or 0 if iter is not dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) CharsInLine 

func (iter *TextIter) CharsInLine() int

CharsInLine returns the number of characters in the line containing iter, including the paragraph delimiters.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of characters in the line.

func (*TextIter) ChildAnchor 

func (iter *TextIter) ChildAnchor() *TextChildAnchor

ChildAnchor: if the location at iter contains a child anchor, the anchor is returned.

Otherwise, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • textChildAnchor: anchor at iter.

func (*TextIter) Compare 

func (lhs *TextIter) Compare(rhs *TextIter) int

Compare: qsort()-style function that returns negative if lhs is less than rhs, positive if lhs is greater than rhs, and 0 if they’re equal.

Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer is less than the second character in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rhs: another GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: -1 if lhs is less than rhs, 1 if lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal.

func (*TextIter) Copy 

func (iter *TextIter) Copy() *TextIter

Copy creates a dynamically-allocated copy of an iterator.

This function is not useful in applications, because iterators can be copied with a simple assignment (GtkTextIter i = j;).

The function is used by language bindings.

The function returns the following values:

  • textIter: copy of the iter, free with gtk.TextIter.Free().

func (*TextIter) Editable 

func (iter *TextIter) Editable(defaultSetting bool) bool

Editable returns whether the character at iter is within an editable region of text.

Non-editable text is “locked” and can’t be changed by the user via TextView. If no tags applied to this text affect editability, default_setting will be returned.

You don’t want to use this function to decide whether text can be inserted at iter, because for insertion you don’t want to know whether the char at iter is inside an editable range, you want to know whether a new character inserted at iter would be inside an editable range. Use gtk.TextIter.CanInsert() to handle this case.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • defaultSetting: TRUE if text is editable by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is inside an editable range.

func (*TextIter) EndsLine 

func (iter *TextIter) EndsLine() bool

EndsLine returns TRUE if iter points to the start of the paragraph delimiter characters for a line.

Delimiters will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character.

Note that an iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no paragraph delimiter chars there.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is at the end of a line.

func (*TextIter) EndsSentence 

func (iter *TextIter) EndsSentence() bool

EndsSentence determines whether iter ends a sentence.

Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is at the end of a sentence.

func (*TextIter) EndsTag 

func (iter *TextIter) EndsTag(tag *TextTag) bool

EndsTag returns TRUE if tag is toggled off at exactly this point.

If tag is NULL, returns TRUE if any tag is toggled off at this point.

Note that if this function returns TRUE, it means that iter is at the end of the tagged range, but that the character at iter is outside the tagged range. In other words, unlike gtk.TextIter.StartsTag(), if this function returns TRUE, gtk.TextIter.HasTag() will return FALSE for the same parameters.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag (optional): GtkTextTag, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is the end of a range tagged with tag.

func (*TextIter) EndsWord 

func (iter *TextIter) EndsWord() bool

EndsWord determines whether iter ends a natural-language word.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is at the end of a word.

func (*TextIter) Equal 

func (lhs *TextIter) Equal(rhs *TextIter) bool

Equal tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible mechanism.

This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it’s a bit faster than gtk.TextIter.Compare().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rhs: another GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer.

func (*TextIter) ForwardChar 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardChar() bool

ForwardChar moves iter forward by one character offset.

Note that images embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so this function may actually move onto an image instead of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If iter is the end iterator or one character before it, iter will now point at the end iterator, and this function returns FALSE for convenience when writing loops.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardChars 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardChars(count int) bool

ForwardChars moves count characters if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the new position of iter is different from its original position, and dereferenceable (the last iterator in the buffer is not dereferenceable). If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of characters to move, may be negative.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardCursorPosition 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardCursorPosition() bool

ForwardCursorPosition moves iter forward by a single cursor position.

Cursor positions are (unsurprisingly) positions where the cursor can appear. Perhaps surprisingly, there may not be a cursor position between all characters. The most common example for European languages would be a carriage return/newline sequence.

For some Unicode characters, the equivalent of say the letter “a” with an accent mark will be represented as two characters, first the letter then a "combining mark" that causes the accent to be rendered; so the cursor can’t go between those two characters.

See also the pango.LogAttr struct and the pango.Break() function.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardCursorPositions 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardCursorPositions(count int) bool

ForwardCursorPositions moves up to count cursor positions.

See gtk.TextIter.ForwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of positions to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardFindChar 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardFindChar(pred TextCharPredicate, limit *TextIter) bool

ForwardFindChar advances iter, calling pred on each character.

If pred returns TRUE, returns TRUE and stops scanning. If pred never returns TRUE, iter is set to limit if limit is non-NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pred: function to be called on each character.
  • limit (optional): search limit, or NULL for none.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether a match was found.

func (*TextIter) ForwardLine 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardLine() bool

ForwardLine moves iter to the start of the next line.

If the iter is already on the last line of the buffer, moves the iter to the end of the current line. If after the operation, the iter is at the end of the buffer and not dereferenceable, returns FALSE. Otherwise, returns TRUE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter can be dereferenced.

func (*TextIter) ForwardLines 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardLines(count int) bool

ForwardLines moves count lines forward, if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves backward by 0 - count lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of lines to move forward.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardSearch 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardSearch(str string, flags TextSearchFlags, limit *TextIter) (matchStart *TextIter, matchEnd *TextIter, ok bool)

ForwardSearch searches forward for str.

Any match is returned by setting match_start to the first character of the match and match_end to the first character after the match. The search will not continue past limit. Note that a search is a linear or O(n) operation, so you may wish to use limit to avoid locking up your UI on large buffers.

match_start will never be set to a GtkTextIter located before iter, even if there is a possible match_end after or at iter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • str: search string.
  • flags affecting how the search is done.
  • limit (optional): location of last possible match_end, or NULL for the end of the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • matchStart (optional): return location for start of match, or NULL.
  • matchEnd (optional): return location for end of match, or NULL.
  • ok: whether a match was found.

func (*TextIter) ForwardSentenceEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardSentenceEnd() bool

ForwardSentenceEnd moves forward to the next sentence end.

If iter is at the end of a sentence, moves to the next end of sentence.

Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardSentenceEnds 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardSentenceEnds(count int) bool

ForwardSentenceEnds calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() count times.

If count is negative, moves backward instead of forward.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of sentences to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardToEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardToEnd()

ForwardToEnd moves iter forward to the “end iterator”, which points one past the last valid character in the buffer.

gtk_text_iter_get_char() called on the end iterator returns 0, which is convenient for writing loops.

func (*TextIter) ForwardToLineEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardToLineEnd() bool

ForwardToLineEnd moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters.

The possible characters are either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator character.

If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the next line. If iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of the last line), and returns FALSE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardToTagToggle 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardToTagToggle(tag *TextTag) bool

ForwardToTagToggle moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if tag is NULL.

If no matching tag toggles are found, returns FALSE, otherwise TRUE. Does not return toggles located at iter, only toggles after iter. Sets iter to the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer if no toggle is found.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag (optional): GtkTextTag, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether we found a tag toggle after iter.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleCursorPosition 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleCursorPosition() bool

ForwardVisibleCursorPosition moves iter forward to the next visible cursor position.

See gtk.TextIter.ForwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleCursorPositions 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleCursorPositions(count int) bool

ForwardVisibleCursorPositions moves up to count visible cursor positions.

See gtk.TextIter.ForwardCursorPosition() for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of positions to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleLine 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleLine() bool

ForwardVisibleLine moves iter to the start of the next visible line.

Returns TRUE if there was a next line to move to, and FALSE if iter was simply moved to the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if iter was already at the end of the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter can be dereferenced.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleLines 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleLines(count int) bool

ForwardVisibleLines moves count visible lines forward, if possible.

If count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer.

The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves backward by 0 - count lines.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of lines to move forward.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter moved and is dereferenceable.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleWordEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleWordEnd() bool

ForwardVisibleWordEnd moves forward to the next visible word end.

If iter is currently on a word end, moves forward to the next one after that.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardVisibleWordEnds 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardVisibleWordEnds(count int) bool

ForwardVisibleWordEnds calls gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end() up to count times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of times to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardWordEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardWordEnd() bool

ForwardWordEnd moves forward to the next word end.

If iter is currently on a word end, moves forward to the next one after that.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) ForwardWordEnds 

func (iter *TextIter) ForwardWordEnds(count int) bool

ForwardWordEnds calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to count times.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • count: number of times to move.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) HasTag 

func (iter *TextIter) HasTag(tag *TextTag) bool

HasTag returns TRUE if iter points to a character that is part of a range tagged with tag.

See also gtk.TextIter.StartsTag() and gtk.TextIter.EndsTag().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag: GtkTextTag.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is tagged with tag.

func (*TextIter) InRange 

func (iter *TextIter) InRange(start *TextIter, end *TextIter) bool

InRange checks whether iter falls in the range [start, end).

start and end must be in ascending order.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • start of range.
  • end of range.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is in the range.

func (*TextIter) InsideSentence 

func (iter *TextIter) InsideSentence() bool

InsideSentence determines whether iter is inside a sentence (as opposed to in between two sentences, e.g. after a period and before the first letter of the next sentence).

Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is inside a sentence.

func (*TextIter) InsideWord 

func (iter *TextIter) InsideWord() bool

InsideWord determines whether the character pointed by iter is part of a natural-language word (as opposed to say inside some whitespace).

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

Note that if gtk.TextIter.StartsWord() returns TRUE, then this function returns TRUE too, since iter points to the first character of the word.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is inside a word.

func (*TextIter) IsCursorPosition 

func (iter *TextIter) IsCursorPosition() bool

IsCursorPosition: determine if iter is at a cursor position.

See gtk.TextIter.ForwardCursorPosition() or pango.LogAttr or pango.Break() for details on what a cursor position is.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cursor can be placed at iter.

func (*TextIter) IsEnd 

func (iter *TextIter) IsEnd() bool

IsEnd returns TRUE if iter is the end iterator.

This means it is one past the last dereferenceable iterator in the buffer. gtk_text_iter_is_end() is the most efficient way to check whether an iterator is the end iterator.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is the end iterator.

func (*TextIter) IsStart 

func (iter *TextIter) IsStart() bool

IsStart returns TRUE if iter is the first iterator in the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is the first in the buffer.

func (*TextIter) Language 

func (iter *TextIter) Language() *pango.Language

Language returns the language in effect at iter.

If no tags affecting language apply to iter, the return value is identical to that of gtk.GetDefaultLanguage().

The function returns the following values:

  • language in effect at iter.

func (*TextIter) Line 

func (iter *TextIter) Line() int

Line returns the line number containing the iterator.

Lines in a GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first line in the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: line number.

func (*TextIter) LineIndex 

func (iter *TextIter) LineIndex() int

LineIndex returns the byte index of the iterator, counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.

Remember that GtkTextBuffer encodes text in UTF-8, and that characters can require a variable number of bytes to represent.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: distance from start of line, in bytes.

func (*TextIter) LineOffset 

func (iter *TextIter) LineOffset() int

LineOffset returns the character offset of the iterator, counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.

The first character on the line has offset 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: offset from start of line.

func (*TextIter) Marks 

func (iter *TextIter) Marks() []*TextMark

Marks returns a list of all GtkTextMark at this location.

Because marks are not iterable (they don’t take up any "space" in the buffer, they are just marks in between iterable locations), multiple marks can exist in the same place.

The returned list is not in any meaningful order.

The function returns the following values:

  • sList: list of GtkTextMark.

func (*TextIter) Offset 

func (iter *TextIter) Offset() int

Offset returns the character offset of an iterator.

Each character in a GtkTextBuffer has an offset, starting with 0 for the first character in the buffer. Use gtk,textbuffer.GetIterAtOffset to convert an offset back into an iterator.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: character offset.

func (*TextIter) Order 

func (first *TextIter) Order(second *TextIter)

Order swaps the value of first and second if second comes before first in the buffer.

That is, ensures that first and second are in sequence. Most text buffer functions that take a range call this automatically on your behalf, so there’s no real reason to call it yourself in those cases. There are some exceptions, such as gtk.TextIter.InRange(), that expect a pre-sorted range.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • second: another GtkTextIter.

func (*TextIter) Paintable 

func (iter *TextIter) Paintable() *gdk.Paintable

Paintable: if the element at iter is a paintable, the paintable is returned.

Otherwise, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable at iter.

func (*TextIter) SetLine 

func (iter *TextIter) SetLine(lineNumber int)

SetLine moves iterator iter to the start of the line line_number.

If line_number is negative or larger than or equal to the number of lines in the buffer, moves iter to the start of the last line in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • lineNumber: line number (counted from 0).

func (*TextIter) SetLineIndex 

func (iter *TextIter) SetLineIndex(byteOnLine int)

SetLineIndex: same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a byte index. The given byte index must be at the start of a character, it can’t be in the middle of a UTF-8 encoded character.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • byteOnLine: byte index relative to the start of iter’s current line.

func (*TextIter) SetLineOffset 

func (iter *TextIter) SetLineOffset(charOnLine int)

SetLineOffset moves iter within a line, to a new character (not byte) offset.

The given character offset must be less than or equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, iter moves to the start of the next line. See gtk.TextIter.SetLineIndex() if you have a byte index rather than a character offset.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • charOnLine: character offset relative to the start of iter’s current line.

func (*TextIter) SetOffset 

func (iter *TextIter) SetOffset(charOffset int)

SetOffset sets iter to point to char_offset.

char_offset counts from the start of the entire text buffer, starting with 0.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • charOffset: character number.

func (*TextIter) SetVisibleLineIndex 

func (iter *TextIter) SetVisibleLineIndex(byteOnLine int)

SetVisibleLineIndex: like gtk_text_iter_set_line_index(), but the index is in visible bytes, i.e. text with a tag making it invisible is not counted in the index.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • byteOnLine: byte index.

func (*TextIter) SetVisibleLineOffset 

func (iter *TextIter) SetVisibleLineOffset(charOnLine int)

SetVisibleLineOffset: like gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but the offset is in visible characters, i.e. text with a tag making it invisible is not counted in the offset.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • charOnLine: character offset.

func (*TextIter) Slice 

func (start *TextIter) Slice(end *TextIter) string

Slice returns the text in the given range.

A “slice” is an array of characters encoded in UTF-8 format, including the Unicode “unknown” character 0xFFFC for iterable non-character elements in the buffer, such as images. Because images are encoded in the slice, byte and character offsets in the returned array will correspond to byte offsets in the text buffer. Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a paintable or widget is in the buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • end: iterator at end of a range.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: slice of text from the buffer.

func (*TextIter) StartsLine 

func (iter *TextIter) StartsLine() bool

StartsLine returns TRUE if iter begins a paragraph.

This is the case if gtk.TextIter.GetLineOffset() would return 0. However this function is potentially more efficient than gtk.TextIter.GetLineOffset(), because it doesn’t have to compute the offset, it just has to see whether it’s 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter begins a line.

func (*TextIter) StartsSentence 

func (iter *TextIter) StartsSentence() bool

StartsSentence determines whether iter begins a sentence.

Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is at the start of a sentence.

func (*TextIter) StartsTag 

func (iter *TextIter) StartsTag(tag *TextTag) bool

StartsTag returns TRUE if tag is toggled on at exactly this point.

If tag is NULL, returns TRUE if any tag is toggled on at this point.

Note that if this function returns TRUE, it means that iter is at the beginning of the tagged range, and that the character at iter is inside the tagged range. In other words, unlike gtk.TextIter.EndsTag(), if this function returns TRUE, [methodGtk.TextIter.has_tag will also return TRUE for the same parameters.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag (optional): GtkTextTag, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether iter is the start of a range tagged with tag.

func (*TextIter) StartsWord 

func (iter *TextIter) StartsWord() bool

StartsWord determines whether iter begins a natural-language word.

Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is at the start of a word.

func (*TextIter) Tags 

func (iter *TextIter) Tags() []*TextTag

Tags returns a list of tags that apply to iter, in ascending order of priority.

The highest-priority tags are last.

The GtkTextTags in the list don’t have a reference added, but you have to free the list itself.

The function returns the following values:

  • sList: list of GtkTextTag.

func (*TextIter) Text 

func (start *TextIter) Text(end *TextIter) string

Text returns text in the given range.

If the range contains non-text elements such as images, the character and byte offsets in the returned string will not correspond to character and byte offsets in the buffer. If you want offsets to correspond, see gtk.TextIter.GetSlice().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • end: iterator at end of a range.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: array of characters from the buffer.

func (*TextIter) ToggledTags 

func (iter *TextIter) ToggledTags(toggledOn bool) []*TextTag

ToggledTags returns a list of GtkTextTag that are toggled on or off at this point.

If toggled_on is TRUE, the list contains tags that are toggled on. If a tag is toggled on at iter, then some non-empty range of characters following iter has that tag applied to it. If a tag is toggled off, then some non-empty range following iter does not have the tag applied to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • toggledOn: TRUE to get toggled-on tags.

The function returns the following values:

  • sList: tags toggled at this point.

func (*TextIter) TogglesTag 

func (iter *TextIter) TogglesTag(tag *TextTag) bool

TogglesTag gets whether a range with tag applied to it begins or ends at iter.

This is equivalent to (gtk_text_iter_starts_tag() || gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag (optional): GtkTextTag, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether tag is toggled on or off at iter.

func (*TextIter) VisibleLineIndex 

func (iter *TextIter) VisibleLineIndex() int

VisibleLineIndex returns the number of bytes from the start of the line to the given iter, not counting bytes that are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag toggled on.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: byte index of iter with respect to the start of the line.

func (*TextIter) VisibleLineOffset 

func (iter *TextIter) VisibleLineOffset() int

VisibleLineOffset returns the offset in characters from the start of the line to the given iter, not counting characters that are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag toggled on.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: offset in visible characters from the start of the line.

func (*TextIter) VisibleSlice 

func (start *TextIter) VisibleSlice(end *TextIter) string

VisibleSlice returns visible text in the given range.

Like gtk.TextIter.GetSlice(), but invisible text is not included. Invisible text is usually invisible because a GtkTextTag with the “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • end: iterator at end of range.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: slice of text from the buffer.

func (*TextIter) VisibleText 

func (start *TextIter) VisibleText(end *TextIter) string

VisibleText returns visible text in the given range.

Like gtk.TextIter.GetText(), but invisible text is not included. Invisible text is usually invisible because a GtkTextTag with the “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • end: iterator at end of range.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: string containing visible text in the range.

type TextMark 

type TextMark struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextMark: GtkTextMark is a position in a GtkTextbuffer that is preserved across modifications.

You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

A GtkTextMark is like a bookmark in a text buffer; it preserves a position in the text. You can convert the mark to an iterator using gtk.TextBuffer.GetIterAtMark(). Unlike iterators, marks remain valid across buffer mutations, because their behavior is defined when text is inserted or deleted. When text containing a mark is deleted, the mark remains in the position originally occupied by the deleted text. When text is inserted at a mark, a mark with “left gravity” will be moved to the beginning of the newly-inserted text, and a mark with “right gravity” will be moved to the end.

Note that “left” and “right” here refer to logical direction (left is the toward the start of the buffer); in some languages such as Hebrew the logically-leftmost text is not actually on the left when displayed.

Marks are reference counted, but the reference count only controls the validity of the memory; marks can be deleted from the buffer at any time with gtk.TextBuffer.DeleteMark(). Once deleted from the buffer, a mark is essentially useless.

Marks optionally have names; these can be convenient to avoid passing the GtkTextMark object around.

Marks are typically created using the gtk.TextBuffer.CreateMark() function.

func NewTextMark 

func NewTextMark(name string, leftGravity bool) *TextMark

NewTextMark creates a text mark.

Add it to a buffer using gtk.TextBuffer.AddMark(). If name is NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieved by name using gtk.TextBuffer.GetMark(). If a mark has left gravity, and text is inserted at the mark’s current location, the mark will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity (left_gravity = FALSE), the mark will end up on the right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right side of the text you’re typing).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional): mark name or NULL.
  • leftGravity: whether the mark should have left gravity.

The function returns the following values:

  • textMark: new GtkTextMark.

func (*TextMark) Buffer 

func (mark *TextMark) Buffer() *TextBuffer

Buffer gets the buffer this mark is located inside.

Returns NULL if the mark is deleted.

The function returns the following values:

  • textBuffer mark’s GtkTextBuffer.

func (*TextMark) Deleted 

func (mark *TextMark) Deleted() bool

Deleted returns TRUE if the mark has been removed from its buffer.

See gtk.TextBuffer.AddMark() for a way to add it to a buffer again.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the mark is deleted.

func (*TextMark) LeftGravity 

func (mark *TextMark) LeftGravity() bool

LeftGravity determines whether the mark has left gravity.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the mark has left gravity, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TextMark) Name 

func (mark *TextMark) Name() string

Name returns the mark name.

Returns NULL for anonymous marks.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): mark name.

func (*TextMark) SetVisible 

func (mark *TextMark) SetVisible(setting bool)

The function takes the following parameters:

func (*TextMark) Visible 

func (mark *TextMark) Visible() bool

Visible returns TRUE if the mark is visible.

A cursor is displayed for visible marks.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if visible.

type TextMarkClass added in v0.0.5 

type TextMarkClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextMarkClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TextMarkOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TextMarkOverrides struct {
}

TextMarkOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TextSearchFlags 

type TextSearchFlags C.guint

TextSearchFlags flags affecting how a search is done.

If neither GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY nor GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY are enabled, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC character will match embedded paintables or child widgets. 

const (
	// TextSearchVisibleOnly: search only visible data. A search match may have
	// invisible text interspersed.
	TextSearchVisibleOnly TextSearchFlags = 0b1
	// TextSearchTextOnly: search only text. A match may have paintables or
	// child widgets mixed inside the matched range.
	TextSearchTextOnly TextSearchFlags = 0b10
	// TextSearchCaseInsensitive: text will be matched regardless of what case
	// it is in.
	TextSearchCaseInsensitive TextSearchFlags = 0b100
)

func (TextSearchFlags) Has 

func (t TextSearchFlags) Has(other TextSearchFlags) bool

Has returns true if t contains other.

func (TextSearchFlags) String 

func (t TextSearchFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for TextSearchFlags.

type TextTag 

type TextTag struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextTag: tag that can be applied to text contained in a GtkTextBuffer.

You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

Tags should be in the gtk.TextTagTable for a given GtkTextBuffer before using them with that buffer.

gtk.TextBuffer.CreateTag() is the best way to create tags. See “gtk4-demo” for numerous examples.

For each property of GtkTextTag, there is a “set” property, e.g. “font-set” corresponds to “font”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not.

They are maintained by GTK and you should not set them independently.

func NewTextTag 

func NewTextTag(name string) *TextTag

NewTextTag creates a GtkTextTag.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional): tag name, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • textTag: new GtkTextTag.

func (*TextTag) Changed 

func (tag *TextTag) Changed(sizeChanged bool)

Changed emits the gtk.TextTagTable::tag-changed signal on the GtkTextTagTable where the tag is included.

The signal is already emitted when setting a GtkTextTag property. This function is useful for a GtkTextTag subclass.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sizeChanged: whether the change affects the GtkTextView layout.

func (*TextTag) Priority 

func (tag *TextTag) Priority() int

Priority: get the tag priority.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint tag’s priority.

func (*TextTag) SetPriority 

func (tag *TextTag) SetPriority(priority int)

SetPriority sets the priority of a GtkTextTag.

Valid priorities start at 0 and go to one less than gtk.TextTagTable.GetSize(). Each tag in a table has a unique priority; setting the priority of one tag shifts the priorities of all the other tags in the table to maintain a unique priority for each tag.

Higher priority tags “win” if two tags both set the same text attribute. When adding a tag to a tag table, it will be assigned the highest priority in the table by default; so normally the precedence of a set of tags is the order in which they were added to the table, or created with gtk.TextBuffer.CreateTag(), which adds the tag to the buffer’s table automatically.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • priority: new priority.

type TextTagClass added in v0.0.5 

type TextTagClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextTagClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TextTagOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TextTagOverrides struct {
}

TextTagOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TextTagTable 

type TextTagTable struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Buildable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextTagTable: collection of tags in a GtkTextBuffer

You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

GtkTextTagTables as GtkBuildable

The GtkTextTagTable implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding tags by specifying “tag” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.

An example of a UI definition fragment specifying tags: 

<object class="GtkTextTagTable">
 <child type="tag">
   <object class="GtkTextTag"/>
 </child>
</object>.

func NewTextTagTable 

func NewTextTagTable() *TextTagTable

NewTextTagTable creates a new GtkTextTagTable.

The table contains no tags by default.

The function returns the following values:

  • textTagTable: new GtkTextTagTable.

func (*TextTagTable) Add 

func (table *TextTagTable) Add(tag *TextTag) bool

Add a tag to the table.

The tag is assigned the highest priority in the table.

tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have the same name as an already-added tag.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag: GtkTextTag.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE on success.

func (*TextTagTable) ConnectTagAdded 

func (table *TextTagTable) ConnectTagAdded(f func(tag *TextTag)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTagAdded is emitted every time a new tag is added in the GtkTextTagTable.

func (*TextTagTable) ConnectTagChanged 

func (table *TextTagTable) ConnectTagChanged(f func(tag *TextTag, sizeChanged bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTagChanged is emitted every time a tag in the GtkTextTagTable changes.

func (*TextTagTable) ConnectTagRemoved 

func (table *TextTagTable) ConnectTagRemoved(f func(tag *TextTag)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTagRemoved is emitted every time a tag is removed from the GtkTextTagTable.

The tag is still valid by the time the signal is emitted, but it is not associated with a tag table any more.

func (*TextTagTable) ForEach 

func (table *TextTagTable) ForEach(fn TextTagTableForEach)

ForEach calls func on each tag in table, with user data data.

Note that the table may not be modified while iterating over it (you can’t add/remove tags).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call on each tag.

func (*TextTagTable) Lookup 

func (table *TextTagTable) Lookup(name string) *TextTag

Lookup: look up a named tag.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of a tag.

The function returns the following values:

  • textTag (optional): tag, or NULL if none by that name is in the table.

func (*TextTagTable) Remove 

func (table *TextTagTable) Remove(tag *TextTag)

Remove a tag from the table.

If a GtkTextBuffer has table as its tag table, the tag is removed from the buffer. The table’s reference to the tag is removed, so the tag will end up destroyed if you don’t have a reference to it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tag: GtkTextTag.

func (*TextTagTable) Size 

func (table *TextTagTable) Size() int

Size returns the size of the table (number of tags).

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of tags in table.

type TextTagTableForEach 

type TextTagTableForEach func(tag *TextTag)

TextTagTableForEach: function used with gtk_text_tag_table_foreach(), to iterate over every GtkTextTag inside a GtkTextTagTable.

type TextView 

type TextView struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextView: widget that displays the contents of a gtk.TextBuffer.

!An example GtkTextview (multiline-text.png)

You may wish to begin by reading the conceptual overview (section-text-widget.html), which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.

CSS nodes 

textview.view
├── border.top
├── border.left
├── text
│   ╰── [selection]
├── border.right
├── border.bottom
╰── [window.popup]

GtkTextView has a main css node with name textview and style class .view, and subnodes for each of the border windows, and the main text area, with names border and text, respectively. The border nodes each get one of the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom.

A node representing the selection will appear below the text node.

If a context menu is opened, the window node will appear as a subnode of the main node.

Accessibility

GtkTextView uses the K_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOX role.

func NewTextView 

func NewTextView() *TextView

NewTextView creates a new GtkTextView.

If you don’t call gtk.TextView.SetBuffer() before using the text view, an empty default buffer will be created for you. Get the buffer with gtk.TextView.GetBuffer(). If you want to specify your own buffer, consider gtk.TextView.NewWithBuffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • textView: new GtkTextView.

func NewTextViewWithBuffer 

func NewTextViewWithBuffer(buffer *TextBuffer) *TextView

NewTextViewWithBuffer creates a new GtkTextView widget displaying the buffer buffer.

One buffer can be shared among many widgets. buffer may be NULL to create a default buffer, in which case this function is equivalent to gtk.TextView.New. The text view adds its own reference count to the buffer; it does not take over an existing reference.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer: GtkTextBuffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • textView: new GtkTextView.

func (*TextView) AcceptsTab 

func (textView *TextView) AcceptsTab() bool

AcceptsTab returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.

See gtk.TextView.SetAcceptsTab().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character, FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.

func (*TextView) AddChildAtAnchor 

func (textView *TextView) AddChildAtAnchor(child Widgetter, anchor *TextChildAnchor)

AddChildAtAnchor adds a child widget in the text buffer, at the given anchor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: GtkWidget.
  • anchor: GtkTextChildAnchor in the GtkTextBuffer for text_view.

func (*TextView) AddOverlay 

func (textView *TextView) AddOverlay(child Widgetter, xpos, ypos int)

AddOverlay adds child at a fixed coordinate in the GtkTextView's text window.

The xpos and ypos must be in buffer coordinates (see gtk.TextView.GetIterLocation() to convert to buffer coordinates).

child will scroll with the text view.

If instead you want a widget that will not move with the GtkTextView contents see Overlay.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: Widget.
  • xpos: x position of child in window coordinates.
  • ypos: y position of child in window coordinates.

func (*TextView) BackwardDisplayLine 

func (textView *TextView) BackwardDisplayLine(iter *TextIter) bool

BackwardDisplayLine moves the given iter backward by one display (wrapped) line.

A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters. Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all views, since they depend on the contents of the GtkTextBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter was moved and is not on the end iterator.

func (*TextView) BackwardDisplayLineStart 

func (textView *TextView) BackwardDisplayLineStart(iter *TextIter) bool

BackwardDisplayLineStart moves the given iter backward to the next display line start.

A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters. Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all views, since they depend on the contents of the GtkTextBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter was moved and is not on the end iterator.

func (*TextView) BottomMargin 

func (textView *TextView) BottomMargin() int

BottomMargin gets the bottom margin for text in the text_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: bottom margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) Buffer 

func (textView *TextView) Buffer() *TextBuffer

Buffer returns the GtkTextBuffer being displayed by this text view.

The reference count on the buffer is not incremented; the caller of this function won’t own a new reference.

The function returns the following values:

  • textBuffer: GtkTextBuffer.

func (*TextView) BufferToWindowCoords 

func (textView *TextView) BufferToWindowCoords(win TextWindowType, bufferX, bufferY int) (windowX, windowY int)

BufferToWindowCoords converts buffer coordinates to window coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • win: TextWindowType.
  • bufferX: buffer x coordinate.
  • bufferY: buffer y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • windowX (optional): window x coordinate return location or NULL.
  • windowY (optional): window y coordinate return location or NULL.

func (*TextView) ConnectBackspace 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectBackspace(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectBackspace gets emitted when the user asks for it.

The ::backspace signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Backspace</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Backspace</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectCopyClipboard 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectCopyClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCopyClipboard gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.

The ::copy-clipboard signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>c</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectCutClipboard 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectCutClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCutClipboard gets emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.

The ::cut-clipboard signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>x</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Delete</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectDeleteFromCursor 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectDeleteFromCursor(f func(typ DeleteType, count int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDeleteFromCursor gets emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.

The ::delete-from-cursor signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

If the type is GTK_DELETE_CHARS, GTK deletes the selection if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number of characters.

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Delete</kbd> for deleting a character, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Delete</kbd> for deleting a word and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Backspace</kbd> for deleting a word backwards.

func (*TextView) ConnectExtendSelection 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectExtendSelection(f func(granularity TextExtendSelection, location, start, end *TextIter) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectExtendSelection is emitted when the selection needs to be extended at location.

func (*TextView) ConnectInsertAtCursor 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectInsertAtCursor(f func(str string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertAtCursor gets emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a fixed string at the cursor.

The ::insert-at-cursor signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

This signal has no default bindings.

func (*TextView) ConnectInsertEmoji 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectInsertEmoji(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectInsertEmoji gets emitted to present the Emoji chooser for the text_view.

The ::insert-emoji signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>.</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>;</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, count int, extendSelection bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.

The ::move-cursor signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html). If the cursor is not visible in text_view, this signal causes the viewport to be moved instead.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically. 

The default bindings for this signal come in two variants, the variant with the <kbd>Shift</kbd> modifier extends the selection, the variant without it does not. There are too many key combinations to list them all here.

- <kbd>←</kbd>, <kbd>→</kbd>, <kbd>↑</kbd>, <kbd>↓</kbd> move by individual characters/lines

- <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>→</kbd>, etc. move by words/paragraphs

- <kbd>Home</kbd>, <kbd>End</kbd> move to the ends of the buffer

- <kbd>PgUp</kbd>, <kbd>PgDn</kbd> move vertically by pages

- <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>PgUp</kbd>, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>PgDn</kbd> move horizontally by pages.

func (*TextView) ConnectMoveViewport 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectMoveViewport(f func(step ScrollStep, count int)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveViewport gets emitted to move the viewport.

The ::move-viewport signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html), which can be bound to key combinations to allow the user to move the viewport, i.e. change what part of the text view is visible in a containing scrolled window.

There are no default bindings for this signal.

func (*TextView) ConnectPasteClipboard 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectPasteClipboard(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPasteClipboard gets emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard into the text view.

The ::paste-clipboard signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>v</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectPreeditChanged 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectPreeditChanged(f func(preedit string)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectPreeditChanged is emitted when preedit text of the active IM changes.

If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text, connect to this signal.

This signal is only emitted if the text at the given position is actually editable.

func (*TextView) ConnectSelectAll 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectSelectAll(f func(sel bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSelectAll gets emitted to select or unselect the complete contents of the text view.

The ::select-all signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>/</kbd> for selecting and <kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>a</kbd> and <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>\</kbd> for unselecting.

func (*TextView) ConnectSetAnchor 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectSetAnchor(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSetAnchor gets emitted when the user initiates settings the "anchor" mark.

The ::set-anchor signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html) which gets emitted when the user initiates setting the "anchor" mark. The "anchor" mark gets placed at the same position as the "insert" mark.

This signal has no default bindings.

func (*TextView) ConnectToggleCursorVisible 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectToggleCursorVisible(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleCursorVisible gets emitted to toggle the cursor-visible property.

The ::toggle-cursor-visible signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>F7</kbd>.

func (*TextView) ConnectToggleOverwrite 

func (textView *TextView) ConnectToggleOverwrite(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggleOverwrite gets emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the text view.

The ::toggle-overwrite signal is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default binding for this signal is <kbd>Insert</kbd>.

func (*TextView) CursorLocations 

func (textView *TextView) CursorLocations(iter *TextIter) (strong, weak *gdk.Rectangle)

CursorLocations: determine the positions of the strong and weak cursors if the insertion point is at iter.

The position of each cursor is stored as a zero-width rectangle. The strong cursor location is the location where characters of the directionality equal to the base direction of the paragraph are inserted. The weak cursor location is the location where characters of the directionality opposite to the base direction of the paragraph are inserted.

If iter is NULL, the actual cursor position is used.

Note that if iter happens to be the actual cursor position, and there is currently an IM preedit sequence being entered, the returned locations will be adjusted to account for the preedit cursor’s offset within the preedit sequence.

The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use gtk.TextView.BufferToWindowCoords() to convert these coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter (optional): GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • strong (optional): location to store the strong cursor position (may be NULL).
  • weak (optional): location to store the weak cursor position (may be NULL).

func (*TextView) CursorVisible 

func (textView *TextView) CursorVisible() bool

CursorVisible: find out whether the cursor should be displayed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the insertion mark is visible.

func (*TextView) Editable 

func (textView *TextView) Editable() bool

Editable returns the default editability of the GtkTextView.

Tags in the buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether text is editable by default.

func (*TextView) ExtraMenu 

func (textView *TextView) ExtraMenu() gio.MenuModeller

ExtraMenu gets the menu model that gets added to the context menu or NULL if none has been set.

The function returns the following values:

  • menuModel: menu model.

func (*TextView) ForwardDisplayLine 

func (textView *TextView) ForwardDisplayLine(iter *TextIter) bool

ForwardDisplayLine moves the given iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.

A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters. Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all views, since they depend on the contents of the GtkTextBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter was moved and is not on the end iterator.

func (*TextView) ForwardDisplayLineEnd 

func (textView *TextView) ForwardDisplayLineEnd(iter *TextIter) bool

ForwardDisplayLineEnd moves the given iter forward to the next display line end.

A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters. Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all views, since they depend on the contents of the GtkTextBuffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter was moved and is not on the end iterator.

func (*TextView) Gutter 

func (textView *TextView) Gutter(win TextWindowType) Widgetter

Gutter gets a GtkWidget that has previously been set as gutter.

See gtk.TextView.SetGutter().

win must be one of GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT, GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT, GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TOP, or GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • win: GtkTextWindowType.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): GtkWidget or NULL.

func (*TextView) IMContextFilterKeypress 

func (textView *TextView) IMContextFilterKeypress(event gdk.Eventer) bool

IMContextFilterKeypress: allow the GtkTextView input method to internally handle key press and release events.

If this function returns TRUE, then no further processing should be done for this key event. See gtk.IMContext.FilterKeypress().

Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when you need to insert your own key handling between the input method and the default key event handling of the GtkTextView. 

static gboolean
gtk_foo_bar_key_press_event (GtkWidget *widget,
                             GdkEvent  *event)
{
  guint keyval;

  gdk_event_get_keyval ((GdkEvent*)event, &keyval);

  if (keyval == GDK_KEY_Return || keyval == GDK_KEY_KP_Enter)
    {
      if (gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress (GTK_TEXT_VIEW (widget), event))
        return TRUE;
    }

  // Do some stuff

  return GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (gtk_foo_bar_parent_class)->key_press_event (widget, event);
}.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • event: key event.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the input method handled the key event.

func (*TextView) Indent 

func (textView *TextView) Indent() int

Indent gets the default indentation of paragraphs in text_view.

Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default. The indentation may be negative.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of pixels of indentation.

func (*TextView) InputHints 

func (textView *TextView) InputHints() InputHints

InputHints gets the input-hints of the GtkTextView.

The function returns the following values:

func (*TextView) InputPurpose 

func (textView *TextView) InputPurpose() InputPurpose

InputPurpose gets the input-purpose of the GtkTextView.

The function returns the following values:

func (*TextView) IterAtLocation 

func (textView *TextView) IterAtLocation(x, y int) (*TextIter, bool)

IterAtLocation retrieves the iterator at buffer coordinates x and y.

Buffer coordinates are coordinates for the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion. If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert those to buffer coordinates with gtk.TextView.WindowToBufferCoords().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position, in buffer coordinates.
  • y position, in buffer coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.
  • ok: TRUE if the position is over text.

func (*TextView) IterAtPosition 

func (textView *TextView) IterAtPosition(x, y int) (*TextIter, int, bool)

IterAtPosition retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer coordinates x and y.

Buffer coordinates are coordinates for the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion. If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert those to buffer coordinates with gtk.TextView.WindowToBufferCoords().

Note that this is different from gtk.TextView.GetIterAtLocation(), which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions between characters.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position, in buffer coordinates.
  • y position, in buffer coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.
  • trailing (optional): if non-NULL, location to store an integer indicating where in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme. 0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
  • ok: TRUE if the position is over text.

func (*TextView) IterLocation 

func (textView *TextView) IterLocation(iter *TextIter) *gdk.Rectangle

IterLocation gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at iter.

The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use gtk.TextView.BufferToWindowCoords() to convert these coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • location bounds of the character at iter.

func (*TextView) Justification 

func (textView *TextView) Justification() Justification

Justification gets the default justification of paragraphs in text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

The function returns the following values:

  • justification: default justification.

func (*TextView) LeftMargin 

func (textView *TextView) LeftMargin() int

LeftMargin gets the default left margin size of paragraphs in the text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: left margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) LineAtY 

func (textView *TextView) LineAtY(y int) (*TextIter, int)

LineAtY gets the GtkTextIter at the start of the line containing the coordinate y.

y is in buffer coordinates, convert from window coordinates with gtk.TextView.WindowToBufferCoords(). If non-NULL, line_top will be filled with the coordinate of the top edge of the line.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • targetIter: GtkTextIter.
  • lineTop: return location for top coordinate of the line.

func (*TextView) LineYrange 

func (textView *TextView) LineYrange(iter *TextIter) (y, height int)

LineYrange gets the y coordinate of the top of the line containing iter, and the height of the line.

The coordinate is a buffer coordinate; convert to window coordinates with gtk.TextView.BufferToWindowCoords().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • y: return location for a y coordinate.
  • height: return location for a height.

func (*TextView) Monospace 

func (textView *TextView) Monospace() bool

Monospace gets whether the GtkTextView uses monospace styling.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if monospace fonts are desired.

func (*TextView) MoveMarkOnscreen 

func (textView *TextView) MoveMarkOnscreen(mark *TextMark) bool

MoveMarkOnscreen moves a mark within the buffer so that it's located within the currently-visible text area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark: GtkTextMark.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the mark moved (wasn’t already onscreen).

func (*TextView) MoveOverlay 

func (textView *TextView) MoveOverlay(child Widgetter, xpos, ypos int)

MoveOverlay updates the position of a child.

See gtk.TextView.AddOverlay().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: widget already added with gtk.TextView.AddOverlay().
  • xpos: new X position in buffer coordinates.
  • ypos: new Y position in buffer coordinates.

func (*TextView) MoveVisually 

func (textView *TextView) MoveVisually(iter *TextIter, count int) bool

MoveVisually: move the iterator a given number of characters visually, treating it as the strong cursor position.

If count is positive, then the new strong cursor position will be count positions to the right of the old cursor position. If count is negative then the new strong cursor position will be count positions to the left of the old cursor position.

In the presence of bi-directional text, the correspondence between logical and visual order will depend on the direction of the current run, and there may be jumps when the cursor is moved off of the end of a run.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.
  • count: number of characters to move (negative moves left, positive moves right).

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter moved and is not on the end iterator.

func (*TextView) Overwrite 

func (textView *TextView) Overwrite() bool

Overwrite returns whether the GtkTextView is in overwrite mode or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether text_view is in overwrite mode or not.

func (*TextView) PixelsAboveLines 

func (textView *TextView) PixelsAboveLines() int

PixelsAboveLines gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.

Adding this function with gtk.TextView.GetPixelsBelowLines() is equal to the line space between each paragraph.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: default number of pixels above paragraphs.

func (*TextView) PixelsBelowLines 

func (textView *TextView) PixelsBelowLines() int

PixelsBelowLines gets the default number of pixels to put below paragraphs.

The line space is the sum of the value returned by this function and the value returned by gtk.TextView.GetPixelsAboveLines().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: default number of blank pixels below paragraphs.

func (*TextView) PixelsInsideWrap 

func (textView *TextView) PixelsInsideWrap() int

PixelsInsideWrap gets the default number of pixels to put between wrapped lines inside a paragraph.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: default number of pixels of blank space between wrapped lines.

func (*TextView) PlaceCursorOnscreen 

func (textView *TextView) PlaceCursorOnscreen() bool

PlaceCursorOnscreen moves the cursor to the currently visible region of the buffer.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the cursor had to be moved.

func (*TextView) Remove 

func (textView *TextView) Remove(child Widgetter)

Remove removes a child widget from text_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child to remove.
func (textView *TextView) ResetCursorBlink()

ResetCursorBlink ensures that the cursor is shown.

This also resets the time that it will stay blinking (or visible, in case blinking is disabled).

This function should be called in response to user input (e.g. from derived classes that override the textview's event handlers).

func (*TextView) ResetIMContext 

func (textView *TextView) ResetIMContext()

ResetIMContext: reset the input method context of the text view if needed.

This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer would confuse on-going input method behavior.

func (*TextView) RightMargin 

func (textView *TextView) RightMargin() int

RightMargin gets the default right margin for text in text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: right margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) ScrollMarkOnscreen 

func (textView *TextView) ScrollMarkOnscreen(mark *TextMark)

ScrollMarkOnscreen scrolls text_view the minimum distance such that mark is contained within the visible area of the widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark in the buffer for text_view.

func (*TextView) ScrollToIter 

func (textView *TextView) ScrollToIter(iter *TextIter, withinMargin float64, useAlign bool, xalign, yalign float64) bool

ScrollToIter scrolls text_view so that iter is on the screen in the position indicated by xalign and yalign.

An alignment of 0.0 indicates left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center. If use_align is FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size within_margin.

Note that this function uses the currently-computed height of the lines in the text buffer. Line heights are computed in an idle handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it’s called before the height computations. To avoid oddness, consider using gtk.TextView.ScrollToMark() which saves a point to be scrolled to after line validation.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.
  • withinMargin: margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size.
  • useAlign: whether to use alignment arguments (if FALSE, just get the mark onscreen).
  • xalign: horizontal alignment of mark within visible area.
  • yalign: vertical alignment of mark within visible area.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if scrolling occurred.

func (*TextView) ScrollToMark 

func (textView *TextView) ScrollToMark(mark *TextMark, withinMargin float64, useAlign bool, xalign, yalign float64)

ScrollToMark scrolls text_view so that mark is on the screen in the position indicated by xalign and yalign.

An alignment of 0.0 indicates left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center. If use_align is FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size within_margin.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • mark: GtkTextMark.
  • withinMargin: margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size.
  • useAlign: whether to use alignment arguments (if FALSE, just get the mark onscreen).
  • xalign: horizontal alignment of mark within visible area.
  • yalign: vertical alignment of mark within visible area.

func (*TextView) SetAcceptsTab 

func (textView *TextView) SetAcceptsTab(acceptsTab bool)

SetAcceptsTab sets the behavior of the text widget when the Tab key is pressed.

If accepts_tab is TRUE, a tab character is inserted. If accepts_tab is FALSE the keyboard focus is moved to the next widget in the focus chain.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • acceptsTab: TRUE if pressing the Tab key should insert a tab character, FALSE, if pressing the Tab key should move the keyboard focus.

func (*TextView) SetBottomMargin 

func (textView *TextView) SetBottomMargin(bottomMargin int)

SetBottomMargin sets the bottom margin for text in text_view.

Note that this function is confusingly named. In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bottomMargin: bottom margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) SetBuffer 

func (textView *TextView) SetBuffer(buffer *TextBuffer)

SetBuffer sets buffer as the buffer being displayed by text_view.

The previous buffer displayed by the text view is unreferenced, and a reference is added to buffer. If you owned a reference to buffer before passing it to this function, you must remove that reference yourself; GtkTextView will not “adopt” it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • buffer (optional): GtkTextBuffer.

func (*TextView) SetCursorVisible 

func (textView *TextView) SetCursorVisible(setting bool)

SetCursorVisible toggles whether the insertion point should be displayed.

A buffer with no editable text probably shouldn’t have a visible cursor, so you may want to turn the cursor off.

Note that this property may be overridden by the gtksettings:gtk-keynav-use-caret setting.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: whether to show the insertion cursor.

func (*TextView) SetEditable 

func (textView *TextView) SetEditable(setting bool)

SetEditable sets the default editability of the GtkTextView.

You can override this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the “editable” attribute of tags.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: whether it’s editable.

func (*TextView) SetExtraMenu 

func (textView *TextView) SetExtraMenu(model gio.MenuModeller)

SetExtraMenu sets a menu model to add when constructing the context menu for text_view.

You can pass NULL to remove a previously set extra menu.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): GMenuModel.

func (*TextView) SetGutter 

func (textView *TextView) SetGutter(win TextWindowType, widget Widgetter)

SetGutter places widget into the gutter specified by win.

win must be one of GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT, GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT, GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TOP, or GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • win: GtkTextWindowType.
  • widget (optional): GtkWidget or NULL.

func (*TextView) SetIndent 

func (textView *TextView) SetIndent(indent int)

SetIndent sets the default indentation for paragraphs in text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • indent: indentation in pixels.

func (*TextView) SetInputHints 

func (textView *TextView) SetInputHints(hints InputHints)

SetInputHints sets the input-hints of the GtkTextView.

The input-hints allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hints: hints.

func (*TextView) SetInputPurpose 

func (textView *TextView) SetInputPurpose(purpose InputPurpose)

SetInputPurpose sets the input-purpose of the GtkTextView.

The input-purpose can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input methods to adjust their behaviour.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • purpose: purpose.

func (*TextView) SetJustification 

func (textView *TextView) SetJustification(justification Justification)

SetJustification sets the default justification of text in text_view.

Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • justification: justification.

func (*TextView) SetLeftMargin 

func (textView *TextView) SetLeftMargin(leftMargin int)

SetLeftMargin sets the default left margin for text in text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

Note that this function is confusingly named. In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • leftMargin: left margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) SetMonospace 

func (textView *TextView) SetMonospace(monospace bool)

SetMonospace sets whether the GtkTextView should display text in monospace styling.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • monospace: TRUE to request monospace styling.

func (*TextView) SetOverwrite 

func (textView *TextView) SetOverwrite(overwrite bool)

SetOverwrite changes the GtkTextView overwrite mode.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • overwrite: TRUE to turn on overwrite mode, FALSE to turn it off.

func (*TextView) SetPixelsAboveLines 

func (textView *TextView) SetPixelsAboveLines(pixelsAboveLines int)

SetPixelsAboveLines sets the default number of blank pixels above paragraphs in text_view.

Tags in the buffer for text_view may override the defaults.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixelsAboveLines pixels above paragraphs.

func (*TextView) SetPixelsBelowLines 

func (textView *TextView) SetPixelsBelowLines(pixelsBelowLines int)

SetPixelsBelowLines sets the default number of pixels of blank space to put below paragraphs in text_view.

May be overridden by tags applied to text_view’s buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixelsBelowLines pixels below paragraphs.

func (*TextView) SetPixelsInsideWrap 

func (textView *TextView) SetPixelsInsideWrap(pixelsInsideWrap int)

SetPixelsInsideWrap sets the default number of pixels of blank space to leave between display/wrapped lines within a paragraph.

May be overridden by tags in text_view’s buffer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pixelsInsideWrap: default number of pixels between wrapped lines.

func (*TextView) SetRightMargin 

func (textView *TextView) SetRightMargin(rightMargin int)

SetRightMargin sets the default right margin for text in the text view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

Note that this function is confusingly named. In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rightMargin: right margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) SetTabs 

func (textView *TextView) SetTabs(tabs *pango.TabArray)

SetTabs sets the default tab stops for paragraphs in text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the default.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tabs as a TabArray.

func (*TextView) SetTopMargin 

func (textView *TextView) SetTopMargin(topMargin int)

SetTopMargin sets the top margin for text in text_view.

Note that this function is confusingly named. In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • topMargin: top margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) SetWrapMode 

func (textView *TextView) SetWrapMode(wrapMode WrapMode)

SetWrapMode sets the line wrapping for the view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wrapMode: GtkWrapMode.

func (*TextView) StartsDisplayLine 

func (textView *TextView) StartsDisplayLine(iter *TextIter) bool

StartsDisplayLine determines whether iter is at the start of a display line.

See gtk.TextView.ForwardDisplayLine() for an explanation of display lines vs. paragraphs.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: GtkTextIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter begins a wrapped line.

func (*TextView) Tabs 

func (textView *TextView) Tabs() *pango.TabArray

Tabs gets the default tabs for text_view.

Tags in the buffer may override the defaults. The returned array will be NULL if “standard” (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value with pango.TabArray.Free().

The function returns the following values:

  • tabArray (optional): copy of default tab array, or NULL if standard tabs are used; must be freed with pango.TabArray.Free().

func (*TextView) TopMargin 

func (textView *TextView) TopMargin() int

TopMargin gets the top margin for text in the text_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: top margin in pixels.

func (*TextView) VisibleRect 

func (textView *TextView) VisibleRect() *gdk.Rectangle

VisibleRect fills visible_rect with the currently-visible region of the buffer, in buffer coordinates.

Convert to window coordinates with gtk.TextView.BufferToWindowCoords().

The function returns the following values:

  • visibleRect: rectangle to fill.

func (*TextView) WindowToBufferCoords 

func (textView *TextView) WindowToBufferCoords(win TextWindowType, windowX, windowY int) (bufferX, bufferY int)

WindowToBufferCoords converts coordinates on the window identified by win to buffer coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • win: TextWindowType.
  • windowX: window x coordinate.
  • windowY: window y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • bufferX (optional): buffer x coordinate return location or NULL.
  • bufferY (optional): buffer y coordinate return location or NULL.

func (*TextView) WrapMode 

func (textView *TextView) WrapMode() WrapMode

WrapMode gets the line wrapping for the view.

The function returns the following values:

  • wrapMode: line wrap setting.

type TextViewClass added in v0.0.5 

type TextViewClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TextViewClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TextViewClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (t *TextViewClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: object class structure needs to be the first.

type TextViewLayer 

type TextViewLayer C.gint

TextViewLayer: used to reference the layers of TextView for the purpose of customized drawing with the ::snapshot_layer vfunc. 

const (
	// TextViewLayerBelowText: layer rendered below the text (but above the
	// background).
	TextViewLayerBelowText TextViewLayer = iota
	// TextViewLayerAboveText: layer rendered above the text.
	TextViewLayerAboveText
)

func (TextViewLayer) String 

func (t TextViewLayer) String() string

String returns the name in string for TextViewLayer.

type TextViewOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TextViewOverrides struct {
	Backspace     func()
	CopyClipboard func()
	CutClipboard  func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - typ
	//   - count
	//
	DeleteFromCursor func(typ DeleteType, count int)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - granularity
	//   - location
	//   - start
	//   - end
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	ExtendSelection func(granularity TextExtendSelection, location, start, end *TextIter) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	InsertAtCursor func(str string)
	InsertEmoji    func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - step
	//   - count
	//   - extendSelection
	//
	MoveCursor     func(step MovementStep, count int, extendSelection bool)
	PasteClipboard func()
	SetAnchor      func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - layer
	//   - snapshot
	//
	SnapshotLayer   func(layer TextViewLayer, snapshot *Snapshot)
	ToggleOverwrite func()
}

TextViewOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TextWindowType 

type TextWindowType C.gint

TextWindowType: used to reference the parts of TextView. 

const (
	// TextWindowWidget: window that floats over scrolling areas.
	TextWindowWidget TextWindowType = 1
	// TextWindowText: scrollable text window.
	TextWindowText TextWindowType = 2
	// TextWindowLeft: left side border window.
	TextWindowLeft TextWindowType = 3
	// TextWindowRight: right side border window.
	TextWindowRight TextWindowType = 4
	// TextWindowTop: top border window.
	TextWindowTop TextWindowType = 5
	// TextWindowBottom: bottom border window.
	TextWindowBottom TextWindowType = 6
)

func (TextWindowType) String 

func (t TextWindowType) String() string

String returns the name in string for TextWindowType.

type TickCallback 

type TickCallback func(widget Widgetter, frameClock gdk.FrameClocker) (ok bool)

TickCallback: callback type for adding a function to update animations. See gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().

type ToggleButton 

type ToggleButton struct {
	Button
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ToggleButton: GtkToggleButton is a button which remains “pressed-in” when clicked.

Clicking again will cause the toggle button to return to its normal state.

A toggle button is created by calling either gtk.ToggleButton.New or gtk.ToggleButton.NewWithLabel. If using the former, it is advisable to pack a widget, (such as a GtkLabel and/or a GtkImage), into the toggle button’s container. (See gtk.Button for more information).

The state of a GtkToggleButton can be set specifically using gtk.ToggleButton.SetActive(), and retrieved using gtk.ToggleButton.GetActive().

To simply switch the state of a toggle button, use gtk.ToggleButton.Toggled().

Grouping

Toggle buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.

To add a GtkToggleButton to a group, use gtk.ToggleButton.SetGroup().

CSS nodes

GtkToggleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain GtkButton, it gets the .toggle style class.

Creating two GtkToggleButton widgets. 

static void output_state (GtkToggleButton *source, gpointer user_data)
{
  printf ("Active: d\n", gtk_toggle_button_get_active (source));
}

void make_toggles (void)
{
  GtkWidget *window, *toggle1, *toggle2;
  GtkWidget *box;
  const char *text;

  window = gtk_window_new ();
  box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 12);

  text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
  toggle1 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);

  g_signal_connect (toggle1, "toggled",
                    G_CALLBACK (output_state),
                    NULL);
  gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle1);

  text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
  toggle2 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
  g_signal_connect (toggle2, "toggled",
                    G_CALLBACK (output_state),
                    NULL);
  gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle2);

  gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), box);
  gtk_widget_show (window);
}.

func NewToggleButton 

func NewToggleButton() *ToggleButton

NewToggleButton creates a new toggle button.

A widget should be packed into the button, as in gtk.Button.New.

The function returns the following values:

  • toggleButton: new toggle button.

func NewToggleButtonWithLabel 

func NewToggleButtonWithLabel(label string) *ToggleButton

NewToggleButtonWithLabel creates a new toggle button with a text label.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: string containing the message to be placed in the toggle button.

The function returns the following values:

  • toggleButton: new toggle button.

func NewToggleButtonWithMnemonic 

func NewToggleButtonWithMnemonic(label string) *ToggleButton

NewToggleButtonWithMnemonic creates a new GtkToggleButton containing a label.

The label will be created using gtk.Label.NewWithMnemonic, so underscores in label indicate the mnemonic for the button.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: text of the button, with an underscore in front of the mnemonic character.

The function returns the following values:

  • toggleButton: new GtkToggleButton.

func (*ToggleButton) Active 

func (toggleButton *ToggleButton) Active() bool

Active queries a GtkToggleButton and returns its current state.

Returns TRUE if the toggle button is pressed in and FALSE if it is raised.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the button is pressed.

func (*ToggleButton) ConnectToggled 

func (toggleButton *ToggleButton) ConnectToggled(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectToggled is emitted whenever the GtkToggleButton's state is changed.

func (*ToggleButton) SetActive 

func (toggleButton *ToggleButton) SetActive(isActive bool)

SetActive sets the status of the toggle button.

Set to TRUE if you want the GtkToggleButton to be “pressed in”, and FALSE to raise it.

If the status of the button changes, this action causes the gtktogglebutton::toggled signal to be emitted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • isActive: TRUE or FALSE.

func (*ToggleButton) SetGroup 

func (toggleButton *ToggleButton) SetGroup(group *ToggleButton)

SetGroup adds self to the group of group.

In a group of multiple toggle buttons, only one button can be active at a time.

Setting up groups in a cycle leads to undefined behavior.

Note that the same effect can be achieved via the gtk.Actionable API, by using the same action with parameter type and state type 's' for all buttons in the group, and giving each button its own target value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • group (optional): another GtkToggleButton to form a group with.

func (*ToggleButton) Toggled 

func (toggleButton *ToggleButton) Toggled()

Toggled emits the ::toggled signal on the GtkToggleButton.

There is no good reason for an application ever to call this function.

type ToggleButtonClass added in v0.0.5 

type ToggleButtonClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ToggleButtonClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*ToggleButtonClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (t *ToggleButtonClass) ParentClass() *ButtonClass

type ToggleButtonOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type ToggleButtonOverrides struct {
	// Toggled emits the ::toggled signal on the GtkToggleButton.
	//
	// There is no good reason for an application ever to call this function.
	Toggled func()
}

ToggleButtonOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Tooltip 

type Tooltip struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Tooltip: GtkTooltip is an object representing a widget tooltip.

Basic tooltips can be realized simply by using gtk.Widget.SetTooltipText() or gtk.Widget.SetTooltipMarkup() without any explicit tooltip object.

When you need a tooltip with a little more fancy contents, like adding an image, or you want the tooltip to have different contents per GtkTreeView row or cell, you will have to do a little more work:

- Set the gtk.Widget:has-tooltip property to TRUE. This will make GTK monitor the widget for motion and related events which are needed to determine when and where to show a tooltip.

- Connect to the gtk.Widget::query-tooltip signal. This signal will be emitted when a tooltip is supposed to be shown. One of the arguments passed to the signal handler is a GtkTooltip object. This is the object that we are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback using functions like gtk.Tooltip.SetIcon(). There are functions for setting the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in a custom widget.

- Return TRUE from your ::query-tooltip handler. This causes the tooltip to be show. If you return FALSE, it will not be shown.

func (*Tooltip) SetCustom 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetCustom(customWidget Widgetter)

SetCustom replaces the widget packed into the tooltip with custom_widget. custom_widget does not get destroyed when the tooltip goes away. By default a box with a Image and Label is embedded in the tooltip, which can be configured using gtk_tooltip_set_markup() and gtk_tooltip_set_icon().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • customWidget (optional) or NULL to unset the old custom widget.

func (*Tooltip) SetIcon 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetIcon(paintable gdk.Paintabler)

SetIcon sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be paintable. If paintable is NULL, the image will be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • paintable (optional) or NULL.

func (*Tooltip) SetIconFromGIcon 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetIconFromGIcon(gicon gio.Iconner)

SetIconFromGIcon sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be the icon indicated by gicon with the size indicated by size. If gicon is NULL, the image will be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • gicon (optional) representing the icon, or NULL.

func (*Tooltip) SetIconFromIconName 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetIconFromIconName(iconName string)

SetIconFromIconName sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be the icon indicated by icon_name with the size indicated by size. If icon_name is NULL, the image will be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iconName (optional): icon name, or NULL.

func (*Tooltip) SetMarkup 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetMarkup(markup string)

SetMarkup sets the text of the tooltip to be markup.

The string must be marked up with Pango markup. If markup is NULL, the label will be hidden.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • markup (optional): string with Pango markup or NLL.

func (*Tooltip) SetText 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetText(text string)

SetText sets the text of the tooltip to be text.

If text is NULL, the label will be hidden. See also gtk.Tooltip.SetMarkup().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional) string or NULL.

func (*Tooltip) SetTipArea 

func (tooltip *Tooltip) SetTipArea(rect *gdk.Rectangle)

SetTipArea sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply, to be rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for properly setting tooltips on TreeView rows and cells, IconViews, etc.

For setting tooltips on TreeView, please refer to the convenience functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • rect: Rectangle.

type TreeCellDataFunc 

type TreeCellDataFunc func(treeColumn *TreeViewColumn, cell CellRendererer, treeModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter)

TreeCellDataFunc: function to set the properties of a cell instead of just using the straight mapping between the cell and the model.

This function is useful for customizing the cell renderer. For example, a function might get an* integer from the tree_model, and render it to the “text” attribute of “cell” by converting it to its written equivalent.

See also: gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func().

type TreeDragDest 

type TreeDragDest struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeDragDest: interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in GtkTreeView.

TreeDragDest wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*TreeDragDest) DragDataReceived 

func (dragDest *TreeDragDest) DragDataReceived(dest *TreePath, value *coreglib.Value) bool

DragDataReceived asks the TreeDragDest to insert a row before the path dest, deriving the contents of the row from value. If dest is outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, FALSE will be returned. Also, FALSE may be returned if the new row is not created for some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a dest no longer found in the model!.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dest: row to drop in front of.
  • value: data to drop.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether a new row was created before position dest.

func (*TreeDragDest) RowDropPossible 

func (dragDest *TreeDragDest) RowDropPossible(destPath *TreePath, value *coreglib.Value) bool

RowDropPossible determines whether a drop is possible before the given dest_path, at the same depth as dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in value at that location. dest_path does not have to exist; the return value will almost certainly be FALSE if the parent of dest_path doesn’t exist, though.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • destPath: destination row.
  • value: data being dropped.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a drop is possible before dest_path.

type TreeDragDestIface added in v0.0.5 

type TreeDragDestIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeDragDestIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeDragDester 

type TreeDragDester interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// DragDataReceived asks the TreeDragDest to insert a row before the path
	// dest, deriving the contents of the row from value.
	DragDataReceived(dest *TreePath, value *coreglib.Value) bool
	// RowDropPossible determines whether a drop is possible before the given
	// dest_path, at the same depth as dest_path.
	RowDropPossible(destPath *TreePath, value *coreglib.Value) bool
}

TreeDragDester describes TreeDragDest's interface methods.

type TreeDragSource 

type TreeDragSource struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeDragSource: interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in GtkTreeView.

TreeDragSource wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*TreeDragSource) DragDataDelete 

func (dragSource *TreeDragSource) DragDataDelete(path *TreePath) bool

DragDataDelete asks the TreeDragSource to delete the row at path, because it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns FALSE if the deletion fails because path no longer exists, or for some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a path no longer found in the model!.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: row that was being dragged.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row was successfully deleted.

func (*TreeDragSource) DragDataGet 

func (dragSource *TreeDragSource) DragDataGet(path *TreePath) *gdk.ContentProvider

DragDataGet asks the TreeDragSource to return a ContentProvider representing the row at path. Should robustly handle a path no longer found in the model!.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: row that was dragged.

The function returns the following values:

  • contentProvider (optional) for the given path or NULL if none exists.

func (*TreeDragSource) RowDraggable 

func (dragSource *TreeDragSource) RowDraggable(path *TreePath) bool

RowDraggable asks the TreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement this interface, the row is assumed draggable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: row on which user is initiating a drag.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row can be dragged.

type TreeDragSourceIface added in v0.0.5 

type TreeDragSourceIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeDragSourceIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeDragSourcer 

type TreeDragSourcer interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// DragDataDelete asks the TreeDragSource to delete the row at path, because
	// it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop.
	DragDataDelete(path *TreePath) bool
	// DragDataGet asks the TreeDragSource to return a ContentProvider
	// representing the row at path.
	DragDataGet(path *TreePath) *gdk.ContentProvider
	// RowDraggable asks the TreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used
	// as the source of a DND operation.
	RowDraggable(path *TreePath) bool
}

TreeDragSourcer describes TreeDragSource's interface methods.

type TreeExpander 

type TreeExpander struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeExpander: GtkTreeExpander is a widget that provides an expander for a list.

It is typically placed as a bottommost child into a GtkListView to allow users to expand and collapse children in a list with a gtk.TreeListModel. GtkTreeExpander provides the common UI elements, gestures and keybindings for this purpose.

On top of this, the "listitem.expand", "listitem.collapse" and "listitem.toggle-expand" actions are provided to allow adding custom UI for managing expanded state.

The GtkTreeListModel must be set to not be passthrough. Then it will provide gtk.TreeListRow items which can be set via gtk.TreeExpander.SetListRow() on the expander. The expander will then watch that row item automatically. gtk.TreeExpander.SetChild() sets the widget that displays the actual row contents.

CSS nodes 

treeexpander
├── [indent]*
├── [expander]
╰── <child>

GtkTreeExpander has zero or one CSS nodes with the name "expander" that should display the expander icon. The node will be :checked when it is expanded. If the node is not expandable, an "indent" node will be displayed instead.

For every level of depth, another "indent" node is prepended.

Accessibility

GtkTreeExpander uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role. The expander icon is represented as a GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTON, labelled by the expander's child, and toggling it will change the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_EXPANDED state.

func NewTreeExpander 

func NewTreeExpander() *TreeExpander

NewTreeExpander creates a new GtkTreeExpander.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeExpander: new GtkTreeExpander.

func (*TreeExpander) Child 

func (self *TreeExpander) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget displayed by self.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child displayed by self.

func (*TreeExpander) Item 

func (self *TreeExpander) Item() *coreglib.Object

Item forwards the item set on the GtkTreeListRow that self is managing.

This call is essentially equivalent to calling: 

gtk_tree_list_row_get_item (gtk_tree_expander_get_list_row (self));.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): item of the row.

func (*TreeExpander) ListRow 

func (self *TreeExpander) ListRow() *TreeListRow

ListRow gets the list row managed by self.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRow (optional): list row displayed by self.

func (*TreeExpander) SetChild 

func (self *TreeExpander) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the content widget to display.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): GtkWidget, or NULL.

func (*TreeExpander) SetListRow 

func (self *TreeExpander) SetListRow(listRow *TreeListRow)

SetListRow sets the tree list row that this expander should manage.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • listRow (optional): GtkTreeListRow, or NULL.

type TreeExpanderClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeExpanderClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeExpanderClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TreeExpanderClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (t *TreeExpanderClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type TreeExpanderOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeExpanderOverrides struct {
}

TreeExpanderOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeIter 

type TreeIter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeIter is the primary structure for accessing a TreeModel. Models are expected to put a unique integer in the stamp member, and put model-specific data in the three user_data members.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TreeIter) Copy 

func (iter *TreeIter) Copy() *TreeIter

Copy creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of iter.

This function is not intended for use in applications, because you can just copy the structs by value (GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;). You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().

The function returns the following values:

  • treeIter: newly-allocated copy of iter.

func (*TreeIter) SetStamp 

func (t *TreeIter) SetStamp(stamp int)

Stamp: unique stamp to catch invalid iterators.

func (*TreeIter) Stamp 

func (t *TreeIter) Stamp() int

Stamp: unique stamp to catch invalid iterators.

func (*TreeIter) UserData 

func (t *TreeIter) UserData() unsafe.Pointer

UserData: model-specific data.

func (*TreeIter) UserData2 

func (t *TreeIter) UserData2() unsafe.Pointer

UserData2: model-specific data.

func (*TreeIter) UserData3 

func (t *TreeIter) UserData3() unsafe.Pointer

UserData3: model-specific data.

type TreeIterCompareFunc 

type TreeIterCompareFunc func(model TreeModeller, a, b *TreeIter) (gint int)

TreeIterCompareFunc should return a negative integer, zero, or a positive integer if a sorts before b, a sorts with b, or a sorts after b respectively.

If two iters compare as equal, their order in the sorted model is undefined. In order to ensure that the TreeSortable behaves as expected, the GtkTreeIterCompareFunc must define a partial order on the model, i.e. it must be reflexive, antisymmetric and transitive.

For example, if model is a product catalogue, then a compare function for the “price” column could be one which returns price_of(a) - price_of(b).

type TreeListModel 

type TreeListModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gio.ListModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListModel: GtkTreeListModel is a list model that can create child models on demand.

func NewTreeListModel 

func NewTreeListModel(root gio.ListModeller, passthrough, autoexpand bool, createFunc TreeListModelCreateModelFunc) *TreeListModel

NewTreeListModel creates a new empty GtkTreeListModel displaying root with all rows collapsed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • root: GListModel to use as root.
  • passthrough: TRUE to pass through items from the models.
  • autoexpand: TRUE to set the autoexpand property and expand the root model.
  • createFunc: function to call to create the GListModel for the children of an item.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListModel: newly created GtkTreeListModel.

func (*TreeListModel) Autoexpand 

func (self *TreeListModel) Autoexpand() bool

Autoexpand gets whether the model is set to automatically expand new rows that get added.

This can be either rows added by changes to the underlying models or via gtk.TreeListRow.SetExpanded().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the model is set to autoexpand.

func (*TreeListModel) ChildRow 

func (self *TreeListModel) ChildRow(position uint) *TreeListRow

ChildRow gets the row item corresponding to the child at index position for self's root model.

If position is greater than the number of children in the root model, NULL is returned.

Do not confuse this function with gtk.TreeListModel.GetRow().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the child to get.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRow (optional): child in position.

func (*TreeListModel) Model 

func (self *TreeListModel) Model() *gio.ListModel

Model gets the root model that self was created with.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: root model.

func (*TreeListModel) Passthrough 

func (self *TreeListModel) Passthrough() bool

Passthrough gets whether the model is passing through original row items.

If this function returns FALSE, the GListModel functions for self return custom GtkTreeListRow objects. You need to call gtk.TreeListRow.GetItem() on these objects to get the original item.

If TRUE, the values of the child models are passed through in their original state. You then need to call gtk.TreeListModel.GetRow() to get the custom GtkTreeListRows.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the model is passing through original row items.

func (*TreeListModel) Row 

func (self *TreeListModel) Row(position uint) *TreeListRow

Row gets the row object for the given row.

If position is greater than the number of items in self, NULL is returned.

The row object can be used to expand and collapse rows as well as to inspect its position in the tree. See its documentation for details.

This row object is persistent and will refer to the current item as long as the row is present in self, independent of other rows being added or removed.

If self is set to not be passthrough, this function is equivalent to calling g_list_model_get_item().

Do not confuse this function with gtk.TreeListModel.GetChildRow().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the row to fetch.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRow (optional): row item.

func (*TreeListModel) SetAutoexpand 

func (self *TreeListModel) SetAutoexpand(autoexpand bool)

SetAutoexpand sets whether the model should autoexpand.

If set to TRUE, the model will recursively expand all rows that get added to the model. This can be either rows added by changes to the underlying models or via gtk.TreeListRow.SetExpanded().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • autoexpand: TRUE to make the model autoexpand its rows.

type TreeListModelClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListModelClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListModelClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeListModelCreateModelFunc 

type TreeListModelCreateModelFunc func(item *coreglib.Object) (listModel *gio.ListModel)

TreeListModelCreateModelFunc: prototype of the function called to create new child models when gtk_tree_list_row_set_expanded() is called.

This function can return NULL to indicate that item is guaranteed to be a leaf node and will never have children. If it does not have children but may get children later, it should return an empty model that is filled once children arrive.

type TreeListModelOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListModelOverrides struct {
}

TreeListModelOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeListRow 

type TreeListRow struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListRow: GtkTreeListRow is used by GtkTreeListModel to represent items.

It allows navigating the model as a tree and modify the state of rows.

GtkTreeListRow instances are created by a GtkTreeListModel only when the gtk.TreeListModel:passthrough property is not set.

There are various support objects that can make use of GtkTreeListRow objects, such as the gtk.TreeExpander widget that allows displaying an icon to expand or collapse a row or gtk.TreeListRowSorter that makes it possible to sort trees properly.

func (*TreeListRow) ChildRow 

func (self *TreeListRow) ChildRow(position uint) *TreeListRow

ChildRow: if self is not expanded or position is greater than the number of children, NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position of the child to get.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRow (optional): child in position.

func (*TreeListRow) Children 

func (self *TreeListRow) Children() *gio.ListModel

Children: if the row is expanded, gets the model holding the children of self.

This model is the model created by the gtk.TreeListModelCreateModelFunc and contains the original items, no matter what value gtk.TreeListModel:passthrough is set to.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel (optional): model containing the children.

func (*TreeListRow) Depth 

func (self *TreeListRow) Depth() uint

Depth gets the depth of this row.

Rows that correspond to items in the root model have a depth of zero, rows corresponding to items of models of direct children of the root model have a depth of 1 and so on.

The depth of a row never changes until the row is destroyed.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: depth of this row.

func (*TreeListRow) Expanded 

func (self *TreeListRow) Expanded() bool

Expanded gets if a row is currently expanded.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row is expanded.

func (*TreeListRow) IsExpandable 

func (self *TreeListRow) IsExpandable() bool

IsExpandable checks if a row can be expanded.

This does not mean that the row is actually expanded, this can be checked with gtk.TreeListRow.GetExpanded().

If a row is expandable never changes until the row is destroyed.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row is expandable.

func (*TreeListRow) Item 

func (self *TreeListRow) Item() *coreglib.Object

Item gets the item corresponding to this row,

The value returned by this function never changes until the row is destroyed.

The function returns the following values:

  • object (optional): item of this row or NULL when the row was destroyed.

func (*TreeListRow) Parent 

func (self *TreeListRow) Parent() *TreeListRow

Parent gets the row representing the parent for self.

That is the row that would need to be collapsed to make this row disappear.

If self is a row corresponding to the root model, NULL is returned.

The value returned by this function never changes until the row is destroyed.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRow (optional): parent of self.

func (*TreeListRow) Position 

func (self *TreeListRow) Position() uint

Position returns the position in the GtkTreeListModel that self occupies at the moment.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: position in the model.

func (*TreeListRow) SetExpanded 

func (self *TreeListRow) SetExpanded(expanded bool)

SetExpanded expands or collapses a row.

If a row is expanded, the model of calling the gtk.TreeListModelCreateModelFunc for the row's item will be inserted after this row. If a row is collapsed, those items will be removed from the model.

If the row is not expandable, this function does nothing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expanded: TRUE if the row should be expanded.

type TreeListRowClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListRowClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListRowClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeListRowOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListRowOverrides struct {
}

TreeListRowOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeListRowSorter 

type TreeListRowSorter struct {
	Sorter
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListRowSorter: GtkTreeListRowSorter is a special-purpose sorter that will apply a given sorter to the levels in a tree.

Here is an example for setting up a column view with a tree model and a GtkTreeListSorter: 

column_sorter = gtk_column_view_get_sorter (view);
sorter = gtk_tree_list_row_sorter_new (g_object_ref (column_sorter));
sort_model = gtk_sort_list_model_new (tree_model, sorter);
selection = gtk_single_selection_new (sort_model);
gtk_column_view_set_model (view, G_LIST_MODEL (selection));.

func NewTreeListRowSorter 

func NewTreeListRowSorter(sorter *Sorter) *TreeListRowSorter

NewTreeListRowSorter: create a special-purpose sorter that applies the sorting of sorter to the levels of a GtkTreeListModel.

Note that this sorter relies on gtk.TreeListModel:passthrough being FALSE as it can only sort gtk.TreeListRows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sorter (optional): GtkSorter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeListRowSorter: new GtkTreeListRowSorter.

func (*TreeListRowSorter) GetSorter 

func (self *TreeListRowSorter) GetSorter() *Sorter

GetSorter returns the sorter used by self.

The function returns the following values:

  • sorter (optional) used.

func (*TreeListRowSorter) SetSorter 

func (self *TreeListRowSorter) SetSorter(sorter *Sorter)

SetSorter sets the sorter to use for items with the same parent.

This sorter will be passed the gtk.TreeListRow:item of the tree list rows passed to self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sorter (optional) to use, or NULL.

type TreeListRowSorterClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListRowSorterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeListRowSorterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TreeListRowSorterClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (t *TreeListRowSorterClass) ParentClass() *SorterClass

type TreeListRowSorterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeListRowSorterOverrides struct {
}

TreeListRowSorterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeModel 

type TreeModel struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModel: tree interface used by GtkTreeView

The TreeModel interface defines a generic tree interface for use by the TreeView widget. It is an abstract interface, and is designed to be usable with any appropriate data structure. The programmer just has to implement this interface on their own data type for it to be viewable by a TreeView widget.

The model is represented as a hierarchical tree of strongly-typed, columned data. In other words, the model can be seen as a tree where every node has different values depending on which column is being queried. The type of data found in a column is determined by using the GType system (ie. TYPE_INT, K_TYPE_BUTTON, TYPE_POINTER, etc). The types are homogeneous per column across all nodes. It is important to note that this interface only provides a way of examining a model and observing changes. The implementation of each individual model decides how and if changes are made.

In order to make life simpler for programmers who do not need to write their own specialized model, two generic models are provided — the TreeStore and the ListStore. To use these, the developer simply pushes data into these models as necessary. These models provide the data structure as well as all appropriate tree interfaces. As a result, implementing drag and drop, sorting, and storing data is trivial. For the vast majority of trees and lists, these two models are sufficient.

Models are accessed on a node/column level of granularity. One can query for the value of a model at a certain node and a certain column on that node. There are two structures used to reference a particular node in a model. They are the gtk.TreePath and the gtk.TreeIter (“iter” is short for iterator). Most of the interface consists of operations on a gtk.TreeIter.

A path is essentially a potential node. It is a location on a model that may or may not actually correspond to a node on a specific model. A gtk.TreePath can be converted into either an array of unsigned integers or a string. The string form is a list of numbers separated by a colon. Each number refers to the offset at that level. Thus, the path 0 refers to the root node and the path 2:4 refers to the fifth child of the third node.

By contrast, a gtk.TreeIter is a reference to a specific node on a specific model. It is a generic struct with an integer and three generic pointers. These are filled in by the model in a model-specific way. One can convert a path to an iterator by calling gtk_tree_model_get_iter(). These iterators are the primary way of accessing a model and are similar to the iterators used by TextBuffer. They are generally statically allocated on the stack and only used for a short time. The model interface defines a set of operations using them for navigating the model.

It is expected that models fill in the iterator with private data. For example, the ListStore model, which is internally a simple linked list, stores a list node in one of the pointers. The TreeModelSort stores an array and an offset in two of the pointers. Additionally, there is an integer field. This field is generally filled with a unique stamp per model. This stamp is for catching errors resulting from using invalid iterators with a model.

The lifecycle of an iterator can be a little confusing at first. Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model is unchanged (and doesn’t emit a signal). The model is considered to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers to is valid (most notably the TreeStore and ListStore). Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for the case where iterators do not persist beyond a signal, some very important performance enhancements were made in the sort model. As a result, the K_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST flag was added to indicate this behavior.

To help show some common operation of a model, some examples are provided. The first example shows three ways of getting the iter at the location 3:2:5. While the first method shown is easier, the second is much more common, as you often get paths from callbacks.

Acquiring a GtkTreeIter 

// Three ways of getting the iter pointing to the location
GtkTreePath *path;
GtkTreeIter iter;
GtkTreeIter parent_iter;

// get the iterator from a string
gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model,
                                     &iter,
                                     "3:2:5");

// get the iterator from a path
path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("3:2:5");
gtk_tree_model_get_iter (model, &iter, path);
gtk_tree_path_free (path);

// walk the tree to find the iterator
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
                               NULL, 3);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
                               &parent_iter, 2);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
                               &parent_iter, 5);

This second example shows a quick way of iterating through a list and getting a string and an integer from each row. The populate_model() function used below is not shown, as it is specific to the ListStore. For information on how to write such a function, see the ListStore documentation.

Reading data from a GtkTreeModel 

enum
{
  STRING_COLUMN,
  INT_COLUMN,
  N_COLUMNS
};

...

GtkTreeModel *list_store;
GtkTreeIter iter;
gboolean valid;
int row_count = 0;

// make a new list_store
list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
                                 G_TYPE_STRING,
                                 G_TYPE_INT);

// Fill the list store with data
populate_model (list_store);

// Get the first iter in the list, check it is valid and walk
// through the list, reading each row.

valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (list_store,
                                       &iter);
while (valid)
 {
   char *str_data;
   int    int_data;

   // Make sure you terminate calls to gtk_tree_model_get() with a “-1” value
   gtk_tree_model_get (list_store, &iter,
                       STRING_COLUMN, &str_data,
                       INT_COLUMN, &int_data,
                       -1);

   // Do something with the data
   g_print ("Row d: (s,d)\n",
            row_count, str_data, int_data);
   g_free (str_data);

   valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (list_store,
                                     &iter);
   row_count++;
 }

The TreeModel interface contains two methods for reference counting: gtk_tree_model_ref_node() and gtk_tree_model_unref_node(). These two methods are optional to implement. The reference counting is meant as a way for views to let models know when nodes are being displayed. TreeView will take a reference on a node when it is visible, which means the node is either in the toplevel or expanded. Being displayed does not mean that the node is currently directly visible to the user in the viewport. Based on this reference counting scheme a caching model, for example, can decide whether or not to cache a node based on the reference count. A file-system based model would not want to keep the entire file hierarchy in memory, but just the folders that are currently expanded in every current view.

When working with reference counting, the following rules must be taken into account:

- Never take a reference on a node without owning a reference on its parent. This means that all parent nodes of a referenced node must be referenced as well.

- Outstanding references on a deleted node are not released. This is not possible because the node has already been deleted by the time the row-deleted signal is received.

- Models are not obligated to emit a signal on rows of which none of its siblings are referenced. To phrase this differently, signals are only required for levels in which nodes are referenced. For the root level however, signals must be emitted at all times (however the root level is always referenced when any view is attached).

TreeModel wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*TreeModel) ColumnType 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) ColumnType(index_ int) coreglib.Type

ColumnType returns the type of the column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: column index.

The function returns the following values:

  • gType: type of the column.

func (*TreeModel) ConnectRowChanged 

func (childModel *TreeModel) ConnectRowChanged(f func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowChanged: this signal is emitted when a row in the model has changed.

func (*TreeModel) ConnectRowDeleted 

func (childModel *TreeModel) ConnectRowDeleted(f func(path *TreePath)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowDeleted: this signal is emitted when a row has been deleted.

Note that no iterator is passed to the signal handler, since the row is already deleted.

This should be called by models after a row has been removed. The location pointed to by path should be the location that the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.

func (*TreeModel) ConnectRowHasChildToggled 

func (childModel *TreeModel) ConnectRowHasChildToggled(f func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowHasChildToggled: this signal is emitted when a row has gotten the first child row or lost its last child row.

func (*TreeModel) ConnectRowInserted 

func (childModel *TreeModel) ConnectRowInserted(f func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowInserted: this signal is emitted when a new row has been inserted in the model.

Note that the row may still be empty at this point, since it is a common pattern to first insert an empty row, and then fill it with the desired values.

func (*TreeModel) ConnectRowsReordered 

func (childModel *TreeModel) ConnectRowsReordered(f func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter, newOrder unsafe.Pointer)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowsReordered: this signal is emitted when the children of a node in the TreeModel have been reordered.

Note that this signal is not emitted when rows are reordered by DND, since this is implemented by removing and then reinserting the row.

func (*TreeModel) Flags 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) Flags() TreeModelFlags

Flags returns a set of flags supported by this interface.

The flags are a bitwise combination of TreeModelFlags. The flags supported should not change during the lifetime of the tree_model.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModelFlags flags supported by this interface.

func (*TreeModel) ForEach 

func (model *TreeModel) ForEach(fn TreeModelForEachFunc)

ForEach calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.

If func returns TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to be called on each row.

func (*TreeModel) Iter 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) Iter(path *TreePath) (*TreeIter, bool)

Iter sets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path. If path does not exist, iter is set to an invalid iterator and FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: TreePath-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: uninitialized TreeIter-struct.
  • ok: TRUE, if iter was set.

func (*TreeModel) IterChildren 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterChildren(parent *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)

IterChildren sets iter to point to the first child of parent.

If parent has no children, FALSE is returned and iter is set to be invalid. parent will remain a valid node after this function has been called.

If parent is NULL returns the first node, equivalent to gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional) or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: new TreeIter-struct to be set to the child.
  • ok: TRUE, if iter has been set to the first child.

func (*TreeModel) IterFirst 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterFirst() (*TreeIter, bool)

IterFirst initializes iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path "0") and returns TRUE. Returns FALSE if the tree is empty.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: uninitialized TreeIter-struct.
  • ok: TRUE, if iter was set.

func (*TreeModel) IterFromString 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterFromString(pathString string) (*TreeIter, bool)

IterFromString sets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path_string, if it exists. Otherwise, iter is left invalid and FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • pathString: string representation of a TreePath-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: uninitialized TreeIter-struct.
  • ok: TRUE, if iter was set.

func (*TreeModel) IterHasChild 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterHasChild(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterHasChild returns TRUE if iter has children, FALSE otherwise.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter to test for children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter has children.

func (*TreeModel) IterNChildren 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterNChildren(iter *TreeIter) int

IterNChildren returns the number of children that iter has.

As a special case, if iter is NULL, then the number of toplevel nodes is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter (optional) or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of children of iter.

func (*TreeModel) IterNext 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterNext(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterNext sets iter to point to the node following it at the current level.

If there is no next iter, FALSE is returned and iter is set to be invalid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter has been changed to the next node.

func (*TreeModel) IterNthChild 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterNthChild(parent *TreeIter, n int) (*TreeIter, bool)

IterNthChild sets iter to be the child of parent, using the given index.

The first index is 0. If n is too big, or parent has no children, iter is set to an invalid iterator and FALSE is returned. parent will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a special case, if parent is NULL, then the n-th root node is set.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional) to get the child from, or NULL.
  • n: index of the desired child.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter to set to the nth child.
  • ok: TRUE, if parent has an n-th child.

func (*TreeModel) IterParent 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterParent(child *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)

IterParent sets iter to be the parent of child.

If child is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then iter is set to an invalid iterator and FALSE is returned. child will remain a valid node after this function has been called.

iter will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so child and iter cannot point to the same memory location.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child: TreeIter-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: new TreeIter-struct to set to the parent.
  • ok: TRUE, if iter is set to the parent of child.

func (*TreeModel) IterPrevious 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) IterPrevious(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterPrevious sets iter to point to the previous node at the current level.

If there is no previous iter, FALSE is returned and iter is set to be invalid.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter has been changed to the previous node.

func (*TreeModel) NColumns 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) NColumns() int

NColumns returns the number of columns supported by tree_model.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns.

func (*TreeModel) NewFilter 

func (childModel *TreeModel) NewFilter(root *TreePath) *TreeModel

NewFilter creates a new TreeModel, with child_model as the child_model and root as the virtual root.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • root (optional) or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel: new TreeModel.

func (*TreeModel) Path 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) Path(iter *TreeIter) *TreePath

Path returns a newly-created TreePath-struct referenced by iter.

This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath: newly-created TreePath-struct.

func (*TreeModel) RefNode 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RefNode(iter *TreeIter)

RefNode lets the tree ref the node.

This is an optional method for models to implement. To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists primarily for performance reasons.

This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence, whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory, just the sections that are currently being displayed by every current view.

A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent of its reffed state.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

func (*TreeModel) RowChanged 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RowChanged(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)

RowChanged emits the TreeModel::row-changed signal on tree_model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path pointing to the changed row.
  • iter: valid TreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row.

func (*TreeModel) RowDeleted 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RowDeleted(path *TreePath)

RowDeleted emits the TreeModel::row-deleted signal on tree_model.

This should be called by models after a row has been removed. The location pointed to by path should be the location that the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.

Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path pointing to the previous location of the deleted row.

func (*TreeModel) RowHasChildToggled 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RowHasChildToggled(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)

RowHasChildToggled emits the TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on tree_model. This should be called by models after the child state of a node changes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path pointing to the changed row.
  • iter: valid TreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row.

func (*TreeModel) RowInserted 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RowInserted(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)

RowInserted emits the TreeModel::row-inserted signal on tree_model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path pointing to the inserted row.
  • iter: valid TreeIter-struct pointing to the inserted row.

func (*TreeModel) RowsReordered 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) RowsReordered(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter, newOrder []int)

RowsReordered emits the TreeModel::rows-reordered signal on tree_model.

This should be called by models when their rows have been reordered.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path pointing to the tree node whose children have been reordered.
  • iter (optional): valid TreeIter-struct pointing to the node whose children have been reordered, or NULL if the depth of path is 0.
  • newOrder: array of integers mapping the current position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering, i.e. new_order[newpos] = oldpos.

func (*TreeModel) StringFromIter 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) StringFromIter(iter *TreeIter) string

StringFromIter generates a string representation of the iter.

This string is a “:” separated list of numbers. For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable return value for this string.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): newly-allocated string. Must be freed with g_free().

func (*TreeModel) UnrefNode 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) UnrefNode(iter *TreeIter)

UnrefNode lets the tree unref the node.

This is an optional method for models to implement. To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what this means, see gtk_tree_model_ref_node().

Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.

func (*TreeModel) Value 

func (treeModel *TreeModel) Value(iter *TreeIter, column int) coreglib.Value

Value initializes and sets value to that at column.

When done with value, g_value_unset() needs to be called to free any allocated memory.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter-struct.
  • column to lookup the value at.

The function returns the following values:

  • value: empty #GValue to set.

type TreeModelFilter 

type TreeModelFilter struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	TreeDragSource
	TreeModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModelFilter: gtkTreeModel which hides parts of an underlying tree model

A TreeModelFilter is a tree model which wraps another tree model, and can do the following things:

- Filter specific rows, based on data from a “visible column”, a column storing booleans indicating whether the row should be filtered or not, or based on the return value of a “visible function”, which gets a model, iter and user_data and returns a boolean indicating whether the row should be filtered or not.

- Modify the “appearance” of the model, using a modify function. This is extremely powerful and allows for just changing some values and also for creating a completely different model based on the given child model.

- Set a different root node, also known as a “virtual root”. You can pass in a TreePath indicating the root node for the filter at construction time.

The basic API is similar to TreeModelSort. For an example on its usage, see the section on TreeModelSort.

When using TreeModelFilter, it is important to realize that TreeModelFilter maintains an internal cache of all nodes which are visible in its clients. The cache is likely to be a subtree of the tree exposed by the child model. TreeModelFilter will not cache the entire child model when unnecessary to not compromise the caching mechanism that is exposed by the reference counting scheme. If the child model implements reference counting, unnecessary signals may not be emitted because of reference counting rule 3, see the TreeModel documentation. (Note that e.g. TreeStore does not implement reference counting and will always emit all signals, even when the receiving node is not visible).

Because of this, limitations for possible visible functions do apply. In general, visible functions should only use data or properties from the node for which the visibility state must be determined, its siblings or its parents. Usually, having a dependency on the state of any child node is not possible, unless references are taken on these explicitly. When no such reference exists, no signals may be received for these child nodes (see reference counting rule number 3 in the TreeModel section).

Determining the visibility state of a given node based on the state of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore, TreeModelFilter explicitly supports this. For example, when a node does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible. As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.

This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order to accommodate this, TreeModelFilter must make sure the necessary signals are received from the child model. This is achieved by building, for all nodes which are exposed as visible nodes to TreeModelFilter's clients, the child level (if any) and take a reference on the first node in this level. Furthermore, for every row-inserted, row-changed or row-deleted signal (also these which were not handled because the node was not cached), TreeModelFilter will check if the visibility state of any parent node has changed.

Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your own. In this case, either rely on TreeStore to emit all signals because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels yourself.

func (*TreeModelFilter) ClearCache 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) ClearCache()

ClearCache: this function should almost never be called. It clears the filter of any cached iterators that haven’t been reffed with gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model being filtered is static (and doesn’t change often) and there has been a lot of unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, all unreffed iters will be invalid.

func (*TreeModelFilter) ConvertChildIterToIter 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) ConvertChildIterToIter(childIter *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)

ConvertChildIterToIter sets filter_iter to point to the row in filter that corresponds to the row pointed at by child_iter. If filter_iter was not set, FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childIter: valid TreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.

The function returns the following values:

  • filterIter: uninitialized TreeIter.
  • ok: TRUE, if filter_iter was set, i.e. if child_iter is a valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.

func (*TreeModelFilter) ConvertChildPathToPath 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) ConvertChildPathToPath(childPath *TreePath) *TreePath

ConvertChildPathToPath converts child_path to a path relative to filter. That is, child_path points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the same row in the filtered model. If child_path isn’t a valid path on the child model or points to a row which is not visible in filter, then NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childPath to convert.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): newly allocated TreePath, or NULL.

func (*TreeModelFilter) ConvertIterToChildIter 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) ConvertIterToChildIter(filterIter *TreeIter) *TreeIter

ConvertIterToChildIter sets child_iter to point to the row pointed to by filter_iter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filterIter: valid TreeIter pointing to a row on filter.

The function returns the following values:

  • childIter: uninitialized TreeIter.

func (*TreeModelFilter) ConvertPathToChildPath 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) ConvertPathToChildPath(filterPath *TreePath) *TreePath

ConvertPathToChildPath converts filter_path to a path on the child model of filter. That is, filter_path points to a location in filter. The returned path will point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If filter_path does not point to a location in the child model, NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filterPath to convert.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): newly allocated TreePath, or NULL.

func (*TreeModelFilter) Model 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns a pointer to the child model of filter.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel: pointer to a TreeModel.

func (*TreeModelFilter) Refilter 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) Refilter()

Refilter emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not.

func (*TreeModelFilter) SetModifyFunc 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) SetModifyFunc(types []coreglib.Type, fn TreeModelFilterModifyFunc)

SetModifyFunc: with the n_columns and types parameters, you give an array of column types for this model (which will be exposed to the parent model/view). The func, data and destroy parameters are for specifying the modify function. The modify function will get called for each data access, the goal of the modify function is to return the data which should be displayed at the location specified using the parameters of the modify function.

Note that gtk_tree_model_filter_set_modify_func() can only be called once for a given filter model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types of the columns.
  • fn: TreeModelFilterModifyFunc.

func (*TreeModelFilter) SetVisibleColumn 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) SetVisibleColumn(column int)

SetVisibleColumn sets column of the child_model to be the column where filter should look for visibility information. columns should be a column of type G_TYPE_BOOLEAN, where TRUE means that a row is visible, and FALSE if not.

Note that gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_func() or gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column() can only be called once for a given filter model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column which is the column containing the visible information.

func (*TreeModelFilter) SetVisibleFunc 

func (filter *TreeModelFilter) SetVisibleFunc(fn TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc)

SetVisibleFunc sets the visible function used when filtering the filter to be func. The function should return TRUE if the given row should be visible and FALSE otherwise.

If the condition calculated by the function changes over time (e.g. because it depends on some global parameters), you must call gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter() to keep the visibility information of the model up-to-date.

Note that func is called whenever a row is inserted, when it may still be empty. The visible function should therefore take special care of empty rows, like in the example below. 

static gboolean
visible_func (GtkTreeModel *model,
              GtkTreeIter  *iter,
              gpointer      data)
{
  // Visible if row is non-empty and first column is “HI”
  char *str;
  gboolean visible = FALSE;

  gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &str, -1);
  if (str && strcmp (str, "HI") == 0)
    visible = TRUE;
  g_free (str);

  return visible;
}

Note that gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_func() or gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column() can only be called once for a given filter model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn the visible function.

type TreeModelFilterClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeModelFilterClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModelFilterClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeModelFilterModifyFunc 

type TreeModelFilterModifyFunc func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, column int) (value coreglib.Value)

TreeModelFilterModifyFunc: function which calculates display values from raw values in the model. It must fill value with the display value for the column column in the row indicated by iter.

Since this function is called for each data access, it’s not a particularly efficient operation.

type TreeModelFilterOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeModelFilterOverrides struct {
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - childModel
	//   - iter
	//   - value
	//   - column
	//
	Modify func(childModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, value *coreglib.Value, column int)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - childModel
	//   - iter
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Visible func(childModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter) bool
}

TreeModelFilterOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc 

type TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)

TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc: function which decides whether the row indicated by iter is visible.

type TreeModelFlags 

type TreeModelFlags C.guint

TreeModelFlags: these flags indicate various properties of a TreeModel.

They are returned by gtk_tree_model_get_flags(), and must be static for the lifetime of the object. A more complete description of K_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST can be found in the overview of this section. 

const (
	// TreeModelItersPersist iterators survive all signals emitted by the tree.
	TreeModelItersPersist TreeModelFlags = 0b1
	// TreeModelListOnly: model is a list only, and never has children.
	TreeModelListOnly TreeModelFlags = 0b10
)

func (TreeModelFlags) Has 

func (t TreeModelFlags) Has(other TreeModelFlags) bool

Has returns true if t contains other.

func (TreeModelFlags) String 

func (t TreeModelFlags) String() string

String returns the names in string for TreeModelFlags.

type TreeModelForEachFunc 

type TreeModelForEachFunc func(model TreeModeller, path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)

TreeModelForEachFunc: type of the callback passed to gtk_tree_model_foreach() to iterate over the rows in a tree model.

type TreeModelIface added in v0.0.5 

type TreeModelIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModelIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeModelSort 

type TreeModelSort struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	TreeDragSource
	TreeSortable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModelSort: gtkTreeModel which makes an underlying tree model sortable

The TreeModelSort is a model which implements the TreeSortable interface. It does not hold any data itself, but rather is created with a child model and proxies its data. It has identical column types to this child model, and the changes in the child are propagated. The primary purpose of this model is to provide a way to sort a different model without modifying it. Note that the sort function used by TreeModelSort is not guaranteed to be stable.

The use of this is best demonstrated through an example. In the following sample code we create two TreeView widgets each with a view of the same data. As the model is wrapped here by a TreeModelSort, the two TreeViews can each sort their view of the data without affecting the other. By contrast, if we simply put the same model in each widget, then sorting the first would sort the second.

Using a TreeModelSort 

void
selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection, gpointer data)
{
  GtkTreeModel *sort_model = NULL;
  GtkTreeModel *child_model;
  GtkTreeIter sort_iter;
  GtkTreeIter child_iter;
  char *some_data = NULL;
  char *modified_data;

  // Get the current selected row and the model.
  if (! gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (selection,
                                         &sort_model,
                                         &sort_iter))
    return;

  // Look up the current value on the selected row and get
  // a new value to change it to.
  gtk_tree_model_get (GTK_TREE_MODEL (sort_model), &sort_iter,
                      COLUMN_1, &some_data,
                      -1);

  modified_data = change_the_data (some_data);
  g_free (some_data);

  // Get an iterator on the child model, instead of the sort model.
  gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model),
                                                  &child_iter,
                                                  &sort_iter);

  // Get the child model and change the value of the row. In this
  // example, the child model is a GtkListStore. It could be any other
  // type of model, though.
  child_model = gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model));
  gtk_list_store_set (GTK_LIST_STORE (child_model), &child_iter,
                      COLUMN_1, &modified_data,
                      -1);
  g_free (modified_data);
}.

func NewTreeModelSortWithModel 

func NewTreeModelSortWithModel(childModel TreeModeller) *TreeModelSort

NewTreeModelSortWithModel creates a new TreeModelSort, with child_model as the child model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childModel: TreeModel.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModelSort: new TreeModelSort.

func (*TreeModelSort) ClearCache 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ClearCache()

ClearCache: this function should almost never be called. It clears the tree_model_sort of any cached iterators that haven’t been reffed with gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model being sorted is static (and doesn’t change often) and there has been a lot of unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, all unreffed iters will be invalid.

func (*TreeModelSort) ConvertChildIterToIter 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ConvertChildIterToIter(childIter *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)

ConvertChildIterToIter sets sort_iter to point to the row in tree_model_sort that corresponds to the row pointed at by child_iter. If sort_iter was not set, FALSE is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childIter: valid TreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.

The function returns the following values:

  • sortIter: uninitialized TreeIter.
  • ok: TRUE, if sort_iter was set, i.e. if sort_iter is a valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.

func (*TreeModelSort) ConvertChildPathToPath 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ConvertChildPathToPath(childPath *TreePath) *TreePath

ConvertChildPathToPath converts child_path to a path relative to tree_model_sort. That is, child_path points to a path in the child model. The returned path will point to the same row in the sorted model. If child_path isn’t a valid path on the child model, then NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childPath to convert.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): newly allocated TreePath, or NULL.

func (*TreeModelSort) ConvertIterToChildIter 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ConvertIterToChildIter(sortedIter *TreeIter) *TreeIter

ConvertIterToChildIter sets child_iter to point to the row pointed to by sorted_iter.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortedIter: valid TreeIter pointing to a row on tree_model_sort.

The function returns the following values:

  • childIter: uninitialized TreeIter.

func (*TreeModelSort) ConvertPathToChildPath 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ConvertPathToChildPath(sortedPath *TreePath) *TreePath

ConvertPathToChildPath converts sorted_path to a path on the child model of tree_model_sort. That is, sorted_path points to a location in tree_model_sort. The returned path will point to the same location in the model not being sorted. If sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model, NULL is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortedPath to convert.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): newly allocated TreePath, or NULL.

func (*TreeModelSort) IterIsValid 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) IterIsValid(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterIsValid: > This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing > purposes.

Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this TreeModelSort.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the iter is valid, FALSE if the iter is invalid.

func (*TreeModelSort) Model 

func (treeModel *TreeModelSort) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model the TreeModelSort is sorting.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel: "child model" being sorted.

func (*TreeModelSort) ResetDefaultSortFunc 

func (treeModelSort *TreeModelSort) ResetDefaultSortFunc()

ResetDefaultSortFunc: this resets the default sort function to be in the “unsorted” state. That is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model to be in the same order as the child model only if the TreeModelSort is in “unsorted” state.

type TreeModelSortClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeModelSortClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeModelSortClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeModelSortOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeModelSortOverrides struct {
}

TreeModelSortOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeModeller 

type TreeModeller interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// ForEach calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
	ForEach(fn TreeModelForEachFunc)
	// ColumnType returns the type of the column.
	ColumnType(index_ int) coreglib.Type
	// Flags returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
	Flags() TreeModelFlags
	// Iter sets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path.
	Iter(path *TreePath) (*TreeIter, bool)
	// IterFirst initializes iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one
	// at the path "0") and returns TRUE.
	IterFirst() (*TreeIter, bool)
	// IterFromString sets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path_string,
	// if it exists.
	IterFromString(pathString string) (*TreeIter, bool)
	// NColumns returns the number of columns supported by tree_model.
	NColumns() int
	// Path returns a newly-created TreePath-struct referenced by iter.
	Path(iter *TreeIter) *TreePath
	// StringFromIter generates a string representation of the iter.
	StringFromIter(iter *TreeIter) string
	// Value initializes and sets value to that at column.
	Value(iter *TreeIter, column int) coreglib.Value
	// IterChildren sets iter to point to the first child of parent.
	IterChildren(parent *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)
	// IterHasChild returns TRUE if iter has children, FALSE otherwise.
	IterHasChild(iter *TreeIter) bool
	// IterNChildren returns the number of children that iter has.
	IterNChildren(iter *TreeIter) int
	// IterNext sets iter to point to the node following it at the current
	// level.
	IterNext(iter *TreeIter) bool
	// IterNthChild sets iter to be the child of parent, using the given index.
	IterNthChild(parent *TreeIter, n int) (*TreeIter, bool)
	// IterParent sets iter to be the parent of child.
	IterParent(child *TreeIter) (*TreeIter, bool)
	// IterPrevious sets iter to point to the previous node at the current
	// level.
	IterPrevious(iter *TreeIter) bool
	// RefNode lets the tree ref the node.
	RefNode(iter *TreeIter)
	// RowChanged emits the TreeModel::row-changed signal on tree_model.
	RowChanged(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)
	// RowDeleted emits the TreeModel::row-deleted signal on tree_model.
	RowDeleted(path *TreePath)
	// RowHasChildToggled emits the TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on
	// tree_model.
	RowHasChildToggled(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)
	// RowInserted emits the TreeModel::row-inserted signal on tree_model.
	RowInserted(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)
	// RowsReordered emits the TreeModel::rows-reordered signal on tree_model.
	RowsReordered(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter, newOrder []int)
	// UnrefNode lets the tree unref the node.
	UnrefNode(iter *TreeIter)

	// Row-changed: this signal is emitted when a row in the model has changed.
	ConnectRowChanged(func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Row-deleted: this signal is emitted when a row has been deleted.
	ConnectRowDeleted(func(path *TreePath)) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Row-has-child-toggled: this signal is emitted when a row has gotten the
	// first child row or lost its last child row.
	ConnectRowHasChildToggled(func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Row-inserted: this signal is emitted when a new row has been inserted in
	// the model.
	ConnectRowInserted(func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)) coreglib.SignalHandle
	// Rows-reordered: this signal is emitted when the children of a node in the
	// TreeModel have been reordered.
	ConnectRowsReordered(func(path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter, newOrder unsafe.Pointer)) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

TreeModeller describes TreeModel's interface methods.

type TreePath 

type TreePath struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreePath: opaque structure representing a path to a row in a model.

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewTreePath 

func NewTreePath() *TreePath

NewTreePath constructs a struct TreePath.

func NewTreePathFirst 

func NewTreePathFirst() *TreePath

NewTreePathFirst constructs a struct TreePath.

func NewTreePathFromIndices 

func NewTreePathFromIndices(indices []int) *TreePath

NewTreePathFromIndices constructs a struct TreePath.

func NewTreePathFromString 

func NewTreePathFromString(path string) *TreePath

NewTreePathFromString constructs a struct TreePath.

func (*TreePath) AppendIndex 

func (path *TreePath) AppendIndex(index_ int)

AppendIndex appends a new index to a path.

As a result, the depth of the path is increased.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: index.

func (*TreePath) Compare 

func (a *TreePath) Compare(b *TreePath) int

Compare compares two paths.

If a appears before b in a tree, then -1 is returned. If b appears before a, then 1 is returned. If the two nodes are equal, then 0 is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • b to compare with.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: relative positions of a and b.

func (*TreePath) Copy 

func (path *TreePath) Copy() *TreePath

Copy creates a new TreePath-struct as a copy of path.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath: new TreePath-struct.

func (*TreePath) Depth 

func (path *TreePath) Depth() int

Depth returns the current depth of path.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: depth of path.

func (*TreePath) Down 

func (path *TreePath) Down()

Down moves path to point to the first child of the current path.

func (*TreePath) Indices 

func (path *TreePath) Indices() []int

Indices returns the current indices of path.

This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree. It also returns the number of elements in the array. The array should not be freed.

The function returns the following values:

  • gints: current indices, or NULL.

func (*TreePath) IsAncestor 

func (path *TreePath) IsAncestor(descendant *TreePath) bool

IsAncestor returns TRUE if descendant is a descendant of path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • descendant: another TreePath-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if descendant is contained inside path.

func (*TreePath) IsDescendant 

func (path *TreePath) IsDescendant(ancestor *TreePath) bool

IsDescendant returns TRUE if path is a descendant of ancestor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ancestor: another TreePath-struct.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if ancestor contains path somewhere below it.

func (*TreePath) Next 

func (path *TreePath) Next()

Next moves the path to point to the next node at the current depth.

func (*TreePath) PrependIndex 

func (path *TreePath) PrependIndex(index_ int)

PrependIndex prepends a new index to a path.

As a result, the depth of the path is increased.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: index.

func (*TreePath) Prev 

func (path *TreePath) Prev() bool

Prev moves the path to point to the previous node at the current depth, if it exists.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if path has a previous node, and the move was made.

func (*TreePath) String 

func (path *TreePath) String() string

String generates a string representation of the path.

This string is a “:” separated list of numbers. For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable return value for this string. If the path has depth 0, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): newly-allocated string. Must be freed with g_free().

func (*TreePath) Up 

func (path *TreePath) Up() bool

Up moves the path to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if path has a parent, and the move was made.

type TreeRowReference 

type TreeRowReference struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeRowReference tracks model changes so that it always refers to the same row (a TreePath refers to a position, not a fixed row). Create a new GtkTreeRowReference with gtk_tree_row_reference_new().

An instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func NewTreeRowReference 

func NewTreeRowReference(model TreeModeller, path *TreePath) *TreeRowReference

NewTreeRowReference constructs a struct TreeRowReference.

func NewTreeRowReferenceProxy 

func NewTreeRowReferenceProxy(proxy *coreglib.Object, model TreeModeller, path *TreePath) *TreeRowReference

NewTreeRowReferenceProxy constructs a struct TreeRowReference.

func (*TreeRowReference) Copy 

func (reference *TreeRowReference) Copy() *TreeRowReference

Copy copies a TreeRowReference.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeRowReference: copy of reference.

func (*TreeRowReference) Model 

func (reference *TreeRowReference) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel: model.

func (*TreeRowReference) Path 

func (reference *TreeRowReference) Path() *TreePath

Path returns a path that the row reference currently points to, or NULL if the path pointed to is no longer valid.

The function returns the following values:

  • treePath (optional): current path, or NULL.

func (*TreeRowReference) Valid 

func (reference *TreeRowReference) Valid() bool

Valid returns TRUE if the reference is non-NULL and refers to a current valid path.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if reference points to a valid path.

type TreeSelection 

type TreeSelection struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeSelection: selection object for GtkTreeView

The TreeSelection object is a helper object to manage the selection for a TreeView widget. The TreeSelection object is automatically created when a new TreeView widget is created, and cannot exist independently of this widget. The primary reason the TreeSelection objects exists is for cleanliness of code and API. That is, there is no conceptual reason all these functions could not be methods on the TreeView widget instead of a separate function.

The TreeSelection object is gotten from a TreeView by calling gtk_tree_view_get_selection(). It can be manipulated to check the selection status of the tree, as well as select and deselect individual rows. Selection is done completely view side. As a result, multiple views of the same model can have completely different selections. Additionally, you cannot change the selection of a row on the model that is not currently displayed by the view without expanding its parents first.

One of the important things to remember when monitoring the selection of a view is that the TreeSelection::changed signal is mostly a hint. That is, it may only emit one signal when a range of rows is selected. Additionally, it may on occasion emit a TreeSelection::changed signal when nothing has happened (mostly as a result of programmers calling select_row on an already selected row).

func (*TreeSelection) ConnectChanged 

func (selection *TreeSelection) ConnectChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectChanged is emitted whenever the selection has (possibly) changed. Please note that this signal is mostly a hint. It may only be emitted once when a range of rows are selected, and it may occasionally be emitted when nothing has happened.

func (*TreeSelection) CountSelectedRows 

func (selection *TreeSelection) CountSelectedRows() int

CountSelectedRows returns the number of rows that have been selected in tree.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of rows selected.

func (*TreeSelection) IterIsSelected 

func (selection *TreeSelection) IterIsSelected(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterIsSelected returns TRUE if the row at iter is currently selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if iter is selected.

func (*TreeSelection) Mode 

func (selection *TreeSelection) Mode() SelectionMode

Mode gets the selection mode for selection. See gtk_tree_selection_set_mode().

The function returns the following values:

  • selectionMode: current selection mode.

func (*TreeSelection) PathIsSelected 

func (selection *TreeSelection) PathIsSelected(path *TreePath) bool

PathIsSelected returns TRUE if the row pointed to by path is currently selected. If path does not point to a valid location, FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to check selection on.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if path is selected.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectAll 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectAll()

SelectAll selects all the nodes. selection must be set to K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE mode.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectIter 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectIter(iter *TreeIter)

SelectIter selects the specified iterator.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter to be selected.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectPath 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectPath(path *TreePath)

SelectPath: select the row at path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be selected.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectRange 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectRange(startPath, endPath *TreePath)

SelectRange selects a range of nodes, determined by start_path and end_path inclusive. selection must be set to K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE mode.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startPath: initial node of the range.
  • endPath: final node of the range.

func (*TreeSelection) Selected 

func (selection *TreeSelection) Selected() (*TreeModel, *TreeIter, bool)

Selected sets iter to the currently selected node if selection is set to K_SELECTION_SINGLE or K_SELECTION_BROWSE. iter may be NULL if you just want to test if selection has any selected nodes. model is filled with the current model as a convenience. This function will not work if you use selection is K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.

The function returns the following values:

  • model (optional): pointer to set to the TreeModel, or NULL.
  • iter (optional) or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE, if there is a selected node.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectedForEach 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectedForEach(fn TreeSelectionForEachFunc)

SelectedForEach calls a function for each selected node. Note that you cannot modify the tree or selection from within this function. As a result, gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows() might be more useful.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to call for each selected node.

func (*TreeSelection) SelectedRows 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SelectedRows() (*TreeModel, []*TreePath)

SelectedRows creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may want to convert the returned list into a list of TreeRowReferences. To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().

To free the return value, use: 

g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);.

The function returns the following values:

  • model (optional): pointer to set to the TreeModel, or NULL.
  • list containing a TreePath for each selected row.

func (*TreeSelection) SetMode 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SetMode(typ SelectionMode)

SetMode sets the selection mode of the selection. If the previous type was K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, then the anchor is kept selected, if it was previously selected.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: selection mode.

func (*TreeSelection) SetSelectFunction 

func (selection *TreeSelection) SetSelectFunction(fn TreeSelectionFunc)

SetSelectFunction sets the selection function.

If set, this function is called before any node is selected or unselected, giving some control over which nodes are selected. The select function should return TRUE if the state of the node may be toggled, and FALSE if the state of the node should be left unchanged.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): selection function. May be NULL.

func (*TreeSelection) TreeView 

func (selection *TreeSelection) TreeView() *TreeView

TreeView returns the tree view associated with selection.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeView: TreeView.

func (*TreeSelection) UnselectAll 

func (selection *TreeSelection) UnselectAll()

UnselectAll unselects all the nodes.

func (*TreeSelection) UnselectIter 

func (selection *TreeSelection) UnselectIter(iter *TreeIter)

UnselectIter unselects the specified iterator.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter to be unselected.

func (*TreeSelection) UnselectPath 

func (selection *TreeSelection) UnselectPath(path *TreePath)

UnselectPath unselects the row at path.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be unselected.

func (*TreeSelection) UnselectRange 

func (selection *TreeSelection) UnselectRange(startPath, endPath *TreePath)

UnselectRange unselects a range of nodes, determined by start_path and end_path inclusive.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startPath: initial node of the range.
  • endPath: initial node of the range.

type TreeSelectionForEachFunc 

type TreeSelectionForEachFunc func(model TreeModeller, path *TreePath, iter *TreeIter)

TreeSelectionForEachFunc: function used by gtk_tree_selection_selected_foreach() to map all selected rows. It will be called on every selected row in the view.

type TreeSelectionFunc 

type TreeSelectionFunc func(selection *TreeSelection, model TreeModeller, path *TreePath, pathCurrentlySelected bool) (ok bool)

TreeSelectionFunc: function used by gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function() to filter whether or not a row may be selected. It is called whenever a row's state might change.

A return value of TRUE indicates to selection that it is okay to change the selection.

type TreeSortable 

type TreeSortable struct {
	TreeModel
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeSortable: interface for sortable models used by GtkTreeView

TreeSortable is an interface to be implemented by tree models which support sorting. The TreeView uses the methods provided by this interface to sort the model.

TreeSortable wraps an interface. This means the user can get the underlying type by calling Cast().

func (*TreeSortable) ConnectSortColumnChanged 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) ConnectSortColumnChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectSortColumnChanged signal is emitted when the sort column or sort order of sortable is changed. The signal is emitted before the contents of sortable are resorted.

func (*TreeSortable) HasDefaultSortFunc 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) HasDefaultSortFunc() bool

HasDefaultSortFunc returns TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can go back to the default state, or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if the model has a default sort function.

func (*TreeSortable) SetDefaultSortFunc 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) SetDefaultSortFunc(sortFunc TreeIterCompareFunc)

SetDefaultSortFunc sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func. If the current sort column id of sortable is GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using this function.

If sort_func is NULL, then there will be no default comparison function. This means that once the model has been sorted, it can’t go back to the default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of sortable is GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortFunc: comparison function.

func (*TreeSortable) SetSortColumnID 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) SetSortColumnID(sortColumnId int, order SortType)

SetSortColumnID sets the current sort column to be sort_column_id. The sortable will resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a TreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. sort_column_id may either be a regular column id, or one of the following special values:

- GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: the default sort function will be used, if it is set

- GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: no sorting will occur.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortColumnId: sort column id to set.
  • order: sort order of the column.

func (*TreeSortable) SetSortFunc 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) SetSortFunc(sortColumnId int, sortFunc TreeIterCompareFunc)

SetSortFunc sets the comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func. If the current sort column id of sortable is the same as sort_column_id, then the model will sort using this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortColumnId: sort column id to set the function for.
  • sortFunc: comparison function.

func (*TreeSortable) SortColumnChanged 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) SortColumnChanged()

SortColumnChanged emits a TreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on sortable.

func (*TreeSortable) SortColumnID 

func (sortable *TreeSortable) SortColumnID() (int, SortType, bool)

SortColumnID fills in sort_column_id and order with the current sort column and the order. It returns TRUE unless the sort_column_id is GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.

The function returns the following values:

  • sortColumnId: sort column id to be filled in.
  • order to be filled in.
  • ok: TRUE if the sort column is not one of the special sort column ids.

type TreeSortableIface added in v0.0.5 

type TreeSortableIface struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeSortableIface: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeSortabler 

type TreeSortabler interface {
	coreglib.Objector

	// SortColumnID fills in sort_column_id and order with the current sort
	// column and the order.
	SortColumnID() (int, SortType, bool)
	// HasDefaultSortFunc returns TRUE if the model has a default sort function.
	HasDefaultSortFunc() bool
	// SetDefaultSortFunc sets the default comparison function used when sorting
	// to be sort_func.
	SetDefaultSortFunc(sortFunc TreeIterCompareFunc)
	// SetSortColumnID sets the current sort column to be sort_column_id.
	SetSortColumnID(sortColumnId int, order SortType)
	// SetSortFunc sets the comparison function used when sorting to be
	// sort_func.
	SetSortFunc(sortColumnId int, sortFunc TreeIterCompareFunc)
	// SortColumnChanged emits a TreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on
	// sortable.
	SortColumnChanged()

	// Sort-column-changed signal is emitted when the sort column or sort order
	// of sortable is changed.
	ConnectSortColumnChanged(func()) coreglib.SignalHandle
}

TreeSortabler describes TreeSortable's interface methods.

type TreeStore 

type TreeStore struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	Buildable
	TreeDragDest
	TreeDragSource
	TreeSortable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeStore: tree-like data structure that can be used with the GtkTreeView

The TreeStore object is a list model for use with a TreeView widget. It implements the TreeModel interface, and consequently, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the TreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree [drag and drop][gtk3-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop] interfaces.

GtkTreeStore as GtkBuildable

The GtkTreeStore implementation of the Buildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.

An example of a UI Definition fragment for a tree store: 

<object class="GtkTreeStore">
  <columns>
    <column type="gchararray"/>
    <column type="gchararray"/>
    <column type="gint"/>
  </columns>
</object>.

func NewTreeStore 

func NewTreeStore(types []coreglib.Type) *TreeStore

NewTreeStore: non vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types: array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeStore: new TreeStore.

func (*TreeStore) Append 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Append(parent *TreeIter) *TreeIter

Append appends a new row to tree_store. If parent is non-NULL, then it will append the new row after the last child of parent, otherwise it will append a row to the top level. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the appended row.

func (*TreeStore) Clear 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Clear()

Clear removes all rows from tree_store.

func (*TreeStore) Insert 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Insert(parent *TreeIter, position int) *TreeIter

Insert creates a new row at position. If parent is non-NULL, then the row will be made a child of parent. Otherwise, the row will be created at the toplevel. If position is -1 or is larger than the number of rows at that level, then the new row will be inserted to the end of the list. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.
  • position to insert the new row, or -1 for last.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*TreeStore) InsertAfter 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) InsertAfter(parent, sibling *TreeIter) *TreeIter

InsertAfter inserts a new row after sibling. If sibling is NULL, then the row will be prepended to parent ’s children. If parent and sibling are NULL, then the row will be prepended to the toplevel. If both sibling and parent are set, then parent must be the parent of sibling. When sibling is set, parent is optional.

iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.
  • sibling (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*TreeStore) InsertBefore 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) InsertBefore(parent, sibling *TreeIter) *TreeIter

InsertBefore inserts a new row before sibling. If sibling is NULL, then the row will be appended to parent ’s children. If parent and sibling are NULL, then the row will be appended to the toplevel. If both sibling and parent are set, then parent must be the parent of sibling. When sibling is set, parent is optional.

iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.
  • sibling (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the new row.

func (*TreeStore) InsertWithValues 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) InsertWithValues(parent *TreeIter, position int, columns []int, values []coreglib.Value) *TreeIter

InsertWithValues: variant of gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values() which takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs. This function is mainly intended for language bindings.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.
  • position to insert the new row, or -1 for last.
  • columns: array of column numbers.
  • values: array of GValues.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter (optional): unset TreeIter to set the new row, or NULL.

func (*TreeStore) IsAncestor 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) IsAncestor(iter, descendant *TreeIter) bool

IsAncestor returns TRUE if iter is an ancestor of descendant. That is, iter is the parent (or grandparent or great-grandparent) of descendant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter.
  • descendant: valid TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if iter is an ancestor of descendant.

func (*TreeStore) IterDepth 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) IterDepth(iter *TreeIter) int

IterDepth returns the depth of iter. This will be 0 for anything on the root level, 1 for anything down a level, etc.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: depth of iter.

func (*TreeStore) IterIsValid 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) IterIsValid(iter *TreeIter) bool

IterIsValid: WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing purposes.

Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this TreeStore.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the iter is valid, FALSE if the iter is invalid.

func (*TreeStore) MoveAfter 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) MoveAfter(iter, position *TreeIter)

MoveAfter moves iter in tree_store to the position after position. iter and position should be in the same level. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores. If position is NULL, iter will be moved to the start of the level.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.
  • position (optional): TreeIter.

func (*TreeStore) MoveBefore 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) MoveBefore(iter, position *TreeIter)

MoveBefore moves iter in tree_store to the position before position. iter and position should be in the same level. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores. If position is NULL, iter will be moved to the end of the level.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: TreeIter.
  • position (optional) or NULL.

func (*TreeStore) Prepend 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Prepend(parent *TreeIter) *TreeIter

Prepend prepends a new row to tree_store. If parent is non-NULL, then it will prepend the new row before the first child of parent, otherwise it will prepend a row to the top level. iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional): valid TreeIter, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • iter: unset TreeIter to set to the prepended row.

func (*TreeStore) Remove 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Remove(iter *TreeIter) bool

Remove removes iter from tree_store. After being removed, iter is set to the next valid row at that level, or invalidated if it previously pointed to the last one.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if iter is still valid, FALSE if not.

func (*TreeStore) Set 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Set(iter *TreeIter, columns []int, values []coreglib.Value)

Set: variant of gtk_tree_store_set_valist() which takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs. This function is mainly intended for language bindings or in case the number of columns to change is not known until run-time.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter for the row being modified.
  • columns: array of column numbers.
  • values: array of GValues.

func (*TreeStore) SetColumnTypes 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) SetColumnTypes(types []coreglib.Type)

SetColumnTypes: this function is meant primarily for #GObjects that inherit from TreeStore, and should only be used when constructing a new TreeStore. It will not function after a row has been added, or a method on the TreeModel interface is called.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • types: array of #GType types, one for each column.

func (*TreeStore) SetValue 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) SetValue(iter *TreeIter, column int, value *coreglib.Value)

SetValue sets the data in the cell specified by iter and column. The type of value must be convertible to the type of the column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • iter: valid TreeIter for the row being modified.
  • column number to modify.
  • value: new value for the cell.

func (*TreeStore) Swap 

func (treeStore *TreeStore) Swap(a, b *TreeIter)

Swap swaps a and b in the same level of tree_store. Note that this function only works with unsorted stores.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • a: TreeIter.
  • b: another TreeIter.

type TreeStoreClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeStoreClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeStoreClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type TreeStoreOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeStoreOverrides struct {
}

TreeStoreOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeView 

type TreeView struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeView: widget for displaying both trees and lists

Widget that displays any object that implements the gtk.TreeModel interface.

Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview (section-tree-widget.html) for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together.

Coordinate systems in GtkTreeView API

Several different coordinate systems are exposed in the GtkTreeView API. These are:

! (tree-view-coordinates.png)

- Widget coordinates: Coordinates relative to the widget (usually widget->window).

- Bin window coordinates: Coordinates relative to the window that GtkTreeView renders to.

- Tree coordinates: Coordinates relative to the entire scrollable area of GtkTreeView. These coordinates start at (0, 0) for row 0 of the tree.

Several functions are available for converting between the different coordinate systems. The most common translations are between widget and bin window coordinates and between bin window and tree coordinates. For the former you can use gtk.TreeView.ConvertWidgetToBinWindowCoords() (and vice versa), for the latter gtk.TreeView.ConvertBinWindowToTreeCoords() (and vice versa).

GtkTreeView as GtkBuildable

The GtkTreeView implementation of the GtkBuildable interface accepts gtk.TreeViewColumn objects as <child> elements and exposes the internal gtk.TreeSelection in UI definitions.

An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkTreeView: 

<object class="GtkTreeView" id="treeview">
  <property name="model">liststore1</property>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkTreeViewColumn" id="test-column">
      <property name="title">Test</property>
      <child>
        <object class="GtkCellRendererText" id="test-renderer"/>
        <attributes>
          <attribute name="text">1</attribute>
        </attributes>
      </child>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child internal-child="selection">
    <object class="GtkTreeSelection" id="selection">
      <signal name="changed" handler="on_treeview_selection_changed"/>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

CSS nodes 

treeview.view
├── header
│   ├── button
│   │   ╰── [sort-indicator]
┊   ┊
│   ╰── button
│       ╰── [sort-indicator]
│
├── [rubberband]
╰── [dndtarget]

GtkTreeView has a main CSS node with name treeview and style class .view. It has a subnode with name header, which is the parent for all the column header widgets' CSS nodes.

Each column header consists of a button, which among other content, has a child with name sort-indicator, which carries the .ascending or .descending style classes when the column header should show a sort indicator. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image using the -gtk-icon-source property.

For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.

For the drop target location during DND, a subnode with name dndtarget is used.

func NewTreeView 

func NewTreeView() *TreeView

NewTreeView creates a new TreeView widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeView: newly created TreeView widget.

func NewTreeViewWithModel 

func NewTreeViewWithModel(model TreeModeller) *TreeView

NewTreeViewWithModel creates a new TreeView widget with the model initialized to model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model: model.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeView: newly created TreeView widget.

func (*TreeView) ActivateOnSingleClick 

func (treeView *TreeView) ActivateOnSingleClick() bool

ActivateOnSingleClick gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_activate_on_single_click().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if row-activated will be emitted on a single click.

func (*TreeView) AppendColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) AppendColumn(column *TreeViewColumn) int

AppendColumn appends column to the list of columns. If tree_view has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then column must have its “sizing” property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column to add.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns in tree_view after appending.

func (*TreeView) BackgroundArea 

func (treeView *TreeView) BackgroundArea(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn) *gdk.Rectangle

BackgroundArea fills the bounding rectangle in bin_window coordinates for the cell at the row specified by path and the column specified by column. If path is NULL, or points to a node not found in the tree, the y and height fields of the rectangle will be filled with 0. If column is NULL, the x and width fields will be filled with 0. The returned rectangle is equivalent to the background_area passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render(). These background areas tile to cover the entire bin window. Contrast with the cell_area, returned by gtk_tree_view_get_cell_area(), which returns only the cell itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) for the row, or NULL to get only horizontal coordinates.
  • column (optional) for the column, or NULL to get only vertical coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • rect: rectangle to fill with cell background rect.

func (*TreeView) CellArea 

func (treeView *TreeView) CellArea(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn) *gdk.Rectangle

CellArea fills the bounding rectangle in bin_window coordinates for the cell at the row specified by path and the column specified by column. If path is NULL, or points to a path not currently displayed, the y and height fields of the rectangle will be filled with 0. If column is NULL, the x and width fields will be filled with 0. The sum of all cell rects does not cover the entire tree; there are extra pixels in between rows, for example. The returned rectangle is equivalent to the cell_area passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render(). This function is only valid if tree_view is realized.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) for the row, or NULL to get only horizontal coordinates.
  • column (optional) for the column, or NULL to get only vertical coordinates.

The function returns the following values:

  • rect: rectangle to fill with cell rect.

func (*TreeView) CollapseAll 

func (treeView *TreeView) CollapseAll()

CollapseAll: recursively collapses all visible, expanded nodes in tree_view.

func (*TreeView) CollapseRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) CollapseRow(path *TreePath) bool

CollapseRow collapses a row (hides its child rows, if they exist).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to a row in the tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row was collapsed.

func (*TreeView) Column 

func (treeView *TreeView) Column(n int) *TreeViewColumn

Column gets the TreeViewColumn at the given position in the #tree_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • n of the column, counting from 0.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewColumn (optional) or NULL if the position is outside the range of columns.

func (*TreeView) Columns 

func (treeView *TreeView) Columns() []*TreeViewColumn

Columns returns a #GList of all the TreeViewColumn s currently in tree_view. The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().

The function returns the following values:

  • list of TreeViewColumn s.

func (*TreeView) ColumnsAutosize 

func (treeView *TreeView) ColumnsAutosize()

ColumnsAutosize resizes all columns to their optimal width. Only works after the treeview has been realized.

func (*TreeView) ConnectColumnsChanged 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectColumnsChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectColumnsChanged: number of columns of the treeview has changed.

func (*TreeView) ConnectCursorChanged 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectCursorChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCursorChanged: position of the cursor (focused cell) has changed.

func (*TreeView) ConnectExpandCollapseCursorRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectExpandCollapseCursorRow(f func(object, p0, p1 bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectMoveCursor 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectMoveCursor(f func(step MovementStep, direction int, extend, modify bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveCursor signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkSignalAction] which gets emitted when the user presses one of the cursor keys.

Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor programmatically. In contrast to gtk_tree_view_set_cursor() and gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell() when moving horizontally TreeView::move-cursor does not reset the current selection.

func (*TreeView) ConnectRowActivated 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectRowActivated(f func(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowActivated: "row-activated" signal is emitted when the method gtk_tree_view_row_activated() is called, when the user double clicks a treeview row with the "activate-on-single-click" property set to FALSE, or when the user single clicks a row when the "activate-on-single-click" property set to TRUE. It is also emitted when a non-editable row is selected and one of the keys: Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter is pressed.

For selection handling refer to the [tree widget conceptual overview][TreeWidget] as well as TreeSelection.

func (*TreeView) ConnectRowCollapsed 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectRowCollapsed(f func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowCollapsed: given row has been collapsed (child nodes are hidden).

func (*TreeView) ConnectRowExpanded 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectRowExpanded(f func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRowExpanded: given row has been expanded (child nodes are shown).

func (*TreeView) ConnectSelectAll 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectSelectAll(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectSelectCursorParent 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectSelectCursorParent(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectSelectCursorRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectSelectCursorRow(f func(object bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectStartInteractiveSearch 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectStartInteractiveSearch(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectTestCollapseRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectTestCollapseRow(f func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTestCollapseRow: given row is about to be collapsed (hide its children nodes). Use this signal if you need to control the collapsibility of individual rows.

func (*TreeView) ConnectTestExpandRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectTestExpandRow(f func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectTestExpandRow: given row is about to be expanded (show its children nodes). Use this signal if you need to control the expandability of individual rows.

func (*TreeView) ConnectToggleCursorRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectToggleCursorRow(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConnectUnselectAll 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConnectUnselectAll(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

func (*TreeView) ConvertBinWindowToTreeCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertBinWindowToTreeCoords(bx, by int) (tx, ty int)

ConvertBinWindowToTreeCoords converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bx: x coordinate relative to bin_window.
  • by: y coordinate relative to bin_window.

The function returns the following values:

  • tx: return location for tree X coordinate.
  • ty: return location for tree Y coordinate.

func (*TreeView) ConvertBinWindowToWidgetCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertBinWindowToWidgetCoords(bx, by int) (wx, wy int)

ConvertBinWindowToWidgetCoords converts bin_window coordinates to widget relative coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • bx: bin_window X coordinate.
  • by: bin_window Y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • wx: return location for widget X coordinate.
  • wy: return location for widget Y coordinate.

func (*TreeView) ConvertTreeToBinWindowCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertTreeToBinWindowCoords(tx, ty int) (bx, by int)

ConvertTreeToBinWindowCoords converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree) to bin_window coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tx: tree X coordinate.
  • ty: tree Y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • bx: return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window.
  • by: return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window.

func (*TreeView) ConvertTreeToWidgetCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertTreeToWidgetCoords(tx, ty int) (wx, wy int)

ConvertTreeToWidgetCoords converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree) to widget coordinates.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tx: x coordinate relative to the tree.
  • ty: y coordinate relative to the tree.

The function returns the following values:

  • wx: return location for widget X coordinate.
  • wy: return location for widget Y coordinate.

func (*TreeView) ConvertWidgetToBinWindowCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertWidgetToBinWindowCoords(wx, wy int) (bx, by int)

ConvertWidgetToBinWindowCoords converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wx: x coordinate relative to the widget.
  • wy: y coordinate relative to the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • bx: return location for bin_window X coordinate.
  • by: return location for bin_window Y coordinate.

func (*TreeView) ConvertWidgetToTreeCoords 

func (treeView *TreeView) ConvertWidgetToTreeCoords(wx, wy int) (tx, ty int)

ConvertWidgetToTreeCoords converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • wx: x coordinate relative to the widget.
  • wy: y coordinate relative to the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • tx: return location for tree X coordinate.
  • ty: return location for tree Y coordinate.

func (*TreeView) CreateRowDragIcon 

func (treeView *TreeView) CreateRowDragIcon(path *TreePath) *gdk.Paintable

CreateRowDragIcon creates a #cairo_surface_t representation of the row at path. This image is used for a drag icon.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • paintable (optional): newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.

func (*TreeView) Cursor 

func (treeView *TreeView) Cursor() (*TreePath, *TreeViewColumn)

Cursor fills in path and focus_column with the current path and focus column. If the cursor isn’t currently set, then *path will be NULL. If no column currently has focus, then *focus_column will be NULL.

The returned TreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when you are done with it.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or NULL.
  • focusColumn (optional): a pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or NULL.

func (*TreeView) DestRowAtPos 

func (treeView *TreeView) DestRowAtPos(dragX, dragY int) (*TreePath, TreeViewDropPosition, bool)

DestRowAtPos determines the destination row for a given position. drag_x and drag_y are expected to be in widget coordinates. This function is only meaningful if tree_view is realized. Therefore this function will always return FALSE if tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dragX: position to determine the destination row for.
  • dragY: position to determine the destination row for.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the path of the highlighted row, or NULL.
  • pos (optional): return location for the drop position, or NULL.
  • ok: whether there is a row at the given position, TRUE if this is indeed the case.

func (*TreeView) DragDestRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) DragDestRow() (*TreePath, TreeViewDropPosition)

DragDestRow gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): return location for the path of the highlighted row, or NULL.
  • pos (optional): return location for the drop position, or NULL.

func (*TreeView) EnableModelDragDest 

func (treeView *TreeView) EnableModelDragDest(formats *gdk.ContentFormats, actions gdk.DragAction)

EnableModelDragDest turns tree_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling this method sets TreeView:reorderable to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • formats: target formats that the drag will support.
  • actions: bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget.

func (*TreeView) EnableModelDragSource 

func (treeView *TreeView) EnableModelDragSource(startButtonMask gdk.ModifierType, formats *gdk.ContentFormats, actions gdk.DragAction)

EnableModelDragSource turns tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this method sets TreeView:reorderable to FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startButtonMask: mask of allowed buttons to start drag.
  • formats: target formats that the drag will support.
  • actions: bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget.

func (*TreeView) EnableSearch 

func (treeView *TreeView) EnableSearch() bool

EnableSearch returns whether or not the tree allows to start interactive searching by typing in text.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether or not to let the user search interactively.

func (*TreeView) EnableTreeLines 

func (treeView *TreeView) EnableTreeLines() bool

EnableTreeLines returns whether or not tree lines are drawn in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if tree lines are drawn in tree_view, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TreeView) ExpandAll 

func (treeView *TreeView) ExpandAll()

ExpandAll: recursively expands all nodes in the tree_view.

func (*TreeView) ExpandRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) ExpandRow(path *TreePath, openAll bool) bool

ExpandRow opens the row so its children are visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to a row.
  • openAll: whether to recursively expand, or just expand immediate children.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the row existed and had children.

func (*TreeView) ExpandToPath 

func (treeView *TreeView) ExpandToPath(path *TreePath)

ExpandToPath expands the row at path. This will also expand all parent rows of path as necessary.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to a row.

func (*TreeView) ExpanderColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) ExpanderColumn() *TreeViewColumn

ExpanderColumn returns the column that is the current expander column, or NULL if none has been set. This column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewColumn (optional): expander column.

func (*TreeView) FixedHeightMode 

func (treeView *TreeView) FixedHeightMode() bool

FixedHeightMode returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if tree_view is in fixed height mode.

func (*TreeView) GridLines 

func (treeView *TreeView) GridLines() TreeViewGridLines

GridLines returns which grid lines are enabled in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines are enabled.

func (*TreeView) HeadersClickable 

func (treeView *TreeView) HeadersClickable() bool

HeadersClickable returns whether all header columns are clickable.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise FALSE.

func (*TreeView) HeadersVisible 

func (treeView *TreeView) HeadersVisible() bool

HeadersVisible returns TRUE if the headers on the tree_view are visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the headers are visible or not.

func (*TreeView) HoverExpand 

func (treeView *TreeView) HoverExpand() bool

HoverExpand returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on for tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if tree_view is in hover expansion mode.

func (*TreeView) HoverSelection 

func (treeView *TreeView) HoverSelection() bool

HoverSelection returns whether hover selection mode is turned on for tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if tree_view is in hover selection mode.

func (*TreeView) InsertColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) InsertColumn(column *TreeViewColumn, position int) int

InsertColumn: this inserts the column into the tree_view at position. If position is -1, then the column is inserted at the end. If tree_view has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then column must have its “sizing” property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column to be inserted.
  • position to insert column in.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns in tree_view after insertion.

func (*TreeView) InsertColumnWithDataFunc 

func (treeView *TreeView) InsertColumnWithDataFunc(position int, title string, cell CellRendererer, fn TreeCellDataFunc) int

InsertColumnWithDataFunc: convenience function that inserts a new column into the TreeView with the given cell renderer and a TreeCellDataFunc to set cell renderer attributes (normally using data from the model). See also gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func(), gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start(). If tree_view has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then the new column will have its “sizing” property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • position: position to insert, -1 for append.
  • title: column title.
  • cell renderer for column.
  • fn: function to set attributes of cell renderer.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns in the tree view post-insert.

func (*TreeView) IsBlankAtPos 

func (treeView *TreeView) IsBlankAtPos(x, y int) (path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn, cellX, cellY int, ok bool)

IsBlankAtPos: determine whether the point (x, y) in tree_view is blank, that is no cell content nor an expander arrow is drawn at the location. If so, the location can be considered as the background. You might wish to take special action on clicks on the background, such as clearing a current selection, having a custom context menu or starting rubber banding.

The x and y coordinate that are provided must be relative to bin_window coordinates. Widget-relative coordinates must be converted using gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().

For converting widget coordinates (eg. the ones you get from GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().

The path, column, cell_x and cell_y arguments will be filled in likewise as for gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos(). Please see gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos() for more information.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position to be identified (relative to bin_window).
  • y position to be identified (relative to bin_window).

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): pointer to a TreePath pointer to be filled in, or NULL.
  • column (optional): pointer to a TreeViewColumn pointer to be filled in, or NULL.
  • cellX (optional): pointer where the X coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or NULL.
  • cellY (optional): pointer where the Y coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if the area at the given coordinates is blank, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TreeView) IsRubberBandingActive 

func (treeView *TreeView) IsRubberBandingActive() bool

IsRubberBandingActive returns whether a rubber banding operation is currently being done in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being done in tree_view.

func (*TreeView) LevelIndentation 

func (treeView *TreeView) LevelIndentation() int

LevelIndentation returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: amount of extra indentation for child levels in tree_view. A return value of 0 means that this feature is disabled.

func (*TreeView) MapExpandedRows 

func (treeView *TreeView) MapExpandedRows(fn TreeViewMappingFunc)

MapExpandedRows calls func on all expanded rows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn: function to be called.

func (*TreeView) Model 

func (treeView *TreeView) Model() *TreeModel

Model returns the model the TreeView is based on. Returns NULL if the model is unset.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeModel (optional) or NULL if none is currently being used.

func (*TreeView) MoveColumnAfter 

func (treeView *TreeView) MoveColumnAfter(column, baseColumn *TreeViewColumn)

MoveColumnAfter moves column to be after to base_column. If base_column is NULL, then column is placed in the first position.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column to be moved.
  • baseColumn (optional) to be moved relative to, or NULL.

func (*TreeView) NColumns 

func (treeView *TreeView) NColumns() uint

NColumns queries the number of columns in the given tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: number of columns in the tree_view.

func (*TreeView) PathAtPos 

func (treeView *TreeView) PathAtPos(x, y int) (path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn, cellX, cellY int, ok bool)

PathAtPos finds the path at the point (x, y), relative to bin_window coordinates. That is, x and y are relative to an events coordinates. Widget-relative coordinates must be converted using gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords(). It is primarily for things like popup menus. If path is non-NULL, then it will be filled with the TreePath at that point. This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free(). If column is non-NULL, then it will be filled with the column at that point. cell_x and cell_y return the coordinates relative to the cell background (i.e. the background_area passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()). This function is only meaningful if tree_view is realized. Therefore this function will always return FALSE if tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.

For converting widget coordinates (eg. the ones you get from GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x position to be identified (relative to bin_window).
  • y position to be identified (relative to bin_window).

The function returns the following values:

  • path (optional): pointer to a TreePath pointer to be filled in, or NULL.
  • column (optional): pointer to a TreeViewColumn pointer to be filled in, or NULL.
  • cellX (optional): pointer where the X coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or NULL.
  • cellY (optional): pointer where the Y coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if a row exists at that coordinate.

func (*TreeView) RemoveColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) RemoveColumn(column *TreeViewColumn) int

RemoveColumn removes column from tree_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column to remove.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: number of columns in tree_view after removing.

func (*TreeView) Reorderable 

func (treeView *TreeView) Reorderable() bool

Reorderable retrieves whether the user can reorder the tree via drag-and-drop. See gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the tree can be reordered.

func (*TreeView) RowActivated 

func (treeView *TreeView) RowActivated(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn)

RowActivated activates the cell determined by path and column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to be activated.
  • column to be activated.

func (*TreeView) RowExpanded 

func (treeView *TreeView) RowExpanded(path *TreePath) bool

RowExpanded returns TRUE if the node pointed to by path is expanded in tree_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path to test expansion state.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if #path is expanded.

func (*TreeView) RubberBanding 

func (treeView *TreeView) RubberBanding() bool

RubberBanding returns whether rubber banding is turned on for tree_view. If the selection mode is K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if rubber banding in tree_view is enabled.

func (*TreeView) ScrollToCell 

func (treeView *TreeView) ScrollToCell(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn, useAlign bool, rowAlign, colAlign float32)

ScrollToCell moves the alignments of tree_view to the position specified by column and path. If column is NULL, then no horizontal scrolling occurs. Likewise, if path is NULL no vertical scrolling occurs. At a minimum, one of column or path need to be non-NULL. row_align determines where the row is placed, and col_align determines where column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0. 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means center.

If use_align is FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the cell onto the screen. This means that the cell will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current position. If the cell is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.

This function only works if the model is set, and path is a valid row on the model. If the model changes before the tree_view is realized, the centered path will be modified to reflect this change.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) of the row to move to, or NULL.
  • column (optional) to move horizontally to, or NULL.
  • useAlign: whether to use alignment arguments, or FALSE.
  • rowAlign: vertical alignment of the row specified by path.
  • colAlign: horizontal alignment of the column specified by column.

func (*TreeView) ScrollToPoint 

func (treeView *TreeView) ScrollToPoint(treeX, treeY int)

ScrollToPoint scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible area is tree_x, tree_y, where tree_x and tree_y are specified in tree coordinates. The tree_view must be realized before this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().

If either tree_x or tree_y are -1, then that direction isn’t scrolled.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • treeX: x coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1.
  • treeY: y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1.

func (*TreeView) SearchColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) SearchColumn() int

SearchColumn gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: column the interactive search code searches in.

func (*TreeView) SearchEntry 

func (treeView *TreeView) SearchEntry() *EditableTextWidget

SearchEntry returns the Entry which is currently in use as interactive search entry for tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, NULL will be returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • editable (optional): entry currently in use as search entry.

func (*TreeView) Selection 

func (treeView *TreeView) Selection() *TreeSelection

Selection gets the TreeSelection associated with tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeSelection: TreeSelection object.

func (*TreeView) SetActivateOnSingleClick 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetActivateOnSingleClick(single bool)

SetActivateOnSingleClick: cause the TreeView::row-activated signal to be emitted on a single click instead of a double click.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • single: TRUE to emit row-activated on a single click.

func (*TreeView) SetColumnDragFunction 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetColumnDragFunction(fn TreeViewColumnDropFunc)

SetColumnDragFunction sets a user function for determining where a column may be dropped when dragged. This function is called on every column pair in turn at the beginning of a column drag to determine where a drop can take place. The arguments passed to func are: the tree_view, the TreeViewColumn being dragged, the two TreeViewColumn s determining the drop spot, and user_data. If either of the TreeViewColumn arguments for the drop spot are NULL, then they indicate an edge. If func is set to be NULL, then tree_view reverts to the default behavior of allowing all columns to be dropped everywhere.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): function to determine which columns are reorderable, or NULL.

func (*TreeView) SetCursor 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetCursor(path *TreePath, focusColumn *TreeViewColumn, startEditing bool)

SetCursor sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row. If focus_column is not NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by it. Additionally, if focus_column is specified, and start_editing is TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell. This function is often followed by gtk_widget_grab_focus (tree_view) in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.

If path is invalid for model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset and the function will return without failing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: TreePath.
  • focusColumn (optional) or NULL.
  • startEditing: TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.

func (*TreeView) SetCursorOnCell 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetCursorOnCell(path *TreePath, focusColumn *TreeViewColumn, focusCell CellRendererer, startEditing bool)

SetCursorOnCell sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row. If focus_column is not NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by it. If focus_column and focus_cell are not NULL, and focus_column contains 2 or more editable or activatable cells, then focus is given to the cell specified by focus_cell. Additionally, if focus_column is specified, and start_editing is TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell. This function is often followed by gtk_widget_grab_focus (tree_view) in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.

If path is invalid for model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset and the function will return without failing.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path: TreePath.
  • focusColumn (optional) or NULL.
  • focusCell (optional) or NULL.
  • startEditing: TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.

func (*TreeView) SetDragDestRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetDragDestRow(path *TreePath, pos TreeViewDropPosition)

SetDragDestRow sets the row that is highlighted for feedback. If path is NULL, an existing highlight is removed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • path (optional) of the row to highlight, or NULL.
  • pos specifies whether to drop before, after or into the row.

func (*TreeView) SetEnableSearch 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetEnableSearch(enableSearch bool)

SetEnableSearch: if enable_search is set, then the user can type in text to search through the tree interactively (this is sometimes called "typeahead find").

Note that even if this is FALSE, the user can still initiate a search using the “start-interactive-search” key binding.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enableSearch: TRUE, if the user can search interactively.

func (*TreeView) SetEnableTreeLines 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetEnableTreeLines(enabled bool)

SetEnableTreeLines sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in tree_view. This does not have any visible effects for lists.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enabled: TRUE to enable tree line drawing, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TreeView) SetExpanderColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetExpanderColumn(column *TreeViewColumn)

SetExpanderColumn sets the column to draw the expander arrow at. It must be in tree_view. If column is NULL, then the expander arrow is always at the first visible column.

If you do not want expander arrow to appear in your tree, set the expander column to a hidden column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column (optional): NULL, or the column to draw the expander arrow at.

func (*TreeView) SetFixedHeightMode 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetFixedHeightMode(enable bool)

SetFixedHeightMode enables or disables the fixed height mode of tree_view. Fixed height mode speeds up TreeView by assuming that all rows have the same height. Only enable this option if all rows are the same height and all columns are of type GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enable: TRUE to enable fixed height mode.

func (*TreeView) SetGridLines 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetGridLines(gridLines TreeViewGridLines)

SetGridLines sets which grid lines to draw in tree_view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • gridLines value indicating which grid lines to enable.

func (*TreeView) SetHeadersClickable 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetHeadersClickable(setting bool)

SetHeadersClickable: allow the column title buttons to be clicked.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE if the columns are clickable.

func (*TreeView) SetHeadersVisible 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetHeadersVisible(headersVisible bool)

SetHeadersVisible sets the visibility state of the headers.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • headersVisible: TRUE if the headers are visible.

func (*TreeView) SetHoverExpand 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetHoverExpand(expand bool)

SetHoverExpand enables or disables the hover expansion mode of tree_view. Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer moves over them.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expand: TRUE to enable hover selection mode.

func (*TreeView) SetHoverSelection 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetHoverSelection(hover bool)

SetHoverSelection enables or disables the hover selection mode of tree_view. Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer. Currently, this works only for the selection modes GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hover: TRUE to enable hover selection mode.

func (*TreeView) SetLevelIndentation 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetLevelIndentation(indentation int)

SetLevelIndentation sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in tree_view in addition to the default indentation. The value should be specified in pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default indentation will be used. This does not have any visible effects for lists.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • indentation: amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in tree_view.

func (*TreeView) SetModel 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetModel(model TreeModeller)

SetModel sets the model for a TreeView. If the tree_view already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If model is NULL, then it will unset the old model.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • model (optional): model.

func (*TreeView) SetReorderable 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetReorderable(reorderable bool)

SetReorderable: this function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models that support the TreeDragSourceIface and the TreeDragDestIface. Both TreeStore and ListStore support these. If reorderable is TRUE, then the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model’s TreeModel::row-inserted and TreeModel::row-deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.

This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably handle drag and drop manually.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • reorderable: TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.

func (*TreeView) SetRowSeparatorFunc 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetRowSeparatorFunc(fn TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc)

SetRowSeparatorFunc sets the row separator function, which is used to determine whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator function is NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fn (optional): TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc.

func (*TreeView) SetRubberBanding 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetRubberBanding(enable bool)

SetRubberBanding enables or disables rubber banding in tree_view. If the selection mode is K_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enable: TRUE to enable rubber banding.

func (*TreeView) SetSearchColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetSearchColumn(column int)

SetSearchColumn sets column as the column where the interactive search code should search in for the current model.

If the search column is set, users can use the “start-interactive-search” key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.

Note that column refers to a column of the current model. The search column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching.

func (*TreeView) SetSearchEntry 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetSearchEntry(entry EditableTextWidgetter)

SetSearchEntry sets the entry which the interactive search code will use for this tree_view. This is useful when you want to provide a search entry in our interface at all time at a fixed position. Passing NULL for entry will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup entry again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • entry (optional) the interactive search code of tree_view should use or NULL.

func (*TreeView) SetSearchEqualFunc 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetSearchEqualFunc(searchEqualFunc TreeViewSearchEqualFunc)

SetSearchEqualFunc sets the compare function for the interactive search capabilities; note that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality TreeViewSearchEqualFunc returns FALSE on matches.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • searchEqualFunc: compare function to use during the search.

func (*TreeView) SetShowExpanders 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetShowExpanders(enabled bool)

SetShowExpanders sets whether to draw and enable expanders and indent child rows in tree_view. When disabled there will be no expanders visible in trees and there will be no way to expand and collapse rows by default. Also note that hiding the expanders will disable the default indentation. You can set a custom indentation in this case using gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation(). This does not have any visible effects for lists.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • enabled: TRUE to enable expander drawing, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TreeView) SetTooltipCell 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetTooltipCell(tooltip *Tooltip, path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn, cell CellRendererer)

SetTooltipCell sets the tip area of tooltip to the area path, column and cell have in common. For example if path is NULL and column is set, the tip area will be set to the full area covered by column. See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().

Note that if path is not specified and cell is set and part of a column containing the expander, the tooltip might not show and hide at the correct position. In such cases path must be set to the current node under the mouse cursor for this function to operate correctly.

See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tooltip: Tooltip.
  • path (optional) or NULL.
  • column (optional) or NULL.
  • cell (optional) or NULL.

func (*TreeView) SetTooltipColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetTooltipColumn(column int)

SetTooltipColumn: if you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full rows, you can use this function to have TreeView handle these automatically for you. column should be set to the column in tree_view’s model containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.

When enabled, Widget:has-tooltip will be set to TRUE and tree_view will connect a Widget::query-tooltip signal handler.

Note that the signal handler sets the text with gtk_tooltip_set_markup(), so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • column: integer, which is a valid column number for tree_view’s model.

func (*TreeView) SetTooltipRow 

func (treeView *TreeView) SetTooltipRow(tooltip *Tooltip, path *TreePath)

SetTooltipRow sets the tip area of tooltip to be the area covered by the row at path. See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative. See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • tooltip: Tooltip.
  • path: TreePath.

func (*TreeView) ShowExpanders 

func (treeView *TreeView) ShowExpanders() bool

ShowExpanders returns whether or not expanders are drawn in tree_view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if expanders are drawn in tree_view, FALSE otherwise.

func (*TreeView) TooltipColumn 

func (treeView *TreeView) TooltipColumn() int

TooltipColumn returns the column of tree_view’s model which is being used for displaying tooltips on tree_view’s rows.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: index of the tooltip column that is currently being used, or -1 if this is disabled.

func (*TreeView) TooltipContext 

func (treeView *TreeView) TooltipContext(x, y int, keyboardTip bool) (*TreeModel, *TreePath, *TreeIter, bool)

TooltipContext: this function is supposed to be used in a Widget::query-tooltip signal handler for TreeView. The x, y and keyboard_tip values which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this function without modification.

The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given coordinates (TRUE) or not (FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When TRUE, then any of model, path and iter which have been provided will be set to point to that row and the corresponding model. x and y will always be converted to be relative to tree_view’s bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is FALSE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates).
  • y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates).
  • keyboardTip: whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not.

The function returns the following values:

  • model (optional): pointer to receive a TreeModel or NULL.
  • path (optional): pointer to receive a TreePath or NULL.
  • iter (optional): pointer to receive a TreeIter or NULL.
  • ok: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.

func (*TreeView) UnsetRowsDragDest 

func (treeView *TreeView) UnsetRowsDragDest()

UnsetRowsDragDest undoes the effect of gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets TreeView:reorderable to FALSE.

func (*TreeView) UnsetRowsDragSource 

func (treeView *TreeView) UnsetRowsDragSource()

UnsetRowsDragSource undoes the effect of gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this method sets TreeView:reorderable to FALSE.

func (*TreeView) VisibleRange 

func (treeView *TreeView) VisibleRange() (startPath, endPath *TreePath, ok bool)

VisibleRange sets start_path and end_path to be the first and last visible path. Note that there may be invisible paths in between.

The paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.

The function returns the following values:

  • startPath (optional): return location for start of region, or NULL.
  • endPath (optional): return location for end of region, or NULL.
  • ok: TRUE, if valid paths were placed in start_path and end_path.

func (*TreeView) VisibleRect 

func (treeView *TreeView) VisibleRect() *gdk.Rectangle

VisibleRect fills visible_rect with the currently-visible region of the buffer, in tree coordinates. Convert to bin_window coordinates with gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords(). Tree coordinates start at 0,0 for row 0 of the tree, and cover the entire scrollable area of the tree.

The function returns the following values:

  • visibleRect: rectangle to fill.

type TreeViewClass added in v0.0.5 

type TreeViewClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeViewClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*TreeViewClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (t *TreeViewClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type TreeViewColumn 

type TreeViewColumn struct {
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned

	*coreglib.Object
	Buildable
	CellLayout
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

TreeViewColumn: visible column in a GtkTreeView widget

The GtkTreeViewColumn object represents a visible column in a TreeView widget. It allows to set properties of the column header, and functions as a holding pen for the cell renderers which determine how the data in the column is displayed.

Please refer to the [tree widget conceptual overview][TreeWidget] for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together, and to the TreeView documentation for specifics about the CSS node structure for treeviews and their headers.

func NewTreeViewColumn 

func NewTreeViewColumn() *TreeViewColumn

NewTreeViewColumn creates a new TreeViewColumn.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewColumn: newly created TreeViewColumn.

func NewTreeViewColumnWithArea 

func NewTreeViewColumnWithArea(area CellAreaer) *TreeViewColumn

NewTreeViewColumnWithArea creates a new TreeViewColumn using area to render its cells.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • area that the newly created column should use to layout cells.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewColumn: newly created TreeViewColumn.

func (*TreeViewColumn) AddAttribute 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) AddAttribute(cellRenderer CellRendererer, attribute string, column int)

AddAttribute adds an attribute mapping to the list in tree_column. The column is the column of the model to get a value from, and the attribute is the parameter on cell_renderer to be set from the value. So for example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the “text” attribute of a CellRendererText get its values from column 2.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cellRenderer to set attributes on.
  • attribute on the renderer.
  • column position on the model to get the attribute from.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Alignment 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Alignment() float32

Alignment returns the current x alignment of tree_column. This value can range between 0.0 and 1.0.

The function returns the following values:

  • gfloat: current alignent of tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Button 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Button() Widgetter

Button returns the button used in the treeview column header.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: button for the column header.

func (*TreeViewColumn) CellGetPosition 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) CellGetPosition(cellRenderer CellRendererer) (xOffset, width int, ok bool)

CellGetPosition obtains the horizontal position and size of a cell in a column. If the cell is not found in the column, start_pos and width are not changed and FALSE is returned.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cellRenderer: CellRenderer.

The function returns the following values:

  • xOffset (optional): return location for the horizontal position of cell within tree_column, may be NULL.
  • width (optional): return location for the width of cell, may be NULL.
  • ok: TRUE if cell belongs to tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) CellGetSize 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) CellGetSize() (xOffset, yOffset, width, height int)

CellGetSize obtains the width and height needed to render the column. This is used primarily by the TreeView.

The function returns the following values:

  • xOffset (optional): location to return x offset of a cell relative to cell_area, or NULL.
  • yOffset (optional): location to return y offset of a cell relative to cell_area, or NULL.
  • width (optional): location to return width needed to render a cell, or NULL.
  • height (optional): location to return height needed to render a cell, or NULL.

func (*TreeViewColumn) CellIsVisible 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) CellIsVisible() bool

CellIsVisible returns TRUE if any of the cells packed into the tree_column are visible. For this to be meaningful, you must first initialize the cells with gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the tree_column are currently visible.

func (*TreeViewColumn) CellSetCellData 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) CellSetCellData(treeModel TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter, isExpander, isExpanded bool)

CellSetCellData sets the cell renderer based on the tree_model and iter. That is, for every attribute mapping in tree_column, it will get a value from the set column on the iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell renderer. This is used primarily by the TreeView.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • treeModel to get the cell renderers attributes from.
  • iter to get the cell renderer’s attributes from.
  • isExpander: TRUE, if the row has children.
  • isExpanded: TRUE, if the row has visible children.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Clear 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Clear()

Clear unsets all the mappings on all renderers on the tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) ClearAttributes 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) ClearAttributes(cellRenderer CellRendererer)

ClearAttributes clears all existing attributes previously set with gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Clickable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Clickable() bool

Clickable returns TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if user can click the column header.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Clicked 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Clicked()

Clicked emits the “clicked” signal on the column. This function will only work if tree_column is clickable.

func (*TreeViewColumn) ConnectClicked 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) ConnectClicked(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectClicked is emitted when the column's header has been clicked.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Expand 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Expand() bool

Expand returns TRUE if the column expands to fill available space.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the column expands to fill available space.

func (*TreeViewColumn) FixedWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) FixedWidth() int

FixedWidth gets the fixed width of the column. This may not be the actual displayed width of the column; for that, use gtk_tree_view_column_get_width().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: fixed width of the column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) FocusCell 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) FocusCell(cell CellRendererer)

FocusCell sets the current keyboard focus to be at cell, if the column contains 2 or more editable and activatable cells.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.

func (*TreeViewColumn) MaxWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) MaxWidth() int

MaxWidth returns the maximum width in pixels of the tree_column, or -1 if no maximum width is set.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: maximum width of the tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) MinWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) MinWidth() int

MinWidth returns the minimum width in pixels of the tree_column, or -1 if no minimum width is set.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: minimum width of the tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) PackEnd 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) PackEnd(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)

PackEnd adds the cell to end of the column. If expand is FALSE, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided evenly between cells for which expand is TRUE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • expand: TRUE if cell is to be given extra space allocated to tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) PackStart 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) PackStart(cell CellRendererer, expand bool)

PackStart packs the cell into the beginning of the column. If expand is FALSE, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided evenly between cells for which expand is TRUE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cell: CellRenderer.
  • expand: TRUE if cell is to be given extra space allocated to tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) QueueResize 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) QueueResize()

QueueResize flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have their sizes renegotiated.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Reorderable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Reorderable() bool

Reorderable returns TRUE if the tree_column can be reordered by the user.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the tree_column can be reordered by the user.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Resizable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Resizable() bool

Resizable returns TRUE if the tree_column can be resized by the end user.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE, if the tree_column can be resized.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetAlignment 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetAlignment(xalign float32)

SetAlignment sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header. The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5 for center, 1.0 for right.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • xalign: alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetCellDataFunc 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetCellDataFunc(cellRenderer CellRendererer, fn TreeCellDataFunc)

SetCellDataFunc sets the TreeCellDataFunc to use for the column. This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for setting the column value, and should set the value of tree_column's cell renderer as appropriate. func may be NULL to remove an older one.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cellRenderer: CellRenderer.
  • fn (optional) to use.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetClickable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetClickable(clickable bool)

SetClickable sets the header to be active if clickable is TRUE. When the header is active, then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • clickable: TRUE if the header is active.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetExpand 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetExpand(expand bool)

SetExpand sets the column to take available extra space. This space is shared equally amongst all columns that have the expand set to TRUE. If no column has this option set, then the last column gets all extra space. By default, every column is created with this FALSE.

Along with “fixed-width”, the “expand” property changes when the column is resized by the user.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expand: TRUE if the column should expand to fill available space.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetFixedWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetFixedWidth(fixedWidth int)

SetFixedWidth: if fixed_width is not -1, sets the fixed width of tree_column; otherwise unsets it. The effective value of fixed_width is clamped between the minimum and maximum width of the column; however, the value stored in the “fixed-width” property is not clamped. If the column sizing is K_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY or K_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, setting a fixed width overrides the automatically calculated width. Note that fixed_width is only a hint to GTK; the width actually allocated to the column may be greater or less than requested.

Along with “expand”, the “fixed-width” property changes when the column is resized by the user.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fixedWidth: new fixed width, in pixels, or -1.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetMaxWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetMaxWidth(maxWidth int)

SetMaxWidth sets the maximum width of the tree_column. If max_width is -1, then the maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max width if it’s the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to fill any extra space.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • maxWidth: maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetMinWidth 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetMinWidth(minWidth int)

SetMinWidth sets the minimum width of the tree_column. If min_width is -1, then the minimum width is unset.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • minWidth: minimum width of the column in pixels, or -1.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetReorderable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetReorderable(reorderable bool)

SetReorderable: if reorderable is TRUE, then the column can be reordered by the end user dragging the header.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • reorderable: TRUE, if the column can be reordered.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetResizable 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetResizable(resizable bool)

SetResizable: if resizable is TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is TRUE and sizing mode of the column is K_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing mode is changed to K_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resizable: TRUE, if the column can be resized.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetSizing 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetSizing(typ TreeViewColumnSizing)

SetSizing sets the growth behavior of tree_column to type.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: TreeViewColumnSizing.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetSortColumnID 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetSortColumnID(sortColumnId int)

SetSortColumnID sets the logical sort_column_id that this column sorts on when this column is selected for sorting. Doing so makes the column header clickable.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sortColumnId: sort_column_id of the model to sort on.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetSortIndicator 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetSortIndicator(setting bool)

SetSortIndicator: call this function with a setting of TRUE to display an arrow in the header button indicating the column is sorted. Call gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order() to change the direction of the arrow.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to display an indicator that the column is sorted.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetSortOrder 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetSortOrder(order SortType)

SetSortOrder changes the appearance of the sort indicator.

This does not actually sort the model. Use gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id() to do that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.

The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort. Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • order: sort order that the sort indicator should indicate.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetSpacing 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetSpacing(spacing int)

SetSpacing sets the spacing field of tree_column, which is the number of pixels to place between cell renderers packed into it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • spacing: distance between cell renderers in pixels.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetTitle 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title of the tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then this value is ignored.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title of the tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetVisible 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetVisible(visible bool)

SetVisible sets the visibility of tree_column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: TRUE if the tree_column is visible.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SetWidget 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SetWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetWidget sets the widget in the header to be widget. If widget is NULL, then the header button is set with a Label set to the title of tree_column.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): child Widget, or NULL.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Sizing 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Sizing() TreeViewColumnSizing

Sizing returns the current type of tree_column.

The function returns the following values:

  • treeViewColumnSizing: type of tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SortColumnID 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SortColumnID() int

SortColumnID gets the logical sort_column_id that the model sorts on when this column is selected for sorting. See gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: current sort_column_id for this column, or -1 if this column can’t be used for sorting.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SortIndicator 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SortIndicator() bool

SortIndicator gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed.

func (*TreeViewColumn) SortOrder 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) SortOrder() SortType

SortOrder gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().

The function returns the following values:

  • sortType: sort order the sort indicator is indicating.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Spacing 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Spacing() int

Spacing returns the spacing of tree_column.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: spacing of tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Title 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Title() string

Title returns the title of the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: title of the column. This string should not be modified or freed.

func (*TreeViewColumn) TreeView 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) TreeView() Widgetter

TreeView returns the TreeView wherein tree_column has been inserted. If column is currently not inserted in any tree view, NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): tree view wherein column has been inserted if any, NULL otherwise.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Visible 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Visible() bool

Visible returns TRUE if tree_column is visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then the tree will show the column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Widget 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Widget() Widgetter

Widget returns the Widget in the button on the column header. If a custom widget has not been set then NULL is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional) in the column header, or NULL.

func (*TreeViewColumn) Width 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) Width() int

Width returns the current size of tree_column in pixels.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: current width of tree_column.

func (*TreeViewColumn) XOffset 

func (treeColumn *TreeViewColumn) XOffset() int

XOffset returns the current X offset of tree_column in pixels.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: current X offset of tree_column.

type TreeViewColumnDropFunc 

type TreeViewColumnDropFunc func(treeView *TreeView, column, prevColumn, nextColumn *TreeViewColumn) (ok bool)

TreeViewColumnDropFunc: function type for determining whether column can be dropped in a particular spot (as determined by prev_column and next_column). In left to right locales, prev_column is on the left of the potential drop spot, and next_column is on the right. In right to left mode, this is reversed. This function should return TRUE if the spot is a valid drop spot. Please note that returning TRUE does not actually indicate that the column drop was made, but is meant only to indicate a possible drop spot to the user.

type TreeViewColumnSizing 

type TreeViewColumnSizing C.gint

TreeViewColumnSizing: sizing method the column uses to determine its width. Please note that GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE are inefficient for large views, and can make columns appear choppy. 

const (
	// TreeViewColumnGrowOnly columns only get bigger in reaction to changes in
	// the model.
	TreeViewColumnGrowOnly TreeViewColumnSizing = iota
	// TreeViewColumnAutosize columns resize to be the optimal size every time
	// the model changes.
	TreeViewColumnAutosize
	// TreeViewColumnFixed columns are a fixed numbers of pixels wide.
	TreeViewColumnFixed
)

func (TreeViewColumnSizing) String 

func (t TreeViewColumnSizing) String() string

String returns the name in string for TreeViewColumnSizing.

type TreeViewDropPosition 

type TreeViewDropPosition C.gint

TreeViewDropPosition: enum for determining where a dropped row goes. 

const (
	// TreeViewDropBefore: dropped row is inserted before.
	TreeViewDropBefore TreeViewDropPosition = iota
	// TreeViewDropAfter: dropped row is inserted after.
	TreeViewDropAfter
	// TreeViewDropIntoOrBefore: dropped row becomes a child or is inserted
	// before.
	TreeViewDropIntoOrBefore
	// TreeViewDropIntoOrAfter: dropped row becomes a child or is inserted
	// after.
	TreeViewDropIntoOrAfter
)

func (TreeViewDropPosition) String 

func (t TreeViewDropPosition) String() string

String returns the name in string for TreeViewDropPosition.

type TreeViewGridLines 

type TreeViewGridLines C.gint

TreeViewGridLines: used to indicate which grid lines to draw in a tree view. 

const (
	// TreeViewGridLinesNone: no grid lines.
	TreeViewGridLinesNone TreeViewGridLines = iota
	// TreeViewGridLinesHorizontal: horizontal grid lines.
	TreeViewGridLinesHorizontal
	// TreeViewGridLinesVertical: vertical grid lines.
	TreeViewGridLinesVertical
	// TreeViewGridLinesBoth: horizontal and vertical grid lines.
	TreeViewGridLinesBoth
)

func (TreeViewGridLines) String 

func (t TreeViewGridLines) String() string

String returns the name in string for TreeViewGridLines.

type TreeViewMappingFunc 

type TreeViewMappingFunc func(treeView *TreeView, path *TreePath)

TreeViewMappingFunc: function used for gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows().

type TreeViewOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type TreeViewOverrides struct {
	ColumnsChanged func()
	CursorChanged  func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - logical
	//   - expand
	//   - openAll
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	ExpandCollapseCursorRow func(logical, expand, openAll bool) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - step
	//   - count
	//   - extend
	//   - modify
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	MoveCursor func(step MovementStep, count int, extend, modify bool) bool
	// RowActivated activates the cell determined by path and column.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - path to be activated.
	//   - column to be activated.
	//
	RowActivated func(path *TreePath, column *TreeViewColumn)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter
	//   - path
	//
	RowCollapsed func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter
	//   - path
	//
	RowExpanded func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath)
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	SelectAll func() bool
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	SelectCursorParent func() bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	SelectCursorRow func(startEditing bool) bool
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	StartInteractiveSearch func() bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter
	//   - path
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	TestCollapseRow func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - iter
	//   - path
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	TestExpandRow func(iter *TreeIter, path *TreePath) bool
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	ToggleCursorRow func() bool
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	UnselectAll func() bool
}

TreeViewOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc 

type TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc func(model TreeModeller, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)

TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc: function type for determining whether the row pointed to by iter should be rendered as a separator. A common way to implement this is to have a boolean column in the model, whose values the TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc returns.

type TreeViewSearchEqualFunc 

type TreeViewSearchEqualFunc func(model TreeModeller, column int, key string, iter *TreeIter) (ok bool)

TreeViewSearchEqualFunc: function used for checking whether a row in model matches a search key string entered by the user. Note the return value is reversed from what you would normally expect, though it has some similarity to strcmp() returning 0 for equal strings.

type Unit 

type Unit C.gint

Unit: see also gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width(). 

const (
	// UnitNone: no units.
	UnitNone Unit = iota
	// UnitPoints dimensions in points.
	UnitPoints
	// UnitInch dimensions in inches.
	UnitInch
	// UnitMm dimensions in millimeters.
	UnitMm
)

func (Unit) String 

func (u Unit) String() string

String returns the name in string for Unit.

type Video 

type Video struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Video: GtkVideo is a widget to show a GtkMediaStream with media controls.

!An example GtkVideo (video.png)

The controls are available separately as gtk.MediaControls. If you just want to display a video without controls, you can treat it like any other paintable and for example put it into a gtk.Picture.

GtkVideo aims to cover use cases such as previews, embedded animations, etc. It supports autoplay, looping, and simple media controls. It does not have support for video overlays, multichannel audio, device selection, or input. If you are writing a full-fledged video player, you may want to use the gdk.Paintable API and a media framework such as Gstreamer directly.

func NewVideo 

func NewVideo() *Video

NewVideo creates a new empty GtkVideo.

The function returns the following values:

  • video: new GtkVideo.

func NewVideoForFile 

func NewVideoForFile(file gio.Filer) *Video

NewVideoForFile creates a GtkVideo to play back the given file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional): GFile.

The function returns the following values:

  • video: new GtkVideo.

func NewVideoForFilename 

func NewVideoForFilename(filename string) *Video

NewVideoForFilename creates a GtkVideo to play back the given filename.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Video.NewForFile, See that function for details.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional) to play back.

The function returns the following values:

  • video: new GtkVideo.

func NewVideoForMediaStream 

func NewVideoForMediaStream(stream MediaStreamer) *Video

NewVideoForMediaStream creates a GtkVideo to play back the given stream.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream (optional): GtkMediaStream.

The function returns the following values:

  • video: new GtkVideo.

func NewVideoForResource 

func NewVideoForResource(resourcePath string) *Video

NewVideoForResource creates a GtkVideo to play back the resource at the given resource_path.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Video.NewForFile.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): resource path to play back.

The function returns the following values:

  • video: new GtkVideo.

func (*Video) Autoplay 

func (self *Video) Autoplay() bool

Autoplay returns TRUE if videos have been set to loop.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if streams should autoplay.

func (*Video) File 

func (self *Video) File() *gio.File

File gets the file played by self or NULL if not playing back a file.

The function returns the following values:

  • file (optional) played by self.

func (*Video) Loop 

func (self *Video) Loop() bool

Loop returns TRUE if videos have been set to loop.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if streams should loop.

func (*Video) MediaStream 

func (self *Video) MediaStream() MediaStreamer

MediaStream gets the media stream managed by self or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • mediaStream (optional): media stream managed by self.

func (*Video) SetAutoplay 

func (self *Video) SetAutoplay(autoplay bool)

SetAutoplay sets whether self automatically starts playback when it becomes visible or when a new file gets loaded.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • autoplay: whether media streams should autoplay.

func (*Video) SetFile 

func (self *Video) SetFile(file gio.Filer)

SetFile makes self play the given file.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • file (optional) to play.

func (*Video) SetFilename 

func (self *Video) SetFilename(filename string)

SetFilename makes self play the given filename.

This is a utility function that calls gtk_video_set_file(),.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • filename (optional) to play.

func (*Video) SetLoop 

func (self *Video) SetLoop(loop bool)

SetLoop sets whether new files loaded by self should be set to loop.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • loop: whether media streams should loop.

func (*Video) SetMediaStream 

func (self *Video) SetMediaStream(stream MediaStreamer)

SetMediaStream sets the media stream to be played back.

self will take full control of managing the media stream. If you want to manage a media stream yourself, consider using a gtk.Picture for display.

If you want to display a file, consider using gtk.Video.SetFile() instead.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • stream (optional): media stream to play or NULL to unset.

func (*Video) SetResource 

func (self *Video) SetResource(resourcePath string)

SetResource makes self play the resource at the given resource_path.

This is a utility function that calls gtk.Video.SetFile().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourcePath (optional): resource to set.

type VideoClass added in v0.0.5 

type VideoClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

VideoClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*VideoClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (v *VideoClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type VideoOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type VideoOverrides struct {
}

VideoOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Viewport 

type Viewport struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Scrollable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Viewport: GtkViewport implements scrollability for widgets that lack their own scrolling capabilities.

Use GtkViewport to scroll child widgets such as GtkGrid, GtkBox, and so on.

The GtkViewport will start scrolling content only if allocated less than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.

CSS nodes

GtkViewport has a single CSS node with name viewport.

Accessibility

GtkViewport uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewViewport 

func NewViewport(hadjustment, vadjustment *Adjustment) *Viewport

NewViewport creates a new GtkViewport.

The new viewport uses the given adjustments, or default adjustments if none are given.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hadjustment (optional): horizontal adjustment.
  • vadjustment (optional): vertical adjustment.

The function returns the following values:

  • viewport: new GtkViewport.

func (*Viewport) Child 

func (viewport *Viewport) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of viewport.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of viewport.

func (*Viewport) ScrollToFocus 

func (viewport *Viewport) ScrollToFocus() bool

ScrollToFocus gets whether the viewport is scrolling to keep the focused child in view.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the viewport keeps the focus child scrolled to view.

func (*Viewport) SetChild 

func (viewport *Viewport) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of viewport.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Viewport) SetScrollToFocus 

func (viewport *Viewport) SetScrollToFocus(scrollToFocus bool)

SetScrollToFocus sets whether the viewport should automatically scroll to keep the focused child in view.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scrollToFocus: whether to keep the focus widget scrolled to view.

type VolumeButton 

type VolumeButton struct {
	ScaleButton
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

VolumeButton: GtkVolumeButton is a GtkScaleButton subclass tailored for volume control.

!An example GtkVolumeButton (volumebutton.png).

func NewVolumeButton 

func NewVolumeButton() *VolumeButton

NewVolumeButton creates a GtkVolumeButton.

The button has a range between 0.0 and 1.0, with a stepping of 0.02. Volume values can be obtained and modified using the functions from gtk.ScaleButton.

The function returns the following values:

  • volumeButton: new GtkVolumeButton.

type Widget 

type Widget struct {
	coreglib.InitiallyUnowned

	*coreglib.Object
	Accessible
	Buildable
	ConstraintTarget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Widget: base class for all widgets.

GtkWidget is the base class all widgets in GTK derive from. It manages the widget lifecycle, layout, states and style.

Height-for-width Geometry Management

GTK uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for width-for-height). The most common example is a label that reflows to fill up the available width, wraps to fewer lines, and therefore needs less height.

Height-for-width geometry management is implemented in GTK by way of two virtual methods:

- gtk.Widget.GetRequestMode()

- gtk.Widget.Measure()

There are some important things to keep in mind when implementing height-for-width and when using it in widget implementations.

If you implement a direct GtkWidget subclass that supports height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management for itself or its child widgets, the gtk.Widget.GetRequestMode() virtual function must be implemented as well and return the widget's preferred request mode. The default implementation of this virtual function returns GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_CONSTANT_SIZE, which means that the widget will only ever get -1 passed as the for_size value to its gtk.Widget.Measure() implementation.

The geometry management system will query a widget hierarchy in only one orientation at a time. When widgets are initially queried for their minimum sizes it is generally done in two initial passes in the gtk.SizeRequestMode chosen by the toplevel.

For example, when queried in the normal GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH mode:

First, the default minimum and natural width for each widget in the interface will be computed using gtk_widget_measure with an orientation of GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and a for_size of -1. Because the preferred widths for each widget depend on the preferred widths of their children, this information propagates up the hierarchy, and finally a minimum and natural width is determined for the entire toplevel. Next, the toplevel will use the minimum width to query for the minimum height contextual to that width using gtk_widget_measure with an orientation of GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL and a for_size of the just computed width. This will also be a highly recursive operation. The minimum height for the minimum width is normally used to set the minimum size constraint on the toplevel.

After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size previously specified with gtk.Window.SetDefaultSize()). During the recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles will be recursively executed while widgets allocate their children. Each widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the space in one orientation among its children and then request each child's height for its target allocated width or its width for allocated height, depending. In this way a GtkWidget will typically be requested its size a number of times before actually being allocated a size. The size a widget is finally allocated can of course differ from the size it has requested. For this reason, GtkWidget caches a small number of results to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.

If a widget does move content around to intelligently use up the allocated size then it must support the request in both GtkSizeRequestModes even if the widget in question only trades sizes in a single orientation.

For instance, a gtk.Label that does height-for-width word wrapping will not expect to have gtk.Widget.Measure() with an orientation of GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL called because that call is specific to a width-for-height request. In this case the label must return the height required for its own minimum possible width. By following this rule any widget that handles height-for-width or width-for-height requests will always be allocated at least enough space to fit its own content.

Here are some examples of how a GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH widget generally deals with width-for-height requests: 

static void
foo_widget_measure (GtkWidget      *widget,
                    GtkOrientation  orientation,
                    int             for_size,
                    int            *minimum_size,
                    int            *natural_size,
                    int            *minimum_baseline,
                    int            *natural_baseline)
{
  if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL)
    {
      // Calculate minimum and natural width
    }
  else // VERTICAL
    {
      if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
        {
          int min_width, dummy;

          // First, get the minimum width of our widget
          GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, -1,
                                                  &min_width, &dummy, &dummy, &dummy);

          // Now use the minimum width to retrieve the minimum and natural height to display
          // that width.
          GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, min_width,
                                                  minimum_size, natural_size, &dummy, &dummy);
        }
      else
        {
          // ... some widgets do both.
        }
    }
}

Often a widget needs to get its own request during size request or allocation. For example, when computing height it may need to also compute width. Or when deciding how to use an allocation, the widget may need to know its natural size. In these cases, the widget should be careful to call its virtual methods directly, like in the code example above.

It will not work to use the wrapper function gtk.Widget.Measure() inside your own gtk.Widget.SizeAllocate() implementation. These return a request adjusted by gtk.SizeGroup, the widget's align and expand flags, as well as its CSS style.

If a widget used the wrappers inside its virtual method implementations, then the adjustments (such as widget margins) would be applied twice. GTK therefore does not allow this and will warn if you try to do it.

Of course if you are getting the size request for another widget, such as a child widget, you must use gtk_widget_measure; otherwise, you would not properly consider widget margins, gtk.SizeGroup, and so forth.

GTK also supports baseline vertical alignment of widgets. This means that widgets are positioned such that the typographical baseline of widgets in the same row are aligned. This happens if a widget supports baselines, has a vertical alignment of GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, and is inside a widget that supports baselines and has a natural “row” that it aligns to the baseline, or a baseline assigned to it by the grandparent.

Baseline alignment support for a widget is also done by the gtk.Widget.Measure() virtual function. It allows you to report both a minimum and natural size.

If a widget ends up baseline aligned it will be allocated all the space in the parent as if it was GTK_ALIGN_FILL, but the selected baseline can be found via gtk_widget_get_allocated_baseline. If the baseline has a value other than -1 you need to align the widget such that the baseline appears at the position.

GtkWidget as GtkBuildable

The GtkWidget implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports various custom elements to specify additional aspects of widgets that are not directly expressed as properties.

If the widget uses a gtk.LayoutManager, GtkWidget supports a custom <layout> element, used to define layout properties: 

<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkLabel" id="label1">
      <property name="label">Description</property>
      <layout>
        <property name="column">0</property>
        <property name="row">0</property>
        <property name="row-span">1</property>
        <property name="column-span">1</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
  <child>
    <object class="GtkEntry" id="description_entry">
      <layout>
        <property name="column">1</property>
        <property name="row">0</property>
        <property name="row-span">1</property>
        <property name="column-span">1</property>
      </layout>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

GtkWidget allows style information such as style classes to be associated with widgets, using the custom <style> element: 

<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
  <style>
    <class name="my-special-button-class"/>
    <class name="dark-button"/>
  </style>
</object>

GtkWidget allows defining accessibility information, such as properties, relations, and states, using the custom <accessibility> element: 

<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
  <accessibility>
    <property name="label">Download</property>
    <relation name="labelled-by">label1</relation>
  </accessibility>
</object>

Building composite widgets from template XML

GtkWidget exposes some facilities to automate the procedure of creating composite widgets using "templates".

To create composite widgets with GtkBuilder XML, one must associate the interface description with the widget class at class initialization time using gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplate().

The interface description semantics expected in composite template descriptions is slightly different from regular gtk.Builder XML.

Unlike regular interface descriptions, gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplate() will expect a <template> tag as a direct child of the toplevel <interface> tag. The <template> tag must specify the “class” attribute which must be the type name of the widget. Optionally, the “parent” attribute may be specified to specify the direct parent type of the widget type, this is ignored by GtkBuilder but required for UI design tools like Glade (https://glade.gnome.org/) to introspect what kind of properties and internal children exist for a given type when the actual type does not exist.

The XML which is contained inside the <template> tag behaves as if it were added to the <object> tag defining the widget itself. You may set properties on a widget by inserting <property> tags into the <template> tag, and also add <child> tags to add children and extend a widget in the normal way you would with <object> tags.

Additionally, <object> tags can also be added before and after the initial <template> tag in the normal way, allowing one to define auxiliary objects which might be referenced by other widgets declared as children of the <template> tag.

An example of a template definition: 

<interface>
  <template class="FooWidget" parent="GtkBox">
    <property name="orientation">horizontal</property>
    <property name="spacing">4</property>
    <child>
      <object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button">
        <property name="label">Hello World</property>
        <signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button_clicked" object="FooWidget" swapped="yes"/>
      </object>
    </child>
    <child>
      <object class="GtkButton" id="goodbye_button">
        <property name="label">Goodbye World</property>
      </object>
    </child>
  </template>
</interface>

Typically, you'll place the template fragment into a file that is bundled with your project, using GResource. In order to load the template, you need to call gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplateFromResource() from the class initialization of your GtkWidget type: 

static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
  // ...

  gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
                                               "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
}

You will also need to call gtk.Widget.InitTemplate() from the instance initialization function: 

static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *self)
{
  // ...
  gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (self));
}

You can access widgets defined in the template using the gtk_widget_get_template_child function, but you will typically declare a pointer in the instance private data structure of your type using the same name as the widget in the template definition, and call gtk.WidgetClass.BindTemplateChildFull() (or one of its wrapper macros gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChild() and gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChildPrivate()) with that name, e.g. 

typedef struct {
  GtkWidget *hello_button;
  GtkWidget *goodbye_button;
} FooWidgetPrivate;

G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (FooWidget, foo_widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)

static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
  // ...
  gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
                                               "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
  gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
                                                FooWidget, hello_button);
  gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
                                                FooWidget, goodbye_button);
}

static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *widget)
{

}

You can also use gtk.WidgetClass.BindTemplateCallbackFull() (or is wrapper macro gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateCallback()) to connect a signal callback defined in the template with a function visible in the scope of the class, e.g. 

// the signal handler has the instance and user data swapped
// because of the swapped="yes" attribute in the template XML
static void
hello_button_clicked (FooWidget *self,
                      GtkButton *button)
{
  g_print ("Hello, world!\n");
}

static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
  // ...
  gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
                                               "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
  gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), hello_button_clicked);
}.

func BaseWidget 

func BaseWidget(obj Widgetter) *Widget

BaseWidget returns the underlying base object.

func (*Widget) ActionSetEnabled 

func (widget *Widget) ActionSetEnabled(actionName string, enabled bool)

ActionSetEnabled: enable or disable an action installed with gtk_widget_class_install_action().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actionName: action name, such as "clipboard.paste".
  • enabled: whether the action is now enabled.

func (*Widget) Activate 

func (widget *Widget) Activate() bool

Activate: for widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.) this function activates them.

The activation will emit the signal set using gtk_widget_class_set_activate_signal() during class initialization.

Activation is what happens when you press Enter on a widget during key navigation.

If you wish to handle the activation keybinding yourself, it is recommended to use gtk_widget_class_add_shortcut() with an action created with gtk_signal_action_new().

If widget isn't activatable, the function returns FALSE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget was activatable.

func (*Widget) ActivateAction 

func (widget *Widget) ActivateAction(name string, args *glib.Variant) bool

ActivateAction looks up the action in the action groups associated with widget and its ancestors, and activates it.

If the action is in an action group added with gtk.Widget.InsertActionGroup(), the name is expected to be prefixed with the prefix that was used when the group was inserted.

The arguments must match the actions expected parameter type, as returned by g_action_get_parameter_type().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name of the action to activate.
  • args (optional) parameters to use, or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the action was activated, FALSE if the action does not exist.

func (*Widget) ActivateDefault 

func (widget *Widget) ActivateDefault()

ActivateDefault activates the default.activate action from widget.

func (*Widget) AddCSSClass 

func (widget *Widget) AddCSSClass(cssClass string)

AddCSSClass adds a style class to widget.

After calling this function, the widgets style will match for css_class, according to CSS matching rules.

Use gtk.Widget.RemoveCSSClass() to remove the style again.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cssClass: style class to add to widget, without the leading '.' used for notation of style classes.

func (*Widget) AddController 

func (widget *Widget) AddController(controller EventControllerer)

AddController adds controller to widget so that it will receive events.

You will usually want to call this function right after creating any kind of gtk.EventController.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • controller that hasn't been added to a widget yet.

func (*Widget) AddMnemonicLabel 

func (widget *Widget) AddMnemonicLabel(label Widgetter)

AddMnemonicLabel adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for this widget.

See gtk.Widget.ListMnemonicLabels(). Note the list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection to the gtk.Widget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for widget.

func (*Widget) AddTickCallback 

func (widget *Widget) AddTickCallback(callback TickCallback) uint

AddTickCallback queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called before each frame.

Until the tick callback is removed, it will be called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a Label), then you will have to call gtk.Widget.QueueResize() or gtk.Widget.QueueDraw() yourself.

gdk.FrameClock.GetFrameTime() should generally be used for timing continuous animations and gdk.FrameTimings.GetPredictedPresentationTime() if you are trying to display isolated frames at particular times.

This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the gdk.FrameClock::update signal of GdkFrameClock, since you don't have to worry about when a GdkFrameClock is assigned to a widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • callback: function to call for updating animations.

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback by passing the id returned from this function to gtk.Widget.RemoveTickCallback().

func (*Widget) Allocate 

func (widget *Widget) Allocate(width, height, baseline int, transform *gsk.Transform)

Allocate: this function is only used by GtkWidget subclasses, to assign a size, position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.

In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. The given allocation will be forced to be bigger than the widget's minimum size, as well as at least 0×0 in size.

For a version that does not take a transform, see gtk.Widget.SizeAllocate().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width: new width of widget.
  • height: new height of widget.
  • baseline: new baseline of widget, or -1.
  • transform (optional): transformation to be applied to widget.

func (*Widget) AllocatedBaseline 

func (widget *Widget) AllocatedBaseline() int

AllocatedBaseline returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to widget.

This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers for the GtkWidgetClass.snapshot() function, and when allocating child widgets in GtkWidgetClass.size_allocate().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: baseline of the widget, or -1 if none.

func (*Widget) AllocatedHeight 

func (widget *Widget) AllocatedHeight() int

AllocatedHeight returns the height that has currently been allocated to widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: height of the widget.

func (*Widget) AllocatedWidth 

func (widget *Widget) AllocatedWidth() int

AllocatedWidth returns the width that has currently been allocated to widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: width of the widget.

func (*Widget) Allocation 

func (widget *Widget) Allocation() *Allocation

Allocation retrieves the widget’s allocation.

Note, when implementing a layout container: a widget’s allocation will be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent typically calls gtk.Widget.SizeAllocate() with an allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget. gtk.Widget.GetAllocation() returns the adjusted allocation that was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is guaranteed to be completely contained within the gtk.Widget.SizeAllocate() allocation, however.

So a layout container is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds, but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.

The function returns the following values:

  • allocation: pointer to a GtkAllocation to copy to.

func (*Widget) Ancestor 

func (widget *Widget) Ancestor(widgetType coreglib.Type) Widgetter

Ancestor gets the first ancestor of widget with type widget_type.

For example, gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX) gets the first GtkBox that’s an ancestor of widget. No reference will be added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.

Note that unlike gtk.Widget.IsAncestor(), this function considers widget to be an ancestor of itself.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widgetType: ancestor type.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): ancestor widget, or NULL if not found.

func (*Widget) CSSClasses 

func (widget *Widget) CSSClasses() []string

CSSClasses returns the list of style classes applied to widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8s: NULL-terminated list of css classes currently applied to widget. The returned list can be freed using g_strfreev().

func (*Widget) CSSName 

func (self *Widget) CSSName() string

CSSName returns the CSS name that is used for self.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: CSS name.

func (*Widget) CanFocus 

func (widget *Widget) CanFocus() bool

CanFocus determines whether the input focus can enter widget or any of its children.

See gtk.Widget.SetFocusable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the input focus can enter widget, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) CanTarget 

func (widget *Widget) CanTarget() bool

CanTarget queries whether widget can be the target of pointer events.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget can receive pointer events.

func (*Widget) ChildFocus 

func (widget *Widget) ChildFocus(direction DirectionType) bool

ChildFocus: called by widgets as the user moves around the window using keyboard shortcuts.

The direction argument indicates what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab forward, tab backward).

This function calls the gtk.Widget.Focus() virtual function; widgets can override the virtual function in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.

The default focus() virtual function for a widget should return TRUE if moving in direction left the focus on a focusable location inside that widget, and FALSE if moving in direction moved the focus outside the widget. When returning TRUE, widgets normallycall gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() to place the focus accordingly; when returning FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.

This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're writing an app, you’d use gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() to move the focus to a particular widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • direction of focus movement.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus ended up inside widget.

func (*Widget) ChildVisible 

func (widget *Widget) ChildVisible() bool

ChildVisible gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().

If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably needs reorganization.

This function is only useful for container implementations and should never be called by an application.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.

func (*Widget) Clipboard 

func (widget *Widget) Clipboard() *gdk.Clipboard

Clipboard gets the clipboard object for widget.

This is a utility function to get the clipboard object for the GdkDisplay that widget is using.

Note that this function always works, even when widget is not realized yet.

The function returns the following values:

  • clipboard: appropriate clipboard object.

func (*Widget) ComputeBounds 

func (widget *Widget) ComputeBounds(target Widgetter) (*graphene.Rect, bool)

ComputeBounds computes the bounds for widget in the coordinate space of target.

FIXME: Explain what "bounds" are.

If the operation is successful, TRUE is returned. If widget has no bounds or the bounds cannot be expressed in target's coordinate space (for example if both widgets are in different windows), FALSE is returned and bounds is set to the zero rectangle.

It is valid for widget and target to be the same widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target: GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • outBounds: rectangle taking the bounds.
  • ok: TRUE if the bounds could be computed.

func (*Widget) ComputeExpand 

func (widget *Widget) ComputeExpand(orientation Orientation) bool

ComputeExpand computes whether a container should give this widget extra space when possible.

Containers should check this, rather than looking at gtk.Widget.GetHExpand() or gtk.Widget.GetVExpand().

This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible widgets are not expanded.

The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set, the widget may expand if some of its children do.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation: expand direction.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded.

func (*Widget) ComputePoint 

func (widget *Widget) ComputePoint(target Widgetter, point *graphene.Point) (*graphene.Point, bool)

ComputePoint translates the given point in widget's coordinates to coordinates relative to target’s coordinate system.

In order to perform this operation, both widgets must share a common ancestor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target: GtkWidget to transform into.
  • point in widget's coordinate system.

The function returns the following values:

  • outPoint: set to the corresponding coordinates in target's coordinate system.
  • ok: TRUE if the point could be determined, FALSE on failure. In this case, 0 is stored in out_point.

func (*Widget) ComputeTransform 

func (widget *Widget) ComputeTransform(target Widgetter) (*graphene.Matrix, bool)

ComputeTransform computes a matrix suitable to describe a transformation from widget's coordinate system into target's coordinate system.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • target widget that the matrix will transform to.

The function returns the following values:

  • outTransform: location to store the final transformation.
  • ok: TRUE if the transform could be computed, FALSE otherwise. The transform can not be computed in certain cases, for example when widget and target do not share a common ancestor. In that case out_transform gets set to the identity matrix.

func (*Widget) ConnectDestroy 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectDestroy(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDestroy signals that all holders of a reference to the widget should release the reference that they hold.

May result in finalization of the widget if all references are released.

This signal is not suitable for saving widget state.

func (*Widget) ConnectDirectionChanged 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectDirectionChanged(f func(previousDirection TextDirection)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectDirectionChanged is emitted when the text direction of a widget changes.

func (*Widget) ConnectHide 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectHide(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectHide is emitted when widget is hidden.

func (*Widget) ConnectKeynavFailed 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectKeynavFailed(f func(direction DirectionType) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectKeynavFailed is emitted if keyboard navigation fails.

See gtk.Widget.KeynavFailed() for details.

func (*Widget) ConnectMap 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectMap(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMap is emitted when widget is going to be mapped.

A widget is mapped when the widget is visible (which is controlled with gtk.Widget:visible) and all its parents up to the toplevel widget are also visible.

The ::map signal can be used to determine whether a widget will be drawn, for instance it can resume an animation that was stopped during the emission of gtk.Widget::unmap.

func (*Widget) ConnectMnemonicActivate 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectMnemonicActivate(f func(groupCycling bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMnemonicActivate is emitted when a widget is activated via a mnemonic.

The default handler for this signal activates widget if group_cycling is FALSE, or just makes widget grab focus if group_cycling is TRUE.

func (*Widget) ConnectMoveFocus 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectMoveFocus(f func(direction DirectionType)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectMoveFocus is emitted when the focus is moved.

func (*Widget) ConnectQueryTooltip 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectQueryTooltip(f func(x, y int, keyboardMode bool, tooltip *Tooltip) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectQueryTooltip is emitted when the widgets tooltip is about to be shown.

This happens when the gtk.Widget:has-tooltip property is TRUE and the hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering "above" widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.

Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine whether a tooltip should be shown for widget. If this is the case TRUE should be returned, FALSE otherwise. Note that if keyboard_mode is TRUE, the values of x and y are undefined and should not be used.

The signal handler is free to manipulate tooltip with the therefore destined function calls.

func (*Widget) ConnectRealize 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectRealize(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectRealize is emitted when widget is associated with a GdkSurface.

This means that gtk.Widget.Realize() has been called or the widget has been mapped (that is, it is going to be drawn).

func (*Widget) ConnectShow 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectShow(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectShow is emitted when widget is shown.

func (*Widget) ConnectStateFlagsChanged 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectStateFlagsChanged(f func(flags StateFlags)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectStateFlagsChanged is emitted when the widget state changes.

See gtk.Widget.GetStateFlags().

func (*Widget) ConnectUnmap 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectUnmap(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnmap is emitted when widget is going to be unmapped.

A widget is unmapped when either it or any of its parents up to the toplevel widget have been set as hidden.

As ::unmap indicates that a widget will not be shown any longer, it can be used to, for example, stop an animation on the widget.

func (*Widget) ConnectUnrealize 

func (widget *Widget) ConnectUnrealize(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectUnrealize is emitted when the GdkSurface associated with widget is destroyed.

This means that gtk.Widget.Unrealize() has been called or the widget has been unmapped (that is, it is going to be hidden).

func (*Widget) Contains 

func (widget *Widget) Contains(x, y float64) bool

Contains tests if the point at (x, y) is contained in widget.

The coordinates for (x, y) must be in widget coordinates, so (0, 0) is assumed to be the top left of widget's content area.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x: x coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.
  • y: y coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget contains (x, y).

func (*Widget) CreatePangoContext 

func (widget *Widget) CreatePangoContext() *pango.Context

CreatePangoContext creates a new PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font options, font description, and base direction for drawing text for this widget.

See also gtk.Widget.GetPangoContext().

The function returns the following values:

  • context: new PangoContext.

func (*Widget) CreatePangoLayout 

func (widget *Widget) CreatePangoLayout(text string) *pango.Layout

CreatePangoLayout creates a new PangoLayout with the appropriate font map, font description, and base direction for drawing text for this widget.

If you keep a PangoLayout created in this way around, you need to re-create it when the widget PangoContext is replaced. This can be tracked by listening to changes of the gtk.Widget:root property on the widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional) to set on the layout (can be NULL).

The function returns the following values:

  • layout: new PangoLayout.

func (*Widget) Cursor 

func (widget *Widget) Cursor() *gdk.Cursor

Cursor queries the cursor set on widget.

See gtk.Widget.SetCursor() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • cursor (optional): cursor currently in use or NULL to use the default.

func (*Widget) Direction 

func (widget *Widget) Direction() TextDirection

Direction gets the reading direction for a particular widget.

See gtk.Widget.SetDirection().

The function returns the following values:

  • textDirection: reading direction for the widget.

func (*Widget) Display 

func (widget *Widget) Display() *gdk.Display

Display: get the GdkDisplay for the toplevel window associated with this widget.

This function can only be called after the widget has been added to a widget hierarchy with a GtkWindow at the top.

In general, you should only create display specific resources when a widget has been realized, and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.

The function returns the following values:

  • display: GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.

func (*Widget) DragCheckThreshold 

func (widget *Widget) DragCheckThreshold(startX, startY, currentX, currentY int) bool

DragCheckThreshold checks to see if a drag movement has passed the GTK drag threshold.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startX: x coordinate of start of drag.
  • startY: y coordinate of start of drag.
  • currentX: current X coordinate.
  • currentY: current Y coordinate.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.

func (*Widget) ErrorBell 

func (widget *Widget) ErrorBell()

ErrorBell notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.

If the gtk.Settings:gtk-error-bell setting is TRUE, it calls gdk.Surface.Beep(), otherwise it does nothing.

Note that the effect of gdk.Surface.Beep() can be configured in many ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment or window manager that is used.

func (*Widget) FirstChild 

func (widget *Widget) FirstChild() Widgetter

FirstChild returns the widgets first child.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional) widget's first child.

func (*Widget) FocusChild 

func (widget *Widget) FocusChild() Widgetter

FocusChild returns the current focus child of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): current focus child of widget, or NULL in case the focus child is unset.

func (*Widget) FocusOnClick 

func (widget *Widget) FocusOnClick() bool

FocusOnClick returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.

See gtk.Widget.SetFocusOnClick().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.

func (*Widget) Focusable 

func (widget *Widget) Focusable() bool

Focusable determines whether widget can own the input focus.

See gtk.Widget.SetFocusable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget can own the input focus, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) FontMap 

func (widget *Widget) FontMap() pango.FontMapper

FontMap gets the font map of widget.

See gtk.Widget.SetFontMap().

The function returns the following values:

  • fontMap (optional): PangoFontMap, or NULL.

func (*Widget) FontOptions 

func (widget *Widget) FontOptions() *cairo.FontOptions

FontOptions returns the cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering.

When not set, the defaults font options for the GdkDisplay will be used.

The function returns the following values:

  • fontOptions (optional): cairo_font_options_t or NULL if not set.

func (*Widget) FrameClock 

func (widget *Widget) FrameClock() gdk.FrameClocker

FrameClock obtains the frame clock for a widget.

The frame clock is a global “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints. The most common reason to get the frame clock is to call gdk.FrameClock.GetFrameTime(), in order to get a time to use for animating. For example you might record the start of the animation with an initial value from gdk.FrameClock.GetFrameTime(), and then update the animation by calling gdk.FrameClock.GetFrameTime() again during each repaint.

gdk.FrameClock.RequestPhase() will result in a new frame on the clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a widget, you have to use gtk.Widget.QueueDraw() which invalidates the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame on the appropriate frame clock.

A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can change the widget’s frame clock.

Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.

The function returns the following values:

  • frameClock (optional): GdkFrameClock, or NULL if widget is unrealized.

func (*Widget) GrabFocus 

func (widget *Widget) GrabFocus() bool

GrabFocus causes widget to have the keyboard focus for the GtkWindow it's inside.

If widget is not focusable, or its ::grab_focus implementation cannot transfer the focus to a descendant of widget that is focusable, it will not take focus and FALSE will be returned.

Calling gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() on an already focused widget is allowed, should not have an effect, and return TRUE.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if focus is now inside widget.

func (*Widget) HAlign 

func (widget *Widget) HAlign() Align

HAlign gets the horizontal alignment of widget.

For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to GTK_ALIGN_FILL. Baselines are not supported for horizontal alignment.

The function returns the following values:

  • align: horizontal alignment of widget.

func (*Widget) HExpand 

func (widget *Widget) HExpand() bool

HExpand gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal space.

When a user resizes a GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to expand.

Containers should use gtk.Widget.ComputeExpand() rather than this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children, has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to expand, the parent may ask to expand also.

This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget wants to expand.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether hexpand flag is set.

func (*Widget) HExpandSet 

func (widget *Widget) HExpandSet() bool

HExpandSet gets whether gtk_widget_set_hexpand() has been used to explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.

If gtk.Widget:hexpand property is set, then it overrides any computed expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not set, then the expand value depends on whether any children of the widget would like to expand.

There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here for completeness and consistency.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether hexpand has been explicitly set.

func (*Widget) HasCSSClass 

func (widget *Widget) HasCSSClass(cssClass string) bool

HasCSSClass returns whether css_class is currently applied to widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cssClass: style class, without the leading '.' used for notation of style classes.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if css_class is currently applied to widget, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) HasDefault 

func (widget *Widget) HasDefault() bool

HasDefault determines whether widget is the current default widget within its toplevel.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget is the current default widget within its toplevel, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) HasFocus 

func (widget *Widget) HasFocus() bool

HasFocus determines if the widget has the global input focus.

See gtk.Widget.IsFocus() for the difference between having the global input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.

func (*Widget) HasTooltip 

func (widget *Widget) HasTooltip() bool

HasTooltip returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: current value of has-tooltip on widget.

func (*Widget) HasVisibleFocus 

func (widget *Widget) HasVisibleFocus() bool

HasVisibleFocus determines if the widget should show a visible indication that it has the global input focus.

This is a convenience function that takes into account whether focus indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of widget. See gtk.Window.GetFocusVisible() for more information about focus indication.

To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use gtk.Widget.HasFocus().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”.

func (*Widget) Height 

func (widget *Widget) Height() int

Height returns the content height of the widget.

This function returns the size passed to its size-allocate implementation, which is the size you should be using in GtkWidgetClass.snapshot().

For pointer events, see gtk.Widget.Contains().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: height of widget.

func (*Widget) Hide 

func (widget *Widget) Hide()

Hide reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show().

This is causing the widget to be hidden (invisible to the user).

func (*Widget) InDestruction 

func (widget *Widget) InDestruction() bool

InDestruction returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.

This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing unnecessary work.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget is being destroyed.

func (*Widget) InitTemplate 

func (widget *Widget) InitTemplate()

InitTemplate creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates.

This function must be called in the instance initializer for any class which assigned itself a template using gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplate().

It is important to call this function in the instance initializer of a GtkWidget subclass and not in GObject.constructed() or GObject.constructor() for two reasons:

  • derived widgets will assume that the composite widgets defined by its parent classes have been created in their relative instance initializers
  • when calling g_object_new() on a widget with composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new() should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML

A good rule of thumb is to call this function as the first thing in an instance initialization function.

func (*Widget) InsertActionGroup 

func (widget *Widget) InsertActionGroup(name string, group gio.ActionGrouper)

InsertActionGroup inserts group into widget.

Children of widget that implement gtk.Actionable can then be associated with actions in group by setting their “action-name” to prefix.action-name.

Note that inheritance is defined for individual actions. I.e. even if you insert a group with prefix prefix, actions with the same prefix will still be inherited from the parent, unless the group contains an action with the same name.

If group is NULL, a previously inserted group for name is removed from widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name: prefix for actions in group.
  • group (optional) or NULL.

func (*Widget) InsertAfter 

func (widget *Widget) InsertAfter(parent, previousSibling Widgetter)

InsertAfter inserts widget into the child widget list of parent.

It will be placed after previous_sibling, or at the beginning if previous_sibling is NULL.

After calling this function, gtk_widget_get_prev_sibling(widget) will return previous_sibling.

If parent is already set as the parent widget of widget, this function can also be used to reorder widget in the child widget list of parent.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations; if you are just using a widget, you *must* use its own API for adding children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent GtkWidget to insert widget into.
  • previousSibling (optional): new previous sibling of widget or NULL.

func (*Widget) InsertBefore 

func (widget *Widget) InsertBefore(parent, nextSibling Widgetter)

InsertBefore inserts widget into the child widget list of parent.

It will be placed before next_sibling, or at the end if next_sibling is NULL.

After calling this function, gtk_widget_get_next_sibling(widget) will return next_sibling.

If parent is already set as the parent widget of widget, this function can also be used to reorder widget in the child widget list of parent.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations; if you are just using a widget, you *must* use its own API for adding children.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent GtkWidget to insert widget into.
  • nextSibling (optional): new next sibling of widget or NULL.

func (*Widget) IsAncestor 

func (widget *Widget) IsAncestor(ancestor Widgetter) bool

IsAncestor determines whether widget is somewhere inside ancestor, possibly with intermediate containers.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • ancestor: another GtkWidget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if ancestor contains widget as a child, grandchild, great grandchild, etc.

func (*Widget) IsDrawable 

func (widget *Widget) IsDrawable() bool

IsDrawable determines whether widget can be drawn to.

A widget can be drawn if it is mapped and visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget is drawable, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) IsFocus 

func (widget *Widget) IsFocus() bool

IsFocus determines if the widget is the focus widget within its toplevel.

This does not mean that the gtk.Widget:has-focus property is necessarily set; gtk,widget:has-focus will only be set if the toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.).

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.

func (*Widget) IsSensitive 

func (widget *Widget) IsSensitive() bool

IsSensitive returns the widget’s effective sensitivity.

This means it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive.

func (*Widget) IsVisible 

func (widget *Widget) IsVisible() bool

IsVisible determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as visible.

This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.

See also gtk.Widget.GetVisible() and gtk.Widget.SetVisible().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible.

func (*Widget) KeynavFailed 

func (widget *Widget) KeynavFailed(direction DirectionType) bool

KeynavFailed emits the ::keynav-failed signal on the widget.

This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within a single widget hits a boundary.

The return value of this function should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of gtk.Widget.ChildFocus(). When TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the focus to. When FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling gtk.Widget.ChildFocus() on the widget’s toplevel.

The default gtk.Widget::keynav-failed handler returns FALSE for GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other values of DirectionType it returns TRUE.

Whenever the default handler returns TRUE, it also calls gtk.Widget.ErrorBell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard navigation.

A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of gtk.Entry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces that require entering license keys.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • direction of focus movement.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, FALSE if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt in its parent container(s).

func (*Widget) LastChild 

func (widget *Widget) LastChild() Widgetter

LastChild returns the widgets last child.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional) widget's last child.

func (*Widget) LayoutManager 

func (widget *Widget) LayoutManager() LayoutManagerer

LayoutManager retrieves the layout manager used by widget

See gtk.Widget.SetLayoutManager().

The function returns the following values:

  • layoutManager (optional): GtkLayoutManager.

func (*Widget) ListMnemonicLabels 

func (widget *Widget) ListMnemonicLabels() []Widgetter

ListMnemonicLabels returns the widgets for which this widget is the target of a mnemonic.

Typically, these widgets will be labels. See, for example, gtk.Label.SetMnemonicWidget().

The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you must call g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL) first, and then unref all the widgets afterwards.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free() when you are done with it.

func (*Widget) Map 

func (widget *Widget) Map()

Map causes a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.

This function is only for use in widget implementations.

func (*Widget) Mapped 

func (widget *Widget) Mapped() bool

Mapped: whether the widget is mapped.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is mapped, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) MarginBottom 

func (widget *Widget) MarginBottom() int

MarginBottom gets the bottom margin of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: bottom margin of widget.

func (*Widget) MarginEnd 

func (widget *Widget) MarginEnd() int

MarginEnd gets the end margin of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: end margin of widget.

func (*Widget) MarginStart 

func (widget *Widget) MarginStart() int

MarginStart gets the start margin of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: start margin of widget.

func (*Widget) MarginTop 

func (widget *Widget) MarginTop() int

MarginTop gets the top margin of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: top margin of widget.

func (*Widget) Measure 

func (widget *Widget) Measure(orientation Orientation, forSize int) (minimum, natural, minimumBaseline, naturalBaseline int)

Measure measures widget in the orientation orientation and for the given for_size.

As an example, if orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and for_size is 300, this functions will compute the minimum and natural width of widget if it is allocated at a height of 300 pixels.

See GtkWidget’s geometry management section (class.Widget.html#height-for-width-geometry-management) for a more details on implementing WidgetClass.measure().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation to measure.
  • forSize: size for the opposite of orientation, i.e. if orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, this is the height the widget should be measured with. The GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL case is analogous. This way, both height-for-width and width-for-height requests can be implemented. If no size is known, -1 can be passed.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimum (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
  • natural (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.
  • minimumBaseline (optional): location to store the baseline position for the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalBaseline (optional): location to store the baseline position for the natural size, or NULL.

func (*Widget) MnemonicActivate 

func (widget *Widget) MnemonicActivate(groupCycling bool) bool

MnemonicActivate emits the GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • groupCycling: TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the signal has been handled.

func (*Widget) Name 

func (widget *Widget) Name() string

Name retrieves the name of a widget.

See gtk.Widget.SetName() for the significance of widget names.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK and should not be modified or freed.

func (*Widget) Native 

func (widget *Widget) Native() *NativeSurface

Native returns the GtkNative widget that contains widget.

This function will return NULL if the widget is not contained inside a widget tree with a native ancestor.

GtkNative widgets will return themselves here.

The function returns the following values:

  • native (optional): GtkNative widget of widget, or NULL.

func (*Widget) NextSibling 

func (widget *Widget) NextSibling() Widgetter

NextSibling returns the widgets next sibling.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional) widget's next sibling.

func (*Widget) ObserveChildren 

func (widget *Widget) ObserveChildren() *gio.ListModel

ObserveChildren returns a GListModel to track the children of widget.

Calling this function will enable extra internal bookkeeping to track children and emit signals on the returned listmodel. It may slow down operations a lot.

Applications should try hard to avoid calling this function because of the slowdowns.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: a GListModel tracking widget's children.

func (*Widget) ObserveControllers 

func (widget *Widget) ObserveControllers() *gio.ListModel

ObserveControllers returns a GListModel to track the gtk.EventControllers of widget.

Calling this function will enable extra internal bookkeeping to track controllers and emit signals on the returned listmodel. It may slow down operations a lot.

Applications should try hard to avoid calling this function because of the slowdowns.

The function returns the following values:

  • listModel: a GListModel tracking widget's controllers.

func (*Widget) Opacity 

func (widget *Widget) Opacity() float64

Opacity the requested opacity for this widget.

See gtk.Widget.SetOpacity().

The function returns the following values:

  • gdouble: requested opacity for this widget.

func (*Widget) Overflow 

func (widget *Widget) Overflow() Overflow

Overflow returns the widgets overflow value.

The function returns the following values:

  • overflow widget's overflow.

func (*Widget) PangoContext 

func (widget *Widget) PangoContext() *pango.Context

PangoContext gets a PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font description, and base direction for this widget.

Unlike the context returned by gtk.Widget.CreatePangoContext(), this context is owned by the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked by listening to changes of the gtk.Widget:root property on the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • context: PangoContext for the widget.

func (*Widget) Parent 

func (widget *Widget) Parent() Widgetter

Parent returns the parent widget of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): parent widget of widget, or NULL.

func (*Widget) Pick 

func (widget *Widget) Pick(x, y float64, flags PickFlags) Widgetter

Pick finds the descendant of widget closest to the screen at the point (x, y).

The point must be given in widget coordinates, so (0, 0) is assumed to be the top left of widget's content area.

Usually widgets will return NULL if the given coordinate is not contained in widget checked via gtk.Widget.Contains(). Otherwise they will recursively try to find a child that does not return NULL. Widgets are however free to customize their picking algorithm.

This function is used on the toplevel to determine the widget below the mouse cursor for purposes of hover highlighting and delivering events.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • x: x coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.
  • y: y coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.
  • flags flags to influence what is picked.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): widget descendant at the given coordinate or NULL if none.

func (*Widget) PreferredSize 

func (widget *Widget) PreferredSize() (minimumSize, naturalSize *Requisition)

PreferredSize retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.

This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in free-form containers such as GtkFixed.

Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for the minimum width.

Use gtk_widget_measure if you want to support baseline alignment.

The function returns the following values:

  • minimumSize (optional): location for storing the minimum size, or NULL.
  • naturalSize (optional): location for storing the natural size, or NULL.

func (*Widget) PrevSibling 

func (widget *Widget) PrevSibling() Widgetter

PrevSibling returns the widgets previous sibling.

This API is primarily meant for widget implementations.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional) widget's previous sibling.

func (*Widget) PrimaryClipboard 

func (widget *Widget) PrimaryClipboard() *gdk.Clipboard

PrimaryClipboard gets the primary clipboard of widget.

This is a utility function to get the primary clipboard object for the GdkDisplay that widget is using.

Note that this function always works, even when widget is not realized yet.

The function returns the following values:

  • clipboard: appropriate clipboard object.

func (*Widget) QueueAllocate 

func (widget *Widget) QueueAllocate()

QueueAllocate flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate function.

Use this function instead of gtk.Widget.QueueResize() when the widget's size request didn't change but it wants to reposition its contents.

An example user of this function is gtk.Widget.SetHAlign().

This function is only for use in widget implementations.

func (*Widget) QueueDraw 

func (widget *Widget) QueueDraw()

QueueDraw schedules this widget to be redrawn in paint phase of the current or the next frame.

This means widget's GtkWidgetClass.snapshot() implementation will be called.

func (*Widget) QueueResize 

func (widget *Widget) QueueResize()

QueueResize flags a widget to have its size renegotiated.

This should be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request. For example, when you change the text in a gtk.Label, the label queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.

Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate virtual method. Calls to gtk_widget_queue_resize() from inside GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.

This function is only for use in widget implementations.

func (*Widget) Realize 

func (widget *Widget) Realize()

Realize creates the GDK resources associated with a widget.

Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be realized and mapped automatically.

Realizing a widget requires all the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling this function realizes the widget’s parents in addition to widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window when you realize it, bad things will happen.

This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be called after the widget is realized automatically, such as gtk.Widget::realize.

func (*Widget) Realized 

func (widget *Widget) Realized() bool

Realized determines whether widget is realized.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget is realized, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) ReceivesDefault 

func (widget *Widget) ReceivesDefault() bool

ReceivesDefault determines whether widget is always treated as the default widget within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget is the default.

See gtk.Widget.SetReceivesDefault().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if widget acts as the default widget when focused, FALSE otherwise.

func (*Widget) RemoveCSSClass 

func (widget *Widget) RemoveCSSClass(cssClass string)

RemoveCSSClass removes a style from widget.

After this, the style of widget will stop matching for css_class.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cssClass: style class to remove from widget, without the leading '.' used for notation of style classes.

func (*Widget) RemoveController 

func (widget *Widget) RemoveController(controller EventControllerer)

RemoveController removes controller from widget, so that it doesn't process events anymore.

It should not be used again.

Widgets will remove all event controllers automatically when they are destroyed, there is normally no need to call this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • controller: EventController.

func (*Widget) RemoveMnemonicLabel 

func (widget *Widget) RemoveMnemonicLabel(label Widgetter)

RemoveMnemonicLabel removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for this widget.

See gtk.Widget.ListMnemonicLabels(). The widget must have previously been added to the list with gtk.Widget.AddMnemonicLabel().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • label: GtkWidget that was previously set as a mnemonic label for widget with gtk.Widget.AddMnemonicLabel().

func (*Widget) RemoveTickCallback 

func (widget *Widget) RemoveTickCallback(id uint)

RemoveTickCallback removes a tick callback previously registered with gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • id returned by gtk.Widget.AddTickCallback().

func (*Widget) RequestMode 

func (widget *Widget) RequestMode() SizeRequestMode

RequestMode gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.

Single-child widgets generally propagate the preference of their child, more complex widgets need to request something either in context of their children or in context of their allocation capabilities.

The function returns the following values:

  • sizeRequestMode: GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by widget.

func (*Widget) Root 

func (widget *Widget) Root() *Root

Root returns the GtkRoot widget of widget.

This function will return NULL if the widget is not contained inside a widget tree with a root widget.

GtkRoot widgets will return themselves here.

The function returns the following values:

  • root (optional) widget of widget, or NULL.

func (*Widget) ScaleFactor 

func (widget *Widget) ScaleFactor() int

ScaleFactor retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates to the actual device pixels.

On traditional systems this is 1, on high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).

See gdk.Surface.GetScaleFactor().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: scale factor for widget.

func (*Widget) Sensitive 

func (widget *Widget) Sensitive() bool

Sensitive returns the widget’s sensitivity.

This function returns the value that has been set using gtk.Widget.SetSensitive()).

The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk.Widget.IsSensitive().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is sensitive.

func (*Widget) SetCSSClasses 

func (widget *Widget) SetCSSClasses(classes []string)

SetCSSClasses will clear all style classes applied to widget and replace them with classes.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • classes: NULL-terminated list of style classes to apply to widget.

func (*Widget) SetCanFocus 

func (widget *Widget) SetCanFocus(canFocus bool)

SetCanFocus specifies whether the input focus can enter the widget or any of its children.

Applications should set can_focus to FALSE to mark a widget as for pointer/touch use only.

Note that having can_focus be TRUE is only one of the necessary conditions for being focusable. A widget must also be sensitive and focusable and not have an ancestor that is marked as not can-focus in order to receive input focus.

See gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() for actually setting the input focus on a widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canFocus: whether or not the input focus can enter the widget or any of its children.

func (*Widget) SetCanTarget 

func (widget *Widget) SetCanTarget(canTarget bool)

SetCanTarget sets whether widget can be the target of pointer events.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • canTarget: whether this widget should be able to receive pointer events.

func (*Widget) SetChildVisible 

func (widget *Widget) SetChildVisible(childVisible bool)

SetChildVisible sets whether widget should be mapped along with its parent.

The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to a container with gtk.Widget.SetParent(), to avoid mapping children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However it will be reset to its default state of TRUE when the widget is removed from a container.

Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container can queue a resize itself.

This function is only useful for container implementations and should never be called by an application.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • childVisible: if TRUE, widget should be mapped along with its parent.

func (*Widget) SetCursor 

func (widget *Widget) SetCursor(cursor *gdk.Cursor)

SetCursor sets the cursor to be shown when pointer devices point towards widget.

If the cursor is NULL, widget will use the cursor inherited from the parent widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • cursor (optional): new cursor or NULL to use the default cursor.

func (*Widget) SetCursorFromName 

func (widget *Widget) SetCursorFromName(name string)

SetCursorFromName sets a named cursor to be shown when pointer devices point towards widget.

This is a utility function that creates a cursor via gdk.Cursor.NewFromName and then sets it on widget with gtk.Widget.SetCursor(). See those functions for details.

On top of that, this function allows name to be NULL, which will do the same as calling gtk.Widget.SetCursor() with a NULL cursor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) of the cursor or NULL to use the default cursor.

func (*Widget) SetDirection 

func (widget *Widget) SetDirection(dir TextDirection)

SetDirection sets the reading direction on a particular widget.

This direction controls the primary direction for widgets containing text, and also the direction in which the children of a container are packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will let the default reading direction present, except for containers where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).

If the direction is set to GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value set by gtk.Widget().SetDefaultDirection will be used.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • dir: new direction.

func (*Widget) SetFocusChild 

func (widget *Widget) SetFocusChild(child Widgetter)

SetFocusChild: set child as the current focus child of widget.

The previous focus child will be unset.

This function is only suitable for widget implementations. If you want a certain widget to get the input focus, call gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() on it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional): direct child widget of widget or NULL to unset the focus child of widget.

func (*Widget) SetFocusOnClick 

func (widget *Widget) SetFocusOnClick(focusOnClick bool)

SetFocusOnClick sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.

Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the application.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • focusOnClick: whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse.

func (*Widget) SetFocusable 

func (widget *Widget) SetFocusable(focusable bool)

SetFocusable specifies whether widget can own the input focus.

Widget implementations should set focusable to TRUE in their init() function if they want to receive keyboard input.

Note that having focusable be TRUE is only one of the necessary conditions for being focusable. A widget must also be sensitive and can-focus and not have an ancestor that is marked as not can-focus in order to receive input focus.

See gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() for actually setting the input focus on a widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • focusable: whether or not widget can own the input focus.

func (*Widget) SetFontMap 

func (widget *Widget) SetFontMap(fontMap pango.FontMapper)

SetFontMap sets the font map to use for Pango rendering.

The font map is the object that is used to look up fonts. Setting a custom font map can be useful in special situations, e.g. when you need to add application-specific fonts to the set of available fonts.

When not set, the widget will inherit the font map from its parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • fontMap (optional): PangoFontMap, or NULL to unset any previously set font map.

func (*Widget) SetFontOptions 

func (widget *Widget) SetFontOptions(options *cairo.FontOptions)

SetFontOptions sets the cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering in this widget.

When not set, the default font options for the GdkDisplay will be used.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • options (optional) or NULL to unset any previously set default font options.

func (*Widget) SetHAlign 

func (widget *Widget) SetHAlign(align Align)

SetHAlign sets the horizontal alignment of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • align: horizontal alignment.

func (*Widget) SetHExpand 

func (widget *Widget) SetHExpand(expand bool)

SetHExpand sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal space.

When a user resizes a GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to expand.

Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra room.

By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given its current children and state, call gtk.Widget.ComputeExpand(). A container can decide how the expandability of children affects the expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual method on GtkWidget.).

Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the automatic expand behavior.

This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand, regardless of children. The override occurs because gtk.Widget.SetHExpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see gtk.Widget.SetHExpandSet()) which causes the widget’s hexpand value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expand: whether to expand.

func (*Widget) SetHExpandSet 

func (widget *Widget) SetHExpandSet(set bool)

SetHExpandSet sets whether the hexpand flag will be used.

The gtk.Widget:hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call gtk.Widget.SetHExpand() to set hexpand, so the most likely reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand flag.

If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not set, then the expand value depends on whether any children of the widget would like to expand.

There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here for completeness and consistency.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • set: value for hexpand-set property.

func (*Widget) SetHasTooltip 

func (widget *Widget) SetHasTooltip(hasTooltip bool)

SetHasTooltip sets the has-tooltip property on widget to has_tooltip.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • hasTooltip: whether or not widget has a tooltip.

func (*Widget) SetLayoutManager 

func (widget *Widget) SetLayoutManager(layoutManager LayoutManagerer)

SetLayoutManager sets the layout manager delegate instance that provides an implementation for measuring and allocating the children of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • layoutManager (optional): GtkLayoutManager.

func (*Widget) SetMarginBottom 

func (widget *Widget) SetMarginBottom(margin int)

SetMarginBottom sets the bottom margin of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: bottom margin.

func (*Widget) SetMarginEnd 

func (widget *Widget) SetMarginEnd(margin int)

SetMarginEnd sets the end margin of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: end margin.

func (*Widget) SetMarginStart 

func (widget *Widget) SetMarginStart(margin int)

SetMarginStart sets the start margin of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: start margin.

func (*Widget) SetMarginTop 

func (widget *Widget) SetMarginTop(margin int)

SetMarginTop sets the top margin of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • margin: top margin.

func (*Widget) SetName 

func (widget *Widget) SetName(name string)

SetName sets a widgets name.

Setting a name allows you to refer to the widget from a CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the same page as the docs for gtk.StyleContext.

Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name for the widget.

func (*Widget) SetOpacity 

func (widget *Widget) SetOpacity(opacity float64)

SetOpacity: request the widget to be rendered partially transparent.

An opacity of 0 is fully transparent and an opacity of 1 is fully opaque.

Opacity works on both toplevel widgets and child widgets, although there are some limitations: For toplevel widgets, applying opacity depends on the capabilities of the windowing system. On X11, this has any effect only on X displays with a compositing manager, see gdk_display_is_composited(). On Windows and Wayland it should always work, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been shown may cause some flicker.

Note that the opacity is inherited through inclusion — if you set a toplevel to be partially translucent, all of its content will appear translucent, since it is ultimatively rendered on that toplevel. The opacity value itself is not inherited by child widgets (since that would make widgets deeper in the hierarchy progressively more translucent). As a consequence, gtk.Popovers and other gtk.Native widgets with their own surface will use their own opacity value, and thus by default appear non-translucent, even if they are attached to a toplevel that is translucent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • opacity: desired opacity, between 0 and 1.

func (*Widget) SetOverflow 

func (widget *Widget) SetOverflow(overflow Overflow)

SetOverflow sets how widget treats content that is drawn outside the widget's content area.

See the definition of gtk.Overflow for details.

This setting is provided for widget implementations and should not be used by application code.

The default value is GTK_OVERFLOW_VISIBLE.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • overflow: desired overflow.

func (*Widget) SetParent 

func (widget *Widget) SetParent(parent Widgetter)

SetParent sets parent as the parent widget of widget.

This takes care of details such as updating the state and style of the child to reflect its new location and resizing the parent. The opposite function is gtk.Widget.Unparent().

This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of GtkWidget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent widget.

func (*Widget) SetReceivesDefault 

func (widget *Widget) SetReceivesDefault(receivesDefault bool)

SetReceivesDefault specifies whether widget will be treated as the default widget within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget is the default.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • receivesDefault: whether or not widget can be a default widget.

func (*Widget) SetSensitive 

func (widget *Widget) SetSensitive(sensitive bool)

SetSensitive sets the sensitivity of a widget.

A widget is sensitive if the user can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • sensitive: TRUE to make the widget sensitive.

func (*Widget) SetSizeRequest 

func (widget *Widget) SetSizeRequest(width, height int)

SetSizeRequest sets the minimum size of a widget.

That is, the widget’s size request will be at least width by height. You can use this function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.

In most cases, gtk.Window.SetDefaultSize() is a better choice for toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size request.

Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes, translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be correct.

The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly. However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more space than it requested.

If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.

The size request set here does not include any margin from the properties gtk.Widget:margin-start, gtk.Widget:margin-end, gtk.Widget:margin-top, and gtk.Widget:margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding or border properties set by any subclass of GtkWidget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width widget should request, or -1 to unset.
  • height widget should request, or -1 to unset.

func (*Widget) SetStateFlags 

func (widget *Widget) SetStateFlags(flags StateFlags, clear bool)

SetStateFlags turns on flag values in the current widget state.

Typical widget states are insensitive, prelighted, etc.

This function accepts the values GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_LTR and GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_RTL but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's direction, use gtk.Widget.SetDirection().

This function is for use in widget implementations.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags: state flags to turn on.
  • clear: whether to clear state before turning on flags.

func (*Widget) SetTooltipMarkup 

func (widget *Widget) SetTooltipMarkup(markup string)

SetTooltipMarkup sets markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with Pango markup.

This function will take care of setting the gtk.Widget:has-tooltip as a side effect, and of the default handler for the gtk.Widget::query-tooltip signal.

See also gtk.Tooltip.SetMarkup().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • markup (optional) contents of the tooltip for widget.

func (*Widget) SetTooltipText 

func (widget *Widget) SetTooltipText(text string)

SetTooltipText sets text as the contents of the tooltip.

If text contains any markup, it will be escaped.

This function will take care of setting gtk.Widget:has-tooltip as a side effect, and of the default handler for the gtk.Widget::query-tooltip signal.

See also gtk.Tooltip.SetText().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • text (optional) contents of the tooltip for widget.

func (*Widget) SetVAlign 

func (widget *Widget) SetVAlign(align Align)

SetVAlign sets the vertical alignment of widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • align: vertical alignment.

func (*Widget) SetVExpand 

func (widget *Widget) SetVExpand(expand bool)

SetVExpand sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical space.

See gtk.Widget.SetHExpand() for more detail.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • expand: whether to expand.

func (*Widget) SetVExpandSet 

func (widget *Widget) SetVExpandSet(set bool)

SetVExpandSet sets whether the vexpand flag will be used.

See gtk.Widget.SetHExpandSet() for more detail.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • set: value for vexpand-set property.

func (*Widget) SetVisible 

func (widget *Widget) SetVisible(visible bool)

SetVisible sets the visibility state of widget.

Note that setting this to TRUE doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see gtk.Widget.GetVisible().

This function simply calls gtk.Widget.Show() or gtk.Widget.Hide() but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on some condition.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • visible: whether the widget should be shown or not.

func (*Widget) Settings 

func (widget *Widget) Settings() *Settings

Settings gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.

Note that this function can only be called when the GtkWidget is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific to a particular GdkDisplay. If you want to monitor the widget for changes in its settings, connect to notify::display.

The function returns the following values:

  • settings: relevant Settings object.

func (*Widget) ShouldLayout 

func (widget *Widget) ShouldLayout() bool

ShouldLayout returns whether widget should contribute to the measuring and allocation of its parent.

This is FALSE for invisible children, but also for children that have their own surface.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if child should be included in measuring and allocating.

func (*Widget) Show 

func (widget *Widget) Show()

Show flags a widget to be displayed.

Any widget that isn’t shown will not appear on the screen.

Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget, in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.

When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their toplevel container is realized and mapped.

func (*Widget) Size 

func (widget *Widget) Size(orientation Orientation) int

Size returns the content width or height of the widget.

Which dimension is returned depends on orientation.

This is equivalent to calling gtk.Widget.GetWidth() for GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL or gtk.Widget.GetHeight() for GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, but can be used when writing orientation-independent code, such as when implementing gtk.Orientable widgets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • orientation to query.

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: size of widget in orientation.

func (*Widget) SizeAllocate 

func (widget *Widget) SizeAllocate(allocation *Allocation, baseline int)

SizeAllocate allocates widget with a transformation that translates the origin to the position in allocation.

This is a simple form of gtk.Widget.Allocate().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • allocation: position and size to be allocated to widget.
  • baseline of the child, or -1.

func (*Widget) SizeRequest 

func (widget *Widget) SizeRequest() (width, height int)

SizeRequest gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using gtk_widget_set_size_request().

A value of -1 stored in width or height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See gtk.Widget.SetSizeRequest(). To get the size a widget will actually request, call gtk.Widget.Measure() instead of this function.

The function returns the following values:

  • width (optional): return location for width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): return location for height, or NULL.

func (*Widget) SnapshotChild 

func (widget *Widget) SnapshotChild(child Widgetter, snapshot *Snapshot)

SnapshotChild: snapshot the a child of widget.

When a widget receives a call to the snapshot function, it must send synthetic GtkWidgetClass.snapshot() calls to all children. This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A widget, when it receives a call to its GtkWidgetClass.snapshot() function, calls gtk_widget_snapshot_child() once for each child, passing in the snapshot the widget received.

gtk_widget_snapshot_child() takes care of translating the origin of snapshot, and deciding whether the child needs to be snapshot.

This function does nothing for children that implement GtkNative.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child of widget.
  • snapshot as passed to the widget. In particular, no calls to gtk_snapshot_translate() or other transform calls should have been made.

func (*Widget) StateFlags 

func (widget *Widget) StateFlags() StateFlags

StateFlags returns the widget state as a flag set.

It is worth mentioning that the effective GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE state will be returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if widget itself is sensitive.

Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the gtk.StateFlags to pass to a gtk.StyleContext method, you should look at gtk.StyleContext.GetState().

The function returns the following values:

  • stateFlags: state flags for widget.

func (*Widget) StyleContext 

func (widget *Widget) StyleContext() *StyleContext

StyleContext returns the style context associated to widget.

The returned object is guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • styleContext: GtkStyleContext. This memory is owned by widget and must not be freed.

func (*Widget) TemplateChild 

func (widget *Widget) TemplateChild(widgetType coreglib.Type, name string) *coreglib.Object

TemplateChild: fetch an object build from the template XML for widget_type in this widget instance.

This will only report children which were previously declared with gtk.WidgetClass.BindTemplateChildFull() or one of its variants.

This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the widget_type which declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use of the GObject structure offsets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widgetType to get a template child for.
  • name: “id” of the child defined in the template XML.

The function returns the following values:

  • object built in the template XML with the id name.

func (*Widget) TooltipMarkup 

func (widget *Widget) TooltipMarkup() string

TooltipMarkup gets the contents of the tooltip for widget.

If the tooltip has not been set using gtk.Widget.SetTooltipMarkup(), this function returns NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): tooltip text.

func (*Widget) TooltipText 

func (widget *Widget) TooltipText() string

TooltipText gets the contents of the tooltip for widget.

If the widget's tooltip was set using gtk.Widget.SetTooltipMarkup(), this function will return the escaped text.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): tooltip text.

func (*Widget) TranslateCoordinates 

func (srcWidget *Widget) TranslateCoordinates(destWidget Widgetter, srcX, srcY float64) (destX, destY float64, ok bool)

TranslateCoordinates: translate coordinates relative to src_widget’s allocation to coordinates relative to dest_widget’s allocations.

In order to perform this operation, both widget must share a common ancestor.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • destWidget: GtkWidget.
  • srcX: x position relative to src_widget.
  • srcY: y position relative to src_widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • destX (optional): location to store X position relative to dest_widget.
  • destY (optional): location to store Y position relative to dest_widget.
  • ok: FALSE if src_widget and dest_widget have no common ancestor. In this case, 0 is stored in *dest_x and *dest_y. Otherwise TRUE.

func (*Widget) TriggerTooltipQuery 

func (widget *Widget) TriggerTooltipQuery()

TriggerTooltipQuery triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of widget is located.

func (*Widget) Unmap 

func (widget *Widget) Unmap()

Unmap causes a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.

This function is only for use in widget implementations.

func (*Widget) Unparent 

func (widget *Widget) Unparent()

Unparent: dissociate widget from its parent.

This function is only for use in widget implementations, typically in dispose.

func (*Widget) Unrealize 

func (widget *Widget) Unrealize()

Unrealize causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources associated with the widget).

This function is only useful in widget implementations.

func (*Widget) UnsetStateFlags 

func (widget *Widget) UnsetStateFlags(flags StateFlags)

UnsetStateFlags turns off flag values for the current widget state.

See gtk.Widget.SetStateFlags().

This function is for use in widget implementations.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • flags: state flags to turn off.

func (*Widget) VAlign 

func (widget *Widget) VAlign() Align

VAlign gets the vertical alignment of widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • align: vertical alignment of widget.

func (*Widget) VExpand 

func (widget *Widget) VExpand() bool

VExpand gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical space.

See gtk.Widget.GetHExpand() for more detail.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether vexpand flag is set.

func (*Widget) VExpandSet 

func (widget *Widget) VExpandSet() bool

VExpandSet gets whether gtk_widget_set_vexpand() has been used to explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.

See gtk.Widget.GetHExpandSet() for more detail.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether vexpand has been explicitly set.

func (*Widget) Visible 

func (widget *Widget) Visible() bool

Visible determines whether the widget is visible.

If you want to take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as visible, use gtk.Widget.IsVisible() instead.

This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.

See gtk.Widget.SetVisible().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget is visible.

func (*Widget) Width 

func (widget *Widget) Width() int

Width returns the content width of the widget.

This function returns the size passed to its size-allocate implementation, which is the size you should be using in GtkWidgetClass.snapshot().

For pointer events, see gtk.Widget.Contains().

The function returns the following values:

  • gint: width of widget.

type WidgetClass added in v0.0.5 

type WidgetClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WidgetClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*WidgetClass) AccessibleRole added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) AccessibleRole() AccessibleRole

AccessibleRole retrieves the accessible role used by the given GtkWidget class.

Different accessible roles have different states, and are rendered differently by assistive technologies.

See also: gtk.Accessible.GetAccessibleRole().

The function returns the following values:

  • accessibleRole: accessible role for the widget class.

func (*WidgetClass) ActivateSignal added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) ActivateSignal() uint

ActivateSignal retrieves the signal id for the activation signal set using gtk_widget_class_set_activate_signal().

The function returns the following values:

  • guint: signal id, or 0 if the widget class does not specify an activation signal.

func (*WidgetClass) AddShortcut added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) AddShortcut(shortcut *Shortcut)

AddShortcut installs a shortcut in widget_class.

Every instance created for widget_class or its subclasses will inherit this shortcut and trigger it.

Shortcuts added this way will be triggered in the GTK_PHASE_BUBBLE phase, which means they may also trigger if child widgets have focus.

This function must only be used in class initialization functions otherwise it is not guaranteed that the shortcut will be installed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • shortcut to add.

func (*WidgetClass) BindTemplateChildFull added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) BindTemplateChildFull(name string, internalChild bool, structOffset int)

BindTemplateChildFull: automatically assign an object declared in the class template XML to be set to a location on a freshly built instance’s private data, or alternatively accessible via gtk.Widget.GetTemplateChild().

The struct can point either into the public instance, then you should use G_STRUCT_OFFSET(WidgetType, member) for struct_offset, or in the private struct, then you should use G_PRIVATE_OFFSET(WidgetType, member).

An explicit strong reference will be held automatically for the duration of your instance’s life cycle, it will be released automatically when GObjectClass.dispose() runs on your instance and if a struct_offset that is != 0 is specified, then the automatic location in your instance public or private data will be set to NULL. You can however access an automated child pointer the first time your classes GObjectClass.dispose() runs, or alternatively in gtk.Widget::destroy.

If internal_child is specified, gtk.Buildable.GetInternalChild() will be automatically implemented by the GtkWidget class so there is no need to implement it manually.

The wrapper macros gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChild(), gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChildInternal(), gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChildPrivate() and gtk.WidgetClassBindTemplateChildInternalPrivate() might be more convenient to use.

Note that this must be called from a composite widget classes class initializer after calling gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplate().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name: “id” of the child defined in the template XML.
  • internalChild: whether the child should be accessible as an “internal-child” when this class is used in GtkBuilder XML.
  • structOffset: structure offset into the composite widget’s instance public or private structure where the automated child pointer should be set, or 0 to not assign the pointer.

func (*WidgetClass) CSSName added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) CSSName() string

CSSName gets the name used by this class for matching in CSS code.

See gtk_widget_class_set_css_name() for details.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8: CSS name of the given class.

func (*WidgetClass) InstallPropertyAction added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) InstallPropertyAction(actionName string, propertyName string)

InstallPropertyAction installs an action called action_name on widget_class and binds its state to the value of the property_name property.

This function will perform a few santity checks on the property selected via property_name. Namely, the property must exist, must be readable, writable and must not be construct-only. There are also restrictions on the type of the given property, it must be boolean, int, unsigned int, double or string. If any of these conditions are not met, a critical warning will be printed and no action will be added.

The state type of the action matches the property type.

If the property is boolean, the action will have no parameter and toggle the property value. Otherwise, the action will have a parameter of the same type as the property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • actionName: name of the action.
  • propertyName: name of the property in instances of widget_class or any parent class.

func (*WidgetClass) LayoutManagerType added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) LayoutManagerType() coreglib.Type

LayoutManagerType retrieves the type of the gtk.LayoutManager used by the GtkWidget class.

See also: gtk_widget_class_set_layout_manager_type().

The function returns the following values:

  • gType: type of a GtkLayoutManager subclass, or G_TYPE_INVALID.

func (*WidgetClass) QueryAction added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) QueryAction(index_ uint) (owner coreglib.Type, actionName string, parameterType *glib.VariantType, propertyName string, ok bool)

QueryAction queries the actions that have been installed for a widget class using gtk.WidgetClass.InstallAction() during class initialization.

Note that this function will also return actions defined by parent classes. You can identify those by looking at owner.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • index_: position of the action to query.

The function returns the following values:

  • owner: return location for the type where the action was defined.
  • actionName: return location for the action name.
  • parameterType (optional): return location for the parameter type.
  • propertyName (optional): return location for the property name.
  • ok: TRUE if the action was found, FALSE if index_ is out of range.

func (*WidgetClass) SetAccessibleRole added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetAccessibleRole(accessibleRole AccessibleRole)

SetAccessibleRole sets the accessible role used by the given GtkWidget class.

Different accessible roles have different states, and are rendered differently by assistive technologies.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • accessibleRole: GtkAccessibleRole used by the widget_class.

func (*WidgetClass) SetActivateSignal added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetActivateSignal(signalId uint)

SetActivateSignal sets the GtkWidgetClass.activate_signal field with the given signal_id; the signal will be emitted when calling gtk_widget_activate().

The signal_id must have been registered with g_signal_new() or g_signal_newv() before calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • signalId: id for the activate signal.

func (*WidgetClass) SetActivateSignalFromName added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetActivateSignalFromName(signalName string)

SetActivateSignalFromName sets the GtkWidgetClass.activate_signal field with the signal id for the given signal_name; the signal will be emitted when calling gtk_widget_activate().

The signal_name of widget_type must have been registered with g_signal_new() or g_signal_newv() before calling this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • signalName: name of the activate signal of widget_type.

func (*WidgetClass) SetCSSName added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetCSSName(name string)

SetCSSName sets the name to be used for CSS matching of widgets.

If this function is not called for a given class, the name set on the parent class is used. By default, GtkWidget uses the name "widget".

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name to use.

func (*WidgetClass) SetLayoutManagerType added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetLayoutManagerType(typ coreglib.Type)

SetLayoutManagerType sets the type to be used for creating layout managers for widgets of widget_class.

The given type must be a subtype of gtk.LayoutManager.

This function should only be called from class init functions of widgets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • typ: object type that implements the GtkLayoutManager for widget_class.

func (*WidgetClass) SetTemplate added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetTemplate(templateBytes *glib.Bytes)

SetTemplate: this should be called at class initialization time to specify the GtkBuilder XML to be used to extend a widget.

For convenience, gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplateFromResource() is also provided.

Note that any class that installs templates must call gtk.Widget.InitTemplate() in the widget’s instance initializer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • templateBytes holding the Builder XML.

func (*WidgetClass) SetTemplateFromResource added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetTemplateFromResource(resourceName string)

SetTemplateFromResource: convenience function that calls gtk.WidgetClass.SetTemplate() with the contents of a GResource.

Note that any class that installs templates must call gtk.Widget.InitTemplate() in the widget’s instance initializer.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resourceName: name of the resource to load the template from.

func (*WidgetClass) SetTemplateScope added in v0.0.5 

func (widgetClass *WidgetClass) SetTemplateScope(scope BuilderScoper)

SetTemplateScope: for use in language bindings, this will override the default GtkBuilderScope to be used when parsing GtkBuilder XML from this class’s template data.

Note that this must be called from a composite widget classes class initializer after calling gtk_widget_class_set_template().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • scope: GtkBuilderScope to use when loading the class template.

type WidgetOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WidgetOverrides struct {
	// Contains tests if the point at (x, y) is contained in widget.
	//
	// The coordinates for (x, y) must be in widget coordinates, so (0, 0) is
	// assumed to be the top left of widget's content area.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - x: x coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.
	//   - y: y coordinate to test, relative to widget's origin.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if widget contains (x, y).
	//
	Contains func(x, y float64) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	DirectionChanged func(previousDirection TextDirection)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	Focus func(direction DirectionType) bool
	// RequestMode gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout or
	// a width-for-height layout.
	//
	// Single-child widgets generally propagate the preference of their child,
	// more complex widgets need to request something either in context of their
	// children or in context of their allocation capabilities.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - sizeRequestMode: GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by widget.
	//
	RequestMode func() SizeRequestMode
	// GrabFocus causes widget to have the keyboard focus for the GtkWindow it's
	// inside.
	//
	// If widget is not focusable, or its ::grab_focus implementation cannot
	// transfer the focus to a descendant of widget that is focusable, it will
	// not take focus and FALSE will be returned.
	//
	// Calling gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() on an already focused widget is allowed,
	// should not have an effect, and return TRUE.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if focus is now inside widget.
	//
	GrabFocus func() bool
	// Hide reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show().
	//
	// This is causing the widget to be hidden (invisible to the user).
	Hide func()
	// KeynavFailed emits the ::keynav-failed signal on the widget.
	//
	// This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within a
	// single widget hits a boundary.
	//
	// The return value of this function should be interpreted in a way similar
	// to the return value of gtk.Widget.ChildFocus(). When TRUE is returned,
	// stay in the widget, the failed keyboard navigation is OK and/or there
	// is nowhere we can/should move the focus to. When FALSE is returned,
	// the caller should continue with keyboard navigation outside the widget,
	// e.g. by calling gtk.Widget.ChildFocus() on the widget’s toplevel.
	//
	// The default gtk.Widget::keynav-failed handler returns FALSE for
	// GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other values of
	// DirectionType it returns TRUE.
	//
	// Whenever the default handler returns TRUE, it also calls
	// gtk.Widget.ErrorBell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
	// navigation.
	//
	// A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed (either
	// by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of gtk.Entry
	// widgets where the user should be able to navigate the entire row with the
	// cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces that require entering
	// license keys.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - direction of focus movement.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, FALSE if the
	//     emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt
	//     in its parent container(s).
	//
	KeynavFailed func(direction DirectionType) bool
	// Map causes a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
	//
	// This function is only for use in widget implementations.
	Map func()
	// Measure measures widget in the orientation orientation and for the given
	// for_size.
	//
	// As an example, if orientation is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and for_size
	// is 300, this functions will compute the minimum and natural width of
	// widget if it is allocated at a height of 300 pixels.
	//
	// See GtkWidget’s geometry management section
	// (class.Widget.html#height-for-width-geometry-management) for a more
	// details on implementing WidgetClass.measure().
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - orientation to measure.
	//   - forSize: size for the opposite of orientation, i.e. if orientation
	//     is GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, this is the height the widget should
	//     be measured with. The GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL case is analogous.
	//     This way, both height-for-width and width-for-height requests can be
	//     implemented. If no size is known, -1 can be passed.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - minimum (optional): location to store the minimum size, or NULL.
	//   - natural (optional): location to store the natural size, or NULL.
	//   - minimumBaseline (optional): location to store the baseline position
	//     for the minimum size, or NULL.
	//   - naturalBaseline (optional): location to store the baseline position
	//     for the natural size, or NULL.
	//
	Measure func(orientation Orientation, forSize int) (minimum, natural, minimumBaseline, naturalBaseline int)
	// MnemonicActivate emits the GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - groupCycling: TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic.
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	//   - ok: TRUE if the signal has been handled.
	//
	MnemonicActivate func(groupCycling bool) bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	MoveFocus func(direction DirectionType)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - x
	//   - y
	//   - keyboardTooltip
	//   - tooltip
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	QueryTooltip func(x, y int, keyboardTooltip bool, tooltip *Tooltip) bool
	// Realize creates the GDK resources associated with a widget.
	//
	// Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show a widget and all
	// its parent containers, then the widget will be realized and mapped
	// automatically.
	//
	// Realizing a widget requires all the widget’s parent widgets to be
	// realized; calling this function realizes the widget’s parents in addition
	// to widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window when
	// you realize it, bad things will happen.
	//
	// This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and isn’t
	// very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might need it,
	// a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be called after the
	// widget is realized automatically, such as gtk.Widget::realize.
	Realize func()
	Root    func()
	// SetFocusChild: set child as the current focus child of widget.
	//
	// The previous focus child will be unset.
	//
	// This function is only suitable for widget implementations. If you want a
	// certain widget to get the input focus, call gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() on it.
	//
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - child (optional): direct child widget of widget or NULL to unset the
	//     focus child of widget.
	//
	SetFocusChild func(child Widgetter)
	// Show flags a widget to be displayed.
	//
	// Any widget that isn’t shown will not appear on the screen.
	//
	// Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
	// in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
	//
	// When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
	// mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their toplevel
	// container is realized and mapped.
	Show func()
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	//   - width
	//   - height
	//   - baseline
	//
	SizeAllocate func(width, height, baseline int)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	Snapshot func(snapshot *Snapshot)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	StateFlagsChanged func(previousStateFlags StateFlags)
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	SystemSettingChanged func(settings SystemSetting)
	// Unmap causes a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
	//
	// This function is only for use in widget implementations.
	Unmap func()
	// Unrealize causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
	// associated with the widget).
	//
	// This function is only useful in widget implementations.
	Unrealize func()
	Unroot    func()
}

WidgetOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type WidgetPaintable 

type WidgetPaintable struct {
	*coreglib.Object

	gdk.Paintable
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WidgetPaintable: GtkWidgetPaintable is a GdkPaintable that displays the contents of a widget.

GtkWidgetPaintable will also take care of the widget not being in a state where it can be drawn (like when it isn't shown) and just draw nothing or where it does not have a size (like when it is hidden) and report no size in that case.

Of course, GtkWidgetPaintable allows you to monitor widgets for size changes by emitting the gdk.Paintable::invalidate-size signal whenever the size of the widget changes as well as for visual changes by emitting the gdk.Paintable::invalidate-contents signal whenever the widget changes.

You can use a GtkWidgetPaintable everywhere a GdkPaintable is allowed, including using it on a GtkPicture (or one of its parents) that it was set on itself via gtk_picture_set_paintable(). The paintable will take care of recursion when this happens. If you do this however, ensure that the gtk.Picture:can-shrink property is set to TRUE or you might end up with an infinitely growing widget.

func NewWidgetPaintable 

func NewWidgetPaintable(widget Widgetter) *WidgetPaintable

NewWidgetPaintable creates a new widget paintable observing the given widget.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional): GtkWidget or NULL.

The function returns the following values:

  • widgetPaintable: new GtkWidgetPaintable.

func (*WidgetPaintable) SetWidget 

func (self *WidgetPaintable) SetWidget(widget Widgetter)

SetWidget sets the widget that should be observed.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • widget (optional) to observe or NULL.

func (*WidgetPaintable) Widget 

func (self *WidgetPaintable) Widget() Widgetter

Widget returns the widget that is observed or NULL if none.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): observed widget.

type WidgetPaintableClass added in v0.0.5 

type WidgetPaintableClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WidgetPaintableClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type WidgetPaintableOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WidgetPaintableOverrides struct {
}

WidgetPaintableOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type Widgetter 

type Widgetter interface {
	coreglib.Objector
	// contains filtered or unexported methods
}

Widgetter describes types inherited from class Widget.

To get the original type, the caller must assert this to an interface or another type.

func DragIconCreateWidgetForValue 

func DragIconCreateWidgetForValue(value *coreglib.Value) Widgetter

DragIconCreateWidgetForValue creates a widget that can be used as a drag icon for the given value.

Supported types include strings, GdkRGBA and GtkTextBuffer. If GTK does not know how to create a widget for a given value, it will return NULL.

This method is used to set the default drag icon on drag'n'drop operations started by GtkDragSource, so you don't need to set a drag icon using this function there.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • value: GValue.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): new GtkWidget for displaying value as a drag icon.

func DragIconGetForDrag 

func DragIconGetForDrag(drag gdk.Dragger) Widgetter

DragIconGetForDrag gets the GtkDragIcon in use with drag.

If no drag icon exists yet, a new one will be created and shown.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • drag: GdkDrag.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget: GtkDragIcon.

func WindowListToplevels 

func WindowListToplevels() []Widgetter

WindowListToplevels returns a list of all existing toplevel windows.

The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you must call g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL) first, and then unref all the widgets afterwards.

The function returns the following values:

  • list of toplevel widgets.

type Window 

type Window struct {
	Widget

	*coreglib.Object
	Root
	ShortcutManager
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Window: GtkWindow is a toplevel window which can contain other widgets.

!An example GtkWindow (window.png)

Windows normally have decorations that are under the control of the windowing system and allow the user to manipulate the window (resize it, move it, close it,...).

GtkWindow as GtkBuildable

The GtkWindow implementation of the gtk.Buildable interface supports setting a child as the titlebar by specifying “titlebar” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.

CSS nodes 

window.background [.csd / .solid-csd / .ssd] [.maximized / .fullscreen / .tiled]
├── <child>
╰── <titlebar child>.titlebar [.default-decoration]

GtkWindow has a main CSS node with name window and style class .background.

Style classes that are typically used with the main CSS node are .csd (when client-side decorations are in use), .solid-csd (for client-side decorations without invisible borders), .ssd (used by mutter when rendering server-side decorations). GtkWindow also represents window states with the following style classes on the main node: .maximized, .fullscreen, .tiled (when supported, also .tiled-top, .tiled-left, .tiled-right, .tiled-bottom).

GtkWindow subclasses often add their own discriminating style classes, such as .dialog, .popup or .tooltip.

Generally, some CSS properties don't make sense on the toplevel window node, such as margins or padding. When client-side decorations without invisible borders are in use (i.e. the .solid-csd style class is added to the main window node), the CSS border of the toplevel window is used for resize drags. In the .csd case, the shadow area outside of the window can be used to resize it.

GtkWindow adds the .titlebar and .default-decoration style classes to the widget that is added as a titlebar child.

Accessibility

GtkWindow uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_WINDOW role.

func NewWindow 

func NewWindow() *Window

NewWindow creates a new GtkWindow.

To get an undecorated window (no window borders), use gtk.Window.SetDecorated().

All top-level windows created by gtk_window_new() are stored in an internal top-level window list. This list can be obtained from gtk.Window().ListToplevels. Due to GTK keeping a reference to the window internally, gtk_window_new() does not return a reference to the caller.

To delete a GtkWindow, call gtk.Window.Destroy().

The function returns the following values:

  • window: new GtkWindow.

func (*Window) Application 

func (window *Window) Application() *Application

Application gets the GtkApplication associated with the window.

The function returns the following values:

  • application (optional): GtkApplication, or NULL.

func (*Window) Child 

func (window *Window) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of window.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of window.

func (*Window) Close 

func (window *Window) Close()

Close requests that the window is closed.

This is similar to what happens when a window manager close button is clicked.

This function can be used with close buttons in custom titlebars.

func (*Window) ConnectActivateDefault 

func (window *Window) ConnectActivateDefault(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateDefault is emitted when the user activates the default widget of window.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*Window) ConnectActivateFocus 

func (window *Window) ConnectActivateFocus(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectActivateFocus is emitted when the user activates the currently focused widget of window.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

func (*Window) ConnectCloseRequest 

func (window *Window) ConnectCloseRequest(f func() (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectCloseRequest is emitted when the user clicks on the close button of the window.

func (*Window) ConnectEnableDebugging 

func (window *Window) ConnectEnableDebugging(f func(toggle bool) (ok bool)) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectEnableDebugging is emitted when the user enables or disables interactive debugging.

When toggle is TRUE, interactive debugging is toggled on or off, when it is FALSE, the debugger will be pointed at the widget under the pointer.

This is a keybinding signal (class.SignalAction.html).

The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-Shift-I and Ctrl-Shift-D.

func (*Window) ConnectKeysChanged 

func (window *Window) ConnectKeysChanged(f func()) coreglib.SignalHandle

ConnectKeysChanged is emitted when the set of accelerators or mnemonics that are associated with window changes.

func (*Window) Decorated 

func (window *Window) Decorated() bool

Decorated returns whether the window has been set to have decorations.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window has been set to have decorations.

func (*Window) DefaultSize 

func (window *Window) DefaultSize() (width, height int)

DefaultSize gets the default size of the window.

A value of 0 for the width or height indicates that a default size has not been explicitly set for that dimension, so the “natural” size of the window will be used.

The function returns the following values:

  • width (optional): location to store the default width, or NULL.
  • height (optional): location to store the default height, or NULL.

func (*Window) DefaultWidget 

func (window *Window) DefaultWidget() Widgetter

DefaultWidget returns the default widget for window.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): default widget, or NULL if there is none.

func (*Window) Deletable 

func (window *Window) Deletable() bool

Deletable returns whether the window has been set to have a close button.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button.

func (*Window) Destroy 

func (window *Window) Destroy()

Destroy: drop the internal reference GTK holds on toplevel windows.

func (*Window) DestroyWithParent 

func (window *Window) DestroyWithParent() bool

DestroyWithParent returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.

func (*Window) Focus 

func (window *Window) Focus() Widgetter

Focus retrieves the current focused widget within the window.

Note that this is the widget that would have the focus if the toplevel window focused; if the toplevel window is not focused then gtk_widget_has_focus (widget) will not be TRUE for the widget.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): currently focused widget, or NULL if there is none.

func (*Window) FocusVisible 

func (window *Window) FocusVisible() bool

FocusVisible gets whether “focus rectangles” are supposed to be visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if “focus rectangles” are supposed to be visible in this window.

func (*Window) Fullscreen 

func (window *Window) Fullscreen()

Fullscreen asks to place window in the fullscreen state.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely fullscreen afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager unfullscreen it again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen windows.

You can track the result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property, or by listening to notifications of the gtk.Window:fullscreened property.

func (*Window) FullscreenOnMonitor 

func (window *Window) FullscreenOnMonitor(monitor *gdk.Monitor)

FullscreenOnMonitor asks to place window in the fullscreen state on the given monitor.

Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely fullscreen afterward, or that the windowing system allows fullscreen windows on any given monitor.

You can track the result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property, or by listening to notifications of the gtk.Window:fullscreened property.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • monitor: which monitor to go fullscreen on.

func (*Window) Group 

func (window *Window) Group() *WindowGroup

Group returns the group for window.

If the window has no group, then the default group is returned.

The function returns the following values:

  • windowGroup: GtkWindowGroup for a window or the default group.

func (*Window) HandleMenubarAccel 

func (window *Window) HandleMenubarAccel() bool

HandleMenubarAccel returns whether this window reacts to F10 key presses by activating a menubar it contains.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window handles F10.

func (*Window) HasGroup 

func (window *Window) HasGroup() bool

HasGroup returns whether window has an explicit window group.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if window has an explicit window group.

func (*Window) HideOnClose 

func (window *Window) HideOnClose() bool

HideOnClose returns whether the window will be hidden when the close button is clicked.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window will be hidden.

func (*Window) IconName 

func (window *Window) IconName() string

IconName returns the name of the themed icon for the window.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): icon name or NULL if the window has no themed icon.

func (*Window) IsActive 

func (window *Window) IsActive() bool

IsActive returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.

The active toplevel is the window receiving keystrokes.

The return value is TRUE if the window is active toplevel itself. You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window part of the current active window.

func (*Window) IsFullscreen 

func (window *Window) IsFullscreen() bool

IsFullscreen retrieves the current fullscreen state of window.

Note that since fullscreening is ultimately handled by the window manager and happens asynchronously to an application request, you shouldn’t assume the return value of this function changing immediately (or at all), as an effect of calling gtk.Window.Fullscreen() or gtk.Window.Unfullscreen().

If the window isn't yet mapped, the value returned will whether the initial requested state is fullscreen.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the window has a fullscreen state.

func (*Window) IsMaximized 

func (window *Window) IsMaximized() bool

IsMaximized retrieves the current maximized state of window.

Note that since maximization is ultimately handled by the window manager and happens asynchronously to an application request, you shouldn’t assume the return value of this function changing immediately (or at all), as an effect of calling gtk.Window.Maximize() or gtk.Window.Unmaximize().

If the window isn't yet mapped, the value returned will whether the initial requested state is maximized.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: whether the window has a maximized state.

func (*Window) Maximize 

func (window *Window) Maximize()

Maximize asks to maximize window, so that it fills the screen.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely maximized afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager could unmaximize it again, and not all window managers support maximization.

It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen initially.

You can track the result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property, or by listening to notifications on the gtk.Window:maximized property.

func (*Window) Minimize 

func (window *Window) Minimize()

Minimize asks to minimize the specified window.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely minimized afterward, because the windowing system might not support this functionality; other entities (e.g. the user or the window manager could unminimize it again, or there may not be a window manager in which case minimization isn’t possible, etc.

It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be minimized before it ever appears onscreen.

You can track result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property.

func (*Window) MnemonicsVisible 

func (window *Window) MnemonicsVisible() bool

MnemonicsVisible gets whether mnemonics are supposed to be visible.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if mnemonics are supposed to be visible in this window.

func (*Window) Modal 

func (window *Window) Modal() bool

Modal returns whether the window is modal.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the window is set to be modal and establishes a grab when shown.

func (*Window) Present 

func (window *Window) Present()

Present presents a window to the user.

This function should not be used as when it is called, it is too late to gather a valid timestamp to allow focus stealing prevention to work correctly.

func (*Window) PresentWithTime 

func (window *Window) PresentWithTime(timestamp uint32)

PresentWithTime presents a window to the user.

This may mean raising the window in the stacking order, unminimizing it, moving it to the current desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent on the user’s platform, window manager, and preferences.

If window is hidden, this function calls gtk.Widget.Show() as well.

This function should be used when the user tries to open a window that’s already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu a second time; use gtk.Window.Present() to move the already-open dialog where the user can see it.

Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction. The timestamp should be gathered when the window was requested to be shown (when clicking a link for example), rather than once the window is ready to be shown.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • timestamp of the user interaction (typically a button or key press event) which triggered this call.

func (*Window) Resizable 

func (window *Window) Resizable() bool

Resizable gets the value set by gtk_window_set_resizable().

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the user can resize the window.

func (*Window) SetApplication 

func (window *Window) SetApplication(application *Application)

SetApplication sets or unsets the GtkApplication associated with the window.

The application will be kept alive for at least as long as it has any windows associated with it (see g_application_hold() for a way to keep it alive without windows).

Normally, the connection between the application and the window will remain until the window is destroyed, but you can explicitly remove it by setting the application to NULL.

This is equivalent to calling gtk.Application.RemoveWindow() and/or gtk.Application.AddWindow() on the old/new applications as relevant.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • application (optional): GtkApplication, or NULL to unset.

func (*Window) SetChild 

func (window *Window) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of window.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

func (*Window) SetDecorated 

func (window *Window) SetDecorated(setting bool)

SetDecorated sets whether the window should be decorated.

By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize controls, etc. Some window managers allow GTK to disable these decorations, creating a borderless window. If you set the decorated property to FALSE using this function, GTK will do its best to convince the window manager not to decorate the window. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk.Widget.Show().

On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager policy involved.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to decorate the window.

func (*Window) SetDefaultSize 

func (window *Window) SetDefaultSize(width, height int)

SetDefaultSize sets the default size of a window.

If the window’s “natural” size (its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be ignored.

Unlike gtk.Widget.SetSizeRequest(), which sets a size request for a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to use the “natural” default size (the size request of the window).

The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.

Windows can’t actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but passing 0 for width and height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.

If you use this function to reestablish a previously saved window size, note that the appropriate size to save is the one returned by gtk.Window.GetDefaultSize(). Using the window allocation directly will not work in all circumstances and can lead to growing or shrinking windows.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width.
  • height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height.

func (*Window) SetDefaultWidget 

func (window *Window) SetDefaultWidget(defaultWidget Widgetter)

SetDefaultWidget sets the default widget.

The default widget is the widget that is activated when the user presses Enter in a dialog (for example).

The function takes the following parameters:

  • defaultWidget (optional): widget to be the default, or NULL to unset the default widget for the toplevel.

func (*Window) SetDeletable 

func (window *Window) SetDeletable(setting bool)

SetDeletable sets whether the window should be deletable.

By default, windows have a close button in the window frame. Some window managers allow GTK to disable this button. If you set the deletable property to FALSE using this function, GTK will do its best to convince the window manager not to show a close button. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk.Widget.Show().

On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager policy involved.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: TRUE to decorate the window as deletable.

func (*Window) SetDestroyWithParent 

func (window *Window) SetDestroyWithParent(setting bool)

SetDestroyWithParent: if setting is TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of window will also destroy window itself.

This is useful for dialogs that shouldn’t persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they are associated with, for example.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: whether to destroy window with its transient parent.

func (*Window) SetDisplay 

func (window *Window) SetDisplay(display *gdk.Display)

SetDisplay sets the GdkDisplay where the window is displayed.

If the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and then remapped on the new display.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • display: GdkDisplay.

func (*Window) SetFocus 

func (window *Window) SetFocus(focus Widgetter)

SetFocus sets the focus widget.

If focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets it as the focus widget for the window. If focus is NULL, unsets the focus widget for this window. To set the focus to a particular widget in the toplevel, it is usually more convenient to use gtk.Widget.GrabFocus() instead of this function.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • focus (optional): widget to be the new focus widget, or NULL to unset any focus widget for the toplevel window.

func (*Window) SetFocusVisible 

func (window *Window) SetFocusVisible(setting bool)

SetFocusVisible sets whether “focus rectangles” are supposed to be visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value.

func (*Window) SetHandleMenubarAccel 

func (window *Window) SetHandleMenubarAccel(handleMenubarAccel bool)

SetHandleMenubarAccel sets whether this window should react to F10 key presses by activating a menubar it contains.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • handleMenubarAccel: TRUE to make window handle F10.

func (*Window) SetHideOnClose 

func (window *Window) SetHideOnClose(setting bool)

SetHideOnClose: if setting is TRUE, then clicking the close button on the window will not destroy it, but only hide it.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: whether to hide the window when it is closed.

func (*Window) SetIconName 

func (window *Window) SetIconName(name string)

SetIconName sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon.

See the docs for gtk.IconTheme for more details. On some platforms, the window icon is not used at all.

Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • name (optional) of the themed icon.

func (*Window) SetMnemonicsVisible 

func (window *Window) SetMnemonicsVisible(setting bool)

SetMnemonicsVisible sets whether mnemonics are supposed to be visible.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • setting: new value.

func (*Window) SetModal 

func (window *Window) SetModal(modal bool)

SetModal sets a window modal or non-modal.

Modal windows prevent interaction with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs on top of main application windows, use gtk.Window.SetTransientFor() to make the dialog transient for the parent; most window managers will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • modal: whether the window is modal.

func (*Window) SetResizable 

func (window *Window) SetResizable(resizable bool)

SetResizable sets whether the user can resize a window.

Windows are user resizable by default.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • resizable: TRUE if the user can resize this window.

func (*Window) SetStartupID 

func (window *Window) SetStartupID(startupId string)

SetStartupID sets the startup notification ID.

Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to track application startup, to provide user feedback and other features. This function changes the corresponding property on the underlying GdkSurface.

Normally, startup identifier is managed automatically and you should only use this function in special cases like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this function before calling gtk.Window.Present() or any equivalent function generating a window map event.

This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK targets.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • startupId: string with startup-notification identifier.

func (*Window) SetTitle 

func (window *Window) SetTitle(title string)

SetTitle sets the title of the GtkWindow.

The title of a window will be displayed in its title bar; on the X Window System, the title bar is rendered by the window manager so exactly how the title appears to users may vary according to a user’s exact configuration. The title should help a user distinguish this window from other windows they may have open. A good title might include the application name and current document filename, for example.

Passing NULL does the same as setting the title to an empty string.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • title (optional) of the window.

func (*Window) SetTitlebar 

func (window *Window) SetTitlebar(titlebar Widgetter)

SetTitlebar sets a custom titlebar for window.

A typical widget used here is gtk.HeaderBar, as it provides various features expected of a titlebar while allowing the addition of child widgets to it.

If you set a custom titlebar, GTK will do its best to convince the window manager not to put its own titlebar on the window. Depending on the system, this function may not work for a window that is already visible, so you set the titlebar before calling gtk.Widget.Show().

The function takes the following parameters:

  • titlebar (optional): widget to use as titlebar.

func (*Window) SetTransientFor 

func (window *Window) SetTransientFor(parent *Window)

SetTransientFor: dialog windows should be set transient for the main application window they were spawned from. This allows window managers to e.g. keep the dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the main window. gtk.Dialog.NewWithButtons and other convenience functions in GTK will sometimes call gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.

Passing NULL for parent unsets the current transient window.

On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent, much as the window manager would have done on X.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • parent (optional) window, or NULL.

func (*Window) Title 

func (window *Window) Title() string

Title retrieves the title of the window.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): title of the window, or NULL if none has been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*Window) Titlebar 

func (window *Window) Titlebar() Widgetter

Titlebar returns the custom titlebar that has been set with gtk_window_set_titlebar().

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): custom titlebar, or NULL.

func (*Window) TransientFor 

func (window *Window) TransientFor() *Window

TransientFor fetches the transient parent for this window.

The function returns the following values:

  • ret (optional): transient parent for this window, or NULL if no transient parent has been set.

func (*Window) Unfullscreen 

func (window *Window) Unfullscreen()

Unfullscreen asks to remove the fullscreen state for window, and return to its previous state.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely not fullscreen afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager could fullscreen it again, and not all window managers honor requests to unfullscreen windows; normally the window will end up restored to its normal state. Just don’t write code that crashes if not.

You can track the result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property, or by listening to notifications of the gtk.Window:fullscreened property.

func (*Window) Unmaximize 

func (window *Window) Unmaximize()

Unmaximize asks to unmaximize window.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager maximize it again, and not all window managers honor requests to unmaximize.

You can track the result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property, or by listening to notifications on the gtk.Window:maximized property.

func (*Window) Unminimize 

func (window *Window) Unminimize()

Unminimize asks to unminimize the specified window.

Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely unminimized afterward, because the windowing system might not support this functionality; other entities (e.g. the user or the window manager could minimize it again, or there may not be a window manager in which case minimization isn’t possible, etc.

You can track result of this operation via the gdk.Toplevel:state property.

type WindowClass added in v0.0.5 

type WindowClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*WindowClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (w *WindowClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

ParentClass: parent class.

type WindowControls 

type WindowControls struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowControls: GtkWindowControls shows window frame controls.

Typical window frame controls are minimize, maximize and close buttons, and the window icon.

!An example GtkWindowControls (windowcontrols.png)

GtkWindowControls only displays start or end side of the controls (see gtk.WindowControls:side), so it's intended to be always used in pair with another GtkWindowControls for the opposite side, for example: 

<object class="GtkBox">
  <child>
    <object class="GtkWindowControls">
      <property name="side">start</property>
    </object>
  </child>

  ...

  <child>
    <object class="GtkWindowControls">
      <property name="side">end</property>
    </object>
  </child>
</object>

CSS nodes 

windowcontrols
├── [image.icon]
├── [button.minimize]
├── [button.maximize]
╰── [button.close]

A GtkWindowControls' CSS node is called windowcontrols. It contains subnodes corresponding to each title button. Which of the title buttons exist and where they are placed exactly depends on the desktop environment and gtk.WindowControls:decoration-layout value.

When gtk.WindowControls:empty is TRUE, it gets the .empty style class.

Accessibility

GtkWindowControls uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewWindowControls 

func NewWindowControls(side PackType) *WindowControls

NewWindowControls creates a new GtkWindowControls.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • side: side.

The function returns the following values:

  • windowControls: new GtkWindowControls.

func (*WindowControls) DecorationLayout 

func (self *WindowControls) DecorationLayout() string

DecorationLayout gets the decoration layout of this GtkWindowControls.

The function returns the following values:

  • utf8 (optional): decoration layout or NULL if it is unset.

func (*WindowControls) Empty 

func (self *WindowControls) Empty() bool

Empty gets whether the widget has any window buttons.

The function returns the following values:

  • ok: TRUE if the widget has window buttons, otherwise FALSE.

func (*WindowControls) SetDecorationLayout 

func (self *WindowControls) SetDecorationLayout(layout string)

SetDecorationLayout sets the decoration layout for the title buttons.

This overrides the gtk.Settings:gtk-decoration-layout setting.

The format of the string is button names, separated by commas. A colon separates the buttons that should appear on the left from those on the right. Recognized button names are minimize, maximize, close and icon (the window icon).

For example, “icon:minimize,maximize,close” specifies a icon on the left, and minimize, maximize and close buttons on the right.

If gtk.WindowControls:side value is GTK_PACK_START, self will display the part before the colon, otherwise after that.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • layout (optional): decoration layout, or NULL to unset the layout.

func (*WindowControls) SetSide 

func (self *WindowControls) SetSide(side PackType)

SetSide determines which part of decoration layout the GtkWindowControls uses.

See gtk.WindowControls:decoration-layout.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • side: side.

func (*WindowControls) Side 

func (self *WindowControls) Side() PackType

Side gets the side to which this GtkWindowControls instance belongs.

The function returns the following values:

  • packType: side.

type WindowControlsClass added in v0.0.5 

type WindowControlsClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowControlsClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*WindowControlsClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (w *WindowControlsClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type WindowControlsOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WindowControlsOverrides struct {
}

WindowControlsOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type WindowGroup 

type WindowGroup struct {
	*coreglib.Object
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowGroup: GtkWindowGroup makes group of windows behave like separate applications.

It achieves this by limiting the effect of GTK grabs and modality to windows in the same group.

A window can be a member in at most one window group at a time. Windows that have not been explicitly assigned to a group are implicitly treated like windows of the default window group.

GtkWindowGroup objects are referenced by each window in the group, so once you have added all windows to a GtkWindowGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the window group with g_object_unref(). If the windows in the window group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the window group and drop their references on the window group; when all window have been removed, the window group will be freed.

func NewWindowGroup 

func NewWindowGroup() *WindowGroup

NewWindowGroup creates a new GtkWindowGroup object.

Modality of windows only affects windows within the same GtkWindowGroup.

The function returns the following values:

  • windowGroup: new GtkWindowGroup.

func (*WindowGroup) AddWindow 

func (windowGroup *WindowGroup) AddWindow(window *Window)

AddWindow adds a window to a GtkWindowGroup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • window: GtkWindow to add.

func (*WindowGroup) ListWindows 

func (windowGroup *WindowGroup) ListWindows() []*Window

ListWindows returns a list of the GtkWindows that belong to window_group.

The function returns the following values:

  • list: a newly-allocated list of windows inside the group.

func (*WindowGroup) RemoveWindow 

func (windowGroup *WindowGroup) RemoveWindow(window *Window)

RemoveWindow removes a window from a GtkWindowGroup.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • window: GtkWindow to remove.

type WindowGroupClass added in v0.0.5 

type WindowGroupClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowGroupClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

type WindowGroupOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WindowGroupOverrides struct {
}

WindowGroupOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type WindowHandle 

type WindowHandle struct {
	Widget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowHandle: GtkWindowHandle is a titlebar area widget.

When added into a window, it can be dragged to move the window, and handles right click, double click and middle click as expected of a titlebar.

CSS nodes

GtkWindowHandle has a single CSS node with the name windowhandle.

Accessibility

GtkWindowHandle uses the GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUP role.

func NewWindowHandle 

func NewWindowHandle() *WindowHandle

NewWindowHandle creates a new GtkWindowHandle.

The function returns the following values:

  • windowHandle: new GtkWindowHandle.

func (*WindowHandle) Child 

func (self *WindowHandle) Child() Widgetter

Child gets the child widget of self.

The function returns the following values:

  • widget (optional): child widget of self.

func (*WindowHandle) SetChild 

func (self *WindowHandle) SetChild(child Widgetter)

SetChild sets the child widget of self.

The function takes the following parameters:

  • child (optional) widget.

type WindowHandleClass added in v0.0.5 

type WindowHandleClass struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

WindowHandleClass: instance of this type is always passed by reference.

func (*WindowHandleClass) ParentClass added in v0.0.5 

func (w *WindowHandleClass) ParentClass() *WidgetClass

type WindowHandleOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WindowHandleOverrides struct {
}

WindowHandleOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type WindowOverrides added in v0.0.5 

type WindowOverrides struct {
	ActivateDefault func()
	ActivateFocus   func()
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	CloseRequest func() bool
	// The function takes the following parameters:
	//
	// The function returns the following values:
	//
	EnableDebugging func(toggle bool) bool
	KeysChanged     func()
}

WindowOverrides contains methods that are overridable.

type WrapMode 

type WrapMode C.gint

WrapMode describes a type of line wrapping. 

const (
	// WrapNone: do not wrap lines; just make the text area wider.
	WrapNone WrapMode = iota
	// WrapChar: wrap text, breaking lines anywhere the cursor can appear
	// (between characters, usually - if you want to be technical, between
	// graphemes, see pango_get_log_attrs()).
	WrapChar
	// WrapWord: wrap text, breaking lines in between words.
	WrapWord
	// WrapWordChar: wrap text, breaking lines in between words, or if that is
	// not enough, also between graphemes.
	WrapWordChar
)

func (WrapMode) String 

func (w WrapMode) String() string

String returns the name in string for WrapMode.

Source Files

View all Source files

Jump to

Keyboard shortcuts

? : This menu
/ : Search site
f or F : Jump to
y or Y : Canonical URL
go.dev uses cookies from Google to deliver and enhance the quality of its services and to analyze traffic. Learn more.